JP2009273549A - Pachinko game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

<P>PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a Pachinko game machine by which the breaking of a harness electrically connecting a counting switch 462 and a dispense control substrate 715 and the malfunction of the counting switch 462 or others can be significantly quickly grasped. <P>SOLUTION: When the retry action is repeatedly carried out by getting the detecting signals from the counting switch 462 input into the dispense control substrate 715 by the breaking of the harness electrically connecting the counting switch 462 with the dispense control substrate 715 or the malfunction occurrence in the counting switch 462 by some causes, the reading of a mismatch counter INCC at a mismatch threshold value INCTH or more enables a door frame decoration lamp for notifying that to emit light in a predetermined color or others. Consequently, shop assistants of a hall or others can substantially quickly grasp the breaking of the harness electrically connecting the counting switch 462 and the dispense control substrate 715 and the malfunction of the counting switch 462. <P>COPYRIGHT: (C)2010,JPO&INPIT

Description

  The present invention relates to a pachinko gaming machine including a prize ball unit.

  Conventionally, when a game ball launched by a ball striking device toward a game area defined on a game board enters into various winning holes provided in the game ball area, a main board that controls the progress of the game (main control) Board) transmits a control command (prize ball command) for designating the number of game balls to be paid out to the player as a prize ball to the payout control board, and the payout control board that receives the prize ball command receives the prize ball payout device. There has been proposed a pachinko gaming machine that controls (prize ball unit) and pays out a game ball to a player (for example, Patent Document 1).

  The prize ball unit provided in the pachinko gaming machine described in Patent Document 1 incorporates a payout motor for paying out game balls, and the payout control board is based on a prize ball command from the main control board. The number of game balls paid out to the player is controlled by rotating a screw (sprocket) connected to the output shaft of the payout motor.

By the way, in the pachinko gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, game balls discharged by rotating a sprocket connected to the output shaft of the payout motor are detected one by one by a prize ball payout sensor (counting switch). The detection signal from the counting switch is input to the payout control board or the like. The payout control board returns the payout motor when the ball game ball paid out by rotating the sprocket connected to the output shaft of the payout motor is not detected by the counting switch, that is, when the detection signal from the counting switch is not input. Rotate the sprocket connected to the output shaft of the main control board so that the number of game balls to be paid out to the player specified by the prize ball command from the main control board, that is, game balls to be paid out to the player as prize balls The retry operation is performed so that the number of spheres becomes the same.
Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2001-212321 (FIG. 4)

  However, if the harness that electrically connects the counting switch and the dispensing control board is disconnected for some reason, or if a malfunction or the like occurs in the counting switch, the detection signal from the counting switch is not input to the dispensing control board. Then, since the payout control board controls the payout motor and repeats the retry operation described above, the number of game balls to be paid out to the player designated by the prize ball command from the main control board, that is, More game balls are paid out to the player than the number of game balls paid out to the player as prize balls. For this reason, there has been a demand for hall clerk etc. to grasp as soon as possible a disconnection of a harness that electrically connects the counting switch and the payout control board, a malfunction of the counting switch, and the like.

  The present invention has been made in view of such circumstances, and its purpose is to grasp a disconnection of a harness that electrically connects the counting switch and the payout control board, a malfunction of the counting switch, etc. very quickly. It is to provide a pachinko machine that can be used.

  Effective solutions for achieving the above-described object will be described below. In addition, the effect | action etc. are demonstrated as needed. In addition, for easy understanding, a corresponding configuration in the embodiment of the invention is also shown as appropriate, but is not limited at all.

(Solution 1)
Based on the fact that the game balls launched by the ball striking device toward the game area defined on the game board have entered the various winning holes provided in the game area, the game balls are paid out to the game dish as prize balls. A main control board that transmits a prize ball command that defines the number of game balls, and a payout that controls a payout device that delivers game balls to the storage tray as prize balls based on the prize ball command from the main control board A pachinko gaming machine comprising a control board, wherein the payout device receives at least one payout motor as a result of transmission of rotation of a payout motor as an electrical drive source and an output shaft of the payout motor. A sprocket, a disk fixed to the rotation shaft of the sprocket and provided with a detection part on the outer peripheral part, a rotation angle switch for detecting the detection part provided on the outer peripheral part of the disk, A counting switch for detecting one game ball after being sent out by rotating the sprocket, and the main control board transmits at least the prize ball command to the payout control board The payout control board controls at least a prize ball command reception control means for receiving the prize ball command transmitted by the prize ball command transmission control means, and a game ball payout operation by the payout device. The game ball payout control means, the number of game balls sent out by rotating the sprocket, and the number of game balls actually paid out do not match the number of inconsistent game balls. Retry operation monitoring control means for monitoring a retry operation in which the game ball payout control means controls the payout device to pay out, and the payout control board includes the game ball payout The control by the control means and the control by the retry operation monitoring control means are repeatedly executed at predetermined intervals, and the gaming ball payout control means at least receives the prize ball command received by the prize ball command reception control means Based on the above, the prize ball stock number storage control means for storing the total number of game balls paid out from the payout device as the prize ball stock number, and the number of times the game ball is sent out by rotating the sprocket as the drive command number Drive command number storage control means for storing, real ball count storage control means for storing the number of game balls sent out by rotating the sprocket as a real ball count, and an outer peripheral portion of the disk from the rotation angle switch The number of drive commands stored by the drive command number storage control means when a signal for detecting the detection site provided in the drive is input When the signal for detecting one game ball after the sprocket is rotated and sent out from the counting switch is input from the drive command number subtraction control means for subtracting 1 from the value, the real ball count storage control Whether or not the actual ball count addition control means for adding 1 to the actual ball count stored by the means and the drive command number subtracted by the drive command number subtraction control means match the judgment value 0 When the subtraction result determination control means determines that the drive command number does not match the determination value 0, the subtraction result determination control means starts to output a drive signal to the payout motor. A payout motor drive control means for stopping output of a drive signal to the payout motor when it is determined that the number of drive commands is equal to the determination value 0; When it is determined by the means that the number of drive commands coincides with the determination value 0, the real ball count storage control means uses the prize ball stock number stored by the prize ball stock number storage control means. Difference calculation control means for subtracting the stored real ball count to calculate the difference between the prize ball stock number and the real ball count, and the prize ball stock number calculated by the difference calculation control means A prize forcibly storing the difference from the actual ball count as the prize ball stock number in the prize ball stock number storage control unit and forcibly storing the difference as the drive command number in the drive command number storage control unit. After the calculation by the ball stock number and drive command number forced storage control means and the difference calculation control means, the initial value 0 is forcibly stored in the real ball count storage control means as the real ball count. Real ball count initial value forced storage control means, and the retry operation monitoring control means includes at least the number of game balls sent out by rotating the sprocket and the number of game balls actually paid out. The inconsistent information value storage control means for sequentially storing the inconsistent information value when the number of inconsistent game balls in which the number does not match is generated, and the inconsistent information value storage control means When the inconsistency information value satisfies a predetermined upper limit value, the retry operation abnormality notification control means for informing the fact, and the inconsistency information value stored by the inconsistency information value storage control means is determined in advance. And a mismatch information value forced initialization control means for forcibly initializing the mismatch information value when the upper limit value is satisfied.

  This pachinko gaming machine includes a main control board and a payout control board. The main control board is played as a prize ball based on the fact that the game balls launched by the ball striking device toward the game area defined on the game board have entered the various winning holes provided in the game area. A prize ball command that specifies the number of game balls to be paid out to the dish is transmitted. The payout control board controls a payout device for paying out game balls to the storage tray as prize balls based on prize ball commands from the main control board.

  The payout device includes at least a payout motor, a sprocket, a disk, a rotation angle switch, and a counting switch. The dispensing motor is an electric drive source. The sprocket receives rotation of the output shaft of the payout motor and receives one game ball to send it out. The disk is fixed to the rotating shaft of the sprocket, and a detection site is provided on the outer periphery of the disk. The rotation angle switch detects a detection site provided on the outer peripheral portion of the disk. The counting switch detects the game balls after being sent out by rotating the sprocket one by one.

  The main control board includes at least prize ball command transmission control means. The prize ball command transmission control means transmits the prize ball command to the payout control board.

  The payout control board includes at least prize ball command reception control means, game ball payout control means, and retry operation monitoring control means. The prize ball command reception control means receives the prize ball command transmitted by the prize ball command transmission control means. The game ball payout control means controls the game ball payout operation by the payout device, and the control by the game ball payout control means is repeatedly executed at predetermined intervals. The retry operation monitoring control means pays out the game ball payout number of inconsistent game balls in which the number of game balls sent out by rotating the sprocket does not match the number of game balls actually paid out. The control means controls the payout apparatus to monitor the payout retry operation, and the control by the retry action monitoring control means is repeatedly executed at predetermined intervals.

  The game ball payout control means includes at least a prize ball stock number storage control means, a drive command number storage control means, a real ball count storage control means, a drive command number subtraction control means, a real ball count addition control means, and a subtraction result determination control means. , A payout motor drive control means, a difference calculation control means, a prize ball stock number and drive command number forced storage control means, and a real ball count initial value forced storage control means. The prize ball stock number storage control means stores the total number of game balls to be paid out from the payout device based on the prize ball command received by the prize ball command reception control means as the prize ball stock number. The drive command number storage control means stores, as the drive command number, the number of times that one sprocket is rotated to send out one game ball. The real ball count storage control means stores the number of game balls sent out by rotating the sprocket as a real ball count. The drive command number subtraction control means receives a value of 1 from the drive command number stored by the drive command number storage control means when a signal for detecting a detection part provided on the outer periphery of the disk is input from the rotation angle switch. Subtracting. The real ball count addition control means receives the real ball count stored by the real ball count storage control means when a signal indicating that one game ball is detected after being sent out by rotating the sprocket is input from the count switch. The value 1 is added to. The subtraction result determination control means determines whether or not the drive command number subtracted by the drive command number subtraction control means is equal to the determination value 0. The payout motor drive control means starts outputting a drive signal to the payout motor when the subtraction result judgment control means determines that the number of drive commands does not match the judgment value 0, while the subtraction result judgment control means When it is determined that the number of drive commands matches the determination value 0, the output of the drive signal to the payout motor is stopped. When the subtraction result determination control means determines that the number of drive commands is equal to the determination value 0, the difference calculation control means determines the actual ball from the prize ball stock number stored by the prize ball stock number storage control means. The difference between the number of prize balls and the number of real balls is calculated by subtracting the real ball count stored by the count storage control means. The prize ball stock number and drive command number forced memory control means forcing the difference between the prize ball stock number and the actual ball count calculated by the difference calculation control means to the prize ball stock number memory control means as the prize ball stock number. And is forcibly stored in the drive command number storage control means as the number of drive commands. The real sphere count initial value forced storage control means forcibly stores the initial value 0 as the real sphere count in the real sphere count storage control means after the calculation by the difference calculation control means.

  The retry operation monitoring control means includes at least inconsistency information value storage control means, retry operation abnormality notification control means, and inconsistency information value forced initialization control means. The inconsistent information value storage control means generates a number of inconsistent game balls in which the number of game balls sent out by rotating the sprocket and the number of game balls actually paid out do not match. The inconsistency information values at the time are stored in succession. The retry operation abnormality notification control means notifies the fact when the mismatch information value stored by the mismatch information value storage control means satisfies a predetermined upper limit value. The inconsistency information value forced initialization control means is stored by the inconsistency information value storage control means when the inconsistency information value stored by the inconsistency information value storage control means satisfies a predetermined upper limit value. The inconsistency information value is forcibly initialized, and the inconsistency information value stored by the inconsistency information value storage control means is an external factor that an operation signal by a switch or the like by a hall clerk is input. Is triggered by the occurrence of an internal factor that the inconsistency information value stored by the inconsistency information value storage control means satisfies a predetermined upper limit value. It is supposed to be initialized as.

  Thus, the payout control board repeatedly executes the control by the game ball payout control means and the control by the retry operation monitoring control means at predetermined intervals. The game ball payout control means is memorized by the drive command number storage control means when the drive command number subtraction control means receives from the rotation angle switch a signal for detecting a detection site provided in the outer peripheral portion of the disk. When a value of 1 is subtracted from the number of drive commands, and the real ball count addition control means does not input a signal for detecting one game ball after the sprocket is rotated and sent out from the counting switch, If only 1 is not added to the actual ball count stored by the ball count storage control means, it is determined that the game ball has not been received and sent out by the sprocket. Therefore, the game ball payout control means calculates the award ball stock number calculated by the difference calculation control means in the prize ball stock number and drive command number forced storage control means in order to pay out one ball that should be paid out again. The difference between the actual ball count and the actual ball count is forcibly stored in the award ball stock number storage control unit as the award ball stock number, and forcibly stored in the drive command number storage control unit as the drive command number. As a result, the game ball payout control means, in the real ball count addition control means, does not input a real ball count storage control unless a signal for detecting one game ball after being sent out by rotating the sprocket is input from the count switch. Since the value 1 is not added to the actual ball count stored by the means, the value 1 which is one ball to be paid out is calculated by the difference calculation control means in the prize ball stock number and drive command number forced storage control means. The difference between the award ball stock number and the actual ball count is forcibly memorized in the award ball stock number storage control means as the award ball stock number, that is, the value 1 which is one ball that should be paid out is the award ball. Since the number of stocks can be included in the award ball stock number storage control means, it is possible to perform a retry operation to pay out one ball that should be paid out again. There. The possibility of unpaid game balls to the player due to this retry operation can be extremely reduced, and the player's disadvantage due to unpaid game balls can be prevented. The retry operation actually occurs with a probability of about one-millionth, but for some reason, the harness that electrically connects the counting switch and the payout control board is disconnected, or the counting switch malfunctions. In some cases, the retry operation is repeatedly performed when the detection signal from the counting switch is input to the payout control board.

  On the other hand, the retry operation monitoring control means is configured such that in the inconsistency information value storage control means, the number of game balls sent out by rotating the sprocket and the number of game balls actually paid out are: Since inconsistent information values when the number of inconsistent game balls that do not match are generated are sequentially stored, for example, the balls of game balls that are paid out by a retry operation based on the sequentially stored inconsistent information values The number and the number of retry operations can be monitored. Further, the retry operation monitoring control unit notifies the retry operation abnormality notification control unit when the inconsistency information value stored in the inconsistency information value storage control unit satisfies a predetermined upper limit value. Therefore, it is possible to inform the hall clerk and the like that the inconsistency information value satisfies a predetermined upper limit value. As such notification, for example, the segment display mounted on the payout control board can be notified by displaying alphanumeric characters, figures, etc., or the lamp built in the lamp cover covering the door frame can be illuminated or blinked. Can be mentioned. In this way, the detection signal from the counting switch is input to the dispensing control board when the harness for electrically connecting the counting switch and the dispensing control board is disconnected for some reason or when the malfunctioning of the counting switch occurs. Thus, when the retry operation is repeatedly performed, the retry operation monitoring control means, in the inconsistency information value storage control means, the number of game balls sent out by rotating the sprocket and the game actually paid out The inconsistency information value when the number of inconsistent gaming balls that do not match the number of balls is sequentially stored, and the retry operation abnormality notification control means sets the inconsistency information value to a predetermined upper limit value. By notifying that when it is satisfied, it is possible to notify the hall clerk, etc. that the inconsistency information value has satisfied a predetermined upper limit. You have me. Therefore, the hall clerk can grasp the disconnection of the harness that electrically connects the counting switch and the payout control board, the malfunction of the counting switch, and the like very quickly.

  In the present embodiment, for example, the game board 4 in FIG. 118 corresponds to a game board, the game area 255 in FIG. 118 corresponds to a game area, the ball hitting device 300 in FIG. 50 corresponds to a ball hitting apparatus, and FIG. The upper start winning opening 1270, the middle starting winning opening 1330, the lower starting winning opening 1340, the large winning opening 1400, the winning opening unit side normal winning opening 1440, and the decoration unit side normal winning opening 1465, 1470 correspond to various winning openings. The storage tray 30 in FIG. 2 corresponds to the storage tray, the prize ball command in FIGS. 184 (a) and (b) corresponds to the prize ball command, the main control board 1700 in FIG. 140 corresponds to the main control board, 66 prize ball unit 450 corresponds to a payout device, payout control board 715 in FIG. 140 corresponds to a payout control board, pachinko gaming machine 1 in FIG. 1 corresponds to a pachinko gaming machine, and payout motor 465 in FIG. Pay 66 corresponds to the motor, the sprocket 457 in FIG. 66 corresponds to the sprocket, the detection notch 501 in FIG. 66 corresponds to the detection portion, the detection disk 500 in FIG. 66 corresponds to the disk, and the rotation angle switch 505 in FIG. 66 rotates. 66 corresponds to the angle switch, the count switch 462 in FIG. 66 corresponds to the count switch, the prize ball control process in step S80 in the main control timer interruption process in FIG. 167 corresponds to the prize ball command transmission control means, and FIG. The command reception process in step S352 in the payout control side main process of the payout control side power-on process corresponds to the award ball command reception control means, and the payout setting process in FIG. 181 or the payout setting process in FIG. 213 is the game ball payout control means. The retry operation monitoring process of FIG. 183 or the retry operation monitoring process of FIG. 214 is applied to the retry operation monitoring control means. “1.75 ms” corresponds to a predetermined cycle, the prize ball stock number PBS corresponds to the prize ball stock number storage control unit, the drive command number DRV corresponds to the drive command number storage control unit, and the real ball The count PB corresponds to the real ball count storage control means, the processing in step S508 in the payout setting process in FIG. 181 or 213 corresponds to the drive command number subtraction control means, and step S512 in the payout setting process in FIG. 181 or FIG. In step S492 in the payout setting process in FIG. 181 or 213 corresponds to the subtraction result determination control means, and in step S504 in the payout setting process in FIG. 181 or 213. The process and the process of step S494 correspond to the payout motor drive control means, and step S5 in the payout setting process of FIG. 181 or FIG. The process of 00 corresponds to the difference calculation control means, the process of step S500 in the payout setting process of FIG. 181 or 213 corresponds to the prize ball stock number and drive command number forced storage control means, and the payout of FIG. 181 or FIG. The process of step S502 in the setting process corresponds to the real sphere count initial value forced storage control means, the inconsistency counter INCC or the retry operation counter RTC corresponds to the inconsistency information value storage control means, and the retry operation monitoring process in FIG. The processing in step S552 or the processing in step S552 ′ in the retry operation monitoring processing in FIG. 214 corresponds to the retry operation abnormality notification control means, and the processing in step S564 in the mismatch counter reset determination processing in FIG. 184 or the retry operation counter in FIG. Step S564 'in the reset determination process Corresponds to the inconsistency information value forced initialization control means, and the processing in step S554 in the retry operation monitoring process in FIG. 183 or the processing in step S554 ′ in the retry operation monitoring process in FIG. 214 is inconsistent information value forced initialization control means. It corresponds to.

(Solution 2)
The pachinko gaming machine according to Solution 1, wherein the payout control board further includes an error release switch for releasing an operation error state related to the payout device, and an error for determining whether or not the error release switch is operated. Release switch operation determination control means, and the payout control board repeatedly executes the control by the error release switch operation determination control means for each predetermined period, and the error release switch operation monitoring control means includes at least And a notification forced stop control means for forcibly stopping notification by the retry operation abnormality notification control means when it is determined by the error release switch operation monitoring control means that the error release switch has been operated. Pachinko machine. In this way, the hall clerk and the like can forcibly stop the notification by the retry operation abnormality notification control means without operating until the abnormal operation of the retry operation is improved by operating the error release switch. For this reason, it is possible to suppress the irritability caused by the notification as small as possible for a player who is playing with another adjacent pachinko gaming machine.

  In this embodiment, for example, the error release switch 1731 in FIG. 96 corresponds to an error release switch, the error release switch operation determination process in FIG. 185 corresponds to an error release switch operation determination control means, and the error release switch operation in FIG. The process of step S574 in the determination process corresponds to the notification forced stop control means.

  In the pachinko gaming machine of the present invention, it is possible to grasp the disconnection of the harness that electrically connects the counting switch and the payout control board, the malfunction of the counting switch, and the like very quickly.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
DESCRIPTION OF EXEMPLARY EMBODIMENTS Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the entire pachinko gaming machine according to the embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing a state in which the main body frame 3 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the embodiment, and the door frame 5 is opened with respect to the main body frame 3. 3 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1, FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko gaming machine 1, FIG. 4 is a side view of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and FIG. 5 is a plan view of the pachinko gaming machine 1. 6 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as viewed from the rear of the outer frame 2, the main body frame 3, the game board 4, and the door frame 5. FIG. 7 shows the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame 2, the main body frame 3, the game board 4, and the door frame 5 as viewed from the front.

  1 and 2, a pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes an outer frame 2 installed on an island (not shown), and is pivotally supported by the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable. A glass that is a transparent plate that allows a player to visually recognize a main body frame 3 to be obtained and a game area 255 (see FIG. 7) that is pivotally supported by the main body frame 3 so as to be freely opened and closed and into which a ball is driven. The door unit 5 includes a glass unit 50 including a plate 60, and a storage tray 30 that is disposed below the glass unit 50 and stores a ball to be paid out as a result of a game. .

  A lower front cover plate 6 whose surface is covered with a decorative plate 6a is fixed to the outer frame 2 at the lower front side. In addition to the game board 4 being detachably mounted on the main body frame 3 as described above, the ball hitting device 300 and the door frame 5 excluding the game board 4 and the main body frame 3 are provided at the bottom of the back surface thereof. A door frame opening switch 3a for detecting that the door frame 5 is opened from the main body frame 3 is mounted by mounting a board unit 650 on which various control boards and power supply boards for controlling electrical components are collectively provided. And a body frame opening switch 3b for detecting that the body frame 3 is released from the outer frame 2, and a cover body 750 covering the rear opening 222 (see FIG. 6) of the body frame 3 is detachably provided. . The main body frame 3 includes a door frame opening switch 3a for detecting that the door frame 5 is opened from the main body frame 3, a main body frame opening switch 3b for detecting that the main body frame 3 is opened from the outer frame 2, Is provided. Further, in addition to the storage tray 30 described above, the door frame 5 is provided with a glass unit 50 and a handle device 70 so as to close the game window 42. And the feature of this embodiment is that the storage tray 30 provided in the door frame 5 is one, and the handle device 70 conventionally provided in the main body frame 3 is provided in the door frame 5, and the door Since the frame 5 and the main body frame 3 have substantially the same square size when viewed from the front, the main body frame 3 is not visible from the front. Hereinafter, members constituting the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described in detail.

[1-1. Outer frame]
The outer frame 2 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 8 is a front view of the outer frame 2, FIG. 9 is a rear view of the outer frame 2, FIG. 10 is a perspective view as seen from the front of the outer frame 2, and FIG. 1A is a cross-sectional view taken along line B-B of the front view, and FIG. 3C is a cross-sectional view of side frame plate 12 cut along the line A-A of the front view.

  The outer frame 2 connects the upper and lower upper frame plates 10 and 11 and the left and right side frame plates 12 and 13 with corner metal fittings 14 to 16 and upper support metal fittings 17 for connecting respective end portions. It can be assembled into a square shape. Specifically, the upper part on the open side is connected by screwing the upper end and rear face of the upper frame plate 10 and the corner metal fitting 14 passed to the outer side and rear face of the end portion of the side frame plate 13 to open and open. The lower part on the side is connected by screwing a corner metal fitting 15 that is passed to the bottom face and rear face of the lower frame plate 11 and the outer side face and rear face of the end part of the side frame plate 13, and the upper part on the pivot support side is The upper support fitting 17 that is passed between the end upper surface of the upper frame plate 10 and the end outer surface of the side frame plate 12 is connected by screwing, and the lower part on the pivot support side is the bottom surface of the end of the lower frame plate 11. And the rear surface is connected by screwing the corner metal fitting 16 passed to the outer surface of the end portion of the side frame plate 12 and the rear surface.

  Of the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 and the side frame plates 12 and 13 constituting the outer frame 2, the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 are made of the same wood as in the prior art, and the side frame plates 12 and 13. Is made of an extruded plate of a lightweight metal, for example, an aluminum alloy. The reason why the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 are made of the same wood as before is that when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed on an island lined up in a game hall, a predetermined angle is given to the vertical plane of the island. It is necessary to perform an operation of fixing the nail, but such an operation is performed by hitting the nail to the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 and the island, so that the nail is easily made. On the other hand, the reason why the side frame plates 12 and 13 are made of an aluminum alloy extruded plate is that the thickness can be reduced while maintaining the strength as compared with the conventional wood. The left-right width when viewed from the front of the side walls 190 to 193 (see FIG. 36) of the main body frame 3 adjacent to the main frame 3 can be increased. For this reason, the game board 4 having a large left-right direction can be mounted on the main body frame 3, and as a result, the game area 255 of the game board 4 can be formed large. However, if the side frame plates 12 and 13 are made of an aluminum alloy flat plate, sufficient rigidity cannot be secured. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 24 is formed so that the thickness h1 of the rear portion is increased. Of course, the wall thickness h1 is smaller than that of a conventional wooden wall.

  The lower front cover plate 6 fixed to the lower front surface of the lower frame plate 11 and the left and right side frame plates 12 and 13 has the main body frame 3 placed on the upper surface thereof when closed. The surface of the lower front cover plate 6 is covered with the decorative plate 6a as described above, but the fixing projection 6b (FIG. 9, FIG. B) is projectingly provided, and the fixing projection 6b is attached to the lower front cover plate 6 by being passed through an attachment hole penetrating the lower front cover plate 6. Further, a back plate 7 is fixed to the upper part of the back surface of the lower front cover plate 6 to reinforce the strength of the lower front cover plate 6 on which the main body frame 3 is placed.

  By the way, as a structure for pivotally supporting the main body frame 3 so as to be openable and closable, it is attached along the upper surface of one side of the upper support bracket 17 and the lower front cover plate 6 for connecting the upper frame plate 10 and the side frame plate 12. A support fitting 18 is provided. The upper support bracket 17 is formed with a support hole 20 bent in the support protrusion piece 19 protruding forward, and a shaft support pin of an upper shaft support bracket 152 (described later) of the main body frame 3 is formed in the support hole 20. 153 (see FIG. 38) is engaged. Further, the lower support fitting 18 is also formed in a shape protruding forward, and a support protrusion 21 protrudes upward from the protruding portion, and a frame support plate 155 (described later) of the main body frame 3 is provided on the support protrusion 21. The support hole formed in FIG. 38) is inserted. Therefore, in order to support the main body frame 3 on the outer frame 2, after engaging the support holes formed in the frame support plate 155 of the main body frame 3 with the support protrusions 21 of the lower support bracket 18, By pivoting the shaft support pin 153 of the upper shaft support bracket 152 in the support rod hole 20, the shaft can be supported in a freely openable and closable manner.

  On the other hand, closing projections 22 and 23 are fixed to the upper and lower sides of the open side frame 13. The closing protrusions 22 and 23 are hook portions 614 and 624 (see FIG. 86) of the lock device 560 attached along the open side of the main body frame 3 when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. To engage. Then, as will be described in detail later, by inserting a key into the cylinder lock 570 of the locking device 560 and turning it to one side, the hook portions 614 and 624 and the closing projections 22 and 23 are disengaged, and the main body frame 3 Can be opened to the outer frame 2.

  When the upper support plate 17 and the corner brackets 14 to 16 for connecting the upper frame plate 10, the lower frame plate 11, and the side frame plates 12 and 13 constituting the outer frame 2 are respectively attached to predetermined positions, As shown in FIG.8 and FIG.9, each corresponding to the attachment part of each metal fittings 14-17 so that the outer surface of each metal fittings 14-17 and the outer surface of each frame board 10-13 become substantially the same plane. End portions of the frame plates 10 to 13 are formed in a concave shape. Even when the lower support fitting 18 is attached, the upper surface of the lower front cover plate 6 and the upper surface of the lower support fitting 18 are substantially flush with each other.

[1-1-1. Other Embodiments of Outer Frame]
The outer frame 2 described above is composed of the L-shaped corner brackets 14 to 16 and the upper support bracket 17 when the end portions of the upper frame plate 10, the lower frame plate 11, and the side frame plates 12 and 13 are viewed from the back. Although what was comprised by connecting was shown, with reference to FIG. 12 thru | or FIG. 20 about embodiment (henceforth "the outer frame 2A which concerns on 2nd Embodiment") from which the structure which connects four frame boards differs. explain. 12 is a front perspective view of an outer frame 2A according to another embodiment, FIG. 13 is an exploded perspective view seen from the front of the outer frame 2A, and FIG. 14 is a front view of the outer frame 2A. 15 is a rear view of the outer frame 2A, and FIG. 16 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line BB in FIG. 14 (A) and a cross-sectional view taken along the line CC in FIG. D sectional view (C), EE sectional view (D), FIG. 17 is a perspective view for explaining the attachment / detachment structure between the upper shaft support fitting 152 of the main body frame 3 and the upper support fitting 17A of the outer frame 2A. 18 is an exploded perspective view (A) showing a mounting state of the lock member 25 provided on the back surface of the upper support fitting 17A of the outer frame 2A, and a perspective view (B) seen from below. FIG. 20 is a rear view of the upper support bracket 17A for explaining the relationship between the pivot pin 153 and the lock member 25. FIG. It is a rear view of the upper support bracket 17A portion for explaining the. 12 to 20, members having the same functions as those in the embodiment shown in FIGS. 8 to 11 (hereinafter referred to as “the outer frame 2 according to the first embodiment”) have “A” at the end of the same reference numerals. ".

  12 and 13, the outer frame 2A according to the second embodiment is for connecting the upper and lower upper frame plates 10A and 11A and the left and right side frame plates 12A and 13A with their respective end portions. It is assembled in a square shape by connecting with the connecting member 14A. Specifically, the connecting member 14A is formed as a podium with a step between the center and the left and right, and the protruding center part is an engagement notch formed at the center of both ends of the upper frame plate 10A and the lower frame plate 11A. The side frame plates 12A are fitted to the portions 10B and 11B and the left and right portions of the upper frame plate 10A are brought into contact with the planes of the left and right portions lowered one step and the side surfaces of the left and right portions lowered one step. , 13A are in contact with each other. In this state, the insertion holes 10C and 11C and the connecting member 14A are respectively lowered by one step on both sides of the engagement notch 10B of the upper frame plate 10A and on both sides of the engagement notch 11B of the lower frame plate 11A. A plurality of (two in the illustrated case) connecting holes 16A (shown on the connecting member 14A connecting the upper frame plate 10A and the side frame plate 12A in FIG. (They also exist in the member 14A) and are fixed by a plurality (two in the illustrated case) of connecting screws 16B from above or below, and further drilled in the upper and lower ends of the side frame plates 12A and 13A. A plurality (three in the figure) of connection holes 15A (upper frame plate in FIG. 13) formed on the side surfaces of the left and right portions of the plurality of (two in the figure) mounting holes 12B, 13B and the connection member 14A. Connecting member 1 that connects 10A and side frame plate 13A The upper and lower upper frame plates 10 </ b> A are displayed by matching them with a plurality of (three in the illustrated case) connecting screws 15 </ b> B from the outside of the side. The lower frame plate 11A and the left and right side frame plates 12A and 13A are firmly connected and fixed. However, of the three connecting screws 15B, one connecting screw 15B does not connect the side frame plates 12A, 13A and the connecting member 14A, but the upper frame plate 10A, the lower frame plate 11A, and the connecting member 14A. Are directly connected from the side.

  Of the upper frame plate 10A, the lower frame plate 11A, and the side frame plates 12A, 13A constituting the outer frame 2A, the upper frame plate 10A and the lower frame plate 11A are the same wood as in the prior art, and the side frame plates 12A, 13A. Is made of an extruded plate of a lightweight metal, for example, an aluminum alloy. The reason why the upper frame plate 10 </ b> A and the lower frame plate 11 </ b> A are made of the same wood as the conventional one is the same reason as the outer frame 2 of the first embodiment. Also in the outer frame 2A according to the second embodiment, if the side frame plates 12A and 13A are made of an aluminum alloy flat plate, sufficient rigidity cannot be ensured. Therefore, as shown in FIG. A rear portion is formed by forming a space portion 12G (the space portion 13G of the side frame plate 13A is shown in FIG. 15) whose back is opened by a rib inside the rear portion of the plate 12A (the side frame plate 13A has the same structure). It is drawn and molded so that the thickness h2 of the film becomes thicker. Of course, the thickness h2 is equal to or slightly smaller than the thickness of a conventional wooden. Further, as shown in FIGS. 16B and 16D, in the front of the space portion 12G of the side frame plate 12A, the groove portion 12F (side) into which one of the left and right portions of the connecting member 14A is lowered one step is fitted. A groove portion 13F of the frame plate 13A is formed as shown in FIG. From the groove 12F to the front end of the side frame plate 12A, as shown in FIGS. 16B to 16D, the inner surface of the side frame plate 12A comes into contact with the other portion of the left and right portions where the connecting member 14A is lowered by one step. However, a shallow concave portion for reducing material is formed in the flat plate portion. Further, on the opposite surface (outer surface) where the groove portion 12F is formed, as shown in FIGS. 12 and 16B, the concave portion 12H (side) into which the hanging piece portion 17E of the upper support fitting 17A is inserted. A recess 13H of the frame plate 13A is formed in FIG.

  In addition to the structure for attaching the connecting member 14A, the shaft support side frame 12A formed as described above has a hanging piece 17E of the upper support fitting 17A on the outer side of the side frame 12A. A mounting hole 12C for fixing with the mounting screw 17B is drilled in the mounting screw 18B, and the mounting hole 18C is formed at the lower part thereof so as to coincide with the mounting hole 18C formed in the side bent portion of the lower support fitting 18A. A mounting hole 12D is provided. Further, a mounting hole 12E for fixing the side frame plate 12A and the lower front cover plate 6A with a fixing screw 6E is formed in the lower part of the mounting hole 12D and in the front portion of the side frame plate 12A. On the other hand, in addition to the structure for attaching the connecting member 14A, the open side frame portion 13A is provided with an attachment hole 13C for attaching the closing projection 22A with the attachment screw 22B, and closed at the lower part thereof. A mounting hole 13C for mounting the projection 23A for mounting with the mounting screw 23B is drilled, and a mounting hole 13D for fixing the side frame plate 13A and the lower front cover plate 6A to the lowermost position with the fixing screw 6E. Is formed. The closing protrusions 22A and 23A are locks that are attached along the open side of the main body frame 3 when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2A, like the outer frame 2 of the first embodiment. The hook 614 engages with the hook portions 614 and 624 (see FIG. 86) of the device 560. As will be described later in detail, a hook is inserted into the cylinder lock 570 of the lock device 560 and rotated to one side, thereby the hook portion 614 624 and the closing projections 22A and 23A are disengaged, and the main body frame 3 can be opened with respect to the outer frame 2A.

  The lower front cover plate 6A fixed to the lower front surface of the lower frame plate 11A and the left and right side frame plates 12A and 13A has the main body frame 3 placed on the upper surface when closed, and the lower front cover. The front and side surfaces of the plate 6A are covered with a decorative plate 6B as in the case of the outer frame 2 of the first embodiment. However, a fastening projection 6C (elastic claw is formed on the rear surface of the decorative plate 6B at its rear end. 15) is projected, and the fixing projection 6C is attached to the lower front cover plate 6A by passing through the fixing hole 6D that penetrates the lower front cover plate 6A. In addition, a guide plate 6F for smoothly guiding the main body frame 3 when the main body frame 3 is closed is replaceably mounted on the upper surface of the decorative plate 6B of the outer frame 2A according to the second embodiment. Yes.

  By the way, as a structure for pivotally supporting the main body frame 3 so as to be openable and closable, it is attached along the upper surface of one side of the upper support bracket 17A and the lower front cover plate 6A that also functions to connect the upper frame plate 10A and the side frame plate 12A. The lower support bracket 18A is provided. In the upper support fitting 17A, a support protrusion 20A that protrudes forward is formed with a support hole 20A that is bent from the side of the support protrusion 19A toward the center of the tip. A shaft support pin 153 (see FIG. 38) of an upper shaft support fitting 152 (described later) of the main body frame 3 is detachably engaged with the flange hole 20A. The engagement relationship between the support hole 20A and the shaft support pin 153 will be described in detail later. Further, the lower support fitting 18A is also formed in a shape protruding forward, and a support projection 21A is projected upward on the protruding portion, and a frame support plate 155 (described later) of the main body frame 3 is provided on the support projection 21A. The support hole formed in FIG. 38) is inserted. Therefore, in order to support the main body frame 3 on the outer frame 2, after engaging the support holes formed in the frame support plate 155 of the main body frame 3 with the support protrusions 21A of the lower support metal fitting 18A, It is the same as the outer frame 2 according to the first embodiment in that the shaft support pin 153 of the upper shaft support bracket 152 can be supported in a freely openable and closable manner by being hooked on the support hole 20A.

  The upper support bracket 17A is attached to the mounting step portion 10D formed in a concave shape on the upper surface and front surface of the upper frame plate 10A on the shaft support side, and is formed on the upper support bracket 17A when mounting. A plurality of (two in the illustrated case) mounting holes 17D and a plurality of (two in the illustrated case) mounting holes 10E formed in the mounting step portion 10D are aligned to insert the mounting screws 17B from above, and the upper frame The upper support bracket 17A is firmly fixed to the upper frame plate 10A by being fastened to the clamping plate 17C pressed from the back surface of the plate 10A. Further, on the outer side of the upper support bracket 17A, there is a hanging piece 17E that contacts the outside of the side frame plate 12A, and a mounting hole 17D (see FIG. 18A) is also drilled in the hanging piece 17E. By fixing the mounting hole 17D and the mounting hole 12C with mounting screws 17B, the upper support bracket 17A and the side frame plate 12A are fixed, and the upper frame plate 10A and the side frame plate 12A are fixed. The upper support fitting 17A is connected. On the other hand, the lower support bracket 18A is fixed by the mounting screws 18B in a state where the mounting holes 12D and the mounting holes 18C of the side frame plate 12A coincide with each other as described above. By inserting a mounting screw 18E into a mounting hole 18D drilled in the bottom, it is fixed to the upper surface of the lower front cover plate 6A via the decorated 6B.

  In the outer frame 2A according to the second embodiment configured as described above, by connecting the upper frame plate 10A, the lower frame plate 11A, and the side frame plates 12A, 13A, which are the constituent members, with the connecting member 14A, Compared with what was connected with the corner metal fittings 14-16 like the outer frame 2 which concerns on 1st Embodiment, 14 A of connecting members are closely_contact | adhered to the inner surface of side frame board 12A, 13A, and it is connected with 14A of connecting members. Since the upper frame plate 10A and the lower frame plate 11A are fastened in an engaged state, the frame can be formed into a strong and strong rectangular frame. In addition to the engagement state of the connecting member 14A with the upper frame plate 10A and the lower frame plate 11A, when the connecting member 14A is attached to the side frame plates 12A and 13A, the left and right sides of the connecting member 14A are lowered by one step in the groove 12F. Since one of the portions is fitted, the attachment of the connecting member 14A to the side frame plates 12A and 13A is strengthened, which can improve the strength of the rectangular frame and accurately position it. Can be done. Further, when the upper support plate 17A is attached to a predetermined position after the upper frame plate 10A, the lower frame plate 11A, and the side frame plates 12A and 13A are connected by the connecting member 14A, as shown in FIGS. Since there is no member protruding outward from the outer surface (outer peripheral surface) of each of the frame plates 10A, 11A, 12A, 13A, when installing the pachinko gaming machine 1 on a pachinko island platform (not shown), an adjacent device (for example, It can be attached in close contact with the adjacent ball lending device. Even when the lower support fitting 18A is attached, the upper surface of the lower front cover plate 6A and the upper surface of the lower support fitting 18A are substantially flush with each other.

  Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 18, a lock member 25 is pivotally supported on the back surface of the upper support fitting 17A for pivotally supporting the body frame 3 so as to be freely opened and closed. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 18A, the support protruding piece 19A of the upper support fitting 17A is formed as an arc-shaped flat plate at the front end and is perpendicular to the outer edge of the support protruding piece 19A. A drooping wall 19B is formed. The drooping wall 19B can improve the strength of the support protruding piece 19A of the upper support fitting 17A, improve the appearance so that the lock member 25 described below is not visible when viewed from the front, and Then, the lock member 25 is used as a portion where the tip contact portion of the elastic piece 25c of the lock member 25 described below comes into contact, or as a stop portion so that the lock member 25 does not jump out of the support protruding piece 19A. Further, the support hole 20A formed in the support protruding piece 19A is bent and formed so as to be inclined slightly from the opposite side where the hanging wall 19B is not formed to the inside and further toward the center of the tip. Has been. The groove size of the inclined hole portion of the support rod hole 20 </ b> A is formed to be slightly larger than the diameter of the shaft support pin 153. The hanging wall 19B described above is formed by being bent at right angles along the outer edge of the support protruding piece 19A and the upper support fitting 17A from the front end of the support pothole 20A, and the support pothole 20A. A stop drooping portion 19 </ b> C is formed by being bent inward at the entrance end portion in front of. Further, a mounting hole 19D is formed in the approximate center of the support protruding piece 19A, and a lock member 25 is rotatably supported by a rivet 26 in the mounting hole 19D. The lock member 25 is molded from a synthetic resin. The stopper portion 25a and the operation portion 25b are formed in an L shape, and an arc-shaped elastic piece 25c is integrally extended on the opposite side of the operation portion 25b. It is installed. An attachment hole 25d through which the rivet 26 is inserted is formed in an L-shaped base portion formed by the stopper portion 25a and the operation portion 25b. Thus, in the state where the lock member 25 is attached to the attachment hole 19D by the rivet 26 and is rotatably fixed to the back surface of the support protruding piece 19A, as shown in FIG. The portion is in contact with the inner surface of the hanging wall 19B, and the stopper portion 25a closes the inclined hole portion of the supporting saddle hole 20A. At this time, the tip portion of the stopper portion 25a is not in a state of closing the leading space portion of the inclined hole portion of the support hole 20A. That is, in a normal state, a space in which the shaft support pin 153 of the upper shaft support metal 152 of the main body frame 3 is inserted is formed in the head space portion of the support hole 20A.

  By the way, the shaft support pin 153 is inserted into the tip space portion of the inclined hole portion of the support rod hole 20A, and the tip side of the stopper portion 25a faces the stop hanging portion 19C at the inlet end portion (in this state) In a normal shaft support state in which there is a slight gap between the tip side of the stopper portion 25a and the stop hanging portion 19C, the support hole 20A is bent and formed. The centers of the shaft support pin 153 and the tip end surface 25e of the stopper portion 25a located in the tip space portion of the inclined hole portion are in a state of facing each other in an oblique direction. In this normal shaft support state, the shaft support pin 153 supporting the heavy main body frame 3 is in contact with the tip end portion of the support hole 20A. Since almost no load is applied to the distal end surface 25e of the stopper portion 25a, no load is applied to the elastic piece 25c of the lock member 25. Further, as shown in FIG. 19A, the lock member 25 is formed in an arc shape so as to smoothly rotate when the distal end surface 25e of the stopper portion 25a is rotated by operating the operation portion 25b. . In the illustrated case, the arc center of the arcuate tip surface 25e is the center of the rivet 26 (the rotation center of the lock member 25). For this reason, when the acting force F is applied in the direction in which the shaft support pin 153 is removed along the inclination of the inclined hole portion of the support hole 20A and abuts against the arcuate tip surface 25e, the acting force F is The component force F1 (the normal direction of the arc of the arcuate tip surface 25e) acting on the contact portion between the support pin 153 and the arcuate tip end surface 25e, and the inclined hole portion of the shaft support pin 153 and the support rod hole 20A Since the direction of the component force F1 is directed to the center of the rivet 26 (the rotation center of the lock member 25) when divided into the component force F2 acting on the contact portion with the inner surface of the one side, the stopper of the lock member 25 The moment that rotates the tip of the portion 25a in the direction away from the support protruding piece 19A (clockwise in the figure) does not act, and the pivot pin 153 is inclined between the tip of the stopper 25a of the lock member 25 and the support flange 20A. Clamped between one side inner surface of the hole Holding the state. Therefore, the elastic piece 25c of the lock member 25 is not always loaded even in a normal shaft support state or in a state in which the acting force of the shaft support pin 153 is applied to the lock member 25, and is elastically formed integrally with a synthetic resin. Plastic deformation due to creep of the piece 25c can be prevented, and the shaft support pin 153 can be prevented from dropping from the support bore 20A over a long period of time. Even if an excessive force is applied and the distal end portion of the stopper portion 25a of the lock member 25 is rotated in a direction away from the support projecting piece 19A (clockwise in the figure), one side of the distal end portion of the stopper portion 25a. Does not rotate in such a direction as to come into contact with the stop drooping portion 19C and further disengage, the lock member 25 does not protrude outside the support projecting piece 19A.

  In the embodiment shown in FIG. 19A, the center of the arc of the arcuate tip surface 25e of the stopper portion 25a is the center of the rivet 26 (the center of rotation of the lock member 25). Although the description has been given of the case in which no rotational moment is generated in the lock member 25 even when the acting force F is applied in the direction of coming out along the inclination of the inclined hole portion of the support hole 20A, as shown in FIG. When the radius of curvature of the arcuate tip surface 25f of the portion 25a is further reduced and the shaft support position by the rivet 26 of the lock member 25 is set to the inside of the support projecting piece 19A, the shaft support pin 153 is inclined to the support hole 20A When the acting force F is applied in the direction of coming out along the inclination of the hole and contacts the arcuate tip surface 25f, the acting force F is applied to the shaft support pin 153 and the arcuate tip surface 25f. It acts on the contact portion between the component force F1 acting on the contact portion (the normal direction of the arc of the arcuate tip end surface 25f) and the shaft support pin 153 and one side inner surface of the inclined hole portion of the support hole 20A. In the case of dividing into the component force F2, the rotation moment is exerted by the component force F1 to rotate the lock member 25 in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure (clockwise rotation direction). Since one side of the tip only abuts against the stop drooping portion 19C, the lock member 25 does not protrude outside the support protruding piece 19A, and no load is applied to the elastic piece 25c of the lock member 25. .

  That is, the point that can be understood from the embodiment shown in FIG. 19A and FIG. 19B is that the acting force in the direction in which the shaft support pin 153 is pulled out along the inclination of the inclined hole portion of the support hole 20A. When F is applied and comes into contact with the end faces 25e and 25f, a rotational moment that rotates the lock member 25 by the component force F1 acting on the contact portion between the pivot pin 153 and the end faces 2525e and 25f of the acting force F. By positioning the rotation center (the axis fixed by the rivet 26) of the lock member 25 at a position where no rotation occurs or at a position where a rotation moment is generated where the tip of the lock member 25 rotates toward the outside of the support protruding piece 19A. In addition, no load is applied to the elastic piece 25c of the lock member 25 at all times, and even if the lock member 25 rotates, one side of the tip end of the stopper portion 25a stops. Since only it abuts against the part 19C, the lock member 25 nor protrudes to the outside of the support projecting piece 19A. Even if the shape of the distal end surface of the stopper portion 25a is not an arc, the position where the rotational moment is not generated by the action of the component force F1 or the distal end portion of the lock member 25 faces the outside of the support protruding piece 19A. By positioning the rotation center of the lock member 25 (the axis fixed by the rivet 26) at a position where the rotation moment to rotate is generated, no load is applied to the elastic piece 25c of the lock member 25 at all times. The present applicant confirms that the locking member 25 does not protrude outside the supporting projection piece 19A because only one side of the tip of the stopper portion 25a abuts against the stop drooping portion 19C even when the rotation 25 is rotated. is doing.

  The operation of the lock member 25 configured as described above will be described with reference to FIG. As a premise that the main body frame 3 is pivotally supported by the outer frame 2A so as to be openable and closable, the support protrusion 21A of the lower support bracket 18A is formed in a support hole (not shown) formed in the frame support plate 155 (see FIG. 38) of the main body frame 3. It must be inserted. Under such a premise, as shown in FIG. 20 (A), the shaft support pin 153 of the upper shaft support bracket 152 of the main body frame 3 is pressed against the side surface of the stopper portion 25a of the lock member 25, thereby pushing the figure. As shown in FIG. 20 (B), the lock member 25 rotates counterclockwise while deforming the elastic piece 25c, so that the shaft support pin 153 can be inserted into the support rod hole 20A. When the pivot pin 153 reaches the leading space portion of the inclined hole portion of the support hole 20A, as shown in FIG. 20C, the pivot pin 153 and the distal end side surface of the stopper portion 25a do not come into contact with each other. Therefore, the lock member 25 is urged by the elastic force of the elastic piece 25c and rotates clockwise, and the stopper portion 25a of the lock member 25 returns to the normal state again and closes the inlet portion of the support hole 20A. The distal end portion of the stopper portion 25a faces the shaft support pin 153 so that the shaft support pin 153 does not fall out of the support saddle hole 20A. This state is maintained even when the main body frame 3 is completely closed or during the normal opening / closing operation of the main body frame 3 as shown in FIG. Next, in order to remove the pivot pin 153 from the support hole 20A, as shown in FIG. 20 (E), the finger is inserted into the back surface of the support protrusion piece 19A, and the operation portion 25b of the lock member 25 is turned counterclockwise. By rotating, the lock member 25 rotates against the elastic force of the elastic piece 25c, and the distal end portion of the stopper portion 25a is retracted from the support hole 20A, so that the shaft support pin 153 is supported. It can be taken out from the hole 20A. Thereafter, the main body frame 3 can be removed from the outer frame 2A by lifting the main body frame 3 and releasing the engagement between the support holes formed in the frame support plate 155 and the support protrusions 21A of the lower support fitting 18A. .

  As described above, in the lock member 25 provided on the upper support fitting 17A of the outer frame 2A according to the second embodiment, the stopper portion 25a, the operation portion 25b, and the elastic piece 25c are integrally formed of synthetic resin. Therefore, it can be very easily attached to the back surface of the upper support fitting 17A, and since it has an extremely simple structure, there are few failures and the manufacturing cost can be reduced. Further, when the acting force F is applied in the direction in which the pivot pin 153 comes off along the inclination of the inclined hole portion of the support hole 20A and comes into contact with the front end surfaces 25e and 25f, the pivot pin 153 of the acting force F is applied. And a position where no rotational moment is generated to rotate the lock member 25 by the component force F1 acting on the contact portion between the front end surfaces 2525e and 25f, or the front end portion of the lock member 25 is rotated toward the outside of the support protruding piece 19A. By positioning the rotation center of the lock member 25 (the axis fixed by the rivet 26) at the position where the rotational moment is generated, the elastic piece 25c of the lock member 25 is not constantly loaded, and is integrated with synthetic resin. It is possible to prevent plastic deformation due to creep of the elastic piece 25c to be formed, and to prevent the pivot pin 153 from dropping from the support bore 20A over a long period of time. With wear, the lock member 25 is only towards the distal end on one side of the stopper portion 25a also rotates and abuts against the stop suspended portion 19C, the lock member 25 nor protrudes to the outside of the support projecting piece 19A. Although not described in detail, the lock member 25 is also applied as it is to the upper support fitting 17 of the outer frame 2 according to the first embodiment.

[1-2. Door frame]
Next, the door frame 5 will be described with reference mainly to FIG. 2 and FIGS. 21 to 33. FIG. 21 is a rear view of the door frame 5, FIG. 22 is a perspective view of the door frame 5 and the glass unit 50 separated from each other, and FIG. 23 is detachable from the door frame 5. FIG. 24 is a perspective view showing a manufacturing process of the glass unit 50 to be attached, FIG. 24 is an enlarged perspective view of a desiccant insertion portion of the glass unit 50, and FIG. 25 is a side view (A) of the completed glass unit 50; FIG. 26 is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 25B (A) and a cross-sectional view taken along line BB in FIG. FIG. 28 is a cross-sectional view of the handle device 70 to which the door frame 5 is attached. FIG. 28 is a perspective view showing the relationship between the operation handle portion 71 and the joint unit 90 constituting the handle device 70, and FIG. 71 is an exploded perspective view of 71, and FIG. FIG. 31 is an operation view for explaining the operation of the operation handle portion 71 and the joint unit 90, and FIG. 32 is a handle device 70. FIG. 33 is a cross-sectional view for explaining a state in which the handle device 70 and the hitting ball launching device 300 are connected to each other.

  As shown in FIGS. 2 and 4, the door frame 5 is formed in a square shape, a vertically long hexagonal gaming window 42 is formed on the upper portion thereof, and a storage tray 30 is provided on the lower front surface of the gaming window 42, An operation handle 71 constituting the handle device 70 is protruded and fixed on one side (open side) of the storage tray 30, and the balls stored on the lower side of the storage tray 30 are discharged to a receiving box (dollar box) not shown. A ball discharge button 30a is provided. Further, a glass unit 50 as a transparent plate unit is attached to the back surface of the door frame 5 so as to close the gaming window 42, and a joint unit constituting the handle device 70 on the back surface corresponding to the operation handle portion 71. 90 is also attached. In addition, although the detailed structure about the glass unit 50 and the handle apparatus 70 is explained in full detail later, the whole structure of the door frame 5 is demonstrated below.

  As shown in FIG. 21, the door frame 5 includes an upper opening / closing bracket 32 and a lower opening / closing bracket 33 provided on one side of the door frame 5, and a door shaft support hole 154 (see FIG. 38) of the upper shaft support bracket 152 of the main body frame 3. It is inserted and supported in a shaft support hole 157 (see FIG. 38) of the door support plate 156, and is supported by the main body frame 3 so as to be freely opened and closed. For this reason, the upper opening / closing bracket 32 is provided with a sliding shaft support pin (not shown) inserted into the door shaft supporting hole 154 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction, and the lower opening / closing bracket 33 has a shaft supporting hole 157. A shaft pin (not shown) inserted through is projected downward. Thus, in order to attach the door frame 5 to the main body frame 3, the shaft pin of the lower opening / closing bracket 33 of the door frame 5 is inserted into the shaft support hole 157 of the door support plate 156 of the main body frame 3, and then the upper and lower of the door plate In a state where the sliding shaft support pin of the metal fitting 32 is slid downward, the sliding shaft support pin is slid upward (usually a spring) so as to coincide with the door shaft support hole 154 of the upper shaft support metal fitting 152 of the main body frame 3. The door frame 5 can be pivotally supported by the main body frame 3 so as to be openable and closable.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 2, the storage tray 30 provided on the front surface of the door frame 5 is different from a conventional pachinko gaming machine, and corresponds to a single tray (a conventional so-called “upper plate”) below the gaming window 42. ), The storage tray itself can be positioned lower than in the prior art. For this reason, the dimension of the up-down direction of the game window 42 can also be enlarged. In addition, since the door frame 5 is formed to have substantially the same width as the left and right widths of the main body frame 3 as described above, the size of the gaming window 42 in the left and right direction can also be increased. That is, since the vertical and horizontal dimensions of the game window 42 can be formed large, the vertical and horizontal dimensions of the game area 255 of the game board 4 that can be seen through the game window 42 are also increased. Can do. An effect selection switch 31 that can be operated when the game content realized by the gaming device provided in the game board 4 is of the player participation type is provided almost in front of the center of the storage tray 30. Further, the storage tray 30, the game window 42 on the front surface of the door frame 5 and the door frame 5 are covered with a lamp cover or a decorative plate incorporating door frame decoration lamps 5aa, 5b to 5h for providing a game effect. ing. The lamp cover and the decorative plate are formed with irregularities as shown in FIGS.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 21, iron reinforcing plates 35 to 38 are fixed to the rear surface of the door frame 5 along a rectangular outer periphery. Speakers 34 are fixedly attached to the speaker box at both lower ends of the upper reinforcing plate 35 attached to the upper back surface, and the lower reinforcing plate 36 attached to the lower back surface is attached to the lower reinforcing plate 36 directly below the game window 42. A prize ball opening 39 is established on the branch side. The prize ball port 39 is for letting out the prize balls discharged in communication with an outlet 536 (see FIG. 70) of the full tank unit 520 described later to the storage tray 30. Further, the side reinforcing plate 37 attached to the open side rear surface is attached from the upper end portion to the lower end portion of the rear surface of the door frame 5, and hook locking pieces 37 a are formed at the upper portion, the central portion, and the lower portion thereof. Yes. The hook locking piece 37a engages with a glass door hook 601 (see FIG. 86) of the locking device 560, which will be described in detail later, and locks the door frame 5 to the main body frame 3. Further, the side reinforcing plate 38 attached to the rear surface of the pivot support side is also attached from the upper end portion to the lower end portion of the rear surface of the door frame 5, the upper opening / closing bracket 32 at the upper end portion, and the lower opening / closing bracket 33 at the lower end portion. Is fixed. The reinforcing plates 35 to 38 also serve as ground connection plates that remove noise or the like due to electrostatic discharge from the sphere stored in the storage tray 30 from the door frame 5. Specifically, since the reinforcing plates 35 to 38 are made of iron and are electrically connected, the noise that has entered the reinforcing plates 35 to 38 is caused by the upper opening metal fittings of the side reinforcing plates 38. 32 and the lower opening metal fitting 33. As described above, the upper opening / closing bracket 32 and the lower opening / closing bracket 33 include the door shaft support hole 154 (see FIG. 38) of the upper shaft support bracket 152 of the main body frame 3 and the shaft support hole 157 of the door support plate 156 (see FIG. 38). ) Is supported by insertion. For this reason, noise that has entered the strong plates 35 to 38 is transmitted to the upper shaft support bracket 152 and the door support plate 156 of the main body frame 3 via the upper opening metal fitting 32 and the lower opening metal fitting 33 of the side reinforcing plate 38. A grounding connector 690 (see FIG. 96) on a power supply board 686, which will be described later, is grounded to the outside.

  Further, on the back surface of the door frame 5, a glass stopper lever 43, a positioning protrusion 44, and a latching recess 45 for attaching the glass unit 50 as a transparent plate unit are formed, and the cylinder lock 570 of the lock device 560 is inserted. And a hitting ball supply port 40 to which a hitting ball that flows down in a line on the downstream side of the storage tray 30 is supplied, and is supplied from the hitting ball supply port 40 located below the hitting ball supply port 40. Supply swing pieces 41 for supplying the hit balls one by one to the launch position of the launch rail 164 described later are respectively formed or provided. As shown in FIG. 21, the glass stop lever 43 is provided below the installation position of the left and right speakers 34, and is provided so that the upper end is fixed with a screw to rotate. As shown in FIG. 22, the lower portion where the shaft is supported is formed in a concave shape so that a stopper piece 52 of the glass unit 50 to be described below is fitted, and is formed in the stopper piece 52 in the concave portion. A positioning protrusion 44 that engages with the positioning hole 53 is provided. In addition, the latching recess 45 is formed in an L shape with the upper part opened to the left and right of the lower part of the game window 42, and the latching protrusion piece 54 of the glass unit 50 is inserted from above and engaged. . Further, as shown in FIG. 21, the key hole 46 is formed on the open side and below the lower reinforcing plate 36. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, as shown in FIG. 2, the front end surface of the cylinder lock 570 of the lock device 560 faces the key hole 46, and the door frame 5 is opened with respect to the main body frame 3. In this case, the cylinder lock 570 is positioned away from the key hole 46 as shown in FIG. Further, the supply swinging piece 41 comes into contact with an operating piece 308 (see FIG. 50) provided in the hitting ball launching device 300 described later, and from the hitting ball supply port 40 in conjunction with the reciprocation of the hitting ball 336 of the hitting ball launching device 300. The supplied hit ball is supplied to the launch position of the launch rail 164.

[1-2-1. Transparent plate unit (glass unit)]
Next, the glass unit 50 as a transparent plate unit attached to the back surface of the door frame 5 will be described with reference to FIGS. As shown in FIG. 23, the glass unit 50 includes two annular hexagonal unit frames 51 molded with a synthetic resin having an opening larger than the game window 42, and two on the front and rear surfaces of the outer periphery of the opening of the unit frame 51. It is comprised by adhere | attaching the glass plate 60 (It may be not a glass plate but a transparent synthetic resin plate.) As a transparent plate of this. First, the unit frame 51 will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 22, stop pieces 52 in which positioning holes 53 are formed projectingly toward the outside of the ring on the diagonally upper left and right sides of the unit frame 51, On the left and right sides of the lower portion, latching protrusions 54 are formed so as to protrude toward the outside of the ring. The stopper piece 52 and the latching protrusion piece 54 are for attaching the glass unit 50 to the back surface of the door frame 5 as described above. Further, as shown in FIG. 26, a glass contact step portion 55 for fitting the glass plate 60 is provided around the outer peripheral front and back surface portions of the unit frame 51, and the glass contact step portion 55 is provided with the glass plate. When 60 is bonded with an adhesive (hot melt adhesive), the two glass plates 60 are accommodated within the width dimension of the unit frame 51. Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 24 and 26, the unit frame 51 has a desiccant-filling space 56 for enclosing the desiccant 57 therein, and a lower side of one side so as to communicate with the inner peripheral surface of the unit frame 51. An open / close lid 59 formed so as to protrude outwardly in a ring shape and formed with a number of vent holes 59b to close the desiccant-containing space 56 is provided on the inner peripheral surface of the unit frame 51 with a locking claw 59a. Can be attached detachably. Further, a single air hole 58 communicating with the outside is formed in the desiccant enclosing space portion 56. The desiccant enclosing space 56 may be formed so as to protrude to the outside of the annular unit frame 51 at any part of the diagonal left, right, upper and lower parts excluding the upper, lower, left and right parts.

  Thus, to assemble the glass unit 50, as shown in FIG. 23 (A), the desiccant 57 is enclosed in the desiccant enclosure space 56 of the unit frame 51, and then, as shown in FIG. 23 (B). In order to close the desiccant enclosing space portion 56, the opening / closing lid 59 is inserted from the inner peripheral surface side of the unit frame 51 to lock the locking claw 59a. Further, as shown in FIG. The glass plate 60 is bonded and adhered to the glass contact step 55 from both sides of the frame 51 with an adhesive. When the second glass plate 60 is bonded, the air in the sealed space sandwiched between the two glass plates 60 passes through the vent hole 59b of the opening / closing lid 59, the desiccant enclosing space portion 56, and the air hole 58. Since it escapes to the outside, the bonding operation of the second glass plate 60 can be easily performed without being affected by the pressure of the air in the sealed space sandwiched between the two glass plates 60. Finally, FIG. As shown to (D), the glass unit 50 which integrated the two glass plates 60 can be assembled | attached easily. When it is necessary to completely seal the desiccant-enclosed space 56 and the sealed space formed by the two glass plates 60, the sealed state can be obtained by a simple operation of simply sealing the small air hole 58. Can be completed. Instead of sealing the air hole 58, a valve through which air flows only in one direction from the space portion of the two glasses to the outside may be provided in the air hole 58.

  In order to attach the glass unit 50 assembled as described above to the door frame 5, the latching projection piece 54 of the glass unit 50 is latched on the latching recess 45 of the door frame 5 from above, and then the glass unit 50. While the positioning hole 53 formed in the stopper piece 52 is inserted into the positioning protrusion 44 protruding from the concave portion of the main body frame 5, the stopper piece 52 and the concave portion are matched, and the glass stopper lever 43 is turned to the closed position. It moves and presses the back surface of the stop piece 52. Thereby, the glass unit 50 can be easily attached to the back surface of the door frame 5. Note that when the glass stopper lever 43 is rotated to the closed position, a recess (not shown) formed on the back surface of the glass stopper lever 43 and the tip of the positioning protrusion 44 are engaged. Conversely, when removing the glass unit 50, the glass stopper lever 43 is rotated to the open position, and then the upper portion of the glass unit 50 is moved rearward so as to remove the positioning hole 53 from the positioning projection 44, and then the glass By lifting the entire unit 50 upward, the latching protrusion 54 can be removed from the latching recess 45 and the glass unit 50 can be easily detached from the door frame 5.

  As described in detail above, the glass unit 50 as the transparent plate unit in the present embodiment encloses the desiccant 57 in the desiccant enclosure space 56 of the unit frame 51 in advance, and then attaches the glass plate 60 to the unit frame 51. Since it can be assembled simply by sticking to both sides with an adhesive, after attaching the glass plate to the unit frame as before, the desiccant is inserted into the unit frame from the outside to seal the periphery of the desiccant insertion port Compared to the structure, since only the very small air hole 58 needs to be sealed even when sealed, the glass unit 50 can be manufactured easily, and the productivity of the glass unit 50 is improved. is there. In this case, since the desiccant enclosing space 56 is integrally formed so as to protrude to the outside of the annular unit frame 51, it is not necessary to prepare a specially shaped glass plate, and is extremely versatile. A high glass unit 50 can be provided.

  Further, in the present embodiment, since the vent hole 59b is formed in a small component such as the opening / closing lid 59 as compared with the conventional case where the vent hole is formed in the unit frame itself, the molding is easy and after molding. Even if the granular desiccant 57 is enclosed in the desiccant enclosing space 56, the air desiccant 57 is sealed by the two glass plates 60. It does not fall into space.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the desiccant enclosing space portion 56 is formed so as to protrude to the outside of the ring at any part of the diagonal left and right upper and lower parts excluding the upper and lower left and right parts of the annular unit frame 51. In addition, the desiccant-filled space 56 can be disposed in a region that is not used as the gaming window 42 in the diagonally left, right, upper and lower parts of the gaming window 42 that is generally formed in a circular shape, and as a result, the gaming window 42 is formed larger be able to.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the glass unit 50 is attached to the door frame 5, the latching protrusions 54 formed on the left and right sides of the unit frame 51 are inserted into the latching recesses 45 of the door frame 5. The positioning holes 53 of the stopper pieces 52 formed on the diagonally upper left and right sides of the frame 51 can be attached by a simple operation of engaging the positioning protrusions 44 of the door frame 5 and rotating the glass stopper lever 43.

[1-2-2. Handle device]
Next, the handle device 70 attached to the lower part of the open side of the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The handle device 70 is assembled to the operation handle portion 71 provided on the lower front surface of the door frame 5 on the open side and the back surface of the door frame 5 corresponding to the operation handle portion 71, and according to the turning operation of the operation handle portion 71. It is composed of a joint unit 90 that cooperates with the rotating shaft 75 and changes the rotational motion of the rotating shaft 75 into a slide motion.

  First, as shown in FIG. 27, the operation handle portion 71 protrudes from a decorative plate that forms the front surface of the door frame 5 (for example, a decorative plate that is also used as an outer component plate of the storage tray 30). It is inserted into and fixed to the cylindrical handle support tube portion 5a. The handle support cylinder portion 5a is formed so as to be inclined outward (right side) when viewed from above the pachinko gaming machine 1, so that the operation handle portion inserted and fixed to the handle support cylinder portion 5a. 71 is also inclined outward in plan view (in other words, the tip is inclined so as to be directed to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine with respect to a line perpendicular to the front vertical surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1). It is attached and fixed to the door frame 5. In this way, by tilting the operation handle portion 71 outward in a plan view, there is an advantage that the player can easily grasp the operation handle portion 71, and the rotation operation is not uncomfortable and the rotation operation is easy. In this embodiment, as will be described later, even if the operation handle portion 71 is inclined, the rotational motion of the rotation shaft 75 of the operation handle portion 71 is smoothly transmitted, and the resilience of the ball hitting device 300 The structure which can adjust is adopted. After the operation handle portion 71 is inserted into the handle support tube portion 5a, the handle support tube portion 5a and the operation handle portion 71 (precisely, the rear grip portion 73) are connected with a screw or the like, so that the operation handle portion 71 is It cannot be pulled out from the handle support cylinder 5a.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 29, the operation handle 71 is pivotally supported so as to be rotatable between the front gripping member 72, the rear gripping member 73, and the front gripping member 72 and the rear gripping member 73. The operation member 74 includes a rotation shaft 75 having a linear columnar shape whose one end is fixed to the rotation operation member 74, and a cam 76 fixed to the other end of the rotation shaft 75. The rear grip member 73 is integrally formed with a small-diameter portion fitted into the handle support cylinder portion 5a and a large-diameter portion in front of the small-diameter portion, and a shaft through-hole through which the rotary shaft 75 passes. 78 is formed. When the rotating shaft 75 is inserted into the shaft through hole 78, the bearing bush 77 is fitted into the rear end of the shaft through hole 78, and the rotating shaft 75 is inserted into the bearing bush 77. On the other hand, the rotating shaft 75 that is passed through the shaft through hole 78 via the bearing bush 77 passes through the bearing hole 84 of the fixed bearing member 83 that is fixed to the front side of the rear gripping member 73, and the center of the rotation operation unit 74. Is fitted into a shaft fitting hole 86 formed in

  Further, on the front side of the rear grip member 73, there are provided a touch switch 80, a firing stop switch 82, a protrusion and a mounting hole (both not shown) for fixing the hook 88, and the single button 81 is swingable. A swing pin (not shown) to be supported is formed, and a touch switch 80, a firing stop switch 82, a hook 88 and a single button 81 are attached to the protrusions, mounting holes and swing pins. In addition, a wiring through hole 79 formed on the side of the shaft through hole 78 of the rear gripping member 73 by collecting the wiring from the touch switch 80 and the firing stop switch 82 with the hook 88 in a state where they are attached, which will be described later. It is led out from the wiring through cylinder member 108 (see FIG. 27) and the wiring opening 100 (see FIG. 30) to the back surface of the door frame 5, and is connected to the handle relay terminal plate 71a (see FIG. 32). The wiring from the handle relay terminal plate 71a is attached along the lower reinforcing plate 36 described above, and is electrically connected to a payout control board described later. In addition, an urging spring 85 is provided between the fixed bearing member 83 and the rotation operation member 74 so as to be provided around the rotation shaft 75. It is designed to return to the position. Further, a switch contact convex portion 87 is provided on the outside of the shaft fitting hole 86 of the rotation operation member 74, and the switch contact is made when the rotation operation member 74 is in the original position by the urging force of the urging spring 85. When the projection 87 comes into contact with the actuator of the firing stop switch 82 to turn off the firing stop switch 82 and the turning operation member 74 is turned by the player, the switch contact protrusion 87 becomes the actuator of the firing stop switch 82. Turn away and turn on. Further, since the single button 81 can be swung while the firing stop switch 82 is ON, the actuator of the firing stop switch 82 can be turned OFF by pressing the single button 81. ing. It should be noted that the outer peripheral surface of the rotation operation member 74 is subjected to conductive plating so that the touch switch 80 detects contact when the player contacts the rotation operation member 74. Then, when the player rotates the turning operation member 74 and the firing stop switch 82 is turned on and the touch switch 80 detects contact, a firing motor 344 (to be described later) of the ball striking device 300 (see FIG. 51). Is driven to rotate.

  The cam 76 fixed to the tip of the rotating shaft 75 is formed in a slanted ball shape, and a cam contact portion of a slide body 93 (see FIGS. 30 and 31) of the joint unit 90 described later according to the rotation of the rotating shaft 75. 107 is pressed and slid in one direction. In the present embodiment, the operation handle 71 is attached in an inclined manner in plan view as described above by the cooperative structure of the cam 76 fixed to the tip of the rotating shaft 75 and the slide body 93 of the joint unit 90. It is possible.

  Therefore, the joint unit 90 which is the other component of the handle device 70 connected to the operation handle portion 71 will be described next. As shown in FIG. 30, the joint unit 90 includes a storage body 91, a slide body 93 that is stored in the storage body 91 and is slidable in the lateral direction, and a storage body in a state in which the slide body 93 is stored. And a cover body 92 covering the front surface of 91.

  The storage body 91 is formed in a rectangular parallelepiped box shape whose front surface is open, and a cam insertion opening 94 is formed on the rear surface thereof. In addition, two mounting boss holes 95 for attaching the joint unit 90 to the back surface of the door frame 5 are formed on the upper side and the lower side of the housing 91 so as to protrude outward, and the cover body 92 is formed on both the left and right sides. A mounting hole 96 for mounting is attached to the outside. Further, the inner side surfaces of the upper side and the lower side of the container 91 are in contact with the outer sides of the upper and lower sides of the slide body 93 so that the slide body 93 can move smoothly. (In FIG. 30B, only the lower-side abutment convex portion 97 is shown, and the upper-side abutment convex portion 97 is not shown).

  Further, the cover body 92 is formed in a rectangular parallelepiped box shape with an open rear surface, and a cylindrical boss-shaped guide protrusion 104 protruding from the front surface of the slide body 93 is inserted on the front surface thereof to guide the movement of the slide body 93. Two guide horizontal grooves 98, an insertion horizontal hole 99 through which the slide protrusion 102 protruding from the front surface of the slide body 93 is inserted, and a rear end of the rear grip member 73 of the operation handle 71, and the cam. A wiring opening 100 is formed in which the rear end portion of the wiring through cylinder member 108 inserted from the insertion opening 94 faces. Further, mounting holes 101 corresponding to the mounting holes 96 of the housing 91 are formed on the left and right sides of the cover body 92, and screws (not shown) are attached in a state where the mounting holes 96 and 101 are in correspondence with each other. The cover body 92 can be attached to the storage body 91 by being fastened.

  Furthermore, a slide body 93 that is housed in a space formed by the housing body 91 and the cover body 92 so as to be movable in the left-right direction is formed in a rectangular parallelepiped box shape having a smaller rear surface than the housing body 91. On the front surface of the front wall, two guide projections 104 inserted into the guide lateral groove 98 and a slide projection piece 102 inserted into the insertion lateral hole 99 project. The slide projecting piece 102 is formed in a thin plate shape, and the traveling direction at the time of sliding is an inclined side 103. Further, a cylindrical member through opening 105 through which the wiring through cylindrical member 108 passes is formed between the two guide projections 104 on the front wall of the slide body 93. The tubular member through-opening 105 is a horizontally long rectangular opening so that the wiring through tubular member 108 in a fixed state does not interfere with the sliding of the slide body 93. On the other hand, on the back surface of the front wall of the slide body 93, a cam engaging recess 106 in which a cam 76 fixed to the tip of the rotating shaft 75 is housed is formed in an inverted L shape by a rib. Then, a vertical portion of a part of the rib forming the cam engagement recess 106 is formed as an arc-shaped rib so as to protrude into the cam engagement recess 106, and the cam contact portion 107 where the portion contacts the cam 76. It has become.

  To assemble the storage body 91, the slide body 93, and the cover body 92 described above, the slide body 93 is stored in the storage body 91, and the cover body 92 is covered from the front in that state. When covering, the guide protrusion 104 is covered so as to be inserted into the guide lateral groove 98 and the slide protrusion 102 is inserted into the insertion lateral hole 99. After the covering, the mounting holes 101 and 96 are screwed with screws, and the assembly of the joint unit 90 is completed with the slide body 93 housed inside. Then, as shown in FIG. 32, the joint unit 90 assembled as described above is attached to the mounting recess 110 (see FIG. 6) formed corresponding to the mounting position of the operation handle portion 71 on the back surface of the door frame 5. And the mounting boss hole 95 is screwed with a screw or the like to attach the joint unit 90 to the door frame 5.

  As described above, the operation handle 71 is inserted and supported from the front side of the door frame 5 into the handle support cylinder 5a, and the joint unit 90 is attached to the mounting recess 110 from the back side of the door frame 5 as shown in FIG. As shown, the cam 76 fixed to the tip of the rotating shaft 75 is accommodated in the cam engaging recess 106 of the slide body 93. In this case, the operation handle portion 71 is attached to be inclined in a plan view, so that the cam 76 is also inclined with respect to the vertical surface of the door frame 5, but the engagement recess 106 is a predetermined space in the front-rear direction. Since it has a width, the entire inclined cam 76 can be accommodated in the space of the engaging recess 106. Further, as shown in FIG. 31A, the retracted state is such that the rotation center of the cam 76 is located on the side of the cam contact portion 107 and the tip of the slanted cam 76 is below the cam engagement recess 106. It is located in the space.

  Accordingly, when the player rotates the rotation operation member 74 of the operation handle portion 71, the rotation shaft 75 rotates and the cam 76 rotates accordingly. As shown in FIG. The slide body 93 is moved in one direction (in the case of FIG. 31, in the right direction in the figure) by the contact between the cam contact portion 107 of the engaging recess 106 and one outer surface of the cam 76 (the outer surface of the rotation front). Move the slide. That is, the rotational movement of the rotary shaft 75 is converted into the sliding movement of the slide body 93. Therefore, the distance S1 between the rotation center of the cam 76 in the initial state (before the rotation) shown in FIG. The distance S2 is greater than the distance S1 due to the rotation. That is, the slide projecting piece 102 of the slide body 93 slides by a distance of “S2-S1”. Then, as shown in FIGS. 28, 32, and 33, the slide movement of the slide protrusion 102 of the joint unit 90 is transmitted to the slide member 350 of the ball striking device 300, and the biasing spring 333 ( The tension of the hitting ball desired by the player can be obtained by adjusting the tension shown in FIG. The relationship between the handle device 90 and the ball hitting device 300 will be described in detail after the ball hitting device 300 is described.

  The wiring led out from the inside of the operation handle 71 to the back surface of the door frame 5 through the wiring through hole 79, the wiring through cylinder member 108, and the wiring opening 100 is supported along the lower side of the back surface of the door frame 5. And then connected to the operation handle terminal 724 (see FIG. 96) of the payout control board 715 that is attached to the board unit 650 attached to the back side of the main body frame 3.

[1-3. Body frame]
Next, the game board 4 can be detachably mounted from the front side, and the hitting ball launching device 300, a prize ball tank 400 for dispensing a prize ball, a tank rail member 410, a ball path unit 420, and a prize ball unit 450. And the full unit 520, the locking device 560 for locking the main body frame 3 to the outer frame 2 and the door frame 5 to the main body frame 3, and the electrical provided in the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 except for the game board 4. About the main body frame 3 on which various components such as a substrate unit 650 in which various control boards and power supply boards for controlling the components are collectively provided, a cover body 750 that covers the rear opening 222, and the like are mounted. This will be described with reference to the drawings.

  First, with reference to FIGS. 34 to 42, the main body frame 3 itself on which the above-described various components are mounted will be described. 34 is a front view of the main body frame 3 before attaching the components, FIG. 35 is a rear view of the main body frame 3 before attaching the components, and FIG. 36 is a side view of the main body frame 3 before attaching the components. FIG. 37 is a perspective view seen from the back of the main body frame 3 before attaching the parts, FIG. 38 is a perspective view seen from the front of the main body frame 3 to which the parts are attached, and FIG. FIG. 40 is a perspective view of the state in which the main body frame 3 to which the parts are attached is pivotally supported on the outer frame 2 as viewed from the front, FIG. 40 is a rear view of the main body frame 3 to which the parts are attached, and FIG. FIG. 42 is a perspective view of the attached main body frame 3 as seen from the back side, and FIG.

  In FIG. 34, shafts for attaching an upper shaft support bracket 152 and a lower shaft support bracket 158 (both see FIG. 38) for opening and closing the body frame 3 to the outer frame 2 on one side of the body frame 3 are shown. In the state in which the bracket mounting step portions 150 and 151 are formed and the upper shaft bracket 152 and the lower shaft bracket 158 are mounted on the shaft bracket mounting step portions 150 and 151, the upper side and the side sides of the main body frame 3 are the upper side. The upper and side sides of the shaft support bracket 152 are substantially flush with each other, and the lower side and side sides of the main body frame 3 are substantially flush with the lower side and side sides of the lower shaft support bracket 158 (see FIG. 40). Here, the upper shaft support bracket 152 and the lower shaft support bracket 158 will be described with reference to FIGS. 38 and 40. The upper shaft support bracket 152 has a mounting portion on the back surface of the main body frame 3, and its upper end protrudes forward. A shaft support pin 153 is erected and fixed to the upper surface protruding forward, and the side of the shaft pin 153 A door shaft support hole 154 is formed in the door. On the other hand, the lower shaft support fitting 158 has an attachment portion on the back surface of the main body frame 3 and two support plates 155 and 156 are integrally projected on the lower end side and slightly above. The lower support plate 155 constitutes a frame support plate 155 for supporting the main body frame 3 on the lower support fitting 155 of the outer frame 2, and the upper support plate 156 is provided on the door frame 5. A door support plate 156 for supporting the lower opening / closing metal fitting 33 on the main body frame 3 is constituted. Therefore, a shaft support hole (not shown) for inserting the support protrusion 21 of the lower support bracket 18 of the outer frame 2 is formed in the frame support plate 155, and the lower opening / closing bracket 33 of the door frame 5 is formed on the door support plate 156. A shaft support hole 157 for inserting a projecting shaft pin (not shown) is formed.

  By the way, the main body frame 3 is formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and about 3/4 of the upper part thereof is a game board installation recess 159 for installing the game board 4 (see FIG. 38). A slightly recessed area below the game board installation recess 159 is a plate portion 160. First, the configuration of the plate portion 160 will be described with reference to FIGS. The upper surface of the plate part 160 is a game board placement part 161 for placing the game board 4, and the game board 4 is placed on the placement part 161 in the approximate center of the game board placement part 161. A passage support protrusion 162 is provided to support the lower surface of the out port 256 (see FIG. 43) formed in the game board 4 when placed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 34, a rail mounting boss 163 protrudes from the central portion of the front surface of the plate portion 160 toward the end on the open side at a predetermined interval, and the firing rail 164 ( 38) is fixed with screws. Further, a rail connection member 165 protrudes from the front surface of the plate portion 160 corresponding to the tip position of the launch rail 164, and when the game board 4 is installed in the game board installation recess 159, the inner running of the game board 4 is performed. It is adjacent to the connecting passage portion 259 (see FIG. 43) which is the downstream end of the surface 252. Further, at the side position of the rail connecting member 165 (position opposite to the firing rail 164), the upper end of an elliptical game board fixture 168 (see FIG. 38) for fixing the lower part of the game board 4 is provided. A fixture mounting boss 166 for mounting is projected, and a stopper 167 is projected diagonally below. That is, the game board fixing tool 168 is provided so as to be rotatable about the fixing tool mounting boss 166, and rotates in the clockwise direction in a state where the game board 4 is placed on the game board mounting portion 161 to play the game. The game board 4 is fixed by pressing the board fixture 168 against the front surface of the game board 4. Further, when removing the game board, it can be easily performed by turning the game board fixture 168 counterclockwise and removing it. In this case, the game board fixing tool 168 is prevented from being rotated counterclockwise by the stopper 167.

  Further, the lower part of the open side of the plate part 160 is formed with a rectangular parallelepiped launcher mounting portion 169 that protrudes in a bulging shape toward the front side (which is concave when viewed from the back side). The ball striking device 300 is fixed to the mounting portion 169 from the back surface of the main body frame 3. This will be described in detail later. A handle connecting window 172 for accommodating a slide member 350 (see FIG. 55) associated with the slide projecting piece 102 of the joint unit 90 is formed on the front wall portion of the launcher mounting portion 169 described above. A shaft hole 178 is formed at the position adjacent to the connecting window 172 so that the end face of the bearing 338 (see FIG. 51) of the ball striking rod 336 faces. In addition, the upper wall portion of the launching device mounting portion 169 is formed with a notch-penetrating opening 171 for projecting the hitting ball 336 of the hitting ball launching device 300 upward, and a plate portion 160 obliquely above the soot-penetrating opening 171. Is formed with a cylinder lock through hole 170 through which the cylinder lock 570 of the lock device 560 passes.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 35, on the back surface of the plate portion 160, a ball discharge passage 173 extending from the upper portion on the shaft support side toward the center portion of the plate portion 160 and then downward is formed. . The ball discharge passage 173 is for discharging a ball discharged from a ball discharge connection passage 515 (see FIG. 38), which will be described later, from below the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the inside of the island. In addition, a cylindrical guide protrusion 174 protrudes rearward above the launcher mounting portion 169, and a guide hole 675 (see FIG. 92) of a substrate unit 650 described later is inserted into the guide protrusion 174. This facilitates the mounting of the board unit 650. Also, mounting holes 175 for mounting the board unit 650 with screws are formed on the left and right and upper and lower sides of the plate part 160, and the mounting pieces 671 of the board unit 650 are associated with the mounting holes 175 and fastened with screws. In addition, a launching device mounting boss 177 for mounting the hitting ball launching device 300 protrudes rearward inside the concave shape of the launching device mounting portion 169, and further, the lowermost end portion on the open side is shown in FIG. As shown, when closing the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2, a guide protrusion with a tapered tip and a vertically long shape is used to guide the closing operation of the main body frame 3 while abutting against the upper surface of the lower front cover plate 6. A piece 176 protrudes rearward.

  In addition to the configuration described above, the plate portion 160 is provided with a ball removal connection opening 179 which is an opening at the upstream end of the ball removal discharge passage 173 on the upper surface of the end portion on the shaft support side, as shown in FIG. Yes. The downstream end of the ball removal connection passage 515 is connected to the ball removal connection opening 179. The portion adjacent to the ball-opening connection opening 179 is horizontal so that a full unit mounting portion 180 for mounting a full unit 520 (see FIG. 38), which will be described in detail later, is orthogonal to the plate portion 160. A unit engagement groove 181 that engages with the engagement piece 539 (see FIG. 72) of the full unit 520 is formed in the front portion of the full unit mounting portion 180. Further, as shown in FIG. 38, an outlet for blocking a prize ball discharged from the outlet 536 of the full tank unit 520 when the door frame 5 is opened is provided on the front surface of the plate part 160 in front of the full tank unit mounting part 180. An opening / closing device 224 is provided. Although the outlet opening / closing device 224 will not be described in detail, when the door frame 5 is closed, the opening / closing plate is lowered by a lever that contacts the back surface of the door frame 5, but the door frame 5 is opened. Then, the contact with the lever disappears, so that the opening / closing plate rises and closes the outlet 536. For this reason, even when the door frame 5 is opened, the prize balls stored in the full tank unit 520 do not fall down from the outlet 536.

  Next, the structure of the game board installation recessed part 159 is demonstrated. As shown in FIG. 34 and FIG. 38, the game board installation recess 159 has a front side face part that does not accommodate the game board 4 in the upper side part and a part of the open side, and the upper side face part. Although nothing is formed, the door hook holes 199 through which the glass door hooks 601 of the lock device 560 pass are opened at three locations, upper, middle, and lower, on the open side surface portion. In other words, the lock device 560 is fixed to the back surface of the heel surface portion on the open side.

  Thus, the game board installation recess 159 includes a first side wall 190 provided around the inner side surface on the pivot support side, the upper side portion and the open side surface portion on the open side, and a rear side from the first side wall 190. A second side wall 191 provided around, a third side wall 192 provided rearward from the second side wall 191, and a fourth side wall 193 provided rearward from the third side wall 192; Thus, the left and right sides of the main body frame 3 and the rear part of the upper side are formed in a concave shape. The first side wall 190 to the fourth side wall 193 are formed so that the upper side and the right side (sides on the shaft support side) extend straight backward with a step when viewed from the back, whereas the left side ( The open side is formed in a stepped shape (see FIG. 5) that is inclined inwardly from the first side wall 190 toward the fourth side wall 193. This is because the rear end of the fourth side wall 194 is opened when the main body frame 3 is opened when the first side wall 190 to the fourth side wall 193 on the left side (open side) are straightly formed rearward. May be in contact with the inner surface of the side frame plate 13 of the outer frame 2 so that it cannot be opened smoothly. Therefore, the first side wall surface 190 to the fourth side wall 193 on the open side are smoothly opened by inclining inside. It is something that can be done. At the same time, the lock device 560 is attached along the first side wall 190 on the open side, and the attachment is performed using a lock attachment hole 198 (see FIG. 35) provided in the rear end side of the first side wall 190. Therefore, in order to form the lock mounting hole 198, the fourth side wall 194 is formed in an inclined step shape from the first side wall 190 on the open side. Further, the step size between the first side wall 190 to the fourth side wall 193 must be in contact with the periphery of the back surface of the game board 4 to be described later. For this reason, it is formed with a somewhat large step, but the other steps are extremely small steps. Of course, the second side wall 191 to the fourth side wall 193 may be formed continuously without forming a step.

  The side walls 190 to 193 described above are formed to have depth width dimensions d1, d2, d3, and d4, respectively, as shown in FIG. 36. In this embodiment, d1 + d2 + d3 + d4 = about 135 mm. . In particular, the width dimension d1 of the first side wall 190 corresponds to the thickness of the game board 4, and the game board is formed in the space formed by the remaining second side wall 191, third side wall 192, and fourth side wall 193. The rear projecting portions of the various gaming devices provided in 4 are accommodated. That is, the first side wall 190 constitutes a front side wall having a depth dimension substantially the same as the thickness of the game board 4, and the second side wall 191 to the fourth side wall 193 are in contact with the rear surface of the peripheral part of the game board 4. A rear side wall that has a stepped portion that contacts and extends rearward from the first side wall 190 substantially in parallel with the first side wall 190 and accommodates a rearward protruding portion of the gaming device provided in the game board 4 It constitutes. In particular, in the case of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 5, the rearward protruding amounts of all the parts of the second side wall 191 to the fourth side wall 193 are fixed to the upper part on the back side of the main body frame 3. It is formed so as to be substantially at the same position as the rear wall 400b of the storage part for storing the balls of the prize ball tank 400. Thereby, since the size of the space formed by the second side wall 191, the third side wall 192, and the fourth side wall 193 is secured up to a position corresponding to the peripheral portion of the game board 4, for example, a game Even in the case where a gaming device is installed in which the liquid crystal display screen occupies almost the entire area of the board 4, the rearward protruding portion of such a gaming device can be easily stored.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 35 and 37, the left side wall 194, the upper rear wall 195, and the right side wall as the rear wall are located on the left side, the upper side, and the right side when viewed from the rear side from the rear end side of the fourth side wall 193. The rear wall 196 protrudes inward so as to be parallel to the front surface of the pachinko machine. The front surface of the right rear wall 196 has a flat plate shape (see FIG. 34), and a ball path unit 420 (to be described later) and a prize ball unit 450 constituting a ball payout mechanism are detachably attached to the rear surface thereof. It has become. Accordingly, it is sufficient for the protruding width to the inside of the right rear wall 196 to have a width for attaching the ball path unit 420 and the prize ball unit 450. Further, the upper rear wall 195 has a flat front surface (see FIG. 34), and a tank rail member 410 (to be described later) is attached to the rear surface of the upper rear wall 195, so that the lower end side is inclined. Therefore, the height of the tank rail member 410 attached in an inclined manner is sufficient for the projecting width to the inside of the upper rear wall 195. Further, the front surface of the right rear wall 914 has a flat plate shape (see FIG. 34), and a cover body support cylinder portion 220 that pivotally supports a cover body 750 described later is formed on the rear surface. Therefore, it is sufficient that the projecting width to the inside of the right rear wall 194 has a width dimension that forms the cover body supporting cylinder portion 220.

  As described above, the front surfaces of the left rear wall 194, the upper rear wall 195, and the right rear wall 196 projecting inward from the rear edge of the fourth side wall 193 are formed in a flat plate shape. Corresponds to the peripheral part of the game board 4, and as described above, the second side wall 191, the third side wall 192, and the fourth side wall 193 reach the position corresponding to the peripheral part of the game board 4. Since the size of the space to be formed is ensured, for example, even when a gaming device in which the liquid crystal display screen occupies almost the entire area of the gaming board 4 is attached, a rearward protruding portion of such a gaming device Can be stored easily. The inside of the left rear wall 194, the upper rear wall 195, and the right rear wall 196 is a rear opening 222, and the rear opening 222 is closed by a cover body 750 described later so as to be opened and closed. .

  Next, a more detailed configuration of the game board installation recess 159 will be described. As described above, the door hook hole 199 through which the glass door hook 601 of the lock device 560 passes is formed in the upper side of the flat portion on the open side. The lower three places are opened, and a lock locking hole 198 (see FIG. 35) into which a locking projection 564 (to be described later) of the lock device 560 is engaged is further above, below, and below the upper and lower door hook holes 199. Is formed. The lock device 560 is attached along the first side wall 190 on the open side, and a lock attachment hole 197 (see FIG. 35) for attaching the lock device 560 with a screw is an upper part of the rear end portion of the first side wall 190. It is formed in the middle. It should be noted that the locking device 560 is attached not only with the upper and middle screws but also with a screw fixing hole 596 formed in a lock mounting piece 568 described later and a lock mounting hole formed in the vicinity of the cylinder lock through hole 170 above. The lower part of the lock device 560 is also attached by fixing 208 with a screw.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 37, when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the inner peripheral surface of the upper frame plate 10 of the outer frame 2 An abutting guide arc projection 202 protrudes and a relief recess 201 communicating with a notch 401 of a prize ball tank 400 described later is formed at the center of the rear end side of the first side wall 190, and the first side wall 190 and the second side wall 190 A tank mounting groove 200 is formed on a vertical surface connected to the side wall 191. When the mounting flange 407 of the prize ball tank 400 is attached to the tank attachment groove 200, the notch 401 of the prize ball tank 400 communicates with the escape recess 201 as shown in FIG. When the ball pressure of the sphere stored in the tank increases, the pressure is released to prevent clogging. Further, when the prize ball tank 400 is attached to the main body frame 3, the rear side wall 400b on the back side and the rear end side 193a of the fourth side wall 193 are substantially coincident when viewed from the front side of the prize ball tank 400 in plan view (see FIG. 5)). The guide arc projection 202 described above lifts the main body frame 3 by bringing the upper side of the main body frame 3 into contact with the inner peripheral surface of the upper frame plate 10 of the outer frame 2 and the lower front cover of the main body frame 3. This is to prevent a fraudulent act such as forming a gap with the plate 6 and inserting a fraudulent instrument through the gap.

  Further, the rail locking groove 203 for attaching the tank rail member 410 is formed along the opening edge of the rear opening 222 in the upper rear wall 195 described above, and the fourth side wall 193 and the upper rear wall are provided. A rail locking groove 204 is formed in the bent portion of 195. The tank rail member 410 can be attached to the main body frame 3 by locking the locking protrusions 418 and 419 (see FIG. 59) of the tank rail member 410 in the rail locking grooves 203 and 204. Further, a rail latching elastic piece 205 is formed on the upper portion of the upper rear wall 195 corresponding to the downstream side when the tank rail member 410 is attached, and the tank rail member 410 is locked in the rail locking grooves 203 and 204. When the protruding pieces 418 and 419 are locked and the tank rail member 410 is attached to the main body frame 3, the rail latching elastic piece 205 is arranged at the upper end on the downstream side of the tank rail member 410 so that the locked state is not released. It comes in contact with the top. When the tank rail member 410 is to be removed, the rail rail elastic member 205 is pushed backward, and then the tank rail member is released to release the locking state between the rail locking grooves 203 and 204 and the locking protrusions 418 and 419. What is necessary is just to lift 410 upwards. Further, a clearance hole 206 is formed in the side of the rail hooking elastic piece 205, and a ground wire connector 207 is formed below the rail hooking elastic piece 205. The escape hole 206 is formed to escape the end of the shaft pin 417 of the alignment gear 416 provided in the tank rail member 410, and the ground connector 207 is attached to the inside of the tank rail member 410. In addition to being in contact with a metal conductive plate (not shown) to be attached, wiring connected to a ground connector 690 (see FIG. 96) provided on a power supply board 686 described later is connected.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 35 and FIG. 37, vertical standing walls 210 are erected on the right rear wall 196 at both right and left ends, as shown in FIGS. A ball unit 450 is attached. However, the standing wall 210 on the rear surface opening 222 side is formed only up to slightly above the notch 218 formed below the right rear wall 196, whereas the opposite standing wall 210 is on the side of the right rear wall 196. It is formed in an L shape from the side to the bottom side.

  In addition, a prize ball guiding projection 211 is provided in a bent shape from the most upstream part between the left and right standing walls 210 to slightly above the middle stream part. The prize ball guide protrusion 211 corresponds to the ball path 422 (see FIG. 61) of the ball path unit 420 when the ball path unit 420 described later is attached, and guides the prize balls in a line. is there. Further, a path unit mounting boss 212 for fixing the ball path unit 420 with screws and a positioning pin 226 for positioning are provided on the left and right sides of the winning ball guide projection 211, and a ball break switch described later. A switch-corresponding protrusion 213 is provided so as to face 426 (see FIG. 61). The passage unit mounting boss 212 and the positioning pin 226 will be described in detail later.

  Furthermore, an engagement protrusion 215 as an engaging portion that engages with a hook-like engaging portion 474 (see FIG. 61) as an engaging portion of the prize ball unit 450 from the midstream portion to the downstream portion of the left and right standing walls 210, A lock elastic claw 214 that engages with the button insertion engagement hole 471 (see FIG. 61) of the prize ball unit 450 is formed, and the rotation shaft 458 (see FIG. 66) of the sprocket 457 of the prize ball unit 450 is formed. A relief hole 216 is formed to receive the end. A cutout opening 218 is formed below the right rear plate 196, and a payout motor 465, which is a four-phase stepping motor as a drive motor for the prize ball unit 450, faces the cutout opening 218. (See FIG. 38). The prize ball unit 450 then locks the lower end of a locking groove 219 formed at the lowermost bottom of the back surface of the right rear plate 196 and attaches it to the right rear plate 196 by the engagement protrusion 215 and the locking elastic claw 214. It can be attached detachably. This detachable configuration will be described in detail later. Further, a cover body abutting groove 217 into which the open side end of the cover body 750 enters is formed at the open end of the right rear wall 196.

  The configuration of the main body frame 3 including the game board installation recess 159 and the plate portion 160 has been described above. In addition to the above description, as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 34, the lower ends of the walls 191, 192, and 193 are configured as diagonally cutout portions 221, and as shown in FIG. A board positioning protrusion 223 to which 261 (see FIG. 44) is engaged is formed, and an end of the game board stopper 260 provided on the game board 4 above and below the boundary between the flat part on the open side and the game board installation recess 159 A board stopper insertion hole 225 with which the parts are engaged is formed.

  As described above, the main body frame 3 includes the game board 4, the hit ball launching device 300, the prize ball tank 400, the tank rail member 410, the ball passage unit 420, the prize ball unit 450, the full tank unit 520, the lock device 560, and the board unit. 650 and the cover body 750 are attached, and these will be sequentially described below.

[1-4. Game board]
The configuration of the game board 4 will be described with reference to FIGS. 43 is a perspective view seen from the front of the game board 4, FIG. 44 is a front view of the game board 4, FIG. 45 is a rear view of the game board 4, and FIG. FIG. Note that some game boards 4 may be provided with a function display unit to be described later (see FIGS. 101 and 117).

  In FIG. 43, the game board 4 includes a substantially square veneer board 250 and a decorative frame 251 attached to the front surface of the veneer board 250 so as to surround the game area 255. On the surface of the veneer board 250, a decorative plate called a decorative cell is affixed, and various gaming devices and a number of obstacle nails (all not shown) are planted in the gaming area 255. After these gaming devices and obstacle nails are provided, the decorative frame 251 is attached to the front surface of the veneer board 250. The decorative frame 251 has a circular hollow shape so as to surround the periphery of the veneer board 250. The outer shape is formed in a shape along the outer shape of the veneer board 250, and a circular arc surface extending from the middle of the lower side to the diagonally upper side past the center of the upper side is formed as the outer running surface 252. An inner sliding surface 253 is formed from the lower position of the stopper 258 provided at the end of 252 to the position where the symmetrical backflow prevention member 254 of the upper stopper 258 is provided. The outer running surface 252 has a connecting passage portion 259 that is connected to a rail connecting member 165 provided in an extension shape of the firing rail 164 at the start end portion thereof, and is adjacent to the connecting passage portion 259. A foul port 257 is formed. Further, a metal rail is closely attached to the outer sliding surface 252 from the upstream end of the foul port 257 to the stop portion 258. The stopper 258 is provided with an elastic body of rubber or synthetic resin so as to repel the hit ball hitting the inside of the game area 255 when the hit ball that has slid smoothly on the outer sliding surface 252 collides. The backflow prevention member 254 prevents the hit ball, which is fired at one end and taken into the game area 255, from flowing back to the outer sliding surface 252 again.

  In addition, an out port 256 is provided at the center of the lower portion of the inner sliding surface 253. Between the inner sliding surface 253 and the outer sliding surface 252 from the out port 256 to the backflow prevention member 254, a shot is hit. Although it constitutes a guide passage that leads to the region 255, the hit ball that has flowed back through the outer running surface 252 without reaching the game region 255 is taken into the foul port 257, and the foul ball entrance of the full tank unit 520 to be described later It is guided to 538 and discharged to the storage tray 30 again. The game area 255 is an area substantially surrounded by the inner running surface 253.

  By the way, a positioning recess 261 is formed on one side of the game board 4 to be fitted into the board positioning protrusion 223 formed on the main body frame 3, and is formed on the main body frame 3 on the other side of the game board 4. A game board stopper 260 to be inserted into the board stopper insertion hole 225 is provided. The end of the game board stopper 260 is inserted into the board stopper insertion hole 225 when the game board stopper 260 is pushed and fixed. Thus, in order to fix the game board 4 to the main body frame 3, after the insertion of the positioning recess 261 from the front side of the main body frame 3 so as to be fitted to the board positioning protrusion 223, the game board 4 as a whole is inserted. Is pushed into the first side wall 190 of the main body frame 3, and the game board stopper 260 which is in a free state in that state is pushed in and fixed, and the end thereof is inserted into the board stopper insertion hole 225 and fixed. Thereafter, the game board fixture 168 is rotated to fix the lower front surface of the game board 4. As a result, the game board 4 can be easily attached to the main body frame 3. In order to remove the game board 4, the game board 4 may be removed in the reverse order of the above procedure.

  Further, the outer shape of the game board 4 is formed with speaker cutouts 262 on the upper left and right sides of the game board 4 so as to accept the rearward protruding portions of the speakers 34 provided on the back surface of the door frame 5. A passage cutout 263 into which a part of the front guide passage 535 portion of the full tank unit 520 described later is inserted is formed obliquely below. In addition, on the lower left and right sides of the decorative frame 251, a certificate sticking unit 264 for attaching a certificate check certificate is provided.

  On the other hand, on the back side of the game board 4, a winning is achieved by aligning and guiding the balls won in various gaming devices provided in the gaming area 255 (for example, a winning opening such as a big winning opening device or a general winning opening) on the downstream side. A liquid crystal control board for controlling the display of a liquid crystal display (not shown) as a display device, to which a space forming cover body 265 is attached, and which is disposed on the back surface of the winning space forming cover body 265 at substantially the center of the game area 255 In addition, an effect control board box 266 in which a sub-integrated board for controlling various lamps, speakers 34, and the like is housed is attached.

  Further, a board substrate holder 267 is fixed to the back side of the game board 4 below the winning space forming cover body 265. The board substrate holder 267 has a space portion (a width of the space portion in the front-rear direction is the width of the winning space forming cover body 265 so as to collect the winning balls aligned and guided by the winning space forming cover body 265 in front of the board substrate holder 267. And a drop opening 272 (see FIG. 42) is formed on the bottom surface of the space portion. The drop port 272 joins at the rear surface portion of the out port 256 and communicates with an out ball passage 668 (see FIG. 92) formed in the substrate unit 650 described later. The board substrate holder 267 has a game control board box 268 for storing a main control board for controlling the game operation on the back surface thereof, a payout control board 715 and a power supply board 686 (FIG. 97) provided in a board unit 650 described later. And a relay terminal plate 269 for connecting to the terminal. The relay terminal plate 269 is provided with drawer connectors 270 and 271 that are automatically connected to the drawer connectors 730 and 732 provided on the board unit 650 only by mounting the game board 4 on the main body frame 3. The board substrate holder 267 is formed with a joining guide protrusion 273 that protrudes backward from between the drawer connectors 270 and 271 so as to penetrate the relay terminal plate 269. The joint guide protrusions 273 are provided on the drawer connectors 730 and 732 provided on the board unit 650 side and the game board 4 side when the operation of mounting the game board 4 on the main body frame 3 is performed as will be described in detail later. The drawer connectors 270 and 271 are inserted into the joining guide holes 676 formed in the frame substrate holder 651 of the substrate unit 650 so as to be naturally connected (see FIG. 102). The connection of these drawer connectors will be described in detail later.

  The above-described game board 4 is housed and arranged in a game board installation recess 159 (see FIG. 38) surrounded by the first side wall 190 of the main body frame 3, and the main body frame is constituted by the game board stopper 260 and the game board fixing tool 168 and the like. 3, and the game board 4 can be detached from the main body frame 3 by simply releasing the fixation. In this case, a configuration that prevents unauthorized removal of the game board 4 from the main body frame 3 can be achieved by changing a part of the game board 4 and a part of the main body frame 3. This removal preventing mechanism will be described with reference to FIGS. 47 is a perspective view seen from the front of the game board 4 incorporating the removal prevention mechanism, FIG. 48 is a partial perspective view of the main body frame 3 incorporating the removal prevention mechanism, and FIG. 49 is a removal prevention mechanism. It is an expansion perspective view of a part.

  First, as shown in FIG. 47, the anti-removal mechanism provided in the game board 4 is for attaching to the lower end of the lower side of the game board 4 opposite to the passage notch 263 and passing through the front and rear of the game board 4. A notch 280 is formed (more precisely, the mounting notch 280 is formed in the decorative frame 251), and the fastening bar 281 is stretched and fixed horizontally below the mounting notch 280. The fastening bar 281 is formed with a belt groove-like fastening portion 282 for latching a fastening band 283 described later at substantially the center thereof. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 48, the removal preventing mechanism provided in the main body frame 3 is a game board mounting portion 161 formed along the upper end side of the plate portion 160 below the main body frame 3 and the firing rail 164. A fastening hole 185 penetrating in the vertical direction is formed at a position corresponding to the upper portion of the launching portion, and a fastening linkage 186 for hooking the fastening band 283 is passed to a front portion of the fastening hole 185.

  When the game board 4 configured as described above is housed and arranged in the game board installation recess 159 of the main body frame 3, the fastening bar 281 is placed in contact with the game board placement part 161 as shown in FIG. At the same time, the fastening portion 282 and the fastening linkage 186 are in a matched state. In this state, the tip of the fastening band 283 that is generally marketed from above the fastening bar 281 is inserted into the passage notch 263 with respect to the portion where the fastening portion 282 and the fastening linkage 186 coincide. Then, it is inserted downward into the fastening hole 185 and guided forward, and its tip is engaged with the fastener portion of the fastening band 283. And the unnecessary front-end | tip part which protruded ahead from the fastener of the fastening band 283 is cut | disconnected. In this way, unless the fastening band 283 is cut, the game board 4 cannot be removed from the main body frame 3 even if the game board stopper 260 and the game board fixture 168 are released. Although the game board 4 can be removed from the main body frame 3 by cutting the fastening band 283, for example, if different fastening bands are fastened by using a fastening band 283 unique to a pachinko parlor, a game It can be easily understood that the board 4 has been removed and some sort of fraud has been performed. Thus, illegal removal from the main body frame 3 of the game board 4 can be prevented by an extremely simple removal prevention mechanism.

[1-5. Hitting ball launcher]
The ball striking device 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 50 is a perspective view (A) of the entire hitting ball launching apparatus 300, a perspective view (B) with the firing motor portion removed, and FIG. 51 is an exploded perspective view of the hitting ball launching apparatus 300, and FIG. These are the front view (A) which shows the relationship between the hitting ball launcher 300 and the launching rail 164, and the perspective view (B) of the launching motor part, and FIG. 54 is a rear view showing the relationship between the device 300 and the firing rail 164, and FIG. 54 is a rear view showing the relationship between the ball striking device 300 and the firing rail 164 in a state where the operation handle portion 71 is operated. 55 is a plan view (A), a front view (B), a perspective view (C) seen from the front, and a cross-sectional view taken along the line A-A (D) of the front view (B) of the slide member 350 provided in the ball hitting device 300. It is.

  The hitting ball launching device 300 pivotally supports the hitting ball rod 336 on the launching base frame 301 and attaches a shooting motor 344 for reciprocating rotation to the hitting ball rod 336 to the firing base frame 301, and further hits the hitting ball rod 336. The firing base frame 301 is configured with a slide rod 326 and a slide member 350 that adjust the biasing force of the biasing spring 333 that applies the biasing force that returns to the initial position.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 51, the firing base frame 301 is molded into a horizontally long rectangular shape by a synthetic resin, and a bearing in which a bearing 38 of a ball striking rod 336 is fitted at substantially the center thereof. A cylinder 302 is formed, and rubber stopper members 303 and 304 for restricting the firing origin position of the hitting ball 336 are attached and fixed to the upper part and the side thereof. That is, the rubber stopper members 303 and 304 receive the impact of the hitting ball rod 336 when the hitting ball rod 336 returns to the firing origin position by the biasing force of the biasing spring 333. A slide guide hole 305 having a horizontally elongated groove is formed on the rear side of the firing base frame 301 (on the opposite side of the portion corresponding to the lower side of the firing rail 164), and a slide member storage space is formed below the slide guide hole 305. 306 is formed. The slide guide hole 305 is provided with a guide locking piece 327 protruding from an upper rear end of a slide rod 326, which will be described later, and guides the slide movement of the slide rod 326. The member 350 is accommodated so as to be movable in the left-right direction. The slide guide of the front portion of the slide rod 326 is guided by a guide bush 330 fixed to a guide hole 329 formed in front of the slide rod 326 in a stop hole 312 formed in the firing base frame 301 by a set screw 331. This is done by penetrating through. Further, as shown in FIG. 52, a rectangular connection opening 314 is formed in the bottom surface of the slide storage space 306.

  Further, a hook portion is formed on the front portion of the upper side of the firing base frame 301 with respect to the main body of the firing base frame 301, and an operating piece opening 307 is formed in the hook portion above the bearing tube 302. ing. The operating piece opening 307 has an operating piece 308 that contacts the supply swinging piece 41 provided facing the hitting ball supply port 40 on the downstream side of the storage tray 30 of the door frame 5. The mounting portion 310 that protrudes from the rear upper part of the opening edge is swingably provided by a stop pin 309. The operating piece 308 is formed in a “te” shape, the rear end portion of the upper side thereof is pivotally supported by a stop pin 309, and the base plate rotates integrally with the ball striking rod 336 from the pivotal support portion to the arc portion below. 339 is in contact with the operating piece abutting portion 342 projecting from 339, the upper side portion swings the supply swing piece 41 in conjunction with the reciprocating motion of the hitting ball 336, and the supply swing piece 41 swings to hit the ball. Balls flowing out from the supply port 40 are supplied one by one to the launch position of the launch rail 614.

  Further, on the firing base frame 301, motor mounting bosses 311 for fixing a motor cover 343 incorporating a firing motor 344 are projected in a total of three locations, two at the rear lower part and one at the front upper part. In addition, a oscillating piece boss 313 into which a shaft hole 322 at the lower end of the oscillating piece 321 connected to the slide member 350 is slidably provided in the lower rear of the slide member storage space 306 is projected. Has been.

  In order to increase the rigidity of the hit ball launching device 300, the metal plate 315 is attached to the launch base frame 301 so as to be in close contact therewith. Therefore, the metal plate 315 has through holes 316, 317, 318a, 318b, 320 corresponding to the bearing tube 302, the lower rubber stopper member 303, the slide guide hole 305, the guide bush 330, and the swing piece boss 313, respectively. And a horizontally long elliptical through hole 319 through which the connecting convex portion 352 of the slide member 350 penetrates. In the metal plate 315 configured as described above, after the slide member 350 is stored in the slide member storage space 306, each of the through holes 316 to 320 passes through the corresponding members 302, 303, 305, 313, and 352, or It is fixed to the launch base frame 301 by being brought into close contact with the launch base frame 301 and screwed so as to match.

  The tip of the oscillating piece boss 313 of the firing base frame 301 to which the metal plate 315 is attached protrudes from the through hole 320, and the shaft hole 322 of the oscillating piece 321 is inserted into the head portion. The swing piece 321 is pivotally supported so as to be swingable about the lower end. As shown in FIG. 51, the swing piece 321 is formed in a vertically long bowl shape, the shaft hole 322 is formed at the lower end thereof, and the connecting convex portion 352 of the slide member 350 is inserted in the middle thereof. A connecting hole 323 having a shape is formed. The front surface above the connection hole 323 serves as a contact portion 324 that contacts one end (rear end) of the slide rod 326. Thus, the rocking piece 321 is inserted into the rocking piece boss 313 and the connecting hole 323 is inserted into the connecting projection 352 of the slide member 350 protruding from the through hole 319 to connect the pin 325 with washer. The rocking piece 321 is attached to the firing base frame 301 by being fixed to the convex portion 352. The attached swing piece 321 swings at the upper part around the lower end as the slide member 350 slides.

  In addition, a horizontally long bowl-shaped slide bar 326 is attached to the upper front surface of the metal plate 315 so as to be slidable in the left-right direction. In other words, an L-shaped guide locking piece 327 protruding from the rear upper part of the slide rod 326 is engaged with the through hole 318 a of the metal plate 315, and the guide elongated hole 329 formed in front of the slide rod 326 is inserted into the guide elongated hole 329. The guide bush 330 having the set screw 331 is passed through, and the set screw 331 is fixed to the set hole 312. The slide rod 326 is slidably mounted on the firing base frame 301 via the metal plate 315 by the guide locking piece 327 and the through hole 318a, and the guide long hole 329 and the guide bush 330. The slide rod 326 is formed with a contacted portion 328 that contacts the contact portion 324 of the swing piece 321 described above at one end (rear end), and one end of the biasing spring 333 at the other end (front end). A spring locking portion 332 for projecting the locking ring 334 is projected.

  A bearing cylinder 302 of the launch base frame 301 to which the metal plate 315 is attached protrudes from the through hole 316. The bearing cylinder 302 is fitted so that the bearing 338 of the hitting ball 336 does not fall off. The lower end portion of the hitting ball 336 is fixed to the shaft of the bearing 338 and at the same time, the base plate 339 is fixed. An operating piece abutting portion 342 that abuts against the operating piece 308 protrudes from the front back surface of the base plate 339. A spring locking portion 341 is provided in a projecting manner, and a motor contact projecting piece 340 that engages with and disengages from the motor cam 346 of the firing motor 344 is provided in a projecting manner on the rear front surface thereof. A synthetic resin tip 337 is fixed to the upper end of the hitting ball 336, and this tip 337 is formed by a firing position stopper 359 fixed by a lower end portion of the firing rail 164 and an upper portion thereof. It is approaching to rush into.

  On the other hand, the firing motor 344 housed in the motor cover 343 is attached to the motor mounting boss 311 of the firing base frame 301 described above. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 52 (B), the motor cover 343 has a cylindrical portion formed so as to accommodate the firing motor 344 therein, and is enlarged in front of the cylindrical portion to attach the motor. And an anti-rotation preventing cam 347 and a motor cam at the tip of the motor shaft 345 of the firing motor 344, which are integrally formed with an attachment portion in which an attachment fixing hole 348 for attachment to the boss 311 is formed. 346 is fixed. A large number of reverse teeth are formed on the outer periphery of the reverse rotation prevention cam 347. The reverse rotation prevention cam 347 engages with a stopper piece 349 (see FIG. 53) that is swingably fixed to the stopper piece mounting boss 349a. Prevents reverse rotation. This is to prevent the motor cam 346 from rotating in the reverse direction and causing the motor cam 346 and the motor contact protrusion 340 to mesh with each other to prevent a failure that prevents the ball striking device 300 from being driven. Further, the motor cam 346 is formed in a ball shape, and reciprocates the hitting ball rod 336 while being engaged with and disengaged from the motor contact protrusion 340 as the firing motor 344 rotates. When the motor cover 343 is attached to the motor attachment boss 313, as shown in FIG. 50A, the main configuration of the hitting ball launching apparatus 300 is covered as seen from the rear surface.

  Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 55, the slide member 350 housed in the slide member housing space 306 and slidably moving is formed in a rectangular parallelepiped shape with the rear open, and an elliptical oval convex portion 351 projects on the front surface thereof. Further, a circular connecting convex portion 352 is projected from the rear position of the elliptical convex portion 351. Further, on both the upper and lower surfaces, slide contact protrusions 353 having an arc cross section are provided at both ends so as to easily slide in the slide member storage space 306. On the other hand, the space of the slide member 350 formed in a rectangular parallelepiped shape is an insertion space 354 into which the slide projecting piece 102 of the joint unit 90 provided at the lower back of the door frame 5 is inserted. Thus, the insertion space 354 has a first inclined surface 355 formed on the front side of the side wall in the sliding direction, and protrudes inward from the inside of the upper surface and the lower surface slightly toward the rear of the first inclined surface 355. A clamping piece 356 that is provided and has a predetermined interval between the tips of each other is formed. A second inclined surface 357 is also formed on the front side of the sandwiching piece 356, which is inclined like a letter C when viewed laterally. Thus, in the state where the slide projecting piece 102 is inserted into the insertion space 354, as shown in FIG. 55B, one end side of the slide projecting piece 102 on the inclined side 103 side comes into contact with the side wall in the sliding direction. In this state, it is inserted between the upper and lower clamping pieces 356. In addition, although the space part 358 is formed in the side of the insertion space 354 of the slide member 350, this space part 358 does not have a function in particular.

  Thus, the slide member 350 configured as described above is in an elliptical shape formed on the bottom surface of the slide member storage space 306 as shown in FIG. 52 is formed so that the insertion space 354 faces the connection opening 314, and the slide member 350 is in contact with one inner wall of the slide member storage space 306 (in FIG. 52A, the left inner wall is abutted). Although they are shown in contact with each other in a normal state, they are in contact with the inner wall of the right space.

  First, the relationship of adjusting the strength of the urging spring 333 of the slide member 350 and the hitting ball launching apparatus 300 will be described. The slide member 350 has a right position at the initial position inside the slide member storage space 306 (FIG. 52A). 53, the swing piece 321 connected to the connecting projection 352 of the slide member 350 is in a substantially vertical state. For this reason, the slide rod 326 in contact with the swing piece 321 is also urged in one direction (left side in FIG. 53) by the biasing force of the bias spring 333 and the contact portion 324 of the swing piece 321. In this state, the contacted portion 328 of the slide rod 326 is in contact. In this state, since the urging spring 333 is not tensioned, even if the hitting ball 336 is reciprocatingly rotated following the rotation of the firing motor 344, the return force of the hitting ball 336 is weak, and the hit ball at the launch position is Even if issued, the game area 255 of the game board 4 is not reached.

  On the other hand, when the slide member 350 moves in the other direction from the initial position in the slide member storage space 306 (when moving toward the left inner wall in FIG. 52A), as shown in FIG. Since the swing piece 321 swings and tilts about the shaft hole 322 at the lower end, the slide rod 326 moves in the other direction (right side in FIG. 54) due to the contact between the contact portion 324 and the contacted portion 328. Slide towards you. Then, the urging spring 333 locked to the spring locking portion 332 of the slide rod 326 is also tensioned and extended. In this state, since the biasing spring 333 is tensioned, the returning force of the hitting ball 336 when the hitting ball 336 is reciprocatingly rotated following the rotation of the shooting motor 344 increases, and the hitting ball at the shooting position is The game is strongly ejected and reaches the game area 255 of the game board 4. The strength of the impact force of the hit ball can be adjusted according to the amount of slide in the slide member storage space 306 of the slide member 350.

  As described above, by moving the slide member 350, it is possible to adjust the elasticity of the hitting ball launching device 300. This is interlocked with the movement of the slide body 93 of the joint unit 90 that moves in accordance with the turning operation of the moving operation member 74. This point will be described with reference to FIGS. 27, 28, 32, and 33. FIG.

  As described above, when the rotation operation member 74 of the operation handle portion 71 of the handle device 70 is rotated, the slanted cam 76 fixed to the tip of the rotation shaft 75 is also rotated. 93 slides in the storage body 91 in one direction (leftward in FIG. 33). For this reason, the slide protrusion 102 protruding from the front surface of the slide body 93 also slides in the same direction. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the slide projecting piece 102 of the slide body 93 penetrates the connection opening 314 formed in the launcher mounting portion 169 of the main body frame 5 and inserts the slide member 350. It is inserted into the space 354. The insertion state in this case is a state in which one end side on the inclined side 103 side of the slide projecting piece 102 is in contact with the side wall in the sliding direction and is inserted between the upper and lower clamping pieces 356 as described above. (State shown in FIG. 33A). Accordingly, when the slide protrusion 102 slides in one direction, the slide member 350 also slides in the same direction. In the drawing, the state shown in FIG. 33A is changed to the state shown in FIG. At this time, as described above, the slide rod 326 also slides as the slide member 350 slides, so that the biasing force of the biasing spring 333 can be adjusted. That is, the resilience of the hit ball of the hitting ball launching device 300 can be adjusted by rotating the turning operation member 74 of the handle device 70.

  By the way, in this embodiment, since the handle device 70 is provided on the door frame 5 and the hit ball launching device 300 is provided on the main body frame 3, the slide protrusion 102 of the handle device 70 is opened each time the door frame 5 is opened and closed. And the slide member 350 of the hitting ball launching apparatus 300 are linked or separated. However, in the present embodiment, as described above, by closing the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3, the slide projecting piece 102 is automatically inserted into the insertion space 354 of the slide member 350 and the handle device 70. The hitting ball launching device 300 is linked, and conversely, by opening the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3, the slide projecting piece 102 is separated from the insertion space 354 and separates the handle device 70 and the hitting ball hitting device 300. Therefore, the handle device 70 and the hitting ball launching device 300 can be linked and separated very easily as the door frame 5 is opened and closed. In particular, when the slide projecting piece 102 is inserted into the insertion space 354, even if the position of the slide projecting piece 102 is slightly shifted in the vertical direction, the second inclination of the sandwiching piece 356 projecting in the insertion space 354 is provided. The slide protrusion 102 is smoothly inserted into the holding position by the surface 357.

  In some cases, a player may stuff the padding operation member 74 of the operation handle 71 with a padding and fix it at a position rotated to some extent. 5 may be opened and closed. Even in such a case, when the door frame 5 is opened, there is no problem because the slide projecting piece 102 is merely separated from the insertion space 354. However, when the door frame 5 is closed, FIG. As shown, although the position of the slide protrusion 102 is slightly shifted in one direction (a state shifted to the left in FIG. 33), the inclined side 103 of the slide protrusion 102 and the first inclination of the slide member 350 are shown. Due to the cooperative action with the surface 355, the slide projecting piece 102 and the slide member 350 are finally engaged while the slide member 350 is moved in one direction in accordance with the closing operation of the door frame 5. That is, in the present embodiment, the operation handle device 70 and the hitting ball launching device 300 can be linked regardless of the rotation position of the rotation operation member 74 of the operation handle portion 71. It is.

[1-6. Prize ball tank]
Next, the prize ball tank 400 attached to the upper back of the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 56 is a perspective view (A), a plan view (B), and a side view (C) of the prize ball tank 400. FIG. As described above, the prize ball tank 400 is detachably attached to the tank attachment groove 200 (see FIG. 37) formed in the upper part of the back surface of the main body frame 3. Thus, the prize ball tank 400 is formed in a rectangular box shape, and when viewed from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, a notch 401 is formed in the front wall 400a, and the bottom surface is inclined from one to the other. It is formed by a first inclined bottom surface 402 and a second inclined bottom surface 403 inclined toward a discharge port 404 described below. In addition, a discharge port 404 is formed at the lower inclined end of the second inclined bottom surface 403, and this discharge port 404 protrudes outward from the rear wall 400b of the prize ball tank 400 when viewed from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. It is formed to do. In addition, on both outer sides of the front wall 400 a of the prize ball tank 400, attachment flanges 407 that engage with the tank attachment groove 200 are formed, and the main body frame 3 is arranged on the back side of the bottom surface of the prize ball tank 400. Placement contact pieces 405 and 406 that place and contact the fourth side wall 193 project, and a ball leveling member 413 (described later) is attached to the lower portion of the rear surface wall 400b on the upstream side of the prize ball tank 400. The ball leveling mounting shaft 409 is projected. Further, an overflow preventing member 408 for preventing the ball from jumping is detachably attached to the rear wall 400b and the upstream side wall of the prize ball tank 400 excluding the discharge port 404.

  In the prize ball tank 400 configured as described above, the mounting flange 407 is attached to the tank mounting groove 200 of the main body frame 3 so as to be inserted from above, and the mounting contact pieces 405 and 406 are attached to the main body frame 3. It abuts on the fourth side wall 194. As a result, the prize ball tank 400 is placed and attached to the upper part on the back side of the main body frame 3. In this attached state, as shown in FIG. 41, the notch 401 and the main body frame 3 of the front wall 400a. A relief recess 201 formed on the back surface of the tank rail communicates with each other, and as shown in FIG. 5, the discharge port 404 faces an upstream end portion of a tank rail member 410 to be described next. Therefore, in the prize ball tank 400, the width in the front-rear direction of the storage portion that stores the sphere (the storage space portion corresponding to the first inclined bottom surface 402 and the second inclined bottom surface 403) is the second side wall 191-1 of the main body frame 3. It forms so that it may become substantially the same as the width | variety of the front-back direction to the 4th side wall 193, and is mounted in the upper part to those side walls 191-193. As described above, the first side wall 190 to the fourth side wall 193 of the main body frame 3 are deeply formed so as to cover the rearward projecting space of the peripheral part of the game board 4, and therefore the side wall 191. Although the depth of the storage portion of the prize ball tank 400 placed on the upper part of ˜193 is shallower than that of the conventional storage tank, even if the prize ball is stored and the weight increases, the prize ball tank Since the entire 400 is supported by the side walls 192 to 193 of the main body frame 3, the stored spheres can be smoothly guided to the discharge port 404 without deformation of the inclined bottom surfaces 402 and 403. Further, since the discharge port 404 is provided at a position outside the rear wall 400b of the prize ball tank 400, the flow of the sphere stored in the storage portion flows outward from the second inclined bottom surface 403. It is configured. For this reason, as compared with a prize ball tank that has been provided with an opening at a part of the inclined bottom surface as a discharge port as in the prior art, a spherical break-up portion for eliminating ball clogging is not formed in the storage portion near the discharge port. A structure in which ball clogging hardly occurs can be obtained.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the award ball tank 400 storage portion is placed on the upper outer side of the rear side walls 191 to 193 that house the rearward protruding portion of the gaming apparatus, and the award Since the discharge port 404 of the ball tank 400 is provided so as to protrude outward from the rear wall 400b of the storage unit, the tank rail member 410 is located outside the storage unit of the prize ball tank 400 (as viewed from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1). Since the tank rail member 410 and the storage portion of the prize ball tank 400 do not overlap in the vertical direction, the rear protruding portion of the gaming device provided on the back surface of the gaming board 4 is stored. The upper side of the rear side walls 191 to 193 can be protruded rearward at a position close to the upper side of the main body frame 3, so that even if the rearward protruding portion of the gaming device protrudes at the upper side of the game board 4. It can be comfortably accommodated in the interior of the side walls 191-193.

  Further, regardless of whether the storage part of the prize ball tank 400 is placed on the upper outside of the rear side walls 191 to 193 that house the rearward protruding part of the gaming apparatus, the discharge port 404 is located behind the prize ball tank 400. Only the configuration of being provided outside the face wall 400b provides a unique effect not found in conventional prize ball tanks. This will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 57 is a plan view showing the pressure state of the spheres at the discharge port portions of the conventional prize ball tanks (A) and (B) and the prize ball tank (C) according to the present embodiment. In the figure, normally, the balls stored in the prize ball tank 400 are stored and retained in the storage part of the prize ball tank 400. In this case, when a discharge port 404A is formed by opening a part of the inclined bottom surface of the storage unit as in a conventional prize ball tank, for example, as shown in FIG. A prize ball tank in which a discharge port 404A is formed on the opposite side, or, as shown in FIG. 57 (B), when the discharge port 404A is formed adjacent to the ball breaker 400B, a portion of the discharge port 404A In this case, the pressure of the stored sphere and the reaction from the side wall of the prize ball tank based on the pressure are always applied to the discharge port 404A from four directions. For this reason, the pressure between the spheres happens to be balanced due to the degree of sphere polymerization, and even when the sphere on the downstream side flows out, a sphere-engaged state may occur at the discharge port 404A, and sphere clogging may occur. On the other hand, in the prize ball tank 400 according to the present embodiment, the discharge port 404 is provided at a position outside the rear wall 400b of the prize ball tank 400, so as shown in FIG. The pressure of the stored sphere at the discharge port 404 is a pressure from only two directions, that is, only the acting force from the storage portion toward the discharge port 404 and its reaction, and does not receive pressure from four directions as in the conventional case. For this reason, even if the sphere on the downstream side flows out, it is difficult to generate a sphere-engaged state in the discharge port 404 portion, and an excellent effect that sphere clogging does not occur can be achieved.

[1-7. Tank rail member]
The tank rail member 410 disposed below the prize ball tank 400 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 58 is a perspective view of the relationship between the prize ball tank 400, the tank rail member 410, the ball passage unit 420, the prize ball unit 450, and the full tank unit 520 as seen from the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. 60 is a perspective view of the relationship between the prize ball tank 400, the tank rail member 410, the ball passage unit 420, the prize ball unit 450, and the full tank unit 520 as seen from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and FIG. FIG. 6 is a cross-sectional view (A) and a plan view (B) showing the relationship between the downstream portion of the tank rail member 410 and the upstream portion of the ball passage unit 420.

  As described above, the tank rail member 410 is detachably attached to the rail locking grooves 203 and 204 (see FIG. 35) of the upper rear wall 195 of the main body frame 3. Therefore, the tank rail member 410 is provided with a plurality of locking projections 418 that are inserted from above into the rail locking groove 203 on the left and right sides and the lower side of the side surface on the rear surface side, and the upper side of the rear surface side surface. At the center, a hook-shaped locking protrusion 419 is provided so as to be hooked on the rail locking groove 204 from above. Thus, the tank rail member 410 is formed in a slanted bowl shape with an open upper surface, the upper surface of the upstream end faces the discharge port 404 of the prize ball tank 400, and the lower surface of the downstream end of the tank rail member 410 forms a ball passage unit 420 described in detail later. I'm here. Further, the inside of the tank rail member 410 is a passage 412 in which balls are arranged and flow down in two rows by a partition wall 411 as shown in FIG. The bottom surface of the passage 412 is notched with a narrow groove, and foreign substances that roll along the passage 412 together with the sphere fall downward from the narrow groove. Further, a metal plate (not shown) for removing static electricity is affixed to the side wall of the passage 412, and the downstream end of the metal plate is connected to the above-described ground wire connector 207 (see FIG. 35). Yes. For this reason, the static electricity charged in the sphere flowing down the tank rail member 410 is grounded to the outside from the metal plate via the ground connector 207 via the ground connector 690 (see FIG. 96) of the power supply board 686 described later. It is like that.

  Further, an egg-shaped ball leveling member 413 having a weight on the middle downstream side of the tank rail member 410 is provided so as to be swingable. The ball leveling member 413 is pivotally supported by the ball leveling mounting shaft 409 of the award ball tank 400 described above, and moves into the respective passages 412 of the two rows of the tank rail members 410. The spheres that hang down and flow down the passages 412 flow in a plurality of stages in the vertical direction so as to be rectified so as to become one stage. Further, the upper surface of the tank rail member 410 on the downstream side from the installation position of the ball leveling member 413 is covered with a ball pressing plate 414. The ball holding plate 414 is formed in an inclined arc shape so that the ball that has not been made one step by the ball leveling member 413 is forced to one step. Further, a pair of alignment gears 416 are rotatably supported by shaft pins 417 at the downstream end of the tank rail member 410 so as to face the respective passages 412. The alignment gear 416 has a plurality of teeth formed on the outer periphery, and is fixed to the shaft pin 417 so that the pitch of the teeth of the pair of alignment gears 416 is shifted by a half pitch. For this reason, when the upper part of the sphere that has flowed down each passage 412 of the tank rail member 410 flows downstream while meshing with the teeth of the alignment gear 416, the spheres in the two rows of passages 412 are alternately sent one by one. become. In this case, as shown in FIG. 60, the spheres flowing through the respective passages 412 are guided in the central direction along the inclined surfaces 412a formed in the lower portions of the two rows of passages 412 while meshing with the alignment gears 416. During the guidance, the spheres from the two rows of the passages 412 fall alternately in a line at the upper end inlet 422d of the sphere dropping passage 422 of the sphere passage unit 420 described below. The alignment gear 416 is covered with an arcuate gear cover 415 on its upper surface.

[1-8. Ball passage unit]
The ball passage unit 420 for guiding the balls dropped in a line from the tank rail member 410 to the winning ball unit 450 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 61 is an exploded perspective view showing the relationship between the main body frame 3 and the ball passage unit 420 and the prize ball unit 450, and FIG. 62 is a rear view showing the relationship between the ball passage unit 420 and the prize ball unit 450. 63 is a perspective view seen from the back of the ball passage unit 420, FIG. 64 is a front view of the ball passage unit 420, and FIG. 65 is a connection structure of the ball passage unit 420 and the prize ball unit 450. It is a side view for demonstrating. In FIG. 62 and FIG. 63, the prize ball unit 450 is a ball path portion formed in the unit base body 451 with the gear cover 510, the aluminum heat radiating plate 491, and the unit sub plate 475 removed. is there. However, the gears and the like are indicated by alternate long and short dash lines in order to facilitate understanding of the relationship with the ball passage.

  In the spherical passage unit 420, a spherical drop passage 422 is formed by a pair of bent passage walls 421 that are bent on the back surface of a substantially rectangular plate material (the surface that can be seen from the back surface is called the front surface). As shown in FIG. 60A, the ball drop passage 422 communicates with the front / rear bent passage portion 422a whose upstream portion is bent in the front / rear direction (depth direction when viewed from the back), and the front / rear bent passage portion 422a. It is composed of a left and right bent passage portion 422b that is bent in the left and right direction (left and right direction when viewed from the back) and a vertical passage portion 422c that communicates with the left and right bent passage portion 422a and is substantially vertical. As shown in FIG. 60A, the front / rear bent passage portion 422a is located at the center of the two rows of passages 412 as described above because the position of the upper end inlet 422d falling from the tank rail member 410 is the main body frame. 3 is located away from the surface of the upper rear wall 195 and the right rear wall 196 on the back side, and the ball is formed by the front and rear bent passage portion 422a and the prize ball guiding projection 211 projecting from the right rear wall 196. The falling passage 422 is bent in the front-rear direction so as to be positioned close to the surface of the right rear wall 196. Further, as shown in FIG. 64, the left and right bent passage portion 422b is formed in a U shape so as to be almost full in the width of the ball passage unit 420 in order to weaken the momentum of the sphere that has fallen from the tank rail member 410 to the front and rear bent passage portion 422a. It is formed by bending. Further, although the vertical passage portion 422c is formed in a substantially vertical shape, the vertical passage portion 422c is slightly curved and formed, and a notch portion 423 is formed in one bent passage wall 421 constituting the vertical passage portion 422c. A ball breakage detecting piece 424 whose upper end is supported by a support shaft 425 is attached to 423 so as to be swingable. A ball break switch 426 is attached to the side of the ball break detection piece 424, and an actuator 427 of the ball break switch 426 is in contact with the ball break detection piece 424.

  Thus, when a ball is present in the vertical passage portion 422c, the ball breakage detection piece 424 is pressed by the ball present in the vertical passage portion 422c and the actuator 427 is pressed to turn on the ball breakage switch 426. If the ball ceases to exist in the portion 422c due to clogging or lack of the ball, the ball breakage detecting piece 424 swings into the vertical passage portion 422c, so that the actuator 427 turns off the ball breakage switch 426. When the ball cut switch 426 is turned OFF, the payout motor 465 of the prize ball unit 450, which will be described later, stops rotating and the payout of prize balls is stopped. A stopper protrusion 428 is formed at the lower end of the notch 423 to prevent excessive swinging of the ball breakage detecting piece 424 to the opposite side of the passage, and the ball of the ball passage unit 420 is A ball clogging insertion groove 429 is formed in the vertical passage portion 422c corresponding to the cut detection piece 424. The ball clogging insertion groove 429 is inserted into a pin from the rear side of the ball path unit 420 when the ball breakage detecting piece 424 is difficult to swing due to ball clogging or the like. This is provided to eliminate the problem. Further, the other bent passage wall 421 that faces the broken piece detection piece 424 is formed in a slightly bulging shape toward the broken piece detection piece 424 side. This is because when a ball is present in the vertical passage portion 422c, the ball break detection piece 424 is surely pressed and the ball break switch 426 is turned on.

  Further, a stop hole 430 and a positioning boss 431 are formed in the ball path unit 420 at a position avoiding the above-described ball drop path 422. The positioning boss 431 is engaged with a positioning pin 226 formed on the right rear wall 196 of the main body frame 3, and the stop hole 430 corresponds to the passage unit mounting boss 212 also formed on the right rear wall 196. Is. Thus, to attach the ball passage unit 420 to the main body frame 3, as shown in FIG. 61, the passage unit attachment boss 212 and the stop hole 430 are made to coincide with each other while the positioning boss 431 is engaged with the positioning pin 226. In this state, the screw 432 can be screwed from the stop hole 430. Further, the ball passage unit 420 is formed with a cover body engaging groove 433 that engages with an engagement piece 752 (see FIG. 3) of the cover body 750 in the middle of one side thereof, and a prize ball unit at the lower part. A connecting lid member 434 for connecting to 450 is rotatably provided.

  As shown in FIG. 63, the connecting lid member 434 is configured by projecting a pair of passage walls 438 projecting in an arc shape on the back surface of a rectangular plate member, and the lower surface of the ball passage unit 420 The projecting shaft 437 serving as the rotating shaft projecting from the tip of the support piece 436 extending from the both ends of the connecting lid member 434 is fitted into the supporting projecting piece 435 serving as the shaft support projecting from both the left and right ends. Thus, it is pivotally supported. In addition, the connecting lid member 434 is extended below the spherical passage unit 420 when closed, and the passage formed by the passage wall 438 communicates with the downstream end of the spherical drop passage 422 (see FIG. 65B). The state shown in FIG. 65 and the state where the passage formed by the passage wall 438 and the downstream end of the ball drop passage 422 do not communicate with each other (the state shown in FIG. 65A). A guide projection 439 that guides the support piece 436 of the connecting lid member 434 when projecting from the opened state to the closed state is provided at the lower end of the rear surface of the ball path unit 420.

  Thus, the ball path unit 420 is fixed to the right rear wall 196 of the main body frame 3, and the award ball unit 450 is also mounted on the right rear wall 196 as shown later (shown in FIG. 65A). In the state), the connecting lid member 434 is closed and the rear surface thereof is locked by the locking elastic claw 470 provided in the prize ball unit 450, so that the ball drop path 422 of the ball path unit 420 and the bent path of the prize ball unit 450 are 453 is communicated with the passage wall 438 so that the sphere falling in the ball dropping passage 422 of the ball passage unit 420 can be guided to the bending passage 453 of the prize ball unit 450. The reason why the rotatable connecting lid member 434 is provided in the ball passage unit 420 is that the prize ball unit 420 can be easily attached to and detached from the main body frame 3 as will be described later, and the attachment and detachment thereof is possible. This is to prevent the space formed between the ball path unit 420 and the prize ball unit 450 from being attached to the ball from hindering a smooth drop of the ball.

[1-9. Prize ball unit]
Next, the prize ball unit 450 arranged on the downstream side of the above-described ball passage unit 420 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 66 to 69. FIG. 66 is an exploded perspective view as seen from the back side of the prize ball unit 450, FIG. 67 is a rear view for explaining the relationship between the payout motor 465 and the sprocket 457 as the payout member, and FIG. FIG. 69 is a rear view for explaining the path and driving relationship of the prize ball unit 450, and FIG. 69 is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA of FIG.

  In FIG. 66, a prize ball unit 450 as a prize ball payout mechanism is a unit base body 451 in which a bent passage 453, a prize ball passage 460, and a ball removal passage 461 are formed by a pair of bent passage walls 452. A unit sub-plate 475 covering the rear surface of the unit base body 451, a prize ball in-unit relay terminal plate 480 attached to the upper surface (rear surface side) of the unit sub-plate 475, and substantially the center of the unit sub-plate 475 A gear group 493, 494, 497 provided in the surface area (rear side area) and a gear cover 510 that covers the detection disk 500 (rotation transmission member) are configured. Hereinafter, these configurations will be sequentially described.

  The unit base body 451 is formed in a substantially rectangular plate shape (this plate portion may be referred to as “bottom surface”), and a pair of bent passages projecting toward the plate-like unit sub plate 475 side. A bent passage 453 is formed by the wall 452. The bent passage wall 452 protrudes from the upper center of the unit base body 451 to approximately the middle of the downstream side at a distance slightly larger than the diameter of the sphere. It also serves as side walls on both sides of the unit base body 451 from the downstream end to the downstream end. In addition, the middle bent passage wall 452 is largely divided into left and right portions to form a distribution space 455 in which a sprocket 457 serving as a ball feed rotating body is arranged. A passage partition wall 459 is formed in a projecting manner so as to form a pair of the bent passage walls 452 divided to the left and right until the downstream end. That is, the left and right bent passage walls 452 and the passage partition wall 459 on the downstream side from the middle form two passages on the left and right from the distribution space 455, and one passage constitutes the prize ball passage 460, The other passage forms a ball passage 461. The passage partition wall 459 is also largely divided into left and right, and a motor storage space 464 for storing the payout motor 465 is formed inside the divided passage partition wall 459. That is, the payout motor 465 is housed and fixed in a motor housing space 464 that is located at a position avoiding the ball passage (bending passage 453, prize ball passage 460, ball removal passage 461) and within the depth width dimension of the ball passage. Is done. The bent passage 453 is formed in a meandering shape so as to weaken the pressure applied to the sprocket 457 of a sphere remaining in the passage 453, and reaches the distribution space 455, but the upstream side of the distribution space 455 An elliptical opening 454 is formed on the bottom surface of the substrate. The opening 454 stores small dust or the like that has entered the bent passage 453, and can collect dust or the like that is collected when the prize ball unit 450 is removed from the main body frame 3.

  Further, in the distribution space 455, a sprocket 457 serving as a payout member having a plurality of (three in the illustrated example) recesses in which a sphere fits on the outer periphery is rotatably disposed. A bearing cylinder 456 that pivotally supports the other end of the rotating shaft 458 to which the 457 is fixed is formed on the bottom surface of the distribution space 455. Further, the upper end portion of the passage partition wall 459 constituting the bottom portion of the distribution space 455 is formed in a concave arc shape along the rotation arc of the sprocket 457, and on the upstream portion of the prize ball passage 460 formed on one side thereof The counting switch 462 is detachably attached. The counting switch 462 is composed of a rectangular parallelepiped magnetic sensor in which a circular passage hole through which a sphere passes is formed at the front end portion, and by forming an attachment portion that matches the shape of the rear end portion with the bent passage wall 452, It can be easily attached and detached. A wiring (not shown) from the counting switch 462 is connected to a prize ball unit relay terminal plate 480 described later. Further, on the downstream side of the bent passage wall 452 constituting the prize ball passage 460, a locking claw that engages with a locking portion 509 a formed on the passage lid plate portion 509 formed integrally with the unit sub plate 475. A plurality of 463 are formed. However, among the plurality of locking claws 463, the locking claw 463 that engages with one locking portion 509a at the lower end of the passage lid plate portion 509 is formed on the passage partition wall 459 side.

  A circular motor storage space 464 for storing the payout motor 465 is formed below the unit base body 451 and between the prize ball passage 460 and the ball removal passage 461. This motor storage space 464 The cylindrical main body of the payout motor 465 is accommodated in the interior of the. However, the payout motor 465 is fixed to the back side of the aluminum heat dissipating plate 491 attached below the unit sub plate 475 by a pair of mounting pieces 466 formed on the front surface thereof with screws 467. In a state where the payout motor 465 is attached to the aluminum heat radiating plate 491 of the unit sub-plate 475, the motor shaft 468 of the payout motor 465 passes through the shaft insertion hole 492 drilled in the aluminum heat radiating plate 491 and enters the first. The gear 493 is fixed. Further, a space in the depth width direction in which the bent passage 453, the prize ball passage 479, and the ball removal passage 461 are formed by covering the rear surface side of the unit base body 451 with the unit sub plate 475 and the aluminum heat radiating plate 491. The cylindrical main body portion of the dispensing motor 465 is also accommodated in the inside. Since the motor storage space 464 for storing the payout motor 465 and the distribution space 455 in which the sprocket 457 is disposed are formed in a very close positional relationship in the vertical direction, the vertical direction of the unit base body 451 is The length can be shortened, and as a result, the prize ball unit 450 can be made compact.

  Further, the unit base body 451 is provided with a guide protrusion 469 that guides the ball extracted at the lowermost end of the above-described ball extraction passage 461 to the back surface side of the prize ball unit 450, and the guide protrusion 469 has a protrusion. The guided ball is guided to a ball outlet connection passage 515 described later, and finally discharged to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (a collection basket provided below the island platform). A locking elastic claw 470 that locks the connecting lid member 434 of the ball passage unit 420 described above projects from the upper portion of the unit base body 451, and the prize ball unit 450 is attached to the right rear wall of the main body frame 3. A button insertion engagement hole 471 and a hook-shaped engagement portion 474 for detachably attaching to the 196, and an attachment boss 473 for connecting the gear cover 510 with the unit base body 451 and the unit sub plate 475 being sandwiched are provided. It has been. The button insertion engagement hole 471 is provided on one side of the upper portion of the unit base body 451 and is attached with a rod-like detachable button 472 so as to be slidable in the depth width direction. This corresponds to the lock elastic claw 214 formed on the right rear wall 196 of the main body frame 3. Further, as shown in FIG. 61, the rear end surface of the button insertion engagement hole 471 has a concave shape so that the front end portion of the lock elastic claw 214 enters. The hook-shaped engaging portion 474 engages with an engaging protrusion 215 formed on the right rear surface wall 196 of the main body frame 3, and presses the prize ball unit 450 against the right rear surface wall 196 to push downward. By lowering, the hook-like engagement portion 474 and the engagement protrusion 215 are engaged. In this engaged state, the lock elastic claw 214 and the button insertion engagement hole 471 engage with each other, so that the upward movement of the prize ball unit 450 is not allowed. Note that the hook-shaped engaging portions 474 are formed on the upper left and right of the unit base body 451. In addition, a mounting boss 473 for connecting the unit base body 451 and the gear cover 510 with the unit sub plate 475 sandwiched therebetween is long and protrudes toward the rear surface side, and is a through hole formed in the unit sub plate 475. After passing through 508, the unit base body 451 and the gear cover 510 are connected with the unit sub-plate 475 being sandwiched by fitting the screw 512 from the surface of the gear cover 510 to correspond to the mounting hole 511 of the gear cover 510. is doing.

  The configuration of the unit sub plate 475 that covers the unit base body 451 will be described. The unit sub plate 475 covers the bent passage 453 portion, the distribution space 455 portion, and the prize ball passage 460 portion of the unit base body 451. A payout motor 465 is attached to a resin plate, and an aluminum heat radiating plate 491 that covers the downstream portion of the ball extraction passage 461 is attached. On the front side (rear side) of the synthetic resin plate portion of the unit sub-plate 475, a relay board region 476 for attaching the prize ball unit relay terminal plate 480 is formed at an upper portion, and a plurality of gears 493 are provided below the relay substrate region 476. A gear region 490 to which 494 and 497 and the detection disk 500 are attached is formed. The relay board region 476 is formed in a substantially square shape, and mounting ribs 477 for placing the prize ball unit relay terminal plate 480 project along the square shape, and will be described below above and below the one side vertical side. An engagement groove portion 478 that engages with the engagement protrusion 486 of the substrate cover 485 is formed, and a locking claw portion 479 that engages with the locking projection 487 of the base cover 485 is formed at the center of the other side vertical side. . In addition, a mounting boss portion 482 for fixing the button insertion hole 484 through which the attachment / detachment button 472 is inserted and the prize ball unit relay terminal plate 480 with screws (not shown) is formed in the relay board region 476. .

  The above-mentioned prize ball unit relay terminal plate 480 attached to the relay board region 476 includes the count switch connector 480a for relaying the wiring from the count switch 462 and the payout motor connector for relaying the wiring from the payout motor 465. 480b, a rotation angle switch connector 480c that relays wiring from a rotation angle switch 505, which will be described later, a ball break switch connector 480d that relays wiring from the ball break switch 426, and a grounding connector 480e of the payout motor 465, which will be described later. A payout control board connector 480f that relays wiring (harness) from the payout control board 715 (see FIG. 96) is provided, and corresponds to the button insertion hole 483 through which the detachable button 472 is inserted and the mounting boss portion 482. A mounting hole 481 is formed. Thus, the award ball unit relay terminal plate 480 is placed on the placement rib 477 of the relay board region 476, and the attachment hole 481 and the attachment boss portion 482 are matched to each other and fixed with screws (not shown). The in-sphere relay terminal plate 480 can be fixed to the surface (rear surface) of the unit sub-plate 475.

  Further, the prize ball unit relay terminal plate 480 attached as described above is covered with the substrate cover 485. The substrate cover 485 is formed in a box shape having a substantially square front side open, and an engagement projection 486 is formed on the upper and lower bases of one vertical side and a locking projection 487 is formed on the substantially central side of the other vertical side. ing. A button opening 488 and a connection opening 489 are formed on the square vertical surface of the substrate cover 485. Thus, after the engagement protrusion 486 of the substrate cover 485 is inserted into the engagement groove portion 478 of the relay substrate region 476 and engaged, the engagement protrusion 487 and the engagement claw portion 479 are engaged with each other. The baseball unit relay terminal plate 480 can be covered with the substrate cover 485. On the other hand, when removing, the latching claw portion 479 is elastically deformed to release the engagement with the latching projection 487 and the substrate cover 485 is pulled obliquely forward to engage the engagement projection 486 and the engagement groove 478. The engagement with can be released. When the substrate cover 485 is covered, the head of the detachable button 472 engaged with the button insertion engagement hole 471 passes through the button insertion holes 483 and 484 and slightly faces the outside from the button opening 488. Yes. Further, the wiring connected to the relay terminal plate 480 in the prize ball unit is drawn out from the connection opening 489 to the outside.

  Next, the gears 493, 494, 497 and the detection disk 500 provided in the gear region 490 formed on the unit sub plate 475 will be described. As described above, the tip of the motor shaft 468 of the dispensing motor 465 passes through the shaft insertion hole 492 formed in the aluminum heat radiating plate 491 of the unit sub plate 475 and projects to the surface (rear side) of the unit sub plate 475. The first gear 493 (drive gear, number of teeth Z1 = 30) is fixed to the protruding portion. Above the first gear 493, a second gear 494 (rotation transmission gear, number of teeth Z2 = 30) meshing with the first gear 493 is press-fitted into the back surface (front side) of the gear cover 510 and an aluminum heat sink A shaft 495 that is supported at the other end by a shaft hole 496 formed in the shaft 491 is rotatably provided. Above the second gear 494, a third gear 497 (rotational transmission) that meshes with the second gear 494 is provided. A gear and the number of teeth Z3 = 20) are rotatably provided on a shaft 498 press-fitted into a shaft hole 499 formed in the unit sub-plate 475. Further, above the third gear 497, a detection disk 500 having a gear portion 502 (driven gear, number of teeth Z4 = 34) meshing with the third gear 497 rotates on a rotating shaft 458 that supports the sprocket 457. It is provided freely. 69, the tip of the motor shaft 468 is loosely fitted in a receiving hole formed in the gear cover 510. The rotating shaft 458 is supported by being pressed into a bearing cylinder 456 formed on the unit base body 451 and supported by a bearing hole formed on the gear cover 510 at the other end. The sprocket 457 is rotatably supported in the distribution space 455 through a shaft through hole 514 formed slightly below the center of the 490, and the detection disk 500 is formed in the space formed by the unit sub-plate 475 and the gear cover 510. Is pivotally supported. However, as shown in FIG. 69, since the rear end portion of the sprocket 457 is engaged with the center front surface portion of the detection disk 500, the sprocket 457 and the detection disk 500 are integrated around the rotation shaft 458. It is designed to rotate. Therefore, when the payout motor 465 is driven to rotate, the rotation is transmitted to rotate the sprocket 457 via the first gear 493, the second gear 494, the third gear 497, and the gear portion 502 of the detection disk 500.

  Here, the rotation speed of the sprocket 457 is obtained by reducing the rotation speed of the payout motor 465 by the first gear 493, the second gear 494, the third gear 497, and the gear portion 502 of the detection disk 500. This reduction ratio n is set to the number of teeth Z1 (= 30) of the first gear 497 / the number of teeth Z4 (= 34) of the gear portion 502 of the detection disk 500 by calculation based on the mechanism. In this embodiment, the payout motor 465 is a four-phase stepping motor that rotates once in 48 steps. Therefore, in order for the sprocket 456 to rotate once, the payout motor 465 rotates approximately 54 steps. In this case, the dispensing motor 456 rotates 7.5 degrees (= 360 degrees / 48 steps) in one step, and the sprocket 456 is approximately 6.6 degrees (7.5 degrees × reduction ratio n) in one step of the dispensing motor 456. It will rotate.

  The first gear 493, the second gear 494, the third gear 497, and the gear portion 502 of the detection disk 500 have play (backlash). Specifically, (1) backlash between the first gear 493 and the second gear 494, (2) backlash between the second gear 494 and the third gear 497, and (3) detection with the third gear 497. There is a backlash with the gear portion 502 of the disk 500. The size of each backlash of (1) to (3) is 1.75 degrees, and the total backlash of (1) to (3) is 5.25 degrees (1.75 degrees × 3). Therefore, the rotation angle of the sprocket 457 due to the total backlash is 5.25 degrees, and the sprocket 457 is stopped at a fixed position (in this embodiment, the position of the sprocket 457 shown in FIG. 67 is the fixed position). However, it rotates in the clockwise or counterclockwise direction in FIG.

  Thus, the rotation angle (5.25 degrees) of the sprocket 457 due to the total backlash is close to the rotation angle (about 6.6 degrees) of the sprocket 457 due to one-step rotation of the payout motor 456. For this reason, the sprocket 457 fixed position determination is performed in consideration of the rotation angle (5.25 degrees) of the sprocket 457 due to total backlash, as will be described in detail later.

  The outer periphery of the detection disk 500 is formed to be slightly larger than the circle of the gear portion 502, and the outer peripheral portion protruding outward from the gear portion 502 has the same number as the recesses of the sprocket 457 (in the illustrated case). 3) detection notches 501 are formed. This detection notch 501 is detected by a light projection / reception type rotation angle switch 505 (rotation position detection means) provided on a sensor substrate 504 sandwiched and supported by a substrate mounting portion 507 formed on the surface of the unit sub-plate 475. (The detection signal of the rotation angle switch 505 is transmitted to the prize ball unit terminal plate 480 via the wiring connecting the connector 506 and the rotation angle switch connector 480b). The rotation angle switch 505 is for monitoring whether or not the sprocket 457 is rotating normally by detecting the number of detection notches 501 within a predetermined time during the payout operation. If abnormal rotation is detected by the rotation angle switch 505 (in many cases, the ball is engaged by the sprocket 457), the sprocket 457 is rotated forward and backward a predetermined number of times to eliminate the abnormal state (for example, the ball engagement state). To do. Note that the number of balls actually paid out is detected by the counting switch 462 provided in the prize ball passage 460 and used for counting. As shown in FIG. 69, the other end of the sensor substrate 504 is also sandwiched by a substrate attachment portion 507 formed on the gear cover 510.

  Here, as described above, the detection notches 501 are three in the same number as the recesses of the sprocket 457, and are formed on the outer circumference of the detection disk 500 equally (every 120 degrees). The payout motor 465 rotates the sprocket 457 via the first gear 493, the second gear 494, the third gear 497, and the gear portion 502 of the detection disk 500. Since the sprocket 457 rotates once by the delivery motor 465 rotating about 54 steps, the rotation between the detection notches 501 (120 degrees) of the detection disk 500 (sprocket 457) is 18 steps (= about 54) of the delivery motor 465. Step / 3) rotation.

  As described above, of the plurality of gears provided in the gear region 490, only the second gear 494 is rotatably provided on the rotary shaft 495 that is press-fitted to the gear cover 510 side. As a result, the gear cover 510 that covers the gear region 490 is provided. A mounting hole 511 is formed at a position corresponding to the tip of the mounting boss 473 that protrudes from the unit base body 451 and passes through the through hole 508 of the unit sub-plate 475. The mounting hole 511 and the mounting boss 473 are aligned with each other while meshing the teeth of the second gear 494 provided on the gear cover 510 side with the teeth of the first gear 493 and the third gear 497 provided on the unit sub-plate 475 side. In this state, the base unit body 451 and the gear cover 510 are integrally fixed in a state where the unit sub plate 475 is sandwiched by screwing with the screw 512 from the rear surface of the gear cover 510. Further, on one side surface of the gear cover 510, wiring connected to the prize ball unit relay terminal plate 480 (for example, wiring connecting the prize ball unit relay terminal plate 480 and a payout control board 715 described later). A wiring processing piece 513 is provided so as to be hooked and gathered.

  The configuration of the prize ball unit 450 has been described above. In the state where the unit base body 451, the unit sub board 475, the prize ball unit relay terminal board 480, the board cover 485, and the gear cover 510 are assembled, FIG. As shown, the cylindrical main body portion of the payout motor 465 is positioned below the bent passage 453 through which the ball to be paid out is guided. Further, the unit base body 451 includes a sprocket 457 disposed in a ball passage (bending passage 453, prize ball passage 460, ball removal passage 461) and a depth width dimension of the ball passage at a position avoiding the ball passage. A payout motor 465 housed in a motor housing space 464 formed therein, and the rotation of the sprocket 457 rotates the motor shaft 468 of the payout motor 465 along the non-blocking surface side of the unit sub plate 475. Rotation transmitting members (first gear 493, second and third gears 494, 497, and gear portion 502 of detection disk 500) that transmit to shaft 458 are provided, and in distribution space 455 of dispensing motor 465 and bending passage 453, A plurality of gears 493, 494, 49 provided in the gear region 490 on the rear surface of the unit sub-plate 475 with the sprocket 457 serving as a payout member disposed. It has become a consolidated structure to be driven to rotate by 500 (502). That is, the sprocket 457 and the payout motor 465 are accommodated within the depth width of a ball passage (bent passage 453, prize ball passage 460, ball removal passage 461) formed between the unit base body 451 and the unit sub plate 475. In addition, the rotation transmission members (the first gear 493, the second and third gears 494, 497, and the gear portion 502 of the detection disk 500) that connect the sprocket 457 and the payout motor 465 are connected to the non-blocking surface side of the unit sub-plate 475. Therefore, the prize ball unit 450 can be made thinner than the one in which a payout motor and a part of the sprocket are arranged outside the ball passage. Further, such a prize ball unit 450 has a ball passage (bending passage 453, prize ball passage 460, ball removal passage 461) in the prize ball unit 450 formed in a single passage shape. Thinning is achieved. That is, unlike the conventional case in which the payout motor 465 protrudes to the front side, the rear side or the side of the prize ball unit, the prize ball is attached to the rear side of the right rear frame 196 of the main body frame 3. Any part of the unit 450 may be structured not to protrude further rearward. In FIG. 69, the front end portion of the payout motor 465 is configured to slightly protrude from the rear surface of the unit base body 451. This protruding portion is located below the right rear wall 196, as shown in FIG. Since it faces the front portion of the main body frame 3 from the notch opening 218, as a result, it protrudes by a dimension obtained by subtracting the plate thickness dimension of the right rear wall 196 from the protruding dimension, and from the right rear wall 196. However, the amount of protrusion toward the front is small. In addition, by adopting such a configuration, in the present embodiment, the gaming device provided in the gaming board 4 between the right rear wall 196 of the main body frame 3 to which the prize ball unit 450 is attached and the back surface of the gaming board 4. The storage space for storing the rear projecting portion can be increased in the depth width direction.

  In addition, in order to attach the prize ball unit 450 configured as described above to the right rear wall 196 of the main body frame 3, as shown in FIG. 61, the hook-shaped engaging portion 474 and the engaging protrusion 215 correspond to each other. After the positioning, the lower end of the prize ball unit 450 is latched to the locking groove 219 and the prize ball unit 450 is placed on the right rear wall 196 in order to engage the hook-like engagement portion 474 and the engagement protrusion 215. Press down while keeping it in close contact. At this time, since the lower end portion of the prize ball unit 450 and the locking groove 219 are engaged, and the hook-shaped engaging portion 474 and the engaging protrusion 215 are engaged, the mounting itself is completed. When the prize ball unit 450 is moved upward, the respective engagement states are easily released. To prevent this, the lock elastic claw 214 is engaged with the button insertion engagement hole 471. It is supposed to be. That is, the lock elastic claw 214 and the button insertion engagement hole 471 engage with each other to prevent the upward movement of the winning ball unit 450 in the attached state. In this way, after the prize ball unit 450 is attached, the connecting lid member 434 of the ball path unit 420 is rotated as described above and locked by the locking elastic claws 470, so that the ball path of the ball path unit 420 is dropped. The downstream end of the passage 422 and the upstream end of the bent passage 453 of the prize ball unit 450 can be communicated with each other through a passage formed by a pair of passage walls 438. When the prize ball unit 450 is attached, the downstream end of the prize ball passage 460 is connected to the prize ball entrance 542 of the full tank unit 520 described in detail later, and the downstream end of the ball removal passage 461 is connected to the ball removal connection passage. Connected to the upstream end of 515.

  On the other hand, when the prize ball unit 450 is removed, the engagement by the latching elastic claws 470 is released, the connecting lid member 434 is rotated forward, and then the detachable button 472 is pressed to release the locking elastic claws 214. It is moved to the front side to release the engagement between the lock elastic pawl 214 and the button insertion engagement hole 471, and then the prize ball unit 450 is pulled upward with the detachable button 472 pressed, and the prize ball unit 450 By releasing the engagement between the lower end portion of the lens and the locking groove 219 and the engagement between the hook-shaped engagement portion 474 and the engagement protrusion 215 and pulling out the prize ball unit 450 to the front side. Easy to remove.

[1-10. Full tank unit]
The full tank unit 520 disposed on the downstream side of the above-described prize ball unit 450 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 70 is a perspective view showing the relationship between the prize ball unit 450 and the full tank unit 520, FIG. 71 is an exploded perspective view of the full tank unit 520, and FIG. 72 is a view of the balls in the full tank unit 520. 73 is a perspective view showing the flow, FIG. 73 is a plan view for explaining the operation of the full tank swing plate 531, and FIG. 74 is a partially broken view showing the relationship between the full unit 520 and the foul port 257. FIG. 75 is a cross-sectional view showing the relationship between the full tank unit 520 and the foul port 257, similarly.

  The full tank unit 520 is mounted and fixed on the full tank unit mounting portion 180 of the main body frame 3 as described above. As shown in FIG. 71, the main body of the box is formed in a box shape having an open upper surface. 521 and a lid body 541 that covers the upper surface of the box main body 521. The box main body 521 is configured such that a ball flowing from the downstream end of the prize ball passage 460 is guided in a zigzag shape inside and discharged from the outlet 536. For this reason, a side guide passage 522 is formed by the partition wall 526 to guide a sphere that has flowed from the winning ball inlet 542 formed in the lid 541 sideward from one end toward the other end. A side guide receiving portion 523 formed in a concave arc shape so as to guide the sphere toward the side is provided at one end portion of the side guide passage 522 directly below the prize ball entrance 542, and the side guide passage is provided. A buffer member 524 is provided on the inner surface of the other end of 522 to receive the impact of the sphere flowing through the side guide passage 522 and guide the sphere downstream.

  Further, after the ball that collides with the buffer member 524 provided on the inner surface of the other end of the side guide passage 522 is changed in direction to the downstream side, the ball of the side guide passage 522 is formed by the inclined side wall 527 formed on the downstream side. It is induced to flow in the opposite direction to the flow of That is, the reverse side guide passage 525 is formed by the partition wall 526 and the inclined side wall 527. The sphere that has flowed through the reverse side guide passage 525 is then guided to the front guide passage 535 formed forward, and the award of the storage dish 30 described above from the outlet 536 formed at the lower end of the front guide passage 535. Guided to the ball port 39.

  Meanwhile, a switch housing space 528 is formed at one end portion of the reverse side guide passage 525 on the downstream side of the buffer member 524 so as to protrude outward. A support shaft pin 529 protrudes from the front lower position of the switch storage space 528, and the shaft hole 533 of the full tank swing plate 531 is inserted into the support pin 529 so that the full tank swing plate 531 swings. It is provided freely. The full rocking plate 531 is formed in a plate shape so as to form one end side wall of the reverse side guide passage 525, a shaft hole 533 is formed at the lower end of the plate shape, and the detection piece 532 is integrated on the back surface thereof. Is formed. The detection piece 532 is formed by vertically projecting a rear end portion of a fan-like connection plate connected to the back surface of the full tank swinging plate 531, and the projected detection piece 532 is a projection that will be described in detail later. The ON / OFF state of the full tank switch 545 is detected by shielding or conducting between the light projector and the light receiver of the light receiving type full tank switch 545. A shaft spring 530 is also inserted into the support pin 529, one end of the shaft spring 530 is locked to the back surface of the full tank swing plate 531, and the other end is erected rearward of the support pin 529. By being locked by the spring locking pin 549, the upper end portion of the full rocking plate 531 is always urged toward the reverse side guide passage 525. However, two stopper pieces 534 are formed in the upper portion of the switch storage space 528 at the downstream extension position of the other end side wall of the side guide passage 522 and the rear position thereof. The upper end only swings about the support shaft pin 529 between the two stopper pieces 534. In addition, a wiring drawing recess 547 for drawing the wiring 546 from the full tank switch 545 to the outside is formed in the rear part of the upper side wall of the switch storage space 528.

  Further, a foul ball passage 537 is formed on one side downstream of the reverse side guide passage 525. As shown in FIG. 74, the foul ball passage 537 is bent and formed so that the foul ball inlet 538 communicates with the foul port 257 described above and the downstream side communicates with the upstream side of the front guide passage 535. Has been. For this reason, the foul sphere taken into the foul mouth 257 is guided from the foul sphere inlet 538 through the bent foul sphere passage 537 to the front guide passage 535, and further through the outlet 536 and the award ball mouth 39 to the storage dish 30. Returned to

  The box main body 521 includes engaging pieces 539 engaged with unit engaging grooves 181 formed in the full unit mounting portion 180 on both sides of the outlet 536 and one side of the foul inlet 538. And a latching protrusion 540 that engages with a latching piece 548 formed on the lid body 541 is formed. The latching protrusion 540 is appropriately formed on the upper left and right side walls of the box main body 521.

  On the other hand, the lid body 541 is formed in a plate shape so as to cover the upper surfaces of the side guide passage 522, the reverse side guide passage 525, the switch storage space 528, the front guide passage 535, and the foul ball passage 537 of the box main body 520. In the side guide passage 522, a square prize ball inlet 542 is opened at a position corresponding to the upstream end. In addition, a switch attachment portion 543 for attaching a full-light switch 545 of the light projecting / receiving type is formed at a position corresponding to the switch storage space 528. The full tank switch 545 can be easily attached to the switch mounting portion 543 by locking the locking claw formed with the full tank switch 545 to the locking portion of the switch mounting portion 543 from the lower surface of the lid 541. It has become. Further, a latching piece 548 for engaging with the latching protrusion 540 of the box main body 521 protrudes downward from the periphery of the lid body 541.

  In the full tank unit 520 configured as described above, as shown in FIG. 72, the balls paid out from the prize ball passage 460 of the prize ball unit 520 are located upstream from the prize ball entrance 542 to the side guide passage 522. It enters and is guided sideways by the side guide receiving portion 523 and collides with the buffer member 524. The sphere colliding with the buffer member 524 hits the inclined side wall 527 as it is toward the downstream side, is guided in the reverse side guide passage 525 in the direction opposite to the guide direction of the side guide passage 522, and is guided to the front guide passage 535. From the outlet 536 of the front guide passage 535, it is guided to the storage tray 30 through the prize ball port 39. Further, the foul sphere entered from the foul ball inlet 538 is also weakened by the bent foul ball passage 537 and merged with the front guide passage 535, and stored through the prize ball port 39 from the outlet 536 of the front guide passage 535. Guided to the dish 30.

  As described above, when the ball naturally flows in the full tank unit 520, as shown in FIG. 73 (A), when the ball moves from the side guide passage 522 to the reverse side guide passage 525, The ball hits the buffer member 524 and is reflected toward the substantially central position of the inclined side surface 527, so that the ball hardly hits the full tank swing plate 531. For this reason, the upper end of the full rocking plate 531 is in contact with the front stopper piece 534 by the biasing force of the shaft spring 530. It is in a state (OFF) where the switch does not conduct due to entering the light receiver. On the other hand, when the prize ball is stored in the storage tray 30 and the full tank unit 520 is filled with the ball, as shown in FIG. 73 (B), the front guide passage 535 and the reverse side guide passage 525 are filled. Due to the pressure of the stored sphere, the full swing plate 531 swings in the clockwise direction against the biasing force of the shaft spring 530 and comes into contact with the subsequent stopper piece 534. In this state, the detection piece 532 is removed from between the light projector and the light receiver of the full tank switch 545 of the light projecting / receiving method, and the switch becomes conductive (ON). When the full tank switch 545 is turned ON, the rotational drive of the payout motor 465 of the prize ball unit 450 is stopped (if an ON signal is derived while a predetermined number of prize balls are being paid out, the predetermined number of prize balls Will be stopped after it has been paid out). Even when the balls are stored in the front guide passage 535 and the reverse side guide passage 525, the bottom of the foul ball passage 537 has a very strong inclination, so that the stored ball flows back through the foul ball passage 537. Thus, there is no back flow from the foul bulb inlet 538.

  As described above, the full unit 520 according to the present embodiment is detachably attached to the full unit mounting part 180 of the main body frame 3, so that the full unit is attached to the main body frame as in the conventional case. It is not necessary to form a passage for a full tank structure in the main body frame as compared with the one assembled in the formed dispensing passage. Further, by making the inside of the full tank unit 520 into a zigzag-shaped passage, it is possible to guide to the storage tray 30 while weakening the momentum of the balls paid out from the prize ball path 460 of the prize ball unit 450. The awarded ball does not jump out of the storage tray 30. In addition, since the full tank swinging plate 531 for operating the full tank switch 545 is provided at a position below the lower end of the flow of the side guide passage 522 that is not affected by the normal flow of the sphere, The prize ball payout is not stopped by the tank, and the prize ball payout can be reliably stopped only when the tank is full. Further, in the full tank unit 520 according to the present embodiment, the foul ball passage 537 for guiding the foul ball joins the ball in the middle of the front guide passage 535 for paying out the award ball. The foul sphere can be merged without hindering the flow of the sphere.

[1-10-1. Other embodiment of full tank unit]
In the full tank unit 520 according to the above-described embodiment (hereinafter referred to as “full tank unit according to the first embodiment”), the full tank rocking plate 531 that operates the full tank switch 545 is affected by the flow of a normal ball. Although the thing provided in the position below the flow lower end of the side guidance passage 522 which does not receive is shown, the embodiment (following and below) which can detect a full tank more reliably at the time of a full tank , “Full unit according to the second embodiment”) will be described with reference to FIGS. 76 to 80. 76 is a perspective view showing the relationship between the prize ball unit and the full tank unit 520A according to the second embodiment, and FIG. 77 is a perspective view of the full tank unit 520A according to the second embodiment. FIG. 80 is an exploded perspective view seen from the front of the full tank unit 520A according to the second embodiment, and FIG. 79 is an exploded perspective view seen from the rear of the full tank unit 520A according to the second embodiment. These are the cross-sectional views cut | disconnected by the bottom opening-and-closing plate 551 part provided in the full tank unit 520A which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. In addition, in the figure, in the part code | symbol which concerns on the full tank unit 520A which concerns on 2nd Embodiment, in the part which has the same function as the part which concerns on the full tank unit 520 which concerns on 1st Embodiment, "A ".

  The major difference between the full tank unit 520A according to the second embodiment and the full tank unit 520 according to the first embodiment is that the full tank swing that activates the full tank switch 545 of the full tank unit 520 according to the first embodiment. While the plate 531 is formed in a plate shape so as to form one end side wall of the reverse side guide passage 525, the bottom rocking plate for operating the full tank switch 545A of the full unit 520A according to the second embodiment. 551 is provided in almost the entire area of the bottom surface on the upstream side of the reverse side guide passage 525A. A small difference other than the above is that a member corresponding to the partition wall 526 of the full unit 520 according to the first embodiment is not provided in the full unit 520A according to the second embodiment, and a full switch 545A is provided. The mounting structure of the full switch 545A attached to the switch storage space 528A due to the fact that the rocking plate to be operated is the bottom rocking plate 551 is slightly different, and there is almost no difference other than the above.

  Therefore, the full unit 520A according to the second embodiment will be described mainly with respect to the configuration related to the bottom rocking plate 551. As shown in FIGS. 78 and 79, the bottom surface on the upstream side of the reverse side guide passage 525A is formed with a bottom surface opening 550 that opens over the entire bottom surface, and the bottom surface opening 550 is defined as the bottom surface swing plate 551. Is swingably closed. The bottom surface opening 550 is formed in a substantially square concave shape with an open top surface, and a pair of axial projections 554 are provided on the side wall in the front-rear direction when viewed from the front inside. A circular spring mounting recess 555 for positioning the lower end of the spring 556 is formed on the concave bottom surface of the bottom surface opening 550. On the other hand, the bottom rocking plate 551 that closes the bottom opening 550 is formed in a substantially square shape, and is a semicircular shape that is pivotally supported by fitting the shaft projection 554 on the downstream side of the back surface when viewed from the front. A bearing portion 552 is formed to project. Further, as shown in FIG. 80, a spring locking projection 551a for locking the upper end of the spring 556 protrudes downward from the center of the bottom surface of the bottom rocking plate 551. Therefore, the bottom rocking plate 551 is biased in the direction in which the upstream side is always rocked upward by the biasing force of the spring 556. The spring 556 does not swing the bottom rocking plate 551 downward even when a normal number of payout balls (for example, 15) is placed on the bottom rocking plate 551 at a time. A predetermined number of balls equal to or greater than the number of payouts is formed by a spring member having a spring coefficient that swings downward when placed on the bottom rocking plate 551. Further, a detection protrusion 553 protrudes forward on the upstream side of the bottom rocking plate 551. The detection protrusion 553 is positioned in the switch storage space 528A when the bearing portion 552 of the bottom rocking plate 551 is pivotally supported by the shaft projection 554.

  Further, a switch storage space 528A for storing the full tank switch 545A is integrally formed outside the side wall of the upstream end portion of the reverse side guide passage 525A. In order to mount the full switch 545A in the switch storage space 528A, a switch mounting portion 543A is formed on the outer side surface of the upstream end portion of the reverse side guide passage 525A above the switch storage space 528A. A full switch 545A is fixed to the portion 543A with screws 557. The full tank switch 545A is configured as a switch composed of a projector and a light receiver, and detects ON / OFF when the detection protrusion 553 swings up and down between the light receiver and the light projector.

  In the full tank unit 520A configured as described above, when the sphere naturally flows in the full tank unit 520A, the sphere moves from the side guide path 522A to the reverse side guide path 525A. The bottom rocking plate 551 falls to the bottom rocking plate 551. However, when the number of normal award balls is paid out, the spring 556 has a strong resilience, so the bottom rocking plate 551 does not rock and is shown by a solid line in FIG. As shown, the detection protrusion 553 enters between the light projector and the light receiver of the full tank switch 545A of the light projecting / receiving method, and the switch is not conductive (OFF). On the other hand, when the prize ball is stored in the storage tray 30 and the full tank unit 520A is also filled with the ball, the bottom surface fluctuation formed on the entire upstream side of the front guide path 535A and the reverse side guide path 525A. The bottom rocking plate 551 rocks downward against the urging force of the spring 556 due to the pressure of the sphere stored on the moving plate 551, and the detection protrusion 553 is thrown as shown by a two-dot chain line in FIG. The full tank switch 545A of the light receiving system is removed from between the projector and the light receiver, and the switch becomes conductive (ON). When the full tank switch 545A is turned ON, the rotation drive of the payout motor 465 of the prize ball unit 450 is stopped (ON signal during the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls), like the full unit 520 according to the first embodiment. Is derived after the predetermined number of award balls are paid out).

  As described above, in the full unit 520A according to the second embodiment, the bottom surface swings substantially the same width as the width of the bottom surface of the passage through which the sphere flows (in the illustrated case, the reverse side guide passage 525A). The full switch 545 is actuated by the plate 551, and the biasing member (spring) is adapted to swing the bottom rocking plate 551 when a certain amount of balls are placed without swinging due to the normal flow of the ball. 556), the ball is placed in a part of the passage portion as compared with the conventional case where a ball is detected due to the ball placed on the bottom surface of the passage. A situation that is not detected due to clogging can be reliably prevented. This can reliably detect a full tank.

[1-11. Locking device]
Next, the lock device 560 that is attached in the vertical direction along the back side edge of the main body frame 3 will be described with reference mainly to FIGS. 81 is a rear perspective view showing the relationship between the locking device 650 and the main body frame 3, and FIG. 82 is an enlarged side sectional view showing a latching structure of the locking device 650 to the main body frame 3. FIG. FIG. 84 is a partial cross-sectional view cut in the horizontal direction at a position slightly below the center in the vertical direction of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and FIG. 84 shows the detailed relationship between the lock device 560 and the side walls 190 and 191 of the main body frame 3. FIG. 85 is a side view (A) of the locking device 650, a perspective view (B) seen from the front side, and FIG. 86 is a perspective view (viewed from the back side of the locking device 560). A) Perspective views (B) and (C) of a door frame sliding rod 600 and a body frame sliding rod 610 that are slidably provided inside the U-shaped base 561 of the lock device 560. 87 is an exploded perspective view of the lock device 560, and FIG. 88 shows a door frame sliding rod 600 and a body frame sliding rod 61. Is a front view for explaining the operation of FIG. 89 is a front view for explaining the action of the anti-fraud member 582.

  The locking device 560 is attached from the upper end to the lower end of the main body frame 3 along the first side wall 190 on the open side of the main body frame 3, and as shown in FIG. A plurality of (three in the illustrated case) lock locking holes 198 formed in the middle and middle of the upper and lower ends between the rising portions of the first side wall 190 and the upper part of the vertical surface of the first side wall 190 The U-shaped base 561 of the lock device 560 described below is supported by the lock mounting hole 197 formed by being cut out in the middle and the lock mounting hole 208 formed near the upper portion of the cylinder lock through hole 170. It is fixed. Therefore, the structure of the lock device 560 will be described in detail below.

  85 to 87, the lock device 560 includes a U-shaped base 561 as a lock base formed in a U-shaped cross section, and a door frame slidably provided in the U-shaped base 561. The sliding frame 600 for the main body, the sliding frame 610 for the body frame that is slidably provided in the U-shaped base 561, and the sliding frame 610 for the body frame cannot be illegally slid. And tamper-proof members 582 and 590 attached to the lower portion of the U-shaped base 561.

  The U-shaped base 561 is formed by bending a metal so as to have a U-shaped cross section, and providing a sliding slide 600 for a door frame and a sliding rod 610 for a body frame in the interior thereof. The width dimension is extremely thin as compared with a conventional locking device that is concentrated on a base body having an L-shaped cross section. As described above, since the size of the game board 4 in the horizontal direction and the vertical direction is greatly increased, and the space surrounded by the side walls 190 to 193 of the main body frame 3 is increased, the side walls 190 and the main body frame 3 A mounting structure that allows the locking device 560 to be attached to the back side of the main body frame 3 by reducing the width dimension of the locking device 560 according to the present embodiment because the size between the outer periphery and the outer periphery is extremely small. It is because it improved as. And since the open side of the U-shaped cross section of the U-shaped base 561 is attached so as to face the back surface of the main body frame 3, when the lock device 560 is attached to the main body frame 3, the door frame is provided inside. The sliding rod 600 and the body frame sliding rod 610 have a tamper-proof structure in which the U-shaped base 561 is completely covered except for the hook portions 601, 614 and 624.

  First, rectangular hook penetration openings 562 through which the hook portions 614 and 624 of the main body frame sliding rod 610 pass are opened above and below the closed side opposite to the open side of the U-shaped base 561, and on the closed side. In addition, a screw fixing portion 563 protrudes horizontally in the middle of the upper portion and the middle of the side surface 561b (see FIG. 87) that is in close contact with the first side wall 190, and further, the side surface 561a (not in close contact with the first side wall 190 on the open side). A locking projection 564 is formed to project from an upper end portion and an intermediate portion of FIG. 87) and lower end portions of both open side surfaces 561a and 561b. Screw fixing portions 563 and locking protrusions 564 are for attaching the locking device 560 to the back surface of the main body frame 3, and the locking protrusions 564 are inserted into the lock locking holes 198 of the main body frame 3 and moved upward ( 82), since the screw fixing portion 563 and the lock mounting hole 197 coincide with each other in this state, the locking device 560 is firmly fixed to the main body frame 3 by screwing a screw (not shown) into the coincident hole. be able to. The locking device 560 is attached not only by the upper and middle screw fixing portions 563 but also by a screw fixing hole 596 formed in a lock mounting piece 568 described later and in the vicinity of the cylinder lock through hole 170. The lower part of the lock device 560 can be attached by fixing the lock attachment hole 208 to the corresponding lock attachment hole 208 with a screw (not shown).

  Further, at the time of the mounting, the locking projections 564 formed at the upper, middle, and lower three positions on the open side (front part) of the U-shaped base 561 are inserted into the locking holes 198 to be positioned and locked, and the U-shaped Screw fixing portions 563 formed at two locations on the closing side (rear portion) of the base 561 and screw fixing holes 596 formed on the open side (front portion) of the U-shaped base 561 are provided as lock mounting holes 197, Since it is structured to be fixed to 208 with a screw, the front portion of the locking device 560 is locked by a locking projection 564 and a locking locking hole 198, and the rear portion of the locking device 560 is locked by a screw locking portion 563 and a locking mounting hole 197. Since the lower portion of the lock device 560 is fixed by the screw fixing hole 596 and the lock attachment hole 208, the lock device 560 can be firmly fixed to the main body frame 3 with an extremely simple structure. In other words, even when the locking device 560 is formed by concentrating on the U-shaped base 561 having a very small width, the locking device 560 is fixed to the main body by locking and fixing the front portion and the rear portion of the locking device 560. It can be firmly fixed to the frame 3. In particular, in the case of the present embodiment, the locking protrusion 564 that forms the locking structure (or a fixed structure) at the front portion protrudes from the side surface 561a that is not in close contact with the first side wall 190 of the U-shaped base 561. On the other hand, the screw fixing portion 563 and the screw fixing hole 596 constituting the fixing structure of the rear portion are formed so as to protrude in the horizontal direction from the side surface 561b closely contacting the first side wall 190 of the U-shaped base 561. Therefore, the locking device 560 can be fixed to the main body frame 3 so as not to be loose as compared with the case where the locking structure of the front portion is formed on the side surface 561b in close contact with the first side wall 190. is there.

  Also, insertion holes 565 are formed in the upper, middle, and lower portions of both side surfaces 561a and 561b of the U-shaped base 561, and the glass door sliding member 600 and the main body frame sliding rod 610 are provided in the U-shaped base 561. The glass door sliding member 600 and the body frame sliding rod 610 can be slidably attached to the inside of the U-shaped base 561 by inserting and crimping a rivet 566 into the insertion hole 565 in the housed state. it can. That is, one rivet slot 602 is formed in each of the upper, middle, and lower portions of the door frame sliding rod 600 and the upper hook member 611 and the lower hook member 612 are respectively formed in the body frame sliding rod 610. By passing the rivet 566 through the rivet long holes 615 and 620, the door frame sliding rod 600 can be moved upward, and the main body frame sliding rod 610 can be moved downward. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 86 (B), the rivet 566 passes through the lower ends of the rivet slots 615, 620 of the main body frame sliding rod 610, and as shown in FIG. A rivet 566 passes through the upper end of the rivet slot 602 of the sliding rod 600.

  Further, a tamper-proof notch 567 is formed on the closed side of the lower portion of the U-shaped base 561, and at the front end of the side 561b that is in close contact with the first side wall 190 of the body frame 3 on the open side. A lock attachment piece 568 for attaching the cylinder lock 570 protrudes from the side, and an insertion vertical opening 579, a spring locking piece 580, and a clearance side hole 581 are provided on a side surface 561b in close contact with the first side wall 190. Each is formed. The fraud prevention notch 567 is configured such that a stopper piece 585 of a first fraud prevention member 582 described later advances and retreats. This will be described in detail later. Further, the front end of the side surface 561b of the U-shaped base 561 is arranged so that the lock attachment piece 568 is positioned below the lower end side of the game board installation recess 159 in a state where the lock device 560 is attached to the back surface of the main body frame 3. The lock mounting piece 568 is formed with a lock insertion hole 569 through which the cylinder lock 570 passes, and a mounting hole 573 for mounting the cylinder lock 570 with a screw 572. A screw fixing hole 596 for attaching the lower part of the lock device 560 to the back surface of the main body frame 3 is provided. The insertion vertical opening 579 is an opening through which the first engagement protrusion 576 and the second engagement protrusion 577 of the engagement cam 575 fixed to the cylinder lock 570 enter when the cylinder lock 570 rotates. The spring locking piece 580 is for locking the spring 593 provided on the tamper-proof members 582 and 590, and the clearance lateral hole 581 constitutes a clearance hole so as not to obstruct the movement of the connecting pin 592. It is. This point will be described in detail later.

  The cylinder lock 570 attached to the above-described lock attachment piece 568 will be described. In the cylinder lock 570, a cylindrical cylinder lock body is fixed in front of the lock attachment substrate 571, and the lock shaft 574 of the cylinder lock body is the lock attachment substrate. The engagement cam 575 is fixed to the rear end of the lock shaft 574 with a screw 578. The engagement cam 575 is formed in a boomerang shape, and one end side thereof is a first engagement protrusion 576 that engages with the downward engagement hole 621 of the main body frame sliding rod 610 when rotating, and the other end. The side is a second engagement protrusion 577 that engages with the rising engagement hole 605 of the door frame sliding rod 600 when rotating. The cylinder lock 570 configured as described above has an attachment hole (not indicated) and a lock formed in two places on the lock attachment substrate 571 by inserting a cylindrical cylinder lock body portion into the lock insertion hole 569. The cylinder lock 570 can be fixed to the U-shaped base 561 by aligning with the mounting hole 573 of the mounting piece 568 and screwing with the screw 572.

  Next, fraud prevention members 582 and 590 attached to the U-shaped base 561 will be described with reference to FIG. The fraud prevention members 582 and 590 are for preventing the main body frame sliding rod 610 from being lowered illegally with, for example, a piano wire or a wire without rotating the cylinder lock 570 with an official key. . The fraud prevention members 582 and 590 have a structure in which the first fraud prevention member 582 and the second fraud prevention member 590 are connected by the connecting pin 592. The first tamper-proof member 582 is formed in a vertically long plate shape that is swingable about the swing shaft hole 583 at the upper end, and the swing shaft hole 583 is formed inside the U-shaped base 561 described above. Of the insertion hole 565 and the rivet 566 for slidably attaching the glass door sliding member 600 and the body frame sliding rod 610, the lowermost insertion hole 565 and the rivet 566 are attached.

  The first fraud prevention member 582 is provided with a vertically long protruding piece insertion hole 584 that overlaps the insertion vertical opening 579 on the plate-like surface, and a second engaging protruding piece 577 is formed in the protruding piece insertion hole 584. It can be inserted. That is, when the second engagement protrusion 577 passes through the protrusion insertion hole 584 and the insertion vertical opening 579, the upward engagement hole 605 of the sliding frame 600 for the door frame provided inside the U-shaped base 561 The second engaging protrusion 577 is engaged. In addition, an outline line obliquely above the opening position of the protruding piece insertion hole 584 of the first fraud prevention member 582 is an inclined portion 582a. The inclined portion 582a comes into contact with the rear surface side of the first engaging protrusion 576 when the engaging cam 575 rotates, and the first engaging protrusion 576, the inclined portion 582a, and the like when the engaging cam 575 rotates. Makes the first tamper-proof member 582 swing around the swing shaft hole 583 (clockwise in FIG. 89B).

  Further, the first fraud prevention member 582 is provided with a stopper piece 585 protruding on an outline line obliquely below the protruding piece insertion hole 584, and a restriction protruding piece 589 is provided below the stopper piece 585. A pin hole 587 and a connection hole 588 are formed vertically on the front portion of the restricting protrusion 589. The stopper piece 585 enters and engages with the tamper-proof cutout 567 and the engagement cutout 627 of the mainframe slide 610 when the mainframe slide 610 is locked, so that the mainframe slide 610 is engaged. This is to prevent unauthorized sliding. In addition, in the restricting protrusion 589, the first tamper-proof member 582 and the second tamper-proof member 590 are connected by a spring 593, and when the spring 593 is connected, the biasing direction of the second tamper-proof member 590 The movement to is restricted. The pin hole 587 is for fixing the guide pin 586. With the guide pin 586 fixed to the pin hole 587 from the back side of the first tamper-proof member 582, the guide pin 586 is inserted into the insertion vertical opening 579. The first fraud prevention member 582 is guided along the side surface 561b of the U-shaped base 561 by engaging with a horizontally long opening formed at the lowermost end of the U-shaped base. Further, the connection hole 588 is for connecting the first fraud prevention member 582 and the second fraud prevention member 590 with the connection pin 592.

  The second tamper-proof member 590 connected to the first tamper-proof member 582 is formed of an inverted “te” -shaped plate material, a connection hole 591 is formed at one upper end thereof, and a spring engagement is formed at the other upper end thereof. A stop hole 594 is formed, and a contact portion 595 is provided at the lower end. The connection hole 591 is for connecting with the connection pin 592 so as to coincide with the connection hole 588 of the first fraud prevention member 582, and the spring locking hole 594 has one end with a U-shaped base 561 spring locking piece. The other end of the spring 593 locked to 580 is locked. Further, the abutting portion 595 comes into contact with the closing projection 23 fixed to the inner lower portion of the outer frame 2 when the main body frame 3 is closed. The operation of the first fraud prevention member 582 and the second fraud prevention member 590 will be described in detail later.

  Next, the door frame sliding rod 600 and the body frame sliding rod 610 which are slidably provided inside the U-shaped base 561 will be described. First, the door frame sliding rod 600 is formed of a vertically long metal plate-like member, and the door frame hook portions 601 are integrally formed at the upper, middle, and lower portions on one side of the vertical side. Projected. The door frame hook portion 601 protrudes forward from the open side when housed in the U-shaped base 561, and when the lock device 560 is fixed to the back surface of the main body frame 3, 3 protrudes forward from a door hook hole 199 (see FIGS. 37 and 38) formed in 3, and is engaged with a hook locking piece 37 a (see FIG. 21) formed on the back surface of the door frame 5. Since the door frame hook portion 601 has a downward engaging claw shape, the door frame hook portion 601 and the hook locking piece 37a are locked by raising the door frame sliding rod 600. The state can be released.

  In addition, a vertically long rivet slot 602 through which the rivet 566 is inserted is formed at the center of the upper, middle, and lower side surfaces of the door frame sliding rod 600. A guide projection 603 projects from the elongated hole 602 and at the lowermost end of the door frame sliding rod 600. The rivet long hole 602 is a hole through which the rivet 566 inserted into the insertion hole 565 of the U-shaped base 561 passes, and the rivet 566 does not interfere with the raising operation of the door frame sliding rod 600. It is formed vertically. In the normal state, the rivet 566 is in abutment contact with the upper end of the rivet slot 602. The guide protrusion 603 is inserted into the protruding piece moving holes 616 and 623 formed in the upper hook member 611 and the lower hook member 612 of the main body frame sliding rod 610, and the door frame sliding rod 600 The main body frame sliding rod 610 guides the mutual sliding operation.

  Also, a spring hook portion 606 is formed at the upper end portion of the door frame sliding rod 600, one end of the spring 608 is locked to the spring hook portion 606, and the other end of the spring 608 is the body frame sliding rod 610. The upper hook member 611 is engaged with a spring hook portion 617. Thus, the door frame sliding rod 600 is biased downward, and the body frame sliding rod 610 is biased upward. In the middle of the door frame sliding rod 600, a contact elastic piece 607 is formed in a convex shape. The contact elastic piece 607 is formed by pressing from one side surface of the door frame sliding rod 600 with a press, and is in contact with the inner side surface of the U-shaped base 561 so as to be used inside the door frame. This prevents the sliding rod 600 from rattling. Furthermore, a vertically long play hole 604 and a rising engagement hole 605 are formed on the side surface of the lower portion of the door frame sliding rod 600. When the first engagement protrusion 576 of the engagement cam 575 is inserted and rotated, the play hole 604 moves the tip of the first engagement protrusion 576 so as not to obstruct the rotation operation. It constitutes a space. Further, when the second engagement protrusion 577 of the engagement cam 575 is inserted and rotated, the rising engagement hole 605 is engaged so that the door frame sliding rod 600 is raised by the rotation operation. Is to do. An escape notch 609 that is a notch larger in the vertical direction than the tamper-proof notch 567 is formed at the rear of the lower portion of the vertical side of the door frame sliding rod 600. The escape notch 609 is formed so as not to interfere with the stopper piece 585 of the first tamper-proof member 582 in order to reliably engage the tamper-proof notch 567 and the engagement notch 627.

  On the other hand, the body frame sliding rod 610 includes an upper hook member 611 made of a metal plate, a lower hook member 612 made of a metal plate, a connecting wire rod 613 that connects the upper hook member 611 and the lower hook member 612, and It is composed of That is, the main body frame sliding rod 610 is not formed of a single vertically long metal plate as in the prior art, and the upper hook member 611 having the hook portions 614 and 624 and the lower hook member 612 are made of metal. A plate member made of metal is formed by pressing, and the metal upper hook member 611 and the lower hook member 612 are connected by a thin metal connecting wire rod 613. Therefore, the door frame sliding rod 600 and the main body frame sliding rod 610 can be efficiently stored in the narrow space of the U-shaped base 561.

  By the way, the upper hook member 611 has a hook portion 614 projecting rearward from the upper end portion thereof, and a rivet long hole 615 and a projecting piece moving hole 616 are formed on the plate surface portion. A spring hook portion 617 and a connecting hole 618 are formed at the lower end portion of the vertical side, and contact portions 625 are formed at the upper and lower sides thereof. The hook portion 614 passes through the hook penetration opening 562 above the U-shaped base 561 and engages with the closing projection 22 provided on the upper part on the open side of the outer frame 2. Is formed. The rivet slot 615 corresponds to the rivet slot 602 formed in the upper part of the door frame sliding rod 600. In a normal state in which the rivet 566 is penetrated through the rivet slot 615, The rivet 566 is in a state of penetrating the lowermost end portion of the rivet long hole 615. Thereby, the upper hook member 611 can move downward. As described above, the guide protrusion 603 above the door frame sliding rod 600 is inserted into the projecting piece moving hole 616 so that the door frame sliding rod 600 and the main body frame sliding rod 610 move relative to each other. Is to guide you. As described above, the spring hook portion 617 is engaged with the other end of the spring 608. The connection hole 618 is inserted by bending the upper end of the connection wire rod 613. Further, when the abutting portion 625 is housed in the U-shaped base 561, the abutting portion 625 comes into contact with the inner side wall of the U-shaped base 561, and the upper hook member 611 is smoothly moved without rattling. It is for doing so.

  On the other hand, the lower hook member 612 is provided with a hook portion 624 protruding rearward at the lower end portion thereof, and protrudes from the upper portion to the lower portion of the plate surface portion with the rivet long hole 620, the lowering engagement hole 621, and the play hole 622. One moving hole 623 is sequentially formed, a connecting hole 619 is formed at the upper end of the front vertical side, an engagement notch 627 is formed at the lower part of the rear vertical side, and the upper side and the lower side are contacted. A contact portion 626 is formed. The hook portion 624 penetrates the hook penetration opening 562 below the U-shaped base 561 and engages with a closing projection 23 provided on the lower portion on the open side of the outer frame 2. Is formed. The rivet slot 620 corresponds to the rivet slot 602 formed in the lower portion of the door frame sliding rod 600. In a normal state where the rivet 566 is penetrated through the rivet slot 620, The rivet 566 is in a state of penetrating the lowermost end portion of the rivet slot 620. Thereby, the lower hook member 612 can move downward. When the first engagement protrusion 576 of the engagement cam 575 is inserted and rotated, the lowering engagement hole 621 is engaged so that the main body frame sliding rod 610 is lowered by the rotation operation. belongs to. Further, the play hole 622 has a distal end portion of the second engagement projection piece 577 so as not to obstruct the rotation operation when the second engagement projection piece 577 of the engagement cam 575 is inserted and rotated. It constitutes a space that can move. As described above, the guide piece 603 below the door frame sliding rod 600 is inserted into the projecting piece moving hole 623 so that the door frame sliding rod 600 and the main body frame sliding rod 610 move relative to each other. Is to guide you. The connecting hole 619 is inserted by bending the lower end of the connecting wire rod 613. Further, when the abutting portion 626 is housed in the U-shaped base 561, the abutting portion 626 abuts against the inner side wall of the U-shaped base 561, and the sliding operation of the lower hook member 612 is smoothly performed without rattling. It is for doing so.

  The members constituting the locking device 560 have been described above. To attach the locking device 560, the upper hook member 611 and the lower hook member 612 of the main body frame sliding rod 610 are connected by the connecting wire rod 613. In this state, the guide protrusion 603 of the door frame sliding rod 600 is inserted into the protrusion moving holes 616 and 623 of the upper hook member 611 and the lower hook member 612, and the rivet long hole 602 and the rivet length The holes 615 and 620 are aligned and overlapped, and in the overlapped state, the hook portion 614 of the upper hook member 611 and the hook portion 624 of the lower hook member 612 are passed through the hook penetration opening 562 of the U-shaped base 561. The door frame sliding rod 600 and the main body frame sliding rod 610 are inserted into the U-shaped space of the U-shaped base 561. Thereafter, the rivet 566 is inserted from the insertion hole 565. At this time, the rivet 566 is inserted so as to pass through the rivet slots 615, 620, 602. However, when the lowermost rivet 566 is inserted, it is necessary to insert the rivet 566 also into the swing shaft hole 583 of the first tamper-proof member 582 and attach the first tamper-proof member 582 to the U-shaped base 561 at the same time. Before attaching the first fraud prevention member 582 to the U-shaped base 561, the first fraud prevention member 582 and the second fraud prevention member 590 are connected by the connecting pin 592 and the guide pin 586 is illustrated in the pin hole 587. The guide pin 586 needs to be inserted into the lowermost opening of the insertion vertical opening 579.

  With the rivet 566 storing and fixing the door frame sliding rod 600 and the main body frame sliding rod 610 in the U-shaped base 561, the spring 608 is spanned between the spring hook portions 606 and 617, and the door frame is mounted. The sliding rod 600 and the main body frame sliding rod 610 are urged in opposite directions, and the spring 593 is stretched over the spring locking pieces 580 and 594 so that the second fraud prevention member 590 is the regulating projection piece 589. It is in the state which contacted. Thereafter, the cylindrical main body portion of the cylinder lock 570 is inserted into the lock insertion hole 569 of the lock attachment piece 568, and the cylinder lock 570 is fixed to the attachment hole 573 with the screw 572. At this time, the distal end portion of the first engagement protrusion 576 of the engagement cam 575 is slightly inserted outside the inclined portion 582a and into the insertion vertical opening 579, and the second engagement protrusion 577 of the engagement cam 575 The cylinder lock 570 is attached to the lock attachment piece 568 so that the tip end portion is slightly inserted into the protruding piece insertion hole 584 and the insertion vertical opening 578 of the first fraud prevention member 582.

  In order to attach the locking device 560 assembled as described above to the back surface of the main body frame 3, the door frame hook portion 601 of the door frame sliding rod 600 is formed on the main body frame 3 as described above. While inserting into the hook hole 199, the locking projection 564 protruding in a hook shape is inserted into the locking locking hole 198 of the main body frame 3 and moved upward, and in this state the screw fixing portion 563 and screw fixing protruding in the horizontal direction By aligning the hole 596 with the lock mounting holes 197 and 208 and screwing a screw (not shown) into the matched holes, the lock device 560 is firmly fixed to the back surface of the main body frame 3 as shown in FIG. Can do. In particular, in the case of the present embodiment, the locking projection 564 constituting the locking structure of the front portion is formed to project from the side surface 561a that does not adhere to the first side wall 190 of the U-shaped base 561, while the rear portion Since the screw fixing portion 563 and the screw fixing hole 596 constituting the fixing structure of the U-shaped base 561 project from the side surface 561b in close contact with the first side wall 190 of the U-shaped base member 561, the front portion is engaged. Compared with the case where the locking structure is formed on the side surface 561b that is in close contact with the first side wall 190, the locking device 560 can be fixed to the main body frame 3 so as not to be loose.

  By the way, the operation of the locking device 560 attached to the back surface of the main body frame 3 will be described with reference to FIGS. 88 and 89. FIG. First, the opening / closing operation of the main body frame 3 and the opening / closing operation of the door frame 5 will be described with reference to FIG. In a state where the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 and the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, as shown in FIG. The hooks 614 and 624 of the main body frame sliding rod 610 are locked, and the door frame hook portion 601 of the door frame sliding rod 600 and the hook locking piece 37a of the door frame 5 are locked. It has become. In this state, when a key (not shown) is inserted into the cylinder lock 570 and the first engagement protrusion 576 of the engagement cam 575 is rotated in a direction to enter the insertion vertical opening 579, as shown in FIG. 88 (B), The front end of the first engagement protrusion 576 engages with the downward engagement hole 621 of the main body frame sliding rod 610 to depress the lower hook member 612 downward against the urging force of the spring 608, and is connected thereto. The connected connecting rod 613 and the upper hook member 611 are also pushed down and lowered. For this reason, since the locking projections 22 and 23 of the outer frame 2 and the hook portions 614 and 624 of the main body frame sliding rod 610 are released, the main body frame 3 is pulled by pulling the main body frame 3 to the front side. 3 can be opened to the outer frame 2. When the main body frame 3 is closed, the hook portions 614 and 624 are raised by the urging force of the spring 608 (the same raised position as in the state shown in FIG. 88A). , 624 is inclined downward toward the outside, so that the upper side inclined portion of the hook portions 614, 624 is closed by the closing projections 22, 23 by forcibly pressing the main body frame 3 against the outer frame 2. Since the main body frame sliding rod 610 is lowered downward, the upward claws of the hook portions 614 and 624 and the closing projections 22 and 23 are locked again. The body frame sliding rod 610 rises and returns to the locked state.

  On the other hand, when a key (not shown) is inserted into the cylinder lock 570 and the second engagement protrusion 577 of the engagement cam 575 rotates in a direction to enter the insertion vertical opening 579, as shown in FIG. The front end of the two engaging protrusions 577 engages with the ascending engagement hole 605 of the door frame sliding rod 600 to push up and raise the door frame sliding rod 600 against the urging force of the spring 608. For this reason, since the latching state of the hook locking piece 37a of the door frame 5 and the door frame hook portion 601 of the door frame sliding rod 600 is released, the door frame 5 is pulled by pulling the door frame 5 to the front side. 5 can be opened to the main body frame 3. When the door frame 5 is closed, the door frame hook portion 601 is lowered by the urging force of the spring 608 (the same lowered position as that shown in FIG. 88A). Since the lower side of the hook portion 601 for the door is inclined upward toward the outside, the lower side inclined portion of the door frame hook portion 601 is hooked by forcibly pressing the door frame 5 against the main body frame 3. Since the door frame sliding rod 600 rises upward because it abuts the upper end of the piece 37a, the door frame hook portion 601 downward claw and the hook locking piece 37a are locked again. Then, the door frame sliding rod 600 descends and returns to the locked state. Note that the door frame sliding rod 600 in this embodiment is formed to have substantially the same length as the full length of the U-shaped base 561, and the U-shaped base 561 is substantially the side surface in the vertical direction of the main body frame 3. The door frame hook portion 601 that is attached over the entire length and that is a locking portion with the door frame 5 is formed at three locations of the upper end portion, the center portion, and the lower end portion of the door frame sliding rod 600. For this reason, the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 are securely locked in the entire length in the vertical direction, and an illegal act of forcibly opening the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 and inserting an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire from there. There is also the advantage that it cannot be done.

  As described above, the lock device 560 according to the present embodiment releases the lock of the main body frame 3 relative to the outer frame 2 by rotating the key inserted into the cylinder lock 570 in one direction, and rotates in the other direction. By doing so, locking of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 can be cancelled | released. In this case, an illegal act of hooking a piano wire or the like on the hook portions 614 and 624 of the main body frame sliding rod 610 without lowering the key without inserting the key into the cylinder lock 570 may be performed. Are not allowed to perform such cheating. The first structure for preventing such fraud is a lock mechanism composed of a first fraud prevention member 582 and a second fraud prevention member 590, and the second fraud prevention structure is a U-shaped base 561. The door frame sliding rod 600 and the body frame sliding rod 610 are accommodated in the closed space.

  First, the operation of the lock mechanism, which is the first fraud prevention structure, will be described with reference to FIG. First, in a state where the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 3 are closed, as shown in FIG. 89A, the closing projection 23 of the outer frame 2 and the contact portion 595 of the second fraud prevention member 590 are connected. It is in a contact state. In this state, the first tamper-proof member 582 rotates counterclockwise by the biasing force of the spring 593, the stopper piece 585 enters the tamper-proof cutout 567, and the stopper piece 585 is tamper-proof cutout. The main body frame sliding rod 610 at a position corresponding to 567 is engaged with an engagement notch 627 formed in the lower hook member 612. For this reason, even if the piano wire or the like is hooked on the main body frame sliding rod 610 and pulled down, the stopper piece portion 585 and the engagement notch portion 627 are engaged. Unauthorized pulling down (unlocking) becomes impossible, and an illegal act of opening the main body frame 3 cannot be performed.

  On the other hand, when the main body frame 3 is normally unlocked by inserting the key into the cylinder lock 570, the first engagement protrusion of the engagement cam 575 is turned by rotating the key as shown in FIG. The piece 576 is rotated so as to enter the insertion vertical opening 579. When the first engagement protrusion 576 is rotated, the inclined portion 582a of the first fraud prevention member 582 contacts the side surface of the first engagement protrusion 576, so that the first fraud prevention member 582 is pivoted. The stopper piece 585 also moves so as to be retracted from the tamper-proof notch 567, starting to rotate in the clockwise direction shown in the figure around 583. For this reason, it will be in the state by which engagement with the stopper piece part 585 and the engagement notch part 627 was cancelled | released. At this time, the second fraud prevention member 590 is in a position where the spring 593 is extended and the contact portion 595 is retracted. When the engagement cam 575 is further rotated in this state and the first engagement protrusion 576 is also rotated, the tip of the first engagement protrusion 576 is engaged with the lower engagement hole 621 of the lower hook member 612. Since the entire body frame sliding rod 610 is lowered, the hooked portions 614 and 624 and the closing projections 22 and 23 of the outer frame 2 are released, and the main body frame 3 is attached to the outer frame 2. Can be opened.

  When the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the second fraud prevention member 590 is in contact with the restricting protrusion 589, so the first fraud prevention member 582 and the second fraud prevention member The positional relationship with 590 is substantially the same as the state shown in FIG. When the main body frame 3 is closed in this state, the closing projection 23 of the outer frame 2 and the contact portion 595 of the second fraud prevention member 590 come into contact from the front, and finally the state shown in FIG. 89 (A) is obtained. . For this reason, the 1st fraud prevention member 582 and the 2nd fraud prevention member 590 do not get in the way when closing the main body frame 3. In the present embodiment, the first fraud prevention member 582 and the second fraud prevention member 590 prevent only the lowering operation of the main body frame sliding rod 610 from being illegally performed. If the frame sliding rod 610 is illegally opened, the door frame sliding rod 600 can be easily opened manually after being released, and the illegal act of raising the sliding rod with a piano wire or the like is practically difficult to perform. For this reason, it has been devised to prevent unauthorized operation of the main body frame sliding rod 610.

  Further, even in the lock mechanism that is the first tamper-proof structure described above, it is impossible to disable the function of the lock mechanism by swinging the first tamper-proof member 582 with a piano wire or the like. Absent. Therefore, assuming that the lock function of the lock mechanism is disabled by an unauthorized action, in the present embodiment, in the state where the lock device 560 is attached to the main body frame 3, the door frame provided inside is used. Since the sliding rod 600 and the body frame sliding rod 610 are housed in the closed space of the U-shaped base 561 except for the hook portions 601, 614, 624, they are completely covered. Even when an attempt is made to pull down the main body frame sliding rod 610 provided inside the closed space of the U-shaped base 561 by inserting a piano wire or the like, the both sides 561a and 561b of the U-shaped base 561 will close the closed space of the unauthorized tool. Since the intrusion is blocked, it is not possible to easily perform fraud.

  As described above in detail, the locking device 560 according to the present embodiment has a lateral width dimension for the door frame inside the U-shaped base 561 that is extremely thin compared to a conventional locking device that is integrated into an L-shaped base. The sliding hook 600 and the main body frame sliding hook 610 are slidably provided, and the mounting position of the cylinder lock 570 for operating the locking device 560 to the U-shaped base 561 is lower than the lower end side of the game board. Therefore, even if the size of the game board 4 in the horizontal direction and the vertical direction is extremely large, and the space surrounded by the side walls 190 to 193 of the main body frame 3 is increased, the lock device 560 is fixed to the main body frame. 3 can be firmly attached to the back side. And since it is attached so that the open side of the U-shaped cross section faces the back surface of the main body frame 3, when the lock device 560 is attached to the main body frame 3, the sliding frame 600 for the door frame provided inside and the main body Since the frame sliding rod 610 is completely covered with the U-shaped base 561 except for the hooks 601, 614, 624, the main body provided inside by inserting a piano wire or the like. Unauthorized acts such as lowering the frame sliding rod 610 cannot be easily performed. Further, when the locking device 560 is attached, the locking protrusions 564 formed at the upper, middle, and lower three positions on the open side (front portion) of the U-shaped base 561 are inserted into the locking holes 198 to be positioned and locked. Since the screw fixing portions 563 and the screw fixing holes 596 formed at the upper, middle, and lower portions of the closed side (rear part) of the U-shaped base 561 are fixed to the lock mounting holes 197 and 208 with screws, The front portion of the device 560 is locked by the locking protrusion 564 and the lock locking hole 198, and the rear portion of the locking device 560 is fixed by the screw fixing portion 563, the screw fixing hole 596, and the lock mounting holes 197, 208. The lock device 560 can be firmly fixed to the main body frame 3 with a simple structure.

  In the above-described embodiment, the screw fixing hole 596 formed in the lock attachment piece 568 and the cylinder lock through hole 170 of the main body frame 3 are formed in the vicinity of the upper portion of the lock mounting piece 568 as a structure for screwing the lower portion of the U-shaped base 561. However, instead of this, a screw 572 for attaching the cylinder lock 570 to the lock attachment piece 568 is used, and the tip of the screw 572 penetrates the lock attachment piece 568. Alternatively, a structure may be employed in which the lock mounting holes to be screwed are formed above and below the cylinder lock through hole 170. Further, even if the lower portion of the U-shaped base 561 is not screwed, the locking device 560 can be attached to the back surface of the main body frame 3 only by fixing the screw fixing portion 563 and the lock mounting hole 197 at the rear portion of the locking device 560. It is confirmed that it is firmly fixed. Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the door frame sliding rod 600 and the main body frame sliding rod 610 are completely covered with the U-shaped base 561 having the left and right side surfaces 561a and 561b. The door frame sliding rod 600 and the main body frame sliding rod 610 are slidably attached to the opposite side surface 561a not in close contact with the first side wall 190 with a rivet or the like, and the side surface 561b in close contact with the first side wall 190 The L-shaped base (lock base) is omitted, and the door frame sliding rod 600 and the main body frame are formed in a closed space formed by the side surface 561a of the L-shaped base (lock base) and the first side wall 190. It is good also as a structure which accommodates the sliding rod 610. FIG. Even in this case, the same mounting structure and tamper-proof structure as in the embodiment can be obtained.

[1-12. Substrate unit]
Next, the board unit 650 attached to the lower part of the back surface of the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 90 is a perspective view of the substrate unit 650 as viewed from the back side, FIG. 91 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit 650 as viewed from the back side, and FIG. 92 is a view of the substrate unit 650 as viewed from the front side. 93 is an exploded perspective view as seen from the front side of the substrate unit 650, and FIG. 94 is a front view as seen from the front side of the frame substrate holder 651 that forms the main body of the substrate unit 650. 95 is a rear view of the frame substrate holder 651, FIG. 96 is a rear view of the substrate unit 650, and FIG. 97 is a substrate unit with the dispensing control substrate box 655 and the terminal substrate box 654 removed. FIG. 98 is a plan view showing a connection relationship between the boards provided in the board unit 650, and FIG. 99 is an electrical connection between the board unit 650 and the game board 4. FIG. 100 is a part of a rear view of a pachinko gaming machine showing wiring and the like between the payout control board and the board unit, and FIG. 101 is a cross-sectional view of the cross-sectional view of FIG. FIG. 102 is a front view of a game board 4 for use in the game board 4 (however, this game board 4 is a game board 4 incorporating the removal prevention mechanism shown in FIGS. 47 to 49). It is sectional drawing.

  The substrate unit 650 is attached to a plurality of holder mounting holes 175 (see FIGS. 35 and 37) formed in the lower part of the back surface of the main body frame 3. As shown in FIGS. 90 and 91, a synthetic resin is used. By attaching various substrates such as the door relay substrate 652, the power supply substrate box 653, the terminal substrate box 654, the payout control substrate box 655, the main drawer relay substrate 657, and the sub drawer relay substrate 658 to the molded frame substrate holder 651. It is configured. Among the above boards, the door relay board 652, the power board box 653, the terminal board box 654, and the payout control board box 655 are attached to the rear side of the frame board holder 651 overlapping in the front-rear direction, and the main drawer relay The substrate 657 and the auxiliary drawer relay substrate 658 are attached to the front side of the frame substrate holder 651. As will be described later, since the power supply board 686 generates and supplies + 34V, + 18V, and + 9V, it is a very high-temperature heat source, and the heat generated from the power supply board 686 increases. For this reason, the payout control board box 655 that houses the payout control board 715 is attached to the upper surface of the power supply board box 653 so as not to receive the rising heat. A metal shield heat dissipating plate 656 is attached to the back surface of the payout control board box 655 to prevent the influence of electromagnetic waves from the power supply board and the like and to dissipate heat generated from the power supply board. The relay board 657 and the sub drawer relay board 658 are covered and attached to the board cover 659. Hereinafter, each member constituting the substrate unit 650 will be described in detail.

  It should be noted that the shield heat dissipation plate 656 in the present embodiment has a shield heat dissipation as shown in FIGS. The plate surface of the plate 656 is formed as an uneven surface 656a. The heat transmitted to the payout control board 715 by the shield heat sink 656 can be kept small. The uneven surface 656a increases the contact area with the outside (outside air) to enhance the heat dissipation effect. The uneven surface 656a is desirably formed in a vertical or inclined shape so that heat can be easily dissipated when it is installed. Of course, even if the uneven surface 656a is formed on the shield heat sink 656, the shielding effect against electromagnetic waves is not impaired. The shield heat sink 656 prevents the influence of electromagnetic waves from the power supply board or the like. Thereby, since the influence of the noise by electromagnetic waves can be suppressed, the malfunctioning of the payout control board 715 accommodated in the payout control board box 655 by the influence of noise can be prevented. The shield heat dissipation function of the shield heat dissipation plate 656 is not only between the power supply board box 653 and the payout control board box 655 but also when a plurality of other board boxes are attached to the frame board holder 651 in an overlapping manner. Is also achieved by providing the same shield heat dissipating plate 656 as in the present embodiment between the substrate box located on the lower side and the substrate box located on the upper side.

  First, the frame substrate holder 651 is formed of a synthetic resin in a horizontally long shape, and as shown in FIGS. 91 and 94, a wiring opening 673 is formed on one side of the rear surface side (right side in FIG. 94). A relay board recess 660 for attaching the door relay board 652 is formed inside the wiring opening 673. The relay substrate recess 660 is formed as a square recess so as to match the outer shape of the substantially square door relay substrate 652, and on the upper and lower sides of the relay substrate recess 660, And a retaining claw 661 that is engaged with the surface of one side of the door relay substrate 652 in a state where the door relay substrate 652 is housed in the relay substrate recess 660. ing. Also, on the upper and lower sides of the relay board recess 660, there are mounting bosses 662 for engaging with engagement locking holes 685 formed on one end side of the power supply board box 653 and fastening with screws (not shown). Projected.

  In addition, on the rear surface side of the frame substrate holder 651, two wiring processing pieces 664 for locking and collecting wirings passing through the inside closer to the center than the above-described relay substrate recess 660 are formed. The wiring processing piece 664 is formed so as to project in an L shape when viewed from the side with respect to the vertical surface, and the wiring is hung between the vertical surface and the L-shaped projecting piece. ing. Further, the area from the upper part of the relay board recess 660 of the frame board holder 651 to the part that is almost closer to the other end side than the center is an area for attaching the power supply board box 653 (the lower area on the right side to be described next). Abutting protrusions 665 that contact the back surface of the power supply board box 653 are provided on the upper and lower sides. Therefore, in a state where the power supply board box 653 is attached to the power supply board box attachment area so as to contact the contact protrusion 665, there is a space between the back surface of the power supply board box 653 and the vertical surface of the frame substrate holder 651. The wirings that are formed and connect the substrates to each other are accommodated in this space, and the two wiring processing pieces 664 are those that lock and collect the accommodated wirings.

  It should be noted that the rearward projecting amount is large from the other end side of the region where the power supply board box 653 is attached to the other end side of the frame substrate holder 651 (the left side in FIG. 94). That is, when viewed from the back, the frame substrate holder 651 is formed in a stepped shape slightly on the left side of the center, with the left side being high and the right side being low, and the lower region on the right side is attached with the power supply board box 653. Area (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “power supply board box mounting area”). An insertion port 665a is formed on the other end side of the power supply board box mounting region. The insertion opening 665a is inserted into the insertion protrusion 684 that protrudes above and below the other end side of the power supply board box 653. For this reason, in order to attach the power supply board box 653, after inserting the insertion protrusion 684 into the insertion port 665a, an engagement locking hole 685 formed on one end side of the power supply board box 653 is formed on the attachment boss 662 from above. The power supply substrate box 653 can be fixed to the frame substrate holder 651 by inserting and fastening with screws (not shown).

  Furthermore, on the back side of the frame substrate holder 651, the above step-shaped high region is one of regions for attaching the payout control board box 655 (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “payout control board box attachment region”). A horizontal L-shaped concave wiring routing space 666 is formed in a part of the step-like high region. A wiring opening 674 (see FIGS. 93 to 96) is formed on the bottom surface of the wiring routing space 666, and the wirings hooked to the two wiring processing pieces 664 in the power supply board box mounting region are connected. The wiring routing space 666 and the wiring opening 674 are drawn out to the front side of the frame substrate holder 651. Further, a locking projection 667 for engaging with the engagement elastic piece 714 of the payout control board box 655 is formed in a protruding manner on the other end side (the left end side in FIG. 91) of the payout control board box mounting region. ing.

  Next, the configuration of the front side of the frame substrate holder 651 will be described. As shown in FIGS. 92, 93, and 95, an out-sphere passage 668 is inverted at the approximate center of the front side of the frame substrate holder 651. It is formed in an L shape. The out ball passage 668 is formed broadly at the upper side so as to correspond to the out port 256 (see FIG. 45), the downstream side of the ball discharge passage 173 (see FIG. 35), and the drop port 272 (see FIG. 42). The downstream side is formed narrow so that the spheres are discharged in a row. Therefore, when the board unit 650 is attached to the main body frame 3, as shown in FIG. 38, the wide upstream portion of the out ball passage 668 is positioned behind the passage support protrusion 162 that supports the lower surface of the out port 256. ing. Then, an out ball, a winning ball, or a ball without ball is discharged from the downstream end of the out ball passage 668 toward the outside of the pachinko gaming machine (generally, a collection basket on the island).

  In addition, on the front side of the frame substrate holder 651 corresponding to the payout control board box mounting region, the main drawer relay board 657 and the sub drawer relay board 658 are laterally spaced at a predetermined interval in the upper area. Drawer mounting area 670 is formed to be spaced in parallel and mounted in parallel. In the drawer attaching area 670, support holes 734 and 735 formed in the respective relay boards 657 and 658 are penetrated to be provided with drawer attaching bosses 669 for supporting the relay boards 657 and 658, respectively. The junction guide hole 676 and the guide hole 675 are formed above and below the intermediate position of the relay boards 657 and 658. As shown in FIG. 102, the joint guide holes 676 are connected to drawer connectors 730 and 732 (holder side connectors) provided on the board unit 650 side and the game board 4 when the game board 4 is attached to the main body frame 3. Joining projections 273 (see FIG. 45) formed on the board substrate holder 267 of the game board 4 are inserted so that the drawer connectors 270 and 271 (game board side connectors) provided on the side are naturally connected. Is. On the other hand, when the board unit 650 is attached to the main body frame 3, the guide hole 675 is inserted with the guide protrusion 174 (see FIG. 37) protruding from the main body frame 3, and positions the board unit 650. At the same time, the mounting work is facilitated. Further, on both the left and right sides and the lower side of the frame substrate holder 651, attachment pieces 671 for attaching the substrate unit 650 to the main body frame 3 protrude outward, and the attachment pieces 671 are attached to the attachment holes of the main body frame 3. The board unit 650 is attached to the lower part of the back surface of the main body frame 3 by fastening with screws (not shown) corresponding to the portions 175 (see FIG. 35). As shown in FIG. 37, the attachment hole 175 is formed with an outer peripheral wall that matches the outer shape of the attachment piece 671. Further, a wiring hooking piece 672 for locking the wiring is formed on the outside of the side wall on the other end side (right side in FIG. 92) of the frame substrate holder 651.

  The configuration of the frame substrate holder 651 is generally as described above, and the configuration of various substrates attached to the frame substrate holder 651 having such a configuration will be described. First, the door relay board 652 mounted in the relay board recess 660 on the rear side of the frame board holder 651 will be described. As shown in FIG. 91, the door relay board 652 has a multi-pin connector type internal connection. Terminals 680 and door frame connection terminals 681 are provided. As shown in FIG. 96, the door frame connection terminal 681 can be seen from the outside as viewed from the back, even when all the substrates are attached to the frame substrate holder 651, and is provided on the door frame 5. The door frame wiring 742 (refer to FIG. 98) such as an electric decoration part and a speaker composed of a lamp and LED to be connected to the door connection terminal 681 through the wiring opening 673. The internal connection terminal 680 is connected to a door frame connector 733 provided on the sub drawer relay board 658 by an internal wiring 743 (see FIG. 98). However, the internal wiring 743 is provided inside the frame substrate holder 651 so that the wiring processing piece 664, the wiring routing space 666, and the wiring opening 673 are laid.

  The power board box 653 to be attached to the power board box mounting area on the rear surface side of the frame board holder 651 includes a box main body 682 for fixing the power board 686 (see FIG. 97) and a cover for covering the box main body 682. And a body 683. The box main body 682 is integrally formed with engagement locking holes 685 that engage with the mounting boss 622 above and below one end thereof, and an insertion projection 684 that is inserted into the insertion port 665a above and below the other end. Are integrally formed. Further, as shown in FIG. 97, a power switch 687, a power line connector 688, a CR unit power connector 689, and a grounding portion are provided on a portion of the power supply board 686 that is not covered with the cover body 683 (the right side and lower left in FIG. A connector 690 and a payout control board power connector 691 are provided. The power switch 687 is a switch for supplying power to all electric devices of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and is turned on when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is used. The power line connector 688 connects the power line from the AC 24V (AC 24V) power line supplied to the island, and grounds the noise charged in the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the outside as the frame ground FG2. It is a connector for. The CR unit power connector 689 is a connector for supplying power to a card-type ball lending machine (not shown; generally referred to as a CR unit) adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1. . The grounding connector 690 is electrically connected with various antistatic grounding wires provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and noise or the like that has entered the pachinko gaming machine 1 is externally connected via the power line connector 688. It is a connector for grounding. Specifically, an earth wire for removing noise and the like from the door frame 5 (reinforcing plates 35 to 38) is electrically connected to the earth connector 690a as a frame ground FG3, from a sphere flowing down the tank rail member 410. An earth wire for removing noise and the like is electrically connected to the earth connector 690b as a frame ground FG1, and an earth wire for removing noise and the like from the prize ball unit 450 is electrically connected to the earth connector 690c as a frame ground FG1. The earth wire for removing noise from the CR unit is electrically connected to the earth connector 690d as the frame ground FG. These frame grounds FG, FG1, and FG3 are electrically connected to the frame ground FG2 of the power line connector 688, and are grounded to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1 through the frame ground FG2. Further, as shown in FIG. 98, a power supply wiring 744 is connected to the power supply connector 691 for the payout control board, and the power supply wiring 744 is connected to the power supply terminal 722 of the payout control board 715. Then, by this power supply wiring 744, another control board (for example, a liquid crystal control board stored in the effect control board box 266 or a main control board stored in the game control board box 268) via the payout control board 715. Etc. to supply power. The power supply wiring 744 is led from the payout control board power supply connector 691 to the wiring routing space 666 and drawn backward from the back surface of the payout control board box 655 to be connected to the power supply terminal 722. ing. That is, the power supply wiring 744 is also laid inside the frame substrate holder 651.

  By the way, as shown in FIG. 91, the rear surface of the cover body 683 of the power supply board box 653 is formed in a step shape, and an area having a high step is an attachment area 692 for attaching the terminal board box 654. Is a mounting region 693 for mounting the payout control board box 655. The attachment area 693 constitutes an attachment area for attaching the horizontally long delivery control board box 655 together with the above-mentioned delivery control board box attachment area of the frame substrate holder 651. Note that an engagement hole 696 into which an engagement piece 713 (see FIG. 93) to be described later of the payout control board box 655 is inserted is formed substantially at the center of the stepped portion.

  The cover body 683 constituting the attachment region 692 for attaching the terminal board box 654 has a positioning hole 695 that positions or engages with a positioning pin 698 and an engagement piece portion 697 formed on the back surface side of the terminal board box 654, respectively. A mounting engagement hole 694 is formed. The engagement piece portion 697 is formed in an L-shaped cross section, while the attachment engagement hole 694 is formed in a hole shape in which the wide portion and the narrow portion are continuous, so the engagement piece portion 697 is attached. After being inserted into the wide portion of the engagement hole 694, the L-shaped engagement piece 697 and the mounting engagement hole are slid in one direction (in the illustrated case, the center direction of the frame substrate holder 651). The narrow portion 694 engages. Note that a latching piece 699 protrudes from the lower portion of the other side of the terminal board box 654, and when the terminal board box 654 is slidably engaged with the cover body 683, the latching piece 699 is disengaged from the dispensing control board box 655. The box main body 710 is engaged with a part of the box main body 710. This engagement is an engagement state that is easily disengaged by applying a little force to slide the terminal board box 654 in the non-engagement direction.

  Also, in the terminal board box 654, as shown in FIG. 96, an external terminal board 700a provided with a plurality of external information terminals 701 and payout control board terminals 706, a frequency indicator terminal 702, and a power supply ground terminal 703, Two boards of a CR unit terminal board 700b on which a CR unit terminal 704 and a payout control board terminal 705 are provided are accommodated in parallel in the vertical direction. The plurality of external information terminals 701 provided on the external terminal board 700a externally (for example, installed in a game arcade) various information signals necessary for the management of the pachinko gaming machine 1, such as a jackpot information output signal and a start opening prize information output signal. The main drawer relay connector 730270, which will be described in detail later from the main control board housed in the game control board box 268, is a connector for leading out to a management computer (hall computer). 730 is transmitted to the payout control board 715, and the external terminal board terminal 718 provided on the payout control board 715 is connected to the payout control board terminal 706 to finally each of the plurality of external information terminals 701. Is transmitted to. The frequency indicator terminal 702 of the CR unit terminal board 700b is connected to the wiring of the remaining frequency indicator of the prepaid card provided on the storage tray 30, for example, the lending switch and the return switch of the pachinko gaming machine 1. is there. The power supply ground terminal 703 includes two connectors. One connector (left side in FIG. 96) is connected to the wiring from the CR unit power connector 689 of the power supply board 686, and the other connector is the power supply board 686. The wiring from one ground connector 690 among the plurality of ground connectors 690 is connected. Further, the CR unit terminal 704 is connected to wiring from a CR unit (not shown), and the CR unit terminal plate terminal 719 of the payout control board 715 and the payout control board terminal 705 are connected. Thus, the payout control board 715 and the CR unit are connected.

  As described above, the terminal board box 654 relays the connection between the external terminal board 700a for leading game information from the main control board stored in the game control board box 268 to the outside, and the payout control board 715 and the CR unit. The CR unit terminal board 700b to be housed is housed, and these are conventionally housed in separate board boxes and provided at different positions on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1, but this embodiment In FIG. 5, the terminal board box 654 is collectively attached to the frame board holder 651. For this reason, in particular, in the case of the present embodiment, the main control board and the external terminal board 700a have a unique configuration in which they are connected via the payout control board 715 without being directly connected by wiring.

  Next, the payout control board box 655 that can be mounted over the payout control board box mounting area of the frame board holder 651 and the mounting area 693 formed in the cover body 683 of the power board box 653 is mainly shown in FIGS. Reference is made to FIG. The payout control board box 655 includes a box main body 710 to which a horizontally long payout control board 715 is fixed with a screw (not shown), and a cover body 711 attached to the box main body 710 and covering the surface of the payout control board 715. , Is composed of. The box main body 710 and the cover body 711 are engaged with one side (the right side in FIG. 96) and fixed to the other side (the left side in FIG. 96) with a separation cutting part 712. Thus, in order to separate the box main body 710 and the cover body 711, the separation / cutting portion 712 must be cut so that the box main body 710 and the cover body 711 cannot be separated. However, the caulking and fixing in the separation / cutting portion 712 may be performed by caulking any one of a plurality of locations (in the case of illustration, four locations indicated by numerals 1 to 4) by, for example, inspection. If necessary, it can be done up to 3 times. Of course, in the case of an illegal separation, a cut trace remains, so that it is possible to immediately know whether there has been an illegal act. Further, an engagement piece 713 to be inserted into an engagement hole 696 formed in the cover body 683 of the power supply board box 653 is projected and formed at the center of one side short side of the box main body 710, and the other side short side lower part is formed below. An engagement elastic piece 714 that elastically engages with a locking projection 667 formed on the frame substrate holder 651 is formed. Accordingly, in order to attach the payout control board box 655 to the frame board holder 651, the engaging piece 713 is inserted into the engaging hole 696 and then the engaging elastic piece 714 is engaged with the locking protrusion 667. Easy to install. In the state where the payout control board box 655 is attached over the payout control board box attachment area of the frame board holder 651 and the attachment area 693 formed in the cover body 683 of the power supply board box 653, The payout control board box 655 is housed in a fixed state so that it cannot move in the left-right direction or the up-down direction. On the contrary, when removing, the engaging elastic piece 714 is pressed in the direction opposite to the elastic direction to disengage the engaging elastic piece 714 and the locking projection 667 and pulling up the payout control board box 655, By pulling out the engagement piece 713 from the engagement hole 696, the payout control board box 655 can be detached from the frame board holder 651.

  The dispensing control board 715 covered with the box main body 710 and the cover body 711 has a door frame opening switch terminal 716a and a body frame opening switch terminal 716b on one side (the right side in FIG. 96). , A prize ball unit terminal 717, an external terminal board terminal 718, a CR unit terminal board terminal 719, an operation handle terminal 724, an error LED display 1730, an error release switch 1731, and a ball removal switch 1732. A full switch terminal 720, an inspection output terminal 721, a power supply terminal 722, a firing motor terminal 723, and an internal connection terminal 725 are provided on the lower side (left side in FIG. 96).

  The door frame opening switch terminal 716a is a connector to which wiring from the door frame opening switch 3a that detects that the door frame 5 is opened from the main body frame 3 is connected. The main body frame opening switch terminal 716b is a connector to which wiring from the main body frame opening switch 3b for detecting that the main body frame 3 is released from the outer frame 2 is connected. The prize ball unit terminal 717 is a multi-pin connector to which the wiring from the relay board 480 of the prize ball unit 450 described above is connected. The external terminal board terminal 718 is a multi-pin connector connected to the payout control board terminal 706 of the external terminal board 700a as described above. The CR unit terminal board terminal 719 is a multi-pin connector connected to the payout control board terminal 705 of the CR unit terminal board 700b as described above. The full tank switch terminal 720 is a connector to which wiring from the full tank switch 545 of the full tank unit 520 is connected. The error LED display 1730 is a segment display, and displays the state of the pachinko gaming machine such as CR unit connection abnormality by displaying alphanumeric characters and figures. When the error cancel switch 1731 is operated, a guide for a cancel method corresponding to the error displayed on the error LED indicator 1730 flows from the speaker 34. When operated, the ball removal switch 1732 starts discharging the balls stored in the prize ball tank 400 and the tank rail member 410 (starts ball removal). The inspection output terminal 721 is a connector for connecting to an inspection device when inspecting the payout control board 715, and is a terminal for outputting various output signals for inspection. The power supply terminal 722 is a connector connected to the payout control board power supply connector 691 of the power supply board 686 by the power supply wiring 744 as described above. The launch motor terminal 723 is a connector to which wiring from the launch motor 344 of the hit ball launching device 300 is connected. The operation handle terminal 724 is a connector to which wiring from the touch switch 80 and the firing stop switch 82 provided in the operation handle portion 71 of the handle device 70 is connected. The internal connection terminal 725 is a connector connected to a payout control board connector 731 provided on the main drawer relay board 657 by a signal power line 745.

  Note that resistors R724a to R724d are arranged near the left side of the error release switch 1731 as shown in FIG. These resistors R724a to R724d are connected to the ground (GND) when noise or the like from the door frame 5 (the reinforcing plates 35 to 38 shown in FIG. 21) enters the various detection signals input to the operation handle terminal 724. Is described in detail later.

  Next, the main drawer relay board 657 and the sub drawer relay board 658 attached to the drawer attachment area 670 formed on the front side of the frame substrate holder 651 will be described. 93, the main drawer relay board 657 is connected to the main drawer connector 270 (game board side connector; see FIG. 45) provided on the relay terminal board 269 attached to the back side of the game board 4. A drawer relay connector 730 (holder-side connector), a payout control board connector 731 connected to the internal connection terminal 725 of the payout control board 715 via the signal power supply wiring 745 are provided vertically. Further, the sub drawer relay board 658 is connected to a sub drawer connector 732 (game board side connector; see FIG. 45) provided on the relay terminal plate 269 attached to the back side of the game board 4 (see FIG. 45). Holder side connector) and door frame connectors 733 connected via the internal connection terminals 680 of the door relay board 652 and the internal wiring 743 are provided vertically. The main drawer relay board 657 and the sub drawer relay board 658 are provided with support holes 734 and 735 on the left and right sides of each board, and the support holes 734 and 735 are attached to the drawer mounting area 670 so as to protrude. By inserting into the boss 669, the main drawer relay board 657 and the sub drawer relay board 658 are positioned and supported in the drawer mounting area 670, and then firmly fixed by covering with the board cover 659.

  By the way, the board cover 659 includes a main drawer relay connector 730 and a payout control board connector 731 provided on the main drawer relay board 657, and a sub drawer relay connector 732 and a door connector 733 provided on the sub drawer relay board 658. A rectangular connector opening 736, 737, 738, 739 for projecting to the outside of the board cover 659 is opened, and a pin insertion through which the tip of the drawer mounting boss 669 is inserted into the back surface side of the board cover 659. Holes 740 (see FIG. 91) are formed, and stop holes 741 for fixing the substrate cover 659 to the frame substrate holder 651 with screws (not shown) are formed on the left and right ends. For this reason, the support holes 734 and 735 of the main drawer relay board 657 and the sub drawer relay board 658 are inserted into the drawer mounting boss 669 protruding from the drawer mounting area 670, and the tip of the drawer mounting boss 669 is inserted into the pin insertion hole 740. The main drawer relay board 657 and the sub drawer relay board 658 can be firmly fixed in the drawer mounting area 670 by covering with the board cover 659 while being inserted, and fixing with a screw (not shown) in the stop hole 741.

  As described above, the configuration of the board unit 650 has been described. In the case of the present embodiment, among the various boards necessary for driving and controlling the pachinko gaming machine 1, the board unit 650 is replaced as the game board 4 is changed. Door relay board 652 which is a board other than the main control board and the liquid crystal control board, power board 686 housed in power board board box 653, external terminal board 700 housed in terminal board box 654, housed in dispensing control board box 655. The dispensing control board 715 is assembled in advance into a frame substrate holder 651 to form a unit, and the assembled and unitized board unit 650 is simply separated from the main body frame 3 by a simple operation by simply attaching it to the lower part on the back side of the main body frame 3. The work efficiency can be improved as compared with various kinds of board attaching work attached to the back surface side of FIG. Further, in this case, since the wiring between the boards unitized in the board unit 650 can be accommodated in the frame substrate holder 651, the wiring connecting the boards is not messed up and disturbed, and is laid out neatly. can do.

  In the present embodiment, a main drawer relay board 657 having a main drawer relay connector 730 (holder side connector) on the front surface of the board unit 650, and a sub drawer relay board 658 having a sub drawer relay connector 732 (holder side connector), 102, the main drawer connector of the relay terminal plate 269 provided on the back side of the game board 4 as the game board 4 is mounted on the main body frame 3 from the front side as shown in FIG. 270 and the sub drawer connector 271 (game board side connector) are connected to the corresponding main drawer relay connector 730 and sub drawer relay connector 732 (holder side connector), respectively. Can be performed simultaneously. For this reason, the exchange work of the game board 4 can be performed skillfully.

  Further, in the present embodiment, after the substrate unit 650 is fixed to the back surface of the main body frame 3, a payout control board box 655 that requires wiring connection work with various electric devices provided on the main body frame 3, and an external The terminal board box 654 that requires connection work with the CR unit and the management computer is arranged in parallel at the position at the rearmost position of the board unit 650 where it can be easily seen, while the power supply board that requires less external connection work. Since the box 653 and the door relay substrate 652 are disposed inside, a plurality of substrates can be efficiently overlapped in the front-rear direction, and the size of the substrate unit 650 can be designed to a minimum. However, in the power supply board box 653 and the door relay board 652 arranged inside, all the terminal portions connected to the outside can be visually recognized from the outside, so that the connection work becomes a frustration. There is no.

[1-12-1. Electrical connection between board unit and game board (connection using drawer connector)]
Next, electrical connection between the board unit 650 and the game board 4 will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, drawer connectors 270 and 271 are provided on the game board 4 side, and drawer connectors 730 and 732 are provided on the board unit 650 side. As shown in FIG. 99 (a), the drawer connectors 270 and 271 on the game board 4 side can be electrically connected by inserting them into the drawer connectors 730 and 732 on the board unit 650 side. As shown in FIG. 99 (b), the drawer connectors 270 and 271 on the game board 4 side are provided with terminals 270a and 271a, and the drawer connectors 730 and 732 on the board unit 650 side are shown in FIG. 99 (c). Thus, contacts 730a and 732a are provided. When the drawer connectors 270 and 271 on the game board 4 side are inserted into the drawer connectors 730 and 732 on the board unit 650 side, the terminals 270a and 271a push down the contacts 730a and 732a as shown in FIG. 99 (c). Is displaced. The repulsive force of the contacts 730a and 732a generated by this displacement is brought into electrical conduction by strongly contacting the terminals 270a and 271a. As a result, the drawer connectors 270 and 271 on the game board 4 side and the drawer connectors 730 and 732 on the board unit 650 side have various control boards (for example, the main control board and the payout control board 715). A control signal line for transmitting a control signal is formed. The drawer connector 270 on the game board 4 side and the drawer connector 730 on the board unit 650 side are further formed with voltage supply lines for supplying various voltages generated by the power supply board 686. In this way, by attaching the game board 4 to the main body frame 3 in a detachable manner, control signal lines and voltages by the drawer connectors 270 and 271 on the game board 4 side and the drawer connectors 730 and 732 on the board unit 650 side are provided. The supply line can be connected freely.

  In this embodiment, the terminals 270a and 271a and the contacts 730a and 732a are of the bellows type. In the case of the pin type, there is a risk that the pin may be inadvertently touched and bent during the work, but in the case of the bellows type, there is no such risk. Further, gold plating with a small friction coefficient is adopted for plating of the terminals 270a and 271a and the contacts 730a and 732a. As a result, good sliding (goodness of fitting) is secured when the game board 4 is attached and detached.

  Here, when the game board 4 is attached to the main body frame 3, if the operation is performed with the power switch 687 shown in FIG. 97 being turned on, the contact between the terminal 270a and the contact 730a, specifically, Since a large current (inrush current described later) flows at the contact points for various voltage supply lines, welding occurs. If the game board 4 is forcibly pushed into the main body frame 3 to be attached in this welded state, the contact 730a is bent and broken, or when the game board 4 is removed from the main body frame, the contact 730a becomes the drawer connector 730. The drawer connector 730 becomes unusable due to being peeled off and damaged.

  Further, when the terminal 270a and the contact 730a are welded, various control boards may malfunction or electronic components mounted on the various control boards may be damaged due to breakage of the connector. In view of this, in the present embodiment, a circuit for preventing welding is provided on the main control board described later. Detailed description thereof will be described later.

[1-12-2. Wiring with prize ball unit]
Next, wiring and the like between the payout control board 715 housed in the payout control board box 655 and the prize ball unit 450 will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the prize ball unit relay terminal plate 480 includes the counting switch connector 480a, the payout motor connector 480b, the rotation angle switch connector 480c, the ball break switch connector 480d, the ground connector 480e, and the payout control. A board connector 480f is provided.

  The count switch connector 480a is connected to the wire from the count switch 462, the payout motor connector 480b is connected to the wire from the payout motor 465, and the rotation angle switch connector 480c is connected to the wire from the rotation angle switch 505. The ball break switch connector 480d is connected to the wire from the ball break switch 426 of the ball passage unit 420, and the ground connector 480e is connected to the ground wire from the payout motor 465. The payout control board connector 480f is connected to the prize ball unit terminal 717 of the payout control board 715 by wiring (harness).

  The wiring from the counting switch 462, the wiring from the payout motor 465, the ground wire from the payout motor 465, and the payout control board terminal 717, excluding the wiring from the ball break switch 426 and the wiring from the rotation angle switch 505 The harness is hung by the wiring processing piece 513 and collected.

  As described above, the balls supplied from the island are stored in the prize ball tank 400 and the tank rail member 410, taken into the ball path unit 420, and guided to the prize ball unit 450. When the spheres rub against each other and are charged, electrostatic discharge occurs to generate noise. For this reason, the prize ball unit 450 is susceptible to noise and is in an environment.

  As described above, the sensor board 504 of the prize ball unit 450 is provided with the rotation angle switch 505, and the detection signal from the rotation angle switch 505 is easily affected by noise due to electrostatic discharge of the sphere. Further, the harness connecting the payout control connector 480f and the prize ball unit terminal 717, that is, the harness connecting the prize ball unit 450 and the payout control board 715, is also affected by noise due to electrostatic discharge of the ball. Cheap.

[1-13. Cover body]
Next, the cover body 750 will be described with reference to FIGS. The cover body 750 covers the rear surface opening 222 of the main body frame 3 and is inserted from above into the cover body support cylinder portion 220 formed on one side of the back surface of the main body frame 3 at one of the upper, middle, and lower sides on one side. A pivot pin 751 is formed, and an engagement piece 752 that engages with a cover body engagement groove 433 formed in the spherical passage unit 420 is formed at substantially the center of the other side. Thus, by inserting the shaft support pin 751 of the cover body 750 into the cover body support cylinder portion 220, the cover body 750 is pivotally supported on the main body frame 3 so as to be opened and closed, and the engagement piece 752 is inserted into the cover body engagement groove 433. By locking, the cover body 750 can be closed to the main body frame 3, and the back of various components provided on the game board 4 can be protected. In addition, what is necessary is just to cancel | release engagement with the engagement piece 752 and the cover body engaging groove 433, when releasing.

[1-13-1. Other embodiments of cover body]
The cover body 750 shown in FIGS. 3 and 41 (hereinafter referred to as “the cover body 750 according to the first embodiment”) is attached to the lower part of the back surface of the game board 4 as is apparent from FIG. Although it is formed so as to cover the back surface of the game board 4 excluding the game control board box 268, it may be a cover body that covers the entire back surface of the game board 4 including the game control board box 268. A pachinko gaming machine to which such a cover body 800 (hereinafter referred to as “cover body 800 according to the second embodiment”) is attached will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 103 is a perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to which the cover body 800 according to the second embodiment is attached, as viewed from the back in a state where the cover body 800 is opened, and FIG. 104 is related to the second embodiment. FIG. 105 is a side view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to which the cover body 800 is attached, and FIG. 105 is a perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to which the cover body 800 according to the second embodiment is attached, as viewed from the open side of the cover body 800. FIG. 106 is a perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to which the cover body 800 according to the second embodiment is attached and is viewed from the shaft support side of the cover body 800, and FIG. 107 is a perspective view of the second embodiment. FIG. 108 is a rear view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 with the cover body 800 attached thereto, FIG. 108 is a rear view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 with the cover body 800 removed according to the second embodiment, and FIG. FIG. 110 is a perspective view of a dispensing control board box 655 that overlaps with the lower side of the cover body 800 according to the second embodiment, and FIG. 110 is a perspective view as seen from the inside of the cover body 800 according to the second embodiment. 111 is a rear view for explaining the operation of the cylinder lock 809 provided in the cover body 800 according to the second embodiment, FIG. 112 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA of FIG. 107, and FIG. 107 is a sectional view taken along line BB in FIG. 107, and FIG. 114 is a sectional view taken along line CC in FIG. In FIGS. 103 to 114, the same reference numerals are given to the configurations that exhibit the same functions as the configurations displayed in the previous drawings.

  As shown in FIGS. 103 and 104, the outer frame 2A of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to which the cover body 800 according to the second embodiment is attached is the outer frame 2A according to the second embodiment described above, and the door frame 5 The shape of the storage tray 30 provided in the is slightly different. Further, the structure of the main body frame 3 is also a point of a locking wall 831 having a retaining hole 830, a locking hole 832 and a guide hole 833, which will be described later, formed on the open end side of the right rear wall 196 (see FIG. 108), and the rear side wall. The third side wall 192 and the fourth side wall 193 are different in that the positions of the notch portions 221 of the third side wall 192 and the fourth side wall 193 are extended downward (see FIG. 104), and also in the configuration of the dispensing control board box 655, The only difference is that a low contact surface 711a is formed on the cover body 711 (see FIG. 109). However, the game control board box 268 displayed in FIG. 103 and FIG. 108 is attached to the board substrate holder 267 attached to the lower back of the game board 4 as in the embodiment shown in FIG. In FIG. 103 and FIG. 108, illustration of the game board 4 is omitted.

  First, the cover body 800 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The cover body 800 is formed of a synthetic resin in a dish shape with a slightly vertically long peripheral side wall standing up (a large number of air holes are formed in the upper half of the side wall portion and the rectangular plate portion). A plurality of (four in the illustrated example) pivot pins 801 are integrally formed on the side wall on one side of the vertical side and inserted into the cover body support cylinder portion 220 formed on the body frame 3 and pivotally supported. An engagement piece 802 that engages with the cover body engagement groove 433 formed in the spherical passage unit 420 is formed integrally with the side wall on the other side of the vertical side. As with the cover body 750 according to the first embodiment, the shaft support pin 801 and the engagement piece 802 are inserted into the cover body support cylinder portion 220 by inserting the shaft support pin 801 of the cover body 800 into the main body. The cover body 800 can be closed to the main body frame 3 by pivotally supporting the frame 3 so as to be freely opened and closed and engaging the engagement piece 802 in the cover body engagement groove 433. The back of various components including the game control board box 268 to be played can be protected. The difference between the cover body 800 according to the second embodiment and the cover body 750 according to the first embodiment is that the cover body 800 is not simply provided to be openable and closable, but cannot be illegally opened in the closed state. And a test terminal for connecting a RAM clear switch 268a that is exposed to the outside to the game control board box 268 and an inspection device because the cylinder lock 809 is provided on the back of the game control board box 268. The connection operation opening 803 is provided at a position corresponding to 268b and 268c and the surface of the cover body 711 of the dispensing control board box 655 is contacted with the front end side of the lower side wall of the cover body 800 closed. It is a point of contact. Therefore, a characteristic configuration of the cover body 800 according to the second embodiment will be described below.

  First, the connection operation opening 803 will be described. The connection operation opening 803 is formed in a rectangular shape on the upper side of the lower contact side wall 806 of the lower side of the cover body 800, and the size thereof is as shown in FIG. The RAM clear switch 268a provided exposed to the outside of the game control board box 268 and the test terminals 268b and 268c to which the inspection device is connected are opened. In addition, a standing wall 804 that abuts on the outer peripheral surface of the game control board box 268 in a closed state and an abutment protrusion 805 project from the inside of the connection operation opening 803. The standing wall 804 is formed relatively high along the left and right opening edges of the connection operation opening 803, and the contact protrusion 805 protrudes relatively low from the upper opening edge of the connection operation opening 803 along the one side opening edge. These standing walls 804 and contact protrusions 805 are formed on the outer peripheral surface of the game control board box 268 (the surface of the main control board housed in the game control board box 268, as shown in FIGS. 112 and 113). In order to prevent an illegal act from being performed on the game control board box 268 by inserting an unauthorized tool from the connection operation opening 803.

  Next, the contact lower side wall 806 formed on the lower side of the cover body 800 will be described. When the cover body 800 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the contact lower side wall 806 is shown in FIGS. As described above, the upper side portion of the cover body 711 of the payout control board box 655 attached to the frame side board holder 651 is brought into contact. Therefore, the upper side of the cover body 711 of the payout control board box 655 mounted on the frame side board holder 651 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to which the cover body 800 according to the second embodiment is attached is shown in FIG. A contact low step surface 711a formed lower than the surface is formed. Accordingly, the payout control board box 655 attached to the frame side substrate holder 651 is formed in the payout control board box attachment region of the frame board holder 651 and the cover body 683 of the power supply board box 653 as shown in FIG. In a state of being attached over the attachment region 693, the payout control board box 655 is housed in the attachment region 693, and is fixed so as not to move in the left-right direction and the up-down direction. For this reason, the abutting low step surface 711a that is a part of the upper surface of the cover body 711 of the payout control board box 655 is abutted and covered by the abutting lower side wall 806 of the cover body 800, so that the cover body 800 is not opened. As long as the payout control board box 655 can not be removed from the frame side board holder 651.

  Next, a configuration related to the cylinder lock 809 will be described. In FIG. 110, an elliptical lock hole 808 for penetrating the cylinder lock 809 is formed near the lower side of the cover body 800. A threaded part 810 having an elliptical cross section of the cylinder lock 809 is passed through the lock hole 808, and a nut 812 is screwed into the threaded part 810 from the inside to fix the cylinder lock 809 to the lock hole 808. In addition, the cylinder lock 809 has a lock shaft 811 protruding from the center of the screw portion 810 toward the inside of the cover body 800, and the lock shaft 811 is a screw that is drilled in the lower portion of the oval shaped locking piece 813. The locking piece 813 is fixed to the rear end portion of the cylinder lock 809 by passing through the hole 814 and fastening with a nut 815. With this configuration, the locking piece 813 can be rotated in a range of 90 degrees by inserting a key (owned by a manager in the game hall) into the cylinder lock 809 and rotating it. Yes. In addition, a guide protrusion 816 for instructing opening / closing when the cover body 800 is closed protrudes inward from the lower portion of the keyhole 808. Further, a screw hole 807 for screwing a screw is formed in the upper part on the open side of the cover body 800 and above and below the engagement piece 802.

  On the other hand, a stop hole 830, a lock hole 832, and a guide hole 833 are formed on the main body frame 3 side so as to correspond to the screw stop hole 807, the lock piece 813, and the guide protrusion 816. This structure will be described with reference to FIG. 108. As described above, the cover body contact groove 217 is formed on the right rear wall 196 of the main body frame 3 as described above. Stop holes 830 corresponding to the screw holes 807 are formed in the upper and lower portions (up and down with the cover body engaging groove 433 of the ball passage unit 420 interposed). Further, as shown in FIG. 111, a locking wall 831 extends in the vertical center line direction of the main body frame 3 below the right rear wall 196 of the main body frame 3. In addition, a locking hole 832 and a guide hole 833 are formed. The locking hole 832 is formed in an elliptical shape so that the locking piece 813 passes therethrough, and a reinforcing rib protrudes from the locking wall 831 around the front side of the locking hole 832.

  Thus, by rotating the cover body 800 from the open state to the closed state, the guide protrusion 816 is inserted into the guide hole 833 and the locking piece 813 of the cylinder lock 809 is locked as shown in FIG. It will be in the state which penetrated the hole 832. In this state, by inserting a key into the cylinder lock 809 and turning it, the locking piece 813 rotates 90 degrees as shown in FIG. 111 (B), and one end of the locking piece 813 is connected to the front side of the locking wall 831. Engage. For this reason, the cover body 800 is locked to the main body frame 3. Further, since the cover body 800 is locked by the cylinder lock 809 at the lower portion of the cover body 800, the screw holes that are matched in the closed state are used to fix the upper portion of the cover body 800 to the main body frame 3. The upper portion of the cover body 800 is also fixed to the main body frame 3 by screwing screws (not shown) into the 807 and the stop holes 830. In addition, a cylinder lock may be provided also in the upper part of the cover body 800, and the cover body 800 may be locked to the main body frame 3 by a cylinder lock up and down.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 104, the cover body 800 according to the second embodiment is in a closed state, and the back side thereof is the rearmost end portion of the prize ball tank 400 (in this embodiment, the rear of the discharge port 404). The surface wall) and the rear end wall of the tank rail member 410 and the same vertical surface when viewed from the side. For this reason, when viewed from the back of the pachinko gaming machine 1, there is no unevenness from the upper part to the lower side of the back side, and the shape is extremely refreshing. Because it is uniform and easy to grasp, it is easy to load and superimpose, and even when it is actually installed on the island base of the game hall, on the back of the pachinko machines 1 lined up on the back, the opponent's pachinko machine It can be installed very smoothly without worrying about wiring protruding from the back of the panel. This point also has the same effect as shown in FIG. 4 in the pachinko gaming machine 1 using the cover body 750 according to the first embodiment.

  In the second embodiment described above, the reason why the cover body 800 is closed by both the upper screw and the lower cylinder lock 809 is that the cover body 800 is the same as the first embodiment. Since the covering area is larger in the vertical direction than the cover body 750, the upper and lower portions may be deformed by heat if the closed state is maintained only at the center of the cover body 800. It was configured to hold. As the second reason, as described above, since the abutting lower side wall 806 of the cover body 800 is brought into contact with the upper side portion of the dispensing control board box 655, the lower side portion of the cover body 800 cannot be particularly opened. In addition, it is necessary to firmly maintain the closed state of the lower portion of the cover body 800, and as a result, the upper portion of the cover body 800 must be closed. For this second reason, in order to maintain the closed state of the lower side portion in particular, a locking device such as the cylinder lock 809 (not limited to the cylinder lock, any locking device that can be unlocked only by a game hall administrator may be used. ) Is desirable.

  The cover body 800 according to the second embodiment has been described above. The cover body 800 according to the second embodiment has a lower side portion of the cover body 800 when the cover body 800 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3. Since the abutting lower side wall 806 abuts and covers the upper side portion of the cover body 711 of the dispensing control board box 655 attached to the frame side substrate holder 651, the dispensing control is performed unless the cover body 800 is opened. The substrate box 655 cannot be detached from the frame side substrate holder 651. Further, since the cover body 800 is locked by the cylinder lock 809, not only illegal acts on the game control board box 268 covered by the cover body 800 but also illegal actions on the payout control board box 655 not covered by the cover body 800 are prevented. be able to. Even when the cover body 800 is closed and the cylinder lock 809 is locked, since the connection operation opening 803 is opened in the cover body 800, the test terminals 268b and 268c for testing are inspected. The RAM clear switch 268a can be operated when a device is connected or when software or the like runs away and recovers. Since the standing wall 804 and the contact protrusion 805 are formed inside the connection operation opening 803 so that no gap is formed between the game control board box 268 and the connection operation opening 803. A piano wire or the like can be inserted to prevent fraudulent acts on the back of the game board 4.

  Furthermore, the cover body 800 according to the second embodiment is in a closed state, and the back side thereof is the same vertical plane when viewed from the rear end wall of the prize ball tank 400 and the rear end wall of the tank rail member 410. Therefore, when viewed from the back of the pachinko gaming machine 1, there is no unevenness from the upper part to the lower part of the back side, and the shape is extremely refreshing. Since the thickness is uniform and easy to grasp, it is easy to load and superimpose, and even when actually installed on the island base of the amusement hall, the pachinko of the opponent on the back of the pachinko machines 1 that are lined up backwards It can be installed very smoothly without worrying about wiring protruding from the back of the gaming machine.

  As mentioned above, although embodiment was described, in the above-mentioned embodiment, what showed only one storage tray 30 in the door frame 5 was shown, but it is not necessarily one and it is the same as the past. In a pachinko gaming machine having an upper plate and a lower plate, the door frame and the main body frame can be separated from each other, an operation handle portion is provided on the door frame, and a ball hitting device is provided on the main body frame. Further, in the above-described embodiment, the operation handle portion 71 and the joint unit 90 constituting the handle device 70 are provided on the door frame 5, but the operation handle is attached to the mounting plate fixed to the lower front portion of the main body frame 3. The part 71 and the joint unit 90 may be provided. In this case, the joint unit 90 and the slide member 350 may be integrally formed. Further, the configuration of the shape of the slide projecting piece 102 of the joint unit 90 and the insertion space 354 of the slide member 350 is not limited to the illustrated embodiment. For example, instead of the slide projecting piece 102, a cylindrical slide projection is used. It is also possible to employ a structure in which the slide protrusion engages with a conical hole formed in the insertion space 354. Further, in the above-described embodiment, the configuration in which the slide movement of the slide projecting piece 102 of the joint unit 90 is transmitted to the slide rod 326 via the slide member 350 and the swinging piece 321 has been described. For example, the slide member 350 and the swing piece 321 may be omitted, and the slide protrusion of the joint unit may be directly connected to the slide rod. Even in this case, the slide protrusion is formed as a cylindrical slide protrusion, and a conical hole is formed in the slide flange so that the slide protrusion and the slide flange can be smoothly engaged. The engagement between the protrusion and the conical hole may be performed smoothly.

[2. Game board configuration]
Next, the configuration of the game board 4 described above will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 115 to 119. 115 is an exploded perspective view as seen from the front of the game board, FIG. 116 is a view as seen from the arrow A in FIG. 115, FIG. 117 is an exploded perspective view as seen from the back of the game board, and FIG. 119 is a front view (partial perspective view) of FIG. When a ball launched into the game area 255 (hereinafter referred to as “game ball”) falls, a plurality of obstacle nails that play the game ball and complicate the traveling direction of the game ball are easy to see in the drawing. For this reason, illustration is omitted.

  115 and 117, the game board 4 has a decorative frame 251 having an out port 256 formed at the bottom, a plurality of appropriately shaped through ports 250a attached to the front surface of the decorative frame 251. Further, a center unit 1200, a prize opening unit 1210, a decoration unit 1220, and a gate are attached to the front surface of the veneer board 250 so as to cover the substantially square veneer board 250 and a plurality of through holes 250a formed in the veneer board 250. 1455, a winning space forming cover body 265a attached to the rear surface of the plywood board 250, a loop unit 1570 attached to the rear surface of the winning space forming cover body 265a at a position corresponding to the center unit 1200, and the loop unit 1570 Liquid crystal module 157 attached to the rear surface And a lamp driving substrate box 1765 is configured to include a board substrate holder 267 mounted on the rear surface lower side of the veneer board 250.

  The game board 4 has a decorative frame 251 attached to the front surface of the veneer board 250 so that an area surrounded by the inner running surface 253 formed on the decorative frame 251 is partitioned and formed as a game area 255. . As described above, when a game ball is launched by the hit ball launching device 300, the launched game ball slides along the outer running surface 252 formed in the decorative frame 251 and is guided into the game area 255. The ball enters a winning opening formed in the center unit 1200, the winning opening unit 1210, or the decoration unit 1220, or is collected by the out opening 256 formed in the decorative frame 251. A function display unit 1225 (see FIG. 118) for displaying the progress of the game, which will be described later, is attached to the rear surface of the decorative frame 251 on the lower right side when viewed from the front of the decorative frame 251.

  The game balls that have entered the winning openings formed in the center unit 1200, the winning opening unit 1210, and the decoration unit 1220 are aligned and guided downstream by the winning space forming cover body 265a. The winning space forming cover body 265a is molded of a transparent synthetic resin, and is located in a position corresponding to an elliptical opening 1200aa (see FIG. 118) of the center unit 1200 described later, and has a hollow elliptical shape whose interior is elliptical. An opening 265aa is formed. The size of the elliptical opening 265aa is slightly larger than the elliptical opening 1200aa of the center unit 1200.

  On the front surface of the winning space forming cover body 265a attached to the rear surface of the plywood board 250, as shown in FIG. A discharge guiding passage 265ab for guiding the game ball that has entered the winning opening 1270 to the downstream side is formed, and enters the middle starting winning opening 1330 at a position corresponding to the middle starting winning opening 1330 (see FIG. 118) of the winning opening unit 1210. A discharge guide passage 265ac for guiding the ball that has been sphered to the downstream side is formed, and the winning port unit side normal winning port 1440 is located at a position corresponding to the winning port unit side normal winning port 1440 (see FIG. 118) of the winning port unit 1210. A discharge guide passage 265ad for guiding the game ball that has entered the ball to the downstream side is formed, and the decoration unit side of the decoration unit 1220 is formed. A discharge guiding passage 265ae for guiding the game ball that has entered the decoration unit side normal prize opening 1465 to the downstream side is formed at a position corresponding to the pass prize opening 1465 (see FIG. 118), and the decoration unit side normal prize of the decoration unit 1220 is formed. A discharge guide passage 265af is formed at a position corresponding to the mouth 1470 (see FIG. 118) to guide the game ball that has entered the decoration unit side normal winning port 1470 to the downstream side. The discharge guide passage 265af is formed in communication with a discharge guide passage 265ae that guides the game ball that has entered the decoration unit side normal winning port 1465 to the downstream side.

  A mounting portion 265ag is formed on the upstream side of the discharge guide passage 265ab to which an upper start port switch 1272 for detecting a game ball that has entered the upper start winning port 1270 is attached. A mounting portion 265ah to which a middle start port switch 1360 for detecting a game ball that has entered the port 1330 is attached is formed, and a game ball that has entered the normal port unit side normal winning port 1440 is located downstream of the discharge guide passage 265ad. A mounting portion 265am to which a right winning port switch 1450 to be detected is attached is formed, and a left winning port switch 1475 for detecting a game ball that has entered the decoration unit side normal winning ports 1465, 1470 is formed on the downstream side of the discharge guiding passage 265ae. A mounting portion 265an to be mounted is formed. In addition, a mounting portion 265ap to which a magnetic detection switch 1395 for detecting magnetism is attached is formed in the vicinity of the position corresponding to the middle start winning port 1330 and the lower starting winning port 1340 (see FIG. 118) on the front surface of the winning space forming cover body 265a. ing.

  A game ball that has flowed down along the discharge guide passages 265ab to 265af, a game ball that has entered the lower start winning port 1340 of the winning port unit 1210, and a game that has entered the big winning port 1400 (see FIG. 118) of the winning port unit 1210 The balls and the game balls collected at the out port 256 are collected by the board substrate holder 267 and discharged to a collection basket inside an island (not shown) (hereinafter referred to as “Pachinko island equipment”). It has become. A game control board box 268 that houses the main control board 1700 (see FIG. 142) and the like for controlling the game operation described above is attached to the rear surface of the board substrate holder 267.

  As shown in FIGS. 115 and 117, the liquid crystal module 1571 attached to the substantially center of the rear surface of the loop unit 1570 is attached to the rear surface of the horizontally long rectangular 17-inch liquid crystal display 1315 and the liquid crystal display 1315. The effect control board box 266a and the inverter board box 1756 attached to the rear surface of the liquid crystal display 1315 adjacent to the effect control board box 266a. The effect control board box 266a accommodates a sub-integrated board 1740 that performs various controls relating to effects, and a liquid crystal control board 1750 that controls drawing of the liquid crystal display 1315. An inverter board box 1756 is built in the liquid crystal display 1315. An inverter board 1755 that supplies power to a backlight (cold cathode tube) (not shown) to control lighting of the backlight is housed.

  A lamp driving board box 1765 attached below the liquid crystal module 1571 on the rear surface of the loop unit 1570 outputs a gradation lighting signal or the like to a gradation lamp 1240 or the like (see FIG. 118) attached to the center unit 1200. A drive substrate 1760 is accommodated.

  Here, the difference between the winning space forming cover body 265 shown in FIG. 45 and the winning space forming cover body 265a shown in FIGS. 115 to 118 will be described. The winning space forming cover body 265 shown in FIG. The effect control board box 266 is attached to the rear surface, whereas the loop unit 1570 is attached to the rear surface of the winning space forming cover body 265a shown in FIGS. The board box 266 is attached (the winning space forming cover body 265a is greatly different in shape from the winning space forming cover body 265. For this reason, the winning space forming cover body 265 has a sign at the end. "A" is attached). 44 is different from the veneer board 250 shown in FIGS. 115 and 117 in that the center unit 1200 and the like are attached to the veneer board 250 shown in FIGS. 115 and 117. The point 250a is formed. Furthermore, the difference between the decoration 251 shown in FIG. 44 and the decoration frame 251 shown in FIGS. 115, 117, and 118 is that the decoration display unit 251 shown in FIGS. 115, 117, and 118 has a function display unit. 1225 is attached.

  A detailed description of the display of the progress of the game by the center unit 1200, the prize opening unit 1210, the decoration unit 1220, and the function display unit 1225 and the loop unit 1570 will be described later.

[2-1. Center unit]
Next, the center unit 1200 attached to the front surface of the veneer board 250 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 118 and 119.

  As shown in FIG. 118, the center unit 1200 is attached to the veneer board 250 at the upper center of the game area 255, and is a frame-shaped decorative member with an annular decoration having an elliptical cavity-shaped elliptical opening 1200aa. A curved decoration member 1200b that is curved and decorated along the outer periphery from the upper right side to the lower right side from the upper side thereof has a shape that is formed in a substantially nine-letter shape as a whole. An approximately square emblem 1200c, which is a symbol of the game board 4, is formed on the upper side of the frame-shaped decorative member 1200a so as to cover a portion where the frame-shaped decorative member 1200a and the curved decorative member 1200b are circumscribed. On the rear surface of the frame-shaped decorative member 1200a, a thin-walled partition wall plate 1285 molded with a transparent synthetic resin is attached so as to close the elliptical opening 1200aa of the frame-shaped decorative member 1200a. By attaching the center unit 1200 configured as described above to the veneer board 250, the outer peripheral surface of the curved decorative member 1200b and the outer sliding surface 252 formed on the decorative frame 251 and one side of the inner sliding surface 253 are formed. (A right side when viewed from the front) is formed as an outlet guidance passage 255a. When the game ball launched into the game area 255 enters the out-port guide passage 255a, the invaded game ball rolls along the out-port guide passage 255a and is guided to the out port 256 formed in the decorative frame 251. It has come to be.

[2-1-1. Frame-shaped decorative member]
On the left side of the frame-shaped decorative member 1200a facing the elliptical opening 1200aa, a warp member 1260 that takes in the game ball launched into the game area 255 and guides it downward to face the elliptical opening 1200aa of the frame-shaped decorative member 1200a is attached. It has been. The warp member 1260 includes a warp intrusion member 1260a into which a game ball launched into the game area 255 can enter, and a game ball that has entered the warp intrusion member 1260a in communication with the warp intrusion member 1260a. And a guide passage 1260b for guiding the oval opening 1200aa to the lower side. The guide passage 1260b has a shape along the outer shape of the elliptical opening 1200aa.

  An upper start winning opening 1270 is formed on the lower side of the center facing the elliptical opening 1200aa of the frame-shaped decorative member 1200a. In front of the upper start winning opening 1270, as shown in FIG. 119, an upper stage 1250 capable of rolling the game ball guided by the warp member 1260 in the left-right direction is formed. A lower stage 1252 is formed which can receive a game ball flowing out from the upper stage 1250 and roll it in the left-right direction. The upper stage 1250 has a curved surface that follows the outer shape of the elliptical opening 1200aa, and a peak 1250a that swells upward is formed at the center of the upper stage 1250. A trough 1250b is formed. A guide groove 1250aa for guiding a game ball to the upper start winning prize opening 1270 is formed on the top of the mountain portion 1250a. The guide groove 1250aa is inclined downward so that the game ball rolls from the mountain portion 1250a toward the upper start winning opening 1270. In the valley 1250b, an inclined groove 1250ba is formed for allowing the game ball rolling on the upper stage 1250 to flow down to the lower stage 1252. The inclined groove 1250ba is inclined forward and downward toward the lower stage 1252. A partition wall 1254 that partitions the upper stage 1250 and the lower stage 1252 is formed between the upper stage 1250 and the lower stage 1252 so as to protrude upward in a shape along the curved surface of the upper stage 1250. In this partition wall 1254, a communication portion 1254a is formed at a position corresponding to the inclined groove 1250ba formed in the valley portion 1250b, and a guide port 1254b is formed below the guide groove 1250aa formed in the peak portion 1250a. As described above, when the game ball guided by the warp member 1260 rolls in the left-right direction along the upper stage 1250 and climbs up the mountain portion 1250a to get over the guide groove 1250aa, the game ball is moved into the guide groove 1250aa. If the momentum of climbing the mountain portion 1250a is lost, the game ball rolls in the valley portion 1250b in the left-right direction, and then in the left-right direction in the inclined groove 1250ba. , It flows out to the front of the upper stage 1250 through the communication portion 1254a and is received by the lower stage 1252.

  The lower stage 1252 has a curved surface along the outer shape of the elliptical opening 1200aa. In the center of the lower stage 1252, an inclined groove 1252 a is formed for allowing a game ball rolling on the lower stage 1252 to flow down to the lower game area 255. The inclined groove 1252a is inclined forward and downward toward a game area 255 directly above a middle start winning port 1330 (see FIG. 118) of a winning port unit 1210 described later. In addition, a guide groove 1252aa for guiding the game ball toward the guide port 1254b formed in the partition wall 1254 is formed in the center of the inclined groove 1252a. The guide groove 1252aa is inclined backward and downward so that the game ball rolls toward the guide port 1254b. A decorative plate 1256 is formed on the front surface of the lower stage 1252 so as to protrude upward in a shape along the curved surface of the lower stage 1252. The decorative plate 1256 has a communication portion 1256a formed at a position corresponding to the inclined groove 1252a, and an opening 1256b is formed below the communication portion 1256a. Inside the lower stage 1252, a guide passage 1252 b is formed that communicates the guide port 1254 b formed in the partition wall 1254 and the opening 1256 b formed in the decorative plate 1256. The opening 1256 b opens in the game area 255 just above the middle start winning opening 1330 in the winning opening unit 1210. In this way, the game ball that has flowed down from the upper stage 1250 and received by the lower stage 1252 rolls in the left-right direction along the lower stage 1252, and then only gets over the guide groove 1252aa formed in the inclined groove 1252a. When the momentum disappears, it is guided to the guide port 1254b along the guide groove 1252aa and flows forward from the opening 1256b through the guide passage 1252b, while the communication portion while rolling in the left and right directions in the inclined groove 1252a. It flows out to the front of the lower stage 1252 through 1256a. In this embodiment, the width of the guide passage 1252b is formed so that one game ball can pass, and the width of the communication portion 1256a is formed about 3.3 times the width of the guide passage 1252b, and the opening 1256b. The range in which the game ball flows out to the front of the lower stage 1252 through the communication portion 1256a is larger than the range in which the game ball flows out from the front. This makes it easier for the game ball flowing out from the opening 1256b to enter the middle start winning opening 1330 in the winning opening unit 1210 as compared to the game ball flowing out to the front of the lower stage 1252 through the communication portion 1256a. Yes.

  As shown in FIG. 118, the frame-shaped decorative member 1200a has a gradation lamp 1240 whose brightness changes smoothly so as to emit light forward along the vicinity of the outer periphery of the frame-shaped decorative member 1200a. A gradation lamp 1240 whose brightness changes smoothly so as to emit light is attached overlapping in the front-rear direction. In addition, a guide passage (not shown) for guiding the game ball that has entered the upper start winning opening 1270 to the above-described discharge guide passage 265ab formed in the winning space forming cover body 265a is formed inside the frame-shaped decorative member 1200a. Has been.

[2-1-2. Curved decorative member]
As shown in FIG. 118, the curved decorative member 1200b curved along the outer periphery from the upper side to the lower right side of the frame-shaped decorative member 1200a has a right where the upper start winning opening 1270 formed in the frame-shaped decorative member 1200a is arranged. On the other hand, a patrol device 1235 is attached. The patrol lamp device 1235 includes a lighting lamp 1235a, a reflecting mirror (not shown) that rotates around the lighting lamp 1235a, and a motor 1235b that rotates the reflecting mirror via a speed reducer (not shown). Yes. When the rotation of the output shaft of the motor 1235b is transmitted to the reflecting mirror through the reduction gear, the reflecting mirror rotates around the lighting lamp 1235a, so that the light emitted from the lighting lamp 1235a is reflected by the reflecting mirror. Proceed to, and it appears to turn on.

  A gradation lamp 1240 whose brightness changes smoothly along the vicinity of the outer periphery of the curved decorative member 1200b is attached inside the curved decorative member 1200b. Is attached.

[2-1-3. emblem]
Behind the emblem 1200c, which is a symbol of the game board 4, is a position where vehicles 1572c and 1573c (see FIG. 125), which will be described later, run along the vicinity of the outer periphery of the elliptical opening 1200aa of the frame-shaped decorative member 1200a. In other words, it is the original position (standby position) of the cars 1572c and 1573c. In a state where the cars 1572c and 1573c are waiting at the original position, the cars 1572c and 1573c are in a state where it is difficult to see from the front of the game board 4 because they are hidden by the emblem 1200c.

[2-2. Winning prize unit]
Next, the winning a prize opening unit 1210 attached to the front surface of the veneer board 250 will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 118, the winning opening unit 1210 is attached to a veneer board 250 below the opening 1256b of the center unit 1200. The prize opening unit 1210 includes a decorative plate 1210a in which a vertically long rectangular plate is circumscribed at the center of the upper side of the horizontally long rectangular horizontal plate and is formed in a substantially inverted T shape as a whole and decorated. An intermediate start winning port 1330 formed by opening a substantially cubic upper surface protruding forward from the front surface of the decorative plate 1210a on the upper side of the vertical plate of 1210a, and a decorative plate below the intermediate start winning port 1330 An open / close-type lower start winning port 1340 formed by opening an upper surface of a substantially pentagonal column projecting forward from the front surface of the decorative plate 1210a on the lower side of the vertical plate of 1210a, and below the lower start winning port 1340 An attacker device 1350 attached to the center of the horizontal plate of the decorative plate 1210a and a decorative plate 1210a on the left side of the attacker device 1350 and on the left side of the horizontal plate of the decorative plate 1210a. And it is configured to include a winning port unit side ordinary winning holes 1440 formed by an opening in the side surface the upper left side projects forward, against the front face. The decorative plate 1210a has a substantially bilaterally symmetric shape, and on its central axis, there are an intermediate start winning port 1330, a lower start winning port 1340, and an attacker device 1350 in order from the upper side to the lower side of the decorative plate 1210a. Is arranged. An opening 1256b of the center unit 1200 is disposed on a line extending the central axis of the decorative plate 1210a upward, and an out opening 256 formed in the decorative frame 251 is disposed on a line extending downward.

[2-2-1. Middle start prize opening]
Inside the cube in which the middle start winning opening 1330 is formed, the game ball that has entered the middle starting winning opening 1330 is guided to the discharge guide passage 265ac formed in the winning space forming cover 265a described above. A guide passage is formed.

[2-2-2. Lower start prize opening]
On the rear surface of the decorative plate 1210a, a lower start opening / closing unit (not shown) that opens and closes a pair of opening and closing blades 1380 that open and close the lower start winning opening 1340 is attached at a position corresponding to the lower start winning opening 1340. The lower start port opening / closing unit includes an opening / closing blade solenoid 1390 in which a compression spring (not shown) is inserted into a plunger (not shown) that moves forward and backward in the front-rear direction, and an opening / closing blade 1380 that moves forward and backward of the plunger attached to the front of the opening / closing blade solenoid 1390. And a link mechanism (not shown) for converting into the opening / closing operation. Here, the operation of the lower start port opening / closing unit will be briefly described. When a winning signal is inputted in the normal lottery described later, when a drive signal is input to the opening / closing blade solenoid 1390, the plunger retracts and the compression spring contracts, and the link mechanism As a result, the rotating shafts 1380 are rotated in directions away from each other around a rotation shaft (not shown) formed on the lower side of the opening / closing blades 1380, and the opening / closing blades 1380 are opened. In this state, the opening width of the opening / closing blade 1380 is larger than the width of the upper surface opening of the cube in which the medium start winning opening 1330 is formed, and the opening / closing blade 1380 and the cube in which the medium starting winning opening 1330 is formed are A gap is widened, and a game ball can enter from this gap. Thereby, it will be in the open state in which a game ball is easy to enter the lower start winning opening 1340. On the other hand, when the drive signal is not input to the opening / closing blade solenoid 1390, the plunger moves forward by the restoring force of the compression spring, and rotates in a direction approaching each other with the rotation shaft formed on the lower side of the opening / closing blade 1380 by the link mechanism. The opening / closing blade 1380 is closed. In this state, the opening and closing blades 1380 stand upright, and the opening width of the opening and closing blades 1380 is substantially the same as the width of the upper surface opening of the cube in which the medium start winning opening 1330 is formed. The gap between the cube formed with the mouth 1330 and the cube is narrowed, and the game ball cannot enter from this gap. As a result, the game ball enters a closed state in which it is difficult to enter the lower start winning opening 1340.

  A guide passage (not shown) for guiding a game ball that has entered the lower start winning port 1340 to the downstream side is formed inside the pentagonal column in which the lower start winning port 1340 is formed. This guide passage communicates with a guide passage (not shown) formed in the lower start port opening / closing unit. An attachment portion (not shown) to which a lower start opening switch 1370 for detecting a game ball that has entered the lower start winning opening 1340 is attached is formed on the upstream side of the guide passage.

  In addition, on the lower left rear of the cube in which the middle start winning opening 1330 is formed and on the upper left rear of the pentagonal column in which the lower starting winning opening 1340 is formed, the above-described attachment portion 265ap of the winning space forming cover body 265a is provided. An attached magnetic detection switch 1395 is arranged. As described above, the magnetism detection switch 1395 detects magnetism, and in this embodiment, an illegal act of guiding a game ball to the middle start winning opening 1330 and the lower starting winning opening 1340 by using a magnet. It is used to detect. Here, there is a reed switch type as a magnetic detection switch. This reed switch type magnetic detection switch can detect magnetism in a specific direction, and the switch closes when magnetism is detected. By the way, when a drive signal is input to the opening / closing blade solenoid 1390, magnetism is generated from the opening / closing blade solenoid 1390. As described above, the reed switch type magnetic detection switch can detect magnetism in a specific direction. Therefore, when a reed switch type magnetic detection switch is attached to the attachment portion 265ap of the winning space forming cover body 265a in the vicinity of the middle start winning opening 1330 and the lower starting winning opening 1340, the magnetism by the opening / closing blade solenoid 1390 is detected in advance. It is necessary to design in consideration of the direction of the mounting portion 265ap. However, in the reed switch type magnetic detection switch, it is difficult to detect this approach if the magnet is approached to the middle start winning opening 1330 or the lower starting winning opening 1340, pretending to be magnetism generated from the opening / closing blade solenoid 1390. It becomes difficult to detect an illegal act that causes a game ball to enter the middle start winning opening 1330 or the lower starting winning opening 1340 with a magnet. Therefore, in this embodiment, a rotation angle sensor (for example, AE-8001 manufactured by Asahi Kasei Electronics Co., Ltd.) in which two Hall elements (for example, manufactured by Asahi Kasei Electronics Co., Ltd .: HZ-166C) are used as the magnetic detection switch 1395 is used. ing. Specifically, the magnetism generated by the hall element A is detected as an analog quantity, and the magnetism generated from the opening / closing blade solenoid 1390 by the other hall element B is detected as an analog quantity. The rotation angle sensor detects the magnetism generated from multiple directions by subtracting the analog amount from the Hall element B from the analog amount from the Hall element A. Thereby, it is possible to detect an illegal act of causing a game ball to enter the middle start winning opening 1330 or the lower starting winning opening 1340 with a magnet.

[2-2-3. Attacker device]
The attacker device 1350 includes a horizontally long rectangular prize-winning opening 1400, an opening-and-closing board 1410 that opens and closes the prize-winning opening 1400, and an opening-and-closing-plate solenoid in which a compression spring (not shown) is inserted into a plunger (not shown) that moves forward and backward. 1420, and a link mechanism (not shown) that is attached in front of the opening / closing plate solenoid 1420 and converts the forward / backward movement of the plunger into the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing plate 1410. Here, the operation of the attacker device 1350 will be briefly described. When a winning signal is input in the special lottery described later, when a drive signal is input to the opening / closing plate solenoid 1420, the plunger retracts and the compression spring contracts, and the link mechanism opens and closes it. It is assumed that the opening / closing plate 1410 is opened by rotating forward about a rotation shaft (not shown) formed on both the left and right sides of the plate 1410 as a rotation center. In this state, the game ball launched into the game area 255 is received by the opening / closing plate 1410, and the received game ball is in an open state in which it is easy to enter the grand prize winning opening 1400. On the other hand, when the drive signal is not input to the opening / closing blade solenoid 1390, the plunger moves forward by the restoring force of the compression spring, and rotates backward about the rotation shaft formed on both the left and right sides of the opening / closing plate 1410 by the link mechanism. The open / close plate 1410 is closed. In this state, the open / close plate 1410 stands upright, and the game ball is in a closed state in which it is difficult to enter the winning prize opening 1400.

  Inside the attacker device 1350, a discharge guide passage (not shown) for guiding the game ball that has entered the special winning opening 1400 to the downstream side is formed. An attachment portion (not shown) to which a count switch 1430 for detecting a game ball that has entered the big prize opening 1400 is attached is formed on the upstream side of the discharge guide passage. In addition, on the rear surface of the attacker device 1350, the ball enters the lower start winning opening 1340, receives the game ball rolling along the guide passage formed in the lower start opening / closing unit, and discharges it to the downstream side (not shown). A guide passage is also formed.

[2-2-4. Winning entrance unit side normal winning entrance]
Inside the opening of the winning port unit side normal winning port 1440, the game ball that has entered the winning port unit side normal winning port 1440 is guided to the above-described discharge guide passage 265ad formed in the winning space forming cover body 265a. A guide passage (not shown) is formed.

  Note that a gate 1455 through which a game ball launched into the game area 255 can pass is attached to the veneer board 250 above the winning port unit side normal winning port 1440. The game ball passing through the gate 1455 is detected by a gate switch 1460 built in the gate 1455.

[2-3. Decoration unit]
Next, the decoration unit 1220 attached to the front surface of the veneer board 250 will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 118, the decoration unit 1220 is attached to the veneer board 250 along the inner running surface 253 on the left side of the winning port unit side normal winning port 1440 of the winning port unit 1210. The decoration unit 1220 includes a decoration plate 1220a which is formed in a bow shape as a whole and decorated, and a gate 1455 attached to the plywood board 250 to the left of the decoration plate 1220a. The decorative unit side normal winning port 1470 is formed to be open to the upper side of the decorative unit 1220a, and protrudes forward from the front surface of the decorative plate 1220a. And a decoration unit side normal winning opening 1465. Inside the openings of the decoration unit side normal winning ports 1465, 1470, the game balls that have entered the decoration unit side normal winning ports 1465, 1470 are discharged to the discharge guide passages 265ae formed in the winning space forming cover body 265a described above. Guide passages (not shown) for guiding to 265af are formed.

[2-4. Game progress display by function display unit]
Next, display of the progress of the game by the function display unit 1225 attached to the rear surface of the decorative frame 251 will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 118, the function display unit 1225 includes an upper special symbol display 1480 disposed on the lower side thereof, a lower special symbol display 1490 disposed on the right side of the upper special symbol display 1480, Upper special symbol memory lamps 1500a and 1500b arranged on the left side of the upper special symbol display 1480, lower special symbol memory lamps 1510a and 1510b arranged on the right side of the lower special symbol display unit 1490, and this lower special symbol The normal symbol display 1520 disposed above the storage lamp 1510a, the normal symbol storage lamps 1530a to 1530d disposed at the upper left of the normal symbol display 1520, and the upper right of the normal symbol storage lamp 1530d. 2-round display lamp 1550 and a 15-round table arranged at the upper right of the 2-round display lamp 1550 A lamp 1560 is configured to include an upper special symbol memory lamps 1500b on the left in placed game state display lamp 1540, the.

  The upper special symbol display 1480 variably displays the special symbol by flashing in various patterns when a game ball enters the middle start winning port 1330 and is detected by the middle start port switch 1360. Then, after a predetermined time has elapsed, the confirmed special symbol is stopped and displayed. Thereby, the upper special symbol display 1480 notifies the lottery result in the special lottery as to whether or not to generate the big hit gaming state. The lower special symbol display 1490 is configured such that when a game ball enters the upper start winning opening 1270 and is detected by the upper start opening switch 1272 or a game ball enters the lower start winning opening 1340, the lower start opening When detected by the switch 1370, the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner by blinking in various patterns, and the fixed special symbol is confirmed after a predetermined time has elapsed, like the upper special symbol display 1480. Is displayed to stop. Thereby, the lower special symbol display 1490 notifies the lottery result in the special lottery as to whether or not to generate the big hit gaming state. In this embodiment, the value of the jackpot gaming state notified by the upper special symbol display 1480 and the value of the jackpot gaming state notified by the lower special symbol display 1490 are set to be the same.

  The upper special symbol memory lamps 1500a and 1500b are not used when the game ball enters the middle start winning port 1330 and is detected by the middle start port switch 1360 when the game ball is not used in the special symbol variation display (for example, When the special symbol is variably displayed on the upper special symbol display 1480, when a game ball enters the middle start winning port 1330 or when a big hit gaming state occurs, the game ball enters the middle start winning port 1330. When the ball enters, the number of game balls detected after entering the ball is notified by lighting or flashing as a holding ball. The lower special symbol memory lamps 1510a and 1510b are used when a game ball enters the upper start winning opening 1270 and is detected by the upper start opening switch 1272, or when a game ball enters the lower start winning opening 1340. When detected by the lower start opening switch 1370, when the game ball is not used in the special symbol variation display (for example, when the special symbol is variably displayed on the lower special symbol display 1490, the upper start prize opening 1270 Or, when a game ball enters the lower start prize opening 1340, or when a game ball enters the upper start prize opening 1270 or the lower start prize opening 1340 when a big hit gaming state is occurring, As with the special symbol memory lamps 1500a and 1500b, the number of game balls detected after entering the ball is notified by lighting or flashing as a holding ball.

  When the game ball passes through the gate 1455 and is detected by the gate switch 1460, the normal symbol display unit 1520 displays the normal symbol variably by blinking in various color patterns. After a lapse, the confirmed normal symbol is stopped and displayed. Thereby, the normal symbol display 1520 notifies the lottery result in the normal lottery whether or not to open and close the opening / closing blade 1380.

  When the game ball passes through the gate 1455 and is detected by the gate switch 1460, the normal symbol memory lamps 1530a to 1530d are detected when the game ball is not used in the normal symbol variation display. The number of balls is lit as a holding ball and is informed.

  For example, the two-round display lamp 1550 is lit to notify that the number of times that a small hit occurs as a gaming state and the winning prize opening 1400 is changed from a closed state to an open state (referred to as “round”) is two times. Yes. The 15-round display lamp 1560 lights and notifies that a big hit gaming state has occurred and the round is 15 times.

  The gaming state display lamp 1540 lights and notifies that a probability variation or a small hit has occurred as a gaming state in a predetermined color.

[2-5. Loop unit]
Next, the configuration of the loop unit 1570 attached to the rear surface of the winning space forming cover body 265a will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 120 is an exploded perspective view of the loop unit as seen from the front, FIG. 121 is an exploded perspective view of the loop unit as seen from the back, and FIG. 122 is a front view of the unit base constituting the loop unit. FIG. 124 is a rear view of a unit base constituting the loop unit, and FIG. 124 is a partial cross-sectional view (partial perspective view) taken along line AA in FIG. In the following description, the front-rear direction is described with reference to the state of the loop unit 1570 viewed from the front unless otherwise noted.

[2-5-1. Overall structure of loop unit]
As shown in FIGS. 120 and 121, the loop unit 1570 is formed in a unit base 1570b having an elliptical elliptical opening 1570ba formed in the center, a circular shape on the upper side and a substantially rectangular shape on the lower side, and a unit base 1570b. A circular annular front gear module that is attached to the front surface of the unit base 1570b so as to be rotatable about the intersection of the short axis and the long axis of the elliptical opening 1570ba (hereinafter referred to as “the center of the elliptical opening 1570ba”). 1572, a circular annular rear gear module 1573 attached to the rear surface of the unit base 1570b so as to be rotatable about the center of the elliptical opening 1570ba formed in the unit base 1570b, and an elliptical opening formed in the unit base 1570b Part 1570ba and the corresponding position. The front unit cover 1570a is formed so that the elliptical opening 1570aa having the same shape as the elliptical opening 1570ba is formed so as to cover the front surface of the unit base 1570b, and the elliptical opening 1570ba formed in the unit base 1570b. An elliptical opening 1570ca having the same shape as the elliptical opening 1570ba is formed, and a rear unit cover 1570c attached to cover the rear surface of the unit base 1570b is provided.

  The front unit cover 1570a attached to the front surface of the unit base 1570b is formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and has a rib portion 1570ab protruding rearward along the opening edge of the elliptical opening portion 1570aa formed at the center thereof. Is formed. The inner peripheral surface of the rib portion 1570ab is a smooth curved surface, which becomes a travel surface 1570aba on which a left wheel 1572ce (see FIG. 131) of a car 1572c attached to the front gear module 1572 travels, which will be described later. Yes. On the other hand, the outer peripheral surface of the rib portion 1570ab is formed in a shape in which a semi-cylindrical condensing portion 1570abb (having the same shape as the condensing portion 1570bxb in FIG. 124) is continuously arranged. When the light emitted from the gradation lamp 1240 attached along the outer periphery of the elliptical decorative member 1200a of the center unit 1200 described above is incident on the condensing portion 1570abb, the incident light is transmitted through the rib portion 1570ab. Thus, the light is emitted from the running surface 1570aba of the rib portion 1570ab or the rear side surface of the rib portion 1570ab. In addition, on the lower left side when the front unit cover 1570a is viewed from the front, heat generated by the rear gear module drive motor 1585 is radiated to a position corresponding to the rear gear module drive motor 1585 that rotates the rear gear module 1573. The heat radiation opening 1570ac is formed, and a rib portion 1570ad protruding forward along the opening edge of the heat radiation opening 1570ac is formed. Further, a plurality of stop holes 1570ae for fixing the unit base 1570b are formed along the outer periphery of the front unit cover 1570a.

  The rear unit cover 1570c attached to the rear surface of the unit base 1570b is formed of a transparent synthetic resin and has a rib portion 1570cb protruding forward along the opening edge of the elliptical opening portion 1570ca formed at the center thereof. Is formed. The inner peripheral surface of the rib portion 1570cb is a smooth curved surface, which becomes a travel surface 1570cba on which a right wheel 1573ce (see FIG. 131) of the vehicle 1573c attached to the rear gear module 1573 travels, which will be described later. ing. On the other hand, the outer peripheral surface of the rib portion 1570cb is formed in a shape in which the cone-shaped condensing portion 1570cbb (having the same shape as the condensing portion 1570bxb in FIG. 124) is continuously arranged. When light emitted from the gradation lamp 1240 attached along the outer periphery of the rear surface of the elliptical decorative member 1200a of the center unit 1200 is incident on the condensing unit 1570cbb, the incident light passes through the rib unit 1570cb and passes through the rib unit 1570cbb. The light is emitted from the traveling surface 1570cba of the 1570cb or the front side surface of the rib portion 1570cb. Further, on the rear surface of the rear unit cover 1570c, a horizontally-long rectangular frame-shaped frame portion 1570cc centering on the intersection of the short axis and the long axis of the elliptical opening 1570ca is formed to protrude rearward. The liquid crystal module 1571 described above is attached inside the frame portion 1570cc. Further, on the right side when the rear unit cover 1570c is viewed from the back, a connection opening for connecting a connection connector (not shown) to the drive relay board 1589 at a position corresponding to a drive relay board 1589 described later attached to the unit base 1570b. A portion 1570cd is formed, and heat is generated by the front gear module drive motor 1578 at a position corresponding to the front gear module drive motor 1578 for rotating the front gear module 1572 on the right side of the lower side when the rear unit cover 1570c is viewed from the back. A heat radiating opening 1570ce for radiating heat is formed, and a rib portion 1570cf protruding rearward along the opening edge of the heat radiating opening 1570ce is formed. A rib portion 1570cg that connects the upper side of the rib portion 1570cf and the lower side of the frame portion 1570cc, and a rib portion 1570ch that connects the lower side of the unit base 1570b and the lower side of the frame portion 1570cc are parallel to each other at a predetermined interval. It protrudes toward the surface. The area surrounded by the lower part of the rib part 1570cg, the frame part 1570cc, the rib part 1570ch and the unit base 1570b is a horizontally long rectangle, and the lamp driving board box 1765 described above can be attached to the inside of the area. ing. The rear unit cover 1570c has a plurality of stop holes 1570ci for fixing the unit base 1570b along the outer periphery thereof.

  The unit base 1570b to which the front gear module 1572 and the rear gear module 1573 are attached is molded of a transparent synthetic resin, and extends forward and rearward along the opening edge of the elliptical opening 1570ba formed at the center thereof. A protruding rib portion 1570bx is formed. The inner peripheral surface of the rib portion 1570bx has a smooth curved surface, and the left wheel 1572ce (see FIG. 131) of the vehicle 1572c attached to the front gear module 1572 and the vehicle attached to the rear gear module 1573. A wheel 1573ce (see FIG. 131) on the right side of 1573c serves as a travel surface 1570bxa on which the vehicle travels. On the other hand, the outer peripheral surface of the rib portion 1570bx is formed in a shape in which the semi-cylindrical condensing portions 1570bxb are continuously arranged. When light emitted from the gradation lamp 1240 attached along the outer periphery of the rear surface of the elliptical decorative member 1200a of the center unit 1200 is incident on the condensing unit 1570bxb, the incident light is transmitted through the rib unit 1570bx and the rib unit. The light is emitted from both the front and rear side surfaces of the travel surface 1570bxa of the 1570bx or the rib portion 1570bx.

  On the upper side and the lower side of the unit base 1570b, symmetrically with respect to a center line obtained by extending the short axis of the elliptical opening 1570ba in the vertical direction (hereinafter referred to as “the central line of the elliptical opening 1570ba”). The front gear module 1572 is rotatably supported with the center of the elliptical opening 1570ba as the center of rotation, the front guide roller 1575 having a groove formed on the outer periphery, and the rear gear module 1573 with the center of the elliptical opening 1570ba as the center of rotation. A shaft hole 1570bb is formed for inserting a roller pin 1574 of a retaining ring type with a flange that pivotally supports a rear guide roller 1582 having a groove formed on the outer periphery, which is rotatably supported (two on the upper side, A total of four shaft holes 1570bb are formed on the lower two sides). The dimensional distance WH (see FIG. 122) between the shaft hole 1570bb formed on the upper left side and the shaft hole 1570bb formed on the upper right side is the shaft hole 1570bb formed on the lower left side and the shaft hole formed on the lower right side. A straight line connecting a shaft hole 1570bb formed on the upper left side and a shaft hole 1570bb formed on the lower right side and a shaft formed on the upper right side, which is larger than the dimensional distance WL (see FIG. 122) with respect to 1570bb. The intersection of the straight line connecting the hole 1570bb and the shaft hole 1570bb formed on the lower left side is located on the short axis (center line) below the center of the elliptical opening 1570ba (see FIG. 122).

  The lower left side of the unit base 1570b when viewed from the front side (hereinafter referred to as “the lower left side of the front surface of the unit base 1570b”. Hereinafter, the description of specifying the position when the unit base 1570b is viewed from the front side is referred to as “the front surface of the unit base 1570b. ”And then the position.) Is a substantially L-shape in which a longitudinal groove and a transverse groove for attaching various drive system members for rotating the front gear module 1572 and the rear gear module 1573 are connected. The drive system mounting recess 1570bc is formed to protrude rearward. On the upper side in the vicinity of the right side of the lateral groove of the drive system mounting recess 1570bc, there is a flange that supports a front intermediate gear 1576 that meshes with a ring gear 1572ab (see FIG. 126) formed on the gear base 1572a of the front gear module 1572, which will be described later. A shaft hole 1570bca for inserting a retaining ring type front idle gear pin 1577 is formed. In the front intermediate gear 1576, a front small gear 1576a having a smaller number of teeth than the front intermediate gear 1576 is integrally formed on one side surface with the shaft hole of the front intermediate gear 1576 being coaxial. A front drive gear 1578a that meshes with the front small gear 1576a of the front intermediate gear 1576 is attached to the output shaft of the front gear module drive motor 1578 on the right side of the lateral groove of the drive system mounting recess 1570bc and on the lower left side of the shaft hole 1570bca. An opening 1570bcb that can be inserted in a state is formed. On the other hand, a rear intermediate gear 1583 that meshes with a ring gear 1573ab (see FIG. 126) formed on the gear base 1573a of the rear gear module 1573, which will be described later, is provided on the right side in the vicinity of the upper side of the vertical groove of the drive system mounting recess 1570bc. A shaft hole 1570bcc for inserting a rear idle gear pin 1584 of a retaining ring type with a flange that supports the shaft is formed. In the rear intermediate gear 1583, a rear small gear 1583a having a smaller number of teeth than the rear intermediate gear 1583 is integrally formed on one side surface with the shaft hole of the rear intermediate gear 1583 being coaxial. A rear drive gear 1585a that meshes with the rear small gear 1583a of the rear intermediate gear 1583 is located above the vertical groove of the drive system mounting recess 1570bc and to the lower left of the shaft hole 1570bcc, and the output of the rear gear module drive motor 1585. An opening 1570bcd that can be inserted while being attached to the shaft is formed.

  Near the lower front side of the unit base 1570b, right below the shaft hole 1570bb formed on the lower left side of the front surface of the unit base 1570b, and lower left of the shaft hole 1570bb formed on the lower right side of the front surface of the unit base 1570b, Includes a positive electrode side wire 1572bd and a negative electrode side wire 1572be wound around a reel base 1572b of the front gear module 1572, which will be described later, symmetrically with respect to the center line of the elliptical opening 1570ba (see FIGS. 125 and 126). An attachment boss hole 1570bm for attaching the front contact module 1579 to which the positive voltage and the negative voltage are applied is formed to protrude forward. Near the mounting boss hole 1570bm formed on the lower right side of the front surface of the unit base 1570b and in the vicinity where the outer shape of the unit base 1570b changes from a circular shape to a rectangular shape, a thin disk 1572aa of the front gear module 1572, which will be described later. A mounting boss hole 1570bn for mounting a front sensor board box 1581 in which a front sensor board 1580 for detecting a magnet MG0 (see FIGS. 125 and 126) embedded in the vicinity of the outer periphery of the magnet MG0 is projected is formed. ing.

  In addition, a mounting boss hole 1570bo for attaching the front unit cover 1570a is formed to protrude forward at a position corresponding to a stop hole 1570ae formed in the front unit cover 1570a near the front outer periphery of the unit base 1570b. A wiring through hole 1570bi for passing various front wirings to the rear surface side of the unit base 1570b is formed in the center of the left side of the front surface of the unit base 1570b and in the vicinity where the outer shape of the unit base 1570b changes from a circular shape to a rectangular shape. The front gear module 1572 is supported by the front guide roller 1575 from the lower left side of the front surface of the unit base 1570b to the middle of the left side of the front surface of the unit base 1570b and the vicinity of the outer shape of the unit base 1570b having a circular shape to a rectangular shape. Rotate The partition wall 1570bk for partitioning the region where the area and the drive system mounting recess 1570bc are formed and the region where the wiring through hole 1570bi is formed to form a wiring processing space is formed along the substantially outer periphery of the unit base 1570b. And projecting forward, along the wiring processing space formed by the vicinity of the lower front side of the unit base 1570b and the partition wall 1570bk, wiring from the front sensor board 1580, wiring from the front contact modules 1579, 1579, etc. A wiring processing piece 1570bh for hooking and gathering various front side wirings is formed to protrude forward at a predetermined interval.

  On the other hand, when the unit base 1570b is viewed from the back side, it is described in the vicinity of the lower side (hereinafter, referred to as “the vicinity of the lower side of the rear surface of the unit base 1570b”. The rear surface ”is described, followed by the position.), Which is formed on the lower right side of the shaft hole 1570bb formed on the lower left side of the rear surface of the unit base 1570b and on the lower right side of the rear surface of the unit base 1570b. On the lower left side of the shaft hole 1570 bb, a positive electrode side wire 1573 bd and a negative electrode side wire 1573 be wound around a reel base 1573 b of the rear gear module 1573, which will be described later, symmetrically with respect to the center line of the elliptical opening 1570 ba. Apply positive voltage and negative voltage respectively (see Fig. 125 and Fig. 126) Mounting boss hole 1570bp for mounting the side contact module 1586 is formed to project backwardly after that. In the vicinity of the upper left of the mounting boss hole 1570bp formed on the lower left side of the rear surface of the unit base 1570b and in the vicinity where the outer shape of the unit base 1570b changes from a circular shape to a rectangular shape, a thin disk 1573aa of the rear gear module 1573, which will be described later. A mounting boss hole 1570bq for mounting a rear sensor board box 1588 in which a rear sensor board 1587 for detecting a magnet MG1 (see FIGS. 125 and 126) embedded in the vicinity of the outer periphery of the magnet MG1 protrudes rearward. Is formed.

  Further, a mounting boss hole 1570br for attaching the rear unit cover 1570c protrudes rearward at a position corresponding to a stop hole 1570ci formed in the rear unit cover 1570c in the vicinity of the outer periphery of the rear surface of the unit base 1570b. The rear gear module 1573 is formed from the lower right side of the rear surface of the unit base 1570b to the center of the right side of the rear surface of the unit base 1570b and the vicinity of the outer shape of the unit base 1570b from a circular shape to a rectangular shape. A partition wall 1570bt for partitioning a region supported by the guide roller 1582 and rotating and a region where the drive system mounting recess 1570bc is formed and a region where the wiring through hole 1570bi is formed to form a wiring processing space is a unit. After the shape of the base 1570b substantially along the outer shape The wiring from the rear sensor board 1587, the wiring from the rear contact modules 1586, 1586, etc. along the wiring processing space formed by the partition wall 1570bt in the vicinity of the lower side of the rear surface of the unit base 1570b. A wiring processing piece 1570bs for hooking and collecting various rear wirings is formed to protrude rearward at a predetermined interval. A drive relay board 1589 to which various front wirings and various rear wirings are electrically connected is attached above the wiring processing space formed by the partition wall 1570bt and below the wiring through hole 1570bi.

  Further, in the vicinity of the outer periphery of the rear surface of the unit base 1570b, a circular reinforcing rib portion 1570bu centering on the center of the elliptical opening 1570ba is formed so as to protrude rearward. A notch is formed below the reinforcing rib portion 1570bu. The reinforcing rib portion 1570bu, and a positive side finger 1586b and a negative side finger 1586c of the rear contact module 1586, which will be described later (FIGS. 132A and 132B). b)) is not interfered with.

  Furthermore, between the elliptical opening 1570ba and the reinforcing rib 1570bu, the cross-sectional shape becomes a sawtooth shape as the short axis and long axis of the elliptical opening 1570ba increase so as to surround the elliptical opening 1570ba. An optical portion 1570be is formed. In the cross section taken along the line AA in FIG. 123, the light guide portion 1570be is, as shown in FIG. Light emitted by 1240 (indicated by a two-dot chain line in the figure) is incident. The light incident on the light guide portion 1570be is emitted toward the light collecting portion 1570bxb formed on the outer peripheral surface of the rib portion 1570bx of the elliptical opening portion 1570ba. Further, on the running surface 1570bxa formed on the inner peripheral surface of the rib portion 1570bx, an emission projection 1570bxaa that emits a part of the light incident on the light collecting portion 1570bxb forward is formed along the center.

  Next, a method of attaching the front gear module 1572 and the rear gear module 1573 to the unit base 1570b will be described. As shown in FIGS. 120 and 121, a shaft hole 1570bb formed on the lower left side of the front surface of the unit base 1570b, A roller pin 1574 in which a front guide roller 1575 is inserted into a shaft hole 1570bb formed on the lower right side of the front surface of the unit base 1570b and an upper left side of the front surface of the unit base 1570b is inserted from the front side of the unit base 1570b. It is inserted toward the rear surface side of the base 1570b and protrudes from the rear surface of the unit base 1570b. Subsequently, the rear guide roller 1582 is inserted into the protruded roller pin 1574, and a retaining ring groove (not shown) formed on the roller pin 1574 is protruded to the rear surface of the rear guide roller 1582. Then, an E-shaped ring (not shown) is inserted and fitted into the protruding retaining ring groove.

  Subsequently, the rear guide roller is inserted from the upper right side of the front surface of the unit base 1570b toward the lower left side of the front surface of the unit base 1570b so that the outer periphery of the thin disk 1572aa of the front gear module 1572 is accommodated in the groove of the front guide roller 1575. The thin disc 1573aa of the rear gear module 1573 is inserted into the groove 1582 from the upper left side of the rear surface of the unit base 1570b toward the lower right side of the rear surface of the unit base 1570b. And the front side guide roller 1575 is arrange | positioned in the shaft hole 1570bb formed in the front upper right side of the unit base 1570b. At this time, the thin disc 1572aa of the front gear module 1572 is inserted and arranged in the groove of the front guide roller 1575. Subsequently, a roller pin 1574 is inserted from the front side of the front guide roller 1575 toward the rear side of the unit base 1570b so as to protrude from the rear surface of the unit base 1570b, and the rear guide roller 1582 is inserted into the protruded roller pin 1574. Then, the retaining ring groove formed on the roller pin 1574 is projected from the rear surface of the rear guide roller 1582. Then, an E-shaped ring is inserted into the protruding retaining ring groove.

  Accordingly, the front guide roller 1575 and the rear guide roller 1582 are prevented from being detached from the roller pin 1574, and the movement of the front guide roller 1575 and the rear guide roller 1582 in the front-rear direction is restricted. By restricting the movement of the front guide roller 1575 in the front-rear direction, the front-side gear module 1572 is supported by the front guide roller 1575 and suppresses vibration in the front-rear direction that occurs when the center of the elliptical opening 1570ba rotates about the center of rotation. On the other hand, when the movement of the rear guide roller 1582 in the front-rear direction is restricted, the rear gear module 1573 is supported by the rear guide roller 1582 and rotates around the center of the elliptical opening 1570ba as the rotation center. The generated vibration in the front-rear direction can be suppressed. Since the load caused by the vibration in the front-rear direction by the front gear module 1572 and the rear gear module 1573 is not applied as an overload to the shaft hole 1570bb via the roller pin 1574, the shaft hole 1570bb is damaged (for example, near the shaft hole 1570bb). There is no risk of cracking. Further, by suppressing the vibration in the front-rear direction, the front gear module 1572 is supported by the front guide roller 1575 and can smoothly rotate about the center of the elliptical opening 1570ba as the rotation center, while the rear gear module 1573 It is supported by the guide roller 1582 and can rotate smoothly with the center of the elliptical opening 1570ba as the center of rotation.

  In the method for attaching the front gear module 1572 and the rear gear module 1573 to the unit base 1570b described above, the shaft hole 1570bb formed on the lower left side of the front surface of the unit base 1570b and the lower right side of the front surface of the unit base 1570b are formed. Insert a roller pin 1574 into which a front guide roller 1575 is inserted into a shaft hole 1570bb formed on the upper left side of the front surface of the unit base 1570b from the front surface side of the unit base 1570b toward the rear surface side of the unit base 1570b. The unit pin 1574 protrudes from the rear surface of the unit base 1570b, but at least one or two shaft holes 1570bb have roller pins 1574 inserted with the front guide roller 1575 from the front side of the unit base 1570b. Be made to protrude to the rear face of the unit base 1570b is inserted toward the rear side of 70b, it is possible to attach the front gear module 1572 and the rear-side gear module 1573 to the unit base 1570b.

  Next, a method for attaching various drive system members and the like for rotating the front gear module 1572 and the rear gear module 1573 thus installed will be described. First, a method for mounting the drive system for rotating the front gear module 1572 will be described. As shown in FIGS. 120 and 121, the ring of the front gear module 1572 is inserted into the shaft hole 1570bca formed in the drive system mounting recess 1570bc of the unit base 1570b. Front intermediate gear 1576 is arranged in mesh with gear 1572ab. At this time, the front small gear 1576a of the front intermediate gear 1576 is arranged facing rearward. Subsequently, a front idle gear pin 1577 is inserted into the shaft hole 1570bca from the rear surface side of the unit base 1570b toward the front surface side of the unit base 1570b, and a retaining ring groove (not shown) formed in the front idle gear pin 1577 is inserted into the front intermediate gear. Project to the front of 1576. Then, an E-shaped ring (not shown) is inserted and fitted into the protruding retaining ring groove.

  Subsequently, with the front drive gear 1578a attached to the output shaft of the front gear module drive motor 1578, the unit base 1570bb is formed in the opening 1570bcb formed in the drive system mounting recess 1570bc of the unit base 1570b from the rear side of the unit base 1570b. It is inserted toward the front side of 1570b to engage the front drive gear 1578a and the front small gear 1576a of the front intermediate gear 1576. Then, a screw (not shown) is inserted into a mounting hole (not shown) formed in the drive system mounting recess 1570bc of the unit base 1570b from the fixing hole 1578b of the front gear module drive motor 1578, and is screwed.

  After the installation of the drive system for rotating the front gear module 1572 is completed, the front contact modules 1579 and 1579 are attached to the attachment boss holes 1570bm of the unit base 1570b, and the front sensor substrate box 1581 is attached to the attachment boss holes 1570bn of the unit base 1570b. . Subsequently, the front unit cover 1570a is covered so as to cover the front surface of the unit base 1570b, and a screw (not shown) is inserted from the set hole 1570ae of the front unit cover 1570a toward the mounting boss hole 1570bo of the unit base 1570b and screwed. Thereby, the front unit cover 1570a is fixed to the unit base 1570b.

  Here, the rotation direction of the front gear module 1572 will be described. As shown in FIG. 122, the rotation of the front drive gear 1578a attached to the output shaft of the front gear module drive motor 1578 is engaged with the front drive gear 1578a. This is transmitted to the small gear 1576a, and the front small gear 1576a rotates in the direction opposite to the rotation direction of the front drive gear 1578a with the front idle gear pin 1577 as the rotation center. Since the front intermediate gear 1576 is integrally formed with the front small gear 1576a, the front intermediate gear 1576 rotates around the front idle gear pin 1577 together with the front small gear 1576a. The rotation of the front intermediate gear 1576 is transmitted to the ring gear 1572ab of the front gear module 1572 that meshes with the front intermediate gear 1576, and the front gear module 1572 is supported by the front guide roller 1575 so that the center of the elliptical opening 1570ba is the center of rotation. The front intermediate gear 1576 rotates in the direction opposite to the rotation direction. In other words, the rotation direction of the front gear module 1572 matches the rotation direction of the front drive gear 1578a attached to the output shaft of the front gear module drive motor 1578. In the present embodiment, the front gear module 1572 rotates in the clockwise direction in FIG. That is, the front gear module 1572 rotates in a direction in which the teeth of the ring gear 1572ab of the front gear module 1572 are lifted by the teeth of the front intermediate gear 1576. In the present embodiment, the number of teeth of the front drive gear 1578a, the number of teeth of the front small gear 1576a, and the number of front intermediate gears so that when the output shaft of the front gear module drive motor 1578 rotates six times, the front gear module 1572 rotates once. The number of teeth of 1576 and the number of teeth of the ring gear 1572a are selected. The front gear module drive motor 1578 used in this embodiment is a four-phase stepping motor, and its output shaft rotates once when the number of input steps advances from a value 1 to a value 96. As described above, the rotation of the front gear module 1572 is one sixth of the rotation of the output shaft of the front gear module drive motor 1578. Therefore, in order to rotate the front gear module 1572 once, the front gear module 1572 It is necessary to rotate the output shaft of the drive motor 1578 6 times. In this case, the number of steps input to the front gear module drive motor 1578 advances from value 1 to value 576 (= value 96 × 6 times).

  Next, a method for attaching various drive system members and the like for rotating the rear gear module 1573 will be described. As shown in FIGS. 120 and 121, the shaft hole 1570bcc formed in the drive system installation recess 1570bc of the unit base 1570b is rearwardly attached. The rear intermediate gear 1583 is arranged in a state where it is engaged with the ring gear 1573ab of the side gear module 1573. At this time, the rear small gear 1583a of the rear intermediate gear 1583 is arranged facing forward. Subsequently, the rear idle gear pin 1584 is inserted into the shaft hole 1570bcc from the front surface side of the unit base 1570b toward the rear surface side of the unit base 1570b, and a retaining ring groove (not shown) formed in the rear idle gear pin 1584 is moved to the rear. The rear intermediate gear 1583 protrudes from the rear surface. Then, an E-shaped ring (not shown) is inserted and fitted into the protruding retaining ring groove.

  Subsequently, with the rear drive gear 1585a attached to the output shaft of the rear gear module drive motor 1585, the opening 1570bcd formed in the drive system mounting recess 1570bc of the unit base 1570b is inserted from the front side of the unit base 1570b. It is inserted toward the rear surface side of the unit base 1570b to engage the rear drive gear 1585a and the rear small gear 1583a of the rear intermediate gear 1583. Then, a screw (not shown) is inserted into a mounting hole (not shown) formed in the drive system mounting recess 1570bc of the unit base 1570b from the fixing hole 1585b of the rear gear module drive motor 1585, and is fixed.

  After the installation of the drive system for rotating the rear gear module 1573 is completed, the rear contact modules 1586 and 1586 are attached to the attachment boss holes 1570bp of the unit base 1570b, and the rear sensor board box is attached to the attachment boss holes 1570bq of the unit base 1570b. Install 1588. Subsequently, the rear unit cover 1570c is covered so as to cover the rear surface of the unit base 1570b, and a screw (not shown) is inserted from the set hole 1570ci of the rear unit cover 1570c toward the mounting boss hole 1570br of the unit base 1570b. To do. Thereby, the rear unit cover 1570c is fixed to the unit base 1570b.

  Here, the rotation direction of the rear gear module 1573 will be described. As shown in FIG. 123, the rotation of the rear drive gear 1585a attached to the output shaft of the rear gear module drive motor 1585 This is transmitted to the rear small gear 1583a that meshes with 1585a, and this rear small gear 1583a rotates in the direction opposite to the rotational direction of the rear drive gear 1585a with the rear idle gear pin 1584 as the center of rotation. Since the rear intermediate gear 1583 is integrally formed with the rear small gear 1583a, the rear intermediate gear 1583 rotates around the rear idle gear pin 1584 together with the rear small gear 1583a. The rotation of the rear intermediate gear 1583 is transmitted to the ring gear 1573ab of the rear gear module 1573 that meshes with the rear intermediate gear 1583, and the rear gear module 1573 is supported by the rear guide roller 1582 so that the elliptical opening 1570ba It rotates in the direction opposite to the rotation direction of the rear intermediate gear 1583 with the center as the rotation center. In other words, the rotation direction of the rear gear module 1573 coincides with the rotation direction of the rear drive gear 1585a attached to the output shaft of the rear gear module drive motor 1585. In the present embodiment, the rear gear module 1573 rotates in the counterclockwise direction in FIG. That is, the rear gear module 1573 rotates in the direction in which the teeth of the ring gear 1573ab of the rear gear module 1573 are lifted by the teeth of the rear intermediate gear 1583. In this embodiment, the number of teeth of the rear drive gear 1585a and the number of teeth of the rear small gear 1583a are such that when the output shaft of the rear gear module drive motor 1585 rotates six times, the rear gear module 1573 rotates once. The number of teeth of the rear intermediate gear 1583 and the number of teeth of the ring gear 1573a are selected. The rear gear module drive motor 1585 used in this embodiment has an output shaft that rotates once when the number of input steps advances from a value 1 to a value 96. As described above, the rotation of the rear gear module 1573 is one sixth of the rotation of the output shaft of the rear gear module drive motor 1585. Therefore, in order to rotate the rear gear module 1573 once, The output shaft of the rear gear module drive motor 1585 needs to be rotated six times. In this case, the number of steps input to the rear gear module drive motor 1585 advances from value 1 to value 576 (= value 96 × 6 times).

  Detailed descriptions of the front gear module 1572, the rear gear module 1573, the front contact module 1579, the rear contact module 1586, the front sensor board box 1581, and the rear sensor board box 1588 will be described later.

[2-5-2. Front gear module and rear gear module]
Next, the front gear module 1572 and the rear gear module 1573 that rotate around the center of the elliptical opening 1570ba described above will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 125 is an exploded perspective view of the front (rear) gear module viewed from the front, FIG. 126 is an exploded perspective view of the front (rear) gear module viewed from the rear, and FIG. 127 is the front (rear). FIG. 128 is a rear view of a reel base constituting the gear module, and FIG. 128 is a cross-sectional view taken along line BB in FIG. 127 and a cross-sectional view taken along line CC in FIG. FIG. 129 is an exploded perspective view of the car constituting the front (rear) gear module as seen from the front, and FIG. 130 is an exploded perspective view of the car constituting the front (rear) gear module as seen from the back. 131 is a partial cross-sectional view of the loop unit along the line DD in FIG. Since the front gear module 1572 and the rear gear module 1573 have the same structure, the configuration of the front gear module 1572 will be described. In addition, the code | symbol in parenthesis in the figure of FIGS. 125-130 has shown the various structural members of the rear side gear module 1573. FIG.

  The front gear module 1572 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and as shown in FIGS. 125 to 127, the front intermediate gear described above is formed on the rear surface of the circular annular thin disk 1572aa having a circular opening 1572ae. The gear base 1572a formed with a ring gear 1572ab that meshes with 1576, and a circular opening 1572bk having the same shape as the circular opening 1572ae is formed at a position corresponding to the circular opening 1572ae of the thin disk 1572aa, and is formed on the front surface of the gear base 1572a. A circular annular reel base 1572b to be attached and a wheel 1572c attached to the reel base 1572b via a tow arm 1572d are provided.

[2-5-2 (a). Gear base]
The outer diameter of the thin disk 1572aa of the gear base 1572a is larger than the diameter of the tip of the ring gear 1572ab formed on the rear surface of the thin disk 1572aa, and the outer periphery of the thin disk 1572aa is the groove of the front guide roller 1575 described above. The tooth tip of the ring gear 1572ab and the front guide roller 1575 are prevented from interfering with each other even in a state of being supported in the position. Magnet MG0 is embedded in the vicinity of the outer periphery of thin disk 1572aa. In the vicinity of the circular opening 1572ae of the thin disk 1572aa, a positioning hole 1572ac for defining the relationship between the position where the magnet MG0 is embedded and the position of the wheel 1572c attached to the reel base 1572b via the towing arm 1572d. Is formed. The thin disk 1572aa has a plurality of stop holes 1572ad for fixing the reel base 1572b on the same circumference where the positioning holes 1572ac are formed.

[2-5-2 (b). Reel base]
The reel base 1572b attached to the front surface of the gear base 1572a is formed with an outer rib portion 1572boa projecting rearward along the outer periphery thereof. The outer rib portion 1572boa is formed with two grooves, a front groove and a rear groove, along the outer peripheral surface thereof. The front side groove is a negative electrode side groove 1572bb, and a negative electrode side wire 1572be having a conductive property made of stainless steel to which a negative electrode voltage is applied from a negative electrode side finger 1579c (see FIGS. 132A and 132B) of a front contact module 1579 described later. On the other hand, the back side groove is a positive electrode made of stainless steel to which a positive electrode voltage from a positive side finger 1579b (see FIGS. 132 (a) and 132 (b)) of a front contact module 1579 described later is applied as a positive side groove 1572ba. A side wire 1572bd is wound. Further, a partition wall 1572bc for partitioning the negative electrode side groove 1572bb and the positive electrode side groove 1572ba is formed along the outer peripheral surface of the outer rib portion 1572boa so as to protrude outward in the radial direction of the reel base 1572b.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 127, the reel base 1572b is described as the upper right side (hereinafter referred to as “the rear upper right side of the rear surface of the reel base 1572b”) along the opening edge of the circular opening 1572bk when the reel base 1572b is viewed from the back. Hereinafter, the description for specifying the position when the reel base 1572b is viewed from the back side will be described as “rear surface of the reel base 1572b” and the position will be described subsequently.) The central angle is 180 degrees counterclockwise from the position. The inner rib portion 1572bob protrudes rearward in a region RB0 extending to a position where the inner base portion RB0 extends to a position where the central angle is 60 degrees clockwise from the position on the right side of the rear surface of the reel base 1572b. Has been. The region RB0 has a region RB0A extending from the upper right side of the rear surface of the reel base 1572b to a position where the central angle is 120 degrees counterclockwise, and the central angle is approximately 30 degrees counterclockwise from the end position of the region RB0A. A region RB0B extending to the position, and a region RB0C extending from the end position of the region RB0B to a position where the central angle is approximately 30 degrees counterclockwise. The height of the inner rib portion 1572bob protruding rearward is lower in the order of the region RB0A, the region RB0B, and the region RB0C. Note that the height of the outer rib portion 1572boa projecting rearward is the same as the height of the inner rib portion 1572bob projecting rearward in the regions RB0A and RB1.

  In the space sandwiched between the outer rib portion 1572boa and the inner rib portion 1572bob in the region RB0C, one end of the negative electrode side tension spring 1572bg that pulls the negative electrode side wire 1572be wound around the negative electrode side groove 1572bb is hooked at the start position of the region RB0C. A negative-side spring mounting boss 1572bw is formed to protrude rearward, and is hooked on the other end of the negative-side tension spring 1572bg at a position where the central angle is approximately 20 degrees counterclockwise from the negative-side spring mounting boss 1572bw. The negative electrode side wire processing piece 1572by for restricting the posture of the negative electrode side wire 1572be thus formed is formed. In the negative side groove 1572bb formed in the outer rib portion 1572boa corresponding to the end position of the region RB0C, a negative side spring opening for guiding the negative side wire 1572be wound around the negative side groove 1572bb to the vicinity of the negative side spring mounting boss 1572bw. 1572bv is formed.

  On the same circumference where the negative angle side spring mounting boss 1572 bw is formed at a position where the central angle is approximately 5 degrees counterclockwise from the negative side spring opening 1572 bv, the positive side wire wound around the positive side groove 1572 ba is formed. A positive-side spring mounting boss 1572bs for hooking one end of the positive-side tension spring 1572bf that pulls 1572bd is formed to protrude rearward, and the central angle is approximately 20 degrees counterclockwise from the positive-side spring mounting boss 1572bs. A positive-side wire processing piece 1572bx for regulating the posture of the positive-side wire 1572bd hooked to the other end of the positive-side tension spring 1572bf is formed at the position. A positive electrode side wire 1572bd wound around a positive electrode side groove 1572ba is connected to a positive electrode on a positive electrode side groove 1572ba formed in an outer rib portion 1572boa corresponding to a position where the central angle is approximately 10 degrees counterclockwise from the positive electrode side wire processing piece 1572bx. A positive-side spring opening 1572br is formed to guide the vicinity of the side spring mounting boss 1572bs.

  In the space sandwiched between the outer rib portion 1572boa and the inner rib portion 1572bob in the region RB1, the positive electrode side wire wound around the positive electrode side groove 1572ba in the vicinity of the position on the right side of the rear surface of the reel base 1572b and in the vicinity of the start position of the region RB1. A positive electrode side wire attachment boss hole 1572bp for attaching 1572bd is formed projecting rearward, and the negative electrode wound around the negative electrode side groove 1572bb at a position where the central angle is approximately 30 degrees in the clockwise direction from the positive electrode side wire attachment boss hole 1572bp. A positive electrode side wire 1572bd and a negative electrode side wire which are formed in a negative electrode side wire attachment boss hole 1572bt protruding rearward and fixed to the positive electrode side wire attachment boss hole 1572bp in the vicinity of the end position of the region RB1. Mounting boss hole 1 In order to attach a loop relay board 1572i for electrically connecting and relaying the negative electrode side wire 1572be fixed to 72bt to an interior lamp board 1572cc (see FIGS. 129 and 130) of a car 1572c, which will be described later, via a tow arm 1572d. The substrate fixing piece 1572bz is formed. A positive-side wire 1572bd wound around the positive-side groove 1572ba is connected to a positive-side wire 1572bd formed in the outer rib portion 1572boa corresponding to a position where the central angle is approximately 10 degrees clockwise from the positive-side wire attachment boss hole 1572bp. A positive electrode side wire fixing opening 1572bq for leading to the mounting boss hole 1572bp is formed, and an outer rib portion 1572boa corresponding to a position where the central angle is approximately 10 degrees in the clockwise direction from the negative electrode side wire mounting boss hole 1572bt is formed. The negative electrode side groove 1572bb is formed with a negative electrode side wire fixing opening 1572bu for guiding the negative electrode side wire 1572be wound around the negative electrode side groove 1572bb to the negative electrode side wire attachment boss hole 1572bt.

  The central angle PW extending from the position where the positive side spring opening 1572br is formed to the position where the positive side wire fixing opening 1572bq is formed is determined when the front gear module 1572 is attached to the front surface of the unit base 1570b. At the position where the positive side finger 1579b and the negative side finger 1579c of the front contact module 1579 attached to the lower left side of the front surface of the 1570b come into contact with the positive side wire 1572bd and the negative side wire 1572be, respectively, and attached to the lower right side of the front surface of the unit base 1570b. About three times the central angle FM (see FIG. 122) due to the positions at which the positive side finger 1579b and the negative side finger 1579c of the front contact module 1579 are in contact with the positive side wire 1572bd and the negative side wire 1572be, respectively. You have me. The central angle NW from the position where the negative side spring opening 1572bv is formed to the position where the negative side wire fixing opening 1572bu is formed is determined when the rear gear module 1573 is attached to the rear surface of the unit base 1570b. The position where the positive side finger 1586b and the negative side finger 1586c of the rear side contact module 1586 attached to the lower left side of the rear surface of the unit base 1570b are in contact with the positive side wire 1573bd and the negative side wire 1573be, respectively, and the lower right side of the rear side of the unit base 1570b. The central angle BM (see FIG. 123) is approximately 3 depending on the positions at which the positive side finger 1586b and the negative side finger 1586c of the rear contact module 1586 attached to the side contact the positive side wire 1573bd and the negative side wire 1573be, respectively. It has become.

  A wheel 1572c is mounted on the same circumference where the negative angle side spring mounting boss 1572bs and the positive side spring mounting boss 1572bs are formed at a position where the central angle is approximately 5 degrees clockwise from the end position of the region RB1. A shaft hole 1572bh for inserting a hooked retaining ring type towing pin 1572e that pivotally supports the towing arm 1572d is formed. A locking piece 1572bm for hooking one end of the torsion spring 1572f is formed at a position where the central angle is approximately 10 degrees clockwise from the shaft hole 1572bh. The other end of the torsion spring 1572f is inserted into a locking hole 1572dad (see FIG. 129) formed on the curved outer periphery of the pulling arm 1572d, which will be described later.

  Further, in the space sandwiched between the outer rib portion 1572boa and the inner rib portion 1572bob, the gear is located along the space at a position corresponding to the aforementioned stop hole 1572ad formed in the thin disk 1572aa of the gear base 1572a. An attachment boss hole 1572bi for attaching the base 1572a is formed to protrude rearward, and a positioning pin for positioning the gear base 1572a at a position corresponding to the positioning hole 1572ac formed in the thin disk 1572aa of the gear base 1572a. 1572bn is formed to protrude rearward.

  In this embodiment, the length of the positive electrode side wire 1572bd wound around the positive electrode side groove 1572ba is set to be approximately 1.25 times the circumferential length of the positive electrode side groove 1572ba, and the negative electrode side wire 1572be wound around the negative electrode side groove 1572bb. Is set to be approximately 1.25 times the circumferential length of the negative side groove 1572bb. Therefore, the positive electrode side wire 1572bd is double-wrapped around the positive electrode side groove 1572ba at the central angle PW from the position where the positive electrode side spring opening 1572br is formed to the position where the positive electrode side wire fixing opening 1572bq is formed. The negative electrode side groove 1572bb has a negative electrode side wire 1572be at a central angle NW from the position where the negative electrode side spring opening 1572bv is formed to the position where the negative electrode side wire fixing opening 1572bu is formed. Is formed in a double-wrapped region. For example, in the cross section taken along the line BB in FIG. 127, as shown in FIG. 128 (a), the width of the positive side groove 1572ba is formed to fit the two positive side wires 1572bd, and the width of the negative side groove 1572bb. Is formed in such a size that two negative-side wires 1572be can be accommodated. On the other hand, in the cross section taken along the line CC in FIG. 127, as shown in FIG. 128 (b), the width of the positive side groove 1572ba is formed to be large enough to accommodate one positive side wire 1572bd. The width is formed such that one negative electrode side wire 1572be can be accommodated. As shown in FIGS. 128 (a) and 128 (b), the partition wall 1572bc described above is formed between the positive electrode side groove 1572ba and the negative electrode side groove 1572bb, so that even if the positive electrode side wire 1572bd or the negative electrode side wire 1572be is loosened. It is prevented from entering other grooves with different polarities, thereby preventing a short circuit.

[2-5-2 (c). car]
Next, the wheel 1572c attached to the towing arm 1572d will be described. In the description here, the front-rear direction and the left-right direction are described with reference to a state in which the vehicle 1572c shown in FIG. 129 is viewed from the front.

  As shown in FIGS. 129 and 130, the wheel 1572c attached to the towing arm 1572d is attached to the upper surface of the chassis 1572ca having a substantially rectangular parallelepiped box shape having an open upper surface and extending in the front-rear direction. A fixing member 1572cb, an in-vehicle lamp board 1572cc attached to the upper surface of the fixing member 1572cb, and a body 1572cd attached to cover the upper surface of the chassis 1572ca are configured.

  A tow arm insertion port 1572cac for inserting a tow arm 1572d is formed at the center of the lower surface of the chassis 1572ca, and an axle 1572cf with wheels 1572ce attached to both ends is inserted into the front surface of the lower surface and the rear surface of the lower surface of the chassis 1572ca. An axle insertion groove 1572caa is formed toward the upper surface of the chassis 1572ca. The axle insertion groove 1572caa formed on the rear side is in communication with the tow arm insertion port 1572cac. In the axle insertion groove 1572caa formed on the front side and the rear side, in the vicinity of the opening, when the axle 1572cf is inserted into the axle insertion groove 1572caa, the inserted axle 1572cf is not removed from the axle insertion groove 1572caa. Axle locking claws 1572cab are provided for the purpose.

  Positioning pins 1572cae for positioning the fixing member 1572cb and the in-vehicle lamp board 1572cc are formed to protrude upward with respect to the upper surface of the chassis 1572ca on the right side of the upper surface of the chassis 1572ca and closer to the center rear side of the chassis 1572ca. A mounting boss hole 1572caf for attaching a fixing member 1572cb and an in-vehicle lamp board 1572cc is formed on the left inner surface of the chassis 1572ca near the center rear side of the chassis 1572ca so as to protrude toward the inside of the chassis 1572ca.

  In the center of the left inner surface and the right inner surface of the chassis 1572ca, a tow arm 1572d is rotatably provided so as to be parallel to an axle insertion groove 1572caa formed on the front side and an axle insertion groove 1572caa formed on the rear side. A tow arm shaft insertion groove 1572 cad for inserting the supporting tow arm shaft 1572 cg is formed, and a thin plate with a stop hole 1572 cag for fixing to the body 1572 cd is formed in the front upper center of the chassis 1572 ca. A thin-walled plate is formed at the center of the rear upper surface of the chassis 1572ca so as to protrude rearward and is formed with a convex chassis locking piece 1572cah for fitting the chassis 1572ca to the body 1572cd. Yes.

  The fixing member 1572cb attached to the upper surface of the chassis 1572ca is formed in a box shape with the lower surface opened, and the fixing member 1572cb is cut from the center of the left and right sides to the inner wall of the rear surface when the fixing member 1572cb is viewed from the front. A notch is formed. The front side of the U-shaped fixing member 1572cb left by this notch is the towing arm inserted when the tow arm shaft 1572cg is inserted into the tow arm shaft insertion groove 1572cad formed in the chassis 1572ca. The arm shaft 1572cg is formed as a tow arm shaft disengagement preventing portion 1572cbc for preventing the arm shaft 1572cg from being detached from the tow arm shaft insertion groove 1572cad. A wiring opening 1572cbd for passing wiring through the in-vehicle lamp board 1572cc is formed at the center of the front upper side of the pull-out arm shaft dropout prevention part 1572cbc.

  The fixing member 1572cb has a positioning hole 1572cba for defining the positional relationship with the chassis 1572ca at a position corresponding to the positioning pin 1572cae formed on the chassis 1572ca on the upper right side when the fixing member 1572cb is viewed from the front. A thin plate is formed protruding outward, and a through hole 1572cbb is formed on the left side of the top surface of the fixing member 1572cb when viewed from the front, for passing a screw in a position corresponding to the mounting boss hole 1572caf formed in the chassis 1572ca. The formed thin plate protrudes outward.

  The in-vehicle lamp board 1572cc attached to the upper surface of the fixing member 1572cb is formed in a rectangular thin plate shape that is long in the front-rear direction. A positioning hole 1572cc for defining a positional relationship with the chassis 1572ca is formed at a position corresponding to the positioning pin 1572cae formed on the chassis 1572ca on the interior lamp board 1572cc, and a mounting boss hole 1572caf formed on the chassis 1572ca, A stop hole 1572ccb for fixing to the chassis 1572ca is formed at a corresponding position. In addition, LEDs 1572ccc are mounted as backlights of the car 1572c on the rear two corners of the upper surface of the interior lamp board 1572cc, and LEDs 1572ccd are mounted as front lights of the car 1572c on the front corners of the lower surface of the interior lamp board 1572cc. In addition, a connection connector 1572cce electrically connected to the LEDs 1572ccc and 1572ccd is mounted at the front center of the lower surface.

  The body 1572cd attached so as to cover the upper surface of the chassis 1572ca is formed using a sports car as a motif, and a mounting boss hole 1572cda for attaching the chassis 1572ca is provided at a position corresponding to the stop hole 1572cag formed in the chassis 1572ca. Is formed. The body 1572 cd has an engagement groove 1572 cdb for fitting a chassis locking piece 1572 cah formed in the chassis 1572 ca in the lower center of the rear surface. Further, a member molded from a transparent synthetic resin is attached to the front light portion 1572cdc and the backlight portion 1572cdd of the body 1572cd from the inside of the body 1572cd, and the LEDs 1572ccc and 1572ccd mounted on the interior lamp board 1572cc are provided. It does not block the emitted light.

  A tow arm 1572d to which the wheel 1572c is attached is a tow arm main body 1572da formed in an arcuate shape, and is curved along the outer shape of the tow arm main body 1572da and covers the outer periphery and one side surface of the tow arm main body 1572da. And a tow arm cover 1572db attached in this manner. The tow arm main body 1572da is formed with a wiring housing groove 1572daa capable of housing the wiring along the outer periphery thereof. A shaft hole 1572da for inserting a tow arm shaft 1572cg is formed at the upper end of the tow arm main body 1572da, and the aforementioned tow pin 1572e (see FIGS. 125 and 126) is formed at the lower end of the tow arm main body 1572da. A shaft hole 1572dac for insertion is formed. Further, on the outer periphery of the tow arm main body 1572da and above the shaft hole 1572dac, a locking hole 1572dad for inserting and hooking one end of the torsion spring 1572f (see FIGS. 125 and 126) is formed protruding outward. A stop hole 1572dae for fixing the tow arm cover 1572db is formed on the outer periphery of the tow arm main body 1572da and below the shaft hole 1572da so as to protrude outward. The towing arm cover 1572db has an attachment boss hole 1572dba for attaching the towing arm main body 1572da at a position corresponding to the stop hole 1572dae formed in the towing arm main body 1572da.

  A method for assembling the vehicle 1572c and the tow arm 1572d configured as described above will be described. First, wires (not shown) are inserted into the wire receiving grooves 1572daa formed in the tow arm main body 1572da, and both ends of the wires are connected to the wire receiving grooves 1572daa. It protrudes from the upper end and the lower end of each. Subsequently, the tow arm cover 1572db is put on the tow arm main body 1572da, and a screw (not shown) is inserted from a set hole 1572dae formed in the tow arm main body 1572da toward a mounting boss hole 1572db formed in the tow arm pull cover 1572db. Screw on. As a result, the wiring is attached to the towing arm 1572d.

  The tow arm 1572d thus assembled is inserted into the tow arm insertion port 1572cac formed in the chassis 1572ca from the lower side of the chassis 1572ca toward the upper side of the chassis 1572ca, and the shaft hole 1572dab formed at the upper end of the tow arm 1572d. Projecting from the upper surface of the chassis 1572ca. Subsequently, the tow arm shaft 1572cg is inserted into the projecting shaft hole 1572dab to pull the tow arm 1572d below the chassis 1572ca, and the tow arm shaft 1572cg is formed in the chassis 1572ca for the tow arm shaft insertion groove 1572cad. Insert into. Then, the wiring protruding from the upper end of the towing arm 1572d is inserted into the connection connector 1572cce mounted on the in-vehicle lamp board 1572cc through the wiring opening 1572cbd from the inside of the fixing member 1572cb. As a result, the wiring is electrically connected to the LEDs 1572ccc and 1572ccd mounted on the interior lamp board 1572cc.

  Subsequently, the fixing member 1572cb and the in-vehicle lamp board 1572cc are sequentially covered on the upper surface of the chassis 1572ca, the positioning pins 1572cae formed in the chassis 1572ca are formed, the positioning holes 1572cba formed in the fixing member 1572cb and the in-car lamp board 1572cc are formed. The positioning holes 1572cc thus fitted are sequentially fitted, and a screw (not shown) is directed from a stop hole 1572ccb formed in the interior lamp board 1572cc to a through hole 1572cbb formed in the fixing member 1572cb and a mounting boss hole 1572caf formed in the chassis 1572ca. Insert and screw. Thereby, the fixing member 1572cb and the in-vehicle lamp board 1572cc can be fixed to the upper surface of the chassis 1572ca. In addition, in the state where the fixing member 1572cb is fixed to the chassis 1572ca, the tow arm shaft 1572cg is not detached from the tow arm shaft insertion groove 1572cad by the tow arm shaft disengagement preventing portion 1572cbc formed on the fixing member 1572cb. The tow arm 1572d in which the shaft 1572cg is inserted is attached to the chassis 1572ca.

  Subsequently, the body 1572cd is placed over the chassis 1572ca, and the chassis locking piece 1572cah formed on the chassis 1572ca is inserted into the engaging groove 1572cdb formed on the body 1572cd to be fitted together, and the stop formed on the chassis 1572ca. A screw (not shown) is inserted into the mounting boss hole 1572cda formed in the body 1572cd from the hole 1572cag and fixed. Accordingly, the body 1572cd can be fixed to the chassis 1572ca.

  Subsequently, an axle 1572cf with wheels 1572ce attached to both ends is inserted into the axle insertion groove 1572caa formed in the chassis 1572ca. Thereby, the wheel 1572ce can rotate around the axle 1572cf.

[2-5-2 (d). How to assemble the front gear module]
Next, a method for assembling the front gear module 1572 from the vehicle 1572c assembled in this manner and the above-described gear base 1572a and reel base 1572b will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 125 to 127. 125 and 126, the positive electrode side wire 1572bd is wound around the positive electrode side groove 1572ba of the reel base 1572b, and the negative electrode side wire 1572be is wound around the negative electrode side groove 1572bb of the reel base 1572b.

  As shown in FIG. 127, both ends of the positive electrode side wire 1572bd are crimped by round terminals. A round terminal at one end of the positive electrode side wire 1572bd is passed through a positive electrode side wire fixing opening 1572bq formed in the positive electrode side groove 1572ba and a screw (not shown) is inserted into the positive electrode side wire attachment boss hole 1572bp together with a positive electrode side wire (not shown). Stop. Subsequently, while pulling the round terminal at the other end of the positive electrode side wire 1572bd, it is wound along the positive electrode side groove 1572ba, passed through the positive electrode side spring opening 1572br formed in the positive electrode side groove 1572ba, and hooked to one end of the positive electrode side tension spring 1572bf. Then, the other end of the positive electrode side tension spring 1572bf is hooked on the positive electrode side spring mounting boss 1572bs. Thereby, the winding force of the positive electrode side wire 1572bd can be generated by the pulling force of the positive electrode side tension spring 1572bf, so that the positive electrode side wire 1572bd can be prevented from loosening.

  As shown in FIG. 127, both ends of the negative electrode side wire 1572be are crimped by round terminals. A round terminal at one end of the negative electrode side wire 1572be is passed through a negative electrode side wire fixing opening 1572bu formed in the negative electrode side groove 1572bb, and a screw (not shown) is inserted into the negative electrode side wire attachment boss hole 1572bt together with a negative electrode side wire (not shown). Stop. Subsequently, while pulling the round terminal at the other end of the negative electrode side wire 1572be, it is wound along the negative electrode side groove 1572bb, passed through the negative electrode side spring opening 1572bv formed in the negative electrode side groove 1572bb, and hooked to one end of the negative electrode side tension spring 1572bg. Then, the other end of the negative electrode side tension spring 1572bg is hooked on the negative electrode side spring mounting boss 1572bw. Thereby, the winding force of the negative electrode side wire 1572be can be generated by the pulling force of the negative electrode side tension spring 1572bg, so that the negative electrode side wire 1572be can be prevented from loosening.

  In this way, after the positive electrode side wire 1572bd and the negative electrode side wire 1572be are wound around the positive electrode side groove 1572ba and the negative electrode side groove 1572bb, respectively, as shown in FIGS. A tow pin 1572e is inserted from the front surface of the reel toward the rear surface of the reel base 1572b so as to protrude from the rear surface of the reel bale 1572b. Subsequently, the torsion spring 1572f is inserted into the protruding pulling pin 1572e, and one end of the torsion spring 1572f is hooked on the locking piece 1572bm formed on the reel base 1572b. Then, the shaft hole 1572dac (see FIGS. 129 and 130) of the towing arm 1572d to which the wheel 1572c described above is attached is inserted into the towing pin 1572e. Subsequently, the washer 1572g is inserted into the tow pin 1572e, and a retaining ring groove (not shown) formed on the tow pin 1572e is projected from the rear surface of the washer 1572g. Then, an E-shaped ring (not shown) is inserted and fitted into the protruding retaining ring groove. As a result, the torsion spring 1572f, the tow arm 1572d, and the like cannot be detached from the tow pin 1572e, and movement of the tow arm 1572d in the front-rear direction can be restricted.

  Subsequently, the other end of the torsion spring 1572f is inserted into the engaging hole 1572dad (see FIGS. 129 and 130) of the pulling arm 1572d and hooked. Thus, the towing arm 1572d generates a force that rotates in the clockwise direction in FIG. 125 (counterclockwise in FIG. 126) about the towing pin 1572e by the restoring force of the torsion spring 1572f.

  Subsequently, wiring electrically connected to the interior lamp board 1572cc of the vehicle 1572c protruding from the vicinity of the shaft hole 1572dac of the towing arm 1572d to which the vehicle 1572c is attached (hereinafter referred to as “wiring from the towing arm 1572d”). Are inserted into the loop relay substrate 1572i, and together with the round terminal at one end of the positive side wire 1572bd and the positive side wiring screwed to the positive side wire mounting boss hole 1572bp, and the round terminal at one end of the negative side wire 1572be The negative electrode side wiring screwed into the negative electrode side wire attachment boss hole 1572bt is inserted into the loop relay substrate 1572i. Thereby, the positive electrode side wire 1572bd and the negative electrode side wire 1572be are electrically connected to the in-vehicle lamp board 1572cc (see FIGS. 129 and 130) of the vehicle 1572c.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 127, the loop relay substrate 1572i is inserted into the substrate fixing piece 1572bz and fixed. At this time, the positive side wiring and the negative side wiring are bent and accommodated in a space sandwiched between the outer rib portion 1572boa of the reel base 1572b and the inner rib portion 1572bob in the region RB1, and the tow arm The wiring from 1572d is bent and accommodated so as not to be disconnected.

  After the wheel 1572c and the loop relay board 1572i are attached to the reel base 1572b as described above, the rear surface of the reel base 1572b is covered with the front surface of the gear base 1572a, and the positioning pins 1572bn formed on the reel base 1572b are geared. The positioning hole 1572ac formed in the base 1572a is fitted, and a screw (not shown) is inserted into the mounting boss hole 1572bi formed in the reel base 1572b from the set hole 1572ad formed in the gear base 1572a and fixed. Thereby, the magnet MG0 embedded in the thin disk 1572aa of the ring gear 1572ab and the position of the wheel 1572c attached to the reel base 1572b (the tow pin 1572e that pivotally supports the tow arm 1572d to which the wheel 1572c is attached are inserted. The gear base 1572a can be fixed to the reel base 1572b without breaking the relationship with the position of the shaft hole 1572bh. Further, by fixing the gear base 1572a to the reel base 1572b, the loop relay board 1572i attached to the space sandwiched between the outer rib portion 1572boa of the reel base 1572b and the inner rib portion 1572bob in the region RB1 described above. Is almost sealed.

  When the front gear module 1572 and the rear gear module 1573 assembled in this way are attached to the unit base 1570b described above, and the front unit cover 1570a and the rear unit cover 1570c are attached to the unit base 1570b, FIG. In the cross section taken along line -D, as shown in FIG. 131, the left wheel 1572ce of the vehicle 1572c is placed on the traveling surface 1570aba of the front unit cover 1570a, and the right wheel 1572ce of the vehicle 1572c is placed on the unit base 1570b. It will be in the state mounted on the running surface 1570bxa. In this state, the tow arm 1572d generates a force that presses the vehicle 1572c toward the traveling surfaces 1570aba and 1570bxa by the restoring force of the torsion spring 1572f (see FIGS. 125 and 126), and the wheels 1572ce and 1572ce The grip strength with the running surfaces 1570aba and 1570bxa is increased. As a result, the towing arm 1572d can tow the wheel 1572ce and 1572ce by towing the car 1572c along the traveling surfaces 1570aba and 1570bxa. On the other hand, the left wheel 1573ce of the vehicle 1573c is placed on the traveling surface 1570bxa of the unit base 1570b, and the right wheel 1573ce of the vehicle 1573c is placed on the traveling surface 1570cba of the rear unit cover 1570c. In this state, the tow arm 1573d generates a force that presses the vehicle 1573c toward the traveling surfaces 1570bxa and 1570cba by the restoring force of the torsion spring 1573f (see FIGS. 125 and 126), and the wheels 1573ce and 1573ce The grip strength with the running surfaces 1570bxa and 1570cba is increased. As a result, the towing arm 1573d tows the vehicle 1573c along the traveling surfaces 1570bxa and 1570cba, thereby rotating the wheels 1573ce and 1573ce.

[2-5-3. Front contact module and rear contact module]
Next, the above-described front contact module 1579 for applying a positive electrode voltage and a negative electrode voltage to the positive electrode side wire 1572bd and the negative electrode side wire 1572be wound around the reel base 1572b of the front gear module 1572, and the above described rear gear module. The rear contact module 1586 for applying the positive voltage and the negative voltage to the positive electrode wire 1573bd and the negative electrode wire 1573be wound around the reel base 1573b of 1573 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 132 and 133. FIG. 132 is an exploded perspective view (a) of the front (rear) contact module, and a front view (b) of the front (rear) contact module. FIG. 133 is a partial cross-sectional view taken along the line EE of FIG. (Partial perspective view). Since the front contact module 1579 and the rear contact module 1586 have the same structure, the configuration of the front contact module 1579 will be described. 132, reference numerals in parentheses indicate various components of the rear contact module 1586.

  As shown in FIG. 132 (a), the front contact module 1579 includes a contact pedestal 1579a molded from a non-conductive synthetic resin, and a positive-side wiring to which a positive voltage is applied by being attached to the upper side of the contact pedestal 1579a. A positive-side finger 1579b electrically connected to 1579d, and a negative-electrode side electrically connected to a negative-side wiring 1579e attached to the upper side of the contact pedestal 1579a along with the positive-side finger 1579b and applied with a negative-voltage And a finger 1579c.

  The contact pedestal 1579a is formed in a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape, and a groove 1579aa is formed on the upper surface thereof along the left-right direction. In this groove 1579aa, a partition wall 1579aa for partitioning the groove 1579aa into two grooves, a front groove and a rear groove, is formed so as to protrude upward along the groove 1579aa. The front side groove partitioned by the partition wall 1579aaa is attached with the negative side finger 1579c as the negative side finger attachment groove 1579aab. The rear side groove partitioned by the partition wall 1579aaa is attached with the positive side finger 1579b as the positive side finger attachment groove 1579aac. The groove 1579aa is formed with a negative-side rib portion 1579aaad projecting upward along the center of the negative-side finger attachment groove 1579aa, and along the center of the positive-side finger attachment groove 1579aac, the positive-side rib portion 1579aae. Projecting upward. The heights of the negative electrode side rib portion 1579aad and the positive electrode side rib portion 1579aae are the same, and are lower than the height of the partition wall 1579aaa.

  Positioning pins 1579aaf for positioning the negative finger 1579c are formed on the upper left side and the upper right side of the negative rib portion 1579aad so as to protrude upward, respectively. An attachment boss hole 1579aag for attaching the finger 1579c is formed. Positioning pins 1579aah for positioning the positive-side finger 1579b are formed to protrude upward on the upper left side and the upper right side of the positive-side rib portion 1579aae, respectively. An attachment boss hole 1579aai for attaching the finger 1579b is formed.

  On the lower surface of the contact pedestal 1579a, as shown in FIG. 132 (b), the unit base 1570b is located at a position corresponding to the mounting boss hole 1570bm formed on the lower left side of the front surface of the unit base 1570b or lower right side of the front surface. A fixing hole 1579ab is formed to protrude downward. Further, as shown in FIG. 132 (b), a wiring processing piece 1579ac for hanging the positive electrode side wiring 1579d and the negative electrode side wiring 1579e together is formed in the center of the lower surface of the contact base 1579a so as to protrude forward. ing.

  The positive-side finger 1579b attached to the positive-side finger attachment groove 1579aac and the negative-side finger 1579c attached to the negative-side finger attachment groove 1579aab are thin conductive rectangular beryllium copper alloys made of beryllium, copper, or the like. It is a plate, and one end of the thin plate is bent upward by approximately 130 degrees with the center of the upper surface of the thin plate as a crease, and one end of the bent thin plate is bent into an arc shape downward. ing. When the positive-side finger 1579b and the negative-side finger 1579c are displaced by pressing a portion bent in an arc shape downward from above, a restoring pressing force is generated.

  The positive-side finger 1579b is a positioning hole for defining the positional relationship with the positive-side rib portion 1579aae at a position corresponding to the positioning pin 1579aah and the mounting boss hole 1579aai formed in the positive-side rib portion 1579aae of the contact base 1579a. 1579ba and a stop hole 1579bb for fixing itself to the positive-side rib portion 1579aae are formed. The negative finger 1579c is a positioning hole for defining the positional relationship between the negative rib 1579aad and the positioning pin 1579aaf and the mounting boss hole 1579aag formed in the negative rib 1579aad of the contact pedestal 1579a. 1579ca and a stop hole 1579cb for fixing itself to the negative-side rib portion 1579aad are formed.

  The assembly method of the front contact module 1579 configured in this way will be described. The positive finger 1579b is inserted into the positive finger mounting groove 1579aac of the contact pedestal 1579a, and is formed in the positive rib portion 1579aae of the positive finger mounting groove 1579aac. The positioning hole 1579ba formed in the positive finger 1579b is fitted to the positioning pin 1579aah. Subsequently, the round terminal to which one end of the positive electrode side wiring 1579d is crimped is aligned with the stop hole 1579bb formed in the positive electrode side finger 1579b. Then, a screw (not shown) is inserted from the round terminal toward the mounting boss hole 1579aai formed in the positive-side rib portion 1579aae of the positive-side finger mounting groove 1579aac, and is fastened. Thereby, the positive electrode side wiring 1579d and the positive electrode side finger 1579b can be fixed to the positive electrode side rib portion 1579aae of the positive electrode side finger attachment groove 1579aac.

  Subsequently, the negative side finger 1579c is inserted into the negative side finger mounting groove 1579aab of the contact pedestal 1579a, and the positioning pin 1579aaf formed in the negative side rib portion 1579aad of the negative side finger mounting groove 1579aab is formed on the negative side finger 1579c. The positioning hole 1579ca is fitted. Subsequently, the round terminal to which one end of the negative electrode side wiring 1579e is crimped is aligned with the stop hole 1579cb formed in the negative electrode side finger 1579c. Then, a screw (not shown) is inserted from this round terminal toward the mounting boss hole 1579 aag formed in the negative electrode side rib portion 1579 aad of the negative electrode side finger mounting groove 1579 aab and screwed. Thereby, the negative electrode side wiring 1579e and the negative electrode side finger 1579c can be fixed to the negative electrode side rib portion 1579aad of the negative electrode side finger mounting groove 1579aab.

  Subsequently, the positive electrode side wiring 1579d and the negative electrode side wiring 1579e are bent so as not to be disconnected and hooked on the wiring processing piece 1579ac formed below the contact pedestal 1579a.

  The front contact module 1579 shown in FIGS. 132 (a) and (b) is attached to the lower left side of the front surface of the unit base 1570b shown in FIG. 122, and is attached to the lower right side of the front surface of the unit base 1570b. The contact module 1579 changes the mounting direction of the positive electrode side finger 1579b and the negative electrode side finger 1579c by 180 degrees, and the positive electrode side rib portion 1579aae of the positive electrode side finger mounting groove 1579aac and the negative electrode side rib portion 1579aad of the negative electrode side finger mounting groove 1579aab. It can be assembled by attaching to each. Further, as shown in FIG. 132 (a), the rear contact module 1586 attached to the lower left side and lower right side of the unit base 1570b shown in FIG. 123 has a front groove formed in the contact pedestal 1586a as a positive electrode. The side finger attachment groove 1586aac and the rear side groove become the negative electrode side finger attachment groove 1586aab. Thus, the various components of the front contact module 1579 and the rear contact module 1586 are designed to share parts.

  When the front contact module 1579 thus assembled is attached to the attachment boss hole 1570bm formed on the lower left side of the front surface of the unit base 1570b, as shown in FIG. 132 (b), the positive side finger 1579b and the negative side finger 1579c. The portions bent in the arc shape are pushed down and displaced by the positive electrode side wire 1572bd and the negative electrode side wire 1572be wound around the reel base 1572b of the front gear module 1572, respectively. The positive-side finger 1579b and the negative-side finger 1579c apply a restoring pressing force to the positive-side wire 1572bd and the negative-side wire 1572be, respectively, by this displacement. 122, the positive finger 1579b of the front contact module 1579 is formed on the reel base 1572b of the front gear module 1572 as shown in FIG. 133. The negative side finger 1579c of the front contact module 1579 is wound around the negative side groove 1572bb formed on the reel base 1572b of the front side gear module 1572. The negative electrode side wire 1572be is in contact with and electrically connected. Accordingly, the positive voltage of the positive electrode side wiring 1579d can be applied to the positive electrode side wire 1572bd via the positive electrode side finger 1579b, and the negative electrode voltage of the negative electrode side wiring 1579e can be applied to the negative electrode side wire via the negative electrode side finger 1579c. 1572be can be applied.

[2-5-4. Front sensor board box and rear sensor board box]
Next, the front sensor board box 1581 for housing the front sensor board 1580 for detecting the magnet MG0 embedded in the thin disk 1572aa of the front gear module 1572 and the thin disk 1573aa of the rear gear module 1573 described above are embedded. The rear sensor board box 1588 that houses the rear sensor board 1587 that detects the magnet MG1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 134 is an exploded perspective view (a) of the front (rear) sensor board box as viewed from the front, and an exploded perspective view (b) of the front (rear) sensor board box as viewed from the back. Since the front sensor board 1580 and the rear sensor board 1587 have the same structure, and the front sensor board box 1581 and the rear sensor board box 1588 have the same structure, the configurations of the front sensor board 1580 and the front sensor board box 1581 will be described. . In FIG. 134, reference numerals in parentheses indicate various components of the rear sensor board 1587 and the rear sensor board box 1588.

  As shown in FIGS. 134A and 134B, the front sensor board box 1581 includes a base 1581a, a front sensor board 1580 attached to the rear surface of the base 1581a, and a cover attached to cover the rear surface of the base 1581a. 1581b.

  The base 1581a has a rectangular thin plate shape that is long in the vertical direction, and has a shape with a chamfered upper left corner when the base 1581a is viewed from the front, and a lower left and upper right when the base 1581a is viewed from the front. Positioning pins 1581aa for positioning the front sensor substrate 1580 are formed to protrude rearward on the side. The base 1581a is formed on the upper side of the right side and the lower side of the left side when viewed from the front, on the front surface of the unit base 1570b described above. Stop holes 1581ab for fixing the unit base 1570b to the unit base 1570b are formed at positions corresponding to the formed mounting boss holes 1570bn so as to protrude outward, respectively, and substantially the center of the left side and the right side when the base 1581a is viewed from the front. In addition, a concave engagement groove 1581ac for fitting the cover 1581b is provided. Which it is formed.

  The front sensor substrate 1580 attached to the rear surface of the base 1581a is a rectangular thin plate that is long in the vertical direction, and the upper left corner of the front sensor substrate 1580 is chamfered when viewed from the front, and is slightly rounded from the outer shape of the base 1581a. It is formed in a small shape, and a positioning hole 1580a that defines the positional relationship with the base 1581a is formed at a position corresponding to the positioning pin 1581aa formed on the base 1581a. On the rear surface of the front sensor board 1580, a Hall element for detecting the magnetism of the magnet MG0 (see FIG. 122) embedded in the vicinity of the outer periphery of the thin disk 1572aa of the front gear module 1572 described above in the vicinity of the chamfered corner. 1580b is mounted, and a connection connector 1580c for transmitting a detection signal from the Hall element 1580b to the outside is mounted at the lower center of the rear surface of the front sensor board 1580.

  The cover 1581b attached so as to cover the rear surface of the base 1581a is a box shape in which the front surface of a rectangular parallelepiped long in the vertical direction is opened, and the upper left corner is chamfered when the cover 1581b is viewed from the front. Stop holes 1581ba for fixing the cover 1581b to the unit base 1570b at the positions corresponding to the stop holes 1581ab formed in the base 1581a are directed outward on the upper right side and lower left side when the cover 1581b is viewed from the front. Locking claws 1581bb for fixing the cover 1581b to the base 1581a at positions corresponding to the engaging grooves 1581ac formed in the base 1581a are formed at the center of the left side and the right side when the cover 1581b is viewed from the front. Connected to the front sensor board 1580 on the lower side of the cover 1581b. Connecting opening 1581bc for inserting wires into connector 1580c at positions corresponding to the connector 1580c is formed.

  The assembly method of the front sensor board box 1581 configured in this way will be described. First, the front sensor board 1580 is brought close to the rear surface of the base 1581a, and the front sensor board 1580 is formed on the positioning pins 1581aa formed on the base 1581a. The positioning holes 1580a are fitted together. Subsequently, the cover 1581b is put on the rear surface of the base 1581a, and the engaging claw 1581bb formed on the cover 1581b is pushed into the engaging groove 1581ac formed on the base 1581a. Thus, the cover 1581b can be fixed to the base 1581a, and the front sensor substrate 1580 can be accommodated in a substantially sealed space sandwiched between the base 1581a and the cover 1581b.

  As shown in FIG. 122, the front sensor board box 1581 assembled in this way has its chamfered corners oriented toward the center of an elliptical opening 1570ba formed in the unit base 1570b (the cover 1581b is connected to the unit base). It is attached to the attachment boss hole 1570bn of the unit base 1570b so as to face the front surface of 1570b. Thus, when the front gear module 1572 is supported by the front guide roller 1575 and rotates around the center of the elliptical opening 1570ba as the rotation center, the front sensor is moved forward on the track of the magnet MG0 embedded in the vicinity of the outer periphery of the thin disk 1572aa. The Hall element 1580b mounted in the vicinity of the chamfered corner of the substrate 1580 is arranged. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 123, the assembled rear sensor board box 1588 has its chamfered corners oriented toward the center of the elliptical opening 1570ba formed in the unit base 1570b (the base 1581a is the unit base). It is attached to the attachment boss hole 1570bq of the unit base 1570b (facing the rear surface of 1570b). Thus, when the rear gear module 1573 is supported by the rear guide roller 1582 and rotates around the center of the elliptical opening 1570ba as the rotation center, the magnet MG1 embedded in the vicinity of the outer periphery of the thin disk 1573aa is moved forward on the track. The Hall element 1587b mounted in the vicinity of the chamfered corner of the rear sensor substrate 1587 is arranged.

  According to the loop unit 1570 of this embodiment described above, the meshing of teeth between the ring gear 1572ab (1573ab) formed on one side surface of the thin disk 1572aa (1573aa) and the front intermediate gear 1576 (rear intermediate gear 1583). Dust generated by wear of the tooth surfaces of each other, a front small gear 1576a (rear small gear 1583a) integrally formed with the front intermediate gear 1576 (rear intermediate gear 1583) and a front gear module drive motor 1578 (rear gear) The dust generated from the tooth surfaces of the front drive gear 1578a (rear drive gear 1585a) attached to the output shaft of the module drive motor 1585) is caused by abrasion of the teeth of the magnet MG0 (MG1) and the front sensor board. 1580 (rear sensor substrate 1587) Since the optical axis as Nsa is prevented from being cut off, the front sensor substrate 1580 (the rear sensor substrate 1587) can detect the magnetism of the magnet MG0 (MG1).

  A member wound around the positive side groove 1572ba (1573ba) and the negative side groove 1572bb (1572bb) formed on the outer rib 1572boa (1573boa) of the reel unit 1572b (1573b) of the front gear module 1572 (rear gear module 1573). Since the positive electrode side wire 1572bd (1573bd) and the negative electrode side wire 1572be (1573be) are respectively used as the positive electrode side wire 1572bd (1573bd) and the negative electrode side wire 1572be (1573be), the positive electrode side groove 1572ba (1573ba) and the negative electrode side groove 1572bb are used. (1572bb) can be wound around a circular shape with no corners. Thus, even if the front gear module 1572 (rear gear module 1573) is supported by the front guide roller 1575 (rear guide roller 1582) and rotates, the positive side finger module of the front contact module 1579 (rear contact module 1586) is rotated. 1579b (1586b) jumps at the corner and moves away from the positive-side wire 1572bd (1573bd), or the negative-side finger 1579c (1586c) of the front contact module 1579 (rear-side contact module 1586) jumps at the corner and the negative-side wire 1572be. (1573bde) is not left. When the copper plate is wound around the positive electrode side groove 1572ba (1573ba) and the negative electrode side groove 1572bb (1573bb) instead of the positive electrode side wire 1572bd (1573bd) and the negative electrode side wire 1572be (1573be), it is necessary to bend the copper plate into a polygon. is there. Even if the copper plate is bent into a polygon and the positive electrode side copper plate 1572bd ′ (1573bd ′) is wound around the positive electrode side groove 1572ba (1573ba), or the negative electrode side copper plate 1572be ′ (1573be ′) is wound around the negative electrode side groove 1572bb (1573bb). The positive electrode side copper plate 1572bd ′ (1573bd ′) and the negative electrode side copper plate 1572be ′ (1573be ′) are polygonal and have corners. Therefore, when the front gear module 1572 (rear gear module 1573) is supported by the front guide roller 1575 (rear guide roller 1582) and rotated, the positive side finger 1576b ( 1586b) jumps off at the corner of the positive electrode copper plate 1572bd ′ (1573bd ′) and separates from the positive electrode copper plate 1572bd ′ (1573bd ′), making it difficult to maintain an electrically conductive state by contact, and the front contact module 1579. The negative side finger 1576c (1586c) of the (rear side contact module 1586) jumps off at the corner of the positive side copper plate 1572be ′ (1573be ′) and is separated from the negative side copper plate 1572be ′ (1573be ′), and is electrically connected by contact. Maintaining state It becomes difficult.

  Further, the positive electrode side wire 1572bd is wound twice around the positive electrode side groove 1572ba at the central angle PW from the position where the positive electrode side spring opening 1572br is formed to the position where the positive electrode side wire fixing opening 1572bq is formed. The negative electrode side groove 1572bb has a negative electrode side wire 1572be at a central angle NW from the position where the negative electrode side spring opening 1572bv is formed to the position where the negative electrode side wire fixing opening 1572bu is formed. A region to be wound twice is formed. The central angle PW corresponds to the position at which the positive side finger 1579b and the negative side finger 1579c of the front contact module 1579 attached to the lower left side of the front surface of the unit base 1570b are in contact with the positive side wire 1572bd and the negative side wire 1572be, respectively. Of the front contact module 1579 attached to the lower right side of the front surface of the front side of the front side of the front side of the module 1579 is approximately three times the center angle FW due to the position where the positive side finger 1579b and the negative side finger 1579c come into contact with the positive side wire 1572bd and the negative side wire 1572be. ing. On the other hand, the central angle NW is determined based on the position where the positive electrode side finger 1586b and the negative electrode side finger 1586c of the rear contact module 1586 attached to the lower left side of the rear surface of the unit base 1570b come into contact with the positive electrode side wire 1573bd and the negative electrode side wire 1573be, respectively. A center angle FW of about 3 depending on the position at which the positive finger 1586b and the negative finger 1586c of the rear contact module 1586 attached to the lower right side of the rear surface of the base 1570b are in contact with the positive wire 1573bd and the negative wire 1573be, respectively. It has doubled. Therefore, for example, when the front gear module 1572 is supported by the front guide roller 1575 and rotates, the positive side finger 1579b and the negative side finger 1579c of the front contact module 1579 attached to the lower left side of the front surface of the unit base 1570b are When the positive electrode side wire 1572bd and the negative electrode side wire 1572be enter the single winding region from the double winding region, the positive side of the front contact module 1579 attached to the lower right side of the front surface of the unit base 1570b The finger 1579b and the negative electrode side finger 1579c are still in contact with the positive electrode side wire 1572bd and the negative electrode side wire 1572be in the region where the positive electrode side wire 1572bd and the negative electrode side wire 1572be are wound twice. . On the other hand, for example, when the rear gear module 1573 is supported by the rear guide roller 1582 and rotates, the positive side finger 1579b and the negative side of the rear contact module 1586 attached to the lower right side of the rear surface of the unit base 1570b. When the finger 1579c rushes into the region where the positive-side wire 1572bd and the negative-side wire 1572be are double-wound from the double-winding region, the rear-side contact module 1586 attached to the lower left side of the rear surface of the unit base 1570b. The positive electrode side finger 1586b and the negative electrode side finger 1586c are still in contact with the positive electrode side wire 1573bd and the negative electrode side wire 1573be in a region where the positive electrode side wire 1573bd and the negative electrode side wire 1573be are wound twice. Thus, when the front gear module 1572 (rear gear module 1573) is supported and rotated by the front guide roller 1575 (rear guide roller 1582), the positive side of the front contact module 1579 (rear contact module 1586). The part where the finger 1579b (1586b) and the negative electrode side finger 1579c (1586c) are in contact with the positive electrode side wire 1572bd (1573bd) and the negative electrode side wire 1572be (1573be), respectively, is wound from a double wound region in a single layer. The positive-side finger 1579b (1586b) jumps and leaves the positive-side wire 1572bd (1573bd), or the negative-side finger 1579c (1586c) jumps and jumps into the region. 573bde), the positive-side finger 1579b (1586b) and the negative-side finger 1579c (1586c) of the other front contact module 1579 (rear contact module 1586) are still double-wrapped. Since the side wire 1572bd (1573bd) and the negative side wire 1572be (1573be) are in contact with each other, the electrically conductive state is not blocked.

  Furthermore, the rotational direction of the front gear module drive motor 1578 (rear gear module drive motor 1585) is the ring gear 1572ab formed on the gear base 1572a (gear base 1573a) of the front gear module 1572 (rear gear module 1573). Since the teeth of (1573ab) are set in the direction in which the teeth of the front intermediate gear 1576 (rear intermediate gear 1583) are lifted, the positive side fingers 1579b (1586b) of the front contact module 1579 (rear contact module 1586) and Dust caused by abrasion due to contact with the positive electrode side wire 1572bd (1573bd), the negative side finger 1579c (1586c) of the front side contact module 1579 (rear side contact module 1586) and the negative side wire 1572de (1573be) Dust generated by abrasion due to the contact is adapted to scatter toward the front gear module drive motor 1578 (rear gear module drive motor 1585). As a result, the opposite side to which the front gear module drive motor 1578 (rear gear module drive motor 1585) is attached, that is, the front left lower side and front right lower side of the knit base 1570b (the rear lower left side and the lower right rear side of the unit base 1570b). ) Attached to the front right side of the unit base 1570b (the rear left side of the unit base 1570b) at a position higher than the front contact module 1579 (rear contact module 1586) attached to The dust is not directly scattered toward the box 1588). Note that the positive-side finger 1579b (1586b) and the negative-side finger 1579c (1586c) are made of beryllium copper alloy, and the beryllium copper alloy has a property of not being magnetized. On the other hand, the positive electrode side wire 1572bd (1573bd) and the negative electrode side wire 1572be (1573be) are made of stainless steel, and the stainless steel has a property of being magnetized by deformation. For this reason, dust generated by wear due to contact between the positive finger 1579b (1586b) of the front contact module 1579 (rear contact module 1586) and the positive wire 1572bd (1573bd), the front contact module 1579 (rear contact module 1586). ) Dust generated by the contact between the negative electrode side finger 1579c (1586c) and the negative electrode side wire 1572de (1573be) may be magnetized. The rotational direction of the front gear module drive motor 1578 (rear gear module drive motor 1585) is set so that such dust is scattered toward the front gear module drive motor 1578 (rear gear module drive motor 1585). Therefore, it does not fly directly to the front sensor board box 1581 (rear sensor board box 1588) attached to the opposite side of the front gear module drive motor 1578 (rear gear module drive motor 1585). Thus, when the front gear module 1572 (rear gear module 1573) is supported by the front guide roller 1575 (rear guide roller 1582) and rotated, the thin disk 1572aa of the front gear module 1572 (rear gear module 1573) is rotated. The magnet MG0 (MG1) embedded in the vicinity of the outer periphery of (1573aa) is placed on the front sensor substrate box 1581 (rear sensor substrate box 1588) in which the front sensor substrate 1580 (rear sensor substrate 1587) is accommodated along the trajectory. Even when approaching, the amount of dust that affects the magnetic field of the magnet MG0 (MG1) is extremely small around the front sensor board box 1581 (rear sensor board box 1588). As described above, the Hall element 1580b (1587b) mounted on the front sensor board 1580 (rear sensor board 1587) is thin in the front gear module 1572 (rear gear module 1573) even in an environment where dust is received. Magnet MG0 (MG1) embedded in the vicinity of the outer periphery of disk 1572aa can be accurately detected. Therefore, even in an environment where dust is received, the original position of the front gear module 1572 (rear gear module) can be accurately grasped.

  Then, a front sensor substrate on which Hall elements 1580b (1587b) for detecting magnetism of magnet MG0 (MG1) embedded in the vicinity of the outer periphery of thin disk 1572aa (1573aa) of front gear module 1572 (rear gear module 1573) are mounted. Since 1580 (rear sensor substrate 1587) is housed in a substantially sealed state in the front sensor substrate box 1581 (rear sensor substrate box 1588), the above-mentioned dust is in the front sensor substrate box 1581 (rear sensor substrate). Intrusion into the box 1588) can be prevented. Thereby, it is possible to prevent dust from adhering to the front sensor substrate 1580 (rear sensor substrate 1587) and the hall element 1580b (1587b). Therefore, a short circuit of the front sensor substrate 1580 (rear sensor substrate 1587) due to conductive dust can be prevented. In place of the detection method using the magnet MG0 (MG1) and the hall element 1580b (1587b), a non-permeable seal is attached to the thin disk 1572aa (1573aa) of the front gear module 1572 (rear gear module 1573). In the case of mounting a photosensor that detects the interruption of the optical axis on the sensor substrate 1580 (rear sensor substrate 1587), the optical axis of the photosensor is exposed from the front sensor substrate box 1581 (rear sensor substrate box 1588). It is necessary to provide a notch in the front sensor board box 1581 (rear sensor board box 1588) at a position corresponding to the position where the photosensor is mounted. Then, when the thin disk 1572aa molded with synthetic resin is charged with static electricity, for example, dust adheres to the outer periphery of the thin disk 1572aa, or the cover of the photosensor molded with synthetic resin is charged with static electricity. For example, dust that has entered the front sensor substrate box 1580 (rear sensor substrate box 1588) from the notch may adhere to the optical axis of the photosensor or the vicinity thereof. As a result, the photosensor is detected as a sticker with dust adhered to the vicinity of the outer periphery of the thin disk 1572aa (1573aa) or when the optical axis is blocked by the dust adhered to the optical axis or its periphery. There is a risk of false detection as an attached seal. Thus, in an environment where dust is scattered, it is not appropriate to employ a detection method using a photosensor and a seal.

  The front contact module 1579 (rear contact module 1586) is attached to the lower left side of the front surface and the lower right side of the front surface of the unit base 1570b (the lower left side of the rear surface of the unit base 1570b and the lower right side of the rear surface). Can be shortened, and the area where dust is scattered can be kept small.

  Further, the front sensor board box 1580 (rear sensor board box 1588) has front contacts attached to the lower left side and the lower right side of the unit base 1570b (the lower left side and the lower right side of the rear side of the unit base 1570b). Since it is higher than the module 1579 (the rear contact module 1586) and is attached to the front right side (the rear left side of the unit base 1570b) of the unit base 1570b, the dust is in the front sensor board box 1580 (rear sensor board box 1588). ). Thereby, it is possible to prevent dust from adhering to the front sensor substrate box 1580 (rear sensor substrate box 1588). The front sensor board box 1580 (rear sensor board box 1588) has a chamfered portion, that is, a portion on which the Hall element 1580b (1587b) is mounted, and a portion on which the connection connector 1580c (1587c) is mounted. Since it is on the lower side, even if dust enters from the gap between the front sensor board box 1580 (rear sensor board box 1588) and the connector 1580c (1587c), it is extremely small. Before reaching the element 1580b (1587b), it falls by its own weight and adheres to the connection connector 1580c (1587c) or the vicinity thereof. Thus, since the amount of dust adhering to the connection connector 1580c and the vicinity thereof is very small, the Hall element 1580b (1587b) uses the thin disk of the front gear module 1572 (rear gear module 1573) to magnetize the adhering dust. There is no risk of erroneous detection as a magnet MG0 (MG1) embedded in the vicinity of the outer periphery of 1572aa (1573aa). Although the dust has conductivity, the amount of dust adhering to the connection connector 1580c (1587c) and the vicinity thereof is extremely small, so there is no possibility that the connection connector 1580c is short-circuited.

[2-6. Positional relationship between magnet track and magnetic detection switch]
Next, the track of the magnet MG0 embedded in the vicinity of the outer periphery of the thin disk 1572aa of the front gear module 1572, the track of the magnet MG1 embedded in the vicinity of the outer periphery of the thin disk 1573aa of the rear gear module 1573, and the game ball Referring to FIGS. 135 and 136, the positional relationship between the magnetic detection switch 1395 and the magnetic detection switch 1395 for detecting an illegal act of entering a ball into the middle start winning opening 1330 and the lower starting winning opening 1340 with a magnet will be described. 135 is a rear view of the game board, and FIG. 136 is a partial cross-sectional view of the game board along the line FF of FIG.

  As described above, the prize opening unit 1210 is attached to the front surface of the veneer board 250 of the game board 4, and the prize space forming cover body 265a is attached to the rear surface of the veneer board 250. The loop unit 1570, the magnetic detection switch 1395, and the like described above are attached to the rear surface of the winning space forming cover body 265a. A magnet MG0 is embedded in the vicinity of the outer periphery of the thin disk 1572aa of the front gear module 1572 of the loop unit 1570, and a magnet MG1 is embedded in the vicinity of the outer periphery of the thin disk 1573aa of the rear gear module 1573. When the front gear module 1572 is supported by the front guide roller 1575 and rotates, the position of the magnet MG0 becomes a track on the same circumference. When the rear gear module 1573 rotates while being supported by the rear guide roller 1582, the position of the magnet MG1 becomes a track on the same circumference. As shown in FIG. 135, these tracks are in the window X in which a part of the rear unit cover 1570c of the loop unit 1570 is cut out, for example, the track of the magnet MG1 is the rear side accommodated in the rear sensor board box 1588 It passes through the back of the sensor board 1587, passes through the back of the lower start winning opening 1340 and the vicinity of the position where the magnetic detection switch 1395 is attached.

  In the cross section taken along the line FF in FIG. 135, as shown in FIG. 136, the magnetic detection switch 1395 opens and closes the opening / closing blade solenoid 1390 that opens and closes the opening / closing blade 1380. As a countermeasure against fraud, it is attached to the winning space forming cover body 265a in the vicinity of the winning opening 1340 and in the vicinity of the winning opening unit 1210. The path of the magnet MG0 embedded in the thin disk 1572aa of the front gear module 1572 and the path of the magnet MG1 embedded in the thin disk 1573aa of the rear gear module 1573 pass through the solenoid 1390 in order. Therefore, in a state where a drive signal is output to the opening / closing blade solenoid 1390, when the magnets MG0 and MG1 pass close to the rear vicinity of the opening / closing blade solenoid 1390 along their tracks, the magnetism generated from the opening / closing blade solenoid 1390 is generated. It is in a state of being shaken by being affected by the magnetism generated from the magnets MG0 and MG1.

[3. Function display unit]
Next, the function display unit 1225 attached to the back surface of the game board 4 will be described. FIG. 137 is an exploded perspective view of the function display unit.

  As shown in FIG. 137, the function display unit 1225 includes a function display substrate 1225a and a cover member 1225b. First, the configuration of the function display board 1225a will be described, and then the attachment of the cover member 1225b to the game board 4 will be described.

[3-1. Configuration of function display board]
As shown in FIG. 137, the function display board 1225a includes segment indicators SEG1 and SEG2 and LEDs 1 to 12. In this embodiment, an upper special symbol display 1480 is assigned to the segment indicator SEG1, and a lower special symbol indicator 1490 is assigned to the segment SEG2. The segment indicators SEG1, SEG2 can display alphanumeric characters and figures, etc., and by displaying these alphanumeric characters and figures as special symbols, the above-mentioned middle start winning a prize opening 1330 is displayed. When a game ball enters, the segment indicator SEG1 displays a predetermined special symbol in a variable manner. When a game ball enters the upper start winning port 1270 or the lower start winning port 1340, the segment indicator SEG2 displays a predetermined special symbol. The display is variable.

  LED1 is assigned an upper special symbol memory lamp 1500a, LED2 is assigned an upper special symbol memory lamp 1500b, LED3 is assigned a lower special symbol memory lamp 1510a, and LED4 is assigned a lower special symbol memory lamp 1510b. When the game ball that has entered the middle start winning opening 1330 is not used in the special symbol fluctuation display, the upper special symbol memory lamps 1500a and 1500b are turned on or flashing with the number of the game balls entered as the number of reserves. It has become. Specifically, the upper special symbol memory lamp 1500a is turned on and the upper special symbol memory lamp 1500b is turned off when the holding ball is one ball, and the upper special symbol memory lamps 1500a and 1500b are both turned on when the holding ball is two balls. The upper special symbol memory lamp 1500a flashes and the upper special symbol memory lamp 1500b lights up when the number of the reserved balls is three, and both the upper special symbol memory lamps 1500a and 1500b flash when the reserved ball is four balls. On the other hand, when the game ball that has entered the upper start winning opening 1270 or the lower start winning opening 1340 is not used in the special symbol change display, the lower special symbol storage lamp 1510a, 1510b lights up or blinks. Specifically, the lower special symbol memory lamp 1510a is turned on and the lower special symbol memory lamp 1510b is turned off when the holding ball is one ball, and the lower special symbol memory lamps 1510a and 1510b are both turned on when the holding ball is two balls. The lower special symbol memory lamp 1510a blinks when the number of the holding balls is three, and the lower special symbol memory lamp 1510b lights. When the number of the holding balls is four, both the lower special symbol memory lamps 1510a and 1510b flash.

  A normal symbol display 1520 is assigned to the LED 5. The LED 5 is an LED capable of lighting red / green / orange, and can be turned on by combining these red / green / orange colors. The LED 5 displays the lit color as a normal symbol so that when the game ball passes through the gate 1455 described above, the predetermined normal symbol is variably displayed.

  Normal symbol storage lamps 1530a to 1530d are assigned to the LEDs 6 to 9, respectively. When the game balls that have passed through the gate 1455 are not used in the normal symbol change display, the normal symbol storage lamps 1530a to 1530d are turned on with the number of the game balls that have passed through as the number of reserves. Specifically, the normal symbol memory lamp 1530a is turned on when the holding ball is one ball, the normal symbol memory lamps 1530b to 1530d are turned off, and the normal symbol memory lamps 1530a and 1530b are turned on when the holding ball is two balls. The normal symbol memory lamps 1530c and 1530d are turned off, the normal symbol memory lamps 1530a to 1530c are turned on when the holding ball is three balls, the normal symbol memory lamp 1530d is turned off, and the normal symbol memory lamp 1530a when the holding ball is four balls. ˜1530d are all lit.

  A gaming state display lamp 1540 is assigned to the LED 10. The LED 10 is an LED capable of lighting red / green / orange, and can be turned on by combining these red / green / orange. The LED 10 displays the lighting color as a gaming state, thereby notifying that a probability variation or a small hit has occurred as the gaming state.

  A two-round display lamp 1550 is assigned to the LED 11, and a 15-round display lamp 1560 is assigned to the LED 12. As described above, the 2-round display lamp 1550 lights and notifies that the number of times (rounds) that the winning prize opening 1400 is changed from the closed state to the open state is two, while the 15-round display is displayed. The lamp 1560 lights up and notifies that the round is 15 times.

  As described above, the segment indicators SEG1, SEG2, LED1 to LED12 mounted on the function display board 1225a are the upper special symbol display 1480, the lower special symbol indicator 1490, the upper special symbol memory lamps 1500a and 1500b, and the lower special symbol. Symbol memory lamps 1510a and 1510b, normal symbol indicator 1520, normal symbol memory lamps 1530a to 1530d, gaming state display lamp 1540, two round display lamp 1550, and 15 round display lamp 1560 are assigned to display various functions. , Segment indicator SEG1, SEG2, LED1-LED12, that is, upper special symbol display 1480, lower special symbol display 1490, upper special symbol memory lamps 1500a, 1500b, lower special symbol memory lamps 1510a, 1510b, normal symbol table Vessel 1520, normal symbol memory lamps 1530A～1530d, gaming state display lamp 1540,2 round display lamp 1550,15 round display lamp 1560 is turned aggregated configured to function display substrate 1225a.

  In addition, the upper special symbol display 1480 and the lower special symbol display 1490 each display the jackpot gaming state as a special symbol. Therefore, the upper special symbol memory lamps 1500a and 1500b, the lower special symbol memory lamps 1510a and 1510b, and the normal symbols. Distinguish from the indicator 1520, the normal symbol memory lamps 1530a to 1530d, the gaming state indicator lamp 1540, the two-round indicator lamp 1550 and the 15-round indicator lamp 1560, and use segment indicators SEG1 and SEG2 different from the LED1 to LED12 assigned to them. In addition, alphanumeric characters and figures are variably displayed as special symbols.

  The sum of the number of LEDs 6 to 9 assigned to the normal symbol memory lamps 1530a to 1530d and the number of LEDs 11 and 12 assigned to the 2 round display lamp 1550 and the 15 round display lamp 1560 is a fixed value 6. .

[3-2. Attaching the cover member to the game board]
The function display board 1225a is fixed to the cover member 1225b with screws (not shown), and the cover member 1225b is attached from the back surface of the decorative frame 251 of the game board 4 with screws (not shown). In the decorative frame 251, segment display openings 251a are formed at positions corresponding to the segments SEG1 and SEG2 of the function display board 1225a, and the contents displayed by these segment displays SEG1 and SEG2 can be visually recognized. Yes.

  The decorative frame 251 is provided with LED insertion holes 251b at positions corresponding to the LEDs 1 to 12 of the function display substrate 1225a. When the cover member 1225b is attached to the back surface of the decorative frame 251, the LEDs 1 to 12 are It does not interfere with the game board 4. These LED insertion holes 251b are formed in a cylindrical shape so that the lights of the LEDs 1 to 12 that are turned on or blinking are not mistaken for the lights of the adjacent LEDs that are turned on or blinked. The contents displayed by the segment indicators SEG1 and SEG2 and the contents displayed by turning on or blinking the LEDs 1 to 12 are printed on a function display sticker 1595A described later. The decorative frame 251 is provided with a function display sticker attaching portion 251c for attaching the function display sticker 1595A. In addition, a concave portion 251d is formed in the function display seal pasting portion 251c. The function display seal 1595A, which is affixed by inserting a tool such as a flat-blade screwdriver into the recess 251d, is easily peeled off. Here, in order to make it easy to peel off the function display seal 1595A, it is conceivable to provide a protrusion on the function display seal 1595A. However, when the door frame 5 is opened and closed from the main body frame 3, the protrusion is pulled for some reason. The function display sticker 1595A may be peeled off from the function display sticker pasting portion 251c. Therefore, in the present embodiment, by forming the recess 251d in the function display sticker attaching part 251c, the function display sticker 1595A is not peeled off from the function display sticker attaching part 251c when the door frame 5 is opened and closed from the main body frame 3. ing.

[4. Function display sticker]
Next, the function display seal 1595A will be described. FIG. 138 is a schematic view of the function display sticker, and FIG. 139 is a partial view of the function display sticker through the game window. As shown in FIG. 138, the function display seal 1595A is printed on the surface of the function display sticker grouped into groups Grp1 to Grp3 for each function display, and is formed on a decorative frame 251 that is a non-game area of the game board 4. Affixed to the function display sticker pasting portion 251c.

  As shown in FIG. 138, the group Grp1 includes an upper special symbol display 1480 and upper special symbol storage lamps 1500a and 1500b. The upper special symbol display 1480 and the upper special symbol storage lamps 1500a and 1500b It is partitioned in a state surrounded by a solid line SL1 that can be visually recognized and printed on the function display sticker 1595A. The area surrounded by the solid line SL1 is displayed on the upper special symbol display 1480, the upper special symbol memory lamp 1500a, and the upper special symbol memory lamp 1500a, 1500b. The position corresponding to 1500b is transparent. In the group Grp1, various kinds of information related to the change display of the special symbol by entering the game ball into the middle start winning opening 1330 described above are displayed. For example, as described above, when a game ball enters the middle start winning opening 1330, the upper special symbol display 1480 displays a predetermined special symbol in a variable manner, or the number of game balls entered increases as the number of reserves. Special symbol memory lamps 1500a and 1500b are turned on or blinked. Thus, by grouping the upper special symbol display 1480 and the upper special symbol storage lamps 1500a and 1500b into one group Grp1, the upper special symbol display 1480 and the upper special symbol storage lamps 1500a and 1500b become the middle. The player can be informed that various types of information regarding the special symbol variation display by entering the game ball into the start winning opening 1330 are shown. As a result, the player sees the group Grp1 partitioned and surrounded by the solid line SL1 and printed on the function display sticker 1595A, thereby changing the special symbol due to the game ball entering the middle start winning opening 1330. Various information related to the display can be easily confirmed.

  As shown in FIG. 138, the group Grp2 includes a lower special symbol display 1490 and lower special symbol storage lamps 1510a and 1510b. The lower special symbol display 1490 and the lower special symbol storage lamps 1510a and 1510b are connected to the group Grp2. It is partitioned in a state surrounded by a solid line SL2 that can be visually recognized and printed on the function display sticker 1595A. The area surrounded by the solid line SL2 is a lower special symbol display 1490, a lower special symbol storage lamp 1510a, a lower special symbol display 1490, and a lower special symbol storage lamp 1510a, 1510b. The position corresponding to 1510b is transparent. In the group Grp2, various information related to the special symbol variation display by the game ball entering the upper start winning opening 1270 or the lower starting winning opening 1340 is displayed. For example, as described above, when a game ball enters the upper start prize opening 1270 or the lower start prize opening 1340, the lower special symbol display 1490 displays a predetermined special symbol in a variable manner, or the ball of the game ball that has entered. The lower special symbol storage lamps 1510a and 1510b are turned on or blinked by using the number as a reserved number. Thus, by grouping the lower special symbol display 1490 and the lower special symbol storage lamps 1510a and 1510b into one group Grp2, the lower special symbol display 1490 and the lower special symbol storage lamps 1510a and 1510b become upper. The player can be informed that various types of information related to the special symbol variation display due to the game ball entering the start winning port 1270 or the lower start winning port 1340 are shown. As a result, the player can enter the game ball into the upper start winning opening 1270 or the lower start winning opening 1340 by visually observing the group Grp2 which is partitioned in a state surrounded by the solid line SL2 and printed on the function display sticker 1595A. Various kinds of information related to the special symbol variation display by the sphere can be easily confirmed.

  As shown in FIG. 138, the group Grp3 includes a normal symbol display 1520 and normal symbol storage lamps 1530a to 1530d, and a solid line SL3 that allows the normal symbol display 1520 and normal symbol storage lamps 1530a to 1530d to be visually recognized. And printed on the function display sticker 1595A. The area surrounded by the solid line SL3 has positions corresponding to the normal symbol display 1520 and the normal symbol storage lamps 1530a to 1530d so that the lighting by the normal symbol display 1520 and the lighting by the normal symbol storage lamps 1530a to 1530d can be visually recognized. It is transparent. As described above, the normal symbol display 1520 variably displays whether or not the open / close wing 1380 is open / closed as a predetermined normal symbol. It becomes easy to enter the ball. Therefore, the normal symbol display 1520 includes the upper special symbol display 1480, the upper special symbol storage lamps 1500a and 1500b, the lower special symbol display 1490, the lower special symbol storage lamps 1510a and 1510b, and the normal symbol storage lamps 1530a to 1530d. A star mark is printed so as to be distinguished from the game state display lamp 1540, the 2-round display lamp 1550, and the 15-round display lamp. In the group Grp3, various information related to the gate 1455 described above is displayed. For example, as described above, when a game ball passes through the gate 1455, the normal symbol display 1520 displays a predetermined normal symbol in a variable manner, or the normal symbol storage lamps 1530a to 1530d with the number of passed game balls as the number of reserves. Lights up. In this way, the normal symbol display 1520 and the normal symbol storage lamps 1530a to 1530d are grouped into one group Grp3, so that the normal symbol display 1520 and the normal symbol storage lamps 1530a to 1530d are displayed in the normal symbol variation display. The player can be informed that various types of information are shown. Thus, the player can easily confirm various information related to the normal symbol variation display by visually observing the group Grp3 partitioned and surrounded by the solid line SL3 and printed on the function display sticker 1595A.

  As shown in FIG. 138, the game status display lamp 1540, the 2nd round display lamp 1550, and the 15th round display lamp 1560 are visually recognized at positions corresponding to the game status display lamp 1540, the 2nd round display lamp 1550, and the 15th round display lamp 1560. It is divided and printed in a state surrounded by solid lines SL4 to SL6. The area surrounded by the solid lines SL4 to SL6 is a gaming state display lamp 1540, two round display lamps 1550 and 15 rounds so that the lighting by the gaming state display lamp 1540, two round display lamps 1550 and 15 round display lamp 1560 can be visually recognized. The position corresponding to the display lamp 1560 is transparent. The 2-round display lamp 1550 and the 15-round display lamp 1560 are printed with a value 2 that is the maximum number of rounds at a position corresponding to the 2-round display lamp 1550 so that the maximum number of rounds can be easily understood. A value 15 which is the maximum number of rounds is printed at a position corresponding to the display lamp 1560. As described above, the gaming state display lamp 1540 displays the lighting color as the gaming state, thereby notifying that the gaming state has a probability fluctuation or a small hit, and the two-round display lamp 1550 has the big prize opening 1400. The fact that the number of times (rounds) from the closed state to the open state (round) is 2 is turned on and notified, and the 15-round display lamp 1560 lights and notifies that the round is 15 times. Thus, the player can easily confirm the gaming state by visually observing the gaming state display lamp 1540 that is partitioned and surrounded by the solid line SL4 and printed on the function display sticker 1595A. By visually observing the two-round display lamp 1550 that is partitioned and printed on the function display sticker 1595A, it is possible to easily confirm whether or not the maximum number of rounds is two. Whether or not the maximum number of rounds is 15 can be easily confirmed by visually observing the 15-round display lamp 1560 that is partitioned and printed on the function display sticker 1595A.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the groups Grp1 to Grp3 are partitioned in a state surrounded by the solid lines SL1 to SL3 and printed on the function display sticker 1595A. The positions corresponding to the lamp 1550 and the 15-round display lamp 1560 are partitioned and printed in a state surrounded by solid lines SL4 to SL6 that can be visually recognized by the game status display lamp 1540, the 2-round display lamp 1550, and the 15-round display lamp 1560, respectively. Yes.

  In this way, the function display seal 1595A is grouped so that the functions of the segment indicators SEG1, SEG2, LED1 to LED12, which are collectively mounted on the function display board 1225a shown in FIG. The contents are printed and partitioned. In addition, a star symbol is printed on the normal symbol display 1520 or the like, and even if the contents displayed by the segment displays SEG1, SEG2, LED1 to LED12 are collectively printed on the function display sticker 1595A, their meanings are displayed. It can be easily understood.

  As shown in FIG. 138, the correspondence between such functions and printed contents is printed on the function display sticker 1595A as a sticker management number 1595Aa. As shown in FIGS. 138 and 139, this seal management number 1595Aa is printed at a position that is difficult to see from the game window 42 via the game window 42 when the door frame 5 is closed to the main body frame 3. It is designed not to convey unnecessary information to the player. Further, as shown in FIGS. 138 and 139, the concave portion 251 d provided in the above-described function display sticker attaching portion 251 c is also a position that is difficult to visually recognize through the game window 42 when the door frame 5 is closed to the main body frame 3. The concave portion 251d is difficult to be visually recognized by the player.

  The seal management number 1595Aa is used to prevent a worker of a manufacturer who manufactures the pachinko gaming machine 1 from mistakenly attaching a function display seal of another specification when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is assembled. Further, the seal management number 1595Aa is also used for inventory management of the function display seal 1595A, and modes such as the group Grp1 to the group Grp3 are linked to the seal management number 1595Aa and managed. Accordingly, when the seal management number 1595Aa is examined, the stock of the function display seal 1595A corresponding to the seal management number 1595Aa can be known.

  Here, with the recent shortening of the life cycle of the pachinko gaming machine, the development period of the pachinko gaming machine is also shortened. For this reason, in the present embodiment, for example, a 2-round display lamp, a 15-round display lamp that lights and notifies that the number of times (rounds) that the winning prize opening 1400 is changed from the closed state to the open state is 2 times or 15 times. In addition to adding a 5-round display lamp or 8-round display lamp that lights up and notifies that the number of rounds is 5 or 8, or when reducing the number of starting winning prize ports from two to one, etc. The specification change of the pachinko gaming machine can be dealt with by using a common function display board 1225a. In order to change the contents printed on the function display sticker in accordance with the specification change of such a pachinko gaming machine, the functions of the segment display units SEG1, SEG2, LED1 to LED12 described above, the contents printed on the function display sticker, Is printed on the function display sticker as a sticker management number. Thus, for example, in the manufacturer of a pachinko machine, before the line operator attaches the function display sticker to the game board, it is determined whether the specification of the pachinko machine and the function display sticker are compatible with each other. Can be confirmed by visual observation, and the sticking of the function display sticker that does not correspond to the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine can be prevented. The function display seal is a seal, and there is no work process for applying an adhesive or the like to the back surface of the function display seal, which contributes to an improvement in productivity.

[5. Main board and peripheral board]
Next, a control board that performs various controls of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described. FIG. 140 is a block diagram of the main board and the peripheral board, and FIG. 141 is a schematic diagram of various detection signals and various drive signals inputted to and outputted from the main board (main control board). As shown in FIG. 140, the control configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a group of main boards 1600 and a group of peripheral boards 1610, and various controls are shared by these two groups. First, a group of main substrates 1600 will be described, and then a group of peripheral substrates 1610 will be described.

[5-1. Main board group]
As shown in FIG. 140, the group of main boards 1600 includes a main control board 1700 that controls game operations (game progress) and a payout control board 715 that controls payout of game balls and the like. Yes.

[5-1-1. Main control board]
As shown in FIGS. 140 and 141, the main control board 1700 for controlling the progress of the game includes a main control MPU 1700a as a microprocessor and a main control I / O port 1700b as an input / output device (I / O device). RAM clear switch 268a. The main control MPU 1700a includes a ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, and a RAM for temporarily storing data, as well as a watchdog timer for monitoring its operation (system) and preventing fraud. It also has a built-in function.

  In the main control MPU 1700a, detection signals from the upper start port switch 1272, the middle start port switch 1360, and the lower start port switch 1370 are input via the main control I / O port 1700b, a gate switch 1460, and a right winning port switch 1450. Detection signals from the left prize opening switch 1475, the count switch 1430, and the magnetic detection switch 1395 are input via the panel relay board 1650 attached to the game board 4 and the main control I / O port 1700b. Based on these detection signals, the main control MPU 1700a outputs a drive signal to the open / close blade solenoid 1390 and the open / close plate solenoid 1420 via the main control I / O port 1700b and the panel relay board 1650, or the main control I / O Upper special symbol display 1480, lower special symbol display 1490, upper special symbol memory lamps 1500a and 1500b, lower special symbol memory lamps 1510a and 1510b, normal symbol display via port 1700b, panel relay board 1650 and function display board 1225a A drive signal is output to the device 1520, the normal symbol memory lamps 1530a to 1530d, the game state display lamp 1540, the 2 round display lamp 1550, and the 15 round display lamp 1560.

  The main control MPU 1700a transmits various information (game information) related to the game and various commands related to payout to the payout control board 715 via the main drawer relay board 657, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 from the payout control board 715 Various commands relating to the state are received via the main drawer relay board 657. Further, the main control MPU 1700a transmits various commands related to the control of the game effect and various commands related to the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the sub-integrated board 1740 of the peripheral board 1610 described later via the main control I / O port 1700b. The boards of the main control board 1700 and the sub integrated board 1740 are electrically connected by a harness (not shown). When the main control MPU 1700a receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 from the payout control board 715, the main control MPU 1700a shapes these various commands and transmits them to the sub-integrated board 1740.

  Various voltages are supplied to the main control board 1700 from the power supply board 686. The power supply board 686 includes an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as “capacitor”) as a backup power supply that supplies power to the main control board 1700 for a predetermined time even when the power supply is shut off. With this capacitor, the main control MPU 1700a can store various kinds of information in its built-in RAM in the power-off process even when the power is shut off. The stored various information is erased (cleared) from the built-in RAM when the RAM clear switch 268a of the main control board 1700 is operated when the power is turned on. The operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch 268a is also output to the payout control board 715 via the main drawer relay board 657.

  The main control board 1700 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit. This power failure monitoring circuit monitors the reduction of various voltages supplied from the power supply board 686, and outputs a power failure warning signal as a power failure warning signal when those voltages fall below the power failure warning voltage. In addition to being input to the main control MPU 1700a via the main control I / O port 1700b, this power failure notice signal is also transmitted to the payout control board 715 via the main drawer relay board 657.

[5-1-2. Dispensing control board]
As shown in FIG. 140, a payout control board 715 that controls payout of game balls, etc. includes a payout control unit 1710 that performs various controls relating to payout, a firing control unit 1720 that performs firing control of the firing motor 344, and a pachinko gaming machine. 1, an error LED display 1730 for displaying the state of 1, an error release switch 1731, and a ball removal switch 1732.

[5-1-2 (a). Dispensing control unit]
As shown in FIG. 140, a payout control unit 1710 that performs various controls relating to payouts operates normally as a payout control MPU 1710a as a microprocessor, a payout control I / O port 1710b as an I / O device, and a payout control MPU1710a. An external watchdog timer 1710c (hereinafter referred to as “external WDT1710c”) for monitoring whether or not the payout motor is driven, and a payout motor drive circuit 1710d for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 465. . The payout control MPU 1710a incorporates a ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and a function for preventing fraud.

  The payout control MPU 1710a receives various information (game information) related to games from the main control board 1700 and various commands related to payouts, or receives an operation signal (detection signal) for the RAM clear switch 268a from the main control board 1700. In addition, a detection signal from the full switch 545 is input, and detection signals from the ball break switch 426, the counting switch 462, and the rotation angle switch 505 are input via the prize ball unit relay terminal plate 480. .

  When the payout control MPU 1710a receives various commands related to payout from the main control board 1700, the payout motor driving circuit 1710d outputs a drive signal to the payout motor 465 based on the received various commands related to payout, or a ball removal switch. When 1732 is operated, the payout motor drive circuit 1710d is used to discharge (remove) the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 400 and the tank rail member 410 based on this operation signal (detection signal). When a drive signal is output to the payout motor 465, or a ball rental request signal from a CR unit (not shown) is input via the CR unit terminal board 700b, the payout motor drive circuit 1710d Outputs a drive signal to the payout motor 465, or a full tank switch When the detection signal from 45 is input, or stop the dispensing motor 465 stops the drive signal from the payout motor drive circuit 1710d to payout motor 465 on the basis of the detection signal.

  Further, the payout control MPU 1710a displays the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 on the error LED display 1730, transmits various commands indicating the state to the main control board 1700, and receives a detection signal from the counting switch 462. Based on this detection signal, the number of game balls actually paid out is output to the external terminal board 700a. The external terminal board 700a is electrically connected to a hall computer installed in a game hall (hall). This hall computer monitors the player's game by ascertaining the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko gaming machine 1, game information of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the like. The error LED indicator 1730 is a segment indicator as described above, and displays the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by displaying alphanumeric characters and figures. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED display 1730 include the following. For example, when the figure “-” is displayed, it is informed that it is “normal”, and when the numeral “0” is displayed, it is indicated that “connection is abnormal” (specifically, with the main control board 1700). An error has occurred in the connection between the payout control board 715 and the board (notifying various command signals), and when the number “1” is displayed, it means “out of ball”. When the number “2” is displayed, it is informed that it is “sphere”, and when the number “3” is displayed, it is notified that it is “counting switch error”. When “5” is displayed, a “retry error” is notified, when “6” is displayed, “full” is notified, and when “7” is displayed. Notify that “CR is not connected” and the number “9” While the indication is notified to the effect that the "in stock".

[5-1-2 (b). Launch control unit]
As shown in FIG. 140, a launch control unit 1720 that performs launch control of the launch motor 344 includes an input circuit 1720a to which various signals are input, a transmission circuit 1720b that outputs a clock signal at regular intervals, and the clock signal. A firing control circuit 1720c that outputs a reference pulse for determining the rotation speed of the firing motor 344 based on the firing motor drive circuit 1720d that outputs a drive signal to the firing motor 344 based on the reference pulse from the firing control circuit 1720c, It is configured with. The launch control circuit 1720c controls the rotation speed of the launch motor 344 so that approximately 99.95 game balls per minute are launched toward the game area 255 based on the clock signal from the transmission circuit 1720b. . That is, the movement of the hitting ball basket 336 is controlled.

  The input circuit 1720a receives detection signals from the touch switch 80 and the firing stop switch 82 incorporated in the handle device 70 (operation handle portion 71) and a CR connection signal from the CR unit. Specifically, when the rotation operation member 74 of the operation handle portion 71 is touched, the detection signal is input to the input circuit 1720a via the handle relay terminal 71a by being detected by the contact detection board 80a built in the touch switch 80. When the firing stop button 81 is operated, a detection signal is detected by the firing stop switch 82 and a detection signal is input to the input circuit 1720a via the handle relay terminal 71a, and the CR unit is electrically connected to the CR unit terminal plate 700b. By this connection, the CR connection signal is input to the input circuit 1720a via the CR unit terminal board 700b.

  Various types of voltages are supplied to the payout control board 715 from the power supply board 686 in the same manner as the main control board 1700. The power supply board 686 includes a capacitor that supplies power to the payout control board 715 for a predetermined time even when the power is shut off. With this capacitor, the payout control MPU 1710a can store various payout information relating to payout in its built-in RAM even when the power is shut off. The stored payout information is erased (cleared) from the built-in RAM when the RAM clear switch 268a of the main control board 1700 is operated when the power is turned on.

[5-2. Peripheral board group]
As shown in FIG. 140, the peripheral board 1610 includes a sub-integrated board 1740 that performs effect control and a liquid crystal control board 1750 that performs drawing control of the liquid crystal display 1315. The sub integrated substrate 1740 and the liquid crystal control substrate 1750 are electrically connected by a harness (not shown).

[5-2-1. Sub-integrated board]
As shown in FIG. 140, the sub-integrated board 1740 that performs the production control includes a sub-integrated MPU 1740a as a microprocessor, a sub-integrated ROM 1740b that stores various processing programs and various commands, and a sound source IC 1740c that performs high-quality sound. And a sound ROM 1740d in which sound information such as music and sound effects referred to by the sound source IC 1740c is stored.

  The sub-integrated MPU 1740a has various input / output ports such as a parallel input / output port and a serial input / output port. Upon receiving various commands from the main control board 1700, the door frame decoration lamp 5aa, A door frame side lighting / flashing command that outputs a lighting signal or flashing signal to 5b to 5h is output to the lamp driving board 1760, or a game board side lighting / flashing command that outputs a lighting signal or flashing signal to the effect lamp 1230 1760, a gradation lighting command for outputting a gradation lighting signal to the gradation lamp 1240, a gradation driving command for outputting a lighting signal to the lighting lamp 1235a of the patrol device 1235, Output to the drive board 1760 and the mode of the patrol device 1235 A gear module that outputs a patrol motor drive command for outputting a drive signal to 1235b to the lamp drive board 1760 or outputs a drive signal to the front gear module drive motor 1578 and the rear gear module drive motor 1585 of the loop unit 1570 described above. A drive motor drive command is output to the lamp drive board 1760, and an application start command for starting application of positive and negative voltages to the front contact module 1579 and the rear contact module 1586 of the loop unit 1570 is applied to the lamp drive board 1760. Output a control signal (sound command) indicating sound information extracted from the sound ROM 1740d to the sound source IC 1740c, output a display command indicating a screen to be displayed on the liquid crystal display 1315 to the liquid crystal control board 1750, It corresponds to the display commands, described later, and outputs a switching point for switching to the effect by the live-action from the performance by the animation on the liquid crystal control circuit board 1750. This switching point is stored in advance in the sub-integrated ROM 1740b. The sub-integrated ROM 1740b also stores schedule data corresponding to sound commands in advance. This schedule data is configured by defining the progress of sound in time series.

  A display command output from the sub-integrated MPU 1740a to the liquid crystal control board 1750 is performed by a serial input / output port. In this embodiment, the bit rate (the size of data that can be transmitted per unit time) is 19.2 kilo (k). BPS (bits per second, hereinafter referred to as “bps”) is set. On the other hand, initial data, door frame side lighting / flashing command, game board side lighting / flashing command, gradation lighting command, patrol lamp lighting command, patrol lamp motor driving command, gear module driving motor, which are output from the sub-integrated MPU 1740a to the lamp driving board 1760 The drive command and the application start command are executed by a plurality of serial input / output ports different from the display command. In the present embodiment, 250 kbps is set as the bit rate.

  The lamp driving board 1760 outputs a lighting signal or a blinking signal to the door frame decoration lamps 5aa, 5b to 5h via the sub drawer relay board 658 based on the received door frame side lighting / blinking command, or the received game board side. A lighting signal or a flashing signal is output to the effect lamp 1230 based on the lighting / flashing command, a gradation lighting signal is output to the gradation lamp 1240 based on the received gradation lighting command, or based on the received patrol lamp lighting command. The lighting signal is output to the lighting lamp 1235a of the patrol device 1235, the driving signal is output to the motor 1235b of the patrol device 1235 based on the received patrol motor driving command, or the received gear module driving motor driving command is received. The drive signal is transmitted to the front gear module of the loop unit 1570. And outputs to the motor 1578 and the rear-side gear module drive motor 1585, and outputs the ON / OFF signals to the front contact module 1579 and the rear-side contact modules 1586 of loop units 1570 based on the application start command received. This ON / OFF signal is a signal for turning on or off the electrical connection for applying the positive and negative voltage to the front contact module 1579 and the rear contact module 1586 of the loop unit 1570. As shown in FIGS. 129 and 130, the LEDs 1572ccd and 1573ccd as the front lights of the cars 1572c and 1573c and the LEDs 1572ccc and 1573ccc as the backlights are turned on.

  The sub-integrated MPU 1740a receives the detection signal from the front sensor board 1580 and the detection signal from the rear sensor board 1587 of the loop unit 1570 through the lamp drive board 1760, respectively. Based on this, the original position of the front gear module 1572 of the loop unit (original position of the car 1572c) and the original position of the rear gear module 1573 (original position of the car 1573c) are grasped. Further, the sub-integrated MPU 1740a receives a signal (operation signal) indicating that the liquid crystal control board 1750 is operating normally from the liquid crystal control board 1750, or receives an effect selection signal (detection signal) from the effect selection switch 31 described above. It is input via the sub drawer relay board 658 and the lamp driving board 1760. Note that the reset terminal of the sub-integrated MPU 1740a is electrically connected to an external watchdog timer 1740e (hereinafter referred to as “external WDT1740e”; see FIG. 159). The external WDT 1740e monitors the operation (system) of the sub-integrated MPU 1740a, and will be described in detail later. However, when the external WDT clear signal is not stopped at the clear signal release time, the sub-integrated MPU 1740a is reset (sub The system of the integrated MPU 1740a is regularly diagnosed as to whether it is running out of control). The sub-integrated board 1740 includes not only various input / output ports such as a parallel input / output port and a serial input / output port, but also a watchdog timer (WDT) (hereinafter referred to as “built-in WDT”). The built-in WDT and the external WDT 1740e are used in combination to diagnose whether the system of the sub-integrated MPU 1740a is out of control.

  The sound source IC 1740c extracts sound information from the sound ROM 1740d based on the sound command output from the sub-integrated MPU 1740a, and music and sound effects according to various effects from the speaker 34 via the lamp driving board 1760 and the sub drawer relay board 658. Etc. to control the flow.

[5-2-2. LCD control board]
As shown in FIG. 140, a liquid crystal control board 1750 that performs drawing control of the liquid crystal display 1315 includes a liquid crystal control MPU 1750a as a microprocessor, a liquid crystal control ROM 1750b that stores various processing programs, various commands, and various data, and a liquid crystal display. VDP (Video Display Processor) 1750c for controlling display of the display 1315, character ROM 1750d for storing various screen data displayed on the liquid crystal display 1315, and various data stored in the character ROM 1750d are transferred. And a character RAM 1750z to be copied.

  The liquid crystal control MPU 1750a has a parallel input / output port, a serial input / output port, and the like. When a display command is received from the sub-integrated board 1740, the VDP 1750c is controlled based on the received display command to Perform drawing control. When the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a is operating normally, the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a outputs an operation signal to that effect to the sub-integrated board 1740.

  The liquid crystal control ROM 1750b stores a plurality of schedule data corresponding to display commands, non-resident area transfer schedule data corresponding to display commands, and the like in addition to various programs for generating a screen to be drawn on the liquid crystal display 1315. The schedule data is configured by arranging screen data defining the screen configuration in time series, and the order of screens to be drawn on the liquid crystal display 1315 is defined. The non-resident area transfer schedule data is constituted by arranging non-resident area transfer data that defines the order when transferring various data stored in the character ROM 1750d to a non-resident area (to be described later) of the character RAM 1750z. . In this non-resident area transfer data, the order of transferring various data from the character ROM 1750d to the non-resident area of the character RAM 1750z in advance is defined for the screen data drawn on the liquid crystal display 1315 according to the progress of the schedule data. Detailed description of the non-resident area transfer schedule data will be described later.

  When the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a receives a display command from the sub-integrated board 1740, the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a extracts schedule data corresponding to the display command, extracts the top screen data of the extracted schedule data from the liquid crystal control ROM 1750b, and outputs it to the VDP 1750c. . Then, the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a extracts screen data following the top screen data and outputs the screen data to the VDP 1750c. In this way, the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a extracts screen data arranged in time series in the schedule data, one by one from the top screen data, from the liquid crystal control ROM 1750b and outputs it to the VDP 1750c.

  When the screen data output from the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a is input, the VDP 1750c extracts sprite data (to be described later) from the character RAM 1750z based on the input screen data, and generates drawing data to be displayed on the liquid crystal display 1315. The generated drawing data is output to the liquid crystal display 1315. The VDP 1750c employs a line buffer method. In this “line buffer system”, drawing data for one line for drawing the horizontal direction of the liquid crystal display 1315 is held in the line buffer, and the drawing data for one line held in this line buffer is stored in the liquid crystal display 1315. This is the output method.

  The character ROM 1750d stores an extremely large amount of sprite data and has a large capacity. When the capacity of the character ROM 1750d increases, that is, when the number of sprites drawn on the liquid crystal display 1315 increases, the access speed of the character ROM 1750d cannot be ignored, and the drawing speed on the liquid crystal display 1315 is affected. Therefore, in this embodiment, the sprite data stored in the character ROM 1750d is transferred and copied to the character RAM 1750z having a high access speed, and the sprite data is extracted from the character RAM 1750z. The sprite data is base data that is data before the sprite is expanded into the bitmap format, and is stored in the character ROM 1750d in a compressed state. Here, “sprite” is an image displayed as a unit on the liquid crystal display 1315. For example, when various kinds of persons are displayed on the liquid crystal display 1315, data for drawing each person is referred to as “sprite”. Thus, when a plurality of persons are displayed on the liquid crystal display 1315, a plurality of sprites are used. In addition to a person, a house, a mountain, a road, and the like constituting the background are also sprites, and the entire background can be made into one sprite. These sprites are displayed on the liquid crystal display 1315 by setting the position on the screen and the vertical relationship when the sprites overlap (hereinafter, referred to as “sprite superposition sequence”). Note that the sprite is configured by bonding a plurality of rectangular regions of 64 pixels vertically and horizontally. Data for drawing this rectangular area is called a “character”. In the case of a small sprite, it can be expressed using one character, and in the case of a relatively large sprite such as a person, it is expressed using, for example, a total of six characters arranged in a horizontal 2 × vertical 3, etc. be able to. In the case of a larger sprite such as the background, it can be expressed using a larger number of characters. Thus, the number and arrangement of characters can be arbitrarily designated for each sprite.

  The liquid crystal display 1315 has 800 pixels in the horizontal direction and 600 pixels (SVGA) in the vertical direction, and displays each pixel in one direction along the pixels sequentially from the left to the right of the liquid crystal display 1315. It is driven by main scanning for setting a state and sub-scanning for repeatedly performing main scanning in a direction crossing one direction. When one line of drawing data output from the liquid crystal control board 1750 is input to the liquid crystal display 1315, the liquid crystal drive circuit 1315b performs liquid crystal display 1315 as main scanning based on the drawing data for one line. Are sequentially output from the left to the right for each pixel of one line. When the output for one line is completed, the process proceeds to the line immediately below as sub-scanning. Similarly, when drawing data for the next line is input, a liquid crystal display is displayed as main scanning based on the drawing data for the next line. The data is sequentially output to the pixels for one line from the left to the right of the unit 1315.

  The liquid crystal display 1315 has a built-in backlight (cold cathode tube) that is turned on by the inverter board 1755.

[6. Lamp drive board]
Next, the lamp driving substrate 1760 will be described. 142 is a part of a circuit constituting the lamp driving board, FIG. 143 is a block diagram of a driver of the driving circuit for the gear module mounted on the lamp driving board, and FIG. 144 is a gear mounted on the lamp driving board. FIG. 145 is a table showing transmission specifications that define the vehicle speed, and FIG. 146 (a) shows the relationship between the rotational speed and speed in various excitation modes. FIG. 146 (b) is a diagram showing the relationship between time and speed required for one rotation in various excitation modes. Note that the reference numerals in parentheses in FIG. 144 indicate various circuits of the rear driver 1760eb, which will be described later.

  As shown in FIG. 142, the lamp driving substrate 1760 includes a gradation control IC 1760b, a serial / parallel conversion circuit 1760c, a patrol lamp driving circuit 1760d, and a gear module driving circuit 1760e. First, the configuration of the gradation control IC 1760b will be described, followed by various commands, a serial / parallel conversion circuit 1760c, a patrol lamp driving circuit 1760d, and a gear module driving circuit 1760e.

[6-1. Configuration of gradation control IC]
As shown in FIG. 142, the gradation control IC 1760b includes a noise removal unit 1760ba, a serial unit 1760bb, a gradation update control unit 1760bc, an ON time setting table register group 1760bd, a waveform table register group 1760be, a pulse generation unit 1760bf, An input / output unit 1760bg and an output unit 1760bh are provided.

[6-1-1. Noise removal unit]
The noise removing unit 1760ba receives initial data output from the sub-integrated board 1740, a door frame side lighting / flashing command, a game board side lighting / flashing command, a gradation lighting command, a patrol lamp lighting command, and an application start command, and the serial input terminal 1760bk. Noise is removed from the initial data, door frame side lighting / flashing command, game board side lighting / flashing command, gradation lighting command, patrol lamp lighting command, and application start command, which are electrical signals. The gradation control IC 1760b has a built-in transmission circuit (not shown), and a clock signal from the transmission circuit is input to the noise removal unit 1760ba. The noise removing unit 1760ba converts a predetermined band frequency component based on the input clock signal into an electrical signal, initial data, door frame side lighting / flashing command, game board side lighting / flashing command, gradation lighting command, patrol lamp Filter processing is performed to remove from the lighting command and the application start command. In this filtering process, the noise of 1 microsecond (μs) obtained by experiment is removed, and the filtered initial data, door frame side lighting flashing command, game board side lighting flashing command, gradation lighting command, A patrol lamp lighting command and an application start command are input to the serial unit 1760bb. Thus, the initial data, door frame side lighting / flashing command, game board side lighting / flashing command, gradation lighting command, patrol lamp lighting command, and application start command, which are still affected by noise, are input to the serial unit 1760bb. It is not input directly.

[6-1-2. Serial part]
When the initial data, door frame side lighting / flashing command, game board side lighting / flashing command, gradation lighting command, patrol lamp lighting command, and application start command, which are filtered by the noise removing unit 1760ba, are input to the serial unit 1760bb. The initial data, door frame side lighting / flashing command, game board side lighting / flashing command, gradation lighting command, patrol lamp lighting command, and application start command, which are serial data, are restored to parallel data. The initial data, door frame side lighting / flashing command, game board side lighting / flashing command, gradation lighting command, patrol lamp lighting command, and application start command restored to the parallel data are input to the gradation update control unit 1760bc. It has become. The serial unit 1760bb has a built-in input / output direction register and input register (not shown). When the power is turned on, the initial data, the door frame side lighting / flashing command, the game board side lighting / flashing command, the gradation lighting command, the patrol lamp lighting, etc. In addition to the command and the application start command, the input / output direction setting command received from the sub-integrated board 1740 is stored in the input / output direction register. This input / output direction register sets the input / output unit 1760bg to the input side or the output side based on the input / output direction setting command. Specifically, the input / output direction register outputs a lighting signal or blinking signal to the door frame decoration lamps 5aa, 5b to 5h and the effect lamp 1230, and an input / output terminal group 1760bm that outputs a gradation lighting signal to the gradation lamp 1240. The input / output unit 1760bg is set to the output side so that the output terminal is the output terminal, or the input / output terminal group 1760bm to which the effect selection signal from the effect selection switch 31 is input is the input / output The unit 1760bg is set on the input side. In the input / output direction register, when the input / output unit 1760bg is set to the input side, a signal is input to the input register via the terminal of the input / output terminal group 1760bm and the input / output unit 1760bg. The serial unit 1760bb outputs the signal input to the input register to the sub-integrated board 1740 via the serial output terminal 1760bn. In the present embodiment, an effect selection signal from the effect selection switch 31 is input to the input register via the terminals of the input / output terminal group 1760bm and the input / output unit bg, and the serial unit 1760bb selects the effect selection. The signal is output to the sub-integrated board 1740 via the serial output terminal 1760bn.

[6-1-3. Gradation update control unit]
Gradation update control unit 1760bc receives initial data, door frame side lighting / blinking command, game board side lighting / blinking command, gradation lighting command, patrol lamp lighting command, and application start command restored to parallel data by serial unit 1760bb. Then, control is performed to store the input initial data in the ON time setting table register group 1760bd and the waveform table register group 1760be, which is a RAM built in the gradation control IC 1760b, or the input door The frame side lighting / flashing command, the game board side lighting / flashing command, the gradation lighting command, the patrol lamp lighting command, and the application start command are stored in a command register (not shown). Based on the door frame side lighting / flashing command, game board side lighting / flashing command, gradation lighting command, patrol lamp lighting command, and application start command stored in the command register, the gradation update control unit 1760bc performs door frame decoration lamp 5aa. , 5b to 5h and a pattern for lighting or blinking the effect lamp 1230, a pattern for lighting the gradation lamp 1240, a pattern for lighting the lighting lamp 1235a of the patrol device 1235, the front contact module 1579 and the rear contact of the loop unit 1570 Control for creating a pattern for turning on or off electrical connection for applying positive and negative voltages to module 1586 with reference to initial data stored in ON time setting table register group 1760bd and waveform table register group 1760be I do. The created pattern for lighting or blinking the door frame decoration lamps 5aa, 5b to 5h and the effect lamp 1230, the pattern for lighting the gradation lamp 1240, the pattern for lighting the lighting lamp 1235a of the patrol lamp device 1235, the loop unit A pattern for turning on or off the electrical connection for applying positive and negative voltages to the front contact module 1579 and the rear contact module 1586 of 1570 is input to the pulse generator 1760bf.

[6-1-4. ON time setting table register group]
The ON time setting table register group 1760bd is configured to store initial data received from the sub-integrated board 1740, such as when the power is turned on, under the control of the gradation update control unit 1760bc. The ON time setting table register group 1760bd includes a total of eight ON time setting tables including an ON time setting table 0 to an ON time setting table 7. Each ON time setting table is composed of a total of 32 gradations of 0 gradations to 31 gradations. In these 0 gradations to 31 gradations, ON times for designating light emission luminance are set by pulse widths, respectively, and 12-bit widths, that is, 0 to 4096 milliseconds (ms) ON times are set. The size of data stored in the ON time setting table register group 1760bd is 3072 bits (= 8 tables × 32 gradations × 12 bits), and the bit rate from the sub-integrated board 1740 to the lamp driving board 1760 is As described above, since it is set to 250 kbps (pulse width: 4 μs), the transmission time of the data stored in the ON time setting table register group 1760bd is 12.288 milliseconds (= 3072 bits × 4 μs) ( ms).

[6-1-5. Waveform table registers]
Similar to the ON time setting table register group 1760bd, the waveform table register group 1760be stores the initial data received from the sub-integrated board 1740 under the control of the gradation update control unit 1760bc. It has become. The waveform table register group 1760be includes a total of three waveform tables, waveform table 0 to waveform table 2. Each waveform table is composed of a total of 90 waveforms of 0 to 89 waveforms. In these 0 waveform to 89 waveform, an array in which 0 gradation to 31 gradation of the ON time setting table 0 to ON time setting table 7 stored in the ON time setting table register group 1760bd is arranged is set. A 5-bit width, that is, 0 gradation to 32 gradation is set. The size of the data stored in the waveform table register group 1760be is 1350 bits (= 3 tables × 90 waveforms × 5 bits), and the bit rate from the sub-integrated board 1740 to the lamp driving board 1760 is 250 kbps (pulse width: 4 μs), the transmission time of data stored in the waveform table register group 1760be is 5.4 ms (= 1350 bits × 4 μs).

[6-1-6. Pulse generator]
The pulse generation unit 1760bf is a pattern for lighting or blinking the door frame decoration lamps 5aa, 5b to 5h and the effect lamp 1230, a pattern for lighting the gradation lamp 1240, and a patrol device, which are created by the gradation update control unit 1760bc. When a pattern for turning on the lighting lamp 1235a of 1235 and a pattern for turning on or off the electrical connection for applying the positive and negative voltage to the front contact module 1579 and the rear contact module 1586 of the loop unit 1570 are input. A pulse is generated based on the pattern. The generated pulse is input to the input / output unit 1760bg and the output unit bh. The input / output unit 1760bg outputs the input pulse as a lighting signal or a blinking signal from the terminals of the input / output terminal group 1760bm and the output terminal group 1760bp to the effect lamp 1230 or as a gradation lighting signal to the gradation lamp 1240. Or output to the door frame decoration lamps 5aa, 5b to 5h via the sub drawer relay board 658 as a lighting signal or a blinking signal. The output unit 1760bh outputs the input pulse as a lighting signal or blinking signal from the terminal of the output terminal group 1760bp to the effect lamp 1230, outputs it as a gradation lighting signal to the gradation lamp 1240, or a patrol as a lighting signal. It outputs to the lighting lamp 1235a of the apparatus 1235, or outputs it to the front contact module 1579 and the rear contact module 1586 of the loop unit 1570 as an ON / OFF signal. As a result, the effect lamp 1230 and the door frame decoration lamps 5aa, 5b to 5h can be turned on or blinking, the gradation lamp 1240 can be turned on in gradation, or the lighting lamp 1235a of the patrol device 1235 can be turned on. Incidentally, by turning on the electrical connection for applying the positive and negative voltage to the front contact module 1579 and the rear contact module 1586 of the loop unit 1570, as shown in FIGS. 129 and 130, the cars 1572c, 1573c The front lights 1572ccc and 1573ccc and the backlights 1572ccd and 1573ccd are turned on.

[6-2. Various commands]
As described above, the gradation control IC 1760b receives the door frame side lighting / flashing command, the game board side lighting / flashing command, the gradation lighting command, the patrol lamp lighting command, and the application start command output from the sub-integrated board 1740. These door frame side lighting / flashing commands, game board side lighting / flashing commands, gradation lighting commands, patrol lamp lighting commands, and application start commands are the terminal numbers in which the input / output terminal group 1760bm is set as the output terminals and the output terminal group 1760bp. Terminal number, any gradation number from 0 gradation to 31 gradation, any waveform table number from waveform table 0 to waveform table 2, waveform that is time until transition to the next waveform Transition time, initial value of waveform counter (any waveform number from 0 to 89 waveforms), maximum waveform counter value (any waveform number from 0 to 89 waveforms), ON time setting table 0 to ON time setting table 7, the ON time setting table number of any one of 7 and the like. The door frame side lighting / blinking command, game board side lighting / blinking command, gradation lighting command, patrol lamp lighting command and application start command have a size of 36 bits (input / output terminal group 1760bm). Are individually set for the terminals set as output terminals and the terminals of the output terminal group 1760 bp.

[6-3. Serial-parallel conversion circuit]
The serial / parallel conversion circuit 1760c mainly includes a serial-in / parallel-out shift register (in this embodiment, manufactured by Tokyo Shibaura Electric: 74HC595), and a plurality of the shift registers are connected in a daisy chain. When these shift registers receive a patrol motor drive command and a gear module drive motor drive command, which are transmission data SP-DAT output bit by bit from the sub-integrated board 1740 in synchronization with the clock signal SP-CLK, The patrol lamp motor drive command and the gear module drive motor drive command, which are serial data, are restored to parallel data when the latch signal SP-LAT from the sub-integrated board 1740 is input. The patrol motor driving command restored to parallel data is input to the patrol driving circuit 1760d, while the gear module driving motor driving command restored to parallel data is input to the gear module driving circuit 1760e. Yes.

[6-4. Patrol drive circuit]
The patrol lamp driving circuit 1760d is mainly composed of a power transistor module (in this embodiment, manufactured by Tokyo Shibaura Electric: MP4303), and four Darlington power transistors are built in the power transistor module. The base terminals (1st terminal, 5th terminal, 8th terminal, 12th terminal) of each Darlington power transistor are electrically connected to the output terminal of the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1760c. A patrol motor drive command restored to parallel data is input. A cathode terminal (No. 3 terminal, No. 10 terminal) of each Darlington power transistor is inputted with a voltage for driving a motor (+18 V described later) via a Zener diode (not shown). The emitter terminals (No. 6 terminal and No. 7 terminal) of each Darlington power transistor are grounded. The collector terminals (second terminal, fourth terminal, ninth terminal, and eleventh terminal) of each Darlington power transistor are connected to the drive coils (A phase, / A phase, B phase, / B phase). The power transistor module outputs a drive signal from the collector terminal corresponding to the base terminal of each Darlington power transistor to the drive coil of the motor 1235b of the patrol device 1235 based on the input patrol motor drive command (for example, at the base terminal). When a voltage is applied to a certain first terminal, a drive signal is output to the drive coil A phase of the motor 1235b, which is electrically connected to the second terminal, which is the collector terminal), and the motor 1235b of the patrol device 1235 is rotated. I am letting.

[6-5. Gear module drive circuit]
As shown in FIG. 142, the gear module drive circuit 1760e mainly includes a front driver 1760ea and a rear driver 1760eb. The gear module drive motor drive command restored to parallel data by the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1760c is between the output terminal of the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1760c and the input terminal of the front driver 1760ea and the input terminal of the rear driver 1760eb. The ON state where the voltage is applied or the OFF state where the voltage is not applied is maintained, and the electrical angle which will be described later is described as zero degrees (hereinafter referred to as “0 degree”). ), The front driver 1760ea outputs a drive signal to the front gear module drive motor 1578 of the loop unit 1570 based on the voltage applied to the input terminal of the front driver 1760ea and the input terminal of the rear driver 1760eb. The rear driver 1760eb The side gear module drive motor 1585 after Tsu bets 1570 and outputs a drive signal.

[6-5-1. Front driver and rear driver]
Since both the front driver 1760ea and the rear driver 1760eb are chopper type microstep pseudo sine wave drive stepping motor drivers (in this embodiment, manufactured by Tokyo Shibaura Electric: TB62209FG), the configuration of the front driver 1760ea will be described here. To do.

  As shown in FIG. 143, the front driver 1760ea has, as input terminals, a RESET terminal, a CW / CCW terminal, an ENABLE terminal, a STANDBY terminal, a D MODE1 terminal to a D MODE3 terminal, a CLK terminal, a TORQUE1 terminal, a TORQUE2 terminal, an MDT1 terminal, While an MDT1 terminal or the like is provided, an MO terminal or the like is provided as an output terminal. Input terminals such as CW / CCW terminal, ENABLE terminal, STANDBY terminal, DMODE1 terminal to DMODE3 terminal, TORQUE1 terminal, TORQUE2 terminal and the like are electrically connected to the output terminal of serial-parallel conversion circuit 1760c. The gear module drive motor drive command restored to parallel data by the parallel conversion circuit 1760c includes input terminals such as a CW / CCW terminal, an ENABLE terminal, a STANDBY terminal, a D MODE1 terminal to a D MODE3 terminal, a TORQUE1 terminal, and a TORQUE2 terminal. Between the output terminal of the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1760c, either an ON state where a voltage is applied or an OFF state where no voltage is applied is maintained. The CLK terminal is electrically connected to the sub-integrated MPU 1740a of the sub-integrated board 1740, and a CLK1 signal (see FIG. 142) that is a clock signal from the sub-integrated MPU 1740a is input thereto. The MO terminal as an output terminal is electrically connected to the sub-integrated MPU 1740a, and the MO1 signal (see FIG. 142) from the MO terminal is input to the sub-integrated MPU 1740a. The CLK terminal of the rear driver 1760eb receives a CLK2 signal (see FIG. 142) that is a clock signal from the sub-integrated MPU 1740a, and the sub-integrated MPU 1740a receives the MO2 from the MO terminal of the rear driver 1760eb. A signal (see FIG. 142) is input.

  Here, the input terminal and the output terminal of the front driver 1760ea will be described. As shown in FIG. 144, the D MODE1 terminal to D MODE3 terminal are input terminals for setting the motor drive mode, and the front gear module drive motor. The drive mode of 1578 can be set to 2-phase excitation, 1-2 phase excitation (A), 1-2 phase excitation (B), W1-2 phase excitation, 2W1-2 phase excitation, etc. Yes. CW / CCW is an input terminal for setting the rotation direction of the motor, and the rotation direction of the front gear module drive motor 1578 can be set. The STANDBY terminal is an input terminal for initializing all functions and setting a power saving mode, and can set normal operation or operation stop of the front driver 1760ea. The TORQUE1 terminal and the TORQUE2 terminal are input terminals for setting the switching of the motor torque, and the torque of the front gear module drive motor 1578 is 100%, 85%, 70%, 50% (% (ratio) is the current) The peak value ratio is shown, and the larger the% (ratio) is, the larger the torque becomes.). The MDT1 terminal and the MDT2 terminal are input terminals for setting MIXED DECAY, and the current decay speed mode (referred to as “DECAY mode”) during constant current control is set to 100%, 75%, 37.5%, It can be set to any one of four levels of 12.5% (the greater the% (ratio), the greater the current damping force).

  The RESET terminal is an input terminal for forcibly initializing the electrical angle (set to 0 degree). The lamp drive board 1760 is housed in the lamp drive board box 1765 as described above, and this lamp drive board box 1765 is looped together with the effect control board box 266a that houses the sub integrated board 1740 and the like as described above. The unit 1570 is attached to the rear surface. The lamp driving board 1760 and the sub-integrated board 1740 are electrically connected by a harness. When the sub-integrated board 1740 outputs a reset signal to the RESET terminal of the front driver 1760ea of the lamp driving board 1760 via the harness, noise enters the harness and the RESET terminal of the front driver 1760ea affects the influence of the noise. If received, the electrical angle of the front driver 1760ea may be forcibly initialized. When the front driver 1760ea is reset, it becomes difficult for the sub-integrated board 1740 to grasp how many electrical angles of the front driver 1760ea are. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the RESET terminal of the front driver 1760ea is grounded. Thereby, even if noise enters the harness, the electrical angle of the front driver 1760ea can be prevented from being forcibly initialized. Briefly describing the noise entering the harness, the pachinko gaming machines are lined up on the pachinko island facility so that game balls are supplied from the pachinko island facility. The supplied game balls are fired toward the game area 255 by the hitting ball launching device 300 described above, and provided in the game area 255. Enter the various winning entrances such as the entrance 1340, the winning entrance unit side normal winning entrance 1440, the decoration unit side normal winning entrances 1465, 1470, etc. It has become. The game balls returned to the pachinko island facility are polished in the pachinko island facility and supplied to the pachinko machine again. In this way, the game balls are configured to circulate between the pachinko machine and the pachinko island equipment. During this circulation, the game balls are polished in the pachinko island equipment or rubbed against each other. And become static. Noise due to electrostatic discharge of the game ball tends to enter a harness that electrically connects various boards.

  The ENABLE terminal is an input terminal for forcibly stopping the output when the front gear module drive motor 1578 is operated. The CLK terminal is an input terminal for determining the motor speed of the front gear module drive motor 1578. When the CLK1 signal is input, the electrical angle advances and the signal is reflected at the up edge (Up edge). It has become.

  The MO terminal is an output terminal that indicates that the electrical angle is 0 degree, and the electrical angle is 0 degrees by 4W1-2, 2W1-2, W1-2, and 1-2 phase excitation (B phase: 100%, A While the MO1 signal is output at 0% phase, the MO1 signal is output at the electrical angle of 0 degrees (B phase: 100%, A phase: 100%) in the two-phase excitation. At the timing of outputting the MO1 signal, the front driver 1760ea is applied to its input terminals such as CW / CCW terminal, ENABLE terminal, STANDBY terminal, DMODE1 terminal to DMODE3 terminal, TORQUE1 terminal, TORQUE2 terminal, and the like. Based on the voltage, a control signal input to its input terminal is taken into a register of a microstep decoder 17600ea, which will be described later, and, for example, the drive mode of the front gear module drive motor 1578 is set based on the fetched control signal. Or the torque of the front gear module drive motor 1578 is switched.

  As shown in FIG. 143, the front driver 1760ea includes a microstep decoder 1760eaa, a current setting circuit 1760eab, a chopping reference generation circuit 1760eaf, a current feedback circuit 1760eae, an output control circuit 1760eag, and an output circuit 1760eah.

  The microstep decoder 1760eaa is a circuit for setting a drive mode of the front gear module drive motor 1578 and setting a constant current value to be passed through the drive coil of the front gear module drive motor 1578. The microstep decoder 1760ea includes a register (not shown). As described above, when the timing for outputting the MO1 signal is reached, the register is a CW / CCW terminal, an ENABLE terminal, a STANDBY which is an input terminal of the front driver 1760ea. Based on the voltage applied to the terminal, D MODE1 terminal to D MODE3 terminal, TORQUE1 terminal, TORQUE2 terminal, etc., the control signal input to the input terminal is taken in. The microstep decoder 1760eaa sets the drive mode of the front gear module drive motor 1578 on the basis of various control signals fetched into the register and the CLK1 signal input from the CLK terminal, and the front gear module drive motor 1578. The constant current value to be passed through the drive coil is set.

  Further, the microstep decoder 1760eaa switches the torque to any one of the four levels based on the control signal input to the TORQUE1 terminal and the TORQUE2 terminal, which has been taken into the register, and transfers the 2-bit TORQUE data to the current setting circuit 1760eab. Output. Further, the microstep decoder 1760eaa stores in the register a value in the range of values 0 to 15 counted up by the up edge of the CLK1 signal input from the CLK terminal, and the value stored in this register is a 4-bit value. It outputs to the current setting circuit 1760eab as the step current data. Furthermore, the microstep decoder 1760eaa controls the output of the 2-bit DECay data in order to set the DECay mode to any one of the four stages based on the control signals input to the MDT1 and MDT2 terminals. Output to the circuit 17690eag.

  The current setting circuit 1760eab is a circuit for setting a reference voltage of an output current value output to the drive coil of the front gear module drive motor 1578 based on the TORQUE data and the staircase current data output from the microstep decoder 1760eaa. As shown at 143, a torque control circuit 1760eac and a staircase current value selection circuit 1760ead are provided.

  The torque control circuit 1760eac is a circuit that switches the torque of the front gear module drive motor 1578 to any one of the four stages based on the TORQUE data from the microstep decoder 1760eaa. The switching of the torque can be varied by switching the peak value of the current flowing through the drive coil of the front gear module drive motor 1578. The torque control circuit 1760eac switches the voltage value of the reference voltage Vref supplied from the outside of the front driver 1760ea to one of four levels based on the TORQUE data, and selects the voltage value of the switched reference voltage as a staircase current value. Output to circuit 1760ead.

  The staircase current value selection circuit 1760ead is a circuit that outputs to the current feedback circuit 1760eae a reference voltage of a staircase-shaped output current value (stair current value) corresponding to the value 0 to value 15 of the staircase current data from the microstep decoder 1760eaa. is there. For example, when the drive mode is W1-2 phase excitation, 0%, 38%, 71% of the maximum value of the reference voltage corresponding to the value 0, value 4, value 8, value 12, and value 15 of the staircase current data. When the drive mode is 2W1-2 phase excitation, the step current data value 0, value 2, value 4, value 6, Reference voltage corresponding to value 8, value 11, value 13, value 14, value 15 is set to 0%, 20%, 38%, 56%, 71%, 88%, 96%, 98%, 100% of the maximum value Stepwise switching to output to the current feedback circuit 1760eae, or when the drive mode is 4W1-2 phase excitation, the step current data value 0, value 1, value 2, value 3, value 4, value 5, value Corresponds to 6, value 7, value 8, value 9, value 10, value 11, value 12, value 13, value 14, value 15. The quasi-voltage is 0%, 10%, 20%, 29%, 38%, 47%, 56%, 63%, 71%, 77%, 83%, 88%, 92%, 96%, 98% of the maximum value. , Switching to 100% step by step and outputting to the current feedback circuit 1760eae. The maximum value of the reference voltage is a value set in four stages by the torque control circuit 1760eac. The front gear module drive motor 1578 rotates one step when the electrical angle advances from 0 degrees to 90 degrees. Therefore, when the drive mode is W1-2 phase excitation, for example, the reference voltage is maximized. If the electrical angle advances from 0 degrees to 90 degrees by switching from 0% → 38% → 71% → 92% → 100% of the value and the electrical angle advances from 0 degrees to 90 degrees, the micro gear necessary for one step rotation of the front gear module drive motor 1578 When the number of steps is 4 and the drive mode is 2W1-2 phase excitation, for example, the reference voltage is 0% of the maximum value → 20% → 38% → 56% → 71% → 88% → 96% → 98% → When the electrical angle advances from 0 degrees to 90 degrees by switching to 8 steps at 100%, the number of microsteps required for the front gear module drive motor 1578 to rotate one step becomes 8 and the drive mode In the case of 4W1-2 phase excitation, for example, the reference voltage is 0% → 10% → 20% → 29% → 38% → 47% → 56% → 63% → 71% → 77% → 83% → 88 of the maximum value. When the electrical angle advances from 0 degrees to 90 degrees by switching from 16% from% to 92% to 96% to 98% to 100%, the number of microsteps required for the front gear module drive motor 1578 to rotate one step is The value is 16.

  The current feedback circuit 1760eae compares the current value of the set current corresponding to the voltage value of the reference voltage from the staircase current value selection circuit 1760eaad and the current value of the output current output to the output control circuit 1760eag, and the difference between them is This is a circuit that changes the current value of the output current so as to disappear.

  The chopping reference creation circuit 1760eaf is a circuit that creates an internal reference (chopping clock signal) that serves as a reference for the chopping frequency when the output control circuit 1760eag performs chopping of the drive current. The chopping reference generation circuit 1760eaf shapes a sawtooth wave of a predetermined frequency generated by a chopping reference waveform generation circuit (not shown) into a clock signal by a waveform shaping circuit (not shown), and outputs the shaped clock signal as a chopping clock signal 1760eag. Output to.

  The output control circuit 1760eag is a circuit that performs constant current chopper driving by chopping a signal of a current value of a set current that changes stepwise from the current feedback circuit 1760eae based on the chopping clock signal from the chopping reference generation circuit 1760eaf. It is. As shown in FIG. 143, the output control circuit 1760eag has a built-in MIXED DECAY TIMMING circuit that switches the current attenuation ratio during chopping in four stages according to the load characteristics.

  This MIXED DECAY TIMMING circuit includes a counter and a selector (not shown). The counter counts the chopping clock signal from the chopping reference generation circuit 1760eaf, and when the predetermined number of pulses is counted, the selector Switch to CHARGE MODE to start charging the current and increase the current value. When this current value rises to the current value of the set current, the CHARGE MODE shifts to the SLOW DECAY MODE where the current decay is slow. In this SLOW DECAY MODE, the current value decreases slowly. The selector switches from SLOW DECAY MODE to FAST DECAY MODE where current decay is fast at a predetermined switching timing. In this FAST DECAY MODE, the current value decreases rapidly. Then, the counter counts the chopping clock signal from the chopping reference generation circuit 1760eaf, and when the predetermined number of pulses is counted, the selector switches from FAST DECAY MODE to CHARGE MODE and starts charging the current to increase the current value. Let

  The MIXED DECAY TIMMING circuit transitions from CHARGE MODE to SLOW DECAY MODE, transitions from this SLOW DECAY MODE to FAST DECAY MODE, and transitions from this FAST DECAY MODE to CHAR DECAY MODE, thereby causing a current feedback circuit 1760e from the current feedback circuit 1760e. The signal of the current value of the set current that changes to is chopped, and constant current chopper driving is performed. Note that the time from the transition to CHARGE MODE to the transition to the next CHARGE MODE is the chopping cycle. In this chopping cycle, the DECAY mode in which FAST DECAY MODE and SLOW DECAY MODE are mixed is called “MIXED DECAY MODE”. The timing for switching between FAST DECAY MODE and SLOW DECAY MODE is “MIXED DECAY TIMMING”. That's it.

  The output control circuit 1760eag chops a signal of the current value of the set current that changes stepwise, and outputs the chopped signal to the output circuit 1760eah. This output circuit 1760eah is a circuit that outputs a drive current while switching the direction of the current flowing through the drive coil of the front gear module drive motor 1578 based on the level of the signal from the output control circuit 1760eag.

[6-5-1 (a). transmission]
The speed at which the cars 1572c and 1573c travel along the vicinity of the outer periphery of the elliptical opening 1200aa is the time when the base clock (130.227 microseconds (μs)) of the sub-integrated board 1740 is counted in this embodiment. And the drive mode (excitation mode) is a transmission specification that can be varied in combination. This transmission specification is stored in advance in the sub-integrated ROM 1740b of the sub-integrated board 1740.

  In this transmission specification, the base clock is counted 4 times, 6 times, 7 times, 8 times, and the excitation mode is 3 types of W1-2 phase excitation, 2W1-2 phase excitation, 4W1-2 phase excitation. , And 12 speeds ranging from 1st speed to 12th speed can be designated.

  As shown in FIG. 145, the transmission specifications are as follows. Each speed from the low speed 1st speed (Lo) to the high speed 12th speed (Hi) is the base clock count, its period and frequency, and the cars 1572c and 1573c. The number of revolutions that travel along the vicinity of the outer periphery of the elliptical opening 1200aa in 1 second, and the time required for the cars 1572c and 1573c to make one rotation along the vicinity of the outer periphery of the elliptical opening 1200aa are shown. As described above, when the output shaft of the front gear module drive motor 1578 rotates 6 times, the front gear module 1572 rotates once, and when the output shaft of the rear gear module drive motor 1585 rotates 6 times, the rear gear module 1573 turns 1 It is designed to rotate. When the cars 1572c and 1573c make one revolution along the vicinity of the outer periphery of the elliptical opening 1200aa, the front gear module 1572 and the rear gear module 1573 make one revolution.

  As shown in FIG. 145, in the transmission specification, in the first speed (Lo), which is a low speed, the base clock count is set to 8, so the cycle is 1041.816 s (= base clock 130.227 μs × value). 8), and the frequency becomes 959.862 hertz (= 1 / 1041.816 s, Hz) which is the reciprocal of the period. At the first speed (Lo), the excitation mode is set to 4W1-2 phase excitation, and the number of microsteps necessary for the front gear module drive motor 1578 to rotate one step is 16 as described above. . The sub-integrated MPU 1740a of the sub-integrated board 1740 outputs the CLK1 signal to the CLK terminal of the front driver 1760ea of the lamp driving board 1760 at the first speed (Lo) at a frequency of 959.892 Hz, and the front driver 1760ea receives the CLK1 signal. Each time, the micro step is advanced by one in the excitation mode of 4W1-2 phase excitation. The number of steps necessary for one rotation of the output shaft of the front gear module drive motor 1578 is 96 as described above, and the wheel 1572c rotates once along the vicinity of the outer periphery of the elliptical opening 1200aa. First, the time required for the output shaft of the front gear module drive motor 1578 to rotate by one step is calculated by multiplying the period (1041.816 μs) and the number of microsteps (value 16) (1041.816 μs × value). 16) Multiplying this calculated value by the value 96, which is the number of steps of one rotation of the output shaft of the front gear module drive motor 1578, calculates the time for one rotation of the output shaft of the front gear module drive motor 1578 ( (1041.816 μs × value 16) × value 96), the calculated value is multiplied by 6 to obtain 9.6 s (= (1041.8 6 .mu.s × value 16) × value 96) × value 6) can be obtained. The number of revolutions of the car 1572c that travels along the vicinity of the outer periphery of the elliptical opening 1200aa is 0.104 times (= 1 / 9.6 s), which is the inverse of 9.6 s.

  In the 7th speed, which is the medium speed, the base clock count is set to 6, so the period is 781.362 s (= base clock 130.227 μs × value 6), and the frequency is 1299.817 Hz which is the reciprocal of the period. (= 1 / 781.362 s). At the seventh speed, the excitation mode is set to 2W1-2 phase excitation, and the number of microsteps necessary for the front gear module drive motor 1578 to rotate one step is 8 as described above. The sub-integrated MPU 1740a of the sub-integrated board 1740 outputs a CLK1 signal to the CLK terminal of the front driver 1760ea of the lamp driving board 1760 at a frequency of 1277.917 Hz in the seventh speed, and the front driver 1760ea receives the CLK1 signal each time it is input. The microstep is advanced by one in the excitation mode of 2W1-2 phase excitation. The number of steps required for one rotation of the output shaft of the front gear module drive motor 1578 is 96, and the time required for the wheel 1572c to make one rotation along the vicinity of the outer periphery of the elliptical opening 1200aa is First, the time for the output shaft of the front gear module drive motor 1578 to rotate by one step is calculated by multiplying the period (781.362 μs) and the number of microsteps (value 8) (781.362 μs × value 8), and this calculation The time for which the output shaft of the front gear module drive motor 1578 makes one revolution is calculated by multiplying the obtained value and the value 96 which is the number of steps of one rotation of the output shaft of the front gear module drive motor 1578 ((781.362 μs × Value 8) × value 96), and the calculated value is multiplied by 6 to obtain the value 3.6 s (= (781.362 μs × value 8) × value 96). × value 6) can be obtained. The number of revolutions of the car 1572c that travels along the vicinity of the outer periphery of the elliptical opening 1200aa in one second is 0.278 times (= 1 / 3.6s) that is the inverse of 3.6s.

  At the high speed 12 (Hi), since the base clock count is set to 5, the cycle is 651.135 s (= base clock 130.227 μs × value 5), and the frequency is 1535 which is the reciprocal of the cycle. .780 Hz (= 1 / 651.135 s). At the 12th speed (Hi), the excitation mode is set to W1-2 phase excitation, and as described above, the number of microsteps required for the front gear module drive motor 1578 to rotate by one step is the value 4. . The sub-integrated MPU 1740a of the sub-integrated board 1740 outputs the CLK1 signal to the CLK terminal of the front driver 1760ea of the lamp driving board 1760 at 12-speed (Hi) at a frequency of 1535.780 Hz, and the front driver 1760ea receives the CLK1 signal. Each time, the micro step is advanced by one in the excitation mode called W1-2 phase excitation. The number of steps required for one rotation of the output shaft of the front gear module drive motor 1578 is 96, and the time required for the wheel 1572c to make one rotation along the vicinity of the outer periphery of the elliptical opening 1200aa is First, the time (651.135 μs × value 4) is calculated by multiplying the period (651.135 μs) and the number of microsteps (value 4) by rotating the output shaft of the front gear module drive motor 1578 by one step. And the value 96, which is the number of steps for one rotation of the output shaft of the front gear module drive motor 1578, is calculated to calculate the time required for one rotation of the output shaft of the front gear module drive motor 1578 ((651.135 μs × Value 4) × value 96), and the calculated value is multiplied by 6 to obtain the value 1.5s (= (651.135 μs × value 4) × value 96). × value 6) can be obtained. The number of revolutions of the car 1572c that travels along the vicinity of the outer periphery of the elliptical opening 1200aa is 0.667 times (= 1 / 1.5s), which is the reciprocal of 1.5s.

  As the speed increases from the low speed 1st (Lo) to the high speed 12th (Hi), the rotational speed traveling along the vicinity of the outer periphery of the elliptical opening 1200aa in one second is shown in FIG. As shown in (), it rises smoothly from 0.104 rotation to 0.667 rotation. Further, the time required for the vehicle 1572c, 1573c to make one rotation along the vicinity of the outer periphery of the elliptical opening 1200aa is smoothly lowered from 9.6s to 1.5s as shown in FIG. 146 (b). It has become. As described above, the cars 1572c and 1573c can travel at a low speed at the low speed of 1st speed (Lo) because the time required for one rotation along the vicinity of the outer periphery of the elliptical opening 1200aa is 9.6. At the high speed 12 speed (Hi), the time required to make one rotation along the vicinity of the outer periphery of the elliptical opening 1200aa is 1.5 s, and the vehicle can travel at high speed.

[7. Power system]
Next, the power supplied to the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described. First, the power supply board 686 described above will be described, and then the power supplied to each control board will be described. FIG. 147 is a block diagram showing a power supply system of a pachinko gaming machine.

[7-1. Power supply board]
The power supply board 686 is electrically connected to the above-described power supply line connector 688 with a power supply cord (not shown), and a plug of the power supply cord is inserted into a power outlet of the pachinko island facility. When the power switch 687 described above is operated, the power supplied from the pachinko island facility is supplied to the power supply board 686, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be turned on.

  As shown in FIG. 147, the power supply board 686 includes a + 34V creation circuit 686a, a + 18V creation circuit 686b, and a + 9V creation circuit 686c. The + 34V creation circuit 686a rectifies the AC 24 volts (AC24V) supplied from the Pachinko Island facility and describes it as DC + 34V (DC + 34V, hereinafter, “+ 34V.” In this embodiment, the maximum current is 6 amperes (A ). The + 18V creation circuit 686b creates a + 34V by rectifying the AC24V supplied from the Pachinko Island facility, and describes the + 34V from the created + 34V (DC + 18V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 18V”. In the present embodiment, the maximum current is described. 4A can be flown.). The + 9V creation circuit 686c creates DC + 9V (DC + 9V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 9V”. In this embodiment, 0.4 A can be passed as the maximum current) from + 18V created by the + 18V creation circuit 686b. . The voltages created by the + 34V creation circuit 686a, + 18V creation circuit 686b, and + 9V creation circuit 686c are supplied to the payout control board 715.

[7-2. Power supplied to each control board]
Next, the power supplied to each control board will be described. As shown in FIG. 147, + 34V, + 18V and + 9V supplied from the power supply board 686 are supplied to the payout control board 715 and supplied to the main control board 1700 via the main drawer relay board 657. Then, + 34V, + 18V and + 9V supplied to the main control board 1700 are supplied to the sub-integrated board 1740 and supplied to the liquid crystal control board 1750 and the lamp driving board 1760, respectively. Note that +34 V and +18 V are supplied to the liquid crystal control board 1750 via the sub-integrated board 1740. Here, the power supplied to the payout control board 715 will be described first, then the power supplied to the main control board 1700, the power supplied to the sub-integrated board 1740, the power supplied to the liquid crystal control board 1750, The power supplied to the lamp driving board 1760 will be described.

[7-2-1. Power supplied to payout control board]
The payout control board 715 includes a payout control series regulator 715a in addition to the payout control MPU 1710a and the like. The payout control series regulator 715a is supplied with + 9V supplied from the power supply board 686. From this + 9V, the reference voltage of the payout control board 715 is + 5V DC (DC + 5V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 5V”). create. In addition to the payout control MPU 1710a of the payout control unit 1710 shown in FIG. 140, this + 5V is the payout control I / O port 1710b, the external WDT 1710c, the payout motor drive circuit 1710d, the input circuit 1720a of the fire control unit 1720, and the fire control. It is also input to the circuit 1720c, the firing motor drive circuit 1720d, and the like.

  + 34V supplied from the power supply board 686 is input to the launch motor drive circuit 1720d in addition to the payout motor drive circuit 1710d, and is used as a drive power source for the payout motor 465 and the launch motor 344 shown in FIG. Yes. Note that + 18V supplied from the power supply board 686 is not only the door opening switch 3a, but also the body frame opening switch 3b, the full tank switch 545, the ball break switch 426, the counting switch 462, and the rotation angle switch 505 shown in FIG. Etc. are input.

[7-2-2. Power supplied to main control board]
The main control board 1700 includes a main control series regulator 1700c and a power failure monitoring circuit 1700d in addition to the main control MPU 1700a. The main control series regulator 1700c receives + 9V supplied from the payout control board 715, and creates + 5V that is the reference voltage of the main control board 1700 from this + 9V. This +5 V is input to the main control I / O port 1700b shown in FIG. 140 in addition to the main control MPU 1700a. The power failure monitoring circuit 1700d receives + 18V and + 9V supplied from the payout control board 715, and monitors these + 18V and + 9V power failure or signs of instantaneous power failure. The power failure monitoring circuit 1700d receives a radio wave detection signal from the radio wave detection switch 1700e and monitors the radio wave detection signal. The radio wave detection switch 1700e is disposed in the vicinity of the main control series regulator 1700c, and detects whether or not the main control series regulator 1700c is irradiated with a high frequency.

  When the power failure monitoring circuit 1700d detects the sign of a power failure or a momentary power failure, or when a radio wave detection signal is input from the radio wave detection switch 1700e, the power failure warning signal is transmitted as a power failure warning signal in addition to the main control MPU 1700a. Output to. Further, a power failure warning signal is input to the payout control board 715 via the main drawer relay board 657, and a power failure warning signal is input to the liquid crystal control board 1750 via the sub-integrated board 1740.

  + 34V supplied from the payout control board 715 is used as a driving power source for the opening / closing blade solenoid 1420 shown in FIG. Note that + 18V supplied from the payout control board 715 is also input to the gate switch 1460, the left prize opening switch 1475, etc. shown in FIG. 140 in addition to the upper start switch 1360.

  The main control board 1700 includes a hot line failure prevention circuit 1700f, and + 34V, +18, and + 9V supplied from the payout control board 715 are input to the hot line failure prevention circuit 1700f. Here, the “live line” means a state in which a current flows through the wiring (harness).

  The hot line failure prevention circuit 1700f shown in FIG. 1 with the power switch 687 shown in FIG. 97 turned on, that is, with + 34V, +18 and + 9V being supplied from the payout control board 715, When the game board 4 is attached to the main body frame 3, the drawer connector 730 provided on the main drawer relay terminal board 657 shown in FIG. 93 and the drawer provided on the relay terminal board 269 of the game board 4 shown in FIG. It is a circuit that prevents welding with the connector 270.

[7-2-3. Power supplied to sub integrated board]
The sub integrated board 1740 includes a sub integrated MPU 1740a, a sound source IC 1740c, and the like. The sub-integrated board 1740 has a liquid crystal control of + 5V that is a reference voltage of the sub-integrated MPU 1740a and DC + 3.3V that is a reference voltage of the sound source IC 1740c (DC + 3.3V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 3.3V”). It is supplied from the substrate 1750. In addition to the sub-integrated MPU 1740a, + 5V is input to, for example, a bus buffer circuit (not shown). This bus buffer circuit is used as a bus line interface between the sub-integrated MPU 1740a and the sub-integrated ROM 1740b shown in FIG. On the other hand, + 3.3V is input to the sub-integrated ROM 1740b and the sound ROM 1740d shown in FIG. 140, for example, in addition to the sound source IC 1740c.

  For example, + 18V supplied via the main control board 1700 is input to an amplifier that amplifies music and sound effects output from the speaker 34 shown in FIG. 140, for example. Note that +9 V supplied via the main control board 1700 is output to the lamp driving board 1760 as it is, and is not used in the sub-integrated board 1740. Further, + 34V supplied via the main control board 1700 is output as it is to the liquid crystal control board 1750 and the lamp driving board 1760 and is not used in the sub integrated board 1740.

[7-2-4. Power supplied to LCD control board]
The liquid crystal control board 1750 includes a liquid crystal control power supply circuit 1750e in addition to the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a, the VDP 1750c, and the like. The liquid crystal control power supply circuit 1750e is supplied with + 18V supplied via the sub-integrated board 1740. From this + 18V, the reference voltage of the sub-integrated MPU 1740a and the like is + 5V and the reference voltage of the liquid crystal control board 1750 and the like. + 3.3V, DC + 1.5V (DC + 1.5V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 1.5V”) that is the power source of the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a and VDP1750c, and DC 2.5V (DC + 2.5V) that is the power source of the VDP1750c. , Hereinafter referred to as “+2.5 V”). In addition to the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a, + 3.3V is input to the VDP 1750c, the liquid crystal control ROM 1750b, the character ROM 1750d and the character RAM 1750z, the liquid crystal drive circuit for driving the liquid crystal display 1315, and the like shown in FIG. Thus, + 1.5V, + 2.5V, and + 3.3V are input to VDP1750c.

  + 5V and + 3.3V created by the liquid crystal control power supply circuit 1750e are also supplied to the sub-integrated board 1740, and these + 5V and + 3.3V are commonly used by the liquid crystal control board 1750 and the sub-integrated board 1740. .

  + 34V supplied via the sub-integrated substrate 1740 is output as it is to the inverter substrate 1755 and is not used in the liquid crystal control substrate 1750.

[7-2-5. Power supplied to inverter board]
The inverter board 1755 includes a cathode fluorescent lamp lighting circuit 1755a for lighting a cold cathode tube which is a backlight of the liquid crystal display 1315 shown in FIG. The cold cathode fluorescent lamp lighting circuit 1755a is supplied with + 34V supplied via the sub-integrated substrate 1740.

[7-2-6. Power supplied to lamp drive board]
The lamp drive board 1760 includes a lamp drive series regulator 1760a, a gradation control IC 1760b, a gear module drive circuit 1760e, and the like. The lamp drive series regulator 1760a receives + 9V supplied via the sub-integrated board 1740, and creates + 5V that is the reference voltage of the lamp drive board 1760 from this + 9V. This +5 V is input to the gradation control IC 1760b that performs gradation lighting of the gradation lamp 1240 shown in FIG. + 34V and + 18V supplied via the sub-integrated board 1740 are input to the gear module drive circuit 1760e and the like.

[8. Noise suppression circuit and grounding circuit for power supply board]
Next, the ground circuit of the power supply board 686 will be described. The AC24V supplied from the pachinko island facility is input to the power supply board 686 via the power supply line connector 688 as described above. The power supply board 686 is provided with countermeasures against two types of mode noise, normal mode noise appearing between the AC 24V power supply lines and common mode noise appearing between the AC 24V and the ground (GND). ing. First, the noise countermeasure circuit of the power supply board 686 will be described, and then the ground circuit of the power supply board 686 will be described. FIG. 148 is a circuit diagram showing a noise countermeasure circuit and a ground circuit of the power supply board.

[8-1. Power board noise countermeasures]
As shown in FIG. 148, the AC 24V supplied from the pachinko island facility is input to the input terminals 1 and 3 of the power switch 687 (in this embodiment, Matsushita Electric Works: AJ8221BF) via the power line connector 688. ing. Specifically, an AC 24V A line (hereinafter referred to as “AC24VA”) is input to the input side terminal 3 of the power switch 687, and an AC 24V B line is input to the input side terminal 1 of the power switch 687. (Hereinafter referred to as “AC24VB”) is input. The output side terminals 2 and 4 of the power switch 687 are connected to a choke coil via a common mode noise countermeasure circuit CMC which is a circuit for countermeasure against common mode noise and a normal mode noise countermeasure circuit NMC which is a circuit for countermeasure against normal mode noise. L1 (in this embodiment, manufactured by Ueno: ADR2515-010TDK).

  The common mode noise countermeasure circuit CMC includes capacitors C110 and C111 and varistors ZNR1 and ZNR2. Capacitors C110 and C111 have the same capacity, and remove common mode noise. On the other hand, the varistors ZNR1 and ZNR2 are surge absorbing elements (surge absorbers), and have the same varistor voltage. The varistors ZNR1 and ZNR2 are for removing spike noise that could not be reduced by the capacitors C110 and C111.

  The normal mode noise countermeasure circuit NMC includes a capacitor C112 and a varistor ZNR3. The capacitor C112 removes normal mode noise generated in AC24VA and AC24VB. The varistor ZNR3 is a surge absorbing element (surge absorber), and removes spike noise that could not be removed by the capacitor C112.

  The AC24VA output from the output side terminal 4 of the power switch 687 is input to the choke coil L1 via the FUSE1, the common mode noise countermeasure circuit CMC, and the normal mode noise countermeasure circuit NMC, and from the output side terminal 2 of the power switch 687. The output AC24VB is input to the choke coil L1 via the FUSE2, the common mode noise countermeasure circuit CMC, and the normal mode noise countermeasure circuit NMC. The choke coil L1 is a countermeasure part for common mode noise of AC24VA and AC24VB, and prevents noise disturbance. The AC24VA and AC24VB in which the common mode noise is reduced by the choke coil L1 are input to the above-described + 34V creation circuit 686a and + 18V creation circuit 686b. The AC24VA and AC24VB input to the choke coil L1 are input to the CR unit power line connector 689 in addition to the choke coil L1, and AC24VA and AC24VB are supplied to a CR unit (not shown).

[8-2. Power board grounding circuit]
As shown in FIGS. 96 and 97, grounding wires for removing noise and the like from the door frame 5 (reinforcing plates 35 to 38) shown in FIG. Ground wire FG3 is electrically connected to ground connector 690a and removes noise and the like from the sphere flowing down tank rail member 410 shown in FIG. 3 (from ground wire connection portion 207 shown in FIG. 35). Is electrically connected to the ground connector 690b as the frame ground FG1, and an earth wire for removing noise and the like from the prize ball unit 450 shown in FIG. 3 is electrically connected to the ground connector 690c as the frame ground FG1, An earth wire for removing noise and the like from a CR unit (not shown) serves as a frame ground FG and is an earth connector 6 0d are electrically connected and.

  As shown in FIG. 148, the frame ground FG3 is electrically connected to the frame ground FG2 of the power line connector 688 via the resistor R110, and the frame ground FG1 is connected via the resistor R111. The frame ground FG of the power line connector 688 is electrically connected to the frame ground FG2, and the frame ground FG is electrically connected to the frame ground FG2 of the power line connector 688 via the resistor R112. The resistor R110 prevents noise from the frame grounds FG1 and FG from entering the frame ground FG3, and the resistor R111 prevents noise from the frame grounds FG3 and FG from entering the frame ground FG1. The resistor R112 prevents noise from the frame grounds FG3 and FG1 from entering the frame ground FG.

  The AC24VB supplied from the Pachinko Island facility is connected to one of the arresters DSP1 (Mitsubishi Materials: DSP-301N-A21F in this embodiment) between the power line connector 688 and the input side terminal 1 of the power switch 687. Electrically connected. The other of the arrester DSP1 is electrically connected to the frame ground FG2 of the power line connector 688. The arrester DSP1 causes the surge voltage to flow as a surge current to the frame ground FG2 of the power line connector 688 when a high voltage (referred to as “surge voltage”) enters the AC24V supplied from the Pachinko island facility by lightning, for example. Thus, the surge voltage is limited so that no surge voltage is applied to the power switch 687 or the high voltage (surge voltage) temporarily generated when the power switch 687 is turned on / off is supplied to the frame ground FG2 of the power line connector 688. The surge voltage is limited by flowing it as a surge current to prevent the surge voltage from being applied to the power switch 687. Accordingly, various control boards such as the payout control board 715 and the main control board 1700 shown in FIG. 147 can be protected from the surge voltage, and failure due to the surge voltage is prevented.

  When the frame ground FG2 is not grounded, the discharge path of the power supply board 686 is formed on the side of the AC24VB that is the power source of the pachinko island facility via the arrester DSP1, for example, the door frame 5 Is not easily charged. Thereby, even if a player touches the door frame 5, the player does not feel discomfort due to electrostatic discharge from the door frame 5.

[9. Main control board circuit]
Next, the circuit of the main control board 1700 shown in FIG. 140 will be described. As shown in FIG. 147, the main control board 1700 is supplied with DC power supplies + 34V, + 18V, and + 9V from the power supply board 686 via the payout control board 715. These DC power supplies + 34V, + 18V, and + 9V are first input to the above-described hot-wire failure prevention circuit 1700f. For example, + 9V is input to the main control series regulator 1700c via the hot-wire failure prevention circuit 1700f. The main control series regulator 1700c generates + 5V which is a reference voltage of the main control board 1700 and the like from the input + 9V, and this + 5V is input to the main control MPU 1700a and the like. Further, + 9V and + 18V are input to the power failure monitoring circuit 1700d through the hot-wire failure prevention circuit 1700f. The power failure monitoring circuit 1700d monitors the signs of the input power failure or instantaneous power failure of + 9V and + 9V. Here, the hot line failure prevention circuit will be described first, followed by the main control series regulator, the peripheral circuit of the main control board, various input / output signals on the main control board, and the power failure monitoring circuit. FIG. 149 is a circuit diagram showing a hot line failure prevention circuit, FIG. 150 is a circuit diagram showing a circuit of the main control board, and FIG. 151 is a circuit diagram showing a power failure monitoring circuit.

[9-1. Hot wire failure prevention circuit]
As shown in FIG. 149, the hot-wire failure prevention circuit 1700f includes a + 34V hot-wire failure prevention circuit 1700fa, a + 18V hot-wire failure prevention circuit 1700fb, and a + 9V hot-wire failure prevention circuit 1700fc. Of the + 34V, + 18V, and + 9V input to the live line fault circuit 1700f, + 18V is electrically connected in series with the resistor R100. The resistor R100 connected in series is electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the grounded electrolytic capacitor C100. The electrolytic capacitor C100 removes and smoothes ripples (alternating current component superimposed on voltage). The smoothed + 18V is input to the + 34V live line connection failure prevention circuit 1700fa, the + 18V live line failure prevention circuit 1700fb, and the + 9V live line failure prevention circuit 1700fc.

[9-1-1. + 34V live line failure prevention circuit]
The + 34V live line failure prevention circuit 1700fa includes a relay RL1 (in this embodiment, manufactured by Fujitsu Takamizawa: JV-18S-KT), a thermistor TH1 (in this embodiment, manufactured by Ishizuka Electronics: 5D2-11LC), an electrolytic capacitor C101, A capacitor C102 is provided. The relay RL1 incorporates a coil, iron piece, switch, etc. When a voltage is applied between the coil side input pins and a current flows through the coil, the iron piece moves and the switch is turned on (ON), and the switch side input The circuit between pins is connected. The first pin as the coil side input pin is grounded and the fourth pin as the coil side input pin is electrically connected to the above-described smoothed + 18V. As a result, a current flows through the coil and the switch is turned on. The 2nd pin and 3rd pin as switch side input pins are electrically connected in parallel with the thermistor TH1, and + 34V from the payout control board 715 is electrically connected to this one connected in parallel. The other is electrically connected to the grounded and grounded electrolytic capacitor C101. By this electrolytic capacitor C101, ripples (AC components convolved with voltage) are removed and smoothed. Further, noise is removed by the capacitor C102 grounded to the ground.

  Here, when the game board 4 shown in FIG. 1 is attached to the main body frame 3, the electrolytic capacitor C101 of the main control board 1700 mounted on the game board 4 is already discharged. When the game board 4 is attached to the main body frame 3 with the power switch 687 shown in FIG. 97 turned on, that is, with + 34V supplied from the payout control board 715, the board shown in FIG. The drawer connector 730 provided on the unit 650 side and the drawer connector 270 provided on the relay terminal plate 269 of the game board 4 shown in FIG. Inflow (referred to as “rush current”). At this time, as shown in FIG. 99, a contact 730a which is a + 34V voltage supply line of the drawer connector 730 provided on the board unit 650 side, and a terminal 270a which is a + 34V voltage supply line of the drawer connector 270 provided on the game board 4 side. Therefore, the contact 730a and the terminal 270a, which are + 34V voltage supply lines, are welded.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, the inrush current is reduced by the thermistor TH1 and charged by the electrolytic capacitor C101. Accordingly, the + 34V voltage supply line of the drawer connector 730 provided on the board unit 650 side and the game board 4 side, which are generated when the game board 4 is attached to the main body frame 3 with the power switch 687 turned on, are provided. Further, welding of the drawer connector 270 to the + 34V voltage supply line can be prevented. Thereby, even if the game board 4 is pushed into the main body frame 3, damage to the contact 730a and the terminal 270a, which are + 34V voltage supply lines due to welding, can be prevented. The characteristics of the thermistor TH1 in this embodiment are an initial resistance value of 5 ohms (Ω), a maximum capacity current of 4A, and a residual resistance value of 0.35Ω. When a current flows through the thermistor TH1, the thermistor TH1 generates heat. The resistance value changes. As a result, even if the relay RL1 does not operate, for example, when an inrush current flows through the thermistor TH1, its resistance value decreases and the thermistor TH1 itself is prevented from generating heat, thereby preventing the thermistor TH1 from being damaged. it can.

  Here, when a fixed resistance whose resistance value does not change, such as cement resistance, is used, it is necessary to use a large type of high power that can withstand heat generation. For this reason, it is difficult to dispose electronic components that malfunction due to the influence of heat in the vicinity of the fixed resistance, and it is necessary to increase the board size of the main control board 1700. On the other hand, when the thermistor TH1 whose resistance value changes with temperature is used, when an inrush current flows through the thermistor TH1, the resistance value decreases and the heat generation of the thermistor TH1 itself is suppressed. For this reason, an electronic component can be disposed in the vicinity of the thermistor TH1, and it is not necessary to increase the board size of the main control board 1700 with respect to the heat generated by the thermistor TH1. Note that the characteristics of the relay RL1 in this embodiment are an ON voltage of 13.5 V and an OFF voltage of 0.9 V, and the ON / OFF time of the switch built in the relay RL1 is the above-described resistance R100, capacitor C100, When the switch of relay RL1 is turned on, the inrush current has already been lowered and the resistance value is much smaller than that of the thermistor TH1 and flows through the switch of relay RL1. become.

[9-1-2. + 18V live line failure prevention circuit]
The + 18V live line failure prevention circuit 1700fb includes a relay RL2 (in this embodiment, manufactured by Fujitsu Takamizawa: JV-18S-KT), a thermistor TH2 (in this embodiment, manufactured by Ishizuka Electronics: 5D2-11LC), an electrolytic capacitor C103, The capacitor C104 is provided. The relay RL2 has the same configuration as the relay RL1, and when a voltage is applied between the coil-side input pins and a current flows through the coil, the iron piece moves and switches on (turns on), and between the switch-side input pins. The circuit is connected. The first pin as the coil side input pin is grounded and the fourth pin as the coil side input pin is electrically connected to the above-described smoothed + 18V. As a result, a current flows through the coil and the switch is turned on. The 2nd and 3rd pins as the switch side input pins are electrically connected in parallel with the thermistor TH2, and + 18V from the dispensing control board 715 is electrically connected to one of the parallel connections. The other is electrically connected to the grounded and grounded electrolytic capacitor C103. The electrolytic capacitor C103 removes and smoothes ripples (alternating current component convolved with voltage). Further, noise is removed by the capacitor C104 grounded.

  Here, when the game board 4 is attached to the main body frame 3, the electrolytic capacitor C103 of the main control board 1700 mounted on the game board 4 is already discharged. When the game board 4 is attached to the main body frame 3 with the power switch 687 turned on, that is, with + 18V being supplied from the payout control board 715, a drawer connector 730 provided on the board unit 650 side, The drawer connector 270 provided on the relay terminal plate 269 of the game board 4 is in an electrically conductive state, and an inrush current flows into the electrolytic capacitor C103 at once. At this time, an inrush current flows through a contact 730a which is a + 18V voltage supply line of the drawer connector 730 provided on the board unit 650 side and a terminal 270a which is a + 18V voltage supply line of the drawer connector 270 provided on the game board 4 side. Therefore, the contact 730a and the terminal 270a, which are + 18V voltage supply lines, are welded.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, the inrush current is reduced by the thermistor TH2 and charged by the electrolytic capacitor C103. As a result, the + 18V voltage supply line of the drawer connector 730 provided on the board unit 650 side, which is generated when the game board 4 is attached to the main body frame 3 with the power switch 687 turned on, and the game board 4 side are provided. Further, welding of the drawer connector 270 with the + 18V voltage supply line can be prevented. Thereby, even if the game board 4 is pushed into the main body frame 3, damage to the contact 730a and the terminal 270a which are + 18V voltage supply lines due to welding can be prevented. The characteristic of the thermistor TH2 in this embodiment is the same as the characteristic of the thermistor TH1 described above. When a current flows through the thermistor TH2, its resistance value changes as the thermistor TH2 generates heat. As a result, even when the relay RL2 does not operate, for example, when an inrush current flows through the thermistor TH2, the resistance value thereof decreases and the heat generation of the thermistor TH2 itself is suppressed, thereby preventing the thermistor TH2 from being damaged. it can.

  Here, when a fixed resistance whose resistance value does not change, such as cement resistance, is used, it is necessary to use a large type of high power that can withstand heat generation. For this reason, it is difficult to dispose electronic components that malfunction due to the influence of heat in the vicinity of the fixed resistance, and it is necessary to increase the board size of the main control board 1700. On the other hand, when the thermistor TH2 whose resistance value changes with temperature is used, when an inrush current flows through the thermistor TH2, the resistance value decreases and the heat generation of the thermistor TH2 itself is suppressed. For this reason, electronic components can be disposed in the vicinity of the thermistor TH2, and it is not necessary to increase the board size of the main control board 1700 with respect to the heat generated by the thermistor TH2. Note that the characteristics of the relay RL2 in the present embodiment are the same as the characteristics of the relay RL1 described above, and the inrush current has already been reduced when the switch of the relay RL2 is turned on, compared with the thermistor TH2. Therefore, the current flows through the switch of the relay RL2 having a very small resistance value.

[9-1-3. + 9V live line failure prevention circuit]
The hot wire failure prevention circuit 1700fc for + 9V includes relay RL3 (in this embodiment, manufactured by Fujitsu Takamizawa: JV-18S-KT), thermistor TH3 (in this embodiment, manufactured by Ishizuka Electronics: 5D2-11LC), electrolytic capacitor C1, The capacitor C2 is provided. The relay RL3 has the same configuration as the relays RL1 and RL2. When a voltage is applied between the coil side input pins and a current flows through the coil, the iron piece moves and the switch is turned on (ON), and the switch side input pin The circuit between them is connected. The first pin as the coil side input pin is grounded and the fourth pin as the coil side input pin is electrically connected to the above-described smoothed + 18V. As a result, a current flows through the coil and the switch is turned on. The second and third pins as the switch side input pins are electrically connected in parallel with the thermistor TH3, and one of the parallel connections is electrically connected to + 9V from the dispensing control board 715. The other is electrically connected to the grounded and grounded electrolytic capacitor C1. The electrolytic capacitor C1 removes and smoothes the ripple (the AC component convolved with the voltage). Further, noise is removed by the capacitor C2 grounded.

  Here, when the game board 4 is attached to the main body frame 3, the electrolytic capacitor C1 of the main control board 1700 mounted on the game board 4 is already discharged. When the game board 4 is attached to the main body frame 3 with the power switch 687 turned on, that is, with +9 V being supplied from the payout control board 715, a drawer connector 730 provided on the board unit 650 side, The drawer connector 270 provided on the relay terminal plate 269 of the game board 4 is in an electrically conductive state, and an inrush current flows into the electrolytic capacitor C1 at once. At this time, an inrush current flows through the contact 730a which is the + 9V voltage supply line of the drawer connector 730 provided on the board unit 650 side and the terminal 270a which is the + 9V voltage supply line of the drawer connector 270 provided on the game board 4 side. Therefore, the contact 730a and the terminal 270a, which are + 9V voltage supply lines, are welded.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, the inrush current is reduced by the thermistor TH3 and charged by the electrolytic capacitor C1. Accordingly, the + 9V voltage supply line of the drawer connector 730 provided on the board unit 650 side, which is generated when the game board 4 is attached to the main body frame 3 with the power switch 687 turned on, and the game board 4 side are provided. Further, welding of the drawer connector 270 to the + 9V voltage supply line can be prevented. Thereby, even if the game board 4 is pushed into the main body frame 3, damage to the contact 730a and the terminal 270a, which are + 9V voltage supply lines due to welding, can be prevented. The characteristics of the thermistor TH3 in the present embodiment are the same as those of the thermistors TH1 and TH2, and when a current flows through the thermistor TH3, the resistance value thereof changes as the thermistor TH3 generates heat. As a result, even if the relay RL3 does not operate, for example, when an inrush current flows through the thermistor TH3, the resistance value thereof decreases and the thermistor TH3 itself is prevented from generating heat, thereby preventing the thermistor TH2 from being damaged. it can.

  Here, when a fixed resistance whose resistance value does not change, such as cement resistance, is used, it is necessary to use a large type of high power that can withstand heat generation. For this reason, it is difficult to dispose electronic components that malfunction due to the influence of heat in the vicinity of the fixed resistance, and it is necessary to increase the board size of the main control board 1700. On the other hand, when the thermistor TH3 whose resistance value changes with temperature is used, when an inrush current flows through the thermistor TH3, the resistance value decreases and the heat generation of the thermistor TH3 itself is suppressed. For this reason, electronic components can be disposed in the vicinity of the thermistor TH3, and it is not necessary to increase the board size of the main control board 1700 with respect to the heat generated by the thermistor TH3. Note that the characteristics of the relay RL3 in the present embodiment are the same as the characteristics of the relays RL1 and RL2 described above, and the inrush current has already decreased when the switch of the relay RL3 is turned on, and the thermistor TH3. The resistance value is much smaller than that of the relay RL3.

[9-2. Main control series regulator]
As shown in FIG. 150, the main control board 1700 is reset as a peripheral circuit in addition to the main control MPU 1700a, the main control I / O port 1700b, the main control series regulator 1700c (in this embodiment, manufactured by ROHM: BA50BC0WT). Main control system reset IC1 that outputs a signal (in this embodiment, Renesas: M51953), main control crystal oscillator X1 that outputs a clock signal (in this embodiment, manufactured by Kyocera: EXO-3, 24 megahertz (MHz)) It is configured with.

  As shown in FIG. 150, main control series regulator 1700c is supplied with + 9V to the VCC terminal, which is the power supply input terminal, through hot line failure prevention circuit 1700fc for + 9V of hot line failure prevention circuit 1700f shown in FIG. ing. This + 9V is smoothed by removing ripples (AC component convoluted with voltage) by the ground (GND) and the grounded electrolytic capacitor C1 (same as the electrolytic capacitor C1 shown in FIG. 149). Further, noise generated between the power supply board 686 and the main control board 1700 is removed by the grounded capacitor C2 (same as the capacitor C2 shown in FIG. 149). In addition to the VCC terminal, the smoothed + 9V is also input to a CTL terminal that is a control terminal of the main control series regulator 1700c. The main control series regulator 1700c generates + 5V from + 9V input to the VCC terminal when + 9V is input to the CTL terminal, and outputs it from the OUT terminal which is an output terminal. A diode D1 (1SS133 in this embodiment) is provided between the OUT terminal and the VCC terminal, the anode terminal of the diode D1 and the OUT terminal are electrically connected, and the cathode terminal of the diode D1 and the VCC The terminal is electrically connected. When a reverse bias is applied between the VCC terminal and the OUT terminal, it is input to the VCC terminal side via the diode D1, thereby preventing destruction of the main control series regulator 1700c due to the reverse bias.

  The + 5V output from the OUT terminal is smoothed by removing the ripple by the electrolytic capacitor C3 grounded. The smoothed + 5V is input to the main control system reset IC1, the main control crystal oscillator X1, the main control MPU 1700a, the main control I / O port 1700b, and the like. Note that the GND terminal, which is a ground terminal, is grounded and the NC terminal is not electrically connected to the outside.

[9-3. Peripheral circuit of main control board]
[9-3-1. Main control system reset IC]
As shown in FIG. 150, + 5V output from the OUT terminal of the main control series regulator 1700c and smoothed is input to the power supply terminal of the main control system reset IC1. The main control system reset IC1 resets the main control MPU 1700a and the main control I / O port 1700b, and has a built-in delay circuit. The delay capacitor terminal of the main control system reset IC 1 is electrically connected to the grounded capacitor C4, and the delay time by the delay circuit can be set by the capacitance of the capacitor C4. . Specifically, when + 5V input to the power supply terminal reaches a threshold value (for example, 4.25V), the main control system reset IC 1 outputs a system reset signal from the output terminal after the delay time has elapsed.

  The output terminal of the main control system reset IC1 is electrically connected to the SRST terminal that is a reset terminal of the main control MPU 1700a and the RESETN terminal that is a reset terminal of the main control I / O port 1700b. The output terminal is an open collector output type, and is pulled up to +5 V by a pull-up resistor R1. The voltage raised to +5 V is smoothed by removing ripples by the capacitor C5 grounded and grounded (the capacitor C5 also serves as a low-pass filter). When the voltage input to the power supply terminal is larger than the threshold value, the output terminal is pulled up to + 5V by the pull-up resistor R1, and the logic becomes HI, and the SRST terminal of the main control MPU 1700a and the RESETN of the main control I / O port 1700b On the other hand, when the voltage input to the power supply terminal is smaller than the threshold value, the logic becomes LOW and is input to the SRST terminal of the main control MPU 1700a and the RESETN terminal of the main control I / O port 1700b. Since the SRST terminal of the main control MPU 1700a and the RESETN terminal of the main control I / O port 1700b are negative logic inputs, when the voltage input to the power supply terminal becomes smaller than the threshold value, the main control MPU 1700a and the main control I / O The O port 1700b is reset. Note that the power supply terminal is electrically connected to the grounded capacitor C6, and + 5V input to the power supply terminal is smoothed by removing ripples. The ground terminal is grounded with the grant, and the NC terminal is not electrically connected to the outside.

[9-3-2. Main control crystal oscillator]
As shown in FIG. 150, + 5V output from the OUT terminal of the main control series regulator 1700c and smoothed is input to the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control crystal oscillator X1. The VDD terminal is electrically connected to a grounded capacitor C7, and + 5V input to the VDD terminal is further smoothed by removing ripples. In addition to the VDD terminal, the smoothed + 5V is also input to the A terminal, B terminal, C terminal, and ST terminal which are output frequency selection terminals. The main control crystal oscillator X1 outputs a clock signal of 24 MHz from the F terminal which is an output terminal by inputting + 5V to these A terminal, B terminal, C terminal and ST terminal.

  The F terminal of the main control crystal oscillator X1 is electrically connected to the CLK terminal which is the clock terminal of the main control MPU 1700a and the CLK terminal which is the clock terminal of the main control I / O port 1700b, and a 24 MHz clock signal is input. Has been. Note that the GND terminal, which is a ground terminal, is grounded, and the D terminal that outputs the divided frequency of the F terminal is not electrically connected to the outside.

[9-4. Power supply created on the main control board]
As shown in FIG. 150, + 5V output from the OUT terminal of the main control series regulator 1700c and smoothed is the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1700a and the VCC which is the power supply terminal of the main control I / O port 1700b. Input to the terminal. The VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1700a is electrically connected to the capacitor C8 grounded and the VCC terminal of the main control I / O port 1700b is electrically connected to the capacitor C9 grounded to the VDD terminal. Further, + 5V input to the VCC terminal is further smoothed by removing ripples. The VSS terminal that is the ground terminal of the main control MPU 1700a is grounded to the ground, and the GND terminal that is the ground terminal of the main control I / O port 1700b is grounded to the ground. Further, + 5V output from the OUT terminal of the main control series regulator 1700c and smoothed is also input to the power failure monitoring circuit 1700d and the like.

[9-5. Various input / output signals of the main control board]
The operation of the RAM clear switch 268a shown in FIG. 140 (in this embodiment, manufactured by OMRON: B3F-1052) is input to the main control I / O port 1700b as a detection signal.

[9-5-1. Detection signal from RAM clear switch]
As shown in FIG. 150, the third pin as the output pin of the RAM clear switch 268a is electrically connected to the input pin PE5 that is the fifth pin of the input port PE of the main control I / O port 1700b. Since the input pin PE5 is a negative logic input, the voltage between the third pin of the RAM clear switch 268a and the input pin PE5 of the main control I / O port 1700b is pulled up to + 5V by the pull-up resistor R2. The voltage raised to +5 V is smoothed by removing ripples by the capacitor C10 grounded (the capacitor C10 also serves as a low-pass filter). When the RAM clear switch 268a is not operated, it is pulled up to + 5V by the pull-up resistor R2 and the logic becomes HI and is input to the input pin PE5 of the main control I / O port 1700b, while when the RAM clear switch 268a is operated. The logic becomes LOW and is input to the input pin PE5 of the main control I / O port 1700b. Note that the first and second pins of the RAM clear switch 268a are grounded and the fourth pin is electrically connected to the third pin.

[9-5-2. Other various input / output signals]
Serial data from the payout control board 715 shown in FIG. 140 is input to the RX terminal, which is a serial data input terminal of the main control MPU 1700a, as a payer serial data reception signal. On the other hand, the TX terminal which is a serial data output terminal of the main control MPU 1700a outputs serial data to be transmitted to the payout control board 715 as a main payout serial data transmission signal.

  For example, each input pin of the input port PE and the input port PD of the main control I / O port 1700b receives the detection signal from the RAM clear switch 268a in the input pin PE5 described above, and the input pin PE6 in FIG. The indicated power failure notice signal is input, and the payer ACK signal from the payout control board 715 is input to the input pin PE7 to notify the completion of the normal reception of the main pay serial data reception signal. A detection signal from the start port switch 1360 is input.

  On the other hand, the main control MPU 1700a sends a power failure warning signal from the output pins PA to PC of the main control I / O port 1700b via the data bus, for example, from the output pin PB5 to the power failure monitoring circuit 1700d shown in FIG. A power failure clear signal to be cleared is output, a main payment ACK signal is transmitted from the output pin PB6 to notify the completion of normal reception of the payer serial data reception signal, and the sub-integration shown in FIG. 140 is output from the output pins PC0 to PC5. Various commands are output to the substrate 1740, and a drive signal from the output pin PB1 to the open / close blade solenoid 1390 is output.

  The data input / output terminals D0 to D7 of the main control I / O port 1700b and the data input / output terminals D0 to D7 of the main control MPU 1700a exchange various information and various signals via the data bus. The main control MPU 1700a reads various signals from the input ports PE and PD via the data bus, and outputs various signals from the output ports PA to PC via this data bus.

[9-6. Power failure monitoring circuit]
Next, the power failure monitoring circuit 1700d shown in FIG. 147 will be described. As shown in FIG. 147, + 34V, + 18V and + 9V are supplied to the main control board 1700 via the payout control board 715, and + 18V and + 9V are input to the power failure monitoring circuit 1700d. The power failure monitoring circuit 1700d monitors + 18V and + 9V power failure or instantaneous power failure signs. When a power failure or instantaneous power failure sign is detected, a power failure notification signal is provided as a power failure notification in addition to the main control MPU 1700a. 715 and the sub-integrated board 1740. The power failure monitoring circuit 1700d receives a radio wave detection signal from the radio wave detection switch 1700e shown in FIG. 147, and when this radio wave detection signal is input, in addition to the main control MPU 1700a, a payout control is performed. Output to the substrate 715 and the sub-integrated substrate 1740. First, the configuration of the power failure monitoring circuit will be described, and then the + 18V power failure or instantaneous power failure monitoring, the + 9V power failure or instantaneous power failure monitoring, and the radio wave detection signal monitoring from the radio wave detection switch will be described. FIG. 151 is a circuit diagram showing a power failure monitoring circuit.

[9-6-1. Configuration of power failure monitoring circuit]
As shown in FIG. 151, the power failure monitoring circuit 1700d includes a stabilized power supply circuit IC20 (in this embodiment, manufactured by NEC: μPC1093), a comparator IC21 (in this embodiment, manufactured by New Japan Radio: NJM2903, an open collector output type). ), Inverter IC22 (in this embodiment, manufactured by Tokyo Shibaura Electric: TC74HC05, open collector output type), D type flip-flop IC23 (in this embodiment, manufactured by Tokyo Shibaura Electric: TC74HC74), transistor TR20 (in this embodiment, 2SC1815).

  The REF terminal that is the reference voltage input terminal and the K terminal that is the cathode terminal of the stabilized power supply circuit IC20 are electrically connected to + 5V via the resistor R20, and the current input to the REF terminal by the resistor R20 Limited. The K terminal outputs a reference voltage Vref (in this embodiment, 2.495 V is set) as a comparison reference voltage for the comparator IC21. The reference voltage Vref is smoothed by removing ripples (AC component convoluted with the voltage) by the capacitor C20 grounded and grounded (the capacitor C20 also serves as a low-pass filter). Note that the A terminal, which is the anode terminal of the stabilized power circuit IC20, is grounded to the ground (GND).

  The comparator IC21 includes two voltage comparison circuits, one of which (IC21A) is used for comparing the + 18V monitoring voltage V1 with the reference voltage Vref, and the + 18V monitoring voltage V1 is applied to the + terminal. The reference voltage Vref is input to the negative terminal. On the other hand, the remaining one (IC21B) is used to compare the + 9V monitoring voltage V2 with the reference voltage Vref, the + 9V monitoring voltage V2 is input to the + terminal, and the reference voltage Vref is input to the − terminal. Has been. These comparison results are input to the D-type flip-flop IC23. The D-type flip-flop IC23 includes two D-type flip-flop circuits, one of which (IC23A) is used in this embodiment. Note that + 5V input to the Vcc terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the comparator IC21, is smoothed by removing ripples from the capacitor C21 grounded. Further, + 5V input to the D-type flip-flop IC23 is smoothed by removing ripples by a capacitor C22 grounded to the ground.

[9-6-2. + 18V power outage or instantaneous power failure monitoring]
As described above, the monitoring of the + 18V power failure or instantaneous power failure is performed by the IC 21A of the comparator IC21 comparing the + 18V monitoring voltage V1 with the reference voltage Vref. 151, as shown in FIG. 151, the voltage is distributed by the resistance ratio of the resistors R21 and R22, the ripple is removed by the capacitor C23 grounded and grounded, and the voltage is input to the + terminal of the IC 21A (the capacitor C23 is It also plays a role as a low-pass filter). The values of the resistors R21 and R22 are preset to the power failure detection voltage V1pf (which is set to 12.53V in the present embodiment) when the voltage starts to drop from + 18V when + 18V has a power failure or a momentary power failure. The monitoring voltage V1 of + 18V is set to be the same value as the reference voltage Vref. When the + 18V voltage is higher than the power failure detection voltage V1pf, the + 18V monitoring voltage V1 becomes higher than the reference voltage Vref, and as a result, the logic becomes LOW. Therefore, since the comparator IC21 is an open collector output type, it is pulled up to + 5V by the pull-up resistor R23, the logic becomes HI, the ripple is removed by the capacitor C24 grounded to the ground, and the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop IC23 (Capacitor C24 also serves as a low-pass filter). Since this PR terminal is a negative logic input, a power failure warning signal is output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop IC23, to the main control I / O port 1700b when the + 18V monitoring voltage V1 is greater than the reference voltage Vref. Not.

  On the other hand, when the + 18V voltage is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf, the + 18V monitoring voltage V1 becomes smaller than the reference voltage Vref, and as a result, the logic becomes HI. For this reason, since the comparator IC21 is an open collector output type, the logic becomes LOW, the ripple is removed by the capacitor C24 grounded and grounded, and the signal is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D type flip-flop IC23. Since the PR terminal is a negative logic input, a power failure warning signal is output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop IC23, to the main control I / O port 1700b when the + 18V monitoring voltage V1 is smaller than the reference voltage Vref. Is done.

[9-6-3. Monitoring of + 9V power outage or instantaneous power failure]
As described above, the + 9V power failure or instantaneous power failure is monitored by the IC 21B of the comparator IC21 comparing the + 9V monitoring voltage V2 with the reference voltage Vref. 151, as shown in FIG. 151, the voltage is distributed according to the resistance ratio of the resistors R24 and R25, the ripple is removed by the capacitor C25 grounded and grounded, and the voltage is input to the + terminal of the IC 21B (the capacitor C25 is It also plays a role as a low-pass filter). The values of the resistors R24 and R25 are set to a power failure detection voltage V2pf (in this embodiment, set to 7.64V) preset when the voltage starts to drop from + 9V when + 9V is interrupted or momentarily stopped. The monitoring voltage V2 of + 9V is set to be the same value as the reference voltage Vref. When the voltage of + 9V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V2pf, the monitoring voltage V2 of + 9V becomes higher than the reference voltage Vref, and as a result, the logic becomes LOW. Therefore, since the comparator IC21 is an open collector output type, it is pulled up to + 5V by the pull-up resistor R23, the logic becomes HI, the ripple is removed by the capacitor C24 grounded to the ground, and the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop IC23 Is input to the PR terminal. Since the PR terminal is a negative logic input, a power failure warning signal is output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop IC23, to the main control I / O port 1700b when the + 9V monitoring voltage V2 is greater than the reference voltage Vref. Not.

  On the other hand, when the voltage of + 9V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf, the monitoring voltage V2 of + 9V becomes smaller than the reference voltage Vref, and as a result, the logic becomes HI. For this reason, since the comparator IC21 is an open collector output type, the logic becomes LOW, the ripple is removed by the capacitor C24 grounded and grounded, and the signal is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D type flip-flop IC23. Since the PR terminal is a negative logic input, a power failure warning signal is output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop IC23, to the main control I / O port 1700b when the + 9V monitoring voltage V2 is smaller than the reference voltage Vref. Is done.

  Note that a power failure clear signal is input from the main control MPU 1700a to the CLR terminal, which is a clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop IC23, via the main control I / O port 1700b. Since the CLR terminal is a negative logic input, the power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 1700a is input to the CLR terminal with the logic being LOW via the main control I / O port 1700b. When the power failure clear signal is input to the CLR terminal, the D type flip-flop IC23 cancels the latch state. At this time, the logic input to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal is inverted and the output terminal is inverted. Is output from the 1Q terminal.

  On the other hand, when the output of the power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 1700a is stopped, the logic becomes HI via the main control I / O port 1700b and is input to the CLR terminal. When the power failure clear signal is not input to the CLR terminal, the D-type flip-flop IC23 sets the latch state, and latches the state where the logic is LOW at the PR terminal. Note that the 1D terminal that is the D input terminal, the 1CK terminal that is the clock input terminal, and the GND terminal that is the ground terminal are grounded. Further, the negative logic 1Q terminal obtained by inverting the logic of the 1Q terminal is not electrically connected to the outside.

[9-6-4. Monitoring the radio wave detection signal from the radio wave detection switch]
Next, monitoring of a radio wave detection signal from the radio wave detection switch 1700e will be described. The radio wave detection switch 1700e is electrically connected to + 18V via a resistor 26, and this voltage is input to the base of the transistor TR20 via the radio wave detection switch 1700e and the resistor 27, and between the resistor 27 and the transistor TR20 base. A resistor 28 grounded to the ground is electrically connected. The emitter of the transistor TR20 is grounded and the collector of the transistor TR20 is pulled up to + 5V by the pull-up resistor R29 and is electrically connected to the input terminal of the inverter IC22. This inverter IC22 includes six inverter circuits, one of which (IC22A) is used in this embodiment. Note that + 5V input to the Vcc terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the inverter IC22, is smoothed by removing ripples by the capacitor C26 grounded.

  The values of the resistors R27 and R28 are set so that the transistor TR20 is turned on when the radio wave detection switch 1700e does not output a radio wave detection signal, that is, when a high frequency is not irradiated. When the transistor TR20 is ON, a current flows from the collector of the transistor TR20 to the emitter of the transistor TR20, so that the logic becomes LOW and is input to the input terminal of the inverter IC22 (IC22A). Thus, as described above, since the inverter IC 22 is an open collector output type, it is pulled up to + 5V by the pull-up resistor 23, the logic becomes HI, and the ripple is removed by the capacitor C24 grounded to the ground, so that the D type flip-flop Is input to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal of the IC 23. Since the PR terminal is a negative logic input, when the radio wave detection switch 1700e does not output a radio wave detection signal, that is, when a high frequency is not irradiated, the main control I / O is output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop IC23. A power failure warning signal is not output to the O port 1700b.

  On the other hand, when the radio wave detection switch 1700e outputs a radio wave detection signal, that is, when high-frequency radiation is applied, the transistor TR20 is turned off. In the state where the transistor TR20 is OFF, no current flows from the collector of the transistor TR20 to the emitter of the transistor TR20. Therefore, the transistor TR20 is pulled up to + 5V by the pull-up resistor R29 and becomes logic HI and is input to the input terminal of the inverter IC22 (IC22A). The Thus, as described above, since the inverter IC22 is an open collector output type, the logic becomes LOW, the ripple is removed by the capacitor C24 grounded and grounded, and the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D type flip-flop IC23 is used. Entered. Since the PR terminal is a negative logic input, when the radio wave detection switch 1700e outputs a radio wave detection signal, that is, when a high frequency is irradiated, the main control I / O is output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop IC23. A power failure warning signal is output to the O port 1700b.

  When the radio wave detection switch 1700e is removed from the main control board 1700, the transistor TR20 is turned off, so that no current flows from the collector of the transistor TR20 to the emitter of the transistor TR20. As a result, the logic becomes HI and is input to the input terminal of the inverter IC22 (IC22A). Thus, as described above, since the inverter IC 22 is an open collector output type, it is pulled up to + 5V by the pull-up resistor 23, the logic becomes HI, and the ripple is removed by the capacitor C24 grounded to the ground so that the D type flip-flop The signal is input to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal of the IC 23. Since this PR terminal is a negative logic input, when the radio wave detection switch 1700e is removed from the main control board 1700, a power failure warning signal is output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop IC23 to the main control I / O port 1700b. Is output. Thus, when the radio wave detection switch 1700e is removed from the main control board 1700, a power failure warning signal is always output.

[10. Dispensing control board circuit]
Next, the circuit of the payout control board 715 shown in FIG. 140 will be described. As shown in FIG. 147, the payout control board 715 is supplied with DC power supplies + 34V, + 18V, and + 9V from the power supply board 686. This + 9V is input to the payout control series regulator 715a. The payout control series regulator 715a creates + 5V, which is a reference voltage for the payout control board 715, from the input + 9V, and this + 5V is input to the payout control MPU 1710a. The payout control board 715 includes a payout control unit 1710, a firing control unit 1720, and the like as shown in FIG. Here, the payout control series regulator will be described first, followed by the circuit of the payout control unit, the power source created by the payout control board, various input / output signals on the payout control board, and the circuit of the launch control part. 152 is a circuit diagram showing a circuit and the like of the payout control unit, FIG. 153 is a circuit diagram showing an equivalent circuit of the drive IC, and FIG. 154 is a circuit diagram showing an input circuit such as an error release switch, and FIG. Is an input / output diagram showing various input / output signals to / from the main control board and various output signals to the external terminal board, FIG. 156 is a circuit diagram showing an input circuit of the launch control unit, and FIG. 157 is a drawing of the payout control board. FIG. 158 is a circuit diagram showing a transmission circuit and the like of the launch control unit.

[10-1. Dispensing control series regulator IC]
As shown in FIG. 152, the payout control series regulator IC 715a (Rohm: BA50BC0WT in this embodiment) has + 9V input to the VCC terminal which is a power input terminal. This + 9V is supplied by the power supply board 686. When the + 9V is input to the payout control board 715, the ripple (the AC component convolved with the voltage) is first removed by the ground (GND) and the grounded electrolytic capacitor C50. To be smoothed. Further, noise generated between the power supply board 686 and the payout control board 715 is removed by the capacitor C51 grounded. In addition to the VCC terminal, the smoothed + 9V is also input to a CTL terminal that is a control terminal of the payout control series regulator IC 715a. The payout control series regulator IC 715a generates + 5V from + 9V input to the VCC terminal when + 9V is input to the CTL terminal, and outputs it from the OUT terminal which is an output terminal. A diode D50 (1SS133 in this embodiment) is provided between the OUT terminal and the VCC terminal, the anode terminal of the diode D50 and the OUT terminal are electrically connected, and the cathode terminal of the diode D50 and the VCC are connected. The terminal is electrically connected. When a reverse bias is applied between the VCC terminal and the OUT terminal, the voltage is input to the VCC terminal via the diode D50, thereby preventing the payout control series regulator IC 715a from being destroyed by the reverse bias.

  The + 5V output from the OUT terminal is smoothed by removing the ripple by the electrolytic capacitor C52 connected to the ground. The smoothed + 5V is input to the payout control unit 1710, the firing control unit 1720, and the like. Note that the GND terminal, which is a ground terminal, is grounded and the NC terminal is not electrically connected to the outside.

[10-2. Circuit of payout control unit]
As shown in FIG. 152, the payout control unit 1710 includes a payout control MPU 1710a, a payout control I / O port 1710b, an external WDT 1710c (in this embodiment, manufactured by Mitsumi: MM1075XD), a payout motor drive circuit 1710d, and a peripheral circuit. As shown, the payout control crystal oscillator X50 (in the present embodiment, manufactured by Epson Toyocom: SG-531P, 8 megahertz (MHz)) is configured.

[10-2-1. External WDT (external watchdog timer)]
As shown in FIG. 152, +5 V output from the OUT terminal of the payout control series regulator IC 715a and smoothed is input to the Vcc terminal of the external WDT 1710c. The external WDT 1710c resets the payout control MPU 1710a and has a built-in watchdog timer. The external WDT 1710c has a function of monitoring the voltage of + 5V input to the Vcc terminal and a function of monitoring whether or not the payout control MPU 1710a is operating normally. The + 5V input to the Vcc terminal. When the voltage reaches the threshold value (in this embodiment, it is set to 4.2 V), a reset signal is output from the negative logic RESET terminal or the payout control from the payout control MPU 1710a to the CK terminal of the external WDT 1710c. If the external WDT clear signal is not input within the clear signal release time via the I / O port 1710b, a reset signal is output from the negative logic RESET terminal.

  The TC terminal of the external WDT 1710c is electrically connected to a grounded capacitor C53, and the RCT terminal of the external WDT 1710c is electrically connected to a pull-up resistor R50 raised to + 5V. The clear signal release time described above can be set by the capacitance of the capacitor C53 and the resistance value of the pull-up resistor R50. In the present embodiment, a time 35 ms (= 1.75 ms × 20 times) corresponding to 20 interrupt timers (1.75 ms) of the payout control MPU 1710a is set as the clear signal release time.

  The negative logic RESET terminal of the external WDT 1710c is electrically connected to the RST0 terminal that is the reset terminal of the payout control MPU 1710a and the RESETN terminal that is the reset terminal of the payout control I / O port 1710b. The negative logic RESET terminal is an open collector output type, and is pulled up to + 5V by a pull-up resistor R51. The voltage raised to + 5V is smoothed by removing ripples by the capacitor C54 connected to the ground (the capacitor C54 also serves as a low-pass filter). The negative logic RESET terminal is pulled up to + 5V by the pull-up resistor R50 when the voltage input to the Vcc terminal is larger than the threshold value, and the logic becomes HI, and the RST0 terminal and the payout control I / O port 1710b of the payout control MPU 1710a. On the other hand, when the voltage input to the power supply terminal is smaller than the threshold value, the logic becomes LOW and is input to the RST0 terminal of the payout control MPU 1710a and the RESETN terminal of the payout control I / O port 1710b. .

  The negative logic RESET terminal is pulled up to + 5V by the pull-up resistor R51 when the external WDT clear signal input to the CK terminal is switched from ON to OFF within the clear signal release time and the external WDT clear signal is released. Becomes HI and is input to the RST0 terminal of the payout control MPU 1710a and the RESETN terminal of the payout control I / O port 1710b, while the external WDT clear signal input to the CK terminal remains ON within the clear signal release time. When the WDT clear signal is not released, the logic becomes LOW and is input to the RST0 terminal of the payout control MPU 1710a and the RESETN terminal of the payout control I / O port 1710b.

  Since the RST0 terminal of the payout control MPU 1710a and the RESETN terminal of the payout control I / O port 1710b are negative logic inputs, the voltage input to the Vcc terminal is less than the threshold value or the external input to the CK terminal When the external WDT clear signal is not released while the WDT clear signal is ON within the clear signal release time, the payout control MPU 1710a and the payout control I / O port 1710b are reset. Note that a capacitor C55 grounded to the ground is electrically connected to the Vs terminal of the external WDT 1710c, and a capacitor C56 grounded to the ground is electrically connected to the Vcc terminal. + 5V input to the Vcc terminal by the capacitor C56 is smoothed by removing ripples. The GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the external WDT 1710c, is grounded with the grant, and the positive logic RESET terminal of the external WDT 1710c is not electrically connected to the outside.

[10-2-2. Dispensing control crystal oscillator]
As shown in FIG. 152, + 5V output from the OUT terminal of the payout control series regulator IC 715a and smoothed is input to the VCC terminal which is the power supply terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator X50. This VCC terminal is electrically connected to a capacitor C57 that is grounded and grounded, and + 5V input to the VCC terminal is further smoothed by removing ripples. In addition to the VCC terminal, the smoothed + 5V is also input to the OE terminal which is an output permission (Output Enable) terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator X50. The payout control crystal oscillator X50 outputs an 8 MHz clock signal from the OUT terminal, which is an output terminal, when +5 V is input to its OE terminal.

  The OUT terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator X50 is electrically connected to the MCLK terminal that is the clock terminal of the payout control MPU 1710a and the CLK terminal that is the clock terminal of the payout control I / O port 1710b. It is input to the control MPU 1710a and the payout control I / O port 1710b.

[10-2-3. Dispensing motor drive circuit]
As shown in FIG. 152, the payout motor drive circuit 1710d includes a drive IC 50 (in this embodiment, manufactured by Tokyo Shibaura Electric: MP4303). This drive IC 50 includes four Darlington power transistors. In this embodiment, when a discharge motor drive signal is input to the base terminal with the emitter terminal grounded, the drive signal is an excitation signal from the corresponding collector terminal. A drive pulse is output.

  As shown in FIG. 152, + 34V supplied from the power supply board 686 is input to the cathode terminal of the drive IC 50 via the Zener diode ZD51 (HZ36BPTK-E in this embodiment). The anode terminal of the Zener diode ZD51 is electrically connected to + 34V, and the cathode terminal of the Zener diode ZD51 is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the drive IC 50. + 34V input to the cathode terminal of the drive IC 50 serves as a drive power source for the payout motor 465. The base terminal of the drive IC 50 is electrically connected to the output pins PB0 to PB3 of the output port PB of the payout control I / O port 1710b, and corresponds to the payout motor drive signal output from the output pins PB0 to PB3. The drive pulse as an excitation signal from the collector terminal that performs the respective phases (/ B phase, B phase, A) of the payout motor 465 via the resistors R52 to R55, the prize ball unit terminal 717, and the prize ball unit relay terminal plate 480 Phase, / A phase). These drive pulses are performed by switching excitation currents that flow through the phases (/ B phase, B phase, A phase, / A phase) of the dispensing motor 465, and rotate the dispensing motor 465. Note that a back electromotive force is generated when the drive pulse (excitation signal) of each phase (/ B phase, B phase, A phase, / A phase) is cut off by this switching. When the counter electromotive force exceeds the withstand voltage of the drive IC 50, the drive IC 50 is damaged, so that the cathode terminal of the drive IC 50 and the cathode terminal of the Zener diode ZD51 are electrically connected as protection.

[10-2-3 (a). Heat absorbed by drive IC]
As described above, the drive IC 50 includes four Darlington power transistors. In the present embodiment, when the emitter terminal is grounded to the ground and a payout motor drive signal is input to the base terminal, the corresponding collector terminal A drive pulse, which is an excitation signal, is output. As shown in FIG. 153, the drive IC 50C includes Darlington power transistors PTr1-PTr4 and flyback voltage absorption diodes FBD1-FBD4 built in the same package.

  The Darlington power transistors PTr1 to PTr4 are formed into chips by electrically connecting two Darlington-connected transistors, resistors, and diodes. The collector terminals of the Darlington power transistors PTr1-PTr4 are electrically connected to flyback voltage absorbing diodes FBD1-FBD4, one of which is grounded with the ground (GND). The flyback voltage absorbing diodes FBD1 to FBD4 are counter electromotive forces generated when the drive pulse (excitation signal) is interrupted to each phase (/ B phase, B phase, A phase, / A phase) of the payout motor 465. Is converted to heat to protect the Darlington power transistors PTr1 to PTr4, and the flyback voltage absorption diodes FBD1 and FBD2 are paired into a chip, and the flyback voltage absorption diodes FBD3 and FBD4 Are paired as a chip. As described above, the package of the drive IC 50 has the heat generated by the Darlington power transistors PTr1 to PTr4 that output drive pulses (excitation signals) to each phase (/ B phase, B phase, A phase, / A phase) of the payout motor 465. , And the heat generated by the flyback voltage absorbing diodes FBD1 to FBD4 that convert the back electromotive force from each phase (/ B phase, B phase, A phase, / A phase) of the payout motor 465 into heat, The absorbed heat is released to the outside air (around the drive IC 50).

  However, as described above, the payout control board box 655 for storing the payout control board 715, the power supply board box 653 for storing the power supply board 686 which is the largest heat source of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the like are provided on the rear surface of the frame board holder 651. It is attached to the side in the longitudinal direction. For this reason, the payout control board 715 absorbs heat generated from the power supply board 686. Also, the cover body 711 of the payout control board box 655 is exposed in the pachinko island equipment, and the pachinko island equipment is lined up behind the other pachinko gaming machines, so the power board of the pachinko gaming machine The temperature in the pachinko island facility is high due to heat generated from various control boards.

  As described above, even when the package of the drive IC 50 absorbs heat generated by the Darlington power transistors PTr1 to PTr4 and the flyback voltage absorption diodes FBD1 to FBD4, the temperature around the drive IC 50, that is, the outside air temperature is high. Since the efficiency of releasing the absorbed heat to the outside air is reduced, heat is stored in the package of the drive IC 50. Then, when the temperature of the package of the drive IC 50 increases and the junction temperature of the Darlington power transistors PTr1 to PTr4 increases to the junction temperature, the Darlington power transistors PTr1 to PTr4 fail.

[10-2-3 (b). Order of output of dispensing motor drive signal]
Therefore, in this embodiment, the order of drive pulses (excitation signals) output to each phase (/ B phase, B phase, A phase, / A phase) of the payout motor 465 is the A phase, B phase, / A phase. The payout motor drive signal is input to the base terminal of the drive IC 50 so as to be in the / B phase. Thereby, the order in which the flyback voltage absorbing diodes FBD1 to FBD4 convert the back electromotive force from each phase (/ B phase, B phase, A phase, / A phase) of the payout motor 465 into heat is also FBD1, FBD3. , FBD2 and FBD4. Then, the above-described chip in which the flyback voltage absorbing diodes FBD1 and FBD2 are paired and the chip in which the flyback voltage absorbing diodes FBD3 and FBD4 are paired alternately generate heat. As described above, when the heat is generated alternately and the order of the drive pulses (excitation signals) output to each phase (/ B phase, B phase, A phase, / A phase) of the payout motor 465 is the A phase, the / A phase. , B phase and / B phase, that is, flyback voltage absorption diodes FBD1 to FBD4 convert back electromotive force from each phase (/ B phase, B phase, A phase, / A phase) of the discharge motor 465 into heat. Compared with the case where FBD1, FBD2, FBD3 and FBD4 are used as the order in which they are performed, when the heat is generated alternately, the flyback voltage absorbing diodes FBD1 and FBD2 are paired to generate heat or flyback voltage absorption. Heat generation of the chip in which the diodes FBD3 and FBD4 are paired can be suppressed to a small level, and it can contribute to a reduction in temperature rise of the package of the drive IC 50. Therefore, failure of the Darlington power transistors PTr1 to PTr4 due to heat can be prevented.

  In this embodiment, the order of drive pulses (excitation signals) output to each phase (/ B phase, B phase, A phase, / A phase) of the payout motor 465 is the A phase, B phase, / A phase. Although programmed to be in the / B phase, for example, the 4th pin and the 9th pin, which are the collector terminals of the drive IC 50 shown in FIG. 152, are replaced with each other on the prize ball unit terminal 717 side. By wiring in advance, the order of drive pulses (excitation signals) to be output to each phase (/ B phase, B phase, A phase, / A phase) of the payout motor 465 can be set as A phase, / A phase, B Even if programmed to be in the phase B and phase B, the order of the prize ball unit terminal 717 is B phase, A phase, A phase, and / B phase, and the flyback voltage absorbing diodes FBD3 and FBD4 are paired. Chips and flyback A tip voltage absorbing diode FBD1 and FBD2 becomes a pair, but can generate heat alternately.

[10-3. Power supply created with payout control board]
As shown in FIG. 152, + 5V output from the OUT terminal of the payout control series regulator IC 715a is smoothed to VDD, which is the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 1710a, and VCC, which is the power supply terminal of the payout control I / O port 1710b. Have been entered. The VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 1710a is electrically connected to the capacitor C58 grounded and the VCC terminal of the payout control I / O port 1710b is electrically connected to the capacitor C59 grounded to the VDD terminal. Further, + 5V input to the VCC terminal is further smoothed by removing ripples. The VSS terminal, which is the ground terminal of the payout control MPU 1710a, is grounded, and the GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the payout control I / O port 1710b, is grounded. Further, +5 V output from the OUT terminal of the payout control series regulator IC 715a and smoothed is also input to the firing control unit 1720 and the like.

[10-4. Various input / output signals on the payout control board]
[10-4-1. Various input / output signals of payout control I / O port]
The operation of the error release switch 1731 (in the present embodiment, manufactured by Alps Electric: SKHHDGA010) and the operation of the ball removal switch 1732 (in the present embodiment, manufactured by Alps Electric: SKHHDAA010) are sent to the payout control I / O port 1710b as detection signals. Have been entered.

  Here, when the error LED indicator 1730 shown in FIG. 140 displays an operation error state such as a broken ball, a broken ball, a prize ball stock (with unpaid portion), a connection abnormality, etc., an error release switch 1731 is set. In operation, voice guidance is transmitted from the speaker 34 shown in FIG. 140 to inform the user of an error canceling method according to the operation error state, and the operation error state is canceled according to the instruction. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed in the hall and moved, or when the above-described dust collected in the prize ball tank 400 and the tank rail member 410 (for example, powder from which the game balls are peeled off) is removed. In this manner, the ball removal switch 1732 is operated to discharge the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 400, the tank rail member 410, and the like to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

[10-4-1 (a). Detection signal from error release switch]
As shown in FIG. 152, the first pin as the output pin of the error release switch 1731 is electrically connected to the input pin PD5 which is the fifth pin of the input port PD of the payout control I / O port 1710b. Since the input pin PD5 is a negative logic input, the voltage between the first pin of the error release switch 1731 and the input pin PD5 of the payout control I / O port 1710b is pulled up to + 5V by the pull-up resistor R56. The voltage raised to + 5V is smoothed by removing ripples by the capacitor C60 grounded and grounded (the capacitor C60 also serves as a low-pass filter). When the error release switch 1731 is not operated, the error release detection signal whose logic is HI is pulled up to + 5V by the pull-up resistor R56 is input to the input pin PD5 of the payout control I / O port 1710b, while the error release switch 1731. Is operated, an error release detection signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input pin PD5 of the payout control I / O port 1710b.

[10-4-1 (b). Detection signal from ball removal switch]
As shown in FIG. 152, the first pin as the output pin of the ball removal switch 1732 is electrically connected to the input pin PD2 which is the second pin of the input port PD of the payout control I / O port 1710b. Since the input pin PD2 is a negative logic input, the voltage between the first pin of the ball removal switch 1732 and the input pin PD2 of the payout control I / O port 1710b is pulled up to + 5V by the pull-up resistor R57. The voltage raised to + 5V is smoothed by removing ripples by the capacitor C61 grounded and grounded (the capacitor C61 also serves as a low-pass filter). When the ball removal switch 1732 is not operated, a ball removal detection signal that has been pulled up to +5 V by the pull-up resistor R57 and whose logic has become HI is input to the input pin PD2 of the payout control I / O port 1710b, while the ball removal switch 1732 Is operated, the ball removal detection signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input pin PD2 of the payout control I / O port 1710b.

[10-4-1 (c). Other various input / output signals]
Serial data from the main control board 1700 shown in FIG. 140 is input to the RXD terminal as a serial data input terminal of the payout control I / O port 1710b as a main payout serial data reception signal. On the other hand, serial data to be transmitted to the main control board 1700 from the TXD terminal which is a serial data output terminal of the payout control I / O port 1710b is output as a payer serial data transmission signal.

  For example, the input pin PD5 and the input port PE of the payout control I / O port 1710b have the above-described input pin PD5 to which the error release detection signal from the error release switch 1731 is input to the input pin PD5, and the input pin PD2 to the input pin PD2. A ball removal detection signal from the ball removal switch 1732 is input, and a main payment ACK signal from the main control board 1700 is input to the input pin PD7 to notify the completion of normal reception of the payer serial data reception signal. A detection signal from the full switch 545 is input to the pin PD1.

  On the other hand, the output pins of the output ports PA to PC of the payout control I / O port 1710b, for example, output payout motor drive signals from the output pins PB0 to PB5, and normality of the main pay serial data reception signal described above from the output pin PC3. A payer ACK signal indicating the completion of reception is output, and an external WDT clear signal is output from the output pin PC5 to the external WDT 1710c.

  The data input / output terminals D0 to D7 of the payout control I / O port 1710b and the data input / output terminals D0 to D7 of the payout control MPU 1710a exchange various information and various signals via the data bus. The payout control MPU 1710a reads various signals from the input ports PD and PE via the data bus, and outputs various signals from the output ports PA to PC via this data bus.

[10-4-2. Detection signal from door frame release switch and body frame release switch]
As described above, the main body frame 3 includes the door frame opening switch 3a for detecting whether or not the door frame 5 is open from the main body frame 3, and the main body frame 3 being opened from the outer frame 2. And a main body frame opening switch 3b for detecting whether or not. These detection signals are input to the payout control board 715 as shown in FIG.

[10-4-2 (a). Detection signal from door frame opening switch]
The door frame opening switch 3a uses a normally closed type (normally closed (NC)), and the switch is turned on (conductive) in a state where the door frame 5 is opened from the main body frame 3, and the door frame 5 is connected to the main body frame 3. The switch is turned off (disconnected) in the closed state. As shown in FIG. 154, the terminal of the door frame opening switch 3a is electrically connected to the door frame opening switch terminal 716a. One of the detection signals from the door frame opening switch 3a is input to the base of the transistor TR60 via the resistor R60, and a resistor R61 that is grounded and grounded is electrically connected between the resistor R60 and the base of the transistor TR60. ing. The emitter of the transistor TR60 is grounded and the collector of the transistor TR60 is electrically connected to the collector of a transistor TR61 described later. A logical sum circuit (OR circuit) is formed by electrical connection between the collector of the transistor TR60 and the collector of the transistor TR61, and the calculation result is output as frame opening information output information via the main drawer relay board 657 shown in FIG. To the main control board 1700. On the other hand, the other detection signal from the door frame opening switch 3a is output to the external terminal plate 700a shown in FIG. 140 as a door frame opening signal via the external terminal plate terminal 718 described above. The door frame opening signal is electrically connected to the cathode of the door frame opening switch photocoupler provided on the external terminal board 700a, and + 18V is input to the anode of the door frame opening switch photocoupler. Thus, a voltage of + 18V is applied to the door frame opening switch 3a.

[10-4-2 (b). Detection signal from body frame opening switch]
As with the door frame opening switch 3a, the body frame opening switch 3b uses a normally closed type (normally closed (NC)), and the switch is turned on (conducted) when the body frame 3 is released from the outer frame 2. The switch is turned off (cut) while the main body frame 3 is closed by the outer frame 2. As shown in FIG. 154, the terminal of the main body frame opening switch 3b is electrically connected to the main body frame opening switch terminal 716b. One of the detection signals from the body frame opening switch 3b is input to the base of the transistor TR61 via the resistor R62, and a resistor R63 that is grounded and grounded is electrically connected between the resistor R62 and the base of the transistor TR61. ing. The emitter of the transistor TR61 is grounded and the collector of the transistor TR61 is electrically connected to the collector of the transistor TR60 described above. A logical sum circuit (OR circuit) is formed by electrical connection between the collector of the transistor TR60 and the collector of the transistor TR61, and the calculation result is output as frame opening information output information via the main drawer relay board 657 shown in FIG. To the main control board 1700. On the other hand, the other detection signal from the body frame opening switch 3b is shown in FIG. 140 as a body frame opening signal via the external terminal plate terminal 718 described above, similarly to the door frame opening signal from the door frame opening switch 3a. Output to the external terminal board 700a. As with the door frame opening signal, the body frame opening signal is electrically connected to the cathode of the body frame opening switch photocoupler provided on the external terminal board 700a, and is connected to the anode of the body frame opening switch photocoupler. + 18V is input. Thus, a voltage of +18 V is applied to the main body frame opening switch 3b as in the case of the door frame opening switch 3a.

  In this embodiment, as described above, the door frame opening switch 3a and the body frame opening switch 3b are normally closed switches. For this reason, even if the door frame opening switch 3a is short-circuited and the switch is turned on (conductive), the door frame 5 is opened from the main body frame 3, the main body frame opening switch 3b is short-circuited, and the switch is turned on. Even when it is turned on (conductive), the main body frame 3 is released from the outer frame 2. In this way, by using the normally closed switch for the door frame opening switch 3a and the main body frame opening switch 3b, for example, the above-mentioned frame opening information output signal is transmitted via the main drawer relay board 657 to the main control board 1700 even when a short circuit occurs. 140, the main control MPU 1700a of the main control board 1700 determines whether the door frame 5 is opened from the main body frame 3 or the main body frame 3 is opened from the outer frame 2. can do.

  When the door frame opening switch 3a and the body frame opening switch 3b are changed from a normally closed switch to a normally open type (normally open (NO)) switch (door frame opening switch 3a ′, body frame opening switch 3b ′). The door frame opening switch 3 a ′ is turned on (conductive) when the door frame 5 is closed from the main body frame 3, and turned off (disconnected) when the door frame 5 is opened to the main body frame 3. . The main body frame opening switch 3 b ′ is turned on (conductive) when the main body frame 3 is closed from the outer frame 2, and is turned off (disconnected) when the main body frame 3 is opened to the outer frame 2. Here, even if the door frame opening switch 3a ′ is disconnected and the switch is turned off (disconnected), the door frame 5 is opened from the body frame 3, and the body frame opening switch 3b ′ is disconnected. Even when the switch is turned off (disconnected), the main body frame 3 is released from the outer frame 2. Thus, by using the normally open switch for the door frame opening switch 3a ′ and the main body frame opening switch 3b ′, for example, the above-described frame opening information output signal can be controlled by the main drawer relay board 657 even when the wire is disconnected. The main control MPU 1700a of the main control board 1700 can determine whether the door frame 5 is released from the main body frame 3 or the main body frame 3 is released from the outer frame 2. .

[10-4-3. Various input / output signals with the main control board and various output signals to the external terminal board]
Here, various input / output signals between the payout control board 715 and the main control board 1700 and various output signals from the payout control board 715 to the external terminal board 700a will be described.

[10-4-3 (a). Various input / output signals with the main control board]
As shown in FIG. 140, the payout control board 715 exchanges various input / output signals with the main control board 1700 via the main drawer relay board 657. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 155 (a), the payout control board 715 exchanges various input / output signals with the main drawer relay board 657 via its internal connection terminals 725. The signals output from the internal connection terminal 725 to the main drawer relay board 657 include the above-described payer serial data transmission signal, payer ACK signal, frame opening information output information, and the like. On the other hand, the signals input from the main drawer relay board 657 to the internal connection terminal 725 include the main payment serial data reception signal, the main payment ACK signal, the RAM clear signal, the power failure warning signal, and the frame opening information output information. In addition, various information related to the game (game information) such as jackpot information output signal, probability changing information output signal, special symbol display information output signal, normal symbol display information output signal, time reduction information output information, start opening prize information output signal There is. Various power sources of ground (GND), + 34V, + 18V, and + 9V are supplied to the main drawer relay board 657 via the internal connection terminal 725.

[10-4-3 (b). Various output signals to external terminal board]
The payout control board 715 outputs various signals to the external terminal board 700a via the external terminal board terminal 718. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 155 (b), in addition to the door frame opening signal and the main body frame opening signal described above, the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 465 shown in FIG. In addition to directly outputting a prize ball number information output signal, there is game information output from the main control board 1700 via the payout control board 715. As described above, the external terminal board 700a is electrically connected to a hall computer installed in a game hall (hall) (not shown), and monitors the game of the player.

[10-5. Circuit of launch control unit]
Next, the firing control unit 1720 will be described. As shown in FIG. 140, the firing control unit 1720 includes an input circuit 1720a, an oscillation circuit 1720b, a firing control circuit 1720c, and a firing motor drive circuit 1720d.

[10-5-1. Input circuit]
As shown in FIG. 156, the payout control board 715 is provided with a CR unit terminal plate terminal 719, an operation handle terminal 724, and the like. Various signals input to these terminals are input to the input circuit 1720a. The input circuit 1720a receives a CR connection signal from a CR unit (not shown), a detection signal from the touch switch 80 shown in FIG. 140, and a detection signal from the firing stop switch 82 shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 140, when the CR unit is electrically connected to the CR unit terminal board 700b, the CR connection signal is input to the input circuit 1720a via the CR unit terminal board 700b and detected from the touch switch 80. When the signal touches the rotation operation member 74 of the operation handle 71 described above, the signal is detected by the touch switch 80 and input to the input circuit 1720a via the handle relay terminal 71a shown in FIG. This detection signal is detected by the firing stop switch 82 when the firing stop button 81 described above is operated, and is input to the input circuit 1720a via the handle relay terminal 71a.

[10-5-1 (a). Connection signal from CR unit]
The boards of the CR unit terminal board 700b and the payout control board 715 are electrically connected by a harness (not shown). In this harness, in order to make it less susceptible to noise, as shown in FIG. 156, a line (transmission line) for transmitting a CR connection signal is pulled up to + 18V by a pull-up resistor R70.

  When the CR connection signal is input to the input circuit 1720a, the CR connection signal is input to the base of the transistor TR70 (2SC1815 in this embodiment) via the resistor R71. Between the resistor R71 and the base of the transistor TR70, a grounded and grounded resistor R72 is electrically connected. The values of the resistors R71 and R72 are set so that the transistor TR70 is turned on when the CR connection signal is not input, that is, when the CR unit is not electrically connected to the CR unit terminal board 700b. Yes.

  The collector of the transistor TR70 is pulled up to + 5V by the pull-up resistor R73, and outputs a firing permission signal having a negative logic to the firing control circuit 1720c.

  When the transistor TR70 is turned on, that is, when the CR unit is not electrically connected to the CR unit terminal plate 700b, a current flows from the collector of the transistor TR70 to the emitter of the transistor TR70, so that the firing permission detection signal whose logic is LOW Is output to the firing control circuit 1720c. On the other hand, when the transistor TR70 is turned off, that is, when the CR unit is electrically connected to the CR unit terminal plate 700b, no current flows from the collector of the transistor TR70 to the emitter of the transistor TR70. A launch permission detection signal that has been pulled up and whose logic has become HI is output to the launch control circuit 1720c.

[10-5-1 (b). Detection signal from touch switch]
When the detection signal from the touch switch 80 is input to the input circuit 1720a, the detection signal is input to the base of the transistor TR71 (2SC1815 in this embodiment) via the resistor R724b. A resistor R75, which is grounded and grounded, is electrically connected between the resistor R724b and the base of the transistor TR71. The values of the resistors R724b and R75 are set so that the transistor TR71 is turned on when the touch switch 80 outputs a detection signal, that is, when the rotation operation member 74 of the operation handle 71 is not touched. . The voltage input to the base of the transistor TR71 is smoothed by removing noise by a capacitor C70 connected to the ground.

  The collector of the transistor TR71 is pulled up to + 5V by the pull-up resistor R76, and outputs a touch detection signal having a negative logic to the firing control circuit 1720c.

  When the transistor TR71 is turned on, that is, when the rotation operation member 74 of the operation handle 71 is not touched, a current flows from the collector of the transistor TR71 to the emitter of the transistor TR71, so that the touch detection signal whose logic is LOW is controlled to fire. It is output to the circuit 1720c. On the other hand, when the transistor TR71 is in the OFF state, that is, when the rotation operation member 74 of the operation handle 71 is touched, current does not flow from the collector of the transistor TR71 to the emitter of the transistor TR71, and therefore is pulled up to + 5V by the pull-up resistor R76. Then, the touch detection signal whose logic is HI is output to the firing control circuit 1720c.

  As described above, the detection signal from the touch switch 80 is input to the operation handle terminal 724 via the handle relay terminal 71a, but the handle relay terminal 71a to the operation handle terminal 724 are electrically connected by wiring. Connected. This wiring is attached along the lower reinforcing plate 36 shown in FIG. As described above, the lower reinforcing plate 36 also serves as a ground connection plate that removes noise and the like due to electrostatic discharge from the sphere stored in the storage tray 30 from the door frame 5. The wiring from 71a is in an environment that is extremely susceptible to noise and the like. For this reason, when noise or the like enters the detection signal from the touch switch 80, the voltage of the ground (GND) goes up and down from 0V to + 3V and becomes unstable. For example, the payout control unit in the payout control board 715 shown in FIG. There is a possibility that the potential difference from + 5V input to the power supply terminal VDD of the payout control MPU 1710a of 1710 becomes smaller than the operating voltage of the payout control MPU 1710a and the payout control MPU 1710a is suddenly reset. Therefore, in the present embodiment, + 18V is supplied to the touch switch 80 via the resistor R724a which is a power supply side noise reduction resistor, and the detection signal from the touch switch 80 is supplied via the resistor R724b which is a detection signal side noise reduction resistor. To stabilize the ground (GND).

  In the present embodiment, winding resistors are used as the resistors R724a and R724b, and the ground (GND) due to noise or the like entering the wiring from the handle relay terminal 71a due to the inductance which is a coil component of the resistors R724a and R724b. High frequency components can be further suppressed. As a result, the payout control MPU 1710a of the payout control unit 1710 in the payout control board 715 is not suddenly reset, and the ground (GND) changes due to the exchange of various input / output signals between the payout control board 715 and the main control board 1700. No communication error occurs.

[10-5-1 (c). Detection signal from firing stop switch]
When the detection signal from the firing stop switch 82 is input to the input circuit 1720a, the detection signal is input to the base of the transistor TR72 (2SC1815 in this embodiment) via the resistor R724d. Between the resistor R724d and the base of the transistor TR72, a grounded and grounded resistor R78 is electrically connected. The values of the resistors R724d and R78 are set so that the transistor TR72 is turned on when the firing stop switch 82 outputs a detection signal, that is, when the firing stop button 81 of the operation handle 71 is not operated. Yes. The voltage input to the base of the transistor TR72 is smoothed by removing noise by the capacitor C71 connected to the ground.

  The collector of the transistor TR72 is pulled up to + 5V by the pull-up resistor R79, and outputs a firing stop detection signal having a negative logic to the firing control circuit 1720c.

  When the transistor TR71 is in an ON state, that is, when the firing stop button 81 of the operation handle 71 is not operated, a current flows from the collector of the transistor TR72 to the emitter of the transistor TR72, so that a firing stop detection signal whose logic is LOW is fired. It is output to the control circuit 1720c. On the other hand, when the transistor TR72 is in the OFF state, that is, when the firing stop button 81 of the operation handle 71 is operated, current does not flow from the collector of the transistor TR72 to the emitter of the transistor TR72, and therefore is pulled up to + 5V by the pull-up resistor R79. Thus, a firing stop detection signal whose logic is HI is output to the firing control circuit 1720c.

  As described above, the detection signal from the firing stop switch 82 is input to the operation handle terminal 724 via the handle relay terminal 71a, but the handle relay terminal 71a to the operation handle terminal 724 are wired. Electrically connected. This wiring is attached along the lower reinforcing plate 36 shown in FIG. As described above, the lower reinforcing plate 36 also serves as a ground connection plate that removes noise and the like due to electrostatic discharge from the sphere stored in the storage tray 30 from the door frame 5. The wiring from 71a is in an environment that is extremely susceptible to noise and the like. For this reason, if noise or the like enters the detection signal from the firing stop switch 82, the voltage of the ground (GND) goes up and down from 0V to + 3V and becomes unstable. There is a possibility that the potential difference from + 5V input to the power supply terminal VDD becomes smaller than the operating voltage of the payout control MPU 1710a and the payout control MPU 1710a is suddenly reset. Therefore, in the present embodiment, + 18V is supplied to the firing stop switch 82 via the resistor R724c that is a power supply side noise reduction resistor, and the detection signal from the launch stop switch 82 is a resistor R724d that is a detection signal side noise reduction resistor. The ground (GND) is stabilized by being input via.

  In the present embodiment, winding resistors are used as the resistors R724c and R724d, and the ground (GND) due to noise or the like entering the wiring from the handle relay terminal 71a due to the inductance which is a coil component of the resistors R724c and R724d. High frequency components can be further suppressed. As a result, the payout control MPU 1710a of the payout control unit 1710 in the payout control board 715 is not suddenly reset, and the ground (GND) changes due to the exchange of various input / output signals between the payout control board 715 and the main control board 1700. No communication error occurs.

[10-5-1 (d). Arrangement of noise reduction resistor on power supply side and detection signal side]
Here, the arrangement of the resistors R724a and R724c, which are power source side noise reduction resistors, and R724b, R724d, which are detection signal side noise reduction resistors, will be described. As described above, the payout control board 715 receives the detection signal from the touch switch 80 and the detection signal from the firing stop switch 82 via the operation handle terminal 724. The touch switch 80 is provided with a resistor R724a that is a power source side noise reduction resistor and a resistor R724b that is a detection signal side noise reduction resistor, and the firing stop switch 82 is provided with a resistor R724c that is a power source side noise reduction resistor and a detection signal side noise reduction. A resistor R724d, which is a resistor, is provided. These resistors R724a to R724d are arranged near the left side of the error release switch 1731 on the component surface 715a of the payout control board 715, as shown in FIG. 157 (a).

  As shown in FIGS. 157 (b) and 157 (c), the component surface 715a and the solder surface 715b of the payout control board 715 are removed from the pattern around the resistors R724a to R724d (referred to as “wiring patterns”). Foil removal regions 724a and 724b that are in a state are provided. In the foil missing regions 724a and 724b, a power supply line such as + 18V or a ground (GND) line is not arranged around the wiring pattern of the resistors R724a to R724d. As a result, noise or the like entering the wiring pattern of the resistors R724a to R724d can be prevented in the foil dropout regions 724a and 724b, and fluctuations in the ground (GND) can be suppressed.

  In addition, the resistors R724a to R724d are arranged such that a copper foil portion (referred to as “land”) to be soldered by a solder surface 715b is separated from a land such as another electronic component by a predetermined distance. The distance between the lands of the resistors R724a to R724d and the lands of other electronic components is set to such an extent that the potential of the power supply line and the potential of the ground (GND) line do not affect each other. As a result, the influence of the potential of the power supply line and the potential of the ground (GND) line from the land such as other electronic components can be prevented, and the fluctuation of the ground (GND) can be suppressed.

[10-5-2. Oscillation circuit]
As shown in FIG. 158, the oscillation circuit 1720b includes a crystal resonator X80 (in this embodiment, manufactured by River Eletech: HC-49 / U03, 4 MHz), and capacitors C80 and C81 that set the load capacitance of the crystal resonator X80. A feedback resistor R80 is provided. Both terminals of the crystal unit X80 are electrically connected to the launch control circuit 1720c, and the crystal unit X80 and the launch control circuit 1720c are closed loop circuits. A feedback resistor R80 is electrically connected to the closed loop circuit in parallel with the crystal unit X80. Both terminals of the crystal unit X80 are electrically connected to a ground and capacitors C80 and C81 grounded. The value of the feedback resistor R80 and the load capacities of the capacitors C80 and C81 are set so that the crystal unit X80 oscillates stably. Accordingly, the oscillation circuit 1720b can supply a clock signal with suppressed fluctuations to the firing control circuit 1720c.

[10-5-3. Launch control circuit]
As shown in FIG. 158, the firing control circuit 1720c receives the clock signal from the oscillation circuit 1720b as input to the clock input / output terminals XT1 and XT2, and determines the rotational speed of the firing motor 344 based on the input clock signal. The reference pulse to be output is output from the output terminals AA and BB to the firing motor drive circuit 1720d. The VCC terminal, which is a power supply terminal, receives +5 V and is electrically connected to a capacitor C82 that is grounded. As a result, + 5V input to the VCC terminal is smoothed by removing ripples. The GND terminal, which is a ground terminal, is grounded.

  In the launch control circuit 1720c, the launch permission signal described above is input to the input terminal E1, the touch detection signal is input to the input terminal E3, and the launch stop detection signal is input to the input terminal E4. The firing control circuit 1720c takes the logical product (AND) of these firing permission detection signals, touch detection signals, and firing stop detection signals, and outputs the calculation result from the ST terminal, which is the start terminal, to the firing motor drive circuit 1720d. This ST terminal informs the firing motor drive circuit 1720d that the reference pulse output from the output terminals AA and BB is permitted or prohibited. Specifically, when the logics of the firing permission detection signal, the touch detection signal, and the firing stop detection signal are all HI (the CR unit is electrically connected to the CR unit terminal board 700b, and the operation handle 71 is turned). When the member 74 is touched and the firing stop button 81 of the operation handle 71 is not operated), a start signal with logic HI is output from the ST terminal, and the permitted reference pulses are output from the output terminals AA and BB. If the logic is LOW in at least one of the firing permission detection signal, the touch detection signal, and the firing stop detection signal while the fact that it is output is transmitted to the firing motor drive circuit 1720d (for example, the CR unit is a CR unit terminal board) 700b is electrically connected, touches the rotation operation member 74 of the operation handle 71, and presses the firing stop button 81 of the operation handle 71. In this case) that is created, logical from the ST terminal is output start signal becomes LOW, convey output terminals AA, to the effect that the reference pulse is prohibited from BB is outputted to the firing motor drive circuit 1720D.

[10-5-4. Launch motor drive circuit]
As shown in FIG. 158, firing motor drive circuit 1720d receives a reference pulse output from output terminals AA and BB of firing control circuit 1720c, and receives a start signal output from ST terminal of firing control circuit 1720c. ing. Specifically, the reference pulse output from the output terminal AA of the firing control circuit 1720c is input to the INA terminal that is the A-phase input terminal of the firing motor drive circuit 1720d, and is output from the output terminal BB of the firing control circuit 1720c. The reference pulse is input to the INB terminal which is the B phase input terminal of the firing motor driving circuit 1720d, and the start signal output from the ST terminal of the firing control circuit 1720c is input to the ST terminal which is the starting terminal of the firing motor driving circuit 1720d. ing.

  When a start signal whose logic is HI is input to the ST terminal, the firing motor drive circuit 1720d starts from the A terminal which is the A phase output terminal via the firing motor terminal 723 based on the reference pulse input to the INA terminal. Then, a drive pulse that is an excitation signal is output to the A phase of the launch motor 344, while a drive pulse that is an excitation signal obtained by inverting the logic of the drive pulse output from the A terminal is output from the AX terminal that is the A phase inverted output terminal. Based on the reference pulse that is output to the / A phase of the launch motor 344 via the launch motor terminal 723 and is input to the INB terminal, the launch motor 344 is transmitted from the B terminal that is the B phase output terminal via the launch motor terminal 723. A drive pulse that is an excitation signal is output to the B phase of the drive signal, while a drive pulse that is an excitation signal obtained by inverting the logic of the drive pulse output from the B terminal is the B phase. Is output to / B-phase firing motor 344 from BX terminal is non-inverting output terminal via the firing motor terminals 723.

  Note that + 5V is input to VCC1 which is a power supply terminal of the firing motor driving circuit 1720d, and the VCC2A terminal which is the A phase power supply voltage terminal and the VCC2B terminal which is the B phase power supply voltage terminal of the firing motor driving circuit 1720d are the firing motor 344. The driving voltage of + 34V is input. The VCC2A terminal and the VCC2B terminal are electrically connected to an electrolytic capacitor C83 that is grounded and grounded, and the driving torque is kept constant by suppressing a temporary voltage drop due to the driving of the firing motor 344. . The VCC2A terminal and the VCC2B terminal are electrically connected to a capacitor C84 that is grounded, and the GND terminal that is a grounding terminal is grounded.

[11. Sub-integrated circuit board (block diagram)]
Next, the circuit of the sub-integrated board 1740 that performs the effect control shown in FIG. 140 will be described. Since the circuit of the sub-integrated substrate 1740 is extremely complicated, it will be described using a simple block diagram. FIG. 159 is a block diagram of the sub-integrated board, and FIG. 160 is a timing chart showing an example of BGM switching timing by the sound source IC mounted on the sub-integrated board. In addition to the sub-integrated MPU 1740a, sub-integrated ROM 1740b, sound source IC 1740c, and sound ROM 1740d shown in FIG. 140, the sub-integrated board 1470 is described as an external watchdog timer 1740e (hereinafter referred to as “external WDT 1740e”) as shown in FIG. And an amplifier 1740f and the like. As shown in FIG. 147, the sub integrated board 1740 is supplied with the DC power supply + 18V from the power supply board 686 via the payout control board 715 and the main control board 1700, and this + 18V is inputted to the amplifier 1740f. Also, a DC power supply + 18V is supplied from the power supply board 686 to the liquid crystal control board 1750 via the payout control board 715, the main control board 1700, and the sub-integrated board 1740. In the liquid crystal control board 1750, the supplied + 18V to + 5V And + 3.3V are created, and the created + 5V and + 3.3V are supplied to the sub-integrated board 1740. + 5V is input to the sub-integrated MPU 1740a and the external WDT 1740e, and + 3.3V is input to the sub-integrated ROM 1740b, the sound source IC 1740c, and the sound ROM 1740d.

  Since + 5V is input to the sub-integrated MPU 1740a and + 3.3V is input to the sub-integrated ROM 1740b, the voltage from + 5V to + 3.3V is used as an interface between the two power sources of the sub-integrated MPU 1740a and the sub-integrated ROM 1740b. A bus buffer (not shown) that converts the level or converts the voltage level from +3.3 V to +5 is provided on the sub-integrated board 1740. On the other hand, since + 3.3V is input to the sound source IC 1740c and the sound ROM 1740d, the sub-integrated board 1740 is not provided with a bus buffer for converting the voltage level. In addition, + 5V is input to the sub-integrated MPU 1740a and + 3.3V is input to the sound source IC 1740c. However, the input terminal of the sound source IC 1740c that is electrically connected to the sub-integrated MPU 1740a can accept + 5V. Therefore, the bus buffer is not provided on the sub-integrated board 1740 as an interface between the two power sources of the sub-integrated MPU 1740a and the sound source IC 1740c.

  As described above, the sub-integrated MPU 1740a incorporates various input / output ports such as a parallel input / output port and a serial input / output port. Sound information (for example, background music (hereinafter referred to as “background music”) that is output to the lamp driving board 1760 such as a door frame side lighting / flashing command that outputs a lighting signal or a flashing signal to the frame decoration lamps 5aa, 5b to 5h, or extracted from the sound ROM 1740d. BGM ”) is output to the tone generator IC 1740c, and a display command indicating a screen to be displayed on the liquid crystal display 1315 is output to the liquid crystal control board 1750. Or Further, as described above, the sub-integrated MPU 1740a receives a detection signal from the front sensor board 1580 of the loop unit 1570, a detection signal from the rear sensor board 1587, etc. via the lamp driving board 1760, or a liquid crystal control board. A signal (operation signal) indicating that the 1750 is operating normally is input from the liquid crystal control board 1750.

  The sound source IC 1740c includes a control register 1740ca and a DAC 1740cb. The control register 1740ca is a register for extracting sound information from the sound ROM 1740d based on the sound command output from the sub-integrated MPU 1740a, and performing pulse modulation to decode the PCM data. The DAC 1740cb is a digital-analog conversion circuit for converting PCM data decoded by the control register 1740ca into an analog signal. Note that the sound information extracted from the sound ROM 1740d by the control register 1740ca is a sound ROM 1740d in which a phrase number from 0 to 255 is associated with phrase data in which music, sound effects, BGM, and the like are binarized. It is divided and memorized.

  The control register 1740ca includes a phrase playback control register 1740caa and a sequencer control register 1740cab. The phrase playback control register 1740caa is a phrase number stored in the sound ROM 1740d, a volume value for setting the volume, repeated information for repeatedly executing BGM of the phrase number, fade-in / fade-out information for BGM (the value and change of the final volume) This is a register for individually setting playback stop information and the like for forcibly stopping playback in channel 0 to channel 7. The sequencer control register 1740 cab reproduces the phrase number of each BGM that composes the combined BGM when the built-in sequencer is started and automatically played by combining a plurality of predetermined BGMs into one BGM. This is a register for individually setting the sequence information and the like in sequencer 0 to sequencer 7.

  The DAC 1740cb converts the PCM data decoded by the control register 1740ca into an analog signal and outputs the analog signal to the amplifier 1740f. The amplifier 1740f amplifies the input analog signal so that music, sound effects, BGM, and the like flow from the left speaker 34 and the right speaker 34 when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is viewed from the front. An amplifier 1740fa for the left speaker 34 and an amplifier 1740fb for the right speaker 34 are provided. The analog signal input to the amplifier 1740f includes a decoded BGM BGM reproduction signal, a decoded sound effect reproduction signal, and the like.

  Here, as an example of the operation of the sound source IC 1740c, a method of switching BGM0 to another BGM1 will be described. BGM0 and BGM1 correspond to the background image drawn and reproduced in the display area 1320 of the liquid crystal display 1315, BGM0 is set to channel 0 of the phrase reproduction control register 1740caa of the control register 1740ca, and BGM1 is controlled. The description will be made assuming that the phrase playback control register 1740caa of the register 1740ca is set to channel 1.

  When, for example, BGM0 is selected from BGM0 and BGM1 corresponding to the background image rendered and reproduced on the display area 1320 of the liquid crystal display 1315, the sub-integrated MPU 1740a selects the schedule stored in the sub-integrated ROM 1740b corresponding to the selected BGM0. Extract data. This schedule data defines the progress of the BGM, and any value in the range from the mute (Mute) that is the minimum value to the maximum sound (Max.) That is the maximum value is the BGM volume. The schedule data of BGM0 is set in advance, and the maximum sound (Max.), Which is the maximum value, is set as the volume of BGM0.

  The sub-integrated MPU 1740a sets the phrase number and volume value of BGM0 in the phrase reproduction control register 1740caa of the control register 1740ca in the sound source IC 1740c according to the extracted schedule data. Specifically, the sub-integrated MPU 1740a stores the phrase number of BGM0, the volume value specified in the schedule data, and the repetition information for repeatedly executing BGM0 in the channel 0 of the phrase playback control register 1740caa of the control register 1740ca. set. At this time, the sub-integrated MPU 1740a does not set playback stop information for forcibly stopping playback by the channel 0 of the phrase playback control register 1740caa of the control register 1740ca, and continuously performs playback by the channel 0. On the other hand, the reproduction stop information for forcibly stopping the reproduction by the channel 1 of the phrase reproduction control register 1740caa of the control register 1740ca is set, and the reproduction by the channel 1 is set not to be performed. In this state, as shown in FIG. 160, the volume of BGM0 becomes the maximum sound (Max.) And flows from the left speaker 34 and the right speaker 34 and proceeds. Note that the reproduction stop information is performed in a reproduction stop process included in a scheduler main process in a 16 ms steady process described later.

  The sub-integrated MPU 1740a performs a BGM switching determination process in a scheduler main process in a 16 ms steady process, which will be described later, and switches the BGM (that is, when it becomes a BGM switching point), the phrase playback control register 1740caa For channel 0, set the BGM0 phrase number and the volume value of the BGM0 volume that is gradually and gradually reduced from the maximum value (Max.) To the minimum value mute (Mute). (Timing F0 in FIG. 160), the fade-out period FOT shown in FIG. 160 (in this embodiment, 1s to 2s is set, and the fade-out period FOT has a width corresponding to the background image. .) Forcibly gradually increases the volume of BGM0. When the fade-out period FOT elapses (timing F1 in FIG. 160), the phrase number of BGM0 and the volume of BGM0 are muted (Mute) to channel 0 of the phrase playback control register 1740caa of the control register 1740ca. The updated volume value is set, and BGM0 is faded out (referred to as “fade-out process”). This fade-out process is performed in a BGM volume forced update process in a 16 ms steady process described later. The sub-integrated MPU 1740a sets playback stop information for forcibly stopping playback to the channel 0 of the phrase playback control register 1740caa of the control register 1740ca at the timing F1, and does not perform playback using this channel 0. Is set. The reproduction stop information is performed in the reproduction stop process included in the scheduler main process in the 16 ms steady process described later.

  The sub-integrated MPU 1740a extracts schedule data stored in the sub-integrated ROM 1740b corresponding to BGM1 when the fade-out period FOT has elapsed, that is, at timing F1. In the schedule data of BGM1, the maximum sound (Max.) Which is the maximum value is set as the volume of BGM1.

  The sub integrated MPU 1740a sets the phrase number and volume value of BGM1 in the phrase reproduction control register 1740caa of the control register 1740ca in the sound source IC 1740c according to the extracted schedule data. Specifically, the sub-integrated MPU 1740a stores the phrase number of BGM1, the volume value defined in the schedule data, and the repetition information for repeatedly executing BGM1 in the channel 1 of the phrase reproduction control register 1740caa of the control register 1740ca. set. At this time, the sub-integrated MPU 1740a releases the reproduction stop information for forcibly stopping reproduction to the channel 1 of the phrase reproduction control register 1740caa of the control register 1740ca, and continuously performs reproduction by the channel 1. It is set as follows. Note that the reproduction stop information is performed in a reproduction stop process included in a scheduler main process in a 16 ms steady process described later.

  When the sub-integrated MPU 1740a sets the phrase number of BGM1 in the channel 1 of the phrase reproduction control register 1740caa of the control register 1740ca, that is, at the timing F1, first, the phrase number of BGM1 and the maximum value are set in this channel 1. The volume value forcibly updated to the mute (Mute) that is the minimum value is set to the maximum sound (Max.), And the fade-in period FIT (in this embodiment, 1 s to 2 s is set). The fade-in period FIT has a width corresponding to the image.) The volume of the BGM 1 is changed from the mute (Mute) which is the minimum value to the maximum sound (Max.) Which is the maximum value until the sound passes. When the fade-in period FIT elapses (see FIG. 160) Timing F2), the phrase number of BGM1 and the volume value of BGM1 updated to the maximum sound (Max.), Which is the maximum value, are set in channel 1 of the phrase playback control register 1740caa of the control register 1740ca, and BGM1 (Referred to as “fade-in process”). This fade-in process is performed in a BGM volume forced update process in a 16 ms steady process described later.

  When the fade-in process of BGM1 is performed following such a fade-out process of BGM0, as shown in FIG. Within the switching period FT, the volume of BGM0 gradually decreases from the maximum sound (Max.) To mute (Mute), and the volume of BGM1 is muted. The sound gradually increases from (Mute) to the maximum sound (Max.), And flows from the left speaker 34 and the right speaker 34 to BGM0 and BGM1. In the scheduler main process in the 16 ms steady process to be described later, BGM0 and BGM1 are advanced according to the schedule data that defines the progress of BGM0 and the schedule data that defines the progress of BGM1. In the BGM volume forced update process in the steady process, the volume value of BGM0 and the volume value of BGM1 that progress in the scheduler main process are forcibly updated, and the process is independent of the scheduler main process.

  In this way, BGM0 is faded out and its volume is gradually reduced from the maximum sound (Max.) To mute (Mute), and BGM1 is faded in and its volume is gradually increased from Mute (Mute). By setting the maximum sound (Max.), Switching from BGM0 to BGM1 is performed smoothly. Here, for example, when BGM0 suddenly switches to BGM1 at the climax of BGM0 and BGM0 is interrupted in the middle of the song and the intro of BGM1 flows out from the left speaker 34 and right speaker 34, it is as if the record board is played by the record player. When listening, the record needle jumps due to scratches on the record board, and other songs suddenly flow out, which may give the player a sense of incongruity. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, since the switching from BGM0 to BGM1 is smoothly switched by fading out and fading in, it is difficult for the player to feel uncomfortable.

  Further, the BGM0 is determined in the scheduler main process switching determination process in the 16 ms steady process without predetermining in advance the timing for fading out the BGM0 in the schedule data defining the progress of the BGM0 and the time for fading in the schedule defining the progress of the BGM1. The switching from BGM0 to BGM1 is smoothly performed by performing the fade-out process and the fade-in process in the BGM volume forced update process in the 16 ms steady process. In this way, the switching from BGM0 to BGM1 is not managed by the scheduler main process, and the BGM0 volume value and the BGM1 volume value are forcibly updated in the BGM volume forced update process independent of the scheduler main process. It has become. As a result, when a plurality of BGMs corresponding to the background image rendered and reproduced in the display area 1320 of the liquid crystal display 1315 are flowed, it is not necessary to preliminarily define schedule data for switching the BGM to another BGM. Is determined by the switching determination process of the scheduler main process in the 16 ms steady process, the BGM switching point can be given randomness, so that the player can not grasp the BGM switching point. Further, since there are a plurality of BGMs corresponding to the same background image rendered and reproduced in the display area 1320 of the liquid crystal display 1315, the background image does not have a one-to-one mode of one BGM. Even if it continues, it becomes difficult for a player to feel that it is a monotonous effect in which the background image and BGM are switched in conjunction with each other, and it is difficult to lose the freshness by switching the background image to be reproduced and rendered on the display area 1320 of the liquid crystal display 1315. Thereby, the fall of a player's game motivation can be suppressed. Further, when the BGM switching is determined in the switching determination process of the scheduler main process in the 16 ms steady process, and the BGM switching is performed, the current flows from the left speaker 34 and the right speaker 34 within the switching period FT. Since BGM0 fades out and BGM1 fades in, it is possible to smoothly switch from BGM0 to BGM1, and when switching from BGM0 to BGM1, BGM0 suddenly stops or BGM1 begins to flow suddenly. Disappears. Thereby, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel uncomfortable due to switching from BGM0 to BGM1. In addition, when switching from BGM0 to BGM1, BGM0 may be faded out in the middle of the music, and the intro of BGM1 may be faded in, or may be faded in from the middle of the music of BGM1. In either case, BGM0 can be smoothly switched from BGM0 to BGM1 by fading out BGM0 and BGM1 being faded in, so that it is difficult for the player to feel uncomfortable.

  Further, the sub-integrated MPU 1740a forcibly stops the reproduction by the channel 1 by setting the reproduction stop information in the channel 1 of the phrase reproduction control register 1740caa of the control register 1740ca until the BGM1 is faded in. When BGM0 is faded out, that is, at timing F1, playback stop information is set in channel 0 of the phrase playback control register 1740caa of the control register 1740ca to forcibly stop playback by this channel 0. Thereby, the reproduction by channel 1 can be surely brought into a complete stop state, and the reproduction by channel 0 can be surely brought into a complete stop state. Further, for example, it is possible to prevent the playback by channel 1 from flowing from the left speaker 34 and the right speaker 34 when the phrase number of BGM1 is not set to channel 1, and the volume value of BGM0 to channel 0. Is set to the minimum value mute (Mute), but even if a value in the vicinity of it is set for some reason, reproduction by channel 0 is prevented from flowing from the left speaker 34 and the right speaker 34. be able to.

[12. Circuit of LCD control board (block diagram)]
Next, a circuit and the like of the liquid crystal control board 1750 that performs drawing control of the liquid crystal display 1315 illustrated in FIG. 140 will be described. Since the circuit of the liquid crystal control board 1750 is extremely complicated, it will be described with reference to a simple block diagram. FIG. 161 is a block diagram of a liquid crystal control board. In addition to the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a, the liquid crystal control ROM 1750b, the VDP 1750c, the character ROM 1750d, and the character RAM 1750z shown in FIG. (Abbreviation of Signaling) is configured to include a transmitter 1750h, a transfer IC 1750m, and the like. As shown in FIG. 147, the liquid crystal control board 1750 is supplied with DC power supplies + 34V and + 18V from the power supply board 686 via the payout control board 715, the main control board 1700, and the sub-integrated board 1740. This + 18V is input to the liquid crystal control power supply circuit 1750e. The liquid crystal control power supply circuit 1750e creates + 5V, which is a reference voltage for the sub-integrated MPU 1740a, from the input + 18V, creates + 3.3V, which is a reference voltage for the liquid crystal control board 1750, and the like. + 1.5V, which is the power source of VDP1750c, or + 2.5V, which is the power source of VDP1750c. In addition to + 3.3V, DC + 1.8V (DC + 1.8V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 1.8V”) is input to scaler IC 1750f. Note that + 1.8V is created by a power supply circuit (not shown) and is created from + 18V described above, but may be generated by the liquid crystal control power supply circuit 1750e. Here, the configuration of the liquid crystal control board 1750 will be described first, followed by the setting of the scaler IC 1750f and the generation of a screen to be displayed on the liquid crystal display 1315. FIG. 162 is a table showing an example of a register group of the scaler IC, FIG. 163 is a simplified diagram showing the inside of the frame memory, and FIG. 164 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of generation of a screen to be displayed on the liquid crystal display. .

[12-1. Configuration of LCD control board]
[12-1-1. Liquid crystal control MPU]
As described above, the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a receives a display command from the sub-integrated board 1740. As described above, this display command indicates a screen to be drawn on the liquid crystal display 1315, and is output (transmitted) from the serial input / output of the sub integrated MPU 1740a of the sub integrated board 1740. As shown in FIG. 161, the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a receives the display command as the liquid crystal serial data DSP-SER, and when receiving the liquid crystal serial data DSP-SER, it sends a DSP-ACK signal to that effect to the sub-integrated board. 1740.

  The liquid crystal control MPU 1750a restores the received liquid crystal serial data DSP-SER to parallel data, analyzes the display command, extracts schedule data corresponding to the analyzed display command from the liquid crystal control ROM 1750b, and extracts the schedule data from the extracted schedule data. First screen data is extracted from the liquid crystal control ROM 1750b and output to the VDP 1750c. As described above, the schedule data is configured by arranging screen data for defining the screen configuration in time series, and the order of the screens to be drawn on the liquid crystal display 1315 is defined. Detailed description of the screen data will be described later.

  The liquid crystal control MPU 1750a, which will be described in detail later, controls the transfer IC 1750m to transfer and copy the sprite data stored in the character ROM 1750d to the character RAM 1750z having a high access speed. As shown in FIG. 161, the character RAM 1750z includes a resident area 1750za and a non-resident area 1750zb. In the resident area 1750za, sprite data for drawing the background on the liquid crystal display 1315 and sprite data for drawing characters such as “big hit” and “power is being restored” on the liquid crystal display 1315 are transferred and copied. Sprite data for suddenly drawing on the liquid crystal display 1315 is mainly stored. On the other hand, in the non-resident area 1750zb, sprite data to be drawn on the liquid crystal display 1315 in the middle from the start of the change to the stop, and on the liquid crystal display 1315 in the middle from the start of the big hit gaming state to the stop. Sprite data and the like are transferred and copied in time before drawing on the liquid crystal display 1315, and sprite data for drawing on the liquid crystal display 1315 is mainly stored along with the schedule data. Yes. The non-resident area 1750zb is an area where sprite data is replaced in accordance with the content drawn on the liquid crystal display 1315.

  As shown in FIG. 161, the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a receives a DMA execution signal DMAFLAG from the VDP 1750c. This DMA execution signal DMAFLAG is a signal that the VDP 1750c does not accept the screen data from the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a, and the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a stops outputting the DMA execution signal DMAFLAG as will be described in detail later. In response to this, interrupt processing is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 161, the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a outputs a field signal FIELD which is a control signal of the frame memory 1750g, or an interface clock signal (hereinafter referred to as “I / F clock signal”) SCL to the scaler IC 1750f. -Write serial data SCL-S0 is transmitted in synchronization with SCLK, read serial data SCL-S1 is received in synchronization with I / F clock signal SCL-SCLK from scaler IC 1750f, and access to scaler IC 1750f is valid Alternatively, the access set signal SCL-SS set to invalid is output. Detailed description of these various signals and various data will be described later.

  As shown in FIG. 161, the liquid crystal control board 1750 includes a flip-flop 1750i and an external watchdog timer 1750k (hereinafter referred to as “external WDT1750k”), and the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a is described in detail. As will be described later, an external WDT clear signal is output to the external WDT 1750k via the flip-flop 1750i. The external WDT 1750k outputs a reset signal to the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a, the VDP 1750c, and the transfer IC 1750m when the external WDT clear signal is not input within a predetermined period. The external WDT clear signal output from the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a is input to the sub integrated MPU 1740a of the sub integrated board 1740 as a DSP-RUN signal via the flip-flop 1750i.

  As shown in FIG. 161, the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a receives the RAM-CLR signal and the power failure warning signal described above from the sub-integrated board 1740.

[12-1-2. Transfer IC]
As described above, the transfer IC 1750m transfers and copies the sprite data stored in the character ROM 1750d to the resident area 1750za and the non-resident area 1750zb of the character RAM 1750z under the control of the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a.

  As illustrated in FIG. 161, the transfer IC 1750m includes a register group 1750ma. This register group 1750ma includes various registers for setting a transfer source address, a transfer destination address, and the number of transfer bytes. When the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a writes setting values to these various registers, the transfer IC 1750m transfers the sprite data stored in the character ROM 1750d to the resident area 1750za and non-resident area 1750zb of the character RAM 1750z and copies them. The register group 1750ma includes a register for setting an access condition suitable for the character ROM 1750d and the character RAM 1750z in addition to the transfer source address, the transfer destination address, and the number of transfer bytes.

  The transfer IC 1750m is configured to extract the sprite data from the character RAM 1750z instead of the character ROM 1750d when the VDP 1750c extracts the sprite data. That is, the transfer IC 1750m behaves as if the VDP 1750c is extracting sprite data from the character ROM 1750d. As described above, the character ROM 1750d stores an extremely large amount of sprite data. As a result, when the number of sprites drawn on the liquid crystal display 1315 increases, the access speed of the character ROM 1750d cannot be ignored, and the speed of drawing on the liquid crystal display 1315 is affected. For this reason, the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a controls the transfer IC 1750m to transfer and copy the sprite data stored in the character ROM 1750d to the character RAM 1750z having a high access speed. Thus, the VDP 1750c can extract sprite data from the character RAM 1750z at a high speed by the circuit configuration of the transfer IC 1750m. Therefore, the VDP 1750c can be accessed at high speed even when the number of sprites drawn on the liquid crystal display 1315 is extremely large.

  As shown in FIG. 161, transfer IC 1750m receives a reset signal from external WDT 1750k. When no reset signal is input, transfer IC 1750m stores sprite data stored in character ROM 1750d. While transferring and copying to the RAM 1750z or the VDP 1750c can extract sprite data from the character RAM 1750z, the sprite data stored in the character ROM 1750d is transferred to the character RAM 1750z when a reset signal is input. As a result, the VDP 1750c cannot extract the sprite data from the character RAM 1750z.

[12-1-3. Configuration of screen data]
The screen data output from the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a to the VDP 1750c is composed of sprite setting data and drawing condition setting data. The sprite setting data is composed of data that displays the sprite as a sprite on the screen, data for setting the sprite drawing color, data for setting the sprite drawing position, data for grouping a plurality of sprites, etc. ing. On the other hand, the drawing condition setting data includes data for setting the size of a virtual screen (hereinafter referred to as “canvas”), data for cutting a part of the canvas into a window shape (rectangular area) and displaying it on the screen, Data for setting a composite screen by arranging grouped sprites in layers, data for setting the size of one line for drawing the horizontal direction of the liquid crystal display 1315 from the above-described line buffer, data for setting resolution, etc. It is composed of

[12-1-4. VDP]
As described above, the screen data from the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a is input to the VDP 1750c. The VDP 1750c extracts the above-described sprite data from the character RAM 1750z by the transfer IC 1750m based on the input screen data, and develops the extracted sprite data into a bitmap on a canvas CV (not shown) which is a virtual screen of the VDP 1750c. Is generated. The VDP 1750c holds the generated drawing data for each line in the line buffer, and outputs the drawing data held in the line buffer to the scaler IC 1750f.

[12-1-4 (a). Sprite register and VDP register]
As shown in FIG. 161, the VDP 1750c includes a sprite register 1750ca and a VDP register 1750cb. The sprite register 1750ca is a register to which sprite setting data is written, and the VDP register 1750cb is a register to which drawing condition setting data is written. The sprite register 1750ca is configured as two buffers of equal storage capacity, called a first buffer and a second buffer (referred to as “double buffer”). When the VDP 1750c captures the sprite setting data among the screen data from the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a into the first buffer, the VDP 1750c transfers the captured sprite setting data from the first buffer to the second buffer. This transfer is performed by DMA (abbreviation of Direct Memory Access). In this DMA transfer, since the VDP 1750c copies the sprite setting data written in the first buffer to the second buffer without being controlled by the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a, high-speed data transfer can be performed. As a result, the same sprite setting data is written in the first buffer and the second buffer until new sprite setting data is written in the first buffer, that is, unless overwritten with new sprite setting data. ing. On the other hand, unlike the sprite register 1750ca, the VDP register 1750cb includes only the first buffer (referred to as “single buffer”).

  Since the VDP 1750c cannot accept the screen data from the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a, that is, the sprite setting data during the DMA transfer, the VDP 1750c outputs a DMA execution signal DMAFLAG to that effect to the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a. When the VDP 1750c completes the DMA transfer, it can accept the screen data from the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a, that is, the sprite setting data, and therefore stops outputting the DMA execution signal DMAFLAG indicating that. On the other hand, since the VDP register 1750cb is a single buffer as described above, the screen data from the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a, that is, the drawing condition setting data can be received even while the VDP 1750c performs the DAM transfer. It has become.

  As described above, the sprite setting data fetched into the first buffer is DMA-transferred to the second buffer, so that the sprite setting data is written into the second buffer. The sprite register 1750ca is a double buffer, and the sprite setting data taken into the first buffer is transferred to the second buffer at high speed in a short period by DMA transfer, so that the data is transferred to the first buffer immediately after the transfer. Writing becomes possible. Therefore, the VDP 1750c according to the present embodiment receives a display command from the sub-integrated board 1740 as compared with the VDP that is configured to perform writing within a limited time during which the blanking signal is output. Even if the interrupt process occurs and the process of writing the sprite setting data to the first buffer is interrupted, the sprite setting data can be written to the first buffer with a sufficient margin even after the interrupt process ends. In the present embodiment, since DMA transfer from the first buffer to the second buffer is performed every 16 milliseconds (ms), the output of the DMA execution signal DMAFLAG is also output every 16 ms. Since the sprite setting data fetched into the first buffer is always the same size, the time required for DMA transfer from the first buffer to the second buffer is always the same, and the output of the DMA execution signal DMAFLAG is stopped every 16 ms. The Rukoto.

  When the DMA transfer is completed, the VDP 1750c, as described above, from the character RAM 1750z by the transfer IC 1750m based on the sprite setting data written in the second buffer and the drawing condition setting data written in the VDP register 1750cb. Sprite data is extracted, and the extracted sprite data is developed into a bitmap on a canvas CV (not shown) which is a virtual screen to generate drawing data. The VDP 1750c holds the generated drawing data for each line in the line buffer, and outputs the drawing data held in the line buffer to the scaler IC 1750f.

  As shown in FIG. 161, the VDP 1750c decomposes the generated drawing data into red (R), green (G), and blue (B), and in synchronization with the clock signal CLK-IN, The green video signal G-INN, the blue video signal B-INN, the horizontal synchronization signal HS-IN, and the vertical synchronization signal VS-IN are output to the scaler IC 1750f. Here, the horizontal synchronization signal HS-IN and the vertical synchronization signal VS-IN are signals used to reconstruct a screen that has been decomposed into red (R), green (G), and blue (B). The signal HS-IN is synchronized in the horizontal direction, and the vertical synchronization signal VS-IN is synchronized in the vertical direction.

  As shown in FIG. 161, the VDP 1750c is configured to receive a reset signal from the external WDT 1750k, and outputs an ENABLE signal DE-IN to the scaler IC 1750f when no reset signal is input. When the reset signal is not input, the ENABLE signal DE-IN is not output to the scaler IC 1750f. The ENABLE signal DE-IN is a signal that informs the scaler IC 1750f that the red video signal R-INN, the green video signal G-INN, and the blue video signal B-INN are valid signals.

[12-1-5. Scaler IC]
As described above, the scaler IC 1750f has the drawing data from the VDP 1750c synchronized with the clock signal CLK-IN, the red video signal R-INN, the green video signal G-INN, the blue video signal B-INN, and the horizontal synchronization signal. HS-IN and vertical synchronizing signal VS-IN are input. The scaler IC 1750f reconstructs drawing data based on these red video signal R-INN, green video signal G-INN, blue video signal B-INN, horizontal synchronization signal HS-IN, and vertical synchronization signal VS-IN, Write to the frame memory 1750g.

  As shown in FIG. 161, the scaler IC 1750f includes a register group 1750fa. Although a specific configuration of the register group 1750fa will be described later, the scaler IC 1750f reconfigures drawing data from the VDP 1750c with reference to various setting values written in the register group 1750fa. Then, the scaler IC 1750f writes the drawing data reconstructed based on the field signal FIELD from the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a into the frame memory 1750g. Various setting values written in the register group 1750fa are written by the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a. Specifically, the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a first outputs an access set signal SCL-SS for setting the access to the register group 1750fa of the scaler IC 1750f to the scaler IC 1750f. Then, a total of 8 bits (1 byte) of information of 1 bit for writing to the register and 7 bits of information indicating the address of the register to be written is written as serial data SCL-S0 and the I / F clock signal SCL- The 8-bit (1 byte) information indicating the set value to be written to the register is transmitted to the scaler IC 1750f in synchronization with the SLK, and the scaler IC 1750f is synchronized with the I / F clock signal SCL-SLK as the serial data SCL-S0. Send to. In this manner, the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a sequentially transmits the write register address value and the write setting value as the write serial data SCL-S0 to the scaler IC 1750f in synchronization with the I / F clock signal SCL-SLK.

  Scaler IC 1750f captures write serial data SCL-S0 in synchronization with I / F clock signal SCL-SLK, restores the captured write data SCL-S0 to parallel data, and writes a set value to a register to be written. The liquid crystal control MPU 1750a outputs an access set signal SCL-SS for invalidating the access to the register group 1750fa of the scaler IC 1750f to the scaler IC 1750f when the transmission of the write register address value and the write set value is completed. As a result, access to the register group 1750fa of the scaler IC 1750f is invalidated, so that various setting values written in the register group 1750fa can be protected.

  Here, when various settings written in the register group 1750fa of the scaler IC 1750f are read and referred to by the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a, first, an access set signal SCL-SS for effectively setting access to the register group 1750fa of the scaler IC 1750f. Is output to the scaler IC 1750f. Then, a total of 8 bits (1 byte) of information of 1 bit indicating that reading is performed to the register and 7 bits of information indicating the value of the address of the register to be read is written as serial data SCL-S0 and the I / F clock signal SCL- It transmits to the scaler IC 1750f in synchronization with SLK. The scaler IC 1750f takes in the write serial data SCL-S0 in synchronization with the I / F clock signal SCL-SLK, and restores the fetched serial data SCL-S0 to parallel data to read the set value written in the register. Read and read serial data SCL-S1 is transmitted to the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a in synchronization with the I / F clock signal SCL-SLK. The liquid crystal control MPU 1750a takes in the read serial data SCL-S1 in synchronization with the I / F clock signal SCL-SLK, and restores the read serial data SCL-S1 into parallel data and writes it in the read register. You can refer to the set value. As described above, the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a transmits the register address value to be read as write serial data SCL-S0 to the scaler IC 1750f in synchronization with the I / F clock signal SCL-SLK, unlike the case where the set value is written to the register. . The liquid crystal control MPU 1750a transmits the address value of the register to be read, and when the reception of the setting value written in the address to be read is completed, the access set signal SCL for invalidating the access to the register group 1750fa of the scaler IC 1750f. -Output SS to scaler IC 1750f. As a result, access to the register group 1750fa of the scaler IC 1750f is invalidated, so that various setting values written in the register group 1750fa can be protected.

  As described above, the scaler IC 1750f reconstructs the drawing data from the VDP 1750c based on the various setting values written in the register group 1750fa, and writes it into the frame memory 1750g. The scaler IC 1750f, which will be described in detail later, reads out the drawn drawing data and decomposes it into red (R), green (G), and blue (B) as shown in FIG. In synchronization with OUT, the red video signal R, the green video signal G, the blue video signal B, the horizontal synchronization signal HS-OUT, and the vertical synchronization signal VS-OUT are output to the LVDS transmitter 1750h. Here, the horizontal synchronization signal HS-OUT and the vertical synchronization signal VS-OUT are red (R), green (G), and blue (G) as in the above-described horizontal synchronization signal HS-IN and vertical synchronization signal VS-IN. B) is a signal used to reconstruct the screen that has been decomposed. The horizontal synchronization signal HS-OUT is synchronized in the horizontal direction, and the vertical synchronization signal VS-OUT is synchronized in the vertical direction. is there.

  As shown in FIG. 161, the scaler IC 1750f receives the ENABLE signal DE-IN from the VDP 1750c. The scaler IC 1750f outputs the ENABLE signal DEVO to the LVDS transmitter 1750h when the ENABLE signal DE-IN is input, and does not output the ENABLE signal DEVO to the LVDS transmitter 1750h when the ENABLE signal DEVO is not input. The ENABLE signal DEVO is a signal that informs the LVDS transmitter 1750h that the red video signal R, the green video signal G, and the blue video signal B are valid signals.

[12-1-6. Frame memory]
As described above, in the frame memory 1750g, the drawing data reconstructed by the scaler IC 1750f is written or the written drawing data is read out.

  As shown in FIG. 161, the frame memory 1750g includes fields (field 1750g [0] to field 1750g [3]) partitioned into four storage areas. These fields 1750g [0] to 1750g [3] are divided in units of 800 × 300 pixels.

  As described above, the liquid crystal display 1315 has 800 pixels in the horizontal direction and 600 pixels in the vertical direction, and the drawing data written in the frame memory 1750g [0] is displayed on the upper screen and the frame memory 1750g [1]. One screen is configured by setting the drawing data written in the lower screen as the lower screen. Further, one screen is configured by setting the drawing data written in the frame memory 1750g [2] as the upper screen and the drawing data written in the frame memory 1750g [3] as the lower screen. Thus, the drawing data for two screens is written in the frame memory 1750g.

  The liquid crystal control MPU 1750a outputs a field signal FIELD indicating whether the drawing data output from the VDP 1750c is drawing data for the upper screen or drawing data for the lower screen to the scaler IC 1750f. When the scaler IC 1750f receives the field signal FIELD, the scaler IC 1750f specifies the field to be written in the field 1750g [0] to the field 1750g [3] of the frame memory 1750g based on the input field signal FIELD. . In this way, the upper screen drawing data and the lower screen drawing data from the VDP 1750c can be written without error in the fields 1750g [0] to 1750g [3] of the frame memory 1750g. When the upper screen drawing data and the lower screen drawing data are written, the scaler IC 1750f sequentially reads the upper screen drawing data and the lower screen drawing data, and, as described above, red (R), green (G ), Blue (B), and in synchronization with the clock signal CLK-OUT, the red video signal R, the green video signal G, the blue video signal B, the horizontal synchronization signal HS-OUT, and the vertical synchronization signal VS-OUT as an LVDS transmitter. 1750h.

[12-1-7. LVDS transmitter]
As described above, the LVDS transmitter 1750h is configured such that the upper screen drawing data and the lower screen drawing data from the scaler IC 1750f are synchronized with the clock signal CLK-OUT, the red video signal R, the green video signal G, and the blue video signal. B, horizontal synchronization signal HS-OUT, and vertical synchronization signal VS-OUT. The LVDS transmitter 1750h receives the ENABLE signal DEVO from the scaler IC 1750f. The LVDS transmitter 1750h has a small amplitude in order to realize high-speed serial transmission, and transmits in a differential manner in order to make it less susceptible to external noise (“transmission scheme using a small differential signal scheme”). "). In synchronization with the clock signal, a red video signal R, a green video signal G, a blue video signal B, a horizontal synchronization signal HS-OUT, a vertical synchronization signal VS-OUT, and an ENABLE signal DEVO are transmitted to the liquid crystal display 1315.

  The red video signal R, green video signal G, blue video signal B, horizontal synchronization signal HS-OUT, vertical synchronization signal VS-OUT, and ENABLE signal DEVO from the LVDS transmitter 1750h are displayed on the liquid crystal display 1315 as shown in FIG. Is received by the LVDS receiver 1315a provided in the system. The LVDS receiver 1315a restores the serial data of the received red video signal R, green video signal G, blue video signal B, horizontal synchronization signal HS-OUT, vertical synchronization signal VS-OUT, and ENABLE signal DEVO to parallel data. The LVDS receiver 1315a reconstructs drawing data based on the restored red video signal R, green video signal G, blue video signal B, horizontal synchronization signal HS-OUT, and vertical synchronization signal VS-OUT, and a liquid crystal display 1315. A drive signal is output to the liquid crystal display 1315 by the liquid crystal drive circuit 1315b provided in the above. As a result, drawing data for one screen based on drawing data for the upper screen and drawing data for the lower screen is displayed on the liquid crystal display 1315. The ENABLE signal DEVO indicates that the red video signal R, the green video signal G, and the blue video signal B are valid signals via the LVDS transmitter 1750h and the LVDS receiver 1315a of the liquid crystal display 1315. This signal is transmitted to the liquid crystal drive circuit 1315 b provided in 1315.

[12-2. Scaler IC settings]
Next, the register group 1750fa of the scaler IC 1750f will be described. As shown in FIG. 162, the register group 1750fa includes field 1750g [0] to field 1750g [3] read start address registers OSFILD0 to OSFILD3, field 1750g [0] to field 1750g [3] write start address registers ISFILD0 to ISFILD3, The memory read line feed width register OMWI, the memory write line feed width register IMWI, the memory access control register MDACT, the memory access start address register MDAST, the memory access end address register MDAEND, and the like.

[12-2-1. Read start address register]
The field 1750g [0] read start address register OSFILD0 to field 1750g [3] read start address register OSFILD3 designates the start of reading of the fields 1750g [0] to 1750g [3] of the frame memory 1750g shown in FIG. This is a register in which the start address is set. The field 1750g [0] read start address register OSFILD0 to the field 1750g [3] read start address register OSFILD3 each have a storage capacity of 24 bits (3 bytes) as shown in FIG. An address is associated. A predetermined set value is set for each byte.

[12-2-1 (a). Field 1750g [0] Read start address register OSFILD0]
In the field 1750g [0] read start address register OSFILD0, as shown in FIG. 162, the address 0x08 (where "0x" is the value 08 in hexadecimal notation) is stored in the first byte OSFILD0 [7: 0]. The same applies hereinafter.) Address 0x09 is associated with OSFILD0 [15: 8] of the second byte, and address 0x0A is associated with OSFILD0 [23:16] of the third byte. By specifying these addresses 0x08 to 0x0A, the field 1750g [0] read start address register OSFILD0 (OSFILD0 [23:16], OSFILD0 [15: 8], OSFILD0 [7: 0]) can be accessed. As setting values, 0x00 is set in OSFILD0 [23:16], 0x00 is set in OSFILD0 [15: 8], and 0x00 is set in OSFILD0 [7: 0]. The scaler IC 1750f obtains the start address designating the start of reading of the field 1750g [0] of the frame memory 1750g from the set values, and, as described above, the upper screen drawing data written in the field 1750g [0]. Is read. The set value of the field 1750g [0] read start address register OSFILD0 will be described in detail later, but is transmitted in synchronization with the I / F clock signal SCL-SCL from the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a shown in FIG. The written serial data SCL-S0 is set.

[12-2-1 (b). Field 1750g [1] Read start address register OSFILD1]
As shown in FIG. 162, the field 1750g [1] read start address register OSFILD1 has an address 0x0B in the first byte OSFILD1 [7: 0], an address 0x0C in the second byte OSFILD1 [15: 8], and a third byte. OSFILD1 [23:16] is associated with address 0x0D. By specifying these addresses 0x0B to 0x0D, the field 1750g [1] read start address register OSFILD1 (OSFILD1 [23:16], OSFILD1 [15: 8], OSFILD1 [7: 0]) can be accessed. As setting values, 0x00 is set in OSFILD1 [23:16], 0x00 is set in OSFILD1 [15: 8], and 0x00 is set in OSFILD1 [7: 0]. The scaler IC 1750f obtains the start address designating the start of reading of the field 1750g [1] of the frame memory 1750g based on the set values, and, as described above, the lower screen drawing data written in the field 1750g [1]. Is read. The set value of the field 1750g [1] read start address register OSFILD1 will be described in detail later, but write serial data SCL transmitted in synchronization with the I / F clock signal SCL-SCL from the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a. It is set by -S0.

  As described above, the scaler IC 1750f reads the start address designating the start of reading of the field 1750g [0] and the field 1750g [1] of the frame memory 1750g, the field 1750g [0] read start address register OSFILD0, and the field 1750g [1]. By obtaining the setting values set in the start address register OSFILD1, the drawing data of the upper screen written in the field 1750g [0] is read, and subsequently the drawing data of the lower screen written in the field 1750g [1]. The drawing data for one screen can be read from the frame memory 1750g. The set values set in the field 1750g [0] read start address register OSFILD0 and the field 1750g [1] read start address register OSFILD1 are the same value. This is because the top addresses read from 1750g are the same (see FIG. 163 (a)).

[12-2-1 (c). Field 1750g [2] read start address register OSFILD2]
As shown in FIG. 162, the field 1750g [2] read start address register OSFILD2 has the address 0x0E at the first byte OSFILD2 [7: 0], the address 0x0F at the second byte OSFILD2 [15: 8], and the third byte. OSFILD2 [23:16] is associated with address 0x10. By designating these addresses 0x0E to 0x10, the field 1750g [2] read start address register OSFILD2 (OSFILD2 [23:16], OSFILD2 [15: 8], OSFILD2 [7: 0]) can be accessed. As setting values, OSFILD2 [23:16] is set to 0x20, OSFILD2 [15: 8] is set to 0x00, and OSFILD2 [7: 0] is set to 0x00. The scaler IC 1750f obtains the start address designating the start of reading of the field 1750g [2] of the frame memory 1750g from the set values, and, as described above, the upper screen drawing data written in the field 1750g [2]. Is read. The set value of the field 1750g [2] read start address register OSFILD2 will be described in detail later, but write serial data SCL transmitted in synchronization with the I / F clock signal SCL-SCL from the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a. It is set by -S0.

[12-2-1 (d). Field 1750g [3] Read start address register OSFILD3]
As shown in FIG. 162, the field 1750g [3] read start address register OSFILD3 has the address 0x11 at the first byte OSFILD3 [7: 0], the address 0x12 at the OSFILD3 [15: 8] at the second byte, and the third byte. OSFILD3 [23:16] is associated with address 0x13. By designating these addresses 0x11 to 0x13, the field 1750g [3] read start address register OSFILD3 (OSFILD3 [23:16], OSFILD3 [15: 8], OSFILD3 [7: 0]) can be accessed. As setting values, 0x20 is set in OSFILD3 [23:16], 0x00 is set in OSFILD3 [15: 8], and 0x00 is set in OSFILD3 [7: 0]. The scaler IC 1750f obtains the start address designating the start of reading of the field 1750g [3] of the frame memory 1750g based on the set values, and, as described above, the lower screen drawing data written in the field 1750g [3]. Is read. The set value of the field 1750g [3] read start address register OSFILD3 will be described in detail later, but the write serial data SCL transmitted in synchronization with the I / F clock signal SCL-SCL from the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a. It is set by -S0.

  As described above, the scaler IC 1750f reads the start address designating the reading start of the field 1750g [1] and the field 1750g [2] of the frame memory 1750g, the field 1750g [1] reading start address register OSFILD1 and the field 1750g [2] reading. The upper screen drawing data written in the field 1750g [1] is read by acquiring the setting values set in the start address register OSFILD2, and the lower screen drawing data written in the field 1750g [2]. The drawing data for one screen can be read from the frame memory 1750g. The set values set in the field 1750g [1] read start address register OSFILD1 and the field 1750g [2] read start address register OSFILD2 are the same value. This is because the top addresses read from 1750g are the same (see FIG. 163 (a)).

[12-2-2. Write start address register]
Field 1750g [0] write start address register ISFILD0 to field 1750g [3] Write start address register ISFILD3 designates the start of writing of fields 1750g [0] to 1750g [3] of frame memory 1750g shown in FIG. This is a register in which the start address is set. Field 1750g [0] write start address register ISFILD0 to field 1750g [3] write start address register ISFILD3 each have a storage capacity of 24 bits (3 bytes) as shown in FIG. An address is associated. A predetermined set value is set for each byte.

[12-2-2 (a). Field 1750g [0] Write Start Address Register ISFILD0] As shown in FIG. 162, the field 1750g [0] Write Start Address Register ISFILD0 has an address 0x14 at the second byte ISFILD0 [7: 0]. [15: 8] is associated with address 0x15, and the third byte ISFILD [23:16] is associated with address 0x16. By specifying these addresses 0x014 to 0x16, the field 1750g [0] write start address register ISFILD0 (ISFILD0 [23:16], ISFILD0 [15: 8], ISFILD0 [7: 0]) can be accessed. As setting values, 0x00 is set in ISFILD0 [23:16], 0x00 is set in OSFILD0 [15: 8], and 0x00 is set in OSFILD0 [7: 0]. The scaler IC 1750f obtains the start address designating the start of writing of the field 1750g [0] of the frame memory 1750g from the set values, and writes the drawing data of the upper screen in the field 1750g [0] as described above. The set value of the field 1750g [0] write start address register ISFILD0 will be described in detail later, but is transmitted in synchronization with the I / F clock signal SCL-SCL from the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a shown in FIG. The written serial data SCL-S0 is set.

[12-2-2 (b). Field 1750g [1] Write start address register ISFILD1]
As shown in FIG. 162, the field 1750g [1] write start address register ISFILD1 has the address 0x17 at the first byte ISFILD1 [7: 0], the address 0x18 at the second byte ISFILD1 [15: 8], and the third byte. Address 0x19 is associated with ISFILD1 [23:16]. By specifying these addresses 0x017 to 0x19, the field 1750g [1] write start address register ISFILD1 (ISFILD1 [23:16], ISFILD1 [15: 8], ISFILD1 [7: 0]) can be accessed. As setting values, 0x03 is set in ISFILD1 [23:16], 0xCF is set in OSFILD1 [15: 8], and 0x00 is set in OSFILD1 [7: 0]. The scaler IC 1750f obtains the start address designating the start of writing of the field 1750g [1] of the frame memory 1750g from the set values, and writes the drawing data of the lower screen in the field 1750g [1] as described above. The set value of the field 1750g [1] write start address register ISFILD1 will be described in detail later, but write serial data SCL transmitted in synchronization with the I / F clock signal SCL-SCL from the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a. It is set by -S0.

  As described above, the scaler IC 1750f writes the start address designating the start of writing of the field 1750g [0] and the field 1750g [1] of the frame memory 1750g, the field 1750g [0] write start address register ISFILD0, and the field 1750g [1]. By obtaining the setting values set in the start address register ISFILD1, the drawing data of the upper screen can be written in the field 1750g [0], and the drawing data of the lower screen can be written in the field 1750g [1]. Can be written into the frame memory 1750g. Note that the set values set in the field 1750g [0] write start address register ISFILD0 and the field 1750g [1] write start address register ISFILD2 are different from each other, as described above, this is VDP1760c. The drawing data for one screen is generated in the frame memory 1750g by writing the drawing data for the upper screen and the drawing data for the lower screen separately from the field 1750g [0] and the field 1750g [1] of the frame memory 1750g. (See FIG. 163 (b)).

[12-2-2 (c). Field 1750g [2] Write start address register OSFILD2]
As shown in FIG. 162, the field 1750g [2] write start address register ISFILD2 has the address 0x1A in the first byte ISFILD2 [7: 0], the address 0x1B in the second byte ISFILD2 [15: 8], and the third byte. Address 0x1C is associated with ISFILD2 [23:16]. By specifying these addresses 0x01A to 0x1C, the field 1750g [2] write start address register ISFILD2 (ISFILD2 [23:16], ISFILD2 [15: 8], ISFILD2 [7: 0]) can be accessed. As setting values, 0x20 is set in ISFILD2 [23:16], 0x00 is set in OSFILD2 [15: 8], and 0x00 is set in OSFILD2 [7: 0]. Scaler IC 1750f obtains the start address for designating the start of writing in field 1750g [2] of frame memory 1750g from the set values, and writes the drawing data of the upper screen in field 1750g [2] as described above. The set value of the field 1750g [2] write start address register ISFILD2 is transmitted in synchronization with the I / F clock signal SCL-SCL from the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a shown in FIG. The written serial data SCL-S0 is set.

[12-2-2 (d). Field 1750g [3] Write start address register OSFILD3]
As shown in FIG. 162, the field 1750g [3] write start address register ISFILD3 has an address 0x1D at the first byte ISFILD3 [7: 0], an address 0x1E at the second byte ISFILD3 [15: 8], and the third byte. Address 0x1F is associated with ISFILD3 [23:16]. By designating these addresses 0x01D to 0x1F, the field 1750g [3] write start address register ISFILD3 (ISFILD3 [23:16], ISFILD3 [15: 8], ISFILD3 [7: 0]) can be accessed. As setting values, 0x23 is set in ISFILD3 [23:16], 0xCF is set in OSFILD3 [15: 8], and 0x00 is set in OSFILD3 [7: 0]. The scaler IC 1750f obtains the start address for designating the start of writing in the field 1750g [3] of the frame memory 1750g from the set values, and writes the drawing data of the lower screen in the field 1750g [3] as described above. The set value of the field 1750g [3] write start address register ISFILD3 will be described in detail later, but write serial data SCL transmitted in synchronization with the I / F clock signal SCL-SCL from the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a. It is set by -S0.

  As described above, the scaler IC 1750f writes the start address designating the start of writing to the field 1750g [2] and the field 1750g [3] of the frame memory 1750g, the field 1750g [2] write start address register ISFILD2, and the field 1750g [3]. By obtaining the setting values set in the start address register ISFILD3, the upper screen drawing data can be written in the field 1750g [2], and the lower screen drawing data can be written in the field 1750g [3]. Can be written into the frame memory 1750g. Note that the set values set in the field 1750g [2] write start address register ISFILD2 and the field 1750g [3] write start address register ISFILD3 are different from each other, as described above, this is VDP1760c. The drawing data for one screen is generated in the frame memory 1750g by separately writing the drawing data for the upper screen and the drawing data for the lower screen from field 1750g [2] and field 1750g [3] of the frame memory 1750g. (See FIG. 163 (b)).

[12-2-3. Memory read line feed width register]
The memory read line feed width register OMWI is a register in which the total pixels in the horizontal direction of the liquid crystal display 1315 shown in FIG. 161, that is, pixels for one line are set when drawing data is read from the frame memory 1750g. . As shown in FIG. 162, the memory read line feed width register OMWI has a storage capacity of 8 bits (1 byte) and is associated with an address 0x20. This address 0x20 can be designated to access the memory read line feed width register OMWI [7], and 0xD is set as the setting value in the memory read line feed width register OMWI [7]. In this embodiment, as described above, the liquid crystal display 1315 has 800 pixels in the left-right direction, that is, for one line. As the setting value of the memory read line feed width register OMWI, at least the total number of pixels displayed by arranging the above characters (data for drawing a rectangular area of 64 pixels) in the left-right direction is larger than 800 pixels of the liquid crystal display 1315. Is set. Specifically, a value 13 (= 0xD) that is an integer value greater than 12.5 obtained by dividing 800 pixels of the liquid crystal display 1315 by 64 pixels of the character is set. The set value of the memory read line feed width register OMWI [7] will be described in detail later, but write serial data SCL- transmitted in synchronization with the I / F clock signal SCL-SCL from the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a. It is set by S0.

[12-2-4. Memory write line feed width register]
The memory writing line feed width register IMWI is a register in which the total pixels in the left-right direction of the liquid crystal display 1315, that is, pixels for one line, are set when drawing data from the VDP 1750c is written into the frame memory 1750g. As shown in FIG. 162, the memory write line feed width register IMWI has a storage capacity of 8 bits (1 byte) and is associated with an address 0x21. This address 0x21 can be designated to access the memory write line feed width register IMWI [7], and the set value is the same as the set value set in the memory read line feed width register OMWI [7]. Some 0xD is set. In this embodiment, as described above, the liquid crystal display 1315 has 800 pixels in the left-right direction, that is, for one line. As a setting value of the memory write line feed width register IMWI, at least the total number of pixels displayed by arranging the above characters (data for drawing a rectangular area of 64 pixels) in the horizontal direction is larger than 800 pixels of the liquid crystal display 1315. Is set. Specifically, a value 13 (= 0xD) that is an integer value greater than 12.5 obtained by dividing 800 pixels of the liquid crystal display 1315 by 64 pixels of the character is set. The set value of the memory write line feed width register IMWI [7] will be described in detail later, but write serial data SCL- transmitted in synchronization with the I / F clock signal SCL-SCL from the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a. It is set by S0.

[12-2-5. Memory access control register]
The memory access control register MDACT is a register for setting access to the frame memory 1750g. As shown in FIG. 162, the memory access control register MDACT has a storage capacity of 8 bits (1 byte) and is associated with an address 0x26. The memory access control register MDACT can be accessed by designating this address 0x26. As setting values, 0x0 is set in the memory access control register MDACT [7: 4], 0x0 is set in the MDACT [3], and MDACT [ 2: 0] is set to 0x0. The memory access control register MDACT [7: 4] is a reserved value and is fixed to 0x0. The memory access control register MDACT [3] is a bit for setting a connection test to the frame memory 1750g. When the value 1 (= 0x1) is set, the connection test can be performed. In normal operation, the value 0 (= 0x0) is set. Set. In this embodiment, 0x0 is set in the memory access control register MDACT [3], and normal operation is performed. The memory access control register MDACT [2: 0] can set a direct memory access command, and a detailed description thereof is omitted. In this embodiment, access from the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a to the frame memory 1750g is validated. The value to be set to 0 (= 0x0) is set. As described above, the setting value set in the memory access control register MDACT [7: 0] is 0x0, and this 0x0 is a default value that the scaler IC 1750f sets as an initial value at power-on or reset. In the present embodiment, the detailed description thereof will be described later, but it is set by the write serial data SCL-S0 transmitted in synchronization with the I / F clock signal SCL-SCL from the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a. .

[12-2-6. Memory access start address register]
The memory access start address register MDAST is a register for setting a start address when accessing the frame memory 1750g from the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a. As shown in FIG. 162, the memory access start address register MDAST has an address 0x27 at the first byte MDAST [7: 0], an address 0x28 at the second byte MDAST [15: 8], and an MDAST [23 at the third byte. : 16] is associated with address 0x28. The memory access start address register MDAST (MDAST [23:16], MDAST [15: 8], MDAST [7: 0]) can be accessed by designating these addresses 0x027 to 0x29. As setting values, 0x0 is set in MDAST [23:16], 0x0 is set in MDAST [15: 8], and 0x0 is set in MDAST [7: 0]. In this way, the set values set in the memory access start address registers MDAST [23:16], MDAST [15: 8], and MDAST [7: 0] are all 0x0. The scaler IC 1750f sometimes has a default value set as an initial value. For this reason, in this embodiment, after the power is turned on or reset, it is not set by the write serial data SCL-S0 transmitted in synchronization with the I / F clock signal SCL-SCL from the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a.

[12-2-7. Memory access end address register]
The memory access end address register MDAEND is a register for setting an end address when accessing the frame memory 1750g from the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a. As shown in FIG. 162, the memory access end address register MDAEND has an address 0x2A at the first byte MDAEND [7: 0], an address 0x2B at the second byte MDAEND [15: 8], and an MDAEND [23 at the third byte. : 16] is associated with address 0x2C. The memory access end address register MDAEND (MDAEND [23:16], MDAEND [15: 8], MDAEND [7: 0]) can be accessed by designating these addresses 0x02A to 0x2C. As setting values, 0x0 is set in MDAEND [23:16], 0x0 is set in MDAEND [15: 8], and 0x0 is set in MDAEND [7: 0]. Thus, the set values set in the memory access end address registers MDAEND [23:16], MDAEND [15: 8], and MDAEND [7: 0] are all 0x0, and this 0x0 is set when the power is turned on or reset. The scaler IC 1750f is a default value set as an initial value. For this reason, in this embodiment, after the power is turned on or reset, it is not set by the write serial data SCL-S0 transmitted in synchronization with the I / F clock signal SCL-SCL from the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a.

[12-3. Generation of the screen to be displayed on the liquid crystal display]
Next, generation of a screen to be displayed on the liquid crystal display 1315 illustrated in FIG. 161 will be described. Here, as an example, the drawing data of the upper screen and the drawing data of the lower screen written in the field 1750g [0] and the field 1750g [1] of the frame memory 1750g described above are stored in the frame memory 1750g for one screen. An outline that is generated as drawing data and displayed on the liquid crystal display 1315 will be described.

  When the screen data from the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a is input, the VDP 1750c extracts the above-described sprite data from the character RAM 1750z by the transfer IC 1750m based on the input screen data, and the extracted sprite data is displayed on the virtual screen of the VDP 1750c. Drawing data is generated by developing it into a bitmap with a canvas CV (not shown). The VDP 1750c holds the generated drawing data as it is in the upper screen as it is in the line buffer one line at a time, and outputs the drawing data held in the line buffer to the scaler IC 1750f. Here, the canvas CV is set with the upper left as the origin, the direction from left to right is set as “x direction”, and the direction from top to bottom is set as “y direction”.

  The scaler IC 1750f refers to various setting values written in the register group 1750fa, reconstructs the upper screen drawing data from the VDP 1750c, and uses the reconstructed upper screen drawing data as the field signal FIELD from the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a. Is written in the field 1750g [0] of the frame memory 1750g. As a result, as shown in FIG. 164 (a), the drawing data of the upper screen (800 × 300 pixels (dots)) is written in the field 1750g [0].

  Subsequently, the VDP 1750c shifts the extracted sprite data by the value 300 in the minus y direction, that is, subtracts the value 300 in the y direction, and develops it into a bitmap on the canvas CV to generate drawing data. The VDP 1750c holds the generated drawing data as it is in the lower screen as it is in the line buffer, and outputs the drawing data held in the line buffer to the scaler IC 1750f.

  The scaler IC 1750f refers to various setting values written in the register group 1750fa, reconfigures the lower screen drawing data from the VDP 1750c, and reconfigures the lower screen drawing data based on the field signal FIELD from the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a. Is written in the field 1750g [1] of the frame memory 1750g. As a result, as shown in FIG. 164 (b), the drawing data of the lower screen (800 × 300 pixels (dots)) is written in the field 1750g [1].

  Then, the scaler IC 1750f stores the drawing data of the upper screen and the drawing data of the lower screen written in the field 1750g [0] and the field 1750g [1] of the frame memory 1750g for one screen (800 × 600), respectively. Pixel (dot)) is generated as drawing data, and the drawing data for the upper screen and the drawing data for the lower screen are sequentially read out. As shown in FIG. Can be displayed in the display area 1320.

  As described above, the VDP 1750c can generate drawing data for the upper screen and drawing data for the lower screen based on common drawing data expanded into a bitmap on a canvas CV (not shown) which is a virtual screen of the VDP 1750c. . The VDP 1750c uses the generated drawing data for the upper screen and drawing data for the lower screen as line drawing data for one line (800 pixels (dots)) for drawing the horizontal direction of the liquid crystal display 1315 line by line. And the drawing data held in the line buffer is output to the scaler IC 1750f, so that the generated drawing data for the upper screen and the drawing data for the lower screen, that is, drawing data for one screen, can be transferred to the frame memory 1750g at high speed. Can write. Therefore, even when the VDP 1750c cannot output the drawing data for one screen (800 × 600 pixels (dots)) to the frame memory 1750g at a time, the drawing data for one screen is reduced to the frame memory without reducing the resolution. 1750g can be written.

  The VDP 1750c cuts out drawing data arranged in a cut-out area, which is a rectangular area of 800 dots in the x direction and 300 dots in the y direction from the origin of the canvas CV, and outputs the drawing data to the scaler IC 1750f. In the present embodiment, the case where the drawing data for the upper screen is generated is set as a reference. For this reason, when the drawing data of the upper screen is generated, the drawing data expanded into the bitmap on the canvas CV is already arranged in the cutout area. On the other hand, when generating drawing data for the lower screen, the drawing data for the lower screen is moved to the cut-out area by subtracting the value 300 from the y-coordinate value of the drawing data expanded into a bitmap on the canvas CV and placing it. It can be made into the state made into.

[13. Various control processes of main control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the main control board 1700 in accordance with the progress of the game of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described. First, various random numbers used for game control will be described, and then main control side power-on processing, main control side timer interruption processing, and magnetic detection signal validity determination processing will be described. FIG. 165 is a flowchart showing an example of main control-side power-on processing, FIG. 166 is a flowchart showing continuation of main-control-side power-on processing in FIG. 165, and FIG. 167 is an example of main control-side timer interrupt processing. FIG. 168 is a flowchart showing an example of the magnetic detection signal validity determination process. The magnetic detection signal validity determination process is performed as one process of the fraud detection process in step S84 in the main control timer interrupt process described later.

[13-1. Various random numbers]
As a variety of random numbers used for game control, a big hit determination random number used to determine whether or not to generate a big hit gaming state, and a big hit determination initial value determination random number used to determine the initial value of the big hit determination random number Are displayed on the upper special symbol display 1480 and the lower special symbol display 1490 shown in FIG. 118, and a reach determination random number used for determining whether or not to generate reach when the big hit gaming state is not generated. Used to determine the combination of the random number for the variable display pattern used to determine the variable display pattern and the special symbol displayed on the upper special symbol display 1480 and the lower special symbol display 1490 when the big hit gaming state is generated. The jackpot symbol random number and the random number for determining the initial value for the jackpot symbol used to determine the initial value of the jackpot symbol random number are prepared. That. In addition to these random numbers, a normal symbol per-determining random number used for determining whether to open / close the opening / closing blade 1380 of the lower start winning port 1340 shown in FIG. A random number for determining an initial value for determining a normal symbol used for determining an initial value, a random number for a normal symbol variation display pattern used for determining a variation display pattern to be displayed on the ordinary symbol display 1520 shown in FIG. 118, and the like are prepared. Has been.

[13-2. Main control side power-on processing]
When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the main control MPU 1700a of the main control board 1700 performs main control side power-on processing as shown in FIGS. 165 and 166. When the main control side power-on process is started, the main control MPU 1700a sets the stack pointer (step S10). The stack pointer indicates, for example, the address accumulated on the stack to temporarily store the contents of the memory element (register) in use, or temporarily returns the return address of this routine when returning to this routine after completing the subroutine. It indicates the address that is stacked on the stack for storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked. In step S10, an initial address is set in the stack pointer, and the contents of the register, the return address, etc. are stacked on the stack from this initial address. Then, the stack pointer returns to the initial address by sequentially reading from the last stacked stack to the first stacked stack.

  Subsequent to step S10, output of a power failure clear signal is started at the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop IC23 shown in FIG. 151 (step S12). As described above, the power failure clear signal is input to the clear terminal CLR with the logic being LOW via the main control I / O port 1700b shown in FIG. As a result, the main control MPU 1700a can release the latch state of the D-type flip-flop IC23 shown in FIG. 151, and the preset terminal PR of the D-type flip-flop IC23 until the latch state described later is set. The logic input to the terminal can be inverted and output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal, and the signal from the 1Q terminal can be monitored.

  Subsequent to step S12, wait timer processing 1 is performed (step S14), and it is determined whether or not a power failure warning signal is input (step S16). The voltage does not rise immediately from when the power is turned on until the voltage reaches the predetermined voltage. On the other hand, when a power failure or a momentary power failure (a phenomenon in which the supply of power is temporarily stopped) occurs, the voltage decreases, and when it becomes lower than the power failure warning voltage (reference voltage Vref shown in FIG. 151), the power failure monitoring circuit 1700d shown in FIG. A power failure warning signal is input as a power failure warning signal. Similarly, when the voltage becomes lower than the power failure warning voltage from when the power is turned on until it reaches the predetermined voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1700d. Therefore, the wait timer process 1 in step S14 is a process for waiting after the power is turned on until the voltage becomes larger than the power failure warning voltage and stabilizes. In this embodiment, the wait timer process 200 waits for 200 milliseconds (wait timer) (wait timer). ms) is set. In step S16, it is determined whether or not the power failure notice signal is input. This determination is performed based on the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop IC23, as the power failure warning signal.

  Subsequent to step S16, the output of the power failure clear signal is stopped at the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop IC23 (step S18). By stopping the output of the power failure clear signal, the logic becomes HI via the main control I / O port 1700b and is input to the CLR terminal which is a clear terminal. As a result, the main control MPU 1700a can set the D-type flip-flop IC23 to the latched state. When the D-type flip-flop IC23 latches the state where the logic is LOW and is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal, the D-type flip-flop IC23 outputs the power failure warning signal from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal.

  Following step S18, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear switch 268a shown in FIG. 140 is operated (step S20). This determination is made based on whether or not the RAM clear switch 268a of the main control board 1700 is operated and an operation signal (detection signal) is input to the main control MPU 1700a. When the detection signal is input, it is determined that the RAM clear switch 268a is operated. On the other hand, when the detection signal is not input, it is determined that the RAM clear switch 268a is not operated.

  When the RAM clear switch 268a is operated in step S20, a value 1 is set to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S22). On the other hand, when the RAM clear switch 268a is not operated in step S20, the RAM clear is cleared. A value 0 is set in the notification flag RCL-FLG (step S24). This RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is stored in a RAM (hereinafter referred to as “main built-in RAM”) incorporated in the main control MPU 1700a, and game information relating to games such as probability variation, unpaid prize balls, etc. Is a flag indicating whether or not to be erased, and is set to a value of 1 when erasing game information and a value of 0 when not erasing game information. The RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG set in step S22 and step S24 is stored in a general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 1700a.

  Subsequent to step S22 or step S24, wait timer processing 2 is performed (step S26). In the wait timer process 2, the system waits until the system that performs drawing control of the liquid crystal display 1315 by the liquid crystal control board 1750 shown in FIG. For example, various control programs compressed from the liquid crystal control ROM 1750b shown in FIG. 140 are read out and stored in the RAM built in the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a shown in FIG. In this embodiment, 2 seconds (s) is set as a time until booting (boot timer).

  Following step S26, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 0 (step S28). As described above, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to a value of 1 when erasing game information and a value of 0 when not erasing game information. When the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 0 in step S28, that is, when the game information is not deleted, a checksum is calculated (step S30). This checksum is calculated by considering the game information stored in the main built-in RAM as a numerical value.

  Following step S30, whether or not the calculated checksum value (sum value) matches the checksum value (sum value) stored in the main control side power-off processing (power-off) described later. Is determined (step S32). If they match, it is determined whether or not the backup flag BK-FLG is 1 (step S34). Whether the backup flag BK-FLG is stored in the main built-in RAM in the main-control-side power-off processing described later, such as game information, checksum value (sum value), and backup flag BK-FLG value It is a flag indicating whether or not, and is set to a value of 1 when the main-control-side power-off process is normally terminated and to a value of 0 when the main-control-side power-off process is not terminated normally.

  When the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1 in step S34, that is, when the main control side power-off process has been completed normally, the work area of the main internal RAM is set as the time of power recovery (step S36). In this setting, in addition to setting the backup flag BK-FLG to 0, the power recovery time information is read from the ROM built in the main control MPU 1700a (hereinafter referred to as “main internal ROM”). Information is set in the work area of the main internal RAM. Here, “when power is restored” means in addition to a state where the power is turned on from a state where the power is shut off, a state where the power is restored after a power failure or a momentary power loss, and a reset is detected upon detection of high frequency irradiation. In addition, the state after the return is also included.

  Subsequent to step S36, power-on command creation processing is performed (step S38). In the power-on command creation process, the game information is read from the backup information, and various commands corresponding to the game information are stored in a predetermined storage area of the main internal RAM.

  On the other hand, when the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not 0 (value 1) in step S28, that is, when the game information is erased, or when the checksum value (sum value) does not match in step S32. Alternatively, when the backup flag BK-FLG is not a value 1 (value 0) in step S34, that is, when the main control side power-off process has not been terminated normally, the entire area of the main built-in RAM is cleared (step S34). S40). Specifically, the value 0 is written in the main built-in RAM (Note that a predetermined value may be read from the main built-in ROM as an initial value and set). Thereby, for example, the initial value 0 is set to the above-described values such as the big hit determination random number, the initial value update type counter, or the like.

  Following step S40, the work area of the main internal RAM is set as an initial setting (step S42). In this setting, the initial information is read from the main internal ROM and the initial information is set in the work area of the main internal RAM.

  Subsequent to step S42, RAM clear notification and test command creation processing is performed (step S44). In this RAM clear notification and test command creation processing, a RAM clear notification command for notifying the sub-integrated board 1740 shown in FIG. Test commands for performing the various tests are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main internal RAM. When the sub-integrated board 1740 receives the RAM clear notification command, the RAM clear notification command is transmitted to the liquid crystal control board 1750. On the other hand, when the sub-integrated board 1740 receives the test command, the tone generator IC 1740c shown in FIG. Then, test commands for performing various inspections of the liquid crystal control board 1750 and the lamp driving board 1760 are transmitted to the liquid crystal control board 1750, the lamp driving board 1760, and the like.

  Subsequent to step S38 or step S44, interrupt initialization is performed (step S46). This setting is to set an interrupt cycle when a main control timer interrupt process described later is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 4 ms.

  Subsequent to step S46, interrupt permission is set. (Step S48). With this setting, the main control side timer interrupt process is repeated every interrupt cycle set in step S46, that is, every 4 ms.

  Subsequent to step S48, a value A is set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL (step S50). The watchdog timer is cleared by setting value A, value B and value C in this order in this watchdog timer clear register WCL.

  Following step S50, it is determined whether a power failure warning signal is input (step S52). This determination is made based on the power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1700d shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 151, when the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off or a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, the voltage becomes lower than the power failure warning voltage (reference voltage Vref shown in FIG. 151), and the power failure monitoring circuit 1700d A power failure warning signal is input as a power failure warning.

  If no power failure warning signal is input in step S52, a non-winning random number update process is performed (step S54). In this non-winning random number update process, the big hit determination initial value determination random number, the reach determination random number, the variation display pattern random number, the big hit symbol initial value determination random number, and the like are updated. For example, the counter for updating the big hit determination random number is the above-described initial value update type counter, and the range from the lower limit value to the upper limit value of the big hit determination random number is changed every time the main control side timer interrupt processing described later is performed. Is incremented by 1 (counts up). This counter counts up from the big hit determination initial value determination random number to the upper limit value when the big hit determination initial value determination random number is set (updated) by non-winning random number update processing, and then continues from the lower limit value to the big hit value. Counts up to a random number for determining the initial value for determination. Then, the big hit determination initial value determination random number is updated again by the non-winning random number update process. As described above, in the non-winning random number update process, random numbers that are not involved in the winning determination (big hit determination) are updated. It should be noted that the above-described random numbers for normal symbol determination, random numbers for initial value determination for normal symbol determination, random numbers for normal symbol variation display pattern, and the like described above are also updated by this non-winning random number update process. The random number for determining normal symbols is the same as the method for updating the random number for determining big hits, and the description thereof is omitted.

  Following step S54, the process returns to step S50 again to set the value A in the watchdog timer clear register WCL. In step S52, it is determined whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input. For example, a non-winning random number update process is performed in step S54, and steps S50 to S54 are repeated. The processing from step S50 to step S54 is referred to as “main control side main processing”.

  On the other hand, when a power failure warning signal is input in step S52, interrupt prohibition setting is performed (step S56). With this setting, the main control side timer interrupt processing described later is not performed, writing to the main internal RAM is prevented, and rewriting of game information is protected.

  Subsequent to step S56, a power failure clear signal is output to the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop IC23 shown in FIG. 151 via the main control I / O port 1700b, or the open / close blade shown in FIG. Solenoid 1390, open / close plate solenoid 1420, upper special symbol indicator 1480, lower special symbol indicator 1490, upper special symbol memory lamp 1500, lower special symbol memory lamp 1510, normal symbol indicator 1520, normal symbol memory lamp 1530, gaming state The drive signals output to the display lamp 1540, the small hit display lamp 1550, the round display lamp 1560, etc. are stopped (step S58). By outputting the power failure clear signal, the D-type flip-flop IC23 can release the latched state.

  Subsequent to step S58, a checksum is calculated and the calculated value is stored (step S60). This checksum is calculated by regarding the game information in the work area of the main built-in RAM as a numerical value, excluding the storage area for the checksum value (sum value) and backup flag BK-FLG described above.

  Subsequent to step S60, the value 1 is set to the backup flag BK-FLG. (Step S62) This completes the storage of the backup information.

  Subsequent to step S62, the watchdog timer is cleared (step S64). As described above, the clear setting is performed by sequentially setting the value A, the value B, and the value C in the watchdog timer clear register WCL.

  Following step S64, an infinite loop is entered. In this infinite loop, the value A, the value B, and the value C are not sequentially set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL, so that the watchdog timer is not cleared. Therefore, the main control MPU 1700a is reset, and then the main control MPU 1700a performs the main control side power-on process again. Note that the processing of step S56 to step S64 and the infinite loop are referred to as “main control side power-off processing”.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 (main control MPU 1700a) is reset when a power failure occurs or when an instantaneous power failure occurs, and the main control side power-on process is performed by subsequent power recovery.

  In step S32, it is inspected whether the backup information stored in the main internal RAM is normal. In step S34, it is inspected whether the main control side power-off process has been normally completed. is doing. In this way, by checking the backup information stored in the main built-in RAM twice, it is inspected whether the backup information is stored by fraud.

[13-3. Main control timer interrupt processing]
Next, the main control timer interrupt process will be described. This main control side timer interrupt process is repeated every interrupt cycle (4 ms in this embodiment) set in the main control side power-on process shown in FIGS. 165 and 166.

  When the main control side timer interrupt process is started, the main control MPU 1700a of the main control board 1700 sets a value B in the watchdog timer clear register WCL (step S70). At this time, the value B is set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL following the value A set in step S50 of the main control side power-on process (main control side main process).

  Subsequent to step S70, the interrupt flag is cleared (step S72). By clearing the interrupt flag, the interrupt cycle is initialized, and the next interrupt cycle is counted from the initial value.

  Subsequent to step S72, switch input processing is performed (step S74). In this switch input process, various signals input to the input terminal of the main control I / O port 1700b are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main built-in RAM. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 118, a detection signal from the left winning port switch 1475 for detecting a game ball that has entered the decoration unit side normal winning ports 1465, 1470, and a ball entering the winning port unit side normal winning port 1440 A detection signal from the right prize opening switch 1450 that detects the game ball that has been played, a detection signal from the count switch 1430 that detects a game ball that has entered the big prize opening 1400, and a game ball that has entered the upper start prize opening 1270 are detected. A detection signal from the upper start opening switch 1272, a detection signal from the middle start opening switch 1360 detecting a game ball that has entered the middle start winning opening 1330, and a lower detection detecting game ball that has entered the lower start winning opening 1340. Using a detection signal from the start switch 1370, a detection signal from the gate switch 1460 for detecting a game ball that has passed through the gate 1455, and a magnet The payout control board 715 shown in FIG. 140 informs that the payout control board 715 shown in FIG. 140 has successfully received a detection signal from the magnetic detection switch 1395 for detecting fraud and a prize ball command transmitted in a prize ball control process described later. Each ACK signal is read and stored as input information in the input information storage area.

  Subsequent to step S74, timer subtraction processing is performed (step S76). In this timer subtraction process, for example, the upper special symbol display 1480 and the lower special symbol display 1490 shown in FIG. 118 according to the variable display pattern determined in the special symbol and special electric accessory control process described later, In addition to the time when the normal symbol display 1520 shown in FIG. 118 is turned on according to the normal symbol and normal symbol change display pattern determined in the normal electric accessory control process described later, the main control board 1700 (main control MPU 1700a) Time management such as an ACK signal input determination time set as a determination condition when determining whether or not an ACK signal indicating that the payout control board 715 has normally received the various transmitted commands has been input is performed. . Specifically, when the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interruption period is set to 4 ms. When the subtraction result is 0, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is accurately measured.

  In this embodiment, the ACK signal input determination time is set to 100 ms. Each time this timer subtraction process is performed, the ACK signal input determination time is subtracted by 4 ms, and the result of the subtraction becomes 0, thereby accurately measuring the ACK signal input determination time. These various times and the ACK signal input determination time are stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the main built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S76, a winning random number update process is performed (step S78). In the winning random number update process, the big hit determination random number and the big hit symbol random number described above are updated. In addition to these random numbers, the big hit determination initial value determination random number updated in the non-winning random number update process in step S54 in the main control side power-on process (main control side main process) shown in FIG. The random number for determining the initial value for the jackpot symbol is also updated. These random numbers for determining the initial value for jackpot determination and the initial value determining random number for the jackpot symbol are updated in the main control side main process and the main control side timer interrupt process, respectively, thereby improving the randomness. On the other hand, since the big hit determination random number and the big hit symbol random number are random numbers related to the winning determination (big hit determination), each time the winning random number update process is performed, each counter is incremented. For example, the counter for updating the big hit determination random number counts up the range from the lower limit value to the upper limit value of the big hit determination random number every time the main control timer interrupt processing is performed. This counter counts up from the big hit determination initial value determination random number to the upper limit value, and then counts up from the lower limit value to the big hit determination initial value determination random number. When the counter finishes counting the range from the lower limit value to the upper limit value of the jackpot determination random number, the initial value determination random number for jackpot determination is updated by this winning random number update process (this initial value determination random number for jackpot determination) Is also updated by the above-mentioned non-winning random number update process). Note that the above-described random numbers for normal symbol determination and random numbers for determining the initial value for normal symbol determination are also updated by this winning random number update process. The random number for determining normal symbols is the same as the method for updating the random number for determining big hits, and the description thereof is omitted.

  Subsequent to step S78, prize ball control processing is performed (step S80). In this prize ball control process, the input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area and a prize ball command for paying out a game ball is created based on this input information, or the board of the main control board 1700 and the payout control board 715 Or create a self-check command to check the connection status. Then, the created prize ball command or self-check command is transmitted to the payout control board 715. For example, when one game ball enters the big prize opening 1400 shown in FIG. 118, a prize ball command for paying out 15 balls as a prize ball is created and transmitted to the payout control board 715. When the payer ACK signal notifying that the payout control board 715 has successfully completed reception is not input within a predetermined time, a self-check command for confirming the connection state between the main control board 1700 and the payout control board 715 is created. To the payout control board 715. Detailed descriptions thereof will be described later.

  Subsequent to step S80, frame command reception processing is performed (step S82). The payout control board 715 transmits a state command such as a state in which the above-described prize ball unit 450 causes a stagnation of a ball and a game ball cannot be paid out, as will be described in detail later. In the frame command reception process in step S82, when this status command is normally received, information that informs the payout control board 715 to that effect is stored as output information in the output information storage area of the main internal RAM. Although the detailed description thereof will be described later, the normally received status command is shaped and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above.

  Subsequent to step S82, fraud detection processing is performed (step S84). In this fraud detection process, the abnormal state related to the prize ball is confirmed. For example, when the input information is read from the above-described input information storage area and the detection signal from the count switch 1430 is input when the game is not in the big hit game state (when a game ball enters the big prize opening 1400), etc. Then, a prize ball abnormality notification command is created as an abnormal state and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above.

  Subsequent to step S84, a special symbol and special electric accessory control process is performed (step S86). In the special symbol and special electric accessory control process, the input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and the start winning process is performed based on the input information. In this start winning process, it is determined from the input information whether the detection signal from the upper start port switch 1272, the middle start port switch 1360, or the lower start port switch 1370 shown in FIG. 118 has been input to the input terminal. Based on the determination result, when the detection signal is input to the input terminal, the values of various counters that update the big hit determination disturbance and the big hit symbol random number are extracted and used as start information in the main built-in RAM. Store in the start information storage area.

  In this start information storage area, start information storage blocks 0 to 7 (eight start information storage blocks) are provided, start information storage block 0, start information storage block 1, start information storage block 2,... The start information is stored in the order of the start information storage block 7. For example, when the start information is stored in the start information storage blocks 0 to 6, the start information is stored in the start information storage block 7 when the detection signal from the middle start port switch 1360 is input to the input terminal. At this time, identification information indicating that it is detected by the middle start port switch 1360 is also stored. As a result, in the start information storage blocks 0 to 7, it is determined in time series which one of the upper start port switch 1272, the middle start port switch 1360, and the lower start port switch 1370 has been detected. (That is, it is stored so that the history can be understood).

  The starting information stored in the starting information storage block 0 is read out. When this starting information is read, the starting information in the starting information storage block 1 is stored in the starting information storage block 0, the starting information in the starting information storage block 2 is stored in the starting information storage block 1,... The start information is shifted to the start information storage block 6 to make the start information storage block 7 an empty area. For example, when the start information is stored in the start information storage blocks 0 to 2, the start information in the start information storage block 1 is stored in the start information storage block 0, and the start information in the start information storage block 2 is stored in the start information storage block. The start information storage blocks 2 to 7 become free areas. Here, if the start information is stored in the start information storage blocks 0 to 7, the number of the start information storage blocks is set as a holding ball, and the upper special symbol storage lamps 1500a and 1500b and the lower special information shown in FIG. When the game ball is detected by the middle start opening switch 1360 based on the above-described identification information so that the symbol memory lamps 1510a and 1510b are lit, the lighting signal or blinking of the upper special symbol memory lamps 1500a and 1500b In addition to setting the signal output, if the game ball is detected by the upper start opening switch 1272 or the lower start opening switch 1370, the output of the lighting signal or flashing signal of the lower special symbol storage lamps 1510a and 1510b is set. And stored as output information in the output information storage area described above. In the present embodiment, the maximum number of game balls detected by the middle starter switch 1360 that can be stored in the starter information storage block as starter information is set to four, and the upper starter switch 1272 or the lower starter switch 1370 The maximum number of game balls that can be stored as start information in the start information storage block is set to four.

  Following the start winning process, the start information is read from the start information storage block 0, and the game process is performed based on the start information. In this game process, for example, the value of a random number for jackpot determination is extracted from the read start information, and it is determined whether or not it matches the jackpot determination value stored in advance in the main built-in ROM (whether or not to generate a jackpot gaming state) (Referred to as “special lottery”), and whether or not the value of the random number for the big hit symbol is taken out and coincides with the probability variation hit judgment value stored in the main built-in ROM in advance (probability fluctuation is generated) Or not). Here, “probability fluctuation” means that the probability of jackpot changes to a high probability (high probability change) set higher than in normal times (low probability). On the other hand, it is read out from the normal time determination table, while it is read out from the probability change time determination table with high probability.

  The gaming state to be generated is determined by these determination results (the lottery result by the special lottery). In this determined gaming state, a variable display pattern is determined based on the above-mentioned random number for the variable display pattern to create a game effect command and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above, or a lottery result by special lottery Is stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information. In addition, according to the game state to be generated, for example, when the big hit game state is set, the output of the drive signal to the opening / closing plate solenoid 1420 shown in FIG. When the number of times (round) when the special winning opening 1400 is changed from the closed state to the open state is 15 times, the 15 round display lamp 1560 shown in FIG. 118 is turned on for 15 rounds. The output of the lighting signal to the display lamp 1560 is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area.

  Subsequent to step S86, normal symbol and normal electric accessory control processing is performed (step S88). In the normal symbol and normal electric accessory control process, the input information is read from the above-described input information storage area, and the gate winning process is performed based on the input information. In this gate winning process, it is determined from the input information whether the detection signal from the gate switch 1460 shown in FIG. 118 has been input to the input terminal. Based on the determination result, when a detection signal is input to the input terminal, the counter value for updating the normal symbol determination random number described above is extracted and stored as gate information in the gate information storage area of the main built-in RAM. Remember.

  In this gate information storage area, gate information storage blocks 0 to 3 (four gate information storage blocks) are provided. Gate information storage block 0, gate information storage block 1, gate information storage block 2, and gate information Gate information is stored in the order of the storage block 3. For example, when the gate information is stored in the gate information storage blocks 0 to 2, the gate information is stored in the gate information storage block 3 when the detection signal from the gate switch 1460 is input to the input terminal.

  The gate information stored in the gate information storage block 0 is read out. When this gate information is read, the gate information in the gate information storage block 1 is stored in the gate information storage block 0, the gate information in the gate information storage block 2 is stored in the gate information storage block 1, and the gate information in the gate information storage block 3 is stored in the gate information. The gate information storage block 3 becomes an empty area by being shifted to the information storage block 2, respectively. For example, when gate information is stored in the gate information storage blocks 0 to 2, the gate information in the gate information storage block 1 is stored in the gate information storage block 0, and the gate information in the gate information storage block 2 is stored in the gate information storage block. The gate information storage block 2 and the gate information storage block 3 become free areas. Here, when the gate information is stored in the gate information storage blocks 0 to 3, the normal symbol storage lamps 1530a to 1530d shown in FIG. Based on the gate information described above, the output of the lighting signals of the normal symbol storage lamps 1530a to 1530d is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area described above. In the present embodiment, the maximum number of game balls detected by the gate switch 1460 that can be stored in the gate information storage block as gate information is set to four.

  Following the gate winning process, the gate information is read from the gate information storage block 0, the random value for determining the normal symbol is extracted from the read gate information, and the normal symbol per unit determination value stored in the main built-in ROM is stored in advance. It is determined whether or not they match (referred to as “normal lottery”). It is determined whether or not the opening / closing blade 1380 is to be opened / closed based on the determination result (the lottery result by the normal lottery). If they match, the opening / closing blade solenoid 1390 shown in FIG. Is output and stored as output information in the output information storage area described above. In addition, the normal symbol variation display pattern is determined based on the normal symbol variation display pattern random number described above, and the output of the lighting signal to the normal symbol display unit 1520 is set so that the normal symbol display unit 1520 shown in FIG. And stored as output information in the output information storage area described above.

  Subsequent to step S88, port output processing is performed (step S90). In this port output process, output information is read from the output information storage area described above from the output terminal of the main control I / O port 1700b, and various signals are output based on this output information. For example, based on the output information, the main payout ACK signal is output to the payout control board 715 when the status command from the payout control board 715 is normally received from the output terminal, or when the big hit gaming state is shown in FIG. In addition, a driving signal is output to the opening / closing plate solenoid 1420 that performs the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing plate 1410 of the prize winning opening 1400, or the driving signal is output to the opening / closing blade solenoid 1390 that performs the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing blade 1380. Various information related to the game, such as jackpot information output signal, probability fluctuation information output signal, special symbol display information output signal, normal symbol display information output signal, time short and medium information output information, start entrance prize information output signal, etc. shown in a) (Game information) is output to the payout control board 715.

  Subsequent to step S90, sub-integrated board command transmission processing is performed (step S92). In the sub-integrated board command transmission process, the transmission information is read from the transmission information storage area described above, and the transmission information is transmitted to the sub-integrated board 1740 shown in FIG. As described above, the transmission information includes a game effect command, a winning information command, a RAM clear notification command, a test command, a prize ball abnormality notification command, a status command, and the like. In addition to transmitting this transmission information, there is a problem in the connection state based on the value of the self-check flag set when the connection state between the main control board 1700 and the payout control board 715 is confirmed. Sometimes a connection failure command is created and transmitted to the sub-integrated board 1740.

  Subsequent to step S92, a value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL (step S94). By setting the value C in the watchdog timer clear register WCL in step S94, the value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL following the value B set in step S70. As a result, the value A, the value B, and the value C are sequentially set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL, and the watchdog timer is cleared.

  Subsequent to step S94, the register is switched (returned) (step S96), and this routine is terminated. Here, when the main control timer interrupt process is started, the main control MPU 1700a saves the contents of the general-purpose registers on the stack in hardware. This prevents the contents of the general-purpose register used in the main process on the main control side from being destroyed. In step S96, the contents saved on the stack are read and written to the original register. Note that the main control MPU 1700a sets the interrupt permission after the return in step S96.

[13-4. Magnetic detection signal validity judgment processing]
Next, the magnetic detection signal validity determination process will be described. In this magnetic detection signal validity determination process, it is determined whether or not the detection signal from the magnetic detection switch 1395 for detecting an illegal act of causing a game ball to enter the middle start winning opening 1330 and the lower starting winning opening 1340 is valid. This is a process for determining. As described above, the magnetic detection switch 1395 is attached to the winning space forming cover body 265a in the vicinity of the opening / closing blade solenoid 1390 that opens and closes the opening / closing blade 1380. The trajectory of the magnet MG0 embedded in the thin disc 1572aa of the front gear module 1572 and the trajectory of the magnet MG1 embedded in the thin disc 1573aa of the rear gear module 1573 pass through the rear of the opening / closing blade solenoid 1390 in this order. Therefore, in a state where a drive signal is output to the opening / closing blade solenoid 1390, when the magnets MG0 and MG1 pass close to the rear vicinity of the opening / closing blade solenoid 1390 along their tracks, the magnetism generated from the opening / closing blade solenoid 1390 is generated. It is in a state of being shaken by being affected by the magnetism emitted from the magnets MG0 and MG1.

  When the magnetic detection signal validity determination process is started, the main control MPU 1700a of the main control board 1700 determines whether or not the detection signal from the magnetic detection switch 1395 is input as shown in FIG. 168 (step S100). ). In this determination, input information is read from the above-described input information storage area, and it is determined whether or not the detection signal from the magnetic detection switch 1395 is input to the input terminal based on this input information. If the detection signal from the magnetic detection switch 1395 is not input in step S100, it is determined that an illegal act has not been performed, and this routine is ended as it is. On the other hand, when the detection signal from the magnetic detection switch 1395 is input in step S100, it is determined whether or not the drive signal to the open / close blade solenoid 1390 is set (step S102). In this determination, the output information is read from the output information storage area described above, and it is determined whether or not the drive signal to the opening / closing blade solenoid 1390 is set based on the output information. When the drive signal to the opening / closing blade solenoid 1390 is set to be output in step S102, that is, when the drive signal to the opening / closing blade solenoid 1390 is set to be output and the detection signal from the magnetic detection switch 1395 is input, It is determined that the magnetism generated from the opening / closing blade solenoid 1390 is in a state of being fluctuated by the magnetism generated from the magnets MG0 and MG1, and this routine is immediately terminated. In such a case, the detection signal from the magnetic detection switch 1395 is set to be invalid (that is, invalidated). On the other hand, when the drive signal to the opening / closing blade solenoid 1390 is not set to be output in step S102, it is determined that an illegal act is being performed, and the above-described prize ball abnormality notification command is generated and transmitted as described above. The information is stored in the information storage area (step S104), and this routine is terminated.

  As described above, the loop unit 1570 is controlled by the sub integrated board 1740. Outputting various commands from the sub-integrated board 1740 to the main control board 1700 is prohibited due to a predetermined rule. For this reason, the main control MPU 1700a of the main control board 1700 is in a state where it cannot grasp the rotational positions of the front gear module 1572 and the rear gear module 1573. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the magnetism MG0, the magnetism generated from the open / close blade solenoid 1390 is disabled by invalidating the detection signal from the magnetic detection switch 1395 only when the open / close blade 1380 that can be directly controlled by the main control MPU 1700a is opened / closed. The state of being shaken by being influenced by the magnetism emitted from MG1 is not judged as the magnetism of the magnet due to fraud.

  Note that when the main control MPU 1700a opens and closes the open / close wing 1380, for example, when the probability change occurs as a gaming state, the gaming state is advantageous to the player. In such a gaming state, there is no need for the player to perform an illegal act of causing the game ball to enter the middle start winning opening 1330 and the lower starting winning opening 1340 with a magnet. That is, it is extremely preferable that the period during which the detection signal from the magnetic detection switch 1395 is invalidated is limited to a period during which the opening / closing blade 1380 is opened / closed.

[14. Various control processing of payout control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the payout control board 715 will be described. First, the payout control side power-on process will be described, and then the payout control side timer interruption process, ball removal switch operation determination process, rotation angle switch history creation process, sprocket fixed position determination skip process, ball spot determination process, award The winning ball stock number adding process for balls, the winning ball stock number adding process for lending, stock monitoring process, payout ball removal determination setting process, payout setting process, and ball removal setting process will be described. FIG. 169 is a flowchart showing an example of a payout control side power-on process, FIG. 170 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the payout control side power-on process of FIG. 169, and FIG. 171 is a payout control side following FIG. FIG. 172 is a flowchart showing an example of a payout control side timer interruption process, FIG. 173 is a flowchart showing an example of a ball removal switch operation determination process, and FIG. 174 is a rotation chart. FIG. 175 is a flowchart showing an example of a sprocket fixed position determination skip process, FIG. 176 is a flowchart showing an example of a ball sag determination process, and FIG. 177 is a prize. FIG. 178 is a flowchart showing an example of a process for adding the number of prize balls for a ball. FIG. 179 is a flowchart showing an example of stock monitoring processing, FIG. 180 is a flowchart showing an example of payout ball removal determination setting processing, and FIG. 181 is a payout. FIG. 182 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a ball removal setting process, FIG. 183 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a retry operation monitoring process, and FIG. 184 is a flowchart of an inconsistency counter reset determination process. FIG. 185 is a flowchart illustrating an example of an error release switch operation determination process. Ball removal switch operation determination processing, rotation angle switch history creation processing, sprocket fixed position determination skip processing, ball corner determination processing, prize ball stock number addition processing, ball rental prize ball number addition processing, stock The monitoring process, the payout ball removal determination setting process, the retry operation monitoring process, the inconsistency counter reset determination process, and the error release switch operation determination process are one process of the main operation setting process in step S356 in the payout control side power-on process described later. , Ball removal switch operation determination processing, rotation angle switch history creation processing, sprocket fixed position determination skip processing, ball edge determination processing, retry operation monitoring processing, inconsistency counter reset determination processing, error release switch operation determination processing, Prize ball stock addition processing for prize balls, prize ball stock addition processing for rental balls, stock monitoring Management and priority in the order of dispensing ball vent determination setting process is set.

[14-1. Discharge control side power-on processing]
When power is turned on to the pachinko gaming machine 1, the payout control MPU 1710a of the payout control board 715 performs payout control side power-on processing as shown in FIGS. When the payout control side power-on process is started, the payout control MPU 1710a sets an interrupt mode (step S300). This interrupt mode is used to set the priority of interrupts of the payout control MPU 1710a. In this embodiment, a payout control side timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is set as the highest priority, and when this payout control side timer interrupt process is interrupted, the process is preferentially performed.

  Subsequent to step S300, input / output setting (I / O input / output setting) is performed (step S302). In this I / O input / output setting, the I / O port input / output setting of the payout control MPU 1710a is performed.

  Following step S302, wait timer processing 1 is performed (step S304). The voltage does not rise immediately from when the power is turned on until the voltage reaches the predetermined voltage. On the other hand, when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs (a phenomenon in which the supply of power is temporarily stopped), the voltage decreases. As shown in FIG. Is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1700d of the main control board 1700. A power failure notice signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1700d is input when the voltage is equal to or lower than the power failure notice voltage from when the power is turned on to when the voltage rises to a predetermined voltage. Therefore, in the wait timer process 1, after the power is turned on, the process waits until the voltage becomes higher than the power failure notice voltage. In this embodiment, 200 milliseconds (ms) is set as the waiting time (wait timer).

  Subsequent to step S304, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear switch 268a shown in FIG. 140 is operated (step S306). This determination is made based on whether or not the RAM clear switch 268a of the main control board 1700 is operated and an operation signal (detection signal) is input to the payout control MPU 1710a. When the detection signal is input, it is determined that the RAM clear switch 268a is operated. On the other hand, when the detection signal is not input, it is determined that the RAM clear switch 268a is not operated.

  When the RAM clear switch 268a is operated in step S306, the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is set to a value 1 (step S308), while when the RAM clear switch 268a is not operated in step S306, the payout A value 0 is set to the RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG (step S310). The payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is stored in a RAM (hereinafter referred to as “payout built-in RAM”) incorporated in the payout control MPU 1710a, for example, award ball stock number, real ball count, drive command, and the like. This is a flag indicating whether or not payout information related to payout (details will be described later) such as number, various flags, and various information stored in various information storage areas. Value 1 is set to 0 when the payout information is not deleted. The payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG set in step S308 and step S310 is stored in a general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the payout control MPU 1710a.

  Subsequent to step S308 or step S310, a setting for permitting access to the payout internal RAM is performed (step S312). With this setting, the payout internal RAM can be accessed, and for example, payout information can be written (stored) or read out.

  Subsequent to step S312, the stack pointer is set (step S314). The stack pointer indicates, for example, the address accumulated on the stack to temporarily store the contents of the memory element (register) in use, or temporarily returns the return address of this routine when returning to this routine after completing the subroutine. It indicates the address that is stacked on the stack for storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked. In step S314, an initial address is set in the stack pointer, and the contents of the register, the return address, etc. are loaded on the stack from this initial address. Then, the stack pointer returns to the initial address by sequentially reading from the last stacked stack to the first stacked stack.

  Subsequent to step S314, it is determined whether or not the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is 0 (step S316). As described above, the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the payout information is erased and to a value of 0 when the payout information is not erased.

  When the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is 0 in step S316, that is, when the payout information is not deleted, a checksum is calculated (step S318). This checksum calculates the sum by regarding the payout information stored in the payout internal RAM as a numerical value.

  Subsequent to step S318, it is determined whether or not the calculated checksum value matches a checksum value stored in a payout control side power-off process (power-off) described later (step S320). . If they match, it is determined whether or not the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is 1 (step S322). This payout backup flag HBK-FLG stores or holds payout backup information such as payout information, a checksum value, and a value of the payout backup flag HBK-FLG in the payout built-in RAM in the payout control side power-off process described later. This flag is set to a value of 1 when the payout control side power-off process is normally terminated, and to a value of 0 when the payout control side power-off process is not normally terminated.

  When the payout backup flag HBK-FLG has a value of 1 in step S322, that is, when the payout control side power-off process has been completed normally, the work area of the payout internal RAM is set as power recovery (step S324). In this setting, in addition to setting the payout backup flag HBK-FLG to 0, the power recovery time information is read from a ROM built in the payout control MPU 1710a (hereinafter referred to as “payout built-in ROM”). Electric time information is set in the work area of the payout internal RAM. Here, “when power is restored” includes, in addition to the state where the power is turned on from the state where the power is cut off, as well as the state where the power is restored after the power failure or the instantaneous power failure as described above.

  On the other hand, when the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is not 0 (value 1) in step S316, that is, when the payout information is erased, or when the checksum values do not match in step S320, or step If the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is not a value 1 (value 0) in S322, that is, if the payout control side power-off process has not ended normally, the entire area of the payout built-in RAM is cleared (step S326). Then, the work area of the payout internal RAM is set as an initial setting (step S328). In this setting, the initial information is read from the payout built-in ROM, and this initial information is set in the work area of the payout internal RAM.

  Subsequent to step S324 or step S328, interrupt initialization is performed (step S330). This setting is to set an interrupt cycle when payout control side timer interrupt processing described later is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 1.75 ms.

  Subsequent to step S330, interrupt permission setting is performed (step S332). With this setting, the payout control side timer interrupt process is repeated every interrupt cycle set in step S330, that is, every 1.75 ms.

  Subsequent to step S332, it is determined whether or not a power failure notice signal is input (step S334). As described above, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shut off, or when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, as shown in FIG. Input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1700d of the control board 1700. The determination in step S334 is made based on this power failure notice signal.

  If no power failure warning signal is input in step S334, it is determined whether or not the 1.75 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is 1 (step S336). This 1.75 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is a flag that counts 1.75 ms in a payout control side timer interrupt process processed every 1.75 ms, which will be described later. The value is set to 0 when 75 ms has not elapsed.

  When the 1.75 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is 0 in step S336, that is, when 1.75 ms has not elapsed, the process returns to step S334 to determine whether or not a power failure warning signal is input.

  On the other hand, when the 1.75 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is 1 in step S336, that is, when 1.75 ms has elapsed, the 1.75 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is set to 0 (step S338), and FIG. An external WDT clear signal is output to the external watchdog timer (external WDT) 1710c shown (turned ON, step S340). The external WDT 1710c monitors the operation (system) of the payout control MPU 1710a. When the external WDT clear signal is not stopped at the clear signal release time, the payout control MPU 1710a and the payout control I / O port 1710b shown in FIG. A reset signal is output for resetting (periodically diagnosing whether the payout control MPU 1710a system is out of control).

  Subsequent to step S340, port output processing is performed (step S342). In this port output process, various information is read from the output information storage area of the payout internal RAM, and various signals are output from the output terminal of the payout control I / O port 1710b based on the various information. In the output information storage area, for example, payer ACK information indicating that various commands relating to payout from the main control board 1700 have been normally received, drive information for controlling drive to the payout motor 465, and the payout motor 465 are actually stored. Information on the number of award balls for which the number of game balls has been paid out, LED display information displayed on the error LED display 1730 shown in FIG. 140, and reception completion information indicating that the rental request signal from the CR unit has been normally received. Are stored, and when a variety of commands relating to payout from the main control board 1700 are normally received from the output terminal of the payout control I / O port 1710b based on this output information, the payer ACK signal is sent as the main information. Output to control board 1700, output drive signal to payout motor 465, payout motor 465 actually pays out game ball 140 is output as an award ball number information signal to the external terminal board 700a shown in FIG. 140 (in this embodiment, every time the payout motor 465 actually pays out 10 game balls, it is output to the external terminal board 700a. A prize ball number information signal is output), a display signal is output to the error LED display 1730, and a reception completion signal is output to the CR unit when a rent request signal from the CR unit is normally received. To do.

  Subsequent to step S342, port input processing is performed (step S344). In this port input process, various signals input to the input terminal of the payout control I / O port 1710b are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout built-in RAM. For example, as shown in FIG. 140, the operation signal of the error release switch 1731, the detection signal from the rotation angle switch 505, the detection signal from the counting switch 462, the detection signal from the full switch 545, the lending request signal from the CR unit, A detection signal from various signals such as a connection signal, a main payment ACK signal from the main control board 1700 that informs that the main control board 1700 has normally received various commands transmitted in the command transmission process described later, respectively, Stored in the input information storage area as input information.

  Subsequent to step S344, timer update processing is performed (step S346). In this timer update process, the detailed description thereof will be described later, but when determining whether or not the above-described sprocket 457 is in a stagnation state, a sphere detection time set as a determination condition thereof, The skip determination time set when the fixed position determination of the sprocket 457 is not performed, the ball removal determination set when the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 400 and the tank rail member 410 are discharged as described above. 140, a full tank determination time set as a determination condition when determining whether or not the above-mentioned full tank unit 520 is full of game balls, and detection from the ball break switch 426 shown in FIG. When determining whether or not the number of game balls taken into the above-described ball passage unit 420 by the signal is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, the determination condition is set. In addition to performing time management such as the ball breakage judgment time, the number of game balls received and paid out by the recess of the sprocket 457 does not match the number of balls actually detected by the counting switch 462 Inconsistency that is set as the determination condition when determining whether or not to reset an inconsistency counter INCC, which will be described later, for monitoring whether or not game balls that are not consistently paid out are repeatedly issued Time management of counter reset judgment time is performed. For example, when the sphere collision determination time is set to 5005 ms, the timer interruption period is set to 1.75 ms. Therefore, every time this timer update process is performed, the sphere collision determination time is subtracted by 1.75 ms. Since the subtraction result is a value of 0, the sphere collision determination time is accurately measured.

  In this embodiment, the skip determination time is 22.75 ms, the ball removal determination time is 60060 ms, the full tank determination time is 504 ms, the ball breakage determination time is 119 ms, and the mismatch counter reset determination time is set to 7000 s (about 2 hours). Each time this timer update process is performed, the ball removal determination time, the full tank determination time, the ball shortage determination time, and the inconsistency counter reset determination time are subtracted by 1.75 ms, and the subtraction result becomes 0. The ball removal determination time, full tank determination time, ball breakage determination time, and inconsistency counter reset determination time are accurately measured. These various determination times are stored in the time management information storage area of the payout internal RAM as time management information.

  Following step S346, CR communication processing is performed (step S348). In this CR communication process, the input information is read from the above-described input information storage area, and it is determined whether or not a lending request signal from the CR unit is input based on this input information. When a lending request signal is input and this lending request signal is normally received, the reception completion information to that effect is stored in the output information storage area, and the lending request signal is paid out as lending information. Store in the rented ball information storage area of the internal RAM. On the other hand, when the ball rental request signal cannot be normally received, the ball rental request error information to that effect is stored in the state information storage area of the payout built-in RAM.

  When a connection signal is input from the CR unit, CR connection information indicating that the connection with the CR unit is normal is stored in the state information storage area. When no connection signal is input, CR connection information that indicates that the connection with the CR unit is abnormal is stored in the state information storage area.

  Subsequent to step S348, a full tank and out-of-ball check process is performed (step S350). In this full tank and out-of-ball check process, input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and based on this input information, the above-mentioned full-unit unit 520 is filled with game balls based on a detection signal from the full-tan switch 545. Whether or not the number of game balls taken into the above-described ball passage unit 420 by the detection signal from the ball break switch 426 shown in FIG. 140 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number. Judgment. For example, whether or not the full tank unit 520 is full of game balls is determined by detecting from the full tank switch 545 in the current full tank and out-of-ball check process using a timer interruption period of 1.75 ms. When the signal is ON, the detection signal from the full tank switch 545 is turned OFF in the last full (1.75 ms before) full ball and ball check check process, that is, the detection signal from the full tank switch 545 is changed from OFF to ON. When this is done, the timer update process in step S346 starts counting the full tank determination time (504 ms) described above. When the full tank determination time becomes 0 in the timer update process, that is, when the full tank determination time is reached, whether or not the detection signal from the full tank switch 545 is ON in this full tank and out-of-ball check process. Determine whether. In this determination, when the detection signal from the full tank switch 545 is ON, the full tank information indicating that the full tank unit 520 is full of game balls is stored in the state information storage area. On the other hand, when the detection signal from the full tank switch 545 is OFF, the full tank information indicating that the full tank unit 520 is not full of game balls is stored in the state information storage area.

  Whether or not the number of game balls taken into the ball passage unit 420 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number is also determined by using the timer interruption period 1.75 ms, When the detection signal from the switch is ON, the detection signal from the ball break switch is turned OFF in the previous full (1.75ms before) full ball and ball break check processing, that is, the detection signal from the ball break switch is ON from OFF When the transition is made, the timer update process in step S346 starts counting the ball breakage determination time (119 ms) described above. When the ball break determination time becomes 0 in the timer update process, that is, when the ball break determination time is reached, whether or not the detection signal from the ball break switch 426 is ON in this full tank and ball break check processing. Determine whether. In this determination, when the detection signal from the ball break switch 426 is ON, ball break information indicating that the number of game balls taken into the ball passage unit 420 is greater than or equal to a predetermined number is sent to the state information storage area. On the other hand, when the detection signal from the ball break switch 426 is OFF, the ball break information indicating that the number of game balls taken into the ball passage unit 420 is not equal to or greater than the predetermined number is stored in the state information storage area. To remember.

  Following step S350, command reception processing is performed (step S352). In this command reception process, various commands relating to payout from the main control board 1700 are received. When the various commands are normally received, the payer ACK information indicating that is stored in the output information storage area. On the other hand, when various commands cannot be received normally, a connection abnormality that indicates that there is an abnormality in the connection between the main control board 1700 and the dispensing control board 715 (an abnormality has occurred in various command signals). Information is stored in the state information storage area described above. A detailed description of various commands related to payout from the main control board 1700 will be described later.

  Following step S352, command analysis processing is performed (step S354). In this command analysis processing, the command received in step S352 is analyzed, and the analyzed command is stored as received command information in the received command information storage area of the payout internal RAM.

  Subsequent to step S354, main operation setting processing is performed (step S356). In this main operation setting process, operation settings such as winning balls, lending balls, ball removal and ball scooping are performed, retry operation determination is performed, and the number of unpaid balls (number of winning ball stock) is monitored. To do. A detailed description of these operation settings, operation determination, and monitoring will be described later.

  Following step S356, LED display data creation processing is performed (step S358). In this LED display data creation process, various types of information are read from the state information storage area described above, and display data to be displayed on the error LED display 1730 of the payout control board 715 shown in FIG. 140 is created and used as LED display information. Stored in the output information storage area. For example, the above-described ball break information is read from the state information storage area, display data corresponding to the ball break information (display value 1 in this embodiment) is created, and the LED display information is stored in the output information storage area.

  Following step S358, command transmission processing is performed (step S360). In this command transmission process, various types of information are read from the state information storage area described above, a command is created based on the various types of information, and is transmitted to the main control board 1700. A detailed description of these commands will be described later.

  Subsequent to step S360, output of the external WDT clear signal to the external watchdog timer (external WDT) 1710c is stopped (turns OFF, step S362). As a result, the external WDT 1710c is cleared so that the payout control MPU 1710a and the payout control I / O port 1710b are not reset. The external WDT 1710c starts counting the clear signal release time when the output of the external WDT clear signal is stopped.

  Following step S362, the process returns to step S334 again to determine whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input. If this power failure warning signal has not been input, the 1.75 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value of 1 in step S336. When the 1.75 ms elapse flag HT-FLG has a value of 1, that is, when 1.75 ms elapses, the value 0 is set in the 1.75 ms elapse flag HT-FLG in step S338. In step S340, an external WDT clear signal is output (ON) to the external WDT 1710c, port output processing is performed in step S342, port input processing is performed in step S344, timer update processing is performed in step S346, and CR communication is performed in step S348. Processing, and in step S350, a full tank and out of ball check process is performed. In step S352, command reception processing is performed. In step S354, command analysis processing is performed. In step S356, main operation setting processing is performed. In step S358, LED display data creation processing is performed. In step S360, command transmission processing is performed. In S362, the output of the external WDT clear signal to the external WDT 1710c is stopped (OFF), and Steps S334 to S362 are repeated. The processing from step S334 to step S362 is referred to as “payout control side main processing”.

  Depending on the progress of the game by the main control board 1700, the processing content of the payout control side main process differs. For this reason, the time required for the processing of the payout control MPU 1710a varies. Accordingly, the payout control MPU 1710a preferentially outputs to the main control board 1700 a payer ACK signal notifying that various commands relating to payout from the main control board 1700 have been normally received in the port output processing of step S342. Yes. As a result, the payout control MPU 1710a ensures the processing time so that other fluctuating processes can be sufficiently performed.

  On the other hand, when a power failure warning signal is input in step S334, interrupt prohibition setting is performed (step S364). With this setting, payout control side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is not performed, writing to the payout internal RAM is prevented, and rewriting of the payout information described above is protected. Subsequent to step S364, output of the drive signal to the payout motor 465 is stopped (step S366). Thereby, payout of the game ball is stopped. Subsequent to step S366, an external WDT clear signal is output to the external WDT 1710c and the output is stopped (ON / OFF, step S368). This clears the external WDT 1710c. Subsequent to step S368, a checksum is calculated and the calculated value is stored (step S370). The checksum is calculated by regarding the payout information in the work area of the payout built-in RAM as a numerical value excluding the storage area for the checksum value calculated in step S318 and the payout backup flag HBK-FLG. Subsequent to step S370, the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is set to a value of 1. (Step S372) This completes the storage of the payout backup information. Subsequent to step S372, prohibition of access to the payout built-in RAM is set (step S374). With this setting, access to the payout internal RAM is prohibited, and writing and reading cannot be performed, and the payout backup information stored in the internal payout RAM is protected. Following step S374, an infinite loop is entered. In this infinite loop, the clear signal is not turned ON / OFF to the external WDT 1710c. Therefore, the external WDT 1710c outputs a reset signal to the payout control MPU 1710a and the payout control I / O port 1710b to reset it. Thereafter, the payout control MPU 1710a performs the payout control side power-on process again. The processing from step S364 to step S374 and the infinite loop are referred to as “payout control side power-off processing”.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 (payout control MPU 1710a) is reset when a power failure occurs or when an instantaneous power failure occurs, and the payout control side power-on process is performed by power recovery thereafter.

  In step S320, it is checked whether or not the payout backup information stored in the payout internal RAM is normal, and in step S322, whether or not the payout control side power-off process has been normally completed is determined. I am inspecting. In this way, by checking the payout backup information stored in the payout built-in RAM twice, it is inspected whether the payout backup information is stored by fraud.

[14-2. Discharge control side timer interrupt processing]
Next, payout control side timer interrupt processing will be described. This payout control side timer interruption process is repeatedly performed at every interruption period (1.75 ms in this embodiment) set in the payout control side power-on process shown in FIGS. 169 to 171.

  When the payout control side timer interrupt process is started, the payout control MPU 1710a of the payout control board 715 sets the timer interrupt to be prohibited and switches (saves) the register as shown in FIG. 172 (step S380). Here, the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) used in the above-described payout control-side main process is switched to the auxiliary register. By using this auxiliary register in the payout control side timer interrupt process, the value of the general-purpose register is not overwritten. This prevents the contents of the general-purpose register used in the payout control side main process from being destroyed.

  Subsequent to step S380, the value 1 is set in the 1.75 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG (step S382). The 1.75 progress flag HT-FLG is a flag that counts 1.75 ms every time the payout control side timer interrupt process is performed, that is, every 1.75 ms. Set to 0 when no 75 ms has elapsed. Subsequent to step S382, the register is switched (returned) (step S384). This restoration is switched from the auxiliary register used in the payout control side timer interrupt process to the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register). By using this general-purpose register in the payout control side main process, the value of the auxiliary register is not overwritten. This prevents the contents of the auxiliary register used in the payout control side timer interrupt processing from being destroyed. Subsequent to step S384, interrupt permission is set (step S386), and this routine ends.

[14-3. Ball removal switch operation determination process]
Next, the ball removal switch operation determination process will be described. In this ball removal switch operation determination process, it is determined whether or not the ball removal switch 1732 shown in FIG. 140 is operated.

  When the ball removal switch operation determination process is started, the payout control MPU 1710a of the payout control board 715 determines whether or not the ball removal switch 1732 is operated as shown in FIG. 173 (step S390). This determination is made based on the detection signal from the ball removal switch 1732 in the port input process of step S344 in the payout control side power-on process (payout control side main process) shown in FIG. Specifically, the detection signal is stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout built-in RAM. In step S390, input information is read from this input information storage area, and it is determined whether or not there is a detection signal from the ball removal switch 1732. When there is a detection signal from the ball removal switch 1732 in the input information, it is determined that the ball removal switch 1732 is operated. On the other hand, when there is no detection signal from the ball removal switch 1732 in the input information, it is determined that the ball removal switch 1732 has not been operated.

  When the ball removal switch 1732 is operated in step S390, a value 1 is set to the ball removal flag RMV-FLG (step S392). This ball removal flag RMV-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not to discharge the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 400 and the tank rail member 410, and is 1 when the game balls are discharged. The value is set to 0 when the ball is not discharged.

  Subsequent to step S392, the above-described ball removal determination time is set to be valid (step S294), and this routine is terminated. As the ball removal determination time becomes effective, the ball removal determination time is subtracted in the timer update process in step S346 in the payout control side power-on process (payout control side main process) shown in FIG.

  On the other hand, when the ball removal switch 1732 is not operated in step S390, this routine is finished as it is. The ball removal flag RMV-FLG set in step S392 is stored in a general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the payout control MPU 1710a.

[14-4. Rotation angle switch history creation process]
Next, a rotation angle switch history creation process is created. In this rotation angle switch history creation processing, a history of detection signals from the rotation angle switch 505 shown in FIG. 140 is created.

  When the rotation angle switch history creation process is started, the payout control MPU 1710a of the payout control board 715 reads the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST from the payout internal RAM as shown in FIG. 174 (step S400). This rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST is 1 byte (8 bits: most significant bits B7, B6, B5, B4, B3, B2, B1, least significant bit B0, "B" represents a bit). A history of detection signals from the rotation angle switch 505 is stored as rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST in the rotation angle switch history information storage area of the payout built-in RAM. In step S400, rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST is read from the rotation angle switch history information storage area.

  Following step S400, it is determined whether there is a detection signal from the rotation angle switch 505 (step S402). This determination is performed based on the detection signal from the rotation angle switch 505 in the port input process of step S344 in the payout control side power-on process (payout control side main process) shown in FIG. Specifically, the detection signal is stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout built-in RAM. In step S402, input information is read from this input information storage area, and it is determined whether or not there is a detection signal from the rotation angle switch 505. When there is a detection signal from the rotation angle switch 505 in the input information, the detection notch 501 for grasping the rotation position of the sprocket 457 described above is a state in which the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 505 has transitioned from the cutoff state to the non-blocking state. Is determined. On the other hand, when there is no detection signal from the rotation angle switch 505 in the input information, the detection notch 501 determines that the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 505 has transitioned from the non-blocking state to the blocking state.

  When the detection notch 501 is in a state where the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 505 is changed from the cut-off state to the non-cut-off state in step S402, the rotation angle switch detection history information is shifted (step S403). In this rotation angle switch detection history information shift process, the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S400 is converted into the most significant bits B7 ← B6, B6 ← B5, B5 ← B4, B4 ← B3, B3 ← B2. , B2 ← B1, B1 ← the least significant bit B0, and so on, and shifts bit by bit from the least significant bit B0 toward the most significant bit B7.

  Subsequent to step S403, the value 1 is set to the least significant bit B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST (step S404), and this routine is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the detection notch 501 is in a state where the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 505 is changed from the non-blocking state to the blocking state in step S402, the rotation angle switch detection history information is shifted (step S405). In this rotation angle switch detection history information shift processing, the same processing as the rotation angle switch detection history information shift processing in step S403 is performed, and the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S400 is converted into the most significant bit. B7 ← B6, B6 ← B5, B5 ← B4, B4 ← B3, B3 ← B2, B2 ← B1, B1 ← Shifts bit by bit from the least significant bit B0 toward the most significant bit B7. To do.

  Subsequent to step S405, the value 0 is set to the least significant bit B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST (step S406), and this routine is terminated.

  Thus, each time this rotation angle switch history creation process is performed, the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST is shifted bit by bit from the least significant bit B0 to the most significant bit B7, and then the detection notch 501 is generated. The value of the least significant bit B0 according to the state in which the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 505 has transitioned from the cutoff state to the non-blocking state or the detection notch 501 has shifted the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 505 from the non-blocking state to the blocking state. Since 1 or 0 is set, a history of detection signals from the rotation angle switch 505 can be created.

[14-5. Sprocket fixed position determination skip processing]
Next, the sprocket fixed position determination skip process will be described. This sprocket fixed position determination skip processing skips the determination of whether or not the sprocket 457 is in a fixed position when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Note that the fixed position of the sprocket 457 is determined when the payout of the game ball by the prize ball unit 450 is completed. As a result, the rotation of the motor shaft of the dispensing motor 465 can be reliably started in a state in which no ball is generated.

  When the sprocket fixed position determination skip process is started, the payout control MPU 1710a of the payout control board 715 determines whether or not the fixed position determination skip flag SKP-FLG is 0 as shown in FIG. S410). This fixed position determination skip flag SKP-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not the fixed position determination of the sprocket 457 is performed. The fixed position determination of the sprocket 457 is 1 when the fixed position determination of the sprocket 457 is not performed (when skipping). When position determination is performed (when skipping is not performed), the value is set to 0.

  When the fixed position determination skip flag SKP-FLG is 0 (not skipped) in step S410, that is, when the fixed position determination of the sprocket 457 is performed, the rotation angle switch is detected from the rotation angle switch history information storage area of the payout built-in RAM. The history information RSW-HIST is read (step S412), and it is determined whether or not it matches the fixed position determination value (step S414). This fixed position determination value is stored in the payout built-in ROM, and is “00001111B (“ B ”represents a bit)” in this embodiment, and the upper 4 bits B7 to B4 are 0 and the lower 4 Bits B3 to B0 have a value of 1. In the determination in step S414, it is determined whether or not the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value.

  Here, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST have the value 1, the detection notch 501 described above is the light of the rotation angle switch 505, continuously in four timer interruption cycles. It means that the shaft is in a state of transition from the shut-off state to the non-cut-off state. In the occurrence of the four timer interruption cycles, the payout motor 465 shown in FIG. 140 rotates four steps. As described above, the rotation of the payout motor 465 is the rotation of the sprocket 457 via the first gear 493, the second gear 494, the third gear 497, and the gear portion 502 of the detection disk 500. Since the first gear 493, the second gear 494, the third gear 497, and the gear portion 502 of the detection disk 500 have play (backlash), even if the sprocket 457 is stopped at a fixed position, the rotating shaft described above is used. It will rotate clockwise or counterclockwise by the amount of backlash around 458.

  The rotation of the sprocket 457 due to the backlash corresponds to the rotation of about two steps of the payout motor 465 as described above. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the fixed position determination of the sprocket 457 is performed, the history of the detection signal from the rotation angle switch 505, the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW in the rotation angle switch history creation processing shown in FIG. -HIST is created, and is performed based on the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the created rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST, that is, based on the detection signal from the rotation angle switch 505 due to the occurrence of the latest four timer interrupt cycles. Yes. As a result, in the four timer interruption cycles, since the payout motor 465 rotates four steps, it rotates more than the rotation of the sprocket 457 caused by backlash, and the rotation of the sprocket 457 caused by backlash can be absorbed. . Therefore, erroneous detection of the fixed position of the sprocket 457 due to backlash can be prevented, so that the rotational position of the sprocket 457 can be correctly managed by the rotational position of the payout motor 465. In the present embodiment, the four timer interruption periods are 7 ms (= 1.75 ms × 4 times), and are set as the backlash absorption time.

  In step S414, if the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S412 match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value, the fixed position determination skip flag A value 1 is set in SKP-FLG (step S416). Thereby, it can set so that the fixed position determination of the sprocket 457 may not be performed (skip). The payout control MPU 1710a sets the rotational position of the sprocket 457 in step S416 to the fixed position of the sprocket 457.

  Subsequent to step S416, the skip determination time is set to be valid (step S418), and this routine is terminated. Here, the above-described detection notches 501 are three in the same number as the recesses of the sprocket 457, and are formed on the outer circumference of the detection disk 500 equally (every 120 degrees). Further, the rotation of the payout motor 465 becomes the rotation of the sprocket 457 via the first gear 493, the second gear 494, the third gear 497, and the gear portion 502 of the detection disk 500 as described above. Therefore, the rotation between the detection notches 501 (120 degrees) of the detection disk 500 (sprocket 457) corresponds to the 18-step rotation of the payout motor 465.

  The payout control MPU 1710a manages the rotational position of the sprocket 457 based on the number of steps of the payout motor 465. Specifically, (1) a transition state in which the detection notch 501 transitions the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 505 from a shut-off state to a non-cut-off state (referred to as an “edge detection state”), and (2) the detection notch 501 A state in which the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 505 has transitioned from a blocked state to a non-blocked state (referred to as a “fixed position determined state”); It is managed in three states: a state transitioned to a state (“fixed position determination skip state”). The edge detection state of (1) corresponds to one step rotation of the payout motor 465, the fixed position fixed state of (2) corresponds to four step rotation of the payout motor 465, and the fixed position determination skip state of (3). This corresponds to 13-step rotation of the payout motor 465, and the rotation position between the detection notches 501 (120 degrees) of the detection disk 500, that is, the rotation position of the sprocket 457, is managed by a total of 18-step rotation.

  In the fixed position determination skip state of (3), the detection notch 501 is in a state where the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 505 has transitioned from the non-blocking state to the blocking state, and therefore the skip determination time rotates 13 steps of the payout motor 465. The time is set. As described above, since the timer interrupt period is set to 1.75 ms, the skip determination time is 22.75 ms (= 1.75 ms × 13 steps).

  When the skip determination time becomes valid in step S418, the skip determination time is subtracted in the timer update process in step S346 in the payout control side power-on process (payout control side main process) shown in FIG. The payout control MPU 1710a subtracts the skip determination time, and sets the initial value 0 to the fixed position determination skip flag SKP-FLG when the subtraction result becomes the value 0.

  On the other hand, when the fixed position determination skip flag SKP-FLG is not 0 (value 1) (when skipping) in step S410, that is, when the fixed position determination of the sprocket 457 is not performed, or in step S414, in step S412 If the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the read rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST do not match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value, this routine is ended as it is. The fixed position determination skip flag SKP-FLG set in step S416 is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the payout control MPU 1710a.

  As described above, the game balls supplied from the pachinko island facility are stored in the prize ball tank 400 and the tank rail member 410, taken into the ball path unit 420, and guided to the prize ball unit 450. When the game balls rub against each other and are charged, electrostatic discharge is generated and noise is generated. For this reason, the prize ball unit 450 is susceptible to noise and is in an environment. As described above, the sensor board 504 of the prize ball unit 450 is provided with the rotation angle switch 505, and the detection signal from the rotation angle switch 505 is easily affected by noise due to electrostatic discharge of the game ball. Further, the wiring (harness) for connecting the prize ball unit terminal 717 of the payout control board 715 and the payout control board connector 480f of the prize ball unit 750 (relay terminal board 480 in the prize ball unit) is also electrostatic discharge of the game ball. It is easily affected by noise.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, in order to suppress erroneous detection due to the influence of noise, the fixed position determination skip state (3) described above, that is, the detection notch 501 blocks the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 505 from the non-blocking state to the blocking state. In this state, the fixed position determination of the sprocket 457 is not performed. Thereby, the precision of the fixed position determination of the sprocket 457 is improved. Note that the period and period necessary for detecting the fixed position of the sprocket 457 can be obtained by calculation in advance as described above, so that the skip determination time can be easily set and adjusted.

[14-6. Spherical spot detection processing]
Next, the sphere collision determination process will be described. In the ball stagnation determination process, it is determined whether or not the above-described sprocket 457 is in a stagnation state.

  When the ball collision determination process is started, the payout control MPU 1710a of the payout control board 715 obtains the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST from the rotation angle switch history information storage area of the payout built-in RAM as shown in FIG. Read (step S420).

  Following step S420, it is determined whether there is a detection signal from the rotation angle switch 505 described above (step S422). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S420 matches the fixed position determination value. As described above, this fixed position determination value is stored in the payout built-in ROM, and in this embodiment, is “00001111B (“ B ”represents a bit)”, and the upper 4 bits B7 to B4 are the same. The value 0 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 are the value 1. In the determination in step S422, it is determined whether or not the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value.

  In step S422, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read out in step S420 match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value, the ball is being judged. The value VAL-FLG is set to 0 (step S424), and this routine is terminated. This sphere collision determination flag is a flag indicating whether or not the sphere collision state is generated by the sprocket 457. The value is 1 when the sphere collision state occurs, and the value when the sphere collision state does not occur. Set to 0 respectively.

  In step S424, the detection notch 501 is in a state where the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 505 has transitioned from the non-blocking state to the blocking state, that is, in a state where the sprocket 457 is rotating, The value 0 is set in the only-determination flag VAL-FLG.

  On the other hand, in step S422, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S420 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value do not match, a sphere is seen. Assuming that a situation has occurred, a value 1 is set in the sphere collision determination flag VAL-FLG (step S426), the sphere collision determination time is set valid (step S428), and this routine is terminated. When the ball stagnation determination time becomes valid, the sphere stagnation determination time is subtracted in the timer update process of step S346 in the payout control side power-on process (payout control side main process) shown in FIG. . Note that the ball staking determination flag VAL-FLG set in steps S424 and S426 is stored in a general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the payout control MPU 1710a.

[14-7. Various prize ball stock addition processing]
Next, various prize ball stock number addition processing will be described. The prize ball stock number addition process includes a prize ball prize ball number addition process and a rental ball prize ball number addition process. The prize ball prize ball number addition process is performed from the main control board 1700. This is a process of adding the number of balls to be paid out based on a prize ball command, which will be described later, and the prize ball stock number adding process for renting is a process of adding the number of balls to be paid out based on a ball rental request signal from the CR unit. . First, the award ball stock number addition process for prize balls will be described, and then the award ball stock number addition process for rental balls will be described. In this embodiment, the prize ball stock number addition process for prize balls is set to be performed preferentially, and according to the number of prize balls stock added in this prize ball stock number addition process. After the game balls are paid out by the above-mentioned prize ball unit 450, a setting is made so that the number of prize ball stocks for lending is added.

[14-7-1. Prize ball stock number addition process for prize balls]
When the award ball stock number addition process for prize balls is started, the payout control MPU 1710a of the payout control board 715 determines whether or not there is a prize ball command as shown in FIG. 177 (step S430). This determination is made based on the command analyzed in the command analysis process of step S354 in the payout control side power-on process (payout control side main process) shown in FIG. Specifically, the analyzed command is stored as received command information in the received command information storage area of the payout internal RAM. In step S430, the received command information is read from the received command information storage area to determine whether the command is a prize ball command.

  When the received command information is a prize ball command in step S430, the prize ball number PBV corresponding to the prize ball command is read from the prize ball number information table (step S432). The prize ball number information table, which will be described in detail later, is an information table stored in advance in the payout built-in ROM in association with the prize ball command and the prize ball number PBV.

  Subsequent to step S432, the prize ball stock number PBS is read from the payout built-in RAM (step S434). The award ball stock PBS represents the number of game balls that have not been paid out by the award ball unit 450, that is, the number of unpaid balls, and has a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits) in this embodiment. ing. As a result, the award ball stock number PBS can store the number of unpaid balls from 0 to 65535.

  The prize ball number PBV read in step S432 is added to the prize ball stock number PBS read in step S434 (step S436), and this routine is ended. After the addition in step S436, the prize ball command read in step S430 is erased from the received command information storage area.

  On the other hand, if the received command information is not a prize ball command in step S430, this routine is ended as it is.

[14-7-2. Addition of prize ball stock for rental balls]
Next, the processing for adding the number of winning ball stocks will be described. When the processing for adding the number of prize balls for renting is started, the payout control MPU 1710a of the payout control board 715 determines whether or not there is a lending request signal as shown in FIG. 178 (step S440). This determination is made based on the lending request signal from the CR unit in the port input process of step S344 in the payout control side power-on process (payout control side main process) shown in FIG. Specifically, the lending request signal is stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout built-in RAM. In step S440, the input information is read from the input information storage area to determine whether or not there is a rent request signal.

  When there is a ball rental request signal in step S440, the prize ball stock number PBS is read from the payout built-in RAM (step S442), and the ball rental number RBV is added to the prize ball stock number PBS (step S444), and this routine is terminated. To do. The number of rented balls RBV is a fixed value and is stored in advance in the payout built-in ROM. In the present embodiment, the value 25 is set as the number of rented balls RBV. In addition, after adding in step S444, the rental request signal read in step S440 is erased from the input information storage area. In the present embodiment, priority is given to prize balls (the prize balls and the rental balls are managed separately). For this reason, even when there is a ball rental request signal, the ball rental request signal is held, and the ball is paid out when the prize ball is paid out. Accordingly, the rented ball is paid out after the prize ball stock PBS becomes zero.

  On the other hand, when there is no lending request signal in step S440, this routine is ended as it is.

[14-8. Stock monitoring process]
Next, the stock monitoring process will be described. This stock monitoring process is a process for monitoring whether or not the game continues in a state where the player has filled the game ball in the above-mentioned full tank unit 520 during the game (stocked state).

  When the stock monitoring process is started, the payout control MPU 1710a of the payout control board 715 reads the prize ball stock number PBS from the payout built-in RAM as shown in FIG. 179 (step S450). It is determined whether or not the threshold value is equal to or greater than a careful threshold value TH (step S452). The alert threshold value TH is set to a value of 50 in this embodiment.

  When the prize ball stock PBS is greater than or equal to the caution threshold TH in step S452, the value 1 is set to the caution flag CA-FLG (step S454). The caution flag CA-FLG indicates that the player has started to stock game balls in the full tank unit 520, and the number of game balls that have not been paid out (the number of prize balls described above) has reached or exceeded the caution threshold TH. This flag indicates that the value is 1 when the threshold value exceeds the alert threshold value TH, and is set to 0 when the threshold value is not greater than the alert threshold value TH.

  On the other hand, when the winning ball stock number PBS is less than the caution threshold TH in step S452, the value 0 is set in the caution flag CA-FLG (step S456), and this routine is terminated.

  If the game state is a big hit, and the player relaxes and looks at the performance developed on the liquid crystal display 1315 shown in FIG. 140, the player inadvertently pays out as a prize ball for one round. The played game ball may not be removed from the storage tray 30 by operating the ball discharge button 30a. When the game is continued in this state, the storage tray 30 is filled with game balls, and the game balls are accumulated in the full tank unit 520. When the full tank unit 520 is full of game balls, as described above, the value of the prize ball stock PBS increases to exceed the caution threshold TH, and a detailed description thereof will be described later. The door frame decoration lamp 5g shown in FIG. 140 blinks. By blinking the door frame decoration lamp 5g, for example, it is possible to inform the hall clerk that the player is careful about the game. As a result, the hall clerk can tell the player that the game ball is to be removed from the storage tray 30, and the player continues the game with the storage ball 30 (full tank unit 520) full of game balls. Can be prevented.

  In the present embodiment, the careful threshold value TH1 is set to a value 50 corresponding to about one fifth of the upper limit value 255 that can be represented by 1 byte (8 bits). As a result, it is possible to inform the hall clerk that the player should be alerted to the game as early as possible.

[14-9. Dispensing ball removal judgment setting process]
Next, the payout ball removal determination setting process will be described. In the payout ball removal determination setting process, the game balls are paid out to the storage tray 30 by the payout motor 465 shown in FIG. 140, or the games stored in the prize ball tank 400 and the tank rail member 410 described above. This is a process for setting whether the ball is discharged from the pachinko gaming machine 1 or whether such a payout or discharge is not performed.

  When the payout ball removal determination setting process is started, the payout control MPU 1710a of the payout control board 715 determines whether or not the ball throwing flag PBE-FLG is a value 1 as shown in FIG. S470). As will be described later in detail, the ball-in-battering flag PBE-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the payout motor 465 is performing a ball-bending operation, and is set to a value of 0 when the ball-bending operation is not being carried out. Is done.

  When it is determined in step S470 that the ball pitch flag PEB-FLG is not 1 (value 0), that is, when the ball stroke operation is not performed, the prize ball stock number PBS is read from the payout internal RAM (step S472). It is determined whether or not the read prize ball stock PBS is larger than 0 (step S474). In this determination, it is determined whether or not there are unpaid balls in the payout of game balls by the payout motor 465.

  When the winning ball stock number PBS is larger than 0 in step S474, that is, when there is an unpaid ball number, it is determined whether or not the above-described full tank unit 520 is full of game balls (step S476). This determination is made on the basis of the full tank information stored in the full tank and out of ball check process in step S350 in the payout control side power-on process (payout control side main process) shown in FIG. Specifically, the full tank information is stored in the state information storage area of the payout internal RAM. In step S476, the full tank information is read from the state information storage area to determine whether or not the full tank unit 520 is full of game balls.

  If the full tank unit 520 is not full of game balls in step S476, a payout setting process described later is performed (step S478), and this routine is terminated. Thereby, game balls are paid out to the storage tray 30.

  On the other hand, when the full tank unit 520 is full of game balls in step S476, this routine is ended as it is. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, when the full tank unit 520 is full with game balls, the payout motor 465 is forcibly stopped. When a prize ball is generated while the payout motor 465 is forcibly stopped, the number of unpaid balls by the payout motor 465 increases, and the prize ball stock number PBS is added by the prize ball stock number addition process shown in FIG. Will increase.

  On the other hand, in step S470, when the ball pitch flag PBE-FLG has a value of 1, that is, when a ball stroke operation is performed, or in step S474, the prize ball stock number PBS is not greater than the value 0 (value 0). That is, when there is no unpaid ball number, it is determined whether or not the ball removal flag RMV-FLG is 1 (step S480). As described above, the ball removal flag RMV-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 400 and the tank rail member 410 are discharged, and has a value of 1 when the game balls are discharged. When the game ball is not discharged, the value is set to 0. The determination in step S480 is made based on the determination result in step S390 in the ball removal switch operation determination process shown in FIG. That is, when an operation signal (detection signal) is input from the ball removal switch 1732 shown in FIG. 140, a value 1 is set to the ball removal flag RMV-FLG in step S392 in the ball removal switch operation determination process.

  When the ball removal flag RMV-FLG is 1 in step S480, that is, when the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 400 and the tank rail member 410 are discharged, a ball removal setting process described later is performed (step S482). This routine is terminated. Thereby, the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 400 and the tank rail member 410 are discharged.

  In this way, when the ball removal switch 1732 is operated after the power is turned on, the ball removal setting process is performed in step S482 of the payout ball removal determination setting process, and the game stored in the prize ball tank 400 and the tank rail member 410 is performed. The ball can be discharged. When this discharge is completed, a value 0 is set in the ball removal flag RMV-FLG.

  On the other hand, when the ball removal flag RMV-FLG is 0 in step S480, that is, when the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 400 and the tank rail member 410 are not discharged, this routine is finished as it is. As a result, game balls are not paid out or discharged.

[14-9-1. Withdrawal setting process]
Next, the payout setting process will be described. In this payout setting process, the payout motor 465 shown in FIG. 140 is driven to make a setting for paying out game balls.

  When the payout setting process is started, the payout control MPU 1710a of the payout control board 715 reads the drive command number DRV from the payout built-in RAM as shown in FIG. 181 (step S490). This drive command number DRV commands the number of game balls to be paid out by the payout motor 465, and is equivalent to the prize ball stock number PBS.

  Subsequent to step S490, it is determined whether or not the drive command number DRV is 0 (step S492). This determination is based on the drive command number DRV as to whether or not the number of game balls to be paid out by the payout motor 465 remains.

  When the drive command number DRV is 0 in step S492, that is, when the number of game balls paid out by the payout motor 465 is zero, output stop (stop) of the drive signal to the payout motor 465 is set ( Step S494). In this setting, drive information for stopping the drive signal is set in the payout motor 465 and stored in the output information storage area of the payout built-in RAM described above.

  Subsequent to step S494, the winning ball stock number PBS is read from the payout built-in RAM (step S496), and the real ball count PB is read (step S498). The actual ball count PB is obtained by counting the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 465. Although the detailed description will be given later, this count is output from the count switch 462 shown in FIG. 140 in the port input process in step S344 in the payout control side power-on process (payout control side main process) shown in FIG. This is performed based on the detection signal.

  Subsequent to step S498, the value obtained by subtracting the actual ball count PB read in step S498 from the winning ball stock number PBS read in step S496 is set in the prize ball stock number PBS and the drive command number DRV (step S500). The actual ball count PB is set to 0 (step S502), and this routine is terminated. When the drive command number DRV and the real ball count PB are 0, in step S502, the value of the prize ball stock number PBS read in step S496 is set as it is to the drive command number DRV.

  On the other hand, when the drive command number DRV is not 0 in step S492, that is, when there is a number of game balls to be paid out by the payout motor 465, an output of a drive signal to the payout motor 465 is set. (Step S504). In this setting, drive information for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 465 is set and stored in the output information storage area.

  Subsequent to step S504, it is determined whether or not the ball collision determination flag VAL-FLG is 0 (step S506). As described above, the sphere collision determination flag VAL-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not a sphere collision state has occurred due to the sprocket 457. The value is set to 0 when no data state has occurred.

  When the ball collision determination flag VAL-FLG is 0 in step S506, that is, when the ball collision state has not occurred, the value is decremented by 1 from the drive command number DRV (step S508), and the count switch 462 It is determined whether there is a detection signal from (step S510). This determination is made based on the detection signal from the count switch 462 in the port input process in step S344 in the payout control side power-on process (payout control side main process) shown in FIG. Specifically, the detection signal is stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout built-in RAM. In step S510, the input information is read from this input information storage area, and it is determined whether or not there is a detection signal from the counting switch 462.

  If there is a detection signal from the counting switch 462 in step S510, the actual ball count PB is incremented by 1 (incremented, step S512), and this routine is terminated. In step S512, the real ball count PB is incremented by incrementing the real ball count PB. On the other hand, if there is no detection signal from the counting switch 462 in step S510, this routine is ended as it is. In this way, the payout control MPU 1710a decrements the drive command number DRV in step S508, and when the detection signal from the count switch 462 is not incremented in the determination of step S510, It is determined that one game ball could not be paid out because the game ball was not received in the recess of the sprocket 457. Therefore, the payout control MPU 1710a sets the value obtained by subtracting the real ball count PB from the prize ball stock number PBS to the drive command number DRV in step S500 described above in order to pay out one ball that should be paid out again. As a result, when there is no detection signal from the counting switch 462 in the determination in step S510, the actual ball count PB is not incremented, and therefore the value 1 which is one ball that should be paid out is included in the prize ball stock number PBS. In other words, since the value 1 that is one ball that should be paid out can be rounded into the winning ball stock number PBS, the retry operation of paying out the one ball that should be paid out can be performed again. .

  On the other hand, when the sphere collision determination flag VAL-FLG is not 0 (value 1), that is, when the sphere collision state has occurred, it is determined whether or not the sphere collision determination time has elapsed. (Step S514). This determination is made based on the ball collision determination time subtracted in the timer update process in step S346 in the payout control side power-on process (payout control side main process) shown in FIG. Specifically, the ball collision determination time is stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the payout built-in RAM. In step S514, the time management information is read from the time management information storage area, and it is determined whether or not the ball collision determination time has elapsed. Note that the payout motor 465 performs a ball-balling operation during the ball-balloon determination time. This ball collapsing operation is performed in order to eliminate the ball collapsing state by the sprocket 457 of the prize ball unit 450 described above.

  When the ball collision determination time has not elapsed in step S514, an output of a drive signal to the payout motor 465 is set so as to perform the ball collision operation (step S516). In this setting, drive information for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 465 is set and stored in the output information storage area of the payout built-in RAM described above.

  Subsequent to step S516, a value of 1 is set in the sphere ball flag PBE-FLG (step S518), and this routine is terminated. This ball squeezing flag PBE-FLG has a value of 1 when the ball staking operation by the payout motor 465 is being performed (during sphere squeezing operation), and when the ball squeezing operation is not being performed (end of the ball staking operation). ) Set to each value 0.

  On the other hand, when the ball collision determination time has elapsed in step S514, stop of the drive signal to the payout motor 465 is set so as to end the ball collision operation (step S520). In this setting, drive information for stopping the drive signal is set in the payout motor 465 and stored in the output information storage area.

  Subsequent to step S520, the value “0” is set in the ball-pushing flag PBE-FLG as the end of the ball-pushing operation (step S522), and this routine is finished.

[14-9-2. Ball removal setting process]
Next, the ball removal setting process will be described. In this ball removal setting process, the payout motor 465 shown in FIG. 140 is driven to discharge the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 400 and the tank rail member 410 described above.

  When the ball removal setting process is started, the payout control MPU 1710a of the payout control board 715 determines whether or not the ball removal determination time has elapsed as shown in FIG. 182 (step S530). This determination is performed based on the ball removal determination time updated in the timer update process in step S346 in the payout control side power-on process (payout control side main process) shown in FIG. Specifically, the ball removal determination time is stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the payout built-in RAM. In step S530, the time management information is read from the time management information storage area to determine whether or not the ball removal determination time has elapsed. During the ball removal determination time, the payout motor 465 performs a ball removal operation. This ball removal operation is performed to discharge the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 400 and the tank rail member 410.

  When the ball removal determination time has not elapsed in step S530, the output of the drive signal to the payout motor 465 is set to perform the ball removal operation (step S532). In this setting, drive information for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 465 is set and stored in the output information storage area of the payout built-in RAM described above.

  Subsequent to step S532, the ball removal flag RMV-FLG is set to 1 (step S534), and this routine is terminated. As described above, the ball removal flag RMV-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 400 and the tank rail member 410 are discharged, and has a value of 1 when the game balls are discharged. When the game ball is not discharged, the value is set to 0.

  On the other hand, when the ball removal determination time has elapsed in step S530, stop of the drive signal to the payout motor 465 is set so as to end the ball removal operation (step S536), and this routine is finished. In this setting, drive information for stopping the drive signal is set in the payout motor 465 and stored in the output information storage area.

[14-10. Retry operation monitoring process]
Next, the retry operation monitoring process will be described. The retry operation monitoring process is a process for monitoring whether or not the above-described retry operation is normally performed.

  When the retry operation monitoring process is started, the payout control MPU 1710a of the payout control board 715 performs the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW− from the rotation angle switch history information storage area of the payout built-in RAM as shown in FIG. HIST is read (step S540).

  Following step S540, it is determined whether there is a detection signal from the rotation angle switch 505 described above (step S542). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S540 matches the fixed position determination value. As described above, this fixed position determination value is stored in the payout built-in ROM, and in this embodiment, is “00001111B (“ B ”represents a bit)”, and the upper 4 bits B7 to B4 are the same. The value 0 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 are the value 1. In the determination in step S542, it is determined whether or not the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value.

  In step S542, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S540 match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value, the mismatch counter INCC is set. Add 1 (increment, step S544). This inconsistency counter INCC is a counter for calculating the difference between the number of game balls received and paid out by the recess of the sprocket 457 and the number of balls detected by the counting switch 462. Since the number of game balls received and paid out by the recess of the sprocket 457 matches the number of balls detected by the counting switch 462, the value is zero. The payout control MPU 1710a performs the above-described retry operation in the payout installation process shown in FIG. 181, so that the number of game balls that are received and paid out by the recess of the sprocket 457 and the actual count are counted. The inconsistency counter INCC determines whether or not the game balls that are not consistent due to the mismatch with the number of balls detected by the switch 462 are repeatedly paid out.

  Subsequent to step S544 or in step S542, the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read out in step S540 do not match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value. In some cases, it is determined whether there is a detection signal from the counting switch 462 (step S546). This determination is made based on the detection signal from the count switch 462 in the port input process in step S344 in the payout control side power-on process (payout control side main process) shown in FIG. Specifically, as described above, the detection signal is stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout built-in RAM. In step S546, the input information is read from the input information storage area, and it is determined whether or not there is a detection signal from the counting switch 462.

  When there is a detection signal from the count switch 462 in step S546, the value 1 is subtracted from the mismatch counter INCC (decrement, step S548).

  Subsequent to step S548 or when there is no detection signal from the counting switch 462 in step S546, it is determined whether or not the value of the mismatch counter INCC is smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH (step S550). In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present invention, it has been experimentally obtained that the probability that a game ball that does not fit due to a retry operation is paid out is about one millionth, and in this embodiment, inconsistency The value 5 is set as the threshold INCTH.

  When the value of the inconsistency counter INCC is smaller than the inconsistency threshold INCTH in step S550, this routine is ended as it is. On the other hand, when the value of the mismatch counter INCC is not smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH in step S550, that is, when the value of the mismatch counter INCC is greater than or equal to the mismatch threshold INCTH, an error has occurred in the retry operation. The state command for causing the door frame decoration lamp 5h built in the lamp cover covering the upper side of the door frame 5 to emit light in a predetermined color (in this embodiment, red) is described above. In order to set (store) in the status information storage area of the payout built-in RAM and notify that it is a “retry error”, the error LED display 1730, which is a segment display mounted on the payout control board 715, displays a number. State information for displaying “5” is set and set (stored) in the output information storage area of the payout internal RAM (step S552).

  Subsequent to step S552, a value 0 (initial value 0) is set in the inconsistency counter INCC (step S554). In step S554, the mismatch counter INCC determines that the value of the mismatch counter INCC is not smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH in step S550, that is, when the value of the mismatch counter INCC is greater than or equal to the mismatch threshold INCTH. Initialization is triggered by the occurrence of this internal factor. The inconsistency counter INCC is initialized when the external factor is generated when the RAM clear switch 268a mounted on the main control board 1700 is operated. When the RAM clear switch 268a is operated, the main control MPU 1700a erases all the various information stored in the main built-in RAM as described above, and outputs a RAM clear notification command to the sub-integrated board 1740. Thereby, the RAM clear notification sound flows from the speaker 34.

  Subsequent to step S554, the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is set to 1 (step S556), and this routine is terminated. This retry error flag RTERR-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not the retry operation is operating abnormally. The value is 1 when the retry operation is operating abnormally, and the retry operation is not operating abnormally (retry operation is not performed). It is set to a value of 0 when operating normally).

  The payout control MPU 1710a sets the state information set (stored) in the output information storage area of the payout built-in RAM in step S552 in step S342 in the payout control side power-on process (payout control side main process) shown in FIG. In this port output process, a drive signal is output to the error LED display 1730, the number “5” is displayed on the error LED display 1730, and set (stored) in the status information storage area of the payout internal RAM in step S552. The status command is transmitted to the main control board 1700 in the command transmission process of step S360 in the payout control side power-on process (payout control side main process) shown in FIG. The main control board 1700 that has received this status command transmits it to the sub-integrated board 1740 in the sub-integrated board command transmission process of step S92 in the main control-side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. A door frame side lighting / flashing command for outputting a lighting signal for causing the decoration lamp 5h to emit light is output to the lamp driving board 1760, and the door frame decoration lamp 5h is caused to emit light. As described above, the store clerk or the like who notices the light emission from the door frame decoration lamp 5h opens the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 by inserting the key into the cylinder lock 570 of the lock device 560 and turning it. By doing so, it can be confirmed that a “retry error” has occurred by visually observing that the number “5” is displayed on the error LED display 1730 mounted on the payout control board 715. As a result, in order to investigate the cause of the occurrence, the hall clerk, etc., confirms the malfunction of the counting switch 462, the disconnection of various harnesses from the counting switch 462 to the payout control board 1715, the contact failure of various connectors, and the like. Compared with the case where the light emission of the door frame decoration lamp 5h and the display content of the error LED indicator 1730 are not notified, it can be performed very quickly.

  Further, by intentionally disabling the counting switch 462, the retry operation described above is forcibly generated because it is difficult to detect the game ball received by the recess of the sprocket 457 and discharged. Even if a fraudulent act of illegally acquiring the game balls paid out is performed, if the value of the inconsistency counter INCC exceeds the inconsistency threshold INCTH, the door frame decoration lamp 5h emits light. A store clerk or the like will rush to confirm the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. If it does so, the player who performs a fraudulent act will have to be interrupted so that the act may not be discovered, and the illegal game ball by a fraudulent act cannot be continuously acquired. Even if the value of the inconsistency counter INCC coincides with the inconsistency threshold INCTH, the number of game balls that can be acquired by a player who performs an illegal act is the same as the inconsistency threshold INCTH. Therefore, damage to the hall due to the act of intentionally deactivating the counting switch 462 can be minimized.

  Further, as described above, the mismatch counter INCC determines that the value of the mismatch counter INCC is not smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH in step S550, that is, the value of the mismatch counter INCC is equal to or greater than the mismatch threshold INCTH. Initialization is triggered by the occurrence of an internal factor. As a result, the inconsistency counter INCC is not initialized when an external factor such as operating the error release switch 1731 occurs. Therefore, even if the error release switch 1731 or the like is illegally modified and the operation signal is input to the payout control MPU 1710a, the inconsistency counter INCC is forcibly initialized by such an illegal action. There is no.

[14-11. Inconsistency counter reset judgment process]
Next, the mismatch counter reset process will be described. This mismatch counter reset process is a process for determining whether or not to reset the mismatch counter INCC described above.

  When the mismatch counter reset determination process is started, the payout control MPU 1710a of the payout control board 715 determines whether or not the mismatch counter reset determination time has elapsed as shown in FIG. 184 (step S560). This determination is made based on the mismatch counter reset determination time updated in the timer update process in step S346 in the payout control side power-on process (payout control side main process) shown in FIG. Specifically, the mismatch counter reset determination time is stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the payout internal RAM. In step S560, the time management information is read from the time management information storage area to determine whether or not the mismatch counter reset determination time has elapsed.

  If the inconsistency counter reset determination time has not elapsed in step S560, this routine is ended as it is. On the other hand, when the mismatch counter reset determination time has elapsed in step S560, the mismatch counter reset determination time is initialized (step S562). By this initialization, an initial value of 7000 s (about 2 hours) is set as the mismatch counter reset determination time.

  Subsequent to step S562, a value 0 (initial value 0) is set in the inconsistency counter INCC (step S564), and this routine is terminated. As described above, the inconsistency counter INCC is a counter for calculating the difference between the number of game balls received and paid out by the recess of the sprocket 457 and the number of balls detected by the counting switch 462. In general, the number of game balls received and paid out by the recess of the sprocket 457 and the number of balls detected by the counting switch 462 coincide with each other, and the value is zero. The payout control MPU 1710a performs the above-described retry operation in the payout installation process shown in FIG. 181, so that the number of game balls that are received and paid out by the recess of the sprocket 457 and the actual count are counted. The inconsistency counter INCC determines whether or not the game balls that are not consistent due to the mismatch with the number of balls detected by the switch 462 are repeatedly paid out. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present invention, it has been experimentally obtained that the probability that a game ball that does not fit in due to a retry operation is paid out is about one millionth. Here, as described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes the game board 4 and the frame body such as the main body frame 3 to which the game board 4 is mounted, and the game board 4 is exchanged (new stand replacement). Since the game specifications can be changed, the payout control board 715 for controlling the prize ball unit 450, the power supply board 686 for generating the drive power supply for the prize ball unit 450 and the control power supply for the payout control board 715 are common. Equipped on the frame side as a function. As described above, the payout control MPU 1710a of the payout control board 715 can determine an abnormal operation as to whether or not the retry operation is repeatedly performed by monitoring the inconsistency counter INCC. In the payout control side power-off process in the payout control side power-on process shown in 171, the inconsistency counter INCC just before the shut-off is stored in the power-off state, while step S324 in the payout control side power-on process shown in FIG. 170. In the process (setting of the RAM work area upon power recovery), the process is started again from the stored inconsistency counter INCC when the power is turned on. Then, when the game board 4 mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1 is switched to a game board 4 'having a different game specification different from the game board 4 and turned on, the payout control is performed. The payout control MPU 1710a of the board 715 starts processing again from the inconsistency counter INCC stored when the game board 4 is mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1. That is, when the player plays the pachinko gaming machine 1 with the game board 4 ′ attached thereto, the mismatch counter INCC in the pachinko gaming machine 1 with the game board 4 before replacement is inherited as it is. For this reason, when a player plays the pachinko gaming machine 1 with the game board 4 ′ mounted, the probability of 1 / million million happens, and the number of game balls that do not match is generated and the inconsistency counter INCC When the inconsistency counter INCC is equal to or greater than the inconsistency threshold INCTH, the game board 4 is replaced with the game board 4 ′, and in a short period, the payout control MPU 1710a of the payout control board 715 performs the retry operation. There is a risk of being determined as an abnormal operation. That is, in a short period of time after the game board 4 is replaced with the game board 4 ′, malfunction of the counting switch 462, disconnection of various harnesses extending from the counting switch 462 to the payout control board 715, poor contact of various connectors, etc. In spite of this, there is a possibility that it is suddenly determined as an abnormal operation of the retry operation. As described above, when the game board 4 is replaced with the game board 4 ′ and it is determined as an abnormal operation of the retry operation in a short period of time, the impression that the replaced game board 4 ′ is new and easily breaks down. May be given to players. The probability that a game ball that does not fit in the retry operation will be paid out in the millions of times is that the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present invention is installed in the hall and continuously operated for one week during the hall's business hours. In this case, it is the same as the probability that one unsuccessful game ball is paid out due to the retry operation, and therefore, in the retry operation monitoring process shown in FIG. With a probability of 1, the value 1 is not subtracted. Then, the value 1 is incremented to the mismatch counter INCC in one week and the mismatch counter INCC becomes the value 1, and the value 1 is further incremented in the mismatch counter INCC and the mismatch counter INCC becomes the value 2 in 2 weeks. In week, value 1 is further incremented in inconsistency counter INCC, value in inconsistency counter INCC becomes value 3, in value 4 in inconsistency counter INCC is further incremented, value in inconsistency counter INCC becomes value 4, and in week 5 The value 1 is further incremented in the inconsistency counter INCC, and the inconsistency counter INCC becomes the value 5, which coincides with the inconsistency threshold INCTH described above. That is, when 5 weeks have elapsed, the inconsistency counter INCC coincides with the inconsistency threshold INCTH, so that the payout control MPU 1710a determines whether the count switch 462 receives the determination in step S546 in the retry operation monitoring process shown in FIG. It is determined that there is no detection signal, and it is determined that a malfunction of the counting switch 462, disconnection of various harnesses extending from the counting switch 462 to the payout control board 1715, contact failure of various connectors, and the like occur. The door frame decoration lamp built in the lamp cover surrounding the door frame 5 and covering the upper side indicates that an error has occurred in the retry operation in the process of step S552 in the retry operation monitoring process shown in FIG. The above-mentioned payout is a state command for emitting light in a predetermined color (red in this embodiment) for 5h. In addition to being set (stored) in the status information storage area of the storage RAM, in order to notify that it is a “retry error”, the error LED display 1730, which is a segment display mounted on the payout control board 715, has a number “ The state information for displaying “5” is set and set (stored) in the output information storage area of the payout built-in RAM.

  Therefore, when the payout control MPU 1710a determines that the inconsistency counter reset determination time has elapsed in the determination in step S560 in the inconsistency counter reset determination processing, that is, every 7000 s (about 2 hours), the inconsistency counter reset is repeated. By forcibly setting the inconsistency counter INCC to 0, that is, forcibly resetting the inconsistency counter INCC in the process of step S564 in the determination process, the increment of the inconsistency counter INCC that occurs with a probability of 1 / several millions is performed. Invalidated. As a result, there is an error in the retry operation even though the malfunction of the counting switch 462, the disconnection of various harnesses from the counting switch 462 to the payout control board 1715, the contact failure of various connectors, and the like have not occurred. Can be prevented from being set (stored) in the status information storage area of the payout internal RAM.

  In addition, by intentionally disabling the counting switch 462, the above-described retry operation is forcibly generated because it is difficult to detect the game ball received and paid out by the recess of the sprocket 457. Even if an illegal act of illegally acquiring a game ball to be paid out is performed, when the count switch 462 is intentionally repeatedly inactivated for a short time, the value of the inconsistency counter INCC is inconsistent as described above. When the threshold value INCTH is exceeded, the door frame decoration lamp 5h emits light, so that a hall clerk rushes to confirm the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. If it does so, the player who performs a fraudulent act will have to be interrupted so that the act may not be discovered, and the illegal game ball by a fraudulent act cannot be continuously acquired. On the other hand, when the count switch 462 is intentionally repeatedly deactivated for a long time so that the value of the mismatch counter INCC does not become equal to or greater than the mismatch threshold INCTH, the mismatch counter INCC is set every 7000 s (about 2 hours). Although reset, the number of game balls that can be acquired by a player who performs fraudulent action is that the inconsistency counter INCC is up to the inconsistency threshold INCTH and the count switch 462 is intentionally set. Even if the player is repeatedly inactivated for a long time, the number of game balls that can be acquired by a player who performs an illegal act can be extremely reduced.

[14-12. Error release switch operation determination process]
Next, the error release switch operation determination process will be described. In this error release switch operation determination process, it is determined whether or not the error release switch 1731 shown in FIG. 140 is operated.

  When the error release switch operation determination process is started, the payout control MPU 1710a of the payout control board 715 determines whether or not the error release switch 1731 is operated as shown in FIG. 185 (step S570). This determination is made based on the detection signal from the error release switch 1731 in the port input process of step S344 in the payout control side power-on process (payout control side main process) shown in FIG. Specifically, the detection signal is stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout built-in RAM. In step S570, the input information is read from the input information storage area, and it is determined whether or not there is a detection signal from the error release switch 1731. When there is a detection signal from the error release switch 1731 in the input information, it is determined that the error release switch 1731 has been operated. On the other hand, when there is no detection signal from the error release switch 1731 in the input information, it is determined that the error release switch 1731 has not been operated.

  When the error release switch 1731 is not operated in step S570, this routine is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when the error release switch 1731 is operated in step S570, error flag state confirmation processing is performed (step S572). In this error flag state determination process, the state of the error flag corresponding to various error information related to the prize ball unit 450 is confirmed. For example, the state of a retry error flag RTERR-FLG indicating whether or not the retry operation is abnormal is confirmed. As described above, the retry error flag RTERR-FLG has a value of 1 when the retry operation is operating abnormally and a value of 0 when the retry operation is not operating abnormally (retry operation is operating normally), respectively. Since it is set, the payout control MPU 1710a checks whether the value of the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is the value 0 or the value 1.

  Subsequent to step S572, state command setting processing is performed (step S574). In this status command setting process, if the status of the error flag indicates that an error has occurred based on the error flag corresponding to the various types of error information confirmed in step S572, the status flag is set. An error LED indicator which is a segment indicator in which an error corresponding to the error flag is already mounted on the payout control board 715, while setting (storing) the status command to be executed in the status information storage area of the payout internal RAM. The content displayed by 1730 is forcibly stopped. For example, when the retry error flag RTERR-FLG indicating whether or not the retry operation described above is operating abnormally, that is, when the retry operation is operating abnormally, it indicates that an error has occurred in the retry operation. The state command (retry error information) to be transmitted is set (stored) in the state information storage area of the payout built-in RAM, and the number “5” indicating that it is a “retry error” already displayed by the error LED indicator 1730 "Is forcibly stopped.

  This retry error information is transmitted as a status command to the main control board 1700 in the command transmission process in step S360 in the payout control side power-on process (payout control side main process) shown in FIG. The main control board 1700 that has received the error information transmits it to the sub-integrated board 1740 in the sub-integrated board command transmission process of step S92 in the main control-side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 167, and the sub-integrated board 1740 performs the retry operation. A retry operation error notification process, which will be described later, is performed to notify that an error has occurred. In this retry operation error notification process, the error notification announcement of the retry operation “Check the prize ball unit.” And “Check the payout control board harness.” 2 times.) By repeatedly flowing from the speaker 34, the clerk of the hall is notified. The clerk of the hall, etc. who heard this retry operation error notification announcement, from the speaker 34, reports a malfunction of the counting switch 462, disconnection of various harnesses from the counting switch 462 to the payout control board 1715, contact failure of various connectors, and the like. Compared to the case where the error notification announcement of the retry operation does not flow, it can be confirmed very quickly. The retry error information includes information for forcibly stopping light emission (red in the present embodiment) of the door frame decoration lamp 5h built in the lamp cover covering the upper side of the door frame 5. Therefore, the store clerk of the hall or the like operates the error release switch 1731 to emit light from the door frame decoration lamp 5h (in this embodiment, without waiting until the abnormal operation of the retry operation is improved). Since the notification by red) can be forcibly stopped, the door frame decoration lamp 5h emits light (in this embodiment, red) to a player who is playing with another adjacent pachinko machine. The frustration can be kept as small as possible.

  Subsequent to step S574, error flag initialization processing is performed (step S576), and this routine is terminated. In this error flag initialization process, if the error flag status indicates that an error has occurred based on the error flag corresponding to the various error information confirmed in step S572, the error flag is set. initialize. For example, when the retry error flag RTERR-FLG indicating whether or not the retry operation described above is operating abnormally, that is, when the retry operation is operating abnormally, the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is set to 0. Set and initialize. As described above, when the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is determined in step S550 in the retry operation monitoring process shown in FIG. 183 and the value of the mismatch counter INCC is greater than or equal to the mismatch threshold INCTH, this internal factor In response to the occurrence of the error, the value 1 is set in the retry error flag RTERR-FLG in the process of step 556 of the same process. On the other hand, when the error release switch 1731 is operated, this is an external factor. As a result, the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is set to 0 and initialized. The retry error flag RTERR-FLG is externally applied when the RAM clear switch 268a mounted on the main control board 1700 is operated, that is, in the same manner as when the error release switch 1731 is operated. It is initialized when a factor occurs.

[15. Various commands related to payout]
Next, various commands related to payout will be described. First, the payout command (prize ball command) transmitted from the main control board 1700 to the payout control board 715 shown in FIG. 140 will be described, and then the pachinko gaming machine 1 sent from the payout control board 715 to the main control board 1700. A state command, and a shaped state command obtained by shaping the state command will be described. FIG. 186 is a prize ball number information table showing an example of a payout command, FIG. 187 is a table showing an example of a status command, and FIG. 188 is a table showing an example of a shaping status command obtained by shaping the status command.

[15-1. Prize ball command]
The prize ball command is a command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and is a command related to payout transmitted from the main control board 1700 to the payout control board 715. As in this embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is connected to the CR unit (communication with the pachinko gaming machine and supplied to the pachinko gaming machine, and the payout motor of the pachinko gaming machine (prize ball unit) is driven to store , A payout ball command transmitted from the main control board 1700 to the payout control board 715, as shown in FIG. 186 (a). Command 10H to command 1EH ("H" represents a hexadecimal number) are prepared, one award ball is designated by the command 10H, two award balls are designated by the command 11H,... In the command 1EH, 15 prize balls are designated. The payout control board 715 controls the payout of game balls by driving the payout motor 465 shown in FIG. 140 for the designated number of prize balls.

  In addition, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with a ball rental machine (not shown) (an apparatus for directly paying out a game ball as a ball rental to a storage tray (referred to as a “general machine”)) adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1, FIG. As shown in b), commands 20H to 2EH are prepared as prize ball commands transmitted from the main control board 1700 to the general machine. One prize ball is designated by the command 20H, and prize balls are designated by the command 21H. Two are designated, and ... 15 prize balls are designated in the command 2EH. The general machine performs control for paying out game balls for the designated number of prize balls.

  As shown in FIG. 186 (c), a command 30H is prepared as a command common to the CR machine and the general machine, and the self check is designated in the command 30H. By transmitting a command 30H and checking whether or not an ACK signal is input when the transmitting side does not input an ACK signal output as a command reception confirmation from the receiving side for a predetermined period after the command is transmitted. Check the connection status. In the case of the CR machine in this embodiment, the payout control board 715 confirms the connection state with the CR unit.

[15-2. Status command]
The status command is a command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and is a command transmitted from the payout control board 715 to the main control board 1700. As shown in FIG. 187, the status command is divided into frame status 1, error release navigation, and frame status 2, and the priority order is set in the order of frame status 1, error release navigation, and frame status 2. Yes.

  In the frame state 1, a broken ball, full tank, 50 or more stocks, connection abnormality and CR unconnected are prepared, and when the ball is broken, the value is 0 (B 0, “B” represents a bit). 1 is set, bit 1 (B1) is set to value 1 when full, bit 2 (B2) is set to value 1 in more than 50 stocks, and bit 3 (B3) is set to value 1 when connection is abnormal Is set, bit 1 (B4) is set to the value 1 when the CR is not connected. Of the status commands, bit 5 (B5) to bit 7 (B7) for indicating that the frame status is 1 are set to a value of 1 for B5, a value of 0 for B6, and a value of 0 for B7.

  In the error canceling navigation, a ball seeing, a count switch error and a retry error are prepared. In the ball seeing, a value 1 is set in bit 2 (B2), and in a count switch error, a value 1 is set in bit 3 (B3). Is set, and in the case of a retry error, the value 1 is set in bit 4 (B4). Here, “counting switch error” indicates whether or not the counting switch 462 shown in FIG. 140 has a problem. The “retry error” indicates that the game ball that is not consistent with the retry operation has been repeatedly paid out. Of the status commands, bit 5 (B5) to bit 7 (B7) for indicating that the error cancellation navigation is performed are set to a value 0 for B5, a value 1 for B6, and a value 0 for B7.

  In the frame state 2, a ball removal is prepared, and a value 1 is set to bit 0 (B0) during the ball removal. Of the status commands, bit 5 (B5) to bit 7 (B7) indicating that the frame status is 2 are set to a value 1 for B5, a value 1 for B6, and a value 0 for B7.

[15-3. Formatting state command]
The main control MPU 1700a of the main control board 1700 shown in FIG. 140 transmits various commands to the sub-integrated board 1740 shown in FIG. These various commands are commands having a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits). Of these 2 bytes, 1 byte (8 bits) is used as a status indicating the type of command, and the remaining 1 byte. A storage capacity of (8 bits) is used as a mode indicating a variation of production.

  When the main control MPU 1700a receives the above-described state command from the payout control board 715, as shown in FIG. It is set and shaped into a shaping state command having a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits). This shaping state command is transmitted to the sub-integrated board 1740 as one process of the sub-integrated board command transmission process in step S92 in the main control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. Note that the detailed description of the shaping state command is the same as the contents of the state command described above, and therefore the description thereof is omitted.

[16. Various control processing of sub-integrated board]
Next, various processes of the sub integrated board 1740 (sub integrated MPU 1740a) that receive various commands from the main control board 1700 (main control MPU 1700a) shown in FIG. 140 will be described. First, sub-integration side power-on processing will be described, followed by sub-integration-side 2 ms steady-state processing, sub-integration-side base timer interrupt processing, sub-integration-side command reception interrupt processing, sub-integration-side command reception end interrupt processing, stock notification processing The ball removal notification process will be described. FIG. 189 is a flowchart showing an example of the sub integration side power-on process, FIG. 190 is a flowchart showing an example of the sub integration side 2 ms steady process, and FIG. 191 is a flowchart showing an example of the sub integration side base timer interrupt process. FIG. 192 is a timing chart showing torque switching timings of the front gear module drive motor and the rear gear module drive motor, and FIG. 193 is a flowchart showing an example of the sub integration side command reception interrupt processing. FIG. 195 is a flowchart showing an example of a liquid crystal serial command control process, and FIG. 196 is a flowchart showing an example of a transmission buffer empty interrupt process. 197 is DSP-A 198 is a flowchart illustrating an example of stock notification processing, FIG. 199 is a flowchart illustrating an example of ball removal notification processing, and FIG. 200 is a retry operation error notification processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example. The liquid crystal serial command control process is performed in step S766 in the sub-integration side 2 ms steady process described later, and the stock notification process, the ball removal notification process, and the retry operation error notification process are performed in a sub-integration side power-on process described later. This is performed as one process of the payout state determination process in step S728. Also, sub integration side command reception interrupt processing, sub integration side command reception end interrupt processing, DSP-ACK signal interrupt processing, transmission buffer empty interrupt processing, sub integration side base timer interrupt processing, sub integration side 2 ms steady state processing, and sub integration The priority order is set in the order of the 16 ms steady process from step S708 to step S740 in the side power-on process.

[16-1. Sub-integration side power-on processing]
When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the sub-integrated MPU 1740a of the sub-integrated board 1740 performs a sub-integration-side power-on process as shown in FIG. When the sub integration-side power-on processing is started, the sub integration MPU 1740a performs initial setting processing (step S700). In this initial setting process, the process of initializing the sub-integrated MPU 1740a, the process of setting the wait timer after reset, and the door frame decoration lamps 5aa and 5b to 5h and the effect lamps 1230 and 1570 shown in FIG. 140 are turned on. Alternatively, a process of transmitting initial data composed of pattern creation data to be blinked and pattern creation data to turn on the gradation lamp 1240 to the gradation control IC 1760b at a time is performed. In this initial setting process, the sub-integrated MPU 1740a first performs a process of initializing itself, thereby outputting various commands related to control of game effects and various conditions related to the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 output from the main control board 1700. The command can be received, and interrupt permission is set. The time required to initialize the sub integrated MPU 1740a is on the order of microseconds (μs), and the sub integrated MPU 1740a can be initialized in a very short time.

  Subsequent to step S700, it is determined whether or not the 16 ms elapsed flag ST-FLG is a value 1 (step S702). This 16 ms elapsed flag ST-FLG is a flag that measures 16 ms in the sub-integration side 2 ms steady process described later, and is set to a value of 1 when 16 ms have elapsed and a value of 0 when 16 ms has not elapsed.

  When the 16 ms elapsed flag ST-FLG is 1 in step S702, that is, when 16 ms has elapsed, the value 0 is set in the 16 ms elapsed flag ST-FLG (step S704), and the value 1 is set in the 16 ms processing flag SP-FLG. Set (step S706). This 16 ms in-process flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 1 when starting a 16 ms steady process and a value of 0 when ending.

  Subsequent to step S706, the measurement of the processing time measurement timer PCT is started, and 16 ms steady processing is started (step S708). This processing time measurement timer PCT measures the processing time of 16 ms steady processing.

  Subsequent to step S708, an external WDT clear signal is output to the external watchdog timer 1740e (external WDT 1740e) (turned ON, step S710). This external WDT 1740e monitors the operation (system) of the sub-integrated MPU 1740a, and resets the sub-integrated MPU 1740a when the external WDT clear signal is not stopped at the clear signal release time (the system of the sub-integrated MPU 1740a is not running out of control). Or make regular diagnoses). Note that the sub-integrated MPU 1740a has a built-in WDT, and in step S710, in addition to turning on the external WDT clear signal to the external WDT 1740e, the built-in WDT is cleared. As described above, the sub integrated MPU 1740a diagnoses whether the system of the sub integrated MPU 1740a is running out of control by using the built-in WDT and the external WDT 1740e together.

  Subsequent to step S710, it is determined whether or not the test mode flag TM-FLG has a value of 0 (step S712). This test mode flag TM-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not a command received from the main control board 1700 (main control MPU 1700a) in a command analysis process to be described later is a test command. Set to 0 when not a test command. In step S712, the process is performed based on a command analyzed by a command analysis process described later 16 ms before.

  When the test mode flag TM-FLG is 0 in step S712, that is, when the command received from the main control board 1700 (main control MPU 1700a) is not a test command, the gradation control of the lamp driving board 1760 shown in FIG. A value 0 is set (cleared) in the transmission counter to the IC 1760b (step S714). This transmission counter is composed of a write counter and a read counter. The write counter counts the number of times data to be transmitted is written to the transmission buffer, and the read counter counts the number of times the data is read from the transmission buffer. is there. When the value 0 is set in the transmission counter, the values of the write counter and the read counter become the value 0.

  Subsequent to step S714, an effect selection switch input process is performed (step S716). In this effect selection switch input process, it is determined whether or not an effect selection signal is input from the effect selection switch 31 shown in FIG.

  Following step S716, a lamp driving board command transmission process is performed (step S718). In this lamp drive board command transmission process, a command to the gradation control IC 1760b is set as transmission data, and transmission is started bit by bit from the serial input / output port to the gradation control IC 1760b of the lamp drive board 1760. When transmission is started, the write counter is incremented every time transmission data is written to the transmission buffer, and the read counter is incremented every time transmission data written to the transmission buffer is transmitted. In the lamp driving board command transmission process, commands to the patrol lamp driving circuit 1760d and the gear module driving circuit 1760e (front driver 1760ea and rear driver 1760eb) are set as transmission data, and the transmission data is sent to the gradation control IC 1760b. Transmission is started bit by bit from another serial input / output port different from the serial input / output port to be transmitted to the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1760c of the lamp driving substrate 1760. When transmission is started, the write counter and read counter of the serial input / output port that transmits transmission data to the patrol lamp drive circuit 1760d and the gear module drive circuit 1760e write the serial input / output port that transmits transmission data to the gradation control IC 1760b. Similar to the counter and the read counter, the write counter is incremented each time transmission data is written to the transmission buffer, and the read counter is incremented each time transmission data written to the transmission buffer is transmitted. In the lamp driving board command transmission process, after transmission data is completely transmitted to the patrol lamp driving circuit 1760d and the gear module driving circuit 1760e, a latch signal (latch signal in FIG. SP-LAT) is output.

  In step S718, the sub-integrated MPU 1740a of the sub-integrated board 1740 described above based on the command received from the main control board 1700 (main control MPU 1700a) in the command analysis process to be described later, When the blinking command and the gradation lighting command are transmitted to the lamp driving board 1760, the gradation control IC 1760b of the lamp driving board 1760 receives the door frame side lighting blinking command, the game board side lighting blinking command, and the gradation lighting command. And stored in a command register (not shown) in the gradation update control unit 1760bc of the gradation control IC 1760b. As described above, the door frame side lighting / flashing command, the game board side lighting / flashing command, and the gradation lighting command are the number of the terminal in which the input / output terminal group 1760bm is set as the output terminal, the number of the terminal of the output terminal group 1760bp, Any gradation number from 0 gradation to 31 gradation, any waveform table number from waveform table 0 to waveform table 2, waveform transition time which is time until transition to next waveform, waveform counter Initial value (any waveform number from 0 to 89 waveforms), waveform counter maximum value (any waveform number from 0 to 89 waveforms), any of ON time setting table 0 to ON time setting table 7 The ON time setting table number and the like. The gradation control IC 1760b is an output terminal of the input / output terminal group 1760bm based on the door frame side lighting / flashing command, the game board side lighting / flashing command, and the gradation lighting command stored in a command register (not shown) of the gradation update control unit 1760bc. The lighting signal, the blinking signal, and the gradation lighting signal are output from the terminal set to “1” or the terminal of the output terminal group 1760 bp. The door frame side lighting / flashing command, the game board side lighting / flashing command, and the gradation lighting command are commands analyzed by the command analysis process 16 ms ago.

  In step S718, the sub-integrated MPU 1740a of the sub-integrated board 1740 receives a patrol motor drive command to the patrol drive circuit 1760d and a gear module drive motor drive command to the gear module drive circuit 1760e (the front driver 1760ea and the rear driver 1760eb). Is transmitted to the lamp drive board 1760 as transmission data (transmission data SP-DAT in FIG. 142). Since this lamp drive board command transmission process is one process of 16 ms steady process, the patrol lamp motor is transmitted every 16 ms. By transmitting a drive command to the lamp drive board 1760, a drive signal is output to the motor 1235b of the patrol device 1235 described above, while a gear module drive motor drive command is sent to the lamp drive board 1760. By transmitting, the above-mentioned input terminal of the front driver 1760ea and the input terminal of the rear driver 1760eb are the CW / CCW terminal, ENABLE terminal, STANDBY terminal, DMODE1 terminal to DMODE3 terminal, TORQUE1 terminal, TORQUE2 terminal, etc. And the output terminal of the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1760c are reset. Thus, every 16 ms, the motor 1235b can be rotated by outputting a drive signal to the motor 1235b of the patrol device 1235, and the input terminal of the front driver 1760ea and the input terminal of the rear driver 1760eb, The voltage between the terminals of the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1760c is reset to stabilize the voltage between the terminals, and the front driver 1760ea and the rear driver 1760eb output the above-described MO1 signal and MO2 signal. Until the timing, that is, until the timing at which the control signal input to the input terminal is taken into the register of the microstep decoder 1760eaa of the front driver 1760ea and the register of the microstep decoder 1760eba of the rear driver 1760eb. The are to stabilize.

  As described above, the sub integrated substrate 1740 and the lamp driving substrate 1760 are electrically connected via the harness. For this reason, the transmission data SP-DAT may be changed to data different from the normal data due to the influence of noise that has entered the harness. In addition, the latch signal SP-LAT may be changed to the output state due to the influence of noise. Since the motor 1235b of the patrol device 1235 rotates monotonously, even if the patrol motor drive command is affected by noise, the motor 1235b outputs a drive signal to the motor 1235b of the patrol device 1235 every 16 ms. Rotation is less likely to become unstable. On the other hand, the cars 1572c and 1573c are as described above by the front gear module drive motor 1578 to which the drive signal from the front driver 1760ea is input and the rear gear module drive motor 1585 to which the drive signal from the rear driver 1760eb is input. In addition, since the speed is variable in 12 steps from 1st speed (Lo) to 12th speed (Hi), the gear module drive motor drive command changes to data different from the normal due to the influence of noise. If the latch signal SP-LAT is input to the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1760c in a state where the gear module drive motor drive command is not completely received, the gear module is different from the normal one. It becomes a drive motor drive command Is restored to Rudeta, the input terminal of the input terminal and the rear driver 1760eb front driver 1760Ea, and an output terminal of the serial-parallel conversion circuit 1760C, the voltage between the terminals will be maintained in the. Then, in such a state, when it is time for the front driver 1760ea and the rear driver 1760eb to output the MO1 signal and the MO2 signal, the registers of the microstep decoder 1760ea of the front driver 1760ea and the microstep decoder 1760eba of the rear driver 1760eb. The register receives a control signal different from the normal one input to the input terminal. Then, the front driver 1760ea and the rear driver 1760eb set the drive mode of the front gear module drive motor 1578 and the drive mode of the rear gear module drive motor 1585 based on the captured control signal, or drive the front gear module. Since the torque of the motor 1578 and the torque of the rear gear module drive motor 1585 are switched, the cars 1572c and 1573c may be unnaturally accelerated, decelerated, suddenly started, or suddenly stopped. . Therefore, every 16 ms, the input terminal of the front driver 1760ea and the input terminal of the rear driver 1760eb are the CW / CCW terminal, the ENABLE terminal, the STANDBY terminal, the DMODE1 terminal to the DMODE3 terminal, the TORQUE1 terminal, the TORQUE2 terminal, etc. By resetting the voltage between the output terminal of the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1760c and the terminal, the influence of noise entering through the harness is reduced. Therefore, it is possible to improve the accuracy of the gear module drive motor drive command fetched into the registers of the microstep decoder 1760eaa of the front driver 1760ea and the microstep decoder 1760eba of the rear driver 1760eb. In the present embodiment, the effects of traveling of the cars 1572c, 1573c such as the cars 1572c, 1573c traveling from the original position along the vicinity of the outer periphery of the elliptical opening 1200aa are displayed on the display area 1320 of the liquid crystal display 1315. It is linked to the screen to be drawn. Specifically, for example, when the car chase scene of two cars 1572c and 1573c is expressed more realistically, the state in the cars 1572c and 1573c (for example, the expression of the driver) is displayed on the liquid crystal display 1315. While drawing in the display area 1320 and linking with the drawn screen, the cars 1572c and 1573c are caused to run along the vicinity of the outer periphery of the elliptical opening 1200aa. Further, as described above, every 16 ms, the input terminal of the front driver 1760ea and the input terminal of the rear driver 1760eb are the CW / CCW terminal, the ENABLE terminal, the STANDBY terminal, the DMODE1 terminal to the DMODE3 terminal, the TORQUE1 terminal, The voltage between the TORQUE2 terminal and the output terminal of the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1760c is reset, but this will be described in detail later, but this is drawn in the display area 1320 of the liquid crystal display 1315. Since one screen to be updated is updated every 32 ms, the effect of traveling of the cars 1572c and 1573c can follow the screen drawn in the display area 1320 of the liquid crystal display 1315. In addition, every 16 ms shorter than the update time of 32 ms, The voltage between the terminals is reset.

  Subsequent to step S718, the sound source IC 1740c shown in FIG. 140 is initialized (step S720). In the initialization of the sound source IC 1740c, an analog amount of a volume knob (not shown) is detected, and the master volume value of the sound source IC 1740c is set so that a volume corresponding to the analog amount flows from the speaker 31 shown in FIG.

  Following step S720, it is determined whether a DSP-RUN signal is input (step S722). The DSP-RUN signal is a signal that is input from the liquid crystal control board 1750 shown in FIG. 140 and indicates that the liquid crystal control board 1750 is operating normally. The reading of the DSP-RUN signal is performed in the sub-integration side 2 ms steady process described later, and the determination in step S722 is performed based on the DSP-RUN signal read in the sub-integration side 2 ms steady process.

  When the DSP-RUN signal is input in step S722, that is, when the liquid crystal control board 1750 is operating normally, the RAM-CLR signal is output to the liquid crystal control board 1750 (ON, step S724). This RAM-CLR signal is a signal for forcibly resetting the liquid crystal control board 1750, and is turned on when not resetting and turned off when resetting.

  On the other hand, when the DSP-RUN signal is not input in step S722, that is, when the liquid crystal control board 1750 is not operating normally, or following step S724, command analysis processing is performed (step S726). In this command analysis processing, various commands from the main control board 1700 shown in FIG. 140 are received in the sub integration side command reception interrupt processing and sub integration side command reception end interrupt processing described later, Analyze.

  Subsequent to step S726, a payout state determination process is performed (step S728). In this payout state determination process, it is determined whether or not the command analyzed in the command analysis process in step S726 is the shaping state command shown in FIG. 188. If the analyzed command is the shaping state command, the shaping state Various notification processes are performed based on the command.

  Subsequent to step S728, effect selection switch main processing is performed (step S730). In this effect selection switch main process, various processes relating to effects are performed based on the determination result of the effect selection switch input process in step S716 (the determination result of whether or not the effect selection signal from the effect selection switch 31 is input).

  Following step S730, scheduler main processing is performed (step S732). In this scheduler main process, the data on the tone generator IC 1740c, the gradation control IC 1760b of the lamp driving board 1760, the front gear module driving motor 1578 and the rear gear module driving motor 1585 of the loop unit 1570 shown in FIG. 140 is analyzed in step S726. A new setting is made based on the command, or the set data is updated (pointer is updated). For example, in order to update the speed data for switching the speed of the cars 1572c and 1573c to any of the 12 speeds from the 1st speed (Lo) to the 12th speed (Hi), or to realize the speed, sub-integration The base clock count is extracted from the transmission specifications stored in the ROM 1740b and the pulse width is set to update the clock generation data for generating the CLK1 signal and the CLK2 signal, which are clock signals. This speed data is created based on trapezoidal control. The sub-integrated MPU 1740a individually sets playback stop information for forcibly stopping playback through the channel of the phrase playback control register 1740caa in the control register 1740ca of the sound source IC 1740c, or releases the playback stop information individually. Corresponds to the background image for performing playback stop processing or drawing and playing BGM flowing from the left speaker 34 and the right speaker 34 when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is viewed from the front on the display area 1320 of the liquid crystal display 1315 A BGM switching determination process for determining whether or not to switch to another BGM is performed. This BGM switching determination process is performed once in this scheduler main process every time the display of decorative symbols 1320a, 1320b, and 1320c (see FIG. 207) described later on the display area 1320 of the liquid crystal display 1315 is started. Is supposed to be done only. That is, the BGM switching point is the timing when the decorative display of the decorative symbols 1320a, 1320b, and 1320c (see FIG. 207) is started.

  Subsequent to step S732, symbol main processing is performed (step S734). In this symbol main process, a display command to be transmitted to the liquid crystal control board 1750 based on the command analyzed in step S726 and preparation of a switching point corresponding to this display command, which will be described later, for switching from an effect by animation to an effect by live-action will be described later. Do. This display command indicates a screen to be drawn on the liquid crystal display 1315. Specifically, the display command is determined based on the winning information command indicating hit or miss, which is a command from the main control board 1700, and the winning information command. The production pattern information command indicating the type of production pattern (production by animation, production by live action, production by combination of these, etc.), and a mini character that tells the player to switch from production by animation to production by live action. The screen includes a mini character notice command for making a mini character notice by appearing in a predetermined area of the display area 1320, a switching point for switching the effect by animation and the effect by live action. The sub-integrated MPU 1740a stores the created display command in a sub-integration side transmission ring buffer provided in a RAM (hereinafter referred to as “sub-integrated built-in RAM”) built in the sub-integrated MPU 1740a. This "sub-integration side transmission ring buffer" is a buffer that is used so that the end and the beginning of the buffer are connected. Data is stored sequentially from the beginning of the buffer, and when it reaches the end of the buffer, it returns to the beginning. Remember.

  Subsequent to step S734, a BGM volume forced update process is performed (step S735). In this BGM volume forced update processing, for example, channel 0 of the phrase reproduction control register 1740caa is set in the control register 1740ca of the tone generator IC 1740c according to the schedule data that defines the progress of BGM that is progressing in the scheduler main processing in step S732. Liquid crystal display is performed by fade-out processing for forcibly and gradually updating the volume value toward mute (Mute), which is the minimum value, until the fade-out period FOT elapses, and BGM switching determination processing in the scheduler main processing in step S732. When it is determined whether or not to switch to another BGM corresponding to the background image to be rendered and reproduced in the display area 1320 of the device 1315, the sound source IC 1740 is determined according to schedule data that defines the progress of the other BGM. In the control register 1740ca, for example, the volume value set in the channel 1 of the phrase playback control register 1740ca is forcibly updated to the mute (Mute) which is the minimum value until the above-described fade-in period FIT elapses. A fade-in process is performed in which the sound is gradually gradually increased greatly from the mute (Mute) toward the maximum value (Max.) Which is the maximum value.

  On the other hand, when the test mode flag TM-FLG is not 0 (value 1) in step S712, that is, when the command received from the main control board 1700 (main control MPU 1700a) is a test command, test command acquisition processing is performed. (Step S736). In this test command acquisition process, a test command for performing various inspections of the sound source IC 1740c, the liquid crystal control board 1750, and the lamp driving board 1760 is prepared based on the test command analyzed in the command analysis process in step S726.

  Subsequent to step S736, a test process is performed (step S738). In this test process, the test command prepared in the test command acquisition process of step S36 is transmitted to the sound source IC 1740c, the liquid crystal control board 1750, and the lamp driving board 1760.

  Subsequent to step S735 or step S738, the output of the external WDT clear signal to the external WDT 1740e is stopped (turned OFF, step S740). As a result, the external WDT 1740e is cleared so that the sub integrated MPU 1740a is not reset. The external WDT 1740e starts counting the clear signal release time when the output of the external WDT clear signal is stopped. Note that the sub-integrated MPU 1740a clears the built-in WDT only in step S710, and clears the built-in WDT every time the 16 ms steady process starts, that is, every 16 ms. Thus, if the built-in WDT is not cleared every 16 ms, the sub-integrated MPU 1740a is reset.

  Subsequent to step S740, the 16 ms processing flag SP-FLG is set to a value 0 (end of 16 ms steady processing) (step S742), and the process returns to step S702 again.

  On the other hand, when the 16 ms elapsed flag ST-FLG is not a value 1 (value 0) in step 702, that is, when 16 ms has not elapsed, it is determined whether or not transmission to the gradation control IC 1760b of the lamp driving substrate 1760 has been completed. Determination is made (step S744). This determination is made based on the transmission counter described above, and whether or not the value of the write counter that counts the number of times of writing to the transmission buffer matches the value of the read counter that counts the number of times of reading from the transmission buffer. Do by. When the transmission is completed, the value of the write counter matches the value of the read counter.

  When transmission to the gradation control IC 1760b of the lamp driving substrate 1760 is completed in step S744, a processing time measurement timer PCT is acquired (step S746). As described above, the processing time measurement timer PCT measures the processing time of the 16 ms steady process. In step S746, the processing time taken from step S708 to step S746 is acquired.

  Subsequent to step S746, transmission data to the gradation control IC 1760b is set and transmission to the lamp driving substrate 1760 is started (step S748). When transmission starts, as described above, the write counter is counted up each time transmission data is written to the transmission buffer, and the read counter is counted up every time transmission data written to the transmission buffer is transmitted. Here, in step S748, a remaining time obtained by subtracting the processing time acquired in step S746 from 16 ms is calculated, and data that can be transmitted in the remaining time of 16 ms is extracted from the same initial data as the initial data transmitted in step S700. Therefore, the initial data stored in the ON time setting table register group 1760bd and the waveform table register group 1760be is not abnormal data due to the influence of noise. Yes. As described above, the size of data stored in the ON time setting table register group 1760bd is 3072 bits, and the size of data stored in the waveform table register group 1760be is 1350 bits. The size of data stored in the ON time setting table register group 1760bd and the waveform table register group 1760be is 4422 bits. Since the bit rate from the sub-integrated board 1740 to the lamp driving board 1760 is set to 250 kbps (pulse width: 4 μs) as described above, the ON time setting table register group 1760bd and the waveform table register group 1760be The transmission time of the stored data is 17.688 ms (= 4422 bits × 4 μs), and all of the initial data cannot be overwritten in the 16 ms steady process. Therefore, in the present embodiment, data that can be transmitted in the remaining time of 16 ms from the same initial data as the initial data transmitted in step S700 is transmitted as transmission data to the gradation control IC 1760b, and the ON time setting table register group 1760bd and waveform The initial data stored in the table register group 1760be is overwritten little by little using the remaining time of 16 ms. Thus, the initial data stored in the ON time setting table register group 1760bd and the waveform table register group 1760be are repeatedly overwritten little by little within the remaining time of 16 ms. In step S748, when calculating the remaining time obtained by subtracting the processing time acquired in step S746 from 16ms, sub-integration-side base timer interrupt processing, sub-integration-side 2ms steady-state processing, sub-integration-side command reception interrupt described later The number of occurrences of various interrupt processing such as processing, sub-integration side command reception end interrupt processing, that is, the time required for various interrupt processing is taken into consideration. The remaining time of 16 ms is from 16 ms to the processing time acquired in step S746 and various times. It is the time minus the time taken to interrupt.

  Following step S748, the process returns to step S702 again to determine whether or not the 16 ms elapsed flag ST-FLG has a value of 1.

  On the other hand, when transmission to the gradation control IC 1760b of the lamp driving substrate 1760 is not completed in step S744, the process returns to step S702 again.

  Returning to step S702, it is determined whether or not the 16 ms elapsed flag ST-FLG has a value of 1. When the 16 ms elapsed flag ST-FLG has a value of 1, that is, when 16 ms has elapsed, the 16 ms elapsed flag in step S704. A value 0 is set in ST-FLG, a value 1 is set in 16 ms processing flag SP-FLG in step S706, a 16 ms steady processing in steps S708 to S740 is performed, and a 16 ms processing flag SP-FLG is set in step S742. The value 0 is set and the process returns to step S702 again. On the other hand, when the 16 ms elapsed flag ST-FLG is not 1 in step S702, that is, when 16 ms has not elapsed, it is determined in step S744 whether or not the transmission to the gradation control IC 1760b of the lamp driving substrate 1760 has been completed. Is completed in step S746, the remaining time is calculated in step S748, data that can be transmitted in the remaining time is reset, and transmission to the lamp driving board 1760 is started. On the other hand, when transmission to the gradation control IC 1760b of the lamp driving substrate 1760 is not completed in step S744, the process returns to step S702 again.

[16-2. Sub-integration side 2ms steady process]
Next, the sub integration side 2 ms steady process will be described. When this sub integration side 2 ms steady process is started, the sub integration MPU 1740a of the sub integration board 1740 determines whether or not the 2 ms elapsed flag STB-FLG is a value 1 as shown in FIG. 190 (step S755). ). This 2 ms elapsed flag STB-FLG is a flag for measuring 2 ms in a sub-integration side base timer interrupt process to be described later, and is set to a value 0 when 2 ms have elapsed and 1 ms has not elapsed.

  If the 2 ms elapsed flag STB-FLG is 1 in step S755, that is, if 2 ms have elapsed, the value 2 is set to the 2 ms elapsed flag STB-FLG (step S757), and the test mode flag TM-FLG is 0. It is determined whether or not (step S760). As described above, the test mode flag TM-FLG indicates that the command received from the main control board 1700 (main control MPU 1700a) in the command analysis process in step S726 in the sub integration side power-on process shown in FIG. This flag is set to a value of 1 when the command is a test command, and a value of 0 when the command is not a test command.

  When the test mode flag TM-FLG is 0 in step S760, that is, when the command received from the main control board 1700 (main control MPU 1700a) is not a test command, switch input processing is performed (step S764). In this switch input process, it is determined whether or not the detection signals from the front sensor board 1580 and the rear sensor board 1587 of the loop unit 1570 are input via the lamp driving board 1760, respectively. The sub-integrated MPU 1740a sets a position rotated 17.5 degrees clockwise from the rotational position of the front gear module 1572 to which the detection signal from the front sensor board 1580 is input to the original position of the front gear module 1572 (the vehicle 1572c ), And a position rotated by 17.5 degrees counterclockwise in FIG. 123 from the rotation position of the rear gear module 1573 to which the detection signal from the rear sensor board 1587 is input is set to the position of the rear gear module 1573. The original position (the original position of the car 1573c) is set. As described above, the sub-integrated MPU 1740 determines the original position of the front gear module 1572 (the original position of the vehicle 1572c) and the original position of the rear gear module 1572 based on the detection signals from the front sensor board 1580 and the rear sensor board 1587. The position (the original position of the car 1573c) is grasped.

  Subsequent to step S764, liquid crystal serial command control processing is performed (step S766). In the liquid crystal serial command control process, the detailed description thereof will be described later. However, the liquid crystal control board 1750 shown in FIG. The switching point for switching from the effect by animation to the effect by live action is transmitted. As described above, the display command and the switching point are stored in the sub integration side transmission ring buffer provided in the sub integration built-in RAM, and the sub integration MPU 1740a receives the display command and the switching point from the sub integration side transmission ring buffer. Extracted and transmitted to the liquid crystal control board 1750.

  The display command includes the serial input / output port for transmitting initial data and the like to the gradation control IC 1760b of the lamp driving board 1760, and the serial input for transmitting various data to the front driver 1760ea and the rear driver 1760eb of the lamp driving board 1760. It is transmitted from the output port and a different serial I / O port. This transmission counter is composed of a write counter and a read counter. The write counter counts the number of times data to be transmitted is written to the transmission buffer, and the read counter counts the number of times the data is read from the transmission buffer. is there. When the transmission is completed, the value of the write counter matches the value of the read counter. Note that when the value 0 is set in the transmission counter, the values of the write counter and the read counter become the value 0.

  On the other hand, when the test mode flag TM-FLG is not 0 (value 1) in step 760, that is, when the command received from the main control board 1700 (main control MPU 1700a) is a test command, or following step S766, The value 1 is added to the value of the 2 ms update counter C (increment. Step S768). The 2 ms update counter C is a counter that counts the number of times that the sub-integration side 2 ms steady process has been performed, and a value 1 of the 2 ms update counter C corresponds to a time of 2 ms.

  Following step S768, it is determined whether or not the 2 ms update counter C has a value of 8, that is, 16 ms (= 2 ms update counter C × 2 ms) (step S770). When it is 16 ms in step S770, the value 1 is set to the 16 ms elapsed flag ST-FLG (step S772). At this time, the value 0 is set in the 2 ms update counter C.

  Subsequent to step S772, whether or not the 16 ms processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 0, that is, whether or not the 16 ms steady processing of steps S708 to S740 in the sub-integration-side power-on processing shown in FIG. Is determined (step S774).

  When the 16 ms processing flag SP-FLG is 0 in step S774, that is, when the 16 ms steady processing is not performed, the work area is backed up (step S776), and this routine is terminated. In this work area backup, the information processed in the 16 ms steady process of steps S708 to S740 in the sub integration side power-on process shown in FIG. 189 is copied to the copy area on the work area provided in the sub integration built-in RAM. To do.

  On the other hand, when the 2 ms elapsed flag STB-FLG is not a value 1 (value 0) in step S755, that is, when 2 ms has not elapsed, when 16 ms has not elapsed in step S770, or during 16 ms steady processing in step S774. If there is no setting, the routine is terminated as it is.

[16-3. Sub-integrated base timer interrupt processing]
Next, the sub integration-side base timer interrupt process will be described. This sub integration side base timer interrupt process is repeated every 130.227 μs as the base clock. When the sub integration-side base timer interrupt process is started, the sub integration MPU 1740a of the sub integration board 1740 adds a value 1 to the value of the base update counter BC (increment, as shown in FIG. 191) (step S780). The base update counter BC is a counter that counts the number of times that the sub-integration-side base timer interrupt process has been performed. A value 1 of the base update counter BC corresponds to a time of 130.227 μs that is a base clock.

  Subsequent to step S780, it is determined whether or not the base update counter BC is a value of 16, that is, 2 ms (base update counter BC × 130.227 μs) (step S782). If it is 2 ms in step S782, the value 1 is set in the 2 ms elapsed flag STB-FLG (step S784). At this time, the value 0 is set in the base update counter BC. As described above, the 2 ms elapsed flag STB-FLG is a flag for counting 2 ms, and is set to a value of 0 when 2 ms have elapsed and a value of 0 when 2 ms has not elapsed.

  On the other hand, when it is not 2 ms in step S782 or following step S784, a clock signal generation process is performed (step S786). In this clock signal generation process, when the speed of the sub integration side in FIG. Based on the clock generation data updated in the scheduler main process in step S732 in the 16 ms steady process of the process and the base clock count extracted from the transmission specification in FIG. Is generated. In the clock signal generation process, when switching to any speed, whether the MO1 signal from the front driver 1760ea of the lamp driving board 1760 and the MO2 signal from the rear driver 1760eb are input, that is, the front driver 1760ea and It is determined whether or not the electrical angle of the rear driver 1760eb is 0 degrees. In this determination, when the MO1 signal and the MO2 signal are input, that is, when the electrical angle is 0 degree, the front driver 1760ea and the rear driver 1760eb are based on the voltages applied to the terminals D MODE1 to D MODE3. The excitation mode is set, and the speed of the cars 1572c and 1573c is switched to one of the 12 speeds from 1st speed (Lo) to 12th speed (Hi) based on the CLK1 signal and the CLK2 signal input. On the other hand, when the MO1 signal and the MO2 signal are not input, that is, when the electrical angle is not 0 degree, the pulse width of the CLK1 signal and the CLK2 signal is 1.5 μs (this pulse width of the CLK1 signal and the CLK2 signal is 1.5 μs). Various types of rotating front gear module 1572 and rear gear module 1573 This is a dummy obtained by setting the electrical angle of the front gear module drive motor 1578 and the rear gear module drive motor 1585 to 0 degrees without affecting the dynamic members. A clock signal is generated and output to the front driver 1760ea and the rear driver 1760eb multiple times within a very short time. This output is performed until the MO1 signal and the MO2 signal from the front driver 1760ea and the rear driver 1760eb are input, and the electrical angle is forcibly set to 0 degree. When the electrical angle becomes 0 degree, the front driver 1760ea and the rear driver 1760eb set the excitation mode based on the voltage applied to the D MODE1 to D MODE3 terminals as described above, and the CLK1 signal inputted Based on the CLK2 signal, the speed of the cars 1572c and 1573c is switched to one of the 12 speeds from 1st speed (Lo) to 12th speed (Hi).

  Following step S786, torque control processing is performed (step S788), and this routine is terminated. In this torque control process, when the speed of the output shaft of the front gear module drive motor 1578 and the speed of the output shaft of the rear gear module drive motor 1585 are continuously rotating at a constant speed, that is, the cars 1572c and 1573c are circular. When traveling continuously at a constant speed along the vicinity of the outer periphery of the opening 1200aa, the torques of the front gear module drive motor 1578 and the rear gear module drive motor 1585 are switched stepwise. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 192, the timing PT0 when the cars 1572c and 1573c are gradually switched to the first speed (Lo), the second speed,. Until the time period ST0 from time to time PT1 elapses, the torque of the front gear module drive motor 1578 and the rear gear module drive motor 1585 is set to be 100%, the time period ST0 elapses, and from the timing PT0 Until the period ST1 up to the timing PT2 elapses, the torque of the front gear module drive motor 1578 and the rear gear module drive motor 1585 is switched from 100% to 85%, and the setting for maintaining the switched torque is performed. After the elapse of time, the front gear module drive motor 1578 and the rear gear module Switching the torque of Le drive motor 1585 70% 85%, to set to maintain this switching torque. In the present embodiment, the value 128 is set as a fixed value in the period ST0 and the value 256 is set as a fixed value in the period ST1.

  As described above, the sub-integrated MPU 1740a of the sub-integrated board 1740 is the same as the sub-integrated MPU 1740a of the sub-integrated board 1740. Data ("Torque management data" is composed of the speed at which the output shaft of the stepping motor rotates at a constant speed and the duration of that speed) without reference (without) The output shafts of the front gear module drive motor 1578 and the rear gear module drive motor 1585 are rotated at a constant speed and the duration of the constant speed is monitored to monitor the front gear module drive motor 1578 and the rear gear module drive motor 1585. Switching to lower torque And measure the timing. As described above, even if the torques of the front gear module drive motor 1578 and the rear gear module drive motor 1585 are switched from 85% to 70% while the cars 1572c and 1573c are traveling at the n-speed, the cars 1572c, When the speed of 1573c is accelerated from n speed to (n + 1) speed or decelerated to (n-1) speed, the torque of the front gear module drive motor 1578 and the rear gear module drive motor 1585 is set to 70. % To 100%. That is, when the cars 1572c and 1573c are accelerated or decelerated, the torques of the front gear module drive motor 1578 and the rear gear module drive motor 1585 are 100%.

  In the torque control process, the number of times the CLK1 signal and the CLK2 signal generated in the clock generation process in step S786 are output is counted, and it is determined whether or not the counted value exceeds the values of the periods ST0 and ST1. Thus, the passage of the periods ST0 and ST1 is determined. That is, the values of the periods ST0 and ST1 are not set in advance in correspondence with the speeds of the cars 1572c and 1573c, and thus are generated as the speeds of the cars 1572c and 1573c increase from 1st speed (Lo) to 12th speed (Hi). The pulse widths of the CLK1 signal and the CLK2 signal are shortened, and the time during which the periods ST0 and ST1 elapse is also shortened. As described above, the sub-integrated MPU 1740a of the sub-integrated board 1740 counts the number of times the CLK1 signal and the CLK2 signal are output, and exceeds the value set in the periods ST0 and ST1, which are the threshold values. Therefore, it is possible to very easily perform torque management for switching the torques of the front gear module drive motor 1578 and the rear gear module drive motor 1585. Thus, when the output shafts of the front gear module drive motor 1578 and the rear gear module drive motor 1585 are continuously rotated at a constant speed, the front gear module drive motor 1578 and the rear gear module drive motor 1585 The torque can be reduced to suppress the heat generation of the front gear module drive motor 1578 and the rear gear module drive motor 1585. In the development stage of the pachinko gaming machine 1, there are many cases where the specifications of the presentation are changed in order to provide the player with an attractive presentation, and the program developer has the front gear module drive motor 1578 and the rear gear module drive motor. Even when the rotational speed of the output shaft 1585 must be changed, the sub-integrated MPU 1740a of the sub-integrated board 1740 does not need to have the above-described torque management data, so that it is not necessary to recreate the torque management data. Therefore, the program developer can suppress the heat generation of the front gear module drive motor 1578 and the rear gear module drive motor 1585 without recreating torque management data even if the production specifications are changed.

  The speeds of the output shafts of the front gear module drive motor 1578 and the rear gear module drive motor 1585 are trapezoidally controlled, while the torques of the front gear module drive motor 1578 and the rear gear module drive motor 1585 are the front gear module. The control is to maintain or switch based on the time during which the speeds of the output shafts of the drive motor 1578 and the rear gear module drive motor 1585 continue. That is, the sub-integrated board 1740 has a program for controlling the speeds of the output shafts of the front gear module drive motor 1578 and the rear gear module drive motor 1585 (16 ms steady-state process of the sub-integration side power-on process in FIG. 189), Two programs are running in parallel: a program for maintaining or switching the torque of the front gear module drive motor 1578 and the rear gear module drive motor 1585 (sub-integration side base timer interrupt processing in FIG. 191). . As described above, the control for maintaining or switching the torque of the front gear module drive motor 1578 and the rear gear module drive motor 1585 is independent of the control of the speed of the output shaft of the front gear module drive motor 1578 and the rear gear module drive motor 1585. Therefore, the correspondence between the switching timing for lowering the torque of the front gear module drive motor 1578 and the rear gear module drive motor 1585 and the speed of the output shaft of the front gear module drive motor 1578 and the rear gear module drive motor 1585 is The state is not specified. Accordingly, the program developer can control the output shaft speeds of the front gear module drive motor 1578 and the rear gear module drive motor 1585 and the torques of the front gear module drive motor 1578 and the rear gear module drive motor 1585. It can be developed separately from the program that performs the control to maintain or switch, that is, individually. Thereby, since the program can be developed by a plurality of persons, the development period can be shortened. In addition, the burden on the program developer can be reduced, leading to a reduction in bugs.

  Here, the method for setting the values of the periods ST0 and ST1 will be described. First, the program developer sets the speeds of the front gear module drive motor 1578 and the rear gear module drive motor 1585 to 1st speed (Lo) to 12th speed (Hi). The speed is switched to any one of the above 12 stages, and the output speed of the front gear module drive motor 1578 and the output shaft of the rear gear module drive motor 1585 are rotated by continuing the changed speed. Then, if the front gear module drive motor 1578 and the rear gear module drive motor 1585 are likely to generate heat, the number of CLK1 signals and CLK2 signals output from when the speed is switched to when the heat is generated is obtained, and the obtained value A smaller value is set as the value of the periods ST0 and ST1. As described above, the program developer can determine the values of the periods ST0 and ST1 very easily in consideration of the heat generated by the front gear module drive motor 1578 and the rear gear module drive motor 1585. The determined periods ST0 and ST1 are stored in the sub integrated ROM.

  As described above, the lamp drive board 1760 is housed in the lamp drive board box 1765, and this lamp drive board box 1765, together with the effect control board box 266a that houses the sub-integrated board 1740, etc. It can be attached to the rear surface. The lamp driving board 1760 and the sub-integrated board 1740 are electrically connected by a harness. When the sub-integrated board 1740 outputs reset signals to the RESET terminals of the front driver 1760ea and the rear driver 1760eb of the lamp driving board 1760 via the harness, noise enters the harness and the front driver 1760ea and the rear driver When the RESET terminal of 1760eb is affected by the noise, the electrical angles of the front driver 1760ea and the rear driver 1760eb may be forcibly initialized. When the front driver 1760ea and the rear driver 1760eb are reset, it becomes difficult for the sub-integrated board 1740 to know how many electrical angles the front driver 1760ea and the rear driver 1760eb are. Therefore, in this embodiment, the RESET terminals of the front driver 1760ea and the rear driver 1760eb are grounded. Thereby, even if noise enters the harness, it is possible to prevent the electrical angles of the front driver 1760ea and the rear driver 1760eb from being forcibly initialized.

  As described above, the sub-integrated board 1740 outputs a reset signal to the RESET terminals of the front driver 1760ea and the rear driver 1760eb of the lamp driving board 1760 via the harness, thereby changing the electrical angles of the front driver 1760ea and the rear driver 1760eb. In the clock signal generation process described above without adopting the initialization mechanism, if the MO1 signal from the front driver 1760ea and the MO1 signal from the rear driver 1760eb are not input, a dummy clock signal is generated, and the generated dummy The clock signal is output to the front driver 1760ea and the rear driver 1760eb to forcibly initialize the electrical angle (set to 0 degrees). Moreover, in the production | presentation by the driving | running | working of the cars 1572c and 1573c, the production | generation which travels 1 round along the outer periphery vicinity of elliptical opening part 1200aa from an original position, or it stops at places other than an original position, and the outer periphery of elliptical opening part 1200aa from this stopping position There is also an effect of traveling one lap along the vicinity, and it is necessary to gradually switch the speeds of the cars 1572c and 1573c to 1st speed (Lo), 2nd speed, 3rd speed,. However, if the MO1 signal and the MO2 signal of the front driver 1760ea and the rear driver 1760eb are not inputted, such a speed cannot be switched. Therefore, a dummy clock signal is generated, and the front driver 1760ea and the rear driver are generated. The electric angle is forcibly initialized (0 degree) by outputting to 1760eb. Thereby, the speed of the cars 1572c and 1573c can be switched, and the cars 1572c and 1573c can be accelerated smoothly. Also, deceleration can be performed smoothly.

[16-4. Sub-integration side command reception interrupt processing]
Next, the sub integration side command reception interrupt process will be described. When this sub integration side command reception interrupt process is started, the sub integration MPU 1740a of the sub integration board 1740 starts receiving a command from the main control board 1700 (hereinafter referred to as “WR signal”) as shown in FIG. And a signal for selecting various boards from the main control board 1700 (hereinafter referred to as “SEL signal”) are determined to be 1 (step S790). The main control MPU 1700a of the main control board 1700 first sets the SEL signal corresponding to the sub-integrated board 1740 to the value 1 and the WR signal to the value 1, and transmits a command to the sub-integrated board 1740.

  This command is composed of 4 nibbles per packet. This “nibble” means 4 bits, which is 8 bits (1 byte) in 2 nibbles, that is, 16 bits (2 bytes) in 4 nibbles. In the extraction of 1 nibble data, the WR signal rises from the value 0 to the value 1 (referred to as “up edge”) and is held for a predetermined time (for example, 20 microseconds (μs) to 50 μs). This is performed by falling from the value 1 to the value 0 (referred to as “down edge”).

  When both the WR signal and the SEL signal are 1 in step S790, that is, when the main control MPU 1700a transmits a command to the sub-integrated board 1740, command reception processing is performed (step S792), and this routine is ended. In this command reception process, the received 1 nibble command (one of the four divided commands) is stored in the sub integration side reception ring buffer provided in the sub integration built-in RAM. This "sub-integration side reception ring buffer" is a buffer that is used so that the end and the beginning of the buffer are connected. The data is stored sequentially from the beginning of the buffer, and when it reaches the end of the buffer, it returns to the beginning Remember.

  After storing in the sub-integration side ring buffer, the buffer write counter is incremented by “1”. This buffer write counter increments by one each time a command reception process is performed. Therefore, when 1 packet (4 nibbles) is stored, the buffer write counter has a value of 4.

  On the other hand, when both the SEL signal and the WR signal are 0 in step S790, that is, when the main control MPU 1700a does not transmit a command to the sub-integrated board 1740, this routine is ended as it is. At the time of command transmission from the main control board 1700 to the sub integrated board 1740, as described above, a predetermined time (for example, 20 μs to 50 μs) from the up edge to the down edge of the WR signal, the SEL signal, the WR signal, and the data (4 Bit) is held constant, but the signal may be disturbed due to noise and the command may not be received normally. Therefore, as a countermeasure against this noise, when the sub-integrated MPU 1740a receives the SEL signal, WR signal, and data (4 bits) (first time), after a predetermined time elapses (for example, 1 μs), the SEL signal, WR signal, and data (4) again. Bit). Then, it is determined whether or not it matches the SEL signal, WR signal, and data (4 bits) received at the first time. If the SEL signal, WR signal, and data (4 bits) received at the first time coincide with each other, it is determined in step S790 whether both the WR signal and the SEL signal are 1 or not. On the other hand, when it does not match the SEL signal, WR signal, and data (4 bits) received at the first time, the SEL signal, WR signal, and data (4 bits) are received again after a predetermined time has elapsed, and received at the first time. The determination is repeated until it matches the selected SEL signal, WR signal, and data (4 bits).

[16-5. Sub-integration side command reception end interrupt processing]
Next, sub integration side command reception end interrupt processing will be described. When the sub integration side command reception end interrupt processing is started, the sub integration MPU 1740a of the sub integration board 1740 determines whether or not both the WR signal and the SEL signal are 0 as shown in FIG. Step S795). When the main control MPU 1700a of the main control board 1700 completes the transmission of the command to the sub-integrated board 1740, the main control board 1700a sets the WR signal to the value 0 and then sets the SEL signal to the value 0 (down edge).

  When both the WR signal and the SEL signal are 0 in step S795, that is, when the main control MPU 1700a completes command transmission to the sub-integrated board 1740, command reception end processing is performed (step S797), and this routine is ended. . In this command reception end process, the value 0 is set in the buffer write counter added in the sub integration side command reception interrupt process shown in FIG. When the command is successfully received, the buffer write counter has a value of 4 because one packet is 4 nibbles. Further, when reception of one packet cannot be performed, that is, when the buffer write counter is less than 4, the received command is discarded.

  On the other hand, if both the WR signal and the SEL signal are not 0 in step S795, that is, if the main control MPU 1700a has not completed transmission of a command to the sub integrated board 1740, this routine is ended as it is. As described above, as a noise countermeasure, when the sub-integrated MPU 1740a receives the SEL signal (first time), the sub-integrated MPU 1740a receives the SEL signal again after a predetermined time elapses (for example, 1 μs), and the first received SEL signal It is determined whether or not they match. If it matches the SEL signal received for the first time, it is determined in step S795 whether or not both the WR signal and the SEL signal are zero. On the other hand, when it does not coincide with the SEL signal received for the first time, the SEL signal is received again after a predetermined time, and the determination is repeated until it coincides with the SEL signal received for the first time.

[16-6. LCD serial command control processing]
Next, the liquid crystal serial command control process will be described. In this liquid crystal serial command control process, the liquid crystal serial data DSP-SER shown in FIG. 161 is output from the sub-integrated board 1740 to the liquid crystal control board 1750.

  When the liquid crystal serial command control process is started, the sub integrated MPU 1740a of the sub integrated board 1740 determines whether or not there is a display command as shown in FIG. 195 (step S800). As described above, this display command indicates a screen to be displayed on the liquid crystal display 1315, and is stored in the sub integration side transmission ring buffer provided in the sub integration built-in RAM. In step S800, it is determined whether or not a display command is stored in the sub integration side transmission ring buffer.

  When there is a display command in step S800, that is, when a display command is stored in the sub integration side transmission ring buffer, it is determined whether or not the transmission flag TX-FLG is a value 1 (step S802). This transmission flag TX-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not a display command is being transmitted to the liquid crystal control board 1750 as the liquid crystal serial data DSP-SER, and is 1 when the liquid crystal serial data DSP-SER is being transmitted. When the liquid crystal serial data DSP-SER is not being transmitted, the value is set to 0. If a switching point for switching from an animation effect to a live action effect, which will be described later, is stored in the sub-integration side transmission ring buffer provided in the sub-integration built-in RAM together with the display command, the switching point is included in the display command. Is also transmitted to the liquid crystal control board 1750 as the liquid crystal serial data DSP-SER.

  If the transmission flag TX-FLG is not a value 1 (value 0) in step S802, that is, if the liquid crystal serial data DSP-SER is not being transmitted, it is determined whether or not the transmission buffer is empty (step S804). . This determination determines whether or not the transmission buffer is empty based on the status indicating the state of the transmission buffer of the serial input / output port that transmits the liquid crystal serial data DSP-SER to the liquid crystal control board 1750.

  If the transmission buffer is empty in step S804, a sum value is calculated (step S806). This sum value is determined based on the display command stored in the sub integration side transmission ring buffer. Here, the display command is composed of one or more basic commands composed of a status having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits) and a mode having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits). ing. The status indicates the type of command, while the mode indicates a variation of the production. The basic command is assigned a status as the first byte and a mode as the second byte. As the base command, for example, in addition to the shaping state command transmitted from the main control board 1700 shown in FIG. 188, the variation pattern information command indicating the type of variation, the winning information command indicating hit or miss, the type of gaming state A game state information command indicating a switching point, a switching point, and the like are included. In step S806, the information indicated by the status allocated as the first byte of the base command and the information indicated by the mode allocated as the second byte of the base command are regarded as numerical values and the sum (sum value) is calculated. . Then, a base command for transmission is created by adding the calculated sum value to the base command, that is, expanding and assigning it as the third byte of the base command. In other words, the base command status for transmission is assigned the status of the base command as the first byte, the mode of the base command is assigned as the second byte, and the status of the base command and the mode of the base command are regarded as numerical values as the third byte. A sum value is calculated to calculate the sum. Thus, the transmission base command has a storage capacity of 3 bytes and is handled as a packet composed of 3 bytes.

  Subsequent to step S806, the first byte is set in the transmission buffer (step S808). Here, by setting the status allocated as the first byte of the transmission base command in the transmission buffer, status information is transmitted bit by bit from the serial input / output port to the liquid crystal control board 1750. Thereby, transmission of the display command as the liquid crystal serial data DSP-SER is started.

  Subsequent to step S808, a value 1 is set in the transmission counter TXC (step S810). The transmission counter TXC is a counter that indicates how many bytes of the transmission base command are set in the transmission buffer. When the first byte of the transmission base command is set in the transmission buffer, the transmission counter TXC has a value of 1. When the second byte is set in the transmission buffer, the value is 2, and when the third byte of the transmission base command is set in the transmission buffer, the value is 3. The transmission counter TXC is set to an initial value 0 when the power is turned on.

  Following step S810, a DSP-ACK signal waiting time is set (step S812). This DSP-ACK signal waiting time sets a period during which the DSP-ACK signal shown in FIG. 161 can be input from the liquid crystal control board 1750. In this embodiment, an asynchronous serial is adopted as a transmission method from the sub-integrated board 1740 to the liquid crystal control board 1750, the bit rate is 19.2 kbps, the liquid crystal serial data DSP-SER format is 8-bit communication, LSB First, even parity added, 1 stop bit. As a result, since the transmission base command has a storage capacity of 3 bytes (24 bits) as described above, the DSP-ACK signal waiting time including the processing time is 1.6 milliseconds (ms ) Is set. Here, as described above, the DSP-ACK signal is a signal indicating that the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a of the liquid crystal control board 1750 has received the liquid crystal serial data DSP-SER, and the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a has the sub-integrated MPU 1740a in step S808. When the display command started to transmit is received within the DSP-ACK signal waiting time, a DSP-ACK signal notifying that is output to the sub-integrated board 1740 (sub-integrated MPU 1740a).

  Subsequent to step S812, assuming that the liquid crystal serial data DSP-SER is being transmitted, a value 1 is set to the transmission flag TX-FLG (step S814), and this routine is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the transmission flag TX-FLG is 1 in step S802, that is, when the liquid crystal serial data DSP-SER is being transmitted, it is determined whether the DSP-ACK signal waiting time has timed out (step S816). .

  When the DSP-ACK signal waiting time has timed out in step S816, that is, when the DSP-ACK signal exceeds the period during which the DSP-ACK signal can be input from the liquid crystal control board 1750, the display command stored in the sub integration side ring buffer is configured. In order to retransmit the base command, it is determined in step S804 whether or not the transmission buffer is empty. When the transmission buffer is empty, information indicated by the status allocated as the first byte of the base command in step S806 and , The information indicated by the mode allocated as the second byte of the base command is regarded as a numerical value, and the sum (sum value) is calculated, and the calculated sum value is extended and allocated as the third byte of the base command. Create a sending command. In step S810, assuming that the first byte of the transmission base command is set in the transmission buffer, the value 1 is set in the transmission counter TXC. In step S812, the DSP-ACK signal waiting time is set, and the DSP-ACK signal is controlled by the liquid crystal. A period input from the substrate 1750 is set, and in step S814, the value 1 is set in the transmission flag TX-FLG, assuming that the liquid crystal serial data DSP-SER is being transmitted, and this routine is terminated. In the present embodiment, the number of retransmissions is set to 4 times, and the same transmission base command is transmitted to the liquid crystal control board 1750 up to 5 times.

  On the other hand, when the DSP-ACK signal waiting time has not timed out in step S816, that is, when the DSP-ACK signal is within the period during which the DSP-ACK signal can be input from the liquid crystal control board 1750, two bytes of the base command for transmission created in step S806. Since the mode allocated as the eye and the sum value allocated as the third byte are transmitted in order, this routine is terminated. The mode and the sum value will be described in detail later when the transmission buffer becomes empty. However, an interrupt is generated when this occurs, and each of these modes is set in the transmission buffer and serial input / output Each bit is transmitted from the port to the liquid crystal control board 1750.

  On the other hand, when there is no display command in step S800, that is, when no display command is stored in the sub integration side transmission ring buffer, since there is no display command to be transmitted to the liquid crystal control board 1750, this routine is ended as it is, and step S804 is completed. If the transmission buffer is not empty, the routine is terminated as it is to wait for the transmission buffer to become empty.

  As described above, this liquid crystal serial command control process is performed in step S766 in the sub integration side 2 ms steady process shown in FIG. That is, it is repeated every 2 ms. When the sub integrated MPU 1740a creates a transmission base command in step S806 in the liquid crystal serial command control process and sets the first byte in the transmission buffer, the sub integrated MPU 1740a starts transmission bit by bit from the serial input / output port to the liquid crystal control board 1750, In step S812, the DSP-ACK signal waiting time is set, and in step S814, the value 1 is set in the transmission flag TX-FLG, assuming that the liquid crystal serial data DSP-SER is being transmitted. As a result, even if the liquid crystal serial command control processing is started after the elapse of 2 ms, the value 1 is set in the transmission flag TX-FLG on the assumption that the liquid crystal serial data DSP-SER is being transmitted. Unless the time is up, that is, within the period when the DSP-ACK signal can be input from the liquid crystal control board 1750, the second and third bytes following the first byte of the transmission base command are not set in the transmission buffer. It is like that. When the transmission of the first byte set in the transmission buffer is completed and the transmission buffer is emptied, the second byte of the base command for transmission is interrupted. Then, transmission is started bit by bit from the serial input / output port to the liquid crystal control board 1750. When the transmission of the second byte set in the transmission buffer is completed and the transmission buffer is emptied, the third byte of the transmission base command is set in the transmission buffer in this interrupt processing, and the serial input / output port Transmission to the liquid crystal control board 1750 is started bit by bit. As described above, in the liquid crystal serial command control process, when the transmission base command is created in step S806 and the first byte is set in the transmission buffer, the second and third bytes of the transmission base command are transmitted. It comes to be separated. As a result, the load of the 2 ms steady process on the sub integration side shown in FIG. 190 performed every 2 ms is reduced.

  In the case where the display command is composed of a plurality of base commands, when the liquid crystal control board 1750 receives all of the base commands, the liquid crystal control board 1750 controls the drawing of the liquid crystal display 1315. The sub-integrated MPU 1740a of the sub-integrated board may transmit a base command bit by bit from the serial input / output port to the liquid crystal control board 1750 and transmit the sum value after completing the transmission of all the base commands. it can. This sum value is a value obtained by regarding the transmitted base command as a numerical value and calculating the sum. The liquid crystal control MPU 1750a of the liquid crystal control board 1750 receives all the base commands and the sum value, then regards the received base commands as numerical values, calculates a sum value, and calculates the sum value, By determining whether or not the received sum value matches, it is possible to confirm whether or not all received base commands, that is, display commands are correctly transmitted from the sub-integrated board 1740 to the liquid crystal control board 1750. . If they do not match, the sub-integrated MPU 1740a retransmits the same display command to the liquid crystal control board 1750. However, after all the base commands have been transmitted, the sum value is transmitted, and the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a determines whether the display command is correctly transmitted from the sub-integrated board 1740 to the liquid crystal control board 1750 by the above-described determination based on the sum value. For example, when the display command is large, that is, when the number of base commands is large, one of the base commands is used as a harness for electrically connecting the sub-integrated board 1740 and the liquid crystal control board 1750 between the boards. If it happens to change due to the influence of the intruding noise, the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a correctly determines the display command by the above-described determination based on the sum value even though other base commands are correctly transmitted from the sub-integrated board 1740 to the liquid crystal control board 1750. Not transmitted from sub-integrated board 1740 to liquid crystal control board 1750 It will be determined as the sub-integration MPU1740a becomes possible to retransmit the same display command to the liquid crystal control circuit board 1750. Then, it is impossible to maintain the synchronism between the uppermost main control board 1700 and the lowermost liquid crystal control board 1750 by spending unnecessary transmission time between the sub-integrated board 1740 and the liquid crystal control board 1750. Therefore, in the present embodiment, a sum value is calculated based on the base command, the calculated sum value is added to the base command to create a base command for transmission, and the generated base command for transmission is used as the liquid crystal control board 1750. Is sending to. As a result, even if the transmission base command happens to change due to the influence of noise that has entered the harness that electrically connects between the sub-integrated board 1740 and the liquid crystal control board 1750, the sub-integrated MPU 1740a is identical. By retransmitting the base command for transmission to the liquid crystal control board 1750, it is not necessary to retransmit all the base commands constituting the display command to the liquid crystal control board 1750, and useless transmission time is not consumed. Therefore, by adopting a method of creating a transmission base command for each base command and transmitting it to the liquid crystal control board 1750, the synchronism between the main control board 1700 which is the highest level and the liquid crystal control board 1750 which is the lowest level is achieved. Can be maintained.

[16-7. Transmit buffer empty interrupt processing]
Next, the transmission buffer empty interrupt process will be described. This transmission buffer empty interrupt process is started when the transmission buffer of the serial input / output port built in the sub integrated MPU 1740a of the sub integrated board 1740 becomes empty.

  When the transmission buffer empty interrupt process is started, the sub-integrated MPU 1740a of the sub-integrated board 1740 determines whether or not the transmission counter TXC is a value 3 as shown in FIG. 196 (step S820). As described above, the transmission counter TXC is a counter that indicates how many bytes of the base command for transmission are set in the transmission buffer. When the first byte of the base command for transmission is set in the transmission buffer, the value 1 When the second byte of the transmission base command is set in the transmission buffer, the value is 2, and when the third byte of the transmission base command is set in the transmission buffer, the value is 3.

  When the transmission counter TXC is not 3 in step S820, that is, when the third byte of the transmission base command is not set in the transmission buffer, the next byte of the transmission base command is set in the transmission buffer (step S822), The value 1 is added to the value of the transmission counter TXC (increment, step S824), and this routine ends.

  On the other hand, when the transmission counter TXC is 3 in step S820, that is, when the third byte of the transmission base command is set in the transmission buffer, this routine is terminated as it is.

  Specifically, in step S808 in the liquid crystal serial command transmission control process shown in FIG. 195, as described above, the first byte of the transmission base command is set in the transmission buffer. The byte is output bit by bit from the serial input / output port to the liquid crystal control board 1750. When the transmission buffer becomes empty, this transmission buffer empty interrupt processing is started. In step S822, the second byte of the transmission base command is set in the transmission buffer, and it is determined that the second byte of the transmission base command is set in the transmission buffer. In step S824, the value 1 is added to the value of the transmission counter TXC, The counter value is set to 2 and the routine is terminated. The second byte of the base command for transmission set in the transmission buffer is output bit by bit from the serial input / output port to the liquid crystal control board 1750. When the transmission buffer becomes empty, this transmission buffer empty interrupt processing is started again. . Then, in step S822, the third byte of the transmission base command is set in the transmission buffer, and assuming that the third byte of the transmission base command is set in the transmission buffer, the value 1 is added to the value of the transmission counter TXC in step S824, and transmission is performed. The counter value is set to 3 and this routine is terminated. The third byte of the base command for transmission set in the transmission buffer is output bit by bit from the serial input / output port to the liquid crystal control board 1750. When the transmission buffer becomes empty, this transmission buffer empty interrupt processing is started again. . In this case, since the transmission counter TXC has already reached the value 3, this routine is terminated as it is in step S820. In this way, the liquid crystal serial command transmission control processing shown in FIG. 195 sets only the first byte of the transmission base command in the transmission buffer, and the transmission buffer empty interrupt processing performs the second and third bytes of the transmission base command. It is set in the transmission buffer.

[16-8. DSP-ACK signal interrupt processing]
Next, DSP-ACK signal interrupt processing will be described. This DSP-ACK signal interrupt processing is started when the DSP-ACK signal shown in FIG. 161 is input from the liquid crystal control board 1750 to the sub-integrated MPU 1740a of the sub-integrated board 1740.

  When the DSP-ACK signal interrupt process is started, the sub-integrated MPU 1740a of the sub-integrated board 1740 sets the transmission flag TX-FLG to 0 as shown in FIG. 197 (step S830), and ends this routine. To do. The transmission flag TX-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not the display command is transmitted to the liquid crystal control board 1750 as the liquid crystal serial data DSP-SER as described above, and the liquid crystal serial data DSP-SER is being transmitted. Is set to 1 when the liquid crystal serial data DSP-SER is not being transmitted.

  When the DSP-ACK signal is input from the liquid crystal control board 1750, the sub-integrated MPU 1740a determines that the liquid crystal control board 1750 has received the transmission base command created based on the base command constituting the display command, in step S830. A value 0 is set in the transmitting flag TX-FLG. Note that the sub-integrated MPU 1740a sets the in-transmission flag TX-FLG to 0 in step S830, and sets the next command that constitutes the display command stored in the sub-integration side transmission ring buffer provided in the sub-integrated built-in RAM. If there is a command, the pointer is advanced to the address where the next command is stored so that the next command can be extracted.

[16-9. Stock notification processing]
Next, the stock notification process will be described. When the stock notification process is started, the sub-integrated MPU 1740a of the sub-integrated board 1740 determines whether there are 50 or more stocks as shown in FIG. 198 (step S840). This determination is performed based on the analyzed command obtained by analyzing various commands from the transmission information transmitted from the main control board 1700 in the command analysis processing in step S726 in the sub-integration-side power-on processing shown in FIG. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the analyzed command is a shaping state command indicating the frame state 1 (status: 81H, mode: B7, B6 = value 0, B5 = value 1), and the frame state 1 is indicated. If it is a shaping state command, it is determined whether or not a value 1 is set in bit B2 of the mode shown in FIG.

  If it is determined in step S840 that there are not more than 50 stocks, that is, if the value 1 is not set in the bit B2 of the state command indicating the frame state 1 (the value 0 is set), this routine is ended as it is. On the other hand, when there are 50 or more stocks in step S840, that is, when the value 1 is set in the bit B2 of the status command indicating the frame status 1, for example, pay attention to the player's game to the hall clerk. In order to convey the effect, blink control of the door frame decoration lamp 5g shown in FIG. 140 is performed as a caution effect (step S842), and this routine is finished. This blinking control is performed by transmitting the door frame side lighting blinking command to the gradation control IC 1760b of the lamp driving board 1760, and when the gradation control IC 1760b receives the door frame side lighting blinking command, the door frame decoration lamp is transmitted. A blinking signal is output to 5g. When the stock status becomes less than 50, a status command is output from the payout control board 715 to the sub integrated board 1740 via the main control board 1700. Based on the analyzed status command (determines whether or not the value B is set to 0 in the status command), the sub-integrated board 1740 sends a door frame side lighting / flashing command to the gradation control IC 1760b of the lamp driving board 1760. Stop sending Thereby, the gradation control IC 1760b stops outputting the blinking signal to the door frame decoration lamp 5g.

  Here, as described above, when the game state is a big hit, if the player is inadvertently about 50, the player must not operate the ball discharge button 30a from the storage tray 30 to remove the game ball. There is. As described above, if the game balls are not pulled out, the number of unpaid balls (the above-mentioned prize ball stock number PBS) increases, and a caution effect is performed. Then, for example, if the game state is a big hit, if it is inadvertently, a cautionary effect will be performed, and there is a possibility that the player may feel frustrated despite being in a relaxed state of a big hit. is there. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the door frame decoration lamp 5g is kept blinking in order to notify the store clerk that there are 50 or more stocks as a warning effect.

[16-10. Ball removal notification process]
Next, the ball removal notification process will be described. When the ball removal notification process is started, the sub-integrated MPU 1740a of the sub-integrated board 1740 determines whether or not the ball is being removed as shown in FIG. 199 (step S850). This determination is performed based on the analyzed command obtained by analyzing various commands from the transmission information transmitted from the main control board 1700 in the command analysis processing in step S726 in the sub-integration-side power-on processing shown in FIG. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the analyzed command is a shaping state command indicating the frame state 2 (status: 81H, mode: B7 = value 0, B6, B5 = value 1), and the frame state 2 is indicated. When there is a shaping state command, it is determined whether or not the value 1 is set in bit B0 of the mode shown in FIG.

  When the ball is not being removed in step S850, that is, when the value 1 is not set to the bit B0 of the state command indicating the frame state 2 (the value 0 is set), this routine is finished as it is. On the other hand, when the ball is being removed in step S850, that is, when the value 1 is set in the bit B0 of the state command indicating the frame state 2, the blinking control of the door frame decoration lamps 5g and 5h shown in FIG. 140 is performed. (Step S852), this routine is finished. This blinking control is performed by transmitting the door frame side lighting blinking command to the gradation control IC 1760b of the lamp driving board 1760, and when the gradation control IC 1760b receives the door frame side lighting blinking command, the door frame decoration lamp A blinking signal is output at 5g and 5h. When the ball removal is completed, a status command is output from the payout control board 715 to the sub integrated board 1740 via the main control board 1700. Based on the analyzed status command (determines whether or not the value B0 of the status command is set to 0), the sub-integrated board 1740 sends a door frame side lighting / flashing command to the gradation control IC 1760b of the lamp driving board 1760. Stop sending Thereby, the gradation control IC 1760b stops the output of the blinking signal to the door frame decoration lamps 5g and 5h.

[16-11. Retry operation error notification process]
Next, the retry operation error notification process will be described. When the retry operation error notification process is started, the sub integrated MPU 1740a of the sub integrated board 1740 determines whether or not it is a retry error as shown in FIG. 200 (step S860). This determination is performed based on the analyzed command obtained by analyzing various commands from the transmission information transmitted from the main control board 1700 in the command analysis processing in step S726 in the sub-integration-side power-on processing shown in FIG. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the analyzed command is a shaping state command indicating error cancellation navigation (status: 81H, mode: B7 = value 0, B6 = value 1, B5 = value 0), and error cancellation If there is a shaping state command indicating navigation, it is determined whether or not a value 1 is set in the mode shown in FIG. 188, that is, bit B4 of the state command indicating error cancellation navigation.

  If it is determined in step S860 that there is no retry error, that is, if value 1 is not set in bit B4 of the status command indicating the error cancellation navigation (value 0 is set), this routine is ended as it is. On the other hand, when it is a retry error in step S860, that is, when the value 1 is set in the bit B4 of the status command indicating the error cancellation navigation, the speaker 34 shown in FIG. ”And“ Check the harness of the payout control board. ”The error notification announcement of the retry operation is repeatedly sent from the speaker 34 a predetermined number of times (in this embodiment, twice) (step S862), this routine Exit. The error notification announcement of the retry operation flows from the speaker 34 by outputting a control signal (sound command) that informs the sub integrated MPU 1740a to send the error notification announcement of the retry operation from the speaker 34 to the above-described sound source IC 1740c. ing. When the sound signal IC 1740c receives a control signal (sound command) indicating that a retry operation error notification is to be sent from the speaker 34, the sound source IC 1740c extracts the retry operation error notification announcement from the sound ROM 1740d and outputs it to the amplifier 1740f. To do. The amplifier 1740 f amplifies the volume of the input error notification announcement of the retry operation and outputs it to the speaker 34. Thereby, an error notification announcement of the retry operation flows from the speaker 34. As described above, when the error notification announcement of the retry operation flows from the speaker 34, the error notification announcement of the retry operation can be notified to a hall clerk or the like. The clerk of the hall, etc. who heard this retry operation error notification announcement, from the speaker 34, reports a malfunction of the counting switch 462, disconnection of various harnesses from the counting switch 462 to the payout control board 1715, contact failure of various connectors, and the like. Compared to the case where the error notification announcement of the retry operation does not flow, it can be confirmed very quickly.

[17. Various control processing of LCD control board]
Next, various processes of the liquid crystal control board 1750 that receives the display command from the sub integrated board 1740 (sub integrated MPU 1740a) shown in FIG. 140 will be described. First, the liquid crystal control side power-on process will be described, and then the DMAFLAG interrupt process and the liquid crystal control side command reception interrupt process will be described. FIG. 201 is a flowchart showing an example of power-on processing on the liquid crystal control side, FIG. 202 is a flowchart showing an example of DMAFLAG interrupt processing, FIG. 203 is a timing chart showing generation of drawing data, and FIG. FIG. 205 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a control-side command reception interrupt process, and FIG. 205 is a timing chart illustrating transmission and reception confirmation of liquid crystal serial data. The priority order is set in the order of the sub integration side command reception interrupt processing and the DMAFLAG interrupt processing.

[17-1. LCD control side power-on processing]
When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a of the liquid crystal control board 1750 performs a liquid crystal control side power-on process as shown in FIG. When the liquid crystal control side power-on process is started, the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a performs a boot process (step S1000). In this boot processing, various programs stored in the liquid crystal control ROM 1750b shown in FIG. 140 are copied to a RAM (hereinafter referred to as “liquid crystal built-in RAM”) built in the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a. The liquid crystal control MPU 1750a reads out various programs from the liquid crystal built-in RAM as necessary. In this embodiment, the above-mentioned schedule data is extracted from the liquid crystal control ROM 1750b without being copied due to the limitation of the capacity of the liquid crystal built-in RAM. Also good.

  Subsequent to step S1000, SIO initial setting processing is performed (step S1002). In this SIO initial setting process, serial input / output built in the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a is initialized, and a display command indicating a screen to be displayed on the liquid crystal display 1315 from the sub-integrated board 1740 shown in FIG. The permission of the command interrupt process received as the data DSP-SER is set. As a result, when the serial input / output reception buffer built in the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a receives the display command, it notifies the CPU core, which is the central processing unit built in the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a, that an interrupt has been received.

  Subsequent to step S1002, transfer IC initial setting processing is performed (step S1002). In this transfer IC initial setting process, the access conditions and the like in the register group 1750ma of the transfer IC 1750m shown in FIG.

  Subsequent to step S1004, sprite data resident area transfer start processing is performed (step S1006). In this sprite data resident area transfer start processing, various setting values such as a transfer source address, a transfer destination address, and the number of transfer bytes are set in the register group 1750ma of the transfer IC 1750m shown in FIG. Is output to the transfer IC 1750m. When this sprite data transfer start signal is input, the transfer IC 1750m starts to transfer the sprite data stored in the character ROM 1750d to the resident area 1750za of the character RAM 1750z based on various setting values written in the register group 1750ma. When the sprite data resident area transfer start processing is performed, the transfer IC 1750m is stored in the character ROM 1750d based on various setting values written to the register group 1750ma without being controlled by the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a. Transfer of the existing sprite data to the resident area 1750za of the character RAM 1750z is started. Specifically, the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a first writes and sets various setting values such as a transfer source address, a transfer destination address, and the number of transfer bytes in the register group 1750ma of the transfer IC 1750m to notify that the power supply is being restored. The sprite data transfer start signal is output to the transfer IC 1750m. The transfer IC 1750m transfers and copies the sprite data with the characters “currently restoring power” to the resident area 1750za of the character RAM 1750z. As a result, in the DMAFLAG interrupt processing described later, the VDP 1750c extracts the sprite data “including power recovery” (including information to be drawn at a predetermined position on the liquid crystal display 1315) from the resident area 1750za of the character RAM 1750z. Then, the extracted sprite data is developed into a bitmap on the canvas CV which is a virtual screen to generate drawing data. Thereafter, when this liquid crystal power-on process is started on the liquid crystal display 1315, the characters “power is being restored” are first drawn. While the characters “power is being restored” are being drawn, sprite data for unexpected drawing on the liquid crystal display 1315 such as background sprite data and sprite data such as “big hit” characters. Are continuously transferred to the resident area 1750za. In this embodiment, since the sprite data stored in the character ROM 1750d is extremely large, the sprite data stored in the character ROM 1750d is transferred from the start to the resident area 1750za of the character RAM 1750z until the transfer is completed. It takes 10 seconds (s).

  Subsequent to step S1006, port setting processing is performed (step S1008). In this port setting process, various input / output ports built in the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a are set. Specifically, the input / output direction of various input / output ports is set.

  Subsequent to step S1008, VDP initial setting processing is performed (step S1010). In this VDP initial setting process, the VDP 1750c shown in FIG. 161 is initialized. Specifically, among the drawing condition setting data, data related to the environment setting of VDP 1750c is written into the VDP register 1750cb of VDP 1750c. As described above, the drawing condition setting data includes data for setting the size of a canvas CV (not shown) that is a virtual screen, data for cutting a part of the canvas CV into a window shape (rectangular area), and displaying it on the screen. Data for setting a composite screen by arranging grouped sprites in layers, data for setting the size of one line for drawing the horizontal direction of the liquid crystal display 1315 from the above-described line buffer, data for setting resolution, etc. It is composed of Here, data for setting the size of a canvas CV (not shown), which is a virtual screen, is cut out into the VDP register 1750cb of the VDP 1750c, and a portion of the canvas CV is cut into a window shape (rectangular region) as data relating to the environment setting of the VDP 1750c. Data to be displayed on the screen, data for setting the size of one line for drawing the horizontal direction of the liquid crystal display 1315 from the line buffer, and data for setting the resolution are written. The VDP 1750c completes the preparation for outputting the DMA execution signal DMAFLAG shown in FIG. 161 by the VDP initial setting process.

  Subsequent to step S1010, scaler IC initial setting processing 1 is performed (step S1012). In the scaler IC initial setting process 1, the register group 1750fa of the scaler IC 1750f shown in FIG. 161 is initialized. Specifically, field 1750g [0] read start address register OSFILD0 to field 1750g [3] read start address register OSFILD3, field 1750g [0] write start address register ISFILD0 to configure register group 1750fa shown in FIG. Field 1750g [3] Write start address register ISFILD3, memory read line feed width register OMWI, memory write line feed width register IMWI, memory access control register MDACT, memory access start address register MDAST, memory access end address register MDAEND, etc. Write the set value. These set values are set by transmitting them as write serial data SCL-S0 shown in FIG. 161 to the scaler IC 1750f in synchronization with the I / F clock signal SCL-SCL.

  Subsequent to step S1012, non-interrupt-side steady processing is repeatedly performed (step S1014). In this non-interrupt-side steady process, it is determined whether or not to display a sprite that is displayed on the liquid crystal display 1315 shown in FIG. 140 and does not affect the game result.

  Here, a variety of other pachinko gaming machines are installed in the hall where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed. For this reason, there is a possibility that an instantaneous stop in which the power supplied to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is temporarily stopped may occur depending on the power situation of the hall. If a momentary power failure occurs while the player is playing a game with the pachinko machine 1, the main control MPU 1700a of the main control board 1700 performs the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. Then, the sub-integrated MPU 1740a of the sub-integrated board 1740 performs the sub-integration side power-on process of FIG. 189, and the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a of the liquid crystal control board 1750 performs the liquid-crystal control side power-on process shown in FIG.

  The main control MPU 1700a is a process that waits until the boot process in step S1000 in the liquid crystal control side power-on process is completed in the wait timer 2 in step S26 in the main control power-on process. After the interrupt permission is set in step S46 in the time process, the game is progressed by the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 167 every 4 ms. The sub integrated MPU 1740a initializes itself in an extremely short time of microsecond (μs) order in the initial setting process in step S700 in the sub integrated side power-on process, sets the interrupt permission, and then performs FIG. 193. The game integration command can be received from the main control board 1700 by the sub-integration side command reception processing interruption processing shown, and the progress of the production is progressed by the sub-integration side 2 ms steady processing shown in FIG. 190 every 2 ms. Is going. The display command can be transmitted to the liquid crystal control board 1750 by the liquid crystal serial command control process of step S766 in the sub integration side 2 ms steady process. The liquid crystal control MPU 1750a performs the boot process in step S1000 in the liquid crystal control turn-on process, and then performs the SIO initial installation process in step S1002. In this SIO initial setting process, as described above, a display command indicating a screen to be displayed on the liquid crystal display 1315 from the sub-integrated board 1740 can be received as the liquid crystal serial data DSP-SER. When the transfer IC 1750m performs the sprite data resident area transfer start process by the SIO initial setting process in step S1002, the transfer IC initial setting process in step S1003, and the sprite data resident area transfer start process in step S1006, the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a performs the process. Transfer of sprite data stored in the character ROM 1750d to the resident area 1750za of the character RAM 1750z is started based on the set values written in the various registers without going through the control.

  In this way, even if a momentary power failure occurs, at the time of power recovery, the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a can perform the SIO initial setting process in step S1002 in the process following the boot process in step S1000 in the power-on process. Therefore, the liquid crystal serial data DSP-SER from the sub integrated substrate 1740 can be received without being lost. In addition, when the setting value is written by the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a in the various register group 1750ma of the register group 1750ma, the transfer IC 1750m does not go through the control by the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a based on the setting value, that is, independently of the various registers. The sprite data stored in the character ROM 1750d is started to be transferred to the character RAM 1750z on the basis of the setting value written in. For this reason, the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a performs the port setting process in step S1008 in the liquid crystal control side power-on process without waiting until the transfer is completed after the sprite data stored in the character ROM 1750d is transferred to the character RAM 1750z. Subsequently, since the VDP initial setting process in step S1010 is performed and the output preparation of the DMA execution signal DMAFLAG is completed, the DMAFLAG interrupt process to be described later can be performed promptly. Therefore, even if a momentary power failure occurs, the game can be resumed promptly upon power recovery.

[17-2. DMAFLAG interrupt processing]
Next, DMAFLAG interrupt processing will be described. This DMAFLAG interrupt processing is performed based on the DMA execution signal DMAFLAG from the VDP 1750c shown in FIG. As described above, the DMA execution signal DMAFLAG is a signal that informs that the VDP 1750c does not accept screen data from the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a, specifically, sprite setting data. The liquid crystal control MPU 1750a outputs the DMA execution signal DMAFLAG. When this is stopped, DMAFLAG interrupt processing is performed. Since the output of the DMA execution signal DMAFLAG is stopped every 16 milliseconds (ms) as described above, the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a performs DMAFLAG interrupt processing every 16 ms. The liquid crystal control MPU 1750a outputs the external WDT clear signal shown in FIG. 161 from the built-in input / output port to the flip-flop 1750i shown in FIG. 161 each time this DMAFLAG interrupt processing is started. ing.

  When the DMAFLAG interrupt process is started, the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a sets the multiple interrupt permission (step S1020). In the multiple interrupt permission setting, various interrupt processes such as an interrupt by the DMA execution signal DMAFLAG from the VDP 1750c and an interrupt when receiving a display command from the sub-integrated board 1740 are set to be valid. If these various interrupt processing settings are changed from valid to invalid due to the influence of noise, for example, there is a possibility that various interrupt processing cannot be performed, and the game must be interrupted. Therefore, in this embodiment, multiple interrupt permission is set in the DMAFLAG interrupt processing, that is, every 16 ms.

  Subsequent to step S1020, noise cancellation determination processing is performed (step S1022). In this noise cancellation determination process, the influence of noise at the terminal to which the DMA execution signal DMAFLAG is input is determined. Specifically, the signal input to the terminal is sampled (referred to as “terminal level”), and whether or not the noise removal time is exceeded is determined.

  Following step S1022, it is determined whether the terminal level is normal (step S1024). This determination is made based on the terminal level in step S1022. Specifically, when the terminal level exceeds the noise elimination time, that is, when the DMA execution signal DMAFLAG input to the terminal is a signal that is not affected by noise, the terminal level is determined to be normal. When the removal time has not been exceeded, that is, when the DMA execution signal DMAFLAG input to the terminal is a signal affected by noise, it is determined as abnormal.

  When the terminal level is normal in step S1024, that is, when the DMA execution signal DMAFLAG input to the terminal is not affected by noise, it is determined whether or not the up / down flag UD-FLG is 0. Is performed (step S1026). This up / down flag UD-FLG is a flag indicating whether to generate drawing data for the upper screen or drawing data for the lower screen, and has a value of 0 when generating drawing data for the upper screen. Set to 1 when generating drawing data for the lower screen.

  In step S1026, when the up / down flag UD-FLG has a value of 0, that is, when drawing data for the upper screen of one screen is generated, port setting processing is performed (step S1028). In this port setting process, the same process as the port setting process in step S1008 in the liquid crystal control power-on process shown in FIG. 201 is performed, and various input / output ports built in the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a are set.

  Subsequent to step S1028, VDP initial setting processing is performed (step S1030). In this VDP initial setting process, the same process as the VDP initial setting process in step S1010 in the liquid crystal control side power-on process shown in FIG. As data, data for setting the size of a canvas CV (not shown), which is a virtual screen, data for cutting a part of the canvas CV into a window shape (rectangular area) and displaying it on the screen, right and left of the liquid crystal display 1315 from the line buffer Data for setting the size of one line for drawing the direction and data for setting the resolution are written. That is, each data is overwritten.

  Following step S1030, scaler IC initial setting processing 2 is performed (step S1032). In this scaler IC initial setting process 2, among the register group 1750fa of the scaler IC 1750f, the field 1750g [0] read start address register OSFILD0 to the field 1750g [3] read start address register OSFILD3, the field 1750g [0] shown in FIG. ] Write start address register ISFILD0 to field 1750g [3] Write respective setting values to write start address register ISFILD3, memory read line feed width register OMWI, memory write line feed width register IMWI, and memory access control register. That is, each setting value is overwritten. These set values are set by transmitting them as write serial data SCL-S0 shown in FIG. 161 to the scaler IC 1750f in synchronization with the I / F clock signal SCL-SCL.

  Subsequent to step S1032, command analysis processing is performed (step S1034). In this command analysis process, a display command from the sub-integrated board 1740 shown in FIG. 140 is received by a liquid crystal control side command reception interrupt process described later, and the received display command is analyzed.

  Subsequent to step S1034, drawing condition setting data setting processing is performed (step S1036). In this drawing condition setting data setting process, schedule data corresponding to the display command analyzed in step S1034 is extracted from the liquid crystal control ROM 1750b shown in FIG. 161, and the first screen data is extracted from the extracted schedule data from the liquid crystal control ROM 1750b. Of the extracted first screen data, the drawing condition setting data is output to the VDP register 1750cb of the VDP 1750c, or when the schedule data is in progress, the screen data arranged in time series in the schedule data is displayed. Next, the next screen data is extracted from the liquid crystal control ROM 1750b, and among the extracted screen data, drawing condition setting data is output to the VDP register 1750cb of the VDP 1750c. As described above, the drawing condition setting data includes data for setting the size of a canvas CV (not shown) that is a virtual screen, data for cutting a part of the canvas CV into a window shape (rectangular area), and displaying the data on the screen. Data to set the composite screen by arranging the sprites in layers, data to set the size of one line for drawing the horizontal direction of the liquid crystal display 1315 from the line buffer, data to set the resolution, etc. ing. Specifically, among the drawing condition setting data, data other than the data related to the environment setting of VDP 1750c is written into the VDP register 1750cb of VDP 1750c. Here, in the VDP register 1750cb of the VDP 1750c, as data other than the data related to the environment setting of the VDP 1750c, a part of the canvas CV is cut into a window shape (rectangular area) and displayed on the screen, and the grouped sprite is layered. Write the data to place and set the composite screen. That is, each data is overwritten.

  Subsequent to step S1036, sprite setting data setting processing is performed (step S1038). In this sprite setting data setting process, schedule data corresponding to the display command analyzed in step S1034 is extracted from the liquid crystal control ROM 1750b shown in FIG. 161, and the first screen data is extracted from the extracted schedule data from the liquid crystal control ROM 1750b. Of the extracted top screen data, sprite setting data is output to the sprite register 1750ca of the VDP 1750c, or when the schedule data is in progress, one screen data arranged in time series is added to the schedule data. The next screen data is extracted from the liquid crystal control ROM 1750b and sprite setting data is output to the sprite register 1750ca of the VDP 1750c among the extracted screen data. As described above, the sprite setting data includes data to be displayed on the screen as a sprite by pasting a plurality of characters, data for setting the sprite drawing color, data for setting the sprite drawing position, data for grouping a plurality of sprites, etc. It is composed of

  When performing the sprite setting data setting processing, the sprite setting data written to the sprite register 1750ca of the VDP 1750c is DMA-transferred from the first buffer of the sprite register 1750ca to the second buffer of the sprite register 1750ca 16 ms before the first buffer. In addition, the same sprite setting data is written in the second buffer. The VDP 1750c extracts sprite data from the character RAM 1750m by the transfer IC 1750m based on the sprite setting data DMA-transferred to the second buffer, that is, the sprite setting data of 16 ms before, and the extracted sprite data is a virtual screen of the VDP 1750c. Drawing data is generated by expanding into a bitmap with a canvas CV that is not. In the present embodiment, as described above, the case where the drawing data for the upper screen is generated is set as a reference. For this reason, when generating drawing data for the upper screen, drawing data expanded into a bitmap on the canvas CV is a rectangular area of 800 dots in the x direction and 300 dots in the y direction from the origin of the canvas CV. Already placed in the area. The VDP 1750c will be described in detail later, but when a predetermined condition is met, the generated drawing data is held in the line buffer as it is for the upper screen as it is in the upper screen, and the drawing data held in this line buffer is stored in the line buffer. Output to scaler IC 1750f.

  Subsequent to step S1038, a sprite data non-resident area transfer start process is performed (step S1039). In this sprite data non-resident area transfer start process, non-resident area transfer schedule data corresponding to the display command analyzed in the command analysis process of step S1034 is extracted from the liquid crystal control ROM 1750b shown in FIG. First, the non-resident area transfer data is extracted. Based on the extracted head non-resident area transmission data, the transfer source address, transfer destination address, etc. are written and set in various registers in the register group 1750ma of the transfer IC 1750m shown in FIG. 161, and the transfer IC 1750m stores in the character ROM 1750d. When the sprite data is transferred to the non-resident area 1750zb of the character RAM 1750z or the non-resident area transfer schedule data is in progress, one non-resident area transfer data arranged in time series is added to the non-resident area transfer schedule data. Next, the next non-resident area transfer data is extracted from the liquid crystal control ROM 1750b, and based on the extracted non-resident area transfer data, the transfer source address, transfer destination address, etc. are written into various registers in the register group 1750ma of the transfer IC 1750m. In setting the transfer IC1750m is or start transferring sprite data stored in the character ROM1750d of characters RAM1750z nonresident region 1750Zb. As described above, the non-resident area transfer schedule data includes time-series arrangement of non-resident area transfer data defining the order when the sprite data stored in the character ROM 1750d is transferred to the non-resident area 1750zb of the character RAM 1750z. It is configured. The non-resident area transfer data defines the order in which the screen data drawn on the liquid crystal display 1315 according to the progress of the schedule data is transferred in advance to the sprite data from the character ROM 1750d to the character RAM 1750z non-resident area 1750zb. In other words, the non-resident area transfer schedule defines the time when the sprite data stored in the character ROM 1750d is transferred to the character RAM 1750z in time for the time when the sprite is drawn on the liquid crystal display 1315 according to the schedule data. Thereby, the transfer timing of sprite data from the character ROM 1750d to the character RAM 1750z can be managed. Thus, the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a advances the drawing of the liquid crystal display 1315 by proceeding in parallel with the two schedulers of schedule data and non-resident area transfer schedule data corresponding to the display command. When the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a writes various setting values to the register group 1750ma of the transfer IC 1750m and sets them, the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a outputs a sprite data transfer start signal to the transfer IC 1750m. The transfer IC 1750m to which the sprite data transfer start signal is input starts to transfer the sprite data stored in the character ROM 1750d to the character RAM 1750z based on various setting values written in the register group 1750ma.

  Subsequent to step S1039, sprite optimization is performed (step S1040). In this sprite optimization, sprites outside the display area of the liquid crystal display 1315 shown in FIG. As a result, unnecessary sprites are eliminated from the VDP 1750c, so that the arithmetic processing capability of the VDP 1750c can be improved.

  Subsequent to step S1040, the value 1 is set to the up / down flag UD-FLG (step S1042). Thereby, the generation of the drawing data for the upper screen is completed, and the drawing data for the lower screen can be generated.

  Subsequent to step S1042, the output of the field signal FIELD to the scaler IC 1750f shown in FIG. 161 is stopped (the field signal FIELD is turned OFF, step S1044), and this routine is terminated. When the output of the field signal FIELD is stopped, the scaler IC 1750f is ready to write the drawing data of the upper screen into the frame memory 1750g shown in FIG.

  On the other hand, when the up / down flag UD-FLG is not 0 (value 1) in step S1026, that is, when drawing data for the lower screen is generated, port setting processing is performed (step S1046). In this port setting process, the same process as the port setting process in step S1028, that is, the same process as the port setting process in step S1008 in the liquid crystal control power-on process shown in FIG. 201 is performed, and is incorporated in the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a. Set various input / output ports.

  Subsequent to step S1046, VDP initial setting processing is performed (step S1048). In this VDP initial setting process, the same process as the VDP initial setting process in step S1030, that is, the same process as the VDP initial setting process in step S1010 in the liquid crystal control side power-on process shown in FIG. In the VDP register 1750cb of the VDP 1750c, as data relating to the environment setting of the VDP 1750c, data for setting the size of a canvas CV (not shown) which is a virtual screen, a part of the canvas CV is cut out into a window shape (rectangular area) and displayed on the screen Data to be displayed, data for setting the size of one line for drawing the horizontal direction of the liquid crystal display 1315 from the line buffer, and data for setting the resolution are written. That is, each data is overwritten.

  Subsequent to step S1048, scaler IC initial setting processing 2 is performed (step S1050). This scaler IC initial setting process 2 is the same process as the scaler IC initial setting process 2 in step S1032, and of the register group 1750fa of the scaler IC 1750f, the field 1750g [0] read start address register OSFILD0 shown in FIG. Field 1750g [3] Read start address register OSFILD3, Field 1750g [0] Write start address register ISFILD0 to Field 1750g [3] Write start address register ISFILD3, Memory read line feed width register OMWI, Memory write line feed width register IMWI, Memory access Write each setting value to the control register. That is, each setting value is overwritten. These set values are set by transmitting them as write serial data SCL-S0 shown in FIG. 161 to the scaler IC 1750f in synchronization with the I / F clock signal SCL-SCL.

  Subsequent to step S1050, drawing condition setting data setting processing is performed (step S1052). This drawing condition setting data setting process is the same drawing condition setting data setting process as in step S1036, and relates to the environment setting written in the drawing condition setting data setting process in step S1036 in the DMAFLAG interrupt process the last time, that is, 16 ms before. Write out the same data other than the data, the data that cuts a part of the canvas CV into a window shape (rectangular area) and displays it on the screen, and the data that sets the composite screen by arranging the grouped sprites in the layer . That is, each data is overwritten.

  Subsequent to step S1052, a sprite setting data coordinate change setting process is performed (step S1054). In the sprite setting data coordinate change setting process, the sprite drawing position of the sprite setting data written in the sprite register 1750ca of the VDP 1750c in the sprite setting data setting process of step S1038 in the DMAFLAG interrupt process is set last time, that is, 16 ms ago. The y coordinate value of the data to be set is subtracted by the value 300.

  When the sprite setting data coordinate change setting process is performed, the sprite setting data written to the sprite register 1750ca of the VDP 1750c in the sprite setting data setting process of step S1038 in the DMAFLAG interrupt process 16 ms earlier is the first buffer of the sprite register 1750ca. To the second buffer of the sprite register 1750ca and the same sprite setting data is written in the first buffer and the second buffer. The liquid crystal control MPU 1750a subtracts the y-coordinate value of data for setting the drawing position of the sprite from the sprite setting data written in the first buffer by a value 300. Thus, the next time, that is, 16 ms later, the sprite setting data whose y-coordinate value has been changed is DMA-transferred from the first buffer of the sprite register 1750ca to the second buffer of the sprite register 1750ca, and is identical to the first buffer and the second buffer. The sprite setting data has been written. The VDP 1750c extracts sprite data from the character RAM 1750z by the transfer IC 1750m based on the sprite setting data DMA-transferred to the second buffer, that is, the sprite setting data whose y coordinate is changed, and the extracted sprite data is displayed on the virtual screen of the VDP 1750c. The drawing data is generated by expanding it into a bitmap with a canvas CV (not shown). The drawing data is arranged in a cutout area which is a rectangular area of 800 dots in the x direction and 300 dots in the y direction from the origin set at the upper left of the canvas CV. The VDP 1750c will be described in detail later, but when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the generated drawing data is held in the line buffer as it is for the lower screen as it is in the lower screen, and the drawing data held in this line buffer is stored. Output to scaler IC 1750f.

  Following step S1054, a code comparison check process is performed (step S1056). In this code contrast check process, various programs copied from the liquid crystal control ROM 1750b to the liquid crystal built-in RAM in the boot process of step S1000 in the liquid crystal control side power-on process shown in FIG. 201 are stored in the liquid crystal control ROM 1750b. Check the consistency of whether it matches the program. If there is a program that does not match, the program is copied from the liquid crystal control ROM 1750b to the liquid crystal built-in RAM. In this way, various programs with consistency are stored in the liquid crystal built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S1056, the work area is backed up (step S1058). In this work area backup, the information processed in the DMAFLAG interrupt process is copied to a copy area on the work area provided in the liquid crystal built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S1058, the value 0 is set in the up / down flag UD-FLG (step S1060). Thus, the generation of the drawing data for the lower screen is completed, and the drawing data for the upper screen, which is the next one screen, can be generated.

  Subsequent to step S1060, the output of the field signal FIELD to the scaler IC 1750f is started (the field signal FIELD is turned on, step S1062), and this routine is ended. When the output of the field signal FIELD is started, the scaler IC 1750f is ready to write the drawing data of the lower screen into the frame memory 1750g.

  On the other hand, when the terminal level is abnormal in step S1024, that is, when the DMA execution signal DMAFLAG input to the terminal is a signal affected by noise, this routine is ended as it is.

  Note that the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a sequentially performs the port setting process in step S1028, the VDP initial setting process in step S1030, and the scaler IC initial setting process 2 in step S1032 in the DMAFLAG interrupt process, that is, every 16 ms, or step S1046. Port setting processing, VDP initial setting processing in step S1048, and scaler IC initial setting processing 2 in step S1050 are sequentially performed.

  In the port setting processing in step S1028 and step S1046, if the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a is affected by noise, the input / output direction of the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a changes, making it difficult to exchange electrical signals with the VDP 1750c and the scaler IC 1750f, and control is impossible. Or fall into. Therefore, the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a is less susceptible to the influence of noise by performing the port setting process in step S1028 or step S1046 in the DMAFLAG interrupt process, that is, every 16 ms.

  In the VDP initial setting process in steps S1030 and S1048, when the VDP 1750c is affected by noise, the data related to the environment setting written in the VDP register 1750cb of the VDP 1750c changes, and a bit is generated on a canvas CV (not shown) which is a virtual screen. It becomes difficult to place the drawing data developed on the map in the cutout area described above, and it is impossible to generate correct drawing data, or the drawing data whose resolution is increased or decreased is transferred to the scaler IC 1750f. It will output. Therefore, the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a performs the VDP initial setting process in step S1030 or step S1048 in the DMAFLAG interrupt process, that is, every 16 ms, so that the VDP register 1750cb of the VDP 1750c stores the data related to the environment setting of the VDP 1750c as Data for setting the size of a canvas CV (not shown) which is a virtual screen, data for cutting a part of the canvas CV into a window shape (rectangular area) and displaying it on the screen, and drawing the horizontal direction of the liquid crystal display 1315 from the line buffer By writing data for setting the size of one line and data for setting the resolution, that is, by overwriting, the data is less affected by noise.

  In scaler IC initial setting processing 2 in steps S1032 and S1050, when scaler IC 1750f is affected by noise, for example, field 1750g [0] read start address register OSFILD0 to field 1750g [3] in register group 1750fa of scaler IC 1750f. The setting value set in the read start address register OSFILD3 changes, and the drawing data on the upper screen and the drawing data on the lower screen cannot be read correctly. Then, even if the drawing data for one screen is read, the drawing data becomes chaotic. In addition, the set value set in the field 1750g [0] write start address register ISFILD0 to field 1750g [0] write start address register ISFILD3 changes, and the upper screen drawing data and the lower screen drawing data are stored in the field 1750g [0]. The field 1750g [3] cannot be correctly written. Then, drawing data for one screen that is chaotic is generated in the frame memory 1750g. Therefore, the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a performs the scaler IC initial setting process 2 in either step S1032 or step S1050 in the DMAFLAG interrupt process, that is, every 16 ms, thereby configuring the register group 1750fa of the scaler IC 1750f, the field 1750g [ 0] Read start address register OSFILD0 to field 1750g [3] Read start address register OSFILD3, field 1750g [0] Write start address register ISFILD0 to field 1750g [3] Write start address register ISFILD3, memory read line feed width register OMWI, memory write Write setting values to the line feed width register IMWI and the memory access control register MDACT. Thus, it is less affected by noise by words overwritten. Therefore, even if it is affected by noise, the drawing data for one screen can be drawn and displayed on the liquid crystal display 1315.

  Next, a drawing data generation method will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG. When the output of the DMA execution signal DMAFLAG shown in FIG. 203 (e) input to the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a from the VDP 1750c is stopped and the signal falls (referred to as “down edge”, timing T0), the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a The DMAFLAG interrupt process shown in FIG. 202 is performed.

  When the DMAFLAG interrupt processing is started, the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a performs VDP initial setting processing (timing T1, DMAFLAG interrupt processing step S1030). In this VDP initial setting process, as described above, data for setting the size of a canvas CV (not shown), which is a virtual screen, is stored in the VDP register 1750cb of the VDP 1750c shown in FIG. , Data to cut out a part of the canvas CV into a window shape (rectangular area) and display it on the screen, data to set the size of one line for drawing the horizontal direction of the liquid crystal display 1315 from the line buffer, and the resolution are set Write data to be used. That is, each data is overwritten.

  Subsequently, the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a performs a scaler IC initial setting process 2 (timing T2, step S1032 of the same process). In the scaler IC initial setting process 2, as described above, the field 1750g [0] read start address register OSFILD0 to the field 1750g [3] read start address of the register group 1750fa of the scaler IC 1750f shown in FIG. Register OSFILD3, field 1750g [0] write start address register ISFILD0 to field 1750g [3] write start address register ISFILD3, memory read line feed width register OMWI, memory write line feed width register IMWI, and memory access control register Write. That is, each setting value is overwritten.

  Subsequently, the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a performs a sprite setting data setting process (timing T3, step S1038 of the same process). In the sprite setting data setting process, as described above, the schedule data corresponding to the display command analyzed in step S1034 of the process is extracted from the liquid crystal control ROM 1750b shown in FIG. First screen data is extracted from the liquid crystal control ROM 1750b from the schedule data thus obtained, and among the extracted first screen data, sprite setting data is output to the sprite register 1750ca of the VDP 1750c or when the schedule data is in progress. Then, the screen data arranged in time series in the schedule data is advanced by one, and the next screen data is extracted from the liquid crystal control ROM 1750b. Among the extracted screen data, the sprite setting data is spliced to the VDP 1750c. Or output to the register 1750ca.

  Subsequently, when the VDP 1750c outputs the vertical synchronization signal VS-IN shown in FIG. 203 (f) and rises (referred to as “up edge”, timing T4), the VDP output shown in FIG. N-1) The drawing data of the lower screen is held in the line buffer one line at a time, and the drawing data held in this line buffer is output to the scaler IC 1750f shown in FIG. The drawing data of the (N-1) th lower screen sets the drawing position of the sprite among the sprite setting data written to the sprite register 1750ca of the VDP 1750c by the sprite setting data setting process of step S1038 in the DMAFLAG interrupt process 16 ms ago. The y coordinate value of the data to be generated is generated by subtracting only the value 300. At timing T4, the scaler IC 1750f receives the vertical synchronization signal VS-IN shown in FIG. 203 (f) as an up-edge, and based on the field signal FIELD from the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a shown in FIG. 203 (g), VDP 1750c IFLD0 shown in FIG. 203 (h) and IFLD1 signal shown in FIG. 203 (i) are signals for telling whether the drawing data output from the drawing data is the drawing data for the upper screen or the drawing data for the lower screen. Are respectively output to the frame memory 1750g, and the upper screen drawing data written in the field 1750g [2] of the frame memory 1750g and the field 1750g [3] of the frame memory 1750g shown in FIG. The drawing data on the lower screen is sequentially read out, and FIG. Via the LVDS transmitter 1750h shown in 1, and outputs to the liquid crystal display device 1315. The frame memory 1750g receives (N−1) in the field 1750g [1] of the frame memory 1750g shown in FIG. 203 (m) by the input IFLD0 shown in FIG. 203 (h) and the IFLD1 signal shown in FIG. 203 (i). ) Write the drawing data of the lower screen.

  Subsequently, the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a down-edges the field signal FIELD shown in FIG.

  Subsequently, when 16 ms elapses from the timing T0 and the DMA execution signal DMAFLAG shown in FIG. 203 (e) goes down (timing T6), the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a performs the DMAFLAG interrupt processing again.

  When this DMAFLAG interrupt process is started, the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a performs a VDP initial setting process (timing T7, DMAFLAG interrupt process step S1048). In this VDP initial setting process, as described above, data for setting the size of a canvas CV (not shown), which is a virtual screen, is stored in the VDP register 1750cb of the VDP 1750c shown in FIG. , Data to cut out a part of the canvas CV into a window shape (rectangular area) and display it on the screen, data to set the size of one line for drawing the horizontal direction of the liquid crystal display 1315 from the line buffer, and the resolution are set Write data to be used. That is, each data is overwritten.

  Subsequently, the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a performs a scaler IC initial setting process 2 (timing T8, step S1050 of the process). In the scaler IC initial setting process 2, as described above, the field 1750g [0] read start address register OSFILD0 to the field 1750g [3] read start address of the register group 1750fa of the scaler IC 1750f shown in FIG. Register OSFILD3, field 1750g [0] write start address register ISFILD0 to field 1750g [3] write start address register ISFILD3, memory read line feed width register OMWI, memory write line feed width register IMWI, and memory access control register Write. That is, each setting value is overwritten.

  Subsequently, the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a performs a sprite setting data setting coordinate change setting process (timing T9, step S1054 of the same process). In this sprite setting data coordinate change setting process, the y coordinate value of the data for setting the drawing position of the sprite is subtracted by a value 300 from the Nth sprite setting data written to the sprite register 1750ca of the VDP 1750c at timing T3. As a result, the generated drawing data is arranged in a cutout area which is a rectangular area of 800 dots in the x direction and 300 dots in the y direction from the origin set at the upper left of the canvas CV.

  Subsequently, the VDP 1750c up-edges the vertical synchronization signal VS-IN shown in FIG. 203 (f) (timing T10), and draws the drawing data of the Nth upper screen as one line as the VDP output shown in FIG. 203 (d). The drawing data held in the line buffer are output to the scaler IC 1750f. The drawing data of the Nth upper screen is generated from the sprite setting data written in the sprite register 1750ca of the VDP 1750c at the timing T3. At timing T10, the scaler IC 1750f receives the vertical synchronization signal VS-IN shown in FIG. 203 (f) as an up-edge, and based on the field signal FIELD from the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a shown in FIG. 203 (g), VDP 1750c. IFLD0 shown in FIG. 203 (h) and IFLD1 signal shown in FIG. 203 (i), which are signals that tell whether the drawing data output from the drawing data is the upper screen drawing data or the lower screen drawing data. Is output to the frame memory 1750g, and the upper screen drawing data written in the field 1750g [0] of the frame memory 1750g and the field 1750g [1] of the frame memory 1750g shown in FIG. Read the drawing data on the lower screen sequentially, Through DS transmitter 1750h, and outputs to the liquid crystal display device 1315. The frame memory 1750g receives the Nth upper screen in the field 1750g [2] of the frame memory 1750g shown in FIG. 203 (m) by the input IFLD0 shown in FIG. 203 (h) and the IFLD1 signal shown in FIG. 203 (i). Write drawing data.

  Subsequently, the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a up-edges the field signal FIELD shown in FIG. 203 (g) (timing T11, step S1062 of the process), and ends the DMAFLAG interrupt process.

  As shown in FIG. 203 (n), the scaler IC 1750f sequentially reads the upper screen drawing data written in the field 1750g [0] and the lower screen drawing data written in the field 1750g [1] at the timing T10. The data is output to the liquid crystal display 1315 via the LVDS transmitter 1750h. Subsequently, after 16 ms from the timing T0, the upper screen drawing data written in the field 1750g [0] and the lower screen drawing data written in the field 1750g [1] are sequentially read out via the LVDS transmitter 1750h. It outputs to the liquid crystal display 1315. Thus, the same screen is drawn on the liquid crystal display 1315 for 32 ms, and one screen drawn on the liquid crystal display 1315 is updated every 32 ms. Yes.

[17-3. LCD control side command reception interrupt processing]
Next, the liquid crystal control side command reception interrupt process will be described. When the liquid crystal serial data DSP-SER shown in FIG. 161 is started to be transmitted from the sub-integrated board 1740, the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a of the liquid crystal control board 1750 incorporates the liquid crystal serial data DSP-SER in the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a. One byte (8 bits) of information is taken into the reception buffer at the serial input / output port. When this fetching is completed, an interrupt is generated as a trigger, and this liquid crystal control side command reception interrupt processing is performed. As described above, the liquid crystal serial data DSP-SER is a base command for transmission created based on the base command constituting the display command, and the status of the base command is assigned as the first byte of the base command for transmission. The base command mode is assigned as the second byte of the base command for transmission, and the sum value is calculated as the third byte of the base command for transmission by regarding the status of the base command and the mode of the base command as numerical values. It is.

  When the liquid crystal control command reception interrupt process is started, the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a of the liquid crystal control board 1750 determines whether or not the 1-byte reception period timer has timed out as shown in FIG. 204 (step S1100). This 1-byte reception period timer sets a period during which information of 1 byte (8 bits) can be received in the liquid crystal serial data DSP-SER transmitted from the sub-integrated board 1740.

  When the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out in step S1100, that is, within the period in which 1-byte (8-bit) information can be received from the liquid crystal serial data DSP-SER transmitted from the sub-integrated board 1740. Then, 1-byte information received from the reception buffer of the serial input / output port built in the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a is fetched (step S1102), and the value 1 is added to the reception counter RXC (increment, step S1104). The reception counter RXC is a counter that indicates the number of times it has been extracted from the reception buffer. If the status that is the first byte of the liquid crystal serial data DSP-SER, that is, the base command for transmission, is extracted from the reception buffer from the sub-integrated board 1740, the value is 1. When the mode that is the second byte of the transmission base command is extracted from the reception buffer, the value is 2. When the sum value that is the third byte of the transmission base command is extracted from the reception buffer, the value is 3. The reception counter RXC is set to an initial value of 0 when the power is turned on.

  Subsequent to step S1104, the DSP-ACK signal is set from ON to OFF (step S1106). By setting the DSP-ACK signal from ON to OFF, the sub integrated board 1740 is informed that reception of the status that is the first byte of the base command for transmission has started.

  Subsequent to step S1106, it is determined whether or not the reception counter RXC has a value of 3, that is, whether or not the sum value that is the third byte of the base command for transmission has been extracted from the reception buffer (step S1108). In this determination, following the status that is the first byte of the base command for transmission, the mode that is the second byte of the base command for transmission and the sum value that is the third byte of the base command for transmission are sequentially received from the reception buffer. It is determined whether it has been taken out.

  When the reception counter RX is not the value 3 in step S1108, that is, following the status that is the first byte of the transmission base command, the mode that is still the second byte of the transmission base command, and the third byte of the transmission base command When the sum values are not sequentially taken out from the reception buffer, the 1-byte reception period timer is set (step S1110), and this routine is terminated. By setting the 1-byte reception period timer in step S1110, the mode that is the second byte of the transmission base command or the period during which the sum value that is the third byte of the transmission base command can be received is set.

  On the other hand, when the reception counter RXC is 3 in step S1108, that is, following the status that is the first byte of the transmission base command, the mode that is the second byte of the transmission base command, and the transmission base command 3 When the sum value which is the byte is taken out from the reception buffer in order, the initial value 0 is set in the reception counter RXC (step S1112), and the sum value is calculated (step S1114). In this calculation, the status that is the first byte of the base command for transmission and the mode that is the second byte of the base command for transmission, which are already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1102, are regarded as numerical values and the sum (sum value). ) Is calculated.

  Subsequent to step S1114, it is determined whether or not the sum value that is the third byte of the base command for transmission already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1102 matches the sum value calculated in step S114 (step S1114). S1116). The sum value, which is the third byte of the transmission base command already taken out from the reception buffer in step S1102, is calculated in step S806 in the liquid crystal serial command control process shown in FIG. It should match the sum value calculated in S1116. However, as described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is supplied with gaming balls from the pachinko island equipment, and when the gaming balls are rubbed against each other and charged, they generate electrostatic discharge and generate noise. 1 is susceptible to noise and is in an environment. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the base command for transmission is created on the sub-integrated board 1740 side based on the base command constituting the display command. As described above, in this basic command for transmission, the status of the basic command is allocated as the first byte of the basic command for transmission, and the mode of the basic command is allocated as the second byte of the basic command for transmission. As the third byte, the sum value is calculated by regarding the status of the base command and the mode of the base command as numerical values and calculating the sum. On the other hand, the liquid crystal control board 1750 side regards the status assigned as the first byte of the received transmission base command and the mode assigned as the second byte as numerical values, and calculates the sum (sum value). Then, it is determined whether or not the calculated sum value matches the sum value allocated as the third byte of the received transmission base command. Thus, it is determined whether or not the transmission base command is changed to a transmission base command different from the regular one due to the influence of noise between the sub-integrated board 1740 and the liquid crystal control board 1750.

  In step S116, if the sum value, which is the third byte of the transmission base command already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1102, matches the sum value calculated in step S114, the received transmission base command is The data is stored in the liquid crystal control side reception ring buffer (step S1118). This "liquid crystal control side reception ring buffer" is a buffer that is used so that the end and the beginning of the buffer are connected. Data is stored sequentially from the beginning of the buffer, and when it reaches the end of the buffer, it returns to the beginning. Remember. When the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a stores in the liquid crystal control side reception ring buffer in step S1118, the status allocated as the first byte of the received transmission base command and the mode allocated as the second byte are displayed. It is stored in association with each other, and the thumb value allocated as the third byte is discarded.

  Subsequent to step S1118, the DSP-ACK signal is set from OFF to ON (step S1120), and this routine is terminated. By setting this DSP-ACK signal from OFF to ON, the status that is the first byte of the basic command for transmission, the mode that is the second byte, and the fact that the sum value that is the third byte has been received are sub-integrated. This is transmitted to the substrate 1740.

  On the other hand, when the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out in step S1100, that is, it exceeds the period during which 1-byte (8-bit) information can be received in the liquid crystal serial data DSP-SER transmitted from the sub-integrated board 1740. If the sum value that is the third byte of the base command for transmission already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1102 and the sum value calculated in step S114 do not match at step S116, End the routine. As a result, the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a cannot set the DSP-ACK signal from OFF to ON. As described above, in step S816 in the liquid crystal serial command control process shown in FIG. It is determined that the time has expired, a transmission base command is created again from the same base command, and transmission of the first to third bytes is sequentially started.

  Next, transmission and reception confirmation of liquid crystal serial data will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG. In this embodiment, as described above, the asynchronous serial is adopted as the transmission method from the sub-integrated board 1740 to the liquid crystal control board 1750, the bit rate is 19.2 kbps, and the liquid crystal serial data DSP-SER format is used. 8-bit communication, LSB first, even parity addition, 1 stop bit.

  When the display command is stored in the sub-integration side transmission ring buffer provided in the sub-integration built-in RAM, the sub-integration MPU 1740a of the sub-integration board 1740 creates a transmission base command based on the base command constituting the display command. Then, the status STTS allocated as the first byte of the created transmission base command is set in the transmission buffer of the serial input / output port built in the sub-integrated MPU 1740a (timing S0, liquid crystal serial command control processing shown in FIG. 195) Step S808). By setting the status allocated as the first byte of the base command for transmission in this transmission buffer, the serial input / output port 1 bit at a time to the liquid crystal control board 1750 as the liquid crystal serial data DSP-SER shown in FIG. Transmission starts (transmission content is status STTS shown in FIG. 205C).

  Subsequently, the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a of the liquid crystal control board 1750 uses the serial I / O port reception buffer built in the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a to display the status assigned as the first byte of the transmission base command transmitted from the sub-integrated board 1740. When the fetching is completed, the status assigned as the first byte of the transmission base command is fetched from the reception buffer, and the DSP-ACK signal shown in FIG. 205B is set from ON to OFF (timing S1, FIG. Step S1106 in the liquid crystal control side command reception interrupt process shown in 204).

  Subsequently, the sub-integrated MPU 1740a outputs the status allocated as the first byte of the base command for transmission to the liquid crystal control board 1750 bit by bit from the serial input / output port, and sends it to the transmission buffer when the transmission buffer becomes empty. The mode allocated as the second byte of the trust command is set (timing S2, step S822 in the transmission buffer empty interrupt process shown in FIG. 196). By setting the mode allocated as the second byte of the base command for transmission in this transmission buffer, the serial input / output port 1 bit at a time to the liquid crystal control board 1750 as the liquid crystal serial data DSP-SER shown in FIG. Transmission starts (transmission contents are in the mode MODE shown in FIG. 205 (c)).

  Subsequently, the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a captures the mode assigned as the second byte of the transmission base command transmitted from the sub-integrated board 1740 in the reception buffer of the serial input / output port. The status allocated as the second byte of the trust group command is fetched. At this time, the DSP-ACK signal shown in FIG. 205 (b) remains off.

  Subsequently, the sub-integrated MPU 1740a outputs the mode allocated as the second byte of the base command for transmission to the liquid crystal control board 1750 bit by bit from the serial input / output port, and sends it to the transmission buffer when the transmission buffer becomes empty. The sum value allocated as the third byte of the trust command is set (timing S3, step S822 in the transmission buffer empty interrupt process shown in FIG. 196). By setting the sum value allocated as the third byte of the base command for transmission in this transmission buffer, the liquid crystal control board 1750 is converted into the liquid crystal serial data DSP-SER shown in FIG. (The transmission content is the sum value SUM shown in FIG. 205 (c)).

  Subsequently, the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a captures the sum value allocated as the third byte of the transmission base command transmitted from the sub-integrated board 1740 with the reception buffer of the serial input / output port built in the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a. Is completed, the sum value allocated as the third byte of the transmission base command is fetched from the reception buffer, the status already allocated from the reception buffer as the first byte of the transmission basic command, and the transmission base command The mode allocated as the 2nd byte is considered as a numerical value, and the sum (sum value) is calculated. The calculated sum value and the received reception buffer are allocated as the 3rd byte of the basic command for transmission. It is determined whether or not the sum value matches. If they match, the DSP-ACK signal shown in FIG. 205B is set from OFF to ON (timing S4, step S1120 in the liquid crystal control side command reception interrupt process shown in FIG. 204).

[18. Direction]
Next, an effect that the above-described cars 1572c and 1573c travel on the front surface of the display area 1320 of the liquid crystal display 1315 will be described with reference to FIG. 206, and an effect that is drawn and reproduced in the display area 1320 of the liquid crystal display 1315. 207 to 210 will be described, schedule data for effects stored in advance in the liquid crystal control ROM 1750b of the liquid crystal display substrate 1750 will be described with reference to FIG. 212, and a method for switching effects will be described with reference to FIG. The correspondence relationship between the display command for drawing various screens in the display area of the liquid crystal display 1315 and the mini character will be described. FIG. 206 is a diagram showing an example of the effect of traveling by the car, FIG. 207 is a diagram showing an example of the effect drawn in the display area of the liquid crystal display, and FIG. 208 is a continuation of the example of the effect of FIG. 209 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example of the effect of FIG. 208, FIG. 210 is an example of the effect by the live action corresponding to FIGS. 208 (d) and 208 (e), and FIG. 211 is the effect. FIG. 212 is a diagram illustrating an example of an appearing mini-character, and FIG. 212 is a diagram illustrating an example of production schedule data stored in the liquid crystal control ROM. FIG. 212B is a timing chart for switching production at a switching point. It is a figure (c) which shows an example. In FIG. 206, the warp member 1260, the emblem 1200c, and the like are shown semi-transparently in order to make the display area 1320 of the liquid crystal display 1315 and the car 1573c inside the elliptical opening 1200aa of the center unit 1200 easy to see. In FIG. 210, a display area 1320 ′ centered about the center of the display area 1320 of the liquid crystal display 1315 is extracted and shown.

[18-1. Direction that car runs]
Since the effect that the car 1572c travels and the effect that the car 1573c travels are similar effects, the effect that the car 1573c travels will be described here. In the display area 1320 of the liquid crystal display 1315, as shown in FIG. 206, a left change display area for changing and displaying the decorative pattern 1320a from the upper side to the lower side is formed on the center left side of the display area 1320. A middle variation display area for variably displaying the decorative pattern 1320b from the upper side to the lower side is formed at the center of the display area, and a right variation display area for variably displaying the decorative pattern 1320c from the upper side to the lower side on the center right side of the display area 1320. Is formed, a middle variation display area is disposed at a position corresponding to the center of the elliptical opening 1200aa of the center unit 1200, and a left variation display area is disposed adjacent to the left side of the middle variation display area. A right variation display area is arranged adjacent to the right side of the area. As described above, the left display area, the middle display area, and the right display area are close to the display area 1320 of the liquid crystal display 1315 at a position corresponding to the center of the elliptical opening 1200aa of the center unit 1200. Are arranged (collected).

  The decorative symbols 1320a, 1320b, and 1320c are stopped and displayed in an opaque manner until the variable display is started in each of the variable display areas. On the other hand, when the variable display is started, the decorative symbols 1320a, 1320b, and 1320c The display is shifted from the stop display to the high-speed display. The decorative symbols 1320a, 1320b, and 1320c are changed to a translucent mode so that the background image can be seen when shifting from the stop display to the high-speed display, and the display shifts from the high-speed display to the low-speed display. Before the stop display, the decorative symbols 1320a, 1320b, 1320c are returned to an opaque mode.

  In addition, on the front surface of the display area 1320 of the liquid crystal display 1315, the car 1573c starts to travel along the outer periphery of the elliptical opening 1200aa of the center unit 1200 from the rear of the emblem 1200c, which is the standby position. As described above, the vehicle 1573c is hidden behind the emblem 1200c and is difficult to view in a state of waiting behind the emblem 1200c. For this reason, when the car 1573c starts to travel from the emblem 1200c which is the standby position, it suddenly appears on the front surface of the display area 1320 of the liquid crystal display 1315, and soil smoke 1320d is displayed as a trace of the travel of the car 1573c. 1320 is rendered.

  Thus, when the vehicle 1573c starts traveling from behind the emblem 1200c, which is the standby position, the vehicle 1573c displays the decorative symbols 1320a, 1320b, and 1320c in a variable manner along the outer periphery of the elliptical opening 1200aa of the center unit 1200. It suddenly appears in front of the display area 1320 of the liquid crystal display 1315 between the variable display area and the elliptical opening 1200aa of the center unit 1200. As a result, the decorative symbols 1320a, 1320b, and 1320c are decorated in the variable display area by suddenly appearing the car 1573c in the display area that is not used for variable display and traveling along the elliptical opening 1200aa of the center unit 1200. An effect by a powerful car 1573c can be added to the effect in which the symbols 1230a, 1320b, and 1320c are variably displayed.

  In addition, the player displays the decorative symbols 1320a, 1320b, and 1320c in a variably displayed manner in order to determine whether or not a big hit gaming state occurs based on the result of the decorative symbols 1320a, 1320b, and 1320c being variably displayed and stopped. The line of sight is directed to the variable display area. In the present embodiment, the display area 1320 of the liquid crystal display 1315 between the variable display area in which the decorative symbols 1320a, 1320b, and 1320c are variably displayed and the oval opening 1200aa of the center unit 1200 is placed in front of the vehicle. 1573c travels and soil smoke 1320d is drawn as a trace of the travel of the car 1573c. Thus, not only the variable display area where the decorative symbols 1320a, 1320b, 1320c are variably displayed, but also the variable display region where the decorative symbols 1320a, 1320b, 1320c are variably displayed, and the center unit 1200 The display area 1320 of the liquid crystal display 1315 can be directed to the elliptical opening 1200aa. Therefore, the entire display area 1320 of the liquid crystal display 1315 inside the elliptical opening 1200aa of the center unit 1200 can be used as an effect.

[18-2. Production rendered and displayed in the display area of the LCD]
Next, an effect rendered and reproduced in the display area 1320 (1320 ′) of the liquid crystal display 1315 will be described. Here, as shown in FIG. 207 (a), the display area 1320 ′ of the liquid crystal display 1315 is fluctuated by rotating the decorative pattern 1320a on the left side of the center of the display area 1320 ′ in the horizontal direction with respect to the central axis. A left variation display area to be displayed is formed, and a center variation display area is formed in the center of the display area 1320 ′. A case will be described in which a right variation display area is formed on the right side where the decorative symbol 1320c is rotated in the left-right direction with respect to the central axis to display the variation. As described above, the left variation display region, the middle variation display region, and the right variation display region have a middle variation display region disposed at a position corresponding to the center of the elliptical opening 1200aa of the center unit 1200. The left variation display area is disposed adjacent to the right variation display area, and the right variation display area is disposed adjacent to the right side of the middle variation display area.

  As shown in FIG. 207 (a), the decorative symbols 1320a, 1320b, and 1320c are stopped and displayed in an opaque manner until the variable display is started in each variable display area. As shown in FIG. 207 (b), in each variable display area, the decorative symbols 1320a, 1320b, 1320c are rotated in the left-right direction with respect to the respective central axes to shift from the stop display to the high-speed display. The decorative symbols 1320a, 1320b, and 1320c are changed to a translucent mode so that the background image can be seen when shifting from the stop display to the high-speed display, and the display shifts from the high-speed display to the low-speed display. Before the stop display, the decorative symbols 1320a, 1320b, 1320c are returned to an opaque state. When the BGM switching determination process is performed in the scheduler main process in step S732 in the 16 ms steady process of the sub-integration side power-on process shown in FIG. The BGM flowing from the left speaker 34 and the right speaker 34 as viewed is switched to another BGM corresponding to the background image drawn and reproduced in the display area 1320 of the liquid crystal display 1315. In this BGM switching, as described above, the BGM is smoothly switched from BGM0 to BGM1 by fading out the current BGM and fading in another BGM. In this way, by changing the BGM when the variable display of the decorative symbols 1320a, 1320b, and 1320c is started in each variable display area, the variable symbols 1320a, 1320b, and 1320c are started to be displayed in a variable manner. When the game is stopped, it is possible to give the player an impression that the expectation to shift to the big hit gaming state that gives a profit to the player is increased.

  The decorative display of the decorative symbols 1320a, 1320b, and 1320c is started in each variable display area, and the decorative graphic 1320a that is variable and displayed in the left variable display area and is stopped and displayed in the right variable display area. When the decorative symbol 1320c is the same symbol, as shown in FIG. 207 (c), a character 1320e indicating that it has reached the reach mode appears in the center of the display area 1320 ′. At this time, the decorative symbol 1320a that is stopped and displayed in the left variation display area and the upper part of the decoration symbol 1320c that is stopped and displayed in the right variation display area overlap with the character 1320e, and the variable display is being displayed in the middle variation display area. The upper part of the decorative symbol 1320b overlaps the character 1320e, but the symbols indicated by the decorative symbols 1320a, 1320b, and 1320c can be visually recognized, and these symbols can be identified.

  In the reach mode, as shown in FIG. 208 (d), an anime main character Char appears, and the animation by the anime main character Char progresses. In this animation production, the main character, Char, will drink tea in the cafeteria. At this time, the decorative symbol 1320a stopped and displayed in the left change area is horizontally moved to the left side of the display area 1320 ′ and is stopped and displayed in the right change display area in order to collect the player's line of sight to the anime main character Char. The decorative pattern 1320c is moved horizontally to the right side of the display area 1320 ′. Then, the anime main character Char rotates the handle 1320fa of the cup 1320f containing tea with a forefinger in the clockwise direction in the drawing as shown in FIG. 208 (e). The rotation of the cup 1320f causes a pattern (not shown) to appear one after another in a manner that follows the handle 1320fa, and the animation hero progresses in a state where the anime hero Char continues to appear, or from the anime hero Char to the live-action hero Char ' The effects of live-action video are progressing after switching. A detailed description of such effect switching will be described later. In the present embodiment, when the anime hero Char rotates the handle 1320fa of the cup 1320f containing tea with one finger, the liquid crystal display 1315 is a mini-character that gives the player a sense of expectation to switch from the animation effect to the live action effect. Appears in the area 1320g on the upper left side of the display area 1320 ′. As shown in FIG. 211, the mini character has a toast 1320ga and a cake 1320gb. When the toast 1320ga appears in the area 1320g, the production is switched from an animation effect to a live action with an probability of about 83%, whereas when the cake 1320gb appears in the area 1320g, the animation production is switched from an animation production to a live action with a probability of 100%. It has become. In addition, even if toast 1320ga appears in area 1320g, it does not relate to the presence or absence of the transition to the big hit gaming state that gives a profit to the player, but when cake 1320gb appears in area 1320g, the player continues after the end of the reach performance. The game is surely shifted to a special game state (a jackpot game state) that gives a profit to the player.

  Returning to FIG. 208, when the effect by animation proceeds as the reach effect, as shown in FIGS. 208 (f), 209 (g), and (h), the decorative symbol 1320a stopped and displayed in the left variation display area. The decorative symbol 1320c stopped and displayed in the right variation display area disappears, and the middle symbol variation display area is moved to the left side, right side, and almost the center of the display region 1320 in accordance with the dance of the anime hero Char, and the decoration symbol 1320b appears. Are displayed in a manner that disappears. Then, again, the decorative symbol 1320a stopped and displayed in the left variation display region and the decorative symbol 1320c stopped and displayed in the right variation display region appear in accordance with the dance of the anime hero Char, and the middle variation display region is displayed in the display region 1320 ′. Returning to the center, the size of the decorative symbol 1320b is enlarged and the decorative symbol 1320b is stopped and displayed. At this time, as shown in FIG. 209 (i), the decorative symbol 1320b stopped and displayed in the middle variation display area is stopped and displayed in the left variation display region and the decoration symbol 1320a stopped and displayed in the right variation display region. When the design is the same as the design 1320c, a non-illustrated character that tells the player that the game will shift to the big hit gaming state that gives a profit appears in the center of the display region 1320 ′, while the decorative design that is stopped and displayed in the middle variation display region When the decorative symbol 1320a that is stopped and displayed in the left variation display area and the decorative symbol 1320c that is stopped and displayed in the right variation display area are not the same as the decorative symbol 1320b, the display returns to the mode shown in FIG. , 1320b, 1320c are stopped and displayed.

  On the other hand, in the case where the effect by the live action progresses after switching from the effect by the animation, as shown in FIGS. 208 (f ′), 209 (g ′), and (h ′), it is stopped and displayed in the left variation display area. The decorative symbol 1320a and the decorative symbol 1320c stopped and displayed in the right variation display area disappear, and instead of the anime hero Char, a live-action hero Char 'by live-action appears, and a middle-symbol variability display according to the dance of the real-photograph hero Char'. The area is displayed in a variable manner in such a manner that the decorative symbol 1320b appears and disappears as the area is moved to the left, right, and substantially in the center of the display area 1320 ′. Then, again, the decorative symbol 1320a stopped and displayed in the left variation display region and the decorative symbol 1320c stopped and displayed in the right variation display region appear in accordance with the dance of the real character hero Char ', and the middle variation display region is displayed in the display region 1320. Returning to the center of ', the size of the decorative symbol 1320b is enlarged and the decorative symbol 1320b is stopped and displayed. At this time, as shown in FIG. 209 (i ′), the decorative symbol 1320b stopped and displayed in the middle variation display area is stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol 1320a and right variation display region that are stopped and displayed in the left variation display region. When the symbol is the same as the ornamental symbol 1320c, a character (not shown) that tells the player that the game is to be changed to the big hit gaming state that gives a profit appears at the center of the display region 1320 ′, while the ornament that is stopped and displayed in the middle variation display region When the symbol 1320b is not the same symbol as the decorative symbol 1320a stopped and displayed in the left variation display area and the ornament symbol 1320c stopped and displayed in the right variation display region, the display returns to the mode shown in FIG. 1320a, 1320b and 1320c are stopped and displayed.

  In the present embodiment, the effect by animation is created based on the effect by live action. More specifically, FIG. 208 (d) is derived from the movement of the main character Char ′ shown in FIGS. 210 (d ′), (e ′), FIG. 208 (f ′) and FIGS. 209 (g) to (i ′). ~ (F) and Figures 209 (g) ~ (i) are created by tracing the movement of the anime hero Char, and the animation produced by the anime hero Char is the same as the action produced by the live-action hero Char '. It has come to be a movement.

  Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, four idols are used as a motif, and one idol out of the four idols is drawn on the display area 1320 of the liquid crystal display 1315 as the main character Char. It is reproduced or drawn and reproduced in the display area 1320 of the liquid crystal display 1315 as the main character Char ', and these idles are switched appropriately. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, each idle song is repeatedly played as BGM and flows from the left speaker 34 and the right speaker 34. Two BGMs are prepared in advance for the four idols, and by switching the BGM, the monotonous effect of rendering the animation main character Char and the live-action main character Char 'on the display area 1320 of the liquid crystal display 1315 is prevented. Have a role. As described above, the BGM switching is determined by the BGM switching determination process included in the scheduler main process in step S732 in the 16 ms steady process in the sub integration side power-on process shown in FIG. The selection ratio of the two BGMs (BGM0, BGM1) prepared for each idle is BGM0: BGM1 = 6: 4. Also, the timing at which the sub-integrated MPU 1740a performs the BGM switching determination process is as described above when the variation display of the decorative symbols 1320a, 1320b, and 1320c is started in each variation display area. As a result, when the sub-integrated MPU 1740a decides to switch from BGM0 to BGM1, since the variation display of the decorative symbols 1320a, 1320b, and 1320c is started, the BGM0 switches to BGM1 having a smaller selection rate than this BGM0. By starting the variable display, it is possible to give the player an impression that the expectation to be a big hit has increased, and it is difficult to lose the freshness of the production. In addition, when the probability variation does not occur, that is, when the probability of a big hit is normal (low probability), if the sub-integrated MPU 1740a determines to switch from BGM0 to BGM1, the variation display of the decorative symbols 1320a, 1320b, and 1320c Since BGM0 is switched from BGM0 to BGM1, which has a lower selection rate than BGM0, when this is started, the expectation of a big hit is increased despite the low probability of starting this variable display. Such an impression can be given to the player.

[18-3. Production schedule data]
Next, production schedule data stored in the liquid crystal control ROM 1750b of the liquid crystal display substrate 1750 will be described. Here, schedule data for reach production will be described as an example of production.

  The liquid crystal control ROM 1750b includes the animation video schedule data A.1 and A.3 in which the content of the animation video rendered and reproduced in the display area 1320 of the liquid crystal display 1315 is defined in advance as an animation image in time series and the effect of animation is advanced. SCHD, schedule data R. for live-action video in which the content of the real-life video to be drawn and reproduced in the display area 1320 of the liquid crystal display 1315 is defined in advance as a live-action image, and the effect of live-action is advanced. SCHD and the like are stored. The live-action video schedule data R.P. An animation image is defined in the first half of the SCHD, and a live-action image is defined from the middle to the latter half.

  Schedule data for animation video As shown in FIG. 212 (a), SCHD draws the decorative symbols 1320a, 1320b, 1320c and background images shown in FIGS. 207 (a) to (c) in parentheses (a) to (c). The content of the structure is defined as an animation image. The parenthesis symbols (d) to (i) are shown in FIGS. 208 (d) to (f) and FIGS. 209 (g) to (i). Further, the configuration contents for drawing the decorative symbols 1320a, 1320b, 1320c, the background image, and the like are respectively defined as animation images.

  Schedule data for live-action video As shown in FIG. 212 (a), SCHD draws the decorative symbols 1320a, 1320b, 1320c and background images shown in FIGS. 207 (a) to (c) in parentheses (a) to (c). The contents of the configuration are respectively defined as animation images, and parentheses (d ′) to (i ′) are shown in FIGS. 210 (d ′), (e ′), FIG. 208 (f ′) and FIG. 209 (g ′). ) To (i ′), the constituent content for drawing the main character Char ′, the decorative symbols 1320a, 1320b, 1320c, the background image, and the like is defined as the real image.

  In this way, the schedule data A. The production until the SCHD animation hero Char appears in the display area 1320 of the liquid crystal display 1315 and the schedule data R.R. The same content as the production until the SCHD live-action hero Char 'appears in the display area 1320 of the liquid crystal display 1315 is defined. Specifically, an effect is provided in which the decorative symbols 1320a, 1320b, and 1320c are variably displayed, and the decorative symbols 1320a and 1320c are stopped and displayed with the same symbol, thereby reaching a reach.

  In the display area 1320 of the liquid crystal display 1315, the schedule data A. SCHD and video schedule data When reach production is started and progressed according to SCHD, the screens in the modes shown in FIGS. 207 (a) to (c) are drawn, and the animation video schedule data A.S. When the reach production proceeds according to the SCHD, the screens shown in FIGS. 208 (d) to (f) and 209 (g) to (i) are drawn, while the video schedule data R.D. When reach production proceeds according to SCHD, the screens of the modes shown in FIGS. 210 (d ′), (e ′), FIG. 208 (f ′) and FIGS. 209 (g ′) to (i ′) are drawn. .

  In the present embodiment, the size of the animation image that defines the configuration content of one animation video is the same as the size of the live-action image that defines the configuration content of one actual shooting video. Schedule data A. The overall size of SCHD and schedule data for live-action video The overall size of the SCHD is the same. Specifically, as shown in FIG. The size of the parenthesis (a) that defines the contents of the SCHD SZ (a),..., Size of parentheses (d) SZ (d),..., Size of parenthesis (i) SZ (i) and, as shown in FIG. The size of parentheses (a) that defines the contents of the SCHD SZ (a),... SZ (d ′),..., Size of parentheses (i ′) SZ (i ') are the same, and the animation video schedule data A.SZ (i') are the same. Overall size of SCHD SZOF and live-action video schedule data R.S. Overall size of SCHD SZOF is the same.

  As a result, the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a of the liquid crystal control board 1750 is stored in the liquid crystal control ROM 1750b. SCHD and live-action video schedule data When reading SCHD, the head address of the other schedule data can be derived by adding or subtracting the offset value OFFSET to the head address of one schedule data. Specifically, animation video schedule data A. SCHD start address The offset value OFFSET is added to ADR, and the schedule data R.R. SCHD head address R. Deriving ADR or schedule data for live-action video SCHD head address R. Subtract the offset value OFFSET from ADR and schedule data for animation video. SCHD start address ADR is derived.

  In addition, the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a of the liquid crystal control board 1750 is stored in the liquid crystal control ROM 1750b. SCHD and live-action video schedule data When the SCHD is read, the address of the other schedule data corresponding to the arbitrary address can be derived by adding or subtracting the offset value OFFSET to an arbitrary address of one schedule data. Specifically, for example, schedule data A. The offset value OFFSET is added to the address of the parenthesis symbol (f) that defines the configuration content of the SCHD, and the schedule data R. The address of the parenthesis (f ') that defines the configuration content of the SCHD is derived, or the schedule data R. Subtract the offset value OFFSET from the address of the parentheses (f ') that defines the contents of the SCHD, and the animation data schedule data A. The address of the parenthesis code (f) that defines the contents of the SCHD is derived. The schedule data for animation video A. SCHD and live-action video schedule data In SCHD, each frame of image data constituting each frame is divided in advance by an area of the same size. And the schedule data for animation video A. SCHD and live-action video schedule data R. SCHD is stored in series, and switching from animation video to live-action video and from live-action video to animation video can be easily switched by simply offsetting. In addition, since it is configured in this way, it is possible to easily switch effects such as switching from an animation video to a live-action video and switching from a real-action video to an animation video again by adding and subtracting the same offset amount.

[18-4. Direction switching method]
Next, a method for switching effects rendered and reproduced in the display area 1320 of the liquid crystal display 1315 will be described. Here, a method of switching to a live action effect from the middle of performing an animation effect as a reach effect will be described.

  The liquid crystal control MPU 1750a is an animation video schedule data A.1 stored in the liquid crystal control ROM 1750b. SCHD start address Schedule data for ADR or live-action video SCHD head address R. By moving from the pointer PTR indicating ADR to the next pointer and updating it, the schedule data A. Produce animations according to SCHD, or schedule data for live-action video. The production by live action is advanced according to SCHD.

  When the display command from the sub-integrated board 1740 is a command for performing an effect by animation, the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a, as shown in FIG. SCHD start address ADR is set to the pointer PTR, the pointer PTR is advanced to the next pointer and updated. SCHD start address The schedule is updated from the ADR to the next address. Produce animation according to SCHD. In this case, in the display area 1320 of the liquid crystal display 1315, the screens shown in FIGS. 207 (a) to (c), FIGS. 208 (d) to (f) and FIGS. 209 (g) to (i) are displayed. Drawn.

  On the other hand, when the display command from the sub-integrated board 1740 is a command for performing a live action, as shown in FIG. SCHD head address R. ADR is set in the pointer PTR, the pointer PTR is advanced to the next pointer and updated. SCHD head address R. Update from the ADR to the next address and update the schedule data R. Produce live action according to SCHD. In this case, the display area 1320 of the liquid crystal display 1315 includes FIGS. 207 (a) to (c), FIGS. 210 (d ′), (e ′), FIG. 208 (f ′), and FIG. The screen having the mode shown in (i ′) is drawn.

  On the other hand, when the display command from the sub-integrated board 1740 produces an effect by combining the effect by animation and the effect by live-action, as shown in FIG. SCHD start address ADR is set to the pointer PTR, the pointer PTR is advanced to the next pointer and updated. SCHD start address The schedule is updated from the ADR to the next address. Produce animation according to SCHD. Then, when the effect by the animation is advanced and the switching point CPNT transmitted together with the display command is reached, the animation video schedule data A.1 indicated by the pointer PTR is displayed. The offset value OFFSET is added to the address that defines the configuration contents of the SCHD, and the schedule data R. An address that defines the configuration content of the SCHD is derived. As a result, the pointer PTR indicates the animation video schedule data A. Schedule data for live-action video derived from the address defining the contents of the SCHD. The address is changed to an address that defines the configuration content of the SCHD, and the production is switched from the animation effect to the live action effect. The pointer PTR is advanced to the next pointer and updated, that is, the derived live-action video schedule data R.P. The schedule data for live-action video is updated by updating from the SCHD address to the next address. Produce live action according to SCHD. In this case, in the display area 1320 of the liquid crystal display 1315, the animation video schedule data A.1 to FIG. 207 (a) to (c), FIGS. A screen in a mode in which an effect by animation is advanced in accordance with SCHD is drawn, and the live-action image schedule data A.1 to FIG. A screen in a mode in which an effect by live action is advanced in accordance with SCHD is drawn. The switching point can be arbitrarily set as long as the reach effect is being performed. For example, the animation main character Char shown in FIG. 208 (e) rotates the handle 1320fa of the cup 1320f containing tea with one finger, and the live-action main character Char 'shown in FIG. 210 (e') holds tea with one finger. The switching point CPNT ′ can be set on the screen for rotating the handle 1320fa of the cup 1320f, and the screen of the main character Char just before the decorative symbols 1320a, 1320b, 1320c shown in FIG. 209 (i ′), the switching point CPNT ″ can be set on the screen of the live-action hero Char ′ immediately before the decorative symbols 1320a, 1320b, and 1320c are aligned with the same symbol.

  In this way, when changing the timing of exciting the production by shifting the timing of switching from the production of animation to the production of live action back and forth, to shorten the time to perform the animation production by changing the switching point While it is possible to lengthen the time for performing live action, the time for performing live action can be shortened accordingly. In addition, in the production of the same content, when the variation is increased by changing the timing of switching from the production by the animation to the production by the live action, it can be dealt with by setting a switching point for each variation. As a result, the video program developer newly creates or recreates the video file, and converts the video file into schedule data which is a format for drawing and playing back on the display area 1320 of the liquid crystal display 1315. Thus, the trouble of storing in the liquid crystal control ROM 1750b can be saved. Therefore, it is possible to increase variations in production without taking time and effort.

  Also, by storing schedule data for advancing two types of effects, animation effects and live action effects, in the liquid crystal control ROM 1750b, the third type of animation effect and action by live action is combined. Since various effects can be performed by setting switching points, information stored in the liquid crystal control ROM 1750b includes two types of effects: animation effects and live action effects. All you need is schedule data.

[18-5. Correspondence between display command and mini character]
Next, the correspondence relationship between a display command for drawing various screens in the display area 1320 of the liquid crystal display 1315 and the mini character toast 1320ga and cake 1320gb will be described. The display command is created by the sub integrated MPU 1740a of the sub integrated board 1740 as described above. When this sub-integrated MPU 1740a receives a winning information command indicating per-command or out-of-command from the main control board, based on the received winning information command, the type of effect pattern (effect by animation, effect by live action, and a combination of these For example), a mini character that tells the player to switch from animation to live action to appear in a predetermined area of the display area 1320 of the liquid crystal display 1315 to give a mini character notice The mini character notice command to be performed is determined, or a switching point at which the effect by animation is switched from the effect by animation is determined. Then, the sub-integrated MPU 1740a creates a display command from the winning information command received from the main control board 1700, the determined production pattern information command, the mini character notice command, and the switching point, and transmits the display command to the liquid crystal control board 1750.

  When the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a of the liquid crystal control board 1750 receives a display command from the sub-integrated board 1740, the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a draws and reproduces an animation video or a live-action video on the display area 1320 of the liquid crystal display 1315 according to the received display command. The symbols 1320a, 1320b, and 1320c are variably displayed. In the present embodiment, as described above, even if the toast 1320ga appears as the mini character in the area 1320g, it does not matter whether or not the game has entered the big hit gaming state that gives a profit to the player, but the cake 1320gb as the mini character is in the area 1320g. If it appears in the game, after the reach effect is finished, the game state always shifts to a special game state (big hit game state) in which a profit is given to the player. For this reason, the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a makes a mini character notice by causing a mini character that informs the player that the effect of switching from the effect of animation to the effect of live action is displayed in a predetermined area of the display area 1320 of the liquid crystal display 1315 in the received display command. When the mini character notice command is included, the mini character notice command is analyzed and before the mini character appears in the area 1320g of the display area 1320 ′ of the liquid crystal display 1315 shown in FIG. And the correspondence relationship with the winning information command from the main control board 1700 included in the display command.

  Specifically, the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a confirms the correspondence between the hit information command from the main control board 1700 and the mini character notice command created by the sub-integrated MPU 1740a, or the win information command from the main control board 1700. Confirms the correspondence relationship between the error transmitted by the sub-integrated MPU 1740a and the mini character notice command created by the sub-integrated MPU 1740a. Various values for confirming this correspondence are stored in advance in the liquid crystal control ROM 1750b of the liquid crystal control board 1750.

  The liquid crystal control MPU 1750a is used when the winning information command from the main control board 1700 is a notification of success or failure, and the mini character notice command included in the display command causes the toast 1320ga to appear in the area 1320g as a mini character. If so, the mini character notice command is maintained, and the toast 1320ga is read from the liquid crystal control ROM 1750b according to the mini character notice command and set in the VDP 1750c. The VDP 1750c draws the set toast 1320ga in the area 1320g shown in FIG. 208 (e). As a result, the toast 1320ga appears in the region 1320g. Then, the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a switches from the effect by animation to the effect by live-action with a probability of about 83% set in the toast 1320ga. Further, the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a is used when the winning information command from the main control board 1700 conveys a win, and the mini character notice command included in the display command causes the cake 1320gb to appear in the area 1320g as a mini character. In some cases, the mini character notice command is maintained, and cake 1320gb is read from liquid crystal control ROM 1750b according to the mini character notice command and set in VDP 1750c. The VDP 1750c draws the set cake 1320gb in the area 1320g shown in FIG. 208 (e). Thereby, the cake 1320gb appears in the region 1320g. Then, the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a switches from the animation effect to the live action effect with a probability of 100% set for the cake 1320gb, and after reaching the reach effect, the special game state (big hit game) that gives the player profits. State).

  On the other hand, the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a is a case where the winning information command from the main control board 1700 does not convey a win, that is, a message that conveys a loss, and the mini character notice command included in the display command is a cake as a mini character. When it is determined that 1320 gb appears in the area 1320 g, control is performed to switch the cake 1320 gb to the toast 1320 ga as a mini character, and the replaced toast 1320 ga is read from the liquid crystal control ROM 1750 b and set in the VDP 1750 c. The VDP 1750c draws the set toast 1320ga in the area 1320g shown in FIG. 208 (e). As a result, the toast 1320ga appears in the region 1320g. Then, the liquid crystal control MPU 1750a switches from the effect by animation to the effect by live-action with a probability of about 83% set in the replaced toast 1320ga. In this way, by confirming the correspondence relationship between the winning information command from the main control board 1700 and the mini character notice command, after the reach presentation is finished, the game state is changed to a special gaming state (big hit gaming state) that subsequently gives a profit to the player. The cake 1320gb is prevented from appearing as a mini character in the area 1320b of the display area 1320 ′ of the liquid crystal display 1315, although it does not shift. As a result, the types of effects rendered and reproduced in the display area 1320 of the liquid crystal display 1315 are extremely large, and the winning information command that is a command from the main control board 1700 and the display area 1320 of the liquid crystal display 1315 are rendered and reproduced. Even if a development person misses a part of the correspondence relationship with the production at the development stage of the pachinko machine, the production of the content different from the production of the content originally intended by the main control board 1700 is displayed on the liquid crystal display 1315. The image is not drawn and reproduced in the display area 1320. Therefore, it is possible to draw and reproduce the effect of the content intended by the main control board 1700 on the display area 1320 of the liquid crystal display 1315. In addition, the cake 1320gb that informs that the special game state is confirmed despite the fact that the main control board 1700 does not generate a special game state (big hit game state) that gives a profit to the player is a liquid crystal display 1315 as a mini character. No display area 1320 ′ of the display area 1320 ′, there is no possibility of confusion for the player. Therefore, there is no possibility of causing a decrease in game motivation due to the player's confusion.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment described above includes a main control board 1700 and a payout control board 715. The main control board 1700 has an upper start winning opening 1270 and a middle start winning opening in which game balls launched by the hitting ball launching device 300 toward the game area 255 defined in the game board 4 are provided in the game area 255. 1330, lower start winning opening 1340, large winning opening 1400, winning unit side normal winning port 1440, decoration unit side normal winning ports 1465, 1470, etc. A prize ball command that defines the number of game balls to be paid out to 30 is transmitted. The payout control board 715 controls a prize ball unit 450 that pays out a game ball to the storage tray 30 as a prize ball based on a prize ball command from the main control board 1700.

  The prize ball unit 450 includes a payout motor 465, a sprocket 457, a detection disk 500, a rotation angle switch 505, and a counting switch 462. The payout motor 465 is an electric drive source. The sprocket 457 receives the rotation of the output shaft of the payout motor 465 and receives and sends out one game ball. The detection disk 500 is fixed to the rotation shaft of the sprocket 457, and a detection notch 501 as a detection part is provided on the outer periphery of the detection disk 500. The rotation angle switch 505 detects a detection notch 501 provided on the outer peripheral portion of the detection disk 500. The counting switch 462 detects the game balls after being sent out by rotating the sprocket 457 one by one.

  The main control MPU 170a mounted on the main control board 1700 transmits a prize ball command to the payout control board 715 in the prize ball control process of step S80 in the main control timer interruption process of FIG.

  The payout control MPU 1710a mounted on the payout control board 715 receives a prize ball command from the main control board 1700 in the command reception process of step S352 in the payout control side main process of the payout control side power-on process in FIG. is doing. The payout control MPU 1710a controls the game ball payout operation by the prize ball unit 450 in the payout setting process of FIG. 181, and repeatedly executes this payout setting process every 1.75 ms which is a predetermined period. Yes. The payout control MPU 1710a is an inconsistent game in which the number of game balls sent out by rotating the sprocket 457 and the number of game balls actually paid out do not match in the retry operation monitoring process of FIG. In the payout setting process of FIG. 181, the retry operation for paying out the number of balls is controlled by controlling the prize ball unit 450, and this retry action monitoring process is performed every 1.75 ms which is a predetermined period. Running repeatedly.

  In the payout setting process of FIG. 181, the payout control MPU 1710a is repeatedly executed every 1.75 ms, which is a predetermined period, the prize ball stock number PBS is the total number of game balls to be paid out from the prize ball unit 4540 based on the prize ball command. The number of balls is stored, the drive command number DRV stores the number of times that the sprocket 457 is rotated to send out one game ball, and the actual ball count PB stores the number of game balls sent out by rotating the sprocket 457. ing. Also, the payout control MPU 1710a receives a value from the drive command number DRV when a signal for detecting the detection notch 501 provided in the outer peripheral portion of the detection disk 500 is input from the rotation angle switch 505 in the process of step S508 in the payout setting process. 1 is subtracted, and in the process of step S512 in the payout setting process, when a signal is detected from the counting switch 462 to detect one game ball after being sent out by rotating the sprocket 457, the real ball count PB is input. The value 1 is added, and it is determined whether or not the drive command number DRV subtracted by the value 1 in the determination of step S492 in the payout setting process matches the determination value 0, and the drive command number subtracted by the value 1 If it is determined that the DRV does not match the determination value 0, the process of step S504 in the payout setting process In step S494, in the process of step S494 in the payout setting process, output of the drive signal to the payout motor 465 is started while it is determined that the drive command number DRV subtracted by the value 1 matches the determination value 0. The drive signal output to the payout motor 465 is stopped. In addition, the payout control MPU 1710a determines in the process of step S500 in the payout setting process that the drive command number DRV subtracted by the value 1 matches the determination value 0 in the determination of step S492 in the payout setting process. In addition, in the process of step S500 in the payout setting process, the difference between the prize ball stock number PBS and the real ball count PB is calculated by subtracting the real ball count PB from the prize ball stock number PBS, and the calculated prize ball The difference between the stock number PBS and the real ball count PB is forcibly stored in the prize ball stock number PBS and forcibly stored in the drive command number DRV. In addition, the payout control MPU 1710a forcibly stores the initial value 0 in the real ball count PB after the process of step S500 in the payout setting process in the process of step S502 in the payout setting process.

  The payout control MPU 1710a repeats and executes every 1.75 ms, which is a predetermined period, in the retry operation monitoring process of FIG. 183, and the number of game balls sent out by rotating the sprocket 457 and the actual payout When an inconsistent number of game balls is generated that does not match the number of game balls, that is, after adding 1 to the inconsistency counter INCC in step S544 in the retry operation monitoring process, the step in the retry operation monitoring process In the determination in S546, it is determined that a signal for detecting one gaming ball after being sent out by rotating the sprocket 457 from the counting switch 462 is not input, so the process does not proceed to the processing in step S548 in the retry operation monitoring process. If you do not subtract 1 from the inconsistency counter INCC, Since the number of game balls sent out by rotating the base 457 and the number of game balls actually paid out do not match, the number of inconsistent game balls is calculated as an inconsistency information value. The data are sequentially stored in a certain inconsistency counter INCC.

  The payout control MPU 1710a determines whether or not the mismatch counter INCC is greater than or equal to the mismatch threshold INCTH in the determination of step S550 in the retry operation monitoring process of FIG. 183, and the mismatch counter INCC is the threshold for mismatch. When it is determined that the value is equal to or greater than the value INCTH, a status command is created to notify that in the processing of step S552 in the retry operation monitoring processing.

  The payout control MPU 1710a determines whether or not the mismatch counter INCC is greater than or equal to the mismatch threshold INCTH in the determination of step S550 in the retry operation monitoring process of FIG. 183, and the mismatch counter INCC is not matched. If it is determined that the value is equal to or greater than the value INCTH, the mismatch counter INCC is forcibly initialized in the process of step S554 in the process. That is, the value 0 (initial value 0) is forcibly set in the inconsistency counter INCC. The inconsistency counter INCC is not initialized in response to the occurrence of an external factor that the operation signal from the error release switch 1731 by a hall clerk or the like is input, but the inconsistency counter INCC is not matched. Initialization is triggered by the occurrence of an internal factor that is greater than or equal to the value INCTH.

  In this manner, the payout control MPU 1710a mounted on the payout control board 715 repeatedly executes the payout setting process in FIG. 181 and the retry operation monitoring process in FIG. 183 every 1.75 ms that is a predetermined period. is doing. In the payout setting process, when a signal for detecting the detection notch 501 provided in the outer peripheral portion of the detection disk 500 is input from the rotation angle switch 505 in the process of step S508, the value 1 is subtracted from the drive command number DRV. In the process of step S512, when a signal for detecting one game ball after being sent out by rotating the sprocket 457 is not input from the count switch 462, the value 1 is not added to the real ball count PB. It is determined that the game ball could not be received and sent out by the sprocket 457. Therefore, in the payout setting process, the payout control MPU 1710a subtracts the real ball count PB from the prize ball stock number PBS in the process of step S500 in order to pay out one ball that should be paid out again. The difference between the PBS and the real ball count PB is calculated, and the calculated difference between the prize ball stock number PBS and the real ball count PB is forcibly stored in the prize ball stock number PBS and the drive command number DRV Is forcibly memorized. Thereby, in the payout setting process, the payout control MPU 1710a does not input a signal indicating that one game ball detected after rotating the sprocket 457 from the counting switch 462 is detected in the process of step S512. Since only the value 1 is not added to the count PB, the value 1 which is one ball to be paid out is subtracted from the prize ball stock number PBS by subtracting the actual ball count PB from the prize ball stock number PBS in the process of step S500. The difference between the ball count PB is calculated, and the calculated difference between the prize ball stock PBS and the actual ball count PB is forcibly stored in the prize ball stock PBS, that is, one ball to be paid out. 1 can be included in the winning ball stock PBS, so that it is possible to perform a retry operation to pay out one ball that should be paid out again. It has become to so that. The possibility of unpaid game balls to the player due to this retry operation can be extremely reduced, and the player's disadvantage due to unpaid game balls can be prevented. The retry operation actually occurs with a probability of about one millionth, but for some reason, the harness that electrically connects the counting switch 462 and the payout control board 715 is disconnected, or the counting switch 462 is defective. When the detection signal from the counting switch 462 is input to the payout control board 715 due to the occurrence of the above, the retry operation may be repeatedly performed.

  On the other hand, in the retry operation monitoring process, the number of game balls sent out by rotating the sprocket 457 and the number of game balls actually paid out do not match with each other. Since the number can be sequentially stored in the mismatch counter INCC, the number of game balls paid out by the retry operation can be monitored based on the sequentially stored mismatch counter INCC. In the retry operation monitoring process, it is determined in step S550 whether or not the mismatch counter INCC is equal to or greater than the mismatch threshold INCTH, and the mismatch counter INCC is equal to or greater than the mismatch threshold INCTH. If it is determined, the door frame decoration lamp built in the lamp cover surrounding the door frame 5 and covering the upper side indicates that an error has occurred in the retry operation in the process of step S552. To set (store) a status command for emitting 5h in a predetermined color (red in the present embodiment) in the status information storage area of the payout built-in RAM and to notify that it is a “retry error” The number “5” is displayed on the error LED display 1730, which is a segment display mounted on the payout control board 715. Set the information set (stored) in the output information storage area of the dispensing chip RAM. Thereby, the payout control MPU 1710a uses the state information set (stored) in the output information storage area of the payout internal RAM in the process of step S552 to the payout control side power-on process (payout control side main process) shown in FIG. In the port output process of step S342, a drive signal is output to the error LED display 1730, the number "5" is displayed on the error LED display 1730, and set in the state information storage area of the payout internal RAM in step S552 ( The stored state command is transmitted to the main control board 1700 in the command transmission process in step S360 in the payout control side power-on process (payout control side main process) shown in FIG. The main control board 1700 that has received this status command transmits it to the sub-integrated board 1740 in the sub-integrated board command transmission process of step S92 in the main-control-side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 167. A door frame side lighting / flashing command that outputs a lighting signal for causing the decoration lamp 5h to emit light is output to the lamp driving board 1760, and the door frame decoration lamp 5h is caused to emit light. A store clerk or the like who notices light emission from the door frame decoration lamp 5h inserts a key into the cylinder lock 570 of the lock device 560 and rotates to release the main body frame 3 from the outer frame 2. By visually observing that the number “5” is displayed on the error LED display 1730 mounted on the substrate 715, it can be confirmed that a “retry error” has occurred. That is, it is possible to notify the hall clerk and the like that the mismatch counter INCC is equal to or greater than the mismatch threshold INCTH. As described above, the detection signal from the counting switch 462 is paid out when the harness for electrically connecting the counting switch 462 and the payout control board 715 is disconnected for some reason, or when the counting switch 462 is defective. When the retry operation is repeatedly performed by being input to the control board 715, the retry operation monitoring process causes the number of game balls sent out by rotating the sprocket 457 and the number of game balls actually paid out. Are sequentially stored in the inconsistency counter INCC, and when the inconsistency counter INCC is greater than or equal to the inconsistency threshold INCTH, a status command is transmitted to that effect. It is supposed to be. As a result, as described above, the door frame decoration lamp 5h is informed and the number “5” is displayed on the error LED display 1730, that is, the mismatch counter INCC is set to the mismatch threshold. By notifying that it is equal to or greater than INCTH, it is possible to inform a hall clerk that the mismatch counter INCC is equal to or greater than the mismatch threshold INCTH. Therefore, the hall clerk can grasp the disconnection of the harness that electrically connects the counting switch 462 and the payout control board 715, the malfunction of the counting switch 462, and the like very quickly.

  In the error release switch operation determination processing step S574 shown in FIG. 185, for example, when the retry error flag RTERR-FLG indicating whether or not the retry operation is operating abnormally is a value 1, that is, the retry operation is operating abnormally. When the error is occurring, a status command (retry error information) for notifying that an error has occurred in the retry operation is set (stored) in the status information storage area of the payout built-in RAM and is already displayed by the error LED display 1730. The number “5” for informing that the “retry error” is being stopped is forcibly stopped. The retry error information includes information for forcibly stopping the light emission (red in the present embodiment) of the door frame decoration lamp 5h built in the lamp cover covering the upper side of the door frame 5. Therefore, the store clerk of the hall or the like operates the error release switch 1731 to emit light from the door frame decoration lamp 5h (in this embodiment, without waiting until the abnormal operation of the retry operation is improved). Since the notification by red) can be forcibly stopped, the door frame decoration lamp 5h emits light (in this embodiment, red) to a player who is playing with another adjacent pachinko machine. The frustration can be kept as small as possible.

[19. Another example]
It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and it goes without saying that the present invention can be implemented in various modes as long as it belongs to the technical scope of the present invention.

  For example, in the above-described embodiment, when the inconsistency counter INCC is equal to or greater than the inconsistency threshold INCTH in the retry operation monitoring process shown in FIG. 183, the door frame decoration lamp 5h that notifies the fact is emitted. At the same time, the number “5” is displayed on the error LED display 1730. If the number of retry operations is directly monitored and the number exceeds a predetermined threshold, that fact is displayed. You may make it produce the status command which conveys. FIG. 213 is a flowchart showing an example of the payout setting process when counting the number of retry operations, FIG. 214 is a flowchart showing an example of the retry operation monitoring process, and FIG. 215 is monitored by the retry operation monitoring process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the retry operation counter reset process for resetting the retry operation counter to be performed.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 that directly monitors the number of retry operations, the payout control MPU 1710a mounted on the payout control board 715 determines the number of drive commands for retry operation determination following step S502 in the payout setting process shown in FIG. A value of 0 is set in RTDRV (see step S503 in the payout setting process in FIG. 213), and this routine ends. This retry operation determination drive command number RTDRV is used to determine whether or not to perform a retry operation. As will be described later, as a result of adding (incrementing) one by one from value 0, step S500 is performed. This is the same value as the drive command number DRV set in the above process, and shows the number of game balls received and paid out by the recess of the sprocket 457. Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 that directly monitors the number of retry operations, the payout control MPU 1710a adds 1 to the retry operation determination drive command number RTDRV (increment) following step S508 in the payout setting process shown in FIG. Then, see step S509 in the payout setting process of FIG. 213.) It is determined whether there is a detection signal from the counting switch 462 (step S510). 213 in the payout setting process in FIG. 213 is the same as the processes in steps S490 to S522 in the payout setting process shown in FIG. 181. The processes in steps S490 to S502, S504 to S508, and S510 to S522 are the same as Since the process is the same, detailed description thereof is omitted here.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 that directly monitors the number of retry operations, the payout control MPU 1710a performs a retry operation monitoring process shown in FIG. 214 instead of the retry operation monitoring process shown in FIG. 183. When the retry operation monitoring process is started, the payout control MPU 1710a reads the drive command number DRV from the payout built-in RAM as shown in FIG. 214 (step S540 '). The drive command number DRV commands the number of game balls to be paid out by the payout motor 465 as described above.

  Subsequent to step S540 ', it is determined whether the drive command number DRV is 0 (step S542'). This determination is based on the drive command number DRV as to whether or not the number of game balls to be paid out by the payout motor 465 remains.

  When the drive command number DRV is not 0 in step S542 ′, the routine is terminated as it is, while when the drive command number DRV is 0 in step S542 ′, that is, the number of game balls to be paid out by the payout motor 465 is When the number is zero, the retry operation determination drive command number RTDRV and the real ball count PB are read from the payout built-in RAM (step S544 ′). As described above, the retry operation determination drive command number RTDRV is used to determine whether or not to perform a retry operation. It becomes the same value as the drive command number DRV set in the process of step S500 in the payout setting process shown. As described above, the real ball count PB is obtained by counting the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 465 and counting the game balls detected by the count switch 462.

  Subsequent to step S544 ', it is determined whether or not the retry operation determination drive command number RTDRV matches the actual ball count PB (step S546'). This determination includes the retry operation determination drive command number RTDRV, that is, the number of game balls received and paid out by the recess of the sprocket 457, the actual ball count PB, that is, the number of balls detected by the count switch 462, It is determined whether or not they match.

  When the drive command number RTDRV for retry operation determination and the actual ball count PB coincide with each other in step S546 ′, that is, the number of game balls received and paid out by the recess of the sprocket 457, and the count switch 462 detect When the number of balls that have been matched is the same, this routine is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the retry operation determination drive command number RTDRV and the actual ball count PB do not coincide with each other in step S546 ′, that is, the number of game balls received and paid out by the recess of the sprocket 457, and the count switch 462 If the number of balls detected in step S1 does not match, the retry operation counter RTC is incremented by 1 (incremented, step S548 ′). The retry operation counter RTC is incremented by 1 every time a retry operation is performed, and stores the number of retry operations.

  Subsequent to step S548 ', it is determined whether or not the retry operation counter RTC is smaller than the retry operation count threshold value RTCTH (step S550'). In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present invention, it has been experimentally obtained that the probability that one game ball that does not fit due to the retry operation is paid out is about one millionth, and in this embodiment, the retry operation is performed. The count threshold value RTCTH is set to a value 5 which is the same value as the mismatch threshold value INCTH described above.

  When the retry operation counter RTC is smaller than the retry operation count threshold value RTCTH in step S550 ', this routine is ended as it is. On the other hand, when the retry operation counter RTC is not smaller than the retry operation count threshold value RTCTH in step S550 ′, that is, when the retry operation counter RTC is greater than or equal to the retry operation count threshold value RTCTH, an error has occurred in the retry operation. Is the above-mentioned payout state command for causing the door frame decoration lamp 5h built in the lamp cover covering the upper side of the door frame 5 to emit light in a predetermined color (red in this embodiment). In addition to being set (stored) in the status information storage area of the built-in RAM, the error LED display 1730, which is a segment display mounted on the payout control board 715, is notified of the “retry error”. 5 ”is set and stored in the output information storage area of the payout internal RAM. (Step S552 ').

  Subsequent to step S552 ', a value 0 (initial value 0) is set in the retry operation counter RTC (step S554'). In step S554 ′, when the retry operation counter RTC is not smaller than the retry operation count threshold value RTCTH in step S550 ′, that is, when the retry operation counter RTC is greater than or equal to the retry operation count threshold value RTCTH, Initialization is triggered by the occurrence of this internal factor. Note that when the RAM clear switch 268a mounted on the main control board 1700 is operated, the retry operation counter RTC is initialized in response to the occurrence of this external factor. When the RAM clear switch 268a is operated, the main control MPU 1700a erases all the various information stored in the main built-in RAM as described above, and outputs a RAM clear notification command to the sub-integrated board 1740. Thereby, the RAM clear notification sound flows from the speaker 34.

  Subsequent to step S554 ', the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is set to 1 (step S556'), and this routine is terminated. This retry error flag RTERR-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not the retry operation is operating abnormally. The value is 1 when the retry operation is operating abnormally, and the retry operation is not operating abnormally (retry operation is not performed). It is set to a value of 0 when operating normally).

  The payout control MPU 1710a sets the state information set (stored) in the output information storage area of the payout built-in RAM in step S552 in step S342 in the payout control side power-on process (payout control side main process) shown in FIG. In this port output process, a drive signal is output to the error LED display 1730, the number “5” is displayed on the error LED display 1730, and set (stored) in the status information storage area of the payout internal RAM in step S552. The status command is transmitted to the main control board 1700 in the command transmission process of step S360 in the payout control side power-on process (payout control side main process) shown in FIG. The main control board 1700 that has received this status command transmits it to the sub-integrated board 1740 in the sub-integrated board command transmission process of step S92 in the main control-side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. A door frame side lighting / flashing command for outputting a lighting signal for causing the decoration lamp 5h to emit light is output to the lamp driving board 1760, and the door frame decoration lamp 5h is caused to emit light. A store clerk or the like who notices light emission from the door frame decoration lamp 5h inserts a key into the cylinder lock 570 of the lock device 560 and rotates to release the main body frame 3 from the outer frame 2. By visually observing that the number “5” is displayed on the error LED display 1730 mounted on the substrate 715, it can be confirmed that a “retry error” has occurred. As a result, in order to investigate the cause of the occurrence, the hall clerk, etc., confirms the malfunction of the counting switch 462, the disconnection of various harnesses from the counting switch 462 to the payout control board 1715, the contact failure of various connectors, and the like. Compared with the case where the light emission of the door frame decoration lamp 5h and the display content of the error LED indicator 1730 are not notified, it can be performed very quickly.

  In addition, by intentionally disabling the counting switch 462, the retry operation described above is forcibly generated because it is difficult to detect the game ball received by the recess of the sprocket 457 and discharged. Even if an illegal act of illegally acquiring the game balls paid out by the player is performed, the door frame decoration lamp 5h emits light when the retry operation counter RTC exceeds the retry operation threshold value RTCTH. Etc. will rush to confirm the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. If it does so, the player who performs a fraudulent act will have to be interrupted so that the act may not be discovered, and the illegal game ball by a fraudulent act cannot be continuously acquired. Even if the retry operation counter RTC matches the retry operation count threshold value RTCTH, the number of game balls that can be acquired by a player who performs an illegal act is the same as the retry operation counter RTC, that is, five balls. Hall damage due to the act of intentionally deactivating the counting switch 462 can be minimized.

  Further, as described above, the retry operation counter RTC is not greater than the retry operation count threshold value RTCTH in step S550 ′, that is, the retry operation counter RTC is greater than or equal to the retry operation count threshold value RTCTH. Initialization is triggered by the occurrence of an internal factor. As a result, the retry operation counter RTC is not initialized when an external factor such as the operation of the error release switch 1731 occurs. Therefore, even if the error release switch 1731 or the like is illegally modified so that the operation signal is input to the payout control MPU 1710a, the retry operation counter RTC is forcibly initialized by such an illegal action. There is no.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 that directly monitors the number of retry operations, the payout control MPU 1710a performs a retry operation counter reset determination process shown in FIG. 215 instead of the inconsistency counter reset determination process shown in FIG. When the retry operation counter reset determination process is started, the payout control MPU 1710a determines whether or not the retry operation counter reset determination time has elapsed as shown in FIG. 215 (step S560 '). This determination is made based on the retry operation counter reset determination time updated in the timer update process in step S346 in the payout control side power-on process (payout control side main process) shown in FIG. Specifically, the retry operation counter reset determination time is stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the payout built-in RAM, instead of the mismatch counter reset determination time described above. In step S560 ', the time management information is read from the time management information storage area to determine whether or not the retry operation counter reset determination time has elapsed. The retry operation counter reset determination time is preset to 7000 s (about 2 hours), which is the same value as the mismatch counter reset determination time.

  If the retry operation counter reset determination time has not elapsed in step S560 ', this routine is ended as it is. On the other hand, when the mismatch counter reset determination time has elapsed in step S560 ', the retry operation counter reset determination time is initialized (step S562'). By this initialization, an initial value of 7000 s (about 2 hours) is set as the retry operation counter reset determination time.

  Subsequent to step S562 ', a value 0 (initial value 0) is set in the retry operation counter RTC (step S564'), and this routine is terminated. As described above, the retry operation counter RTC is incremented by 1 every time a retry operation is performed, and stores the number of retry operations. Normally, the number of game balls received and paid out by the concave portion of the sprocket 457 and the number of balls detected by the counting switch 462 coincide with each other. The counter RTC has the value 0. The payout control MPU 1710a performs the above-described retry operation in the payout installation process shown in FIG. 213. Therefore, the number of game balls received and paid out by the concave portion of the sprocket 457 by this retry operation is actually counted. The retry operation counter RTC is used to determine whether or not the game balls that are not consistent due to a mismatch with the number of balls detected by the switch 462 are repeatedly paid out. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present invention, it has been experimentally obtained that the probability that a game ball that does not fit in due to a retry operation is paid out is about one millionth. This probability of 1 / million is a game ball that does not fit well due to a retry operation when the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present invention is installed in the hall and is continuously operated for one week during the business hours of the hall. Is the same as the probability of paying out one ball, so that the retry operation counter RTC is incremented by 1 with a probability of 1 / million in the processing of step S548 ′ in the retry operation monitoring process shown in FIG. Become. Then, in 1 week, the retry operation counter RTC is incremented by 1 and the retry operation counter RTC is incremented by 1. In the 2 weeks, the retry operation counter RTC is further incremented by 1 and the retry operation counter RTC is incremented by 2. In the week, the retry operation counter RTC is further incremented by the value 1 and the retry operation counter RTC is incremented to the value 3. In the 4 weeks, the retry operation counter RTC is further incremented by the value 1 and the retry operation counter RTC becomes the value 4. The value 1 is further incremented in the retry operation counter RTC, and the retry operation counter RTC becomes the value 5, which coincides with the above-described retry operation count threshold value RTCTH. That is, when five weeks have elapsed, since the retry operation counter RTC coincides with the retry operation count threshold value RTCTH, the payout control MPU 1710a causes a malfunction of the count switch 462 and various harnesses extending from the count switch 462 to the payout control board 1715. State command (retry error) indicating that an error has occurred in the retry operation in the process of step S552 ′ in the retry operation monitoring process shown in FIG. Information) is set (stored) in the state information storage area of the payout internal RAM.

  Therefore, when the payout control MPU 1710a determines that the retry operation counter reset determination time has elapsed in the determination of step S560 ′ in the retry operation counter reset determination processing, that is, every 7000 s (about 2 hours), the retry operation counter When the value 0 is forcibly set to the retry operation counter RTC in the process of step S564 ′ in the reset determination process, that is, the reset operation is forcibly reset, the retry operation counter RTC generated with a probability of 1 / million is used. The increment is invalidated. As a result, there is an error in the retry operation even though the malfunction of the counting switch 462, the disconnection of various harnesses from the counting switch 462 to the payout control board 1715, the contact failure of various connectors, and the like have not occurred. Can be prevented from being set (stored) in the status information storage area of the payout internal RAM.

  In addition, by intentionally disabling the counting switch 462, the above-described retry operation is forcibly generated because it is difficult to detect the game ball received and paid out by the recess of the sprocket 457. Even if an illegal act of illegally acquiring a game ball to be paid out is performed, if the count switch 462 is intentionally repeatedly inactivated for a short time, as described above, the retry operation counter RTC is the threshold of the number of retry operations. When the value RTCTH or more is reached, a notification announcement flows from the speaker 34, so that a player who performs a fraudulent act can continue the fraudulent act and make it difficult to acquire a fraudulent game ball. On the other hand, when the count switch 462 is intentionally repeatedly inactivated for a long time so that the retry operation counter RTC does not exceed the retry operation count threshold value RTCTH, the retry operation counter RTC is reset every 7000 s (about 2 hours). However, during this period, as described above, the number of game balls that can be acquired by a player who performs an illegal act is that the retry operation counter RTC is up to the retry operation count threshold value RTCTH, and the count switch 462 is intentionally set. Even if the player is repeatedly inactivated for a long time, the number of game balls that can be acquired by a player who performs an illegal act can be extremely reduced.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 that directly monitors the number of such retry operations includes a main control board 1700 and a payout control board 715. The main control board 1700 has an upper start winning opening 1270 and a middle start winning opening in which game balls launched by the hitting ball launching device 300 toward the game area 255 defined in the game board 4 are provided in the game area 255. 1330, lower start winning opening 1340, large winning opening 1400, winning unit side normal winning port 1440, decoration unit side normal winning ports 1465, 1470, etc. A prize ball command that defines the number of game balls to be paid out to 30 is transmitted. The payout control board 715 controls a prize ball unit 450 that pays out a game ball to the storage tray 30 as a prize ball based on a prize ball command from the main control board 1700.

  The prize ball unit 450 includes a payout motor 465, a sprocket 457, a detection disk 500, a rotation angle switch 505, and a counting switch 462. The payout motor 465 is an electric drive source. The sprocket 457 receives the rotation of the output shaft of the payout motor 465 and receives and sends out one game ball. The detection disk 500 is fixed to the rotation shaft of the sprocket 457, and a detection notch 501 as a detection part is provided on the outer periphery of the detection disk 500. The rotation angle switch 505 detects a detection notch 501 provided on the outer peripheral portion of the detection disk 500. The counting switch 462 detects the game balls after being sent out by rotating the sprocket 457 one by one.

  The main control MPU 170a mounted on the main control board 1700 transmits a prize ball command to the payout control board 715 in the prize ball control process of step S80 in the main control timer interruption process of FIG.

  The payout control MPU 1710a mounted on the payout control board 715 receives a prize ball command from the main control board 1700 in the command reception process of step S352 in the payout control side main process of the payout control side power-on process in FIG. is doing. The payout control MPU 1710a controls the game ball payout operation by the prize ball unit 450 in the payout setting process of FIG. 213, and repeatedly executes this payout setting process every 1.75 ms which is a predetermined period. Yes. In the retry operation monitoring process of FIG. 214, the payout control MPU 1710a is an inconsistent game in which the number of game balls sent out by rotating the sprocket 457 and the number of game balls actually paid out do not match. In the payout setting process in FIG. 213, the retry operation for paying out the number of balls is controlled by controlling the prize ball unit 450, and this retry operation monitor process is performed every 1.75 ms which is a predetermined period. Running repeatedly.

  In the payout setting process shown in FIG. 213, the payout control MPU 1710a is repeatedly executed every 1.75 ms, which is a predetermined cycle. The prize ball stock number PBS is a game ball to be paid out from the prize ball unit 4540 based on the prize ball command. The driving command number DRV stores the number of times that one sprocket 457 is rotated and one game ball is sent out, and the real ball count PB indicates the number of game balls sent out by rotating the sprocket 457. I remember it. Also, the payout control MPU 1710a receives a value from the drive command number DRV when a signal for detecting the detection notch 501 provided in the outer peripheral portion of the detection disk 500 is input from the rotation angle switch 505 in the process of step S508 in the payout setting process. 1 is subtracted, 1 is added to the retry operation determination drive command number RTDRV in the process of step S509 in the payout setting process, and the sprocket 457 is rotated from the count switch 462 in the process of step S512 in the payout setting process. When a signal for detecting one game ball after being sent out is input, the value 1 is added to the actual ball count PB, and the number of drive commands subtracted by 1 in the determination of step S492 in the payout setting process It is determined whether DRV is equal to the determination value 0, and the value 1 is subtracted. When it is determined that the drive command number DRV does not match the determination value 0, in the process of step S504 in the payout setting process, output of the drive signal to the payout motor 465 is started, while the value 1 is subtracted. When it is determined that the drive command number DRV matches the determination value 0, the output of the drive signal to the payout motor 465 is stopped in the process of step S494 in the payout setting process. In addition, the payout control MPU 1710a determines in the process of step S500 in the payout setting process that the drive command number DRV subtracted by the value 1 matches the determination value 0 in the determination of step S492 in the payout setting process. In addition, in the process of step S500 in the payout setting process, the difference between the prize ball stock number PBS and the real ball count PB is calculated by subtracting the real ball count PB from the prize ball stock number PBS, and the calculated prize ball The difference between the stock number PBS and the real ball count PB is forcibly stored in the prize ball stock number PBS and forcibly stored in the drive command number DRV. In addition, the payout control MPU 1710a forcibly stores the initial value 0 in the real ball count PB after the process of step S500 in the payout setting process in the process of step S502 in the payout setting process, and the process of step S503 in the payout setting process The initial value 0 is forcibly stored in the retry operation determination drive command number RTDRV after the process of step S502 in the payout setting process.

  The payout control MPU 1710a repeats and executes every 1.75 ms, which is a predetermined cycle, in the retry operation monitoring process of FIG. 214, and the number of game balls sent out by rotating the sprocket 457 and the actual payout. When an inconsistent number of game balls is generated that does not match the number of game balls, that is, in step S546 ′ in the retry operation monitoring process, the retry operation determination drive command number RTDRV matches the actual ball count PB. If not, that is, if the number of game balls received and paid out by the recess of the sprocket 457 does not match the number of balls detected by the counting switch 462, step S548 in the retry operation monitoring process The retry operation counter RTC is incremented by “1”. As a result, if the number of game balls sent out by rotating the sprocket 457 and the number of game balls actually paid out do not match, the number of inconsistent game balls is not counted. The matching information value is sequentially stored in the retry operation counter RTC.

  The payout control MPU 1710a determines whether or not the retry operation counter RTC is equal to or greater than the retry operation count threshold value RTCTH in the determination of step S550 ′ in the retry operation monitoring process of FIG. 214, and the retry operation counter RTC performs the retry operation. When it is determined that the value is equal to or greater than the number-of-times threshold value RTCTH, a state command is created informing the fact in step S552 ′ in the retry operation monitoring process.

  The payout control MPU 1710a determines whether or not the retry operation counter RTC is equal to or greater than the retry operation count threshold value RTCTH in the determination of step S550 ′ in the retry operation monitoring process of FIG. 214, and the retry operation counter RTC performs the retry operation. If it is determined that the value is equal to or greater than the number-of-times threshold value RTCTH, the retry operation counter RTC is forcibly initialized in step S554 ′ in the same process. That is, the retry operation counter RTC is forcibly set to the value 0 (initial value 0). The retry operation counter RTC is not initialized when an external factor that the operation signal from the error release switch 1731 is input by the store clerk of the hall or the like, but the retry operation counter RTC counts the number of retry operations. Initialization is triggered by the occurrence of an internal factor that is greater than or equal to the threshold value RTCTH.

  In this way, the payout control MPU 1710a mounted on the payout control board 715 repeatedly executes the payout setting process in FIG. 213 and the retry operation monitoring process in FIG. 214 every 1.75 ms that is a predetermined period. is doing. In the payout setting process, when a signal for detecting the detection notch 501 provided in the outer peripheral portion of the detection disk 500 is input from the rotation angle switch 505 in the process of step S508, the value 1 is subtracted from the drive command number DRV. In the process of step S512, when a signal for detecting one game ball after being sent out by rotating the sprocket 457 is not input from the count switch 462, the value 1 is not added to the real ball count PB. It is determined that the game ball could not be received and sent out by the sprocket 457. Therefore, in the payout setting process shown in FIG. 213, the payout control MPU 1710a subtracts the real ball count PB from the prize ball stock number PBS in the process of step S500 in order to pay out one ball that should be paid out again. The difference between the prize ball stock number PBS and the actual ball count PB is calculated, and the calculated difference between the prize ball stock number PBS and the actual ball count PB is forcibly stored in the prize ball stock number PBS. The drive command number DRV is forcibly stored. Thereby, in the payout setting process, the payout control MPU 1710a does not input a signal indicating that one game ball detected after rotating the sprocket 457 from the counting switch 462 is detected in the process of step S512. Since only the value 1 is not added to the count PB, the value 1 which is one ball to be paid out is subtracted from the prize ball stock number PBS by subtracting the actual ball count PB from the prize ball stock number PBS in the process of step S500. The difference between the ball count PB is calculated, and the calculated difference between the prize ball stock PBS and the actual ball count PB is forcibly stored in the prize ball stock PBS, that is, one ball to be paid out. 1 can be included in the winning ball stock PBS, so that it is possible to perform a retry operation to pay out one ball that should be paid out again. It has become to so that. The possibility of unpaid game balls to the player due to this retry operation can be extremely reduced, and the player's disadvantage due to unpaid game balls can be prevented. The retry operation actually occurs with a probability of about one millionth, but for some reason, the harness that electrically connects the counting switch 462 and the payout control board 715 is disconnected, or the counting switch 462 is defective. When the detection signal from the counting switch 462 is input to the payout control board 715 due to the occurrence of the above, the retry operation may be repeatedly performed.

  In contrast, in the retry operation monitoring process shown in FIG. 214, the number of game balls sent out by rotating the sprocket 457 and the number of game balls actually paid out do not match. Since the number of game balls can be sequentially stored in the retry operation counter RTC, the number of game balls paid out by the retry operation can be monitored based on the successively stored retry operation counter RTC. It has become. In the retry operation monitoring process shown in FIG. 214, it is determined in step S550 ′ whether or not the retry operation counter RTC is equal to or greater than the retry operation threshold value RTCTH, and the retry operation counter RTC determines the number of retry operations. If it is determined that the threshold value RTCTH is greater than or equal to the threshold value RTCTH, a lamp covering the upper side of the door frame 5 and indicating that an error has occurred in the retry operation in the process of step S552 ′. A state command for causing the door frame decoration lamp 5h built in the cover to emit light in a predetermined color (in this embodiment, red) is set (stored) in the above-described state information storage area of the payout built-in RAM, and “retry error” is set. ”Is a segment indicator mounted on the payout control board 715. Set the status information for displaying the number "5" over the LED indicator 1730 is set (stored) in the output information storage area of the dispensing chip RAM. As a result, the payout control MPU 1710a uses the state information set (stored) in the output information storage area of the payout internal RAM in the process of step S552 ′ as the payout control side power-on process (payout control side main process shown in FIG. 171). ) In step S342, a drive signal is output to the error LED display 1730 to display the number “5” on the error LED display 1730, and in the state information storage area of the payout built-in RAM in step S552 ′. The set (stored) state command is transmitted to the main control board 1700 in the command transmission process in step S360 in the payout control side power-on process (payout control side main process) shown in FIG. The main control board 1700 that has received this status command transmits it to the sub-integrated board 1740 in the sub-integrated board command transmission process of step S92 in the main-control-side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 167. A door frame side lighting / flashing command that outputs a lighting signal for causing the decoration lamp 5h to emit light is output to the lamp driving board 1760, and the door frame decoration lamp 5h is caused to emit light. A store clerk or the like who notices light emission from the door frame decoration lamp 5h inserts a key into the cylinder lock 570 of the lock device 560 and rotates to release the main body frame 3 from the outer frame 2. By visually observing that the number “5” is displayed on the error LED display 1730 mounted on the substrate 715, it can be confirmed that a “retry error” has occurred. That is, it is possible to inform the hall clerk or the like that the retry operation counter RTC is equal to or greater than the retry operation count threshold value RTCTH. In this way, the detection signal from the counting switch 462 is paid out when the harness for electrically connecting the counting switch 462 and the payout control board 715 is disconnected for some reason, or when the counting switch 462 is defective. When the retry operation is repeatedly performed by being input to the control board 715, in the retry operation monitoring process shown in FIG. 214, the number of game balls sent out by rotating the sprocket 457 and the number of game balls actually paid out are displayed. The number of inconsistent game balls that do not match the number of game balls is sequentially stored in the retry operation counter RTC, and this retry operation counter RTC is greater than or equal to the retry operation count threshold value RTCTH. It is designed to create a status command that communicates. As a result, as described above, the door frame decoration lamp 5h that emits the light is emitted and the number “5” is displayed on the error LED display 1730, that is, the retry operation counter RTC is the threshold of the number of retry operations. By notifying that the value RTCTH is greater than or equal to the value RTCTH, it is possible to inform the hall clerk that the retry operation counter RTC is greater than or equal to the retry operation count threshold value RTCTH. Therefore, the hall clerk can grasp the disconnection of the harness that electrically connects the counting switch 462 and the payout control board 715, the malfunction of the counting switch 462, and the like very quickly. If the retry operation counter RTC is greater than or equal to the retry operation count threshold value RTCTH, the door frame decoration lamp 5h is emitted, and the number “5” is displayed on the error LED display 1730. However, the error notification screen of the retry operation of “Please check the prize ball unit” and “Please check the harness of the payout control board” is drawn on the display area 1320 of the liquid crystal display 1315. Alternatively, the fact that the prize ball unit 450 is paying out the game ball to the storage tray 30 is lighted or flashed in a place on the front surface of the game board 4 or the door frame 5 and easily visible to the store clerk in the hall. The retry operation counter RTC is reset by changing the light emission mode or the flashing mode (for example, color) of the prize ball lamp. It may be to tell the fact that is the line number of operations threshold RTCTH more.

  In addition, as described above, the retry operation actually occurs with a probability of about 1 / million, but this probability of 1 / million is set to 1 when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed in the hall. In the retry operation monitoring process shown in FIG. 214, the sprocket 457 is set in the same manner as the probability that one unsuccessful game ball will be paid out in the case of continuous operation during the business hours of the hall for a week. The retry operation counter RTC when the number of inconsistent game balls that do not match the number of game balls that have been sent out by rotation and the number of game balls that have actually been paid out is set to several hundreds. It will be stored sequentially with a probability of 1 / 10,000. Then, each time a week is repeated, the retry operation counter RTC is incremented by sequentially storing the retry operation counter RTC when the number of inconsistent game balls is generated, so the retry operation shown in FIG. 214 is performed. In the operation monitoring process, when the retry operation counter RTC is greater than or equal to the retry operation count threshold value RTCTH, a status command is created to notify that. Therefore, in the retry operation counter reset determination process shown in FIG. 215, the retry operation counter reset determination time (about 7000 s (about 7000 s)) that is a period extremely longer than 1.75 ms, which is the period in which the retry operation monitoring process shown in FIG. 214 is repeatedly performed. Every 2 hours)), the retry operation counter RTC is forcibly initialized in the process of step S564 ′. That is, the retry operation counter RTC is forcibly set to the value 0 (initial value 0). In this way, when one game ball that does not fit due to the retry operation that occurs with a probability of 1 / million is paid out, the retry operation counter RTC is sequentially stored in the retry operation monitoring process shown in FIG. However, in the retry operation counter reset determination processing shown in FIG. 215, the retry operation counter reset determination time (7000 s (), which is a cycle extremely longer than 1.75 ms, which is the cycle in which the retry operation monitoring processing shown in FIG. 214 is repeatedly performed. Every 2 hours)), the retry operation counter RTC is repeatedly forcibly initialized and erased in the process of step S564 ′, so that a retry operation by a retry operation that occurs with a probability of 1 / million. An increase in the counter RTC can be prevented.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, when the mismatch counter INCC is equal to or greater than the mismatch threshold INCTH, the door frame decoration lamp 5h that informs the fact is emitted and the error LED display 1730 has a number. Although “5” was displayed, an error in retry operation such as “Check the prize ball unit” in the display area 1320 of the liquid crystal display 1315 and “Check the harness of the payout control board”. An informing screen may be drawn, and the prize ball unit 450 is paying out the game ball to the storage tray 30 in the front surface of the game board 4 or the door frame 5 and easily visible to the store clerk in the hall. An inconsistency counter INCC is provided by changing the light emission mode or flashing mode (for example, color) of the prize ball lamp. May be informing of which it is the mismatch threshold INCTH more.

  Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been described as an example, but the gaming machine to which the present invention can be applied is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine, and a gaming machine other than the pachinko gaming machine, such as a slot machine or The present invention can also be applied to a fusion game machine in which a pachinko game machine and a slot machine are fused (one that uses a game ball to play a slot game).

It is a perspective view which shows the state which open | released the main body frame with respect to the outer frame of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on embodiment, and opened the door frame with respect to the main body frame. It is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a side view of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a top view of a pachinko gaming machine. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the outer frame, main body frame, game board, and door frame which comprise a pachinko gaming machine. It is the exploded perspective view seen from the front of the outer frame, main part frame, game board, and door frame which constitute a pachinko game machine. It is a front view of an outer frame. It is a rear view of an outer frame. It is the perspective view seen from the front of an outer frame. It is the front view (A) of an outer frame, sectional drawing (B) cut | disconnected by the BB line of a front view, and sectional drawing (C) of the side frame board 12 cut | disconnected by the AA line of a front view. It is a front perspective view of the outer frame concerning other embodiments. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front of the same outer frame. It is a front view of the outer frame. It is a rear view of the outer frame. It is BB sectional drawing (A) of FIG. 14, CC sectional drawing (B) of FIG. 16 (A), DD sectional drawing (C), EE sectional drawing (D). It is a perspective view for demonstrating the attachment / detachment structure of the upper-axis support metal fitting of a main body frame, and the upper support metal fitting of an outer frame. They are the exploded perspective view (A) which shows the attachment state of the lock member provided in the back surface of the upper support metal fitting of an outer frame, and the perspective view (B) seen from the downward direction. It is a reverse view of the upper support metal fitting part for demonstrating the relationship between a pivot pin and a locking member. It is a reverse view of the upper metal fitting part for demonstrating the effect | action of a locking member. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is the perspective view seen from the back of the state which isolate | separated the door frame and the glass unit. It is a perspective view which shows the manufacture process of the glass unit detachably attached to a door frame. It is an expansion perspective view of the desiccant insertion part of a glass unit. It is the side view (A), front view (B), and perspective view (C) of the completed glass unit. It is the sectional view on the AA line (A) of FIG. 25 (B), and the sectional view on the BB line (B). It is sectional drawing of the handle apparatus with which a door frame is attached. It is a perspective view which shows the relationship between the operation handle part which comprises a handle apparatus, and a joint unit. It is a disassembled perspective view of an operation handle part. They are a perspective view (A) and an exploded perspective view (B) of the joint unit. It is an operation | movement figure for demonstrating operation | movement of an operation handle part and a joint unit. It is a perspective view which shows the relationship between a handle | steering-wheel apparatus and the hit ball | bowl launching apparatus provided in a main body frame. It is sectional drawing for demonstrating the state which connects a handle | steering-wheel apparatus and a hit ball | bowl launcher. It is a front view of the main body frame before attaching components. It is a rear view of the main body frame before attaching components. It is a side view of the main body frame 3 before attaching components. It is the perspective view seen from the back of the main body frame before attaching components. It is the perspective view seen from the front of the main body frame which attached components. It is the perspective view which looked at the state which pivotally supported the main body frame which attached components to the outer frame from the front. It is a rear view of the main body frame which attached components. It is the perspective view seen from the back of the main body frame which attached components. It is a cross-sectional plan view of the pachinko gaming machine cut along the horizontal line of the middle of the pachinko gaming machine (game control board box portion). It is the perspective view seen from the front of a game board. It is a front view of a game board. It is a rear view of a game board. It is a top view of a game board. It is the perspective view seen from the front of the game board incorporating a removal prevention mechanism. It is a fragmentary perspective view of the main body frame incorporating the removal prevention mechanism. It is an expansion perspective view of the removal prevention mechanism part. It is the perspective view (A) of the whole hitting ball | bowl launcher, and the perspective view (B) of the state which removed the firing motor part. It is a disassembled perspective view of a hit ball launching device. It is the front view (A) which shows the relationship between a hit ball | bowl launcher and a firing rail, and a perspective view (B) of a launching motor part. It is a rear view which shows the relationship between the hit ball | bowl launching device in the state which is not operating the operation handle | steering-wheel part, and a firing rail. It is a rear view which shows the relationship between the hit ball | bowl launching device in the state which is operating the operation handle | steering-wheel part, and a firing rail. It is the top view (A), front view (B), perspective view (C) seen from the front of the slide member provided in the ball hitting device, and AA sectional view (D) of the front view (B). FIG. 4 is a perspective view (A), a plan view (B), and a side view (C) of the prize ball tank. It is a top view which shows the pressure state of the ball | bowl in the discharge port part of the conventional prize ball tank (A), (B) and the prize ball tank (C) which concerns on this embodiment. It is the perspective view seen from the back side of pachinko game machine 1 which shows the relation of a prize ball tank, a tank rail member, a ball passage unit, a prize ball unit, and a full tank unit. It is the perspective view seen from the front side of the pachinko game machine 1 which shows the relationship between a prize ball tank, a tank rail member, a ball path unit, a prize ball unit, and a full tank unit. They are sectional drawing (A) and a top view (B) which show the relationship between the downstream part of a tank rail member, and the upstream part of a ball passage unit. It is a disassembled perspective view which shows the relationship between a main body frame, a ball path unit, and a prize ball unit. It is a rear view which shows the relationship between a ball path unit and a prize ball unit. It is the perspective view seen from the back of a ball passage unit. It is a front view of a ball passage unit. It is a side view for demonstrating the connection structure of a ball path unit and a prize ball unit. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the back side of a prize ball unit. It is a rear view for demonstrating the relationship between the payout motor and the sprocket as a payout member. It is a rear view for demonstrating the channel | path and drive relationship of a prize ball unit. FIG. 69 is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA of FIG. 68. It is a perspective view which shows the relationship between a prize ball unit and a full tank unit. It is a disassembled perspective view of a full tank unit. It is a perspective view which shows the flow of the sphere in a full tank unit. It is a top view for demonstrating an effect | action of a full tank rocking | fluctuation board. It is a partially broken perspective view which shows the relationship between a full tank unit and a foul mouth. It is sectional drawing which similarly shows the relationship between a full tank unit and a foul mouth. It is a perspective view which shows the relationship between the prize ball unit and full tank unit which concern on 2nd Embodiment. It is a perspective view of the full tank unit which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front of the full tank unit which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the back of the full tank unit which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is the cross-sectional view cut | disconnected by the bottom opening-and-closing plate part provided in the full tank unit which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a back perspective view which shows the relationship between a locking device and a main body frame. It is an expanded side sectional view which shows the latching structure to the main body frame of a locking device. It is the partial cross section cut | disconnected in the horizontal direction in the position slightly lower than the vertical direction center of the pachinko game machine. It is an expanded sectional view which shows the detailed relationship between a locking device and the side wall of a main body frame. It is the side view (A) of a locking device, and the perspective view (B) seen from the front side. The perspective view (A) seen from the back side of the locking device, the perspective view (B) of the sliding rod for the glass door and the sliding rod for the main body frame provided slidably inside the U-shaped base of the locking device, (C). It is a disassembled perspective view of a locking device. It is a front view for demonstrating the effect | action of the sliding rod for glass doors, and the sliding rod for main body frames. It is a front view for demonstrating the effect | action of a fraud prevention member. It is the perspective view which looked at the substrate unit from the back side. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the back side of the substrate unit. It is the perspective view which looked at the substrate unit from the front side. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front side of the board | substrate unit. It is the front view seen from the front side of the frame substrate holder which makes the main body of a substrate unit. It is a rear view of the frame substrate holder. It is a rear view of a substrate unit. It is a rear view of the board | substrate unit in the state which removed the delivery control board box and the external terminal board box. It is a top view which shows the connection relation of each board | substrate provided in a board | substrate unit. It is the schematic which shows the electrical connection of a board | substrate unit and a game board. It is a part of rear view of the pachinko gaming machine showing the wiring and the like between the payout control board and the board unit. It is a front view of the game board for demonstrating the cross-sectional location of sectional drawing of FIG. It is CC sectional drawing of FIG. It is the pachinko game machine which attached the cover body 8 which concerns on 2nd Embodiment, and is the perspective view seen from the back surface of the state which open | released the cover body. It is a side view of the pachinko gaming machine which attached the cover body concerning a 2nd embodiment. It is the pachinko game machine which attached the cover body which concerns on 2nd Embodiment, Comprising: It is the perspective view seen from the open side of the cover body. It is the pachinko game machine which attached the cover body which concerns on 2nd Embodiment, Comprising: It is the perspective view seen from the axial support side of the cover body. It is a rear view of the pachinko gaming machine which attached the cover body concerning a 2nd embodiment. It is a rear view of the pachinko gaming machine of the state where the cover body concerning a 2nd embodiment was removed. It is a perspective view of the payout control board box which overlaps and contacts the lower part of the cover object concerning a 2nd embodiment. It is the perspective view seen from the inner side of the cover body concerning a 2nd embodiment. It is a rear view for demonstrating the effect | action of the cylinder lock provided in the cover body which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is AA sectional drawing of FIG. It is BB sectional drawing of FIG. It is CC sectional drawing of FIG. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front of a game board. FIG. 116 is a view on arrow A in FIG. 115. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the back surface of the game board. It is a front view of a game board. It is a B arrow directional view (partial perspective view) of FIG. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the loop unit from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the loop unit from the back. It is a front view of the unit base which comprises a loop unit. It is a rear view of the unit base which comprises a loop unit. It is a fragmentary sectional view (partial perspective view) along the AA line of FIG. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the front side (rear side) gear module from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the front side (rear side) gear module from the back. It is a rear view of the reel base which comprises a front side (rear side) gear module. It is sectional drawing (a) along the BB line of FIG. 127, and sectional drawing (b) along the CC line of FIG. 127. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the car which constitutes the front side (rear side) gear module from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the car which constitutes the front side (rear side) gear module from the back. It is a fragmentary sectional view of the loop unit which followed the DD line | wire of FIG. It is a disassembled perspective view (a) of a front side (rear side) contact module, and a front view (b) of a front side (rear side) contact module. It is a fragmentary sectional view (partial perspective view) along the EE line of FIG. It is the disassembled perspective view (a) which looked at the front side (rear side) sensor substrate box from the front, and the disassembled perspective view (b) which looked at the front side (rear side) sensor substrate box from the back. It is a rear view of a game board. It is a fragmentary sectional view of the game board along the FF line of FIG. It is the schematic of the disassembled perspective view of a function display unit. It is the schematic of a function display sticker. It is the fragmentary view which looked at the function display sticker through the game window. It is a block diagram of a main board and a peripheral board. It is the schematic of the various detection signals input / output to / from the main board (main control board). It is a part of circuit which comprises a lamp drive board | substrate. It is a block diagram of the driver of the drive circuit for gear modules mounted in a lamp drive board. It is a table which shows the terminal function of the driver of the drive circuit for gear modules mounted in a lamp drive board. It is a table which shows the transmission specification which prescribes | regulates the speed of a vehicle. It is a figure (a) which shows the relation between the number of rotations and speed in various excitation modes, and a figure (b) which shows the relation between time and speed required for one rotation in various excitation modes. It is a block diagram which shows the power supply system of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a circuit diagram which shows the noise countermeasure circuit and ground circuit of a power supply board. It is a circuit diagram which shows a hot wire failure prevention circuit. It is a circuit diagram which shows the circuit of a main control board. It is a circuit diagram which shows a power failure monitoring circuit. It is a circuit diagram which shows the circuit etc. of a payout control part. It is a circuit diagram which shows the equivalent circuit of drive IC. It is a circuit diagram which shows input circuits, such as an error cancellation switch. It is an input / output diagram showing various input / output signals to / from the main control board and various output signals to the external terminal board. It is a circuit diagram which shows the input circuit of a launch control part. It is the mounting drawing etc. of a payout control board. It is a circuit diagram which shows the transmission circuit etc. of a launch control part. It is a block diagram of a sub integration board. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the switching timing of BGM by the sound source IC mounted in the sub integrated substrate. It is a block diagram of a liquid crystal control board. It is a table which shows an example of a register group of a scaler IC. It is a simplified diagram showing the inside of the frame memory. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the production | generation of the screen displayed on a liquid crystal display. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the main control side power-on process. 165 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the main-control-side power-on process in FIG. 165. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the main control side timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a magnetic detection signal validity determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process at the time of power-on of the payout control side. 169 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the payout control side power-on processing of FIG. 169. FIG. 170 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the payout control side power-on processing following FIG. 170. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the payout control side timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a ball removal switch operation determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a rotation angle switch log | history production process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a sprocket fixed position determination skip process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a spherical collision determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the prize ball stock number addition process for prize balls. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the number-of-use prize ball stock number addition process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a stock monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a payout ball removal determination setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a payout setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a ball removal setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a retry operation | movement monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a mismatch counter reset determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an error cancellation switch operation determination process. It is a prize ball number information table which shows an example of the command regarding payout. It is a table which shows an example of a status command. It is a table which shows an example of the shaping state command which shaped the state command. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process at the time of sub integration side power-on. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a sub integration side 2ms regular process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a sub integration side base timer interruption process. It is a timing chart which shows the switching timing of the torque of a front gear module drive motor and a rear gear module drive motor. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a sub unification side command reception interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a sub integration side command reception end interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a liquid crystal serial command control process. 10 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a transmission buffer empty interrupt process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a DSP-ACK signal interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a stock alerting | reporting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a ball removal notification process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a retry operation error alerting | reporting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process at the time of power-on of the liquid crystal control side. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a DMAFLAG interruption process. It is a timing chart which shows the production | generation of drawing data. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a liquid crystal control side command reception interruption process. It is a timing chart which shows transmission and reception confirmation of liquid crystal serial data. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect which a car drive | works. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect drawn by the display area of a liquid crystal display. FIG. 207 is a diagram illustrating a continuation of the example of the effect in FIG. 207. FIG. 201 is a diagram showing a continuation of an example of the effect in FIG. 208. It is an example of the effect by the live-action corresponding to FIG. 208 (d), (e). It is a figure which shows an example of the mini character which appears in a production. FIGS. 7A and 7B show an example of production schedule data stored in the liquid crystal control ROM, and FIG. 8C shows an example of a timing chart when the production is switched at a switching point. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the payment setting process in the case of counting the frequency | count of retry operation. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a retry operation | movement monitoring process. FIG. 250 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a retry operation counter reset process for resetting a retry operation counter monitored in the retry operation monitoring process of FIG. 214.

Explanation of symbols

  DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 ... Pachinko machine (pachinko machine), 2 ... Outer frame, 3 ... Main body frame, 3a ... Door frame opening switch, 3b ... Main body frame opening switch, 4 ... Game board (game board), 5 ... Door frame, 5aa 5b to 5h ... door frame decoration lamp, 30 ... storage tray (storage tray), 30a ... ball discharge button, 34 ... speaker, 42 ... gaming window, 50 ... glass unit, 60 ... glass plate, 70 ... handle device, 71a ... handle relay terminal board, 74 ... rotating operation member, 80 ... touch switch, 80a ... contact detection board, 250 ... plywood board, 251 ... decorative frame, 255 ... game area (game area), 266a ... effect control board box, 268 ... game control board box, 268a ... RAM clear switch, 270 ... drawer connector, 270a ... terminal, 300 ... ball hitting device (ball hitting device), 400 ... prize ball tank, DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10 ... Tank rail member, 420 ... Ball passage unit, 450 ... Prize ball unit (dispensing device), 457 ... Sprocket (sprocket), 426 ... Out of ball switch, 462 ... Count switch (counting switch), 465 ... Discharge motor (dispensing) Motor), 480... Prize terminal unit relay terminal board, 493... First gear, 494... Second gear, 497... Third gear, 500 .. detection disk (disk), 501. Gear part 504 ... Sensor board 505 ... Rotation angle switch (rotation angle switch) 651 ... Board holder for frame, 653 ... Power supply board box, 655 ... Discharge control board box, 656 ... Shield heat sink, 656a ... Uneven surface, 657 ... Main drawer relay board, 658 ... Sub drawer relay board, 686 ... Power supply board, 700a ... External terminal board, 700b ... R unit terminal plate, 715 ... payout control board (payout control board), 724a, 724b ... foil removal region, 730 ... drawer connector, 730a ... contact, 1200 ... center unit, 1200aa ... elliptical opening, 1210 ... winning hole unit, 1220 ... Decoration unit, 1225 ... Function display unit, 1225a ... Function display board, 1230 ... Production lamp, 1240 ... Gradation lamp, 1270 ... Upper start winning opening (various winning openings), 1315 ... Liquid crystal display, 1320 ... Display area , 1320a to 1320c ... decorative symbols, 1320d ... smoke, 1330 ... medium start winning opening (various winning openings), 1340 ... lower starting winning opening (various winning openings), 1395 ... magnetic detection switch, 1440 ... winning opening unit side normal winning Mouth (Various prize opening), 1465 ... Ornamental unit side normal prize opening (Various prizes Prize opening), 1470 ... decoration unit side normal winning opening (various winning openings), 1480 ... upper special symbol display, 1490 ... lower special symbol display, 1500a, 1500b ... upper special symbol memory lamp, 1510a, 1510b ... lower special Symbol memory lamp, 1520 ... Normal symbol indicator, 1530a-1530d ... Normal symbol memory lamp, 1540 ... Game status indicator lamp, 1550 ... Two round indicator lamp, 1560 ... 15 round indicator lamp, 1570 ... Loop unit, 1570aa ... Elliptical opening Part, 1570ba ... elliptical opening, 1570ca ... elliptical opening, 1572 ... front gear module, 1572a ... gear base, 1572aa ... thin disk, 1572ab ... ring gear, 1572b ... reel base, 1572bd ... positive wire, 1572be ... negative electrode side Wire, 15 2c ... car, 1572d ... towing arm, 1572e ... towing pin, 1572f ... torsion spring, 1572g ... washer, 1573 ... rear gear module, 1573a ... gear base, 1573aa ... thin disk, 1573ab ... ring gear, 1573b ... reel base, 1573bd: Positive side wire, 1573be ... Negative side wire, 1573c ... Car, 1573d ... Towing arm, 1573e ... Towing pin, 1573f ... Torsion spring, 1573g ... Washer, 1575 ... Front side guide roller, 1576 ... Front side intermediate gear, 1576a ... Front side Small gear, 1577 ... front idle gear pin, 1574 ... roller pin, 1578 ... front gear module drive motor, 1578a ... front drive gear, 1579 ... front contact module, 1579b ... positive finger 1579c ... Negative electrode side finger, 1580 ... Front sensor board, 1580b ... Hall element, 1582 ... Rear guide roller, 1583 ... Rear side intermediate gear, 1583a ... Rear side small gear, 1584 ... Rear idle gear pin, 1585 ... Rear side Gear module drive motor, 1585a ... rear drive gear, 1586 ... rear contact module, 1586b ... positive finger, 1586c ... negative finger, 1587 ... rear sensor substrate, 1587b ... Hall element, MG0, MG1 ... magnet, 1595A ... Function display seal, 1600 ... Main board, 1610 ... Peripheral board, 1700 ... Main control board (main control board), 1700a ... Main control MPU, 1700f ... Hot line failure prevention circuit, 1710 ... Discharge control unit, 1710a ... Discharge control MPU, 1720 ... launch control unit, 1730 ... error LE D display, 1731 ... error release switch, 1732 ... ball removal switch, 1740 ... sub-integrated board, 1740a ... sub-integrated MPU, 1740b ... sub-integrated ROM, 1740c ... sound source IC, 1740d ... sound ROM, 1470f ... amplifier, 1750 ... Liquid crystal control board, 1750a ... Liquid crystal control MPU, 1750b ... Liquid crystal control ROM, 1750c ... VDP, 1750ca ... Sprite register, 1750cb ... VDP register, 1750d ... Character ROM, 1750m ... Transfer IC, 1750ma ... Register group, 1750f ... Scaler IC, 1750fa ... Register group, 1750g ... Frame memory, 1750m ... Transfer IC, 1750ma ... Register group, 1750z ... Character RAM, 1750za ... Resident area, 1750zb ... Nonresident area, 1755 ... In 1760 ... Lamp drive board, 1760 b ... Gradation control IC, 1760 ba ... Noise removal unit, 1760 bb ... Serial part, 1760 bc ... Gradation update control unit, 1760 bd ... Register group for ON time setting table, 1760 be ... Waveform table Register group, 1760bf... Pulse generation unit, 1760c... Serial-parallel conversion circuit, 1760d... Driving circuit for patrol lamp, 1760e... Drive circuit for gear module, 1760ea ... front driver, 1760eb ... rear driver, C1, C101, C103, C50 ... Electrolytic capacitor, FBD1 ... Flyback voltage absorption diode, FBD2 ... Flyback voltage absorption diode, FBD3 ... Flyback voltage absorption diode, FBD4 ... Flyback voltage absorption diode, Grp1, rp2, Grp3 ... group, IC50 ... drive IC, PTr1 ... Darlington power transistor, PTr2 ... Darlington power transistor, PTr3 ... Darlington power transistor, PTr4 ... Darlington power transistor, R724a, R724c ... resistance, R724b, R724d ... resistance, SEG1, SEG2 ... Segment display, ISFILD0 ... Field 1750g [0] Write start address register, ISFILD1 ... Field 1750g [1] Write start address register, ISFILD2 ... Field 1750g [2] Write start address register, ISFILD3 ... Field 1750g [3] Start write Address register, OSFILD0... Field 1750g [0] read start address Register, OSFILD2... Field 1750g [2] read start address register.

Claims (1)

Based on the fact that the game balls launched by the ball striking device toward the game area defined on the game board enter the various winning holes provided in the game area, the game balls are paid out to the game dish as prize balls. A main control board that transmits a prize ball command that defines the number of game balls;
A payout control board for controlling a payout device for paying out game balls to the storage tray as prize balls based on the prize ball commands from the main control board;
A pachinko machine equipped with
The dispensing device is at least
A dispensing motor as an electrical drive source;
A sprocket that receives rotation of the output shaft of the payout motor and receives one game ball;
A disc fixed to the rotation shaft of the sprocket and provided with a detection portion on the outer peripheral portion;
A rotation angle switch for detecting the detection site provided on the outer periphery of the disk;
A counting switch for detecting the game balls after being sent out by rotating the sprocket;
With
The main control board is at least
A prize ball command transmission control means for transmitting the prize ball command to the payout control board;
The payout control board is at least:
Prize ball command reception control means for receiving the prize ball command transmitted by the prize ball command transmission control means;
Game ball payout control means for controlling a payout operation of game balls by the payout device;
The game ball payout control means calculates the number of inconsistent game balls in which the number of game balls sent out by rotating the sprocket and the number of game balls actually paid out do not match. Retry operation monitoring control means for monitoring the retry operation to control and pay out the device;
The payout control board repeatedly executes the control by the game ball payout control means and the control by the retry operation monitoring control means at predetermined intervals,
The game ball payout control means is at least
Prize ball stock number storage control means for storing the total number of game balls paid out from the payout device based on the prize ball command received by the prize ball command reception control means as a prize ball stock number;
Drive command number storage control means for storing, as a drive command number, the number of times that the sprocket is rotated to send out one game ball,
Real ball count storage control means for storing the number of game balls sent out by rotating the sprocket as a real ball count;
When a signal for detecting the detection portion provided on the outer peripheral portion of the disk is input from the rotation angle switch, the drive command is subtracted by 1 from the drive command number stored by the drive command number storage control means. Command number subtraction control means;
When a signal for detecting one game ball after being sent out by rotating the sprocket is input from the counting switch, the actual ball count stored by the real ball count storage control means is set to a value of 1. Real ball count addition control means for adding,
Subtraction result determination control means for determining whether or not the drive command number subtracted by the drive command number subtraction control means is equal to a determination value 0;
When the subtraction result determination control means determines that the number of drive commands does not match the determination value 0, output of the drive signal to the payout motor is started, while the number of drive commands is the determination value 0. A payout motor drive control means for stopping the output of the drive signal to the payout motor when it is determined that
When the subtraction result determination control means determines that the drive command number is equal to the determination value 0, the real ball is obtained from the prize ball stock number stored by the prize ball stock number storage control means. Difference calculation control means for subtracting the real ball count stored by the count storage control means to calculate the difference between the prize ball stock number and the real ball count;
The difference between the prize ball stock number and the actual ball count calculated by the difference calculation control means is forcibly stored in the prize ball stock number storage control means as the prize ball stock number, and the drive command A prize ball stock number and a drive command number forced storage control means forcibly memorized in the drive command number storage control means as a number;
Real ball count initial value forced storage control means for forcibly storing the initial value 0 as the real ball count in the real ball count storage control means after the calculation by the difference calculation control means;
Including
The retry operation monitoring control means is at least:
The inconsistency information value when an inconsistent number of game balls in which the number of game balls sent out by rotating the sprocket does not match the number of game balls actually paid out is generated. Inconsistent information value storage control means for sequentially storing;
Retry operation abnormality notification control means for notifying that when the mismatch information value stored by the mismatch information value storage control means satisfies a predetermined upper limit value;
Inconsistency information value forced initialization control that forcibly initializes the inconsistency information value when the inconsistency information value stored by the inconsistency information value storage control means satisfies the predetermined upper limit value Means,
A pachinko gaming machine characterized by including: